Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2026-128 - 8/11/2026 - Approved
RC CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF O . N . Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and BafflingImprovements PROJECT NUMBER 22407 rk Hazen and Sawyer 500 N. Shoreline Blvd., Suite 203 Corpus Christi, TX 78401 (361) 500-0410 CONFORMED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS Revised May 22, 2026 Record Drawing Number: WTR-509 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page 000102 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 30 01 Bid Form 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev3-2023) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev 2-2026) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Revs-2019) Part S Standard Specifications Division 02-S Existing Conditions 02 10 20 Site Clearing and Stripping 02 10 40 Site Grading 02 20 20 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers 02 20 22 Trench Safety for Excavations 022100 Select Material 02 24 20 Silt Fence 02 52 05 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement Table of Contents 00 0100-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 02 52 23 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 02 56 12 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 02 56 20 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 02 80 40 Sodding Division 26-S Electrical 26 05 00 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 Motor-Control Centers 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 265100 Interior Lighting Division 27-S Communications 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Division 40-S Process Interconnections 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 90 02.1 Power Protection -Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 90 03 SCADA& Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning Part T Technical Specifications Division 01-T General Requirements Table of Contents 00 0100-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 01 14 00 Coordination with Owner's Operations 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Management 014200 References 016100 Product Requirements and Options 01 64 13 Owner Furnished SCADA Services 01 65 00 Product Delivery Requirements 01 66 00 Product Storage and Protection Requirements 01 71 33 Protection of Work and Property 01 73 00 Demolition and Execution of Work 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 01 75 00 Checkout and Startup Procedures 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Material 01 79 00 Instruction of Owner's Personnel Division 02-T Existing Conditions 02 00 01 Mobilization Division 03-T Concrete 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 20 Reinforcing Steel 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 40 00 Precast, Prestressed Hollowcore Planks 03 60 00 Grouting Division 04-T Masonry 04 05 13 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04 05 14 Masonry Mortaring & Grouting 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories Table of Contents 00 0100-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry Division 05-T Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 14 00 Structural Aluminum Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06-T Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Division 07-T Thermal and Moisture Protection 071100 Dampproofing 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 52 00 Built-Up Bituminous Roofing 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 70 00 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 90 00 Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking Division 08-T Openings 08 11 13 Steel Doors and Frames 08 71 00 Finish Hardware Division 09-T Finishes 09 29 00 Gypsum Drywall System 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 90 00 Painting Division 10-T Specialties 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers Division 23-T Heating,Ventilation, and Air Conditioning 23 00 00 Basic HVAC Requirements 23 05 93 HVAC Balancing Table of Contents 00 0100-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 23 05 95 HVAC Field Testing 23 31 13 Metal Ducts and Duct Accessories 23 74 00 Commercial Packaged DX Units Division 26-T Electrical 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 60 Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 09 16 Electric Controls and Relays 26 29 20 Low Voltage Active Harmonic Filter System Division 40-T Process Interconnections 40 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 07 Pipe Supports 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 58 Gate Operators and Electric Gate Actuators 40 05 59.23 Fabricated Stainless-Steel Slide Gates 40 06 20 Process Pipe,Valve, and Gate Schedules 40 61 13 Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15 Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 Process Control System Testing 40 61 21.71 Factory Witness Test 40 61 21.72 Field Testing 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test 40 61 22 Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General 40 61 23 Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 24 Quality Assurance 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 40 61 90 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General 40 61 91 Process Control System Instrument List 406193 Process Control System Input-Output List 406196 Process Control Descriptions 40 62 63 Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers 40 66 00 Network and Communication Equipment 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Table of Contents 00 0100-5 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems 40 75 13 pH Analyzers 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 56 Surge Suppressors Division 46-T Water and Wastewater Equipment 46 00 00 Equipment General Provisions 46 41 27.11 Vertical Turbine Mixers 46 70 00 Stainless Steel Baffle Walls END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-6 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 0 docusign. Certificate Of Completion Envelope Id:65931A4D-8D5E-84E2-8001-FFB27EOE8DOF Status: Completed Subject:Complete with Docusign: Form 1295 Certificate 101582680.pdf Source Envelope: Document Pages: 1 Signatures: 1 Envelope Originator: Certificate Pages:4 Initials:0 Nalia Aviles AutoNav: Enabled 1901 Hollister St. Envelopeld Stamping: Enabled Houston,TX 77080 Time Zone:(UTC-06:00)Central Time(US&Canada) compliance@reytec.com IP Address: 12.68.67.178 Record Tracking Status:Original Holder: Nalia Aviles Location:DocuSign 8/12/2026 1:49:25 PM compliance@reytec.com Signer Events Signature Timestamp Steven K.Aranda EDSi,",dby: Sent:8/12/2026 1:50:36 PM steven@reytec.net fWVA, k ArOIJ.a Resent: 8/13/2026 9:23:26 AM Vice President FABHUHA2448c Viewed:8/13/2026 10:18:04 AM Security Level: Email,Account Authentication Signed: 8/13/2026 10:19:14 AM (None) Signature Adoption:Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 12.68.67.178 Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted:8/13/2026 10:18:04 AM I D:2ca6271 1-ad94-4e41-8c9c-2ee87d89eb96 In Person Signer Events Signature Timestamp Editor Delivery Events Status Timestamp Agent Delivery Events Status Timestamp Intermediary Delivery Events Status Timestamp Certified Delivery Events Status Timestamp Carbon Copy Events Status Timestamp Witness Events Signature Timestamp Notary Events Signature Timestamp Envelope Summary Events Status Timestamps Envelope Sent Hashed/Encrypted 8/12/2026 1:50:37 PM Certified Delivered Security Checked 8/13/2026 10:18:04 AM Signing Complete Security Checked 8/13/2026 10:19:14 AM Completed Security Checked 8/13/2026 10:19:14 AM Payment Events Status Timestamps Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure created on:7/1/2021 11:43:54 AM Parties agreed to:Steven K.Aranda ELECTRONIC RECORD AND SIGNATURE DISCLOSURE From time to time, Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. (we, us or Company) may be required by law to provide to you certain written notices or disclosures. Described below are the terms and conditions for providing to you such notices and disclosures electronically through the DocuSign system. Please read the information below carefully and thoroughly, and if you can access this information electronically to your satisfaction and agree to this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure (ERSD), please confirm your agreement by selecting the check-box next to `I agree to use electronic records and signatures' before clicking `CONTINUE' within the DocuSign system. Getting paper copies At any time, you may request from us a paper copy of any record provided or made available electronically to you by us. You will have the ability to download and print documents we send to you through the DocuSign system during and immediately after the signing session and, if you elect to create a DocuSign account, you may access the documents for a limited period of time (usually 30 days) after such documents are first sent to you. After such time, if you wish for us to send you paper copies of any such documents from our office to you, you will be charged a $0.00 per-page fee. You may request delivery of such paper copies from us by following the procedure described below. Withdrawing your consent If you decide to receive notices and disclosures from us electronically, you may at any time change your mind and tell us that thereafter you want to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format. How you must inform us of your decision to receive future notices and disclosure in paper format and withdraw your consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically is described below. Consequences of changing your mind If you elect to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format, it will slow the speed at which we can complete certain steps in transactions with you and delivering services to you because we will need first to send the required notices or disclosures to you in paper format, and then wait until we receive back from you your acknowledgment of your receipt of such paper notices or disclosures. Further, you will no longer be able to use the DocuSign system to receive required notices and consents electronically from us or to sign electronically documents from us. All notices and disclosures will be sent to you electronically Unless you tell us otherwise in accordance with the procedures described herein, we will provide electronically to you through the DocuSign system all required notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you during the course of our relationship with you. To reduce the chance of you inadvertently not receiving any notice or disclosure, we prefer to provide all of the required notices and disclosures to you by the same method and to the same address that you have given us. Thus, you can receive all the disclosures and notices electronically or in paper format through the paper mail delivery system. If you do not agree with this process,please let us know as described below. Please also see the paragraph immediately above that describes the consequences of your electing not to receive delivery of the notices and disclosures electronically from us. How to contact Reytec Construction Resources,Inc.: You may contact us to let us know of your changes as to how we may contact you electronically, to request paper copies of certain information from us, and to withdraw your prior consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically as follows: To contact us by email send messages to: rcastillo@reytec.net To advise Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. of your new email address To let us know of a change in your email address where we should send notices and disclosures electronically to you, you must send an email message to us at rcastillo@reytec.net and in the body of such request you must state: your previous email address, your new email address. We do not require any other information from you to change your email address. If you created a DocuSign account, you may update it with your new email address through your account preferences. To request paper copies from Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. To request delivery from us of paper copies of the notices and disclosures previously provided by us to you electronically, you must send us an email to rcastillo@reytec.net and in the body of such request you must state your email address, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We will bill you for any fees at that time, if any. To withdraw your consent with Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. To inform us that you no longer wish to receive future notices and disclosures in electronic format you may: i. decline to sign a document from within your signing session, and on the subsequent page, select the check-box indicating you wish to withdraw your consent, or you may; ii. send us an email to rcastillo@re@c.net and in the body of such request you must state your email, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We do not need any other information from you to withdraw consent.. The consequences of your withdrawing consent for online documents will be that transactions may take a longer time to process.. Required hardware and software The minimum system requirements for using the DocuSign system may change over time. The current system requirements are found here: https:Hsupport.docusi n�guides/signer--.@ si fining-system-requirements. Acknowledging your access and consent to receive and sign documents electronically To confirm to us that you can access this information electronically, which will be similar to other electronic notices and disclosures that we will provide to you, please confirm that you have read this ERSD, and(i)that you are able to print on paper or electronically save this ERSD for your future reference and access; or (ii) that you are able to email this ERSD to an email address where you will be able to print on paper or save it for your future reference and access. Further, if you consent to receiving notices and disclosures exclusively in electronic format as described herein, then select the check-box next to `I agree to use electronic records and signatures' before clicking `CONTINUE' within the DocuSign system. By selecting the check-box next to `I agree to use electronic records and signatures', you confirm that: • You can access and read this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure; and • You can print on paper this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure, or save or send this Electronic Record and Disclosure to a location where you can print it, for future reference and access; and • Until or unless you notify Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. as described above, you consent to receive exclusively through electronic means all notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you by Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. during the course of your relationship with Reytec Construction Resources, Inc.. 1- DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 8/12/2026 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: David Stltts American Global LLC PHONE FAX 10001 Woodloch Forest Dr A/c No Ext:469 261 9365 A/c No): Ste 250 ADDRESS: txinsuranceteam@americanglobal.com The Woodlands TX 77380 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA: Charter Oak Fire Insurance Company 25615 INSURED REYTCON-01 INSURERB:The Phoenix Insurance Company 25623 Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. 1901 Hollister INSURER C:Travelers Property Cas.Co.of America 25674 Houston TX 77080 INSURERD:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 INSURER E: St. Paul Surplus Lines Insurance Company 30481 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:465819889 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR I POLICY NUMBER MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-25 9/30/2025 9/30/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $2,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE � OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $300,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $10,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $4,000,000 POLICY L/'-1 PRO LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $4,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y Y VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-25 9/30/2025 9/30/2026 COMBINidED SINGLE LIMIT $2,000,000 Ea accent X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident C UMBRELLALIAB X OCCUR Y Y CUP-8S997967-25-25 9/30/2025 9/30/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 X EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000 DED RETENTION$ $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION Y 0001295501 9/30/2025 9/30/2026 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N/A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 E Pollution Liability Y Y ZCE-61 N93064 9/30/2025 9/30/2026 Each Condition 6,000,000 Aggregate Limit 9,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) RE:O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Owner and required Parties are included as Additional Insureds as applies to the General Liability,Auto Liability, Pollution/Professional Liability,and Umbrella/Excess policies per the attached endorsements.Waiver of Subrogation applies to the Workers Compensation, General Liability,Auto Liability, Pollution/Professional Liability,and Umbrella/Excess policies per the attached endorsements if permissible by law.Notice of Cancellation applies per the attached endorsements. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Corpus Christi Finance& Procurement ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 1201 Leopard Street 1 st Floor AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78401 @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction POLICY NUMBER: VTC2N-CAP-8s997943-P COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE — This endorsement broadens coverage. However, coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to the Coverage Part, and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general cover- age description only. Limitations and exclusions may apply to these coverages. Read all the provisions of this en- dorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE — LOSS OF B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED USE — INCREASED LIMIT C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO I. PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION EXPENSES— INCREASED LIMIT D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED J. PERSONAL PROPERTY E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED K. AIRBAGS LIMITS L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR F. HIRED AUTO — LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- LOSS ERAGE— INDEMNITY BASIS M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE —GLASS N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS PROVISIONS A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED this insurance applies and only to the extent that The following is added to Paragraph A.1., Who Is person or organization qualifies as an "insured" An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS under the Who Is An Insured provision contained in Section II. LIABILITY COVERAGE: Any organization you newly acquire or form dur- C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO ing the policy period over which you maintain 1. The following is added to Paragraph A.1., 50% or more ownership interest and that is not Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COV- separately insured for Business Auto Coverage. ERED AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: Coverage under this provision is afforded only un- An "employee" of yours is an "insured" while til the 180th day after you acquire or form the or- operating an "auto" hired or rented under a ganization or the end of the policy period, which- contract or agreement in an "employee's" ever is earlier. name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your busi- B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ness. The following is added to Paragraph c. in A.1., 2. The following replaces Paragraph b. in B.S., Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED Other Insurance, of SECTION IV — BUSI- AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: NESS AUTO CONDITIONS: Any person or organization who is required under b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage Cover- a written contract or agreement between you and age, the following are deemed to be cov- that person or organization, that is signed and ered "autos"you own: executed by you before the "bodily injury" or (1) Any covered "auto" you lease, hire, "property damage" occurs and that is in effect rent or borrow; and during the policy period, to be named as an addi- (2) Any covered "auto" hired or rented by tional insured is an "insured" for Covered Autos your "employee" under a contract in Liability Coverage, but only for damages to which an "employee's" name, with your CA T3 53 02 15 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction COMMERCIAL AUTO POLICY NUMBER: ITCIN-CAP-BS997943-P permission, while performing duties (a) With respect to any claim made or "suit" related to the conduct of your busi- brought outside the United States of ness. America, the territories and possessions However, any "auto" that is leased, hired, of the United States of America, Puerto rented or borrowed with a driver is not a Rico and Canada: covered "auto". (i) You must arrange to defend the "in- D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED sured" against, and investigate or set- The following is added to Paragraph A.1., Who Is tle any such claim or "suit" and keep us advised of all proceedings and ac- An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS tions. LIABILITY COVERAGE: Any "employee" of yours is an "insured" while us- (ii) Neither you nor any other involved ing a covered "auto" you don't own, hire or borrow "insured" will make any settlement in your business or your personal affairs. without our consent. E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED (iii)We may, at our discretion, participate LIMITS in defending the "insured" against, or in the settlement of, any claim or 1. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(2), "suit". of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS LIABIL- ITY COVERAGE: (iv) We will reimburse the "insured" for sums that the "insured" legally must (2) Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds (in- pay as damages because of "bodily cluding bonds for related traffic law viola- injury" or "property damage" to which tions) required because of an "accident" this insurance applies, that the "in- we cover. We do not have to furnish sured" pays with our consent, but these bonds. only up to the limit described in Para- graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of 2. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(4), SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS LIABIL-ITY COVERAGE: LIABILITY COVERAGE. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the (v) We will reimburse the "insured" for "insured" at our request, including actual the reasonable expenses incurred loss of earnings up to $500 a day be- with our consent for your investiga- cause of time off from work. tion of such claims and your defense of the "insured" against any such F. HIRED AUTO — LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- "suit", but only up to and included ERAGE— INDEMNITY BASIS within the limit described in Para- The following replaces Subparagraph (5) in Para- graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of graph B.7., Policy Period, Coverage Territory, SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- LIABILITY COVERAGE, and not in TIONS: addition to such limit. Our duty to (5) Anywhere in the world, except any country or make such payments ends when we have used up the applicable limit of jurisdiction while any trade sanction, em- insurance in payments for damages, bargo, or similar regulation imposed by the settlements or defense expenses. United States of America applies to and pro- hibits the transaction of business with or (b) This insurance is excess over any valid within such country or jurisdiction, for Cov- and collectible other insurance available ered Autos Liability Coverage for any covered to the "insured" whether primary, excess, "auto" that you lease, hire, rent or borrow contingent or on any other basis. without a driver for a period of 30 days or less (c) This insurance is not a substitute for re- and that is not an "auto" you lease, hire, rent quired or compulsory insurance in any or borrow from any of your "employees", country outside the United States, its ter- partners (if you are a partnership), members ritories and possessions, Puerto Rico and (if you are a limited liability company) or Canada. members of their households. Page 2 of 4 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction POLICY NUMBER: VTC2N-CAP-as997943-P COMMERCIAL AUTO You agree to maintain all required or (2) In or on your covered "auto". compulsory insurance in any such coun- This coverage applies only in the event of a total try up to the minimum limits required by theft of your covered "auto". local law. Your failure to comply with compulsory insurance requirements will No deductibles apply to this Personal Property not invalidate the coverage afforded by coverage. this policy, but we will only be liable to the K. AIRBAGS same extent we would have been liable The following is added to Paragraph B.3., Exclu- had you complied with the compulsory in- sions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE surance requirements. COVERAGE: (d) It is understood that we are not an admit- Exclusion 3.a. does not apply to 'loss" to one or ted or authorized insurer outside the more airbags in a covered "auto" you own that in- United States of America, its territories flate due to a cause other than a cause of "loss" and possessions, Puerto Rico and Can- set forth in Paragraphs A.1.b. and A.1.c., but ada. We assume no responsibility for the only: furnishing of certificates of insurance, or a. If that "auto" is a covered "auto" for Compre- for compliance in any way with the laws hensive Coverage under this policy; of other countries relating to insurance. b. The airbags are not covered under any war- G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE—GLASS ranty; and The following is added to Paragraph D., Deducti- c. The airbags were not intentionally inflated. ble, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE We will pay up to a maximum of $1,000 for any COVERAGE: one"loss". No deductible for a covered "auto" will apply to L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than LOSS replaced. The following is added to Paragraph A.2.a., of H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE — LOSS OF SECTION IV—BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS: USE—INCREASED LIMIT Your duty to give us or our authorized representa- The following replaces the last sentence of Para- tive prompt notice of the "accident' or 'loss" ap- graph AA.b., Loss Of Use Expenses, of SEC- plies only when the "accident' or 'loss" is known TION III—PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE: to: However, the most we will pay for any expenses (a) You (if you are an individual); for loss of use is $65 per day, to a maximum of (b) A partner(if you are a partnership); $750 for any one "accident'. (c) A member (if you are a limited liability com- I. PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION pany); EXPENSES—INCREASED LIMIT (d) An executive officer, director or insurance The following replaces the first sentence in Para- manager (if you are a corporation or other or- graph A.4.a., Transportation Expenses, of ganization); or SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVER- (e) Any "employee" authorized by you to give no- AGE: tice of the "accident' or"loss". We will pay up to $50 per day to a maximum of M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION $1,500 for temporary transportation expense in- The following replaces Paragraph A.S., Transfer curred by you because of the total theft of a cov- Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us, ered "auto" of the private passenger type. of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- J. PERSONAL PROPERTY TIONS : The following is added to Paragraph AA., Cover- S. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against age Extensions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL Others To Us DAMAGE COVERAGE: We waive any right of recovery we may have Personal Property against any person or organization to the ex- tent required of you by a written contract We will pay up to $400 for 'loss" to wearing ap- signed and executed prior to any "accident' parel and other personal property which is: or"loss", provided that the "accident' or"loss" (1) Owned by an "insured"; and arises out of operations contemplated by CA T3 53 02 15 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 3 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. NAMED INSURED:D:Rcytoc Construction COMMERCIAL AUTO POLICY NUMBER: VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-P such contract. The waiver applies only to the The unintentional omission of, or unintentional person or organization designated in such error in, any information given by you shall not contract. prejudice your rights under this insurance. How- N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ever this provision does not affect our right to col- The following is added to Paragraph B.2., Con- lect additional premium or exercise our right of cealment, Misrepresentation, Or Fraud, of cancellation or non-renewal. SECTION IV-BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS: Page 4 of 4 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Compa ny.All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. POLICY NUMBER: VTC2N-CAP-8s997943-P THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION - NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY SCHEDULE CANCELLATION: Number of Days Notice: 30 PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM YOU HAVE AGREED IN A WRITTEN CONTRACT THAT NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY WILL BE GIVEN, BUT ONLY IF: 1. YOU SEND US A WRITTEN REQUEST TO PROVIDE SUCH NOTICE, INCLUDING THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION, AFTER THE FIRST NAMED INSURED RECEIVES NOTICE FROM US OF THE CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY; AND 2. WE RECEIVE SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST AT LEAST 14 DAYS BEFORE THE BEGINNING OF THE APPLICABLE NUMBER OF DAYS SHOWN IN THIS SCHEDULE. ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON OR ORGANIZ- ATION INCLUDED IN SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST FROM YOU TO US. PROVISIONS If we cancel this policy for any legally permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium, and a number of days is shown for Cancellation in the Schedule above, we will mail notice of cancellation to the person or organization shown in such Schedule. We will mail such notice to the address shown in the Schedule above at least the number of days shown for Cancellation in such Schedule before the effective date of cancellation. IL T4 05 05 19 ©2019 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER: : THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EARLIER NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: TRAVELERS ECP CUSTOMsm GENERAL PROVISIONS FORM SCHEDULE OF NUMBER OF DAYS FOR NOTICE OF CANCELLATION Number of Days Notice: 60 PROVISIONS (2) The Number of Days Notice shown in The following replaces Paragraph b. of the Schedule Of Number Of Days For Paragraph 2., Cancellation, of SECTION VIII - Notice Of Cancellation before the CONDITIONS: effective date of cancellation if the cancellation is for any other reason. b. We may cancel this policy by mailing or If no amount is shown for the delivering to the "First Named Insured" Number of Days Notice in the written notice of cancellation at least: Schedule Of Number Of Days For Notice Of Cancellation, the Number of (1) 10 days before the effective date of Days Notice will be deemed to be 60. cancellation if the cancellation is for nonpayment of premium; or RP 12 11 10 21 © 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company_ All rights reserved_ Page 1 of 1 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY any person or organization in any for any such lawsuit brought against us may be country or jurisdiction because we are made upon: not licensed to provide insurance in such Corporation Service Company country or jurisdiction;or 222 Jefferson Blvd.,Suite 200 (2)The furnishing of certificates or other Warwick,Rhode Island 02888. evidence of insurance in any country or 13. Separation Of Insureds jurisdiction in which we are not licensed to provide insurance. Except with respect to the limits of insurance, 11. Representations and any rights or duties specifically assigned in this policy to the "First Named Insured", this By accepting this policy,you agree that: insurance applies: a. All statements in the Travelers ECP a. As if each "named insured" were the only Custom Declarations are accurate and "named insured";and complete; b. All such statements are based upon b. Separately to each "insured"against whom a claim is made. representations made by the "First Named Insured"; 14. Transfer Of Control Of Defense C. All statements and representations made in If the available limits of insurance are used up, the application for this policy, including all we will notify the "First Named Insured" in information provided with the application writing of all outstanding "claims" so that you for this policy, are accurate and complete; can arrange to take control of the defense. and Before the available limits of insurance are used up, you may take over control of the defense of d. We have issued this policy in reliance upon any outstanding"claim"only if we agree that you all such statements and representations. may take over such defense. 12. Service Of Suit We will take whatever steps are necessary In the event that we fail to pay any amount during a transfer of control of defense of an claimed to be due under this policy and the outstanding "claim" to continue that defense "insured" sues us to recover such amount we and avoid a default judgment during such shall honor the decision of the court that is transfer. You agree to repay the reasonable authorized to hear the case. expenses we incur for any such steps taken after However, we have the right to appeal that the available limit of insurance is used up.When decision. we take such steps, you agree that we do not Service of process for any such lawsuit brought give up any rights. against us may be made upon us by serving our 15. Transfer Or Assignment Of This Policy President, or our President's designee, at One This policy may not be transferred or assigned, Tower Square,Hartford,Connecticut 06183,and except with our written consent,or in the case of such person shall be authorized to receive the death of a"named insured"that is an individual. papers on our behalf. If such "named insured" dies, that "named However, the "insured" may also serve or send Insured's"rights and duties will be transferred to papers involving such lawsuit to the that "named insured's" legal representative but Commissioner, Director or Superintendent of only while acting within the scope of duties as Insurance for the state in which the lawsuit is such legal representative. Until such legal being filed. We designate that appropriate representative is appointed, anyone having officer,or that person's successor,to mail a copy proper temporary custody of such "named of the papers to us. insured's" property will have such "named For the State of California,service of process for insured's"rights and duties but only with respect any such lawsuit brought against us may be to that property. made upon: 16.Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against CSC-Lawyers Incorporating Service Others To Us 2730 Gateway Oaks Drive,Suite 100 If the "insured"has rights to recover from others Sacramento,California95833. all or part of any payment we have made under For the State of Rhode Island,service of process this policy, those rights are transferred to us. RP 10 001121 ©2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 20 of 37 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY The "insured" must do nothing after the loss to Coverage;or impair them, and under any Contractors (2)Any Contractors Professional Liability Indemnity For Design Professional's Liability Loss Mitigation Expenses Coverage; Coverage and any Contractors Indemnity For Subcontractor's Pollution Liability Coverage, no b. "Loss" to which any "Pollution Liability "named insured" can agree in a contract or Coverage" applies resulting from "pollution agreement to: conditions" that commence subsequent to a. Waive any "named insured's" right of the execution of the contract or agreement; recovery against any "design professional" or or"specified subcontractor";or C. "Loss" to which any Contractors Pollution b. Limit the liability of the"design professional" Loss Mitigation Expenses Coverage applies or "specified subcontractor" to a maximum resulting from "faulty work incidents" that amount unless such limitation is an are not first discovered by any"insured"until "authorized agreed limitation of liability". subsequent to the execution of the contract or agreement. At our request, the "insured" will bring suit or SECTION IX- DEFINITIONS initiate an alternative dispute resolution proceeding to enforce those rights or will help us 1. "Agreed mediation": enforce them. a. Means a voluntary and non-binding process We will apply any amounts recovered in that: enforcing those rights of recovery in the following order until the total amount recovered (1) Is agreed to by us;and is used up: (2)Involves a qualified professional a. We will reimburse any person or mediator facilitating an attempted organization, including us or the "insured", settlement of the "claim" between the any amount that person or organization has "insured"and the person or organization paid in excess of the limits of insurance. making the"claim". b. We will retain an amount equal to the b. Does not include any mediation or amount we have paid under this policy. alternative dispute resolution that is: C. We will pay to the "insured" any remaining (1) Ordered or imposed by a court;or portion, including any amounts within any (2)Otherwise legally required. applicable deductible or self-insured retention. 2. "Asbestos pollution conditions": If any amounts are recovered in enforcing those a. Means any"pollution conditions"that are: rights of recovery,reasonable expenses incurred (1) The disturbance of asbestos or asbestos in enforcing such rights will be shared among all fibers if the "pollution conditions" result persons or organizations receiving amounts from any activity that is performed on recovered. Each such person's or organization's behalf of any "named insured" by a share of those expenses is based on the ratio of subcontractor under a written contract its amount recovered to the total amounts or agreement with such "named recovered by all such persons or organizations in insured";or enforcing such rights. If the "insured" has agreed in a contract or (2)The inadvertent disturbance of asbestos agreement to waive that "insured's" right of or asbestos fibers if the pollution conditions" do not result from any recovery against any person or organization, we activity that is performed on behalf of waive our right of recovery against such person any"named insured" by a subcontractor or organization, but only for payments we make under a written contract or agreement for: with such "named insured". As used in a. "Loss" to which any of the following applies this provision, inadvertent disturbance caused by an act, error or omission does not include any discharge, committed subsequent to the execution of dispersal, seepage, migration, release or the contract or agreement: escape of asbestos or asbestos fibers (1) Any Contractors Professional Liability during or as a result of asbestos RP 10 001121 ©2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 21 of 37 POLICY NUMBER:CUP-8s997967-25-25 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION - NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY SCHEDULE CANCELLATION: Number of Days Notice: 30 PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM YOU HAVE AGREED IN A WRITTEN CONTRACT THAT NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY WILL BE GIVEN, BUT ONLY IF: 1. YOU SEND US A WRITTEN REQUEST TO PROVIDE SUCH NOTICE, INCLUDING THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION, AFTER THE FIRST NAMED INSURED RECEIVES NOTICE FROM US OF THE CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY; AND 2. WE RECEIVE SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST AT LEAST 14 DAYS BEFORE THE BEGINNING OF THE APPLICABLE NUMBER OF DAYS SHOWN IN THIS SCHEDULE. ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON OR ORGANIZ- ATION INCLUDED IN SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST FROM YOU TO US. PROVISIONS If we cancel this policy for any legally permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium, and a number of days is shown for Cancellation in the Schedule above, we will mail notice of cancellation to the person or organization shown in such Schedule. We will mail such notice to the address shown in the Schedule above at least the number of days shown for Cancellation in such Schedule before the effective date of cancellation. IL T4 05 05 19 ©2019 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 NAMED INSUED: "Y'c"'t"t"' POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-CO-8S997931-C COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED - AUTOMATIC STATUS IF REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS AN (a) The Additional Insured — Owners, Les- INSURED: sees or Contractors — Scheduled Person Any person or organization that: or Organization endorsement CG 20 10 a. You agree in a written contract or agreement to 07 04 or CG 20 10 04 13, the Additional include as an additional insured on this Coverage Insured — Owners, Lessees or Contrac- Part; and tors — Completed Operations endorse- ment CG 20 37 07 04 or CG 20 3 7 04 13, b. Has not been added as an additional insured for or both of such endorsements with either the same project by attachment of an endorse- of those edition dates; or ment under this Coverage Part which includes such person or organization in the endorsement's (b) Either or both of the following: the Addi- schedule; tional Insured —Owners, Lessees or Con- tractors — Scheduled Person Or Organi- is an insured, but: zation endorsement CG 20 10, or the Ad- a. Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or ditional Insured — Owners, Lessees or "property damage" that occurs, or for "personal Contractors — Completed Operations en- injury" caused by an offense that is committed, dorsement CG 20 37, without an edition subsequent to the signing of that contract or date of such endorsement specified; agreement and while that part of the contract or the person or organization is an additional in- agreement is in effect; and sured only if the injury or damage is caused, b. Only as described in Paragraph (1), (2) or (3) be- in whole or in part, by acts or omissions of low, whichever applies: you or your subcontractor in the performance (1) If the written contract or agreement specifical- of "your work" to which the written contract or ly requires you to provide additional insured agreement applies; or coverage to that person or organization by (3) If neither Paragraph (1) nor(2) above applies: the use of: (a) The person or organization is an addi- (a) The Additional Insured — Owners, Les- tional insured only if, and to the extent sees or Contractors — (Form B) endorse- that, the injury or damage is caused by ment CG 20 10 11 85; or acts or omissions of you or your subcon- (b) Either or both of the following: the Addi- tractor in the performance of "your work" tional Insured —Owners, Lessees or Con- to which the written contract or agree- tractors — Scheduled Person Or Organi- ment applies; and zation endorsement CG 20 10 10 01, or (b) Such person or organization does not the Additional Insured —Owners, Lessees qualify as an additional insured with re- or Contractors — Completed Operations spect to the independent acts or omis- endorsement CG 20 37 10 01; sions of such person or organization. the person or organization is an additional in- The insurance provided to such additional insured is sured only if the injury or damage arises out subject to the following provisions: of"your work" to which the written contract or a. If the Limits of Insurance of this Coverage Part agreement applies; shown in the Declarations exceed the minimum (2) If the written contract or agreement specifical- limits required by the written contract or agree- ly requires you to provide additional insured ment, the insurance provided to the additional in- coverage to that person or organization by sured will be limited to such minimum required the use of: limits. For the purposes of determining whether CG D6 04 02 19 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2 NAMED INSUED: Reytec Construction COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER: WC20-CO-8S997931-C this limitation applies, the minimum limits required result in a claim. To the extent possible, such by the written contract or agreement will be con- notice should include: sidered to include the minimum limits of any Um- (a) How, when and where the "occurrence" brella or Excess liability coverage required for the or offense took place; additional insured by that written contract or (b) The names and addresses of any injured agreement. This provision will not increase the persons and witnesses; and limits of insurance described in Section III — Limits Of Insurance. (c) The nature and location of any injury or b. The insurance provided to such additional insured damage arising out of the "occurrence" or does not apply to: offense. (1) Any "bodily injury", "property damage" or (2) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against "personal injury" arising out of the providing, the additional insured: or failure to provide, any professional archi- (a) Immediately record the specifics of the tectural, engineering or surveying services, claim or"suit" and the date received; and including: (b) Notify us as soon as practicable and see (a) The preparing, approving, or failing to to it that we receive written notice of the prepare or approve, maps, shop draw- claim or"suit" as soon as practicable. ings, opinions, reports, surveys, field or- (3) Immediately send us copies of all legal pa- ders or change orders, or the preparing, pers received in connection with the claim or approving, or failing to prepare or ap- "suit", cooperate with us in the investigation prove, drawings and specifications; and or settlement of the claim or defense against (b) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or the "suit", and otherwise comply with all policy engineering activities. conditions. (2) Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" (4) Tender the defense and indemnity of any caused by "your work" and included in the claim or "suit' to any provider of other insur- "products-completed operations hazard" un- ance which would cover such additional fin- less the written contract or agreement specifi- sured for a loss we cover. However, this con- cally requires you to provide such coverage dition does not affect whether the insurance for that additional insured during the policy provided to such additional insured is primary period. to other insurance available to such additional c. The additional insured must comply with the fol- insured which covers that person or organiza- lowing duties: tion as a named insured as described in Par- (1) Give us written notice as soon as practicable agraph 4., Other Insurance, of Section IV — of an "occurrence" or an offense which may Commercial General Liability Conditions. Page 2 of 2 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CG D6 04 02 19 NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-Co-8s997931-C COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. XTEND ENDORSEMENT FOR CONTRACTORS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE — This endorsement broadens coverage. However, coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to this Coverage Part, and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general coverage description only. Read all the provisions of this endorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. Who Is An Insured —Unnamed Subsidiaries C. Incidental Medical Malpractice B. Blanket Additional Insured — Governmental D. Blanket Waiver Of Subrogation Entities — Permits Or Authorizations Relating To E. Contractual Liability—Railroads Operations F. Damage To Premises Rented To You PROVISIONS a. An organization other than a partnership, joint A. WHO IS AN INSURED — UNNAMED venture or limited liability company; or SUBSIDIARIES b. A trust; The following is added to SECTION II —WHO IS as indicated in its name or the documents that AN INSURED: govern its structure. Any of your subsidiaries, other than a partnership, B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — joint venture or limited liability company, that is GOVERNMENTAL ENTITIES — PERMITS OR not shown as a Named Insured in the AUTHORIZATIONS RELATING TO OPERATIONS Declarations is a Named Insured if: a. You are the sole owner of, or maintain an The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS ownership interest of more than 50% in, such AN INSURED: subsidiary on the first day of the policy period; Any governmental entity that has issued a permit and or authorization with respect to operations b. Such subsidiary is not an insured under performed by you or on your behalf and that you similar other insurance. are required by any ordinance, law, building code or written contract or agreement to include as an No such subsidiary is an insured for"bodily injury" additional insured on this Coverage Part is an or "property damage" that occurred, or "personal insured, but only with respect to liabi lity for "bodily and advertising injury" caused by an offense injury", "property damage" or "personal and committed: advertising injury" arising out of such operations. a. Before you maintained an ownership interest The insurance provided to such governmental of more than 50% in such subsidiary; or entity does not apply to: b. After the date, if any, during the policy period a. Any "bodily injury", "property damage" or that you no longer maintain an ownership "personal and advertising injury" arising out of interest of more than 50% in such subsidiary. operations performed for the governmental For purposes of Paragraph 1. of Section II —Who entity; or Is An Insured, each such subsidiary will be b. Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" deemed to be designated in the Declarations as: included in the .1 deemed operations hazard". CG D3 16 02 19 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. NAMED INSURED: ReytocConstruction COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER:vTC20-CO-8S997931-C C. INCIDENTAL MEDICAL MALPRACTICE pharmaceuticals committed by, or with the 1. The following replaces Paragraph b. of the knowledge or consent of, the insured. definition of "occurrence" in the S. The following is added to the DEFINITIONS DEFINITIONS Section: Section: b. An act or omission committed in providing "Incidental medical services" means: or failing to provide "incidental medical services", first aid or "Good Samaritan a. Medical, surgical, dental, laboratory, x-ray services" to a person, unless you are in or nursing service or treatment, advice or the business or occupation of providing instruction, or the related furnishing of professional health care services. food or beverages;or 2. The following replaces the last paragraph of b. The furnishing or dispensing of drugs or Paragraph 2.a.(1) of SECTION II — WHO IS medical, dental, or surgical supplies or AN INSURED: appliances. Unless you are in the business or occupation 6. The following is added to Paragraph 4.b., of providing professional health care services, Excess Insurance, of SECTION IV — Paragraphs (1)(a), (b), (c) and (d) above do COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY not apply to "bodily injury" arising out of CONDITIONS: providing or failing to provide: This insurance is excess over any valid and (a) "Incidental medical services" by any of collectible other insurance, whether primary, your "employees" who is a nurse, nurse excess, contingent or on any other basis, that assistant, emergency medical technician is available to any of your "employees" for or paramedic; or "bodily injury" that arises out of providing or (b) First aid or "Good Samaritan services" by failing to provide "incidental medical services" any of your "employees" or "volunteer to any person to the extent not subject to workers", other than an employed or Paragraph 2.a.(1) of Section II — Who Is An volunteer doctor. Any such "employees" Insured. or "volunteer workers" providing or failing D. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION to provide first aid or "Good Samaritan services" during their work hours for you The following is added to Paragraph 8., Transfer will be deemed to be acting within the Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us, scope of their employment by you or of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL performing duties related to the conduct LIABILITY CONDITIONS: of your business. If the insured has agreed in a contract or 3. The following replaces the last sentence of agreement to waive that insured's right of Paragraph S. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF recovery against any person or organization, we INSURANCE: waive our right of recovery against such person or For the purposes of determining the organization, but only for payments we make applicable Each Occurrence Limit, all related because of: acts or omissions committed in providing or a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" that failing to provide "incidental medical occurs; or services", first aid or "Good Samaritan services"to any one person will be deemed to b. "Personal and advertising injury" caused by be one "occurrence". an offense that is committed; 4. The following exclusion is added to subsequent to the execution of the contract or Paragraph 2., Exclusions, of SECTION I — agreement. COVERAGES — COVERAGE A — BODILY E. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY— RAILROADS INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: 1. The following replaces Paragraph c. of the Sale Of Pharmaceuticals definition of "insured contract" in the "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising DEFINITIONS Section: out of the violation of a penal statute or c. Any easement or license agreement; ordinance relating to the sale of Page 2 of 3 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CG D3 16 02 19 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-CO-83997931-C COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 2. Paragraph f.(1) of the definition of "insured a. Any premises while rented to you or contract' in the DEFINITIONS Section is temporarily occupied by you with permission deleted. of the owner; or F. DAMAGE TO PREMISES RENTED TO YOU b. The contents of any premises while such The following replaces the definition of "premises premises is rented to you, if you rent such damage" in the DEFINITIONS Section: premises for a period of seven or fewer "Premises damage" means "property damage"to: consecutive days. CG D3 16 02 19 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 3 of 3 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-Co-8s997931-C THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION - NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY SCHEDULE CANCELLATION: Number of Days Notice: 30 PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION CONTINUED ON IL T8 03 ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON CONTINUED ON IL T8 03 HOUSTON TX 77080 PROVISIONS If we cancel this policy for any legally permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium, and a number of days is shown for Cancellation in the Schedule above, we will mail notice of cancellation to the person or organization shown in such Schedule. We will mail such notice to the address shown in the Schedule above at least the number of days shown for Cancellation in such Schedule before the effective date of cancellation. IL T4 05 05 19 0 2019 The Travelers Indemnity Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 POLICY NUMBER: VTC2°-r-°-8S99793,-C GENERAL PURPOSE ENDORSEMENT THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED ENTITY NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US IL T4 05 05 19 THIS ENDORSEMENT MODIFIES INSURANCE PROVIDED UNDER THE FOLLOWING: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY CONTINUATION OF FORM IL T4 05, PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM YOU HAVE AGREED IN A WRITTEN CONTRACT THAT NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY WILL BE GIVEN, BUT ONLY IF: 1. YOU SEND US A WRITTEN REQUEST TO PROVIDE SUCH NOTICE, INCLUDING THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION, AFTER THE FIRST NAMED INSURED RECEIVES NOTICE FROM US OF THE CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY; AND 2. WE RECEIVE SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST AT LEAST 14 DAYS BEFORE THE BEGINNING OF THE APPLICABLE NUMBER OF DAYS SHOWN IN THIS ENDORSEMENT. ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON OR ORGANIZATION INCLUDED IN SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST FROM YOU TO US. IL T8 03 Page 1 Te"vasMutual n WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 06 01 EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Agent copy TEXAS NOTICE OF MATERIAL CHANGE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy, we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule. The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to: PER LIST ON FILE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 9/30/2025 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0001295501 Issued t0: Reytec Construction This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 PO Box 12058,Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 06 01 Te"XasMutual WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Agent copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 9/30/2025 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0001295501 Issued t0: Reytec construction This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 PO Box 12058,Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B UMBRELLA 1. The statements in the Declarations and any organizations receiving amounts recovered subsequent notice relating to "underlying according to the ratio of their respective insurance"are accurate and complete; recoveries. 2. Those statements are based upon U. TRANSFER OF YOUR RIGHTS AND DUTIES representations you made to us;and UNDER THIS INSURANCE 3. We have issued this insurance in reliance 1. Your rights and duties under this insurance upon your representations. may not be transferred without our written consent except in the case of death of an S. SEPARATION OF INSUREDS individual Named Insured. Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, 2. If you die, your rights and duties will be and any rights or duties specifically assigned in transferred to your legal representative but this policy to the first Named Insured shown in only while acting within the scope of duties the Declarations,this insurance applies: as your legal representative. Until your legal 1. As if each Named Insured were the only representative is appointed, anyone having Named Insured;and proper temporary custody of your property will have your rights and duties but only with 2. Separately to each insured against whom respect to that property. claim is made or"suit"is brought. V. UNINTENTIONAL OMISSION OR ERROR T. WAIVER OR TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF The unintentional omission of, or unintentional RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US error in, any information provided by you which 1. If the insured has rights to recover all or part we relied upon in issuing this policy will not of any payment we have made under this prejudice your rights under this insurance. insurance, those rights are transferred to us However,this provision does not affect our right and the insured must do nothing after loss to collect additional premium or to exercise our to impair them. At our request, the insured rights of cancellation or nonrenewal in will bring suit or transfer those rights to us accordance with applicable insurance laws or and help us, and with respect to Coverage A, regulations. the"underlying insurer",enforce them. W. WHEN LOSS IS PAYABLE If the insured has agreed in a contract or If we are liable under this insurance, we will pay agreement to waive that insured's right of recovery against any person or organization, for injury,damage or loss after: we waive our right of recovery against that 1. The insured's liability is established by: person or organization, but only for payments we make because of an "event" a. A court decision;or that takes place or is committed subsequent b. A written agreement between the to the execution of that contract or claimant, the insured, any "underlying agreement by such insured. insurer"and us;and 2. Reimbursement of any amount recovered will be made in the following order: 2. The amount of the "applicable underlying limit" or "self-insured retention" is paid by a. First, to any person or organization or on behalf of the insured.ge or loss after: (including us or the insured) who has paid any amount in excess of the SECTION VI - DEFINITIONS applicable limit of insurance; b. Next,to us;and A. With respect to all coverages of this insurance: C. Then, to any person or organization 1. "Applicable underlying limit" means the sum (including the insured and with respect of: to Coverage A,the "underlying insurer") that is entitled to claim the remainder,if a. The applicable limit of insurance stated any. for the policies of"underlying insurance" 3. Expenses incurred in the process of recovery in the Schedule Of Underlying Insurance will be divided among all persons or subject to the provisions in Paragraphs 4.a.(1),(2)and(3) of COVERAGE A- EU 00 010716 ©2016 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 17 of 23 EG 006113 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND No.61 BCSJL7829 Contractor as Principal Surety Name:Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. Name:Hartford Fire Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 1901 Hollister Street One Hartford Plaza Houston,TX 77080 Hartford, CT 06155 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner One Hartford Plaza Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Hartford, CT 06155 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number):860-547-5000 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Basin 1 &2 Telephone(for notice of claim):1-800-451-6944 Project No. 22407 Local Agent for Surety Name: Alyson Carmichael Award Date of the Contract:August 11,2026 Address: 10001 Woodloch Forest Drive,Suite 250 Contract Price: $19,039,000.00 The Woodlands,TX77380 Bond Telephone:8 32-360-2131 Email Address: alyson.carmichael@americanglobal.com Date of Bond: August 13, 2026 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of the Contract) from the Texas Dept.of Insurance by calling the following toll free number:1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 RFB 7208 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Basin 1&2 Rev 5/2025 Project No.22407 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal gcticn. ,,. Contractor as Principal Surety H ord Fire Insurance Cdnipari J r ' Signature: Signature: AA - Name: },Q ��� �C- �y� Gi Name: lyson Carmi ael Title: VA U Cat Title: Attorney-In-Fact! Email Address: greyes@reytec.com Email Address: alyson.carmichae! americangl al.ccin (Attach Power of Attorney and p/ace•Jcirletyse'al b.elowl J END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 RFB 7208 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Basin 1&2 5/2024 Project No. 22407 EG i 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO.61 BCSJL7829 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. Name: Hartford Fire Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 1901 Hollister Street One Hartford Plaza Houston,TX 77080 Hartford, CT 06155 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner One Hartford Plaza Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Hartford, CT 06155 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Basin 860-547-5000 1 &2 Telephone(for notice of claim): Project No.22407 1-800-451-6944 Local Agent for Surety Name: Alyson Carmichael Award Date of the Contract: August 11, 2026 Address: 10001 Woodloch forest Drive.Suite 260 Contract Price: The Woodlands,TX 773M $19,039,000.00 Bond Telephone:832-360-2131 Email Address: al son.carmichael american lobal.com Date of Bond: August 13, 2026 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept.of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 RFB 7208 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Basin 1&2 5/2024 Project No.22407 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code,as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents are incorporated by reference in this Bond. Contractor as Principa R4ytec Constr ction esources, Inc. Surety H lford Fire Insurance Com 3rcy I Signature: Signature: Nurrie: � p /Q� �(��- Name: Alyson armicha�E �I�� �1YC� - I Title: P rQ Title: Attorney-In-Fa(a(-grpyes@reytec.com alyson.carmichac,)@americ anq!ol Email Address:: g Email Address: (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal b�lpw)' J END OF SECTION Performance Bond 0061 13-2 RFB 7208 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Basin 1&2 Rev 5/2025 Project No. 22407 Direct Inquiries,Bond Authenticity and Claims to: POWER OF ATTORNEY THE HARTFORD BOND,T-14 One Hartford Plaza Hartford,Connecticut 06155 Bond.0 laimeAthehartford.com call.888-2663488 orfax:860-7575835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: AMERICAN GLOBAL LLC Agency Code: 61-616588 ® Hartford Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut ® Hartford Casualty Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana ❑ Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut ❑ Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana having their home office in Hartford,Connecticut,(hereinafter collectively referred to as the"Companies")do hereby make,constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Alyson Carmichael, Holli Orr, Sarah Holverson, Paul M. Messenger of THE WOODLANDS, Texas their true and lawful Attorneys)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign its name as surety(ies)only as delineated above by M, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 23, 2016 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. ,.n11 1 nnn,,, \\"0111111/l//,,' \11�f N11111� 111111111/,,/' r° ,oiF E IHSG, \ P<tY INS/jy, �pau ;on,� ` I'acomp,V. �,rb S O:• •9' W gpRPORAIF•co? 's ii tORPORAr "• 0.:: to irsn' i K:� ••• :mi =o? —•— io_ is ^d9 * ?3_ t6••. :ni �r�: 11101ARN _:��- ° 1 g 1979 `Py •. •Oi 'b•. :y'.` of r��r_---� a :,�;'•....... �s,G• '•.....• o° '.'y''•.......•`!�. SEAS 'i,*, * ny0R10RAiEo�°� ''''hhn* ,00\\ fsl•RaPOmrto\"• p„�hOAHR\\`\... Phyllis A.Clark,Assistant Secretary Joelle L.LaPierre,Assistant Vice President STATE OF FLORIDA ss. Lake Mary COUNTY OF SEMINOLE On this 30th day of March,2026,before me personally came Joelle L.LaPierre,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say: that (s)he resides in Seminole County,State of Florida; that (s)he is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that (s)he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals;that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that(s)he signed his/her name thereto by like authority, n Jessica Ciccone 9 O Q.` My Commission HH 644184 Expires June 20,20,29 I,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies,DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing'is a true and nonrect copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is still in full force effective as of August 13, 202 6 Signed and sealed in Lake Mary,Florida. 111111 .• , o°°I�FE I�yn'M1 \\o11u1111u1// �4mfM"1q�U �\\`IfncDA�11'�, ,,,- ,1' I O•• .9i :4:'NGORPORA1r•:�iw u _ p tr$To0P0NAlf• .. f� :ma =ol -•- s =sINDIANSi • ;Ir' 3; +' 'a6Y'••.....,:''ptto 1979 ..I I '4iy�ORA0RAIF•O ° ` �rnRr EAL nto\°4 Keith D.Dozois,Assistant Vice President Revised:Nmch 31,2026 Have a complaint or need help? If you have a problem with a claim or your premium, call your insurance company or HMO first. If you can't work out the issue, the Texas Department of Insurance may be able to help. Even if you file a complaint with the Texas Department of Insurance, you should also file a complaint or appeal through your insurance company or HMO. If you don't, you may lose your right to appeal. The Hartford To get information or file a complaint with your insurance company or HMO: Call: consumer Affairs at 1-800-451-6944 Toll-free: 1-800-451-6944 Email: bond.claims@thehartford.com Mail: The Hartford Financial Services One Hartford Plaza, T-14 Hartford, CT 06155 Attn: Bond Claims Department The Texas Department of Insurance To get help with an insurance question or file a complaint with the state: Call with a question: 1-800-252-3439 Email: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov File a complaint: www.tdi.texas.gov Mail: MC 111-1A, P.O. Box 149091, Austin, TX 78714-9091 ,�yyUS O v �N�OgPORPtE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on August 11, 2026, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements 22407 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Hazen and Sawyer 500 N.Shoreline Blvd.,Suite 203 Corpus Christi,Texas, 78401 thudson@hazenandsawyer.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Jiangang(Daniel) Deng, Ph.D., P.E. 4917 Holly Rd. Bldg#5 Corpus Christi,Texas, 78411 jian�an�d@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 1165 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 1195 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,areas defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $1,550 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$925 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 19,039,000.00 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 00 52 23-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 00 52 23-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES (SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS) Agreement 00 52 23-5 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI �L Jeff Edmonds(Sep 8,2026 11:18:38 CDT) Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E Director of Engineering Services APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: 49=2n 4n--1 M2026-080 AUTHORIZED Francis u od(Sep 8,2026 11:15:51 CDT) Assistant City Attorney 8/11/2026 BY COUNCIL RH/SB ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) (Seal Below) CONTRACTOR Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. (Seal Below) By: Stevanda(Sep 6,2026 12:29:53 CDT) Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Vice President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 1901 Hollister Street Financial Officer Address Houston,Texas 77080 City State Zip 713-957-4003 Phone Fax steven@reytec.com Email END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 Agreement 00 52 23-7 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 RFB 7208 O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffli... Report Created On:6/3/2026 7:02:22 PM PROJECT: RFB 7208 O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements RFB 7208, Project No. 22407 BIDDER: Reytec Construction TOTAL BID: $19,039,000.00 COMPLETION TIME: Not Required BIDDER INFO: 1901 Hollister Street Houston,TX 77080 P: 7139574003 F: 7136810077 CIVCAS, RFB 7208 O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffli... Report Created On:6/3/2026 7:02:22 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A $44,500.00 Part B $16,841,018.00 Part D $1,430,000.00 Part E $723,482.00 Total $19,039,000.00 Part A No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Stormwater Pollution Prevention LS 1 $12,000.00 $12,000.00 A2 Windstorm Inspections and Certificates LS 1 $32,500.00 $32,500.00 Subtotal: $44,500.00 Part B No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 131 Demolition LS 1 $1,514,000.00 $1,514,000.00 B2 Flocculators(Mixers and Motors) LS 1 $2,727,000.00 $2,727,000.00 B3 Stainless Steel Baffle Walls LS 1 $2,759,000.00 $2,759,000.00 B4 Sludge Pipe and Valve Modifications and LS 1 $201,000.00 $201,000.00 Slide Gates B5 Structural Improvements and Misc. LS 1 $3,909,018.00 $3,909,018.00 Metals B6 PCR-14 Building,Ancillary Equipment, LS 1 $986,000.00 $986,000.00 and HVAC Improvements B7 Site Work and Restoration LS 1 $72,000.00 $72,000.00 B8 Electrical and I&C Improvements LS 1 $4,673,000.00 $4,673,000.00 Subtotal: $16,841,018.00 Part D No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 Unforseen Conditions AL 1 $1,400,000.00 $1,400,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 7208 O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffli... Report Created On:6/3/2026 7:02:22 PM D2 Permit Fees AL 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 Subtotal: $1,430,000.00 Part E No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 Mobilization LS 1 $380,780.00 $380,780.00 E2 Bonds and Insurances LS 1 $342,702.00 $342,702.00 Subtotal: $723,482.00 CIVCAS, RFB 7208 O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffli... Report Created On:6/3/2026 7:02:22 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE 7208 Addendum No. 1 06/03/2026 12:38:05 PM 7208 Addendum No. 2 06/03/2026 12:38:06 PM 7208 Addendum No. 3 06/03/2026 12:38:07 PM CIVCAS, RFB 7208 O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffli... Report Created On:6/3/2026 7:02:22 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Invitation To Bid 7208 Invitation to Bid and Specifications 5/1/2026 1:30:05 PM Other No Contact Guide 5/5/2026 7:45:37 AM Addenda 7208 Addendum No. 1 5/28/2026 10:36:13 AM Addenda 7208 Addendum No. 2 5/28/2026 10:36:14 AM Plans 7208 Drawings 5/28/2026 10:36:10 AM Addenda 7208 Addendum No. 3 5/29/2026 1:08:23 PM Other 7208 Pre-Bid Presentation 5/28/2026 10:36:15 AM BID FORM Project Name: O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project Number: 22407 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: I.Iiangang(Daniel) Deng, Ph.D.,P.E.,Assistant Director of Treatment Construction,City of Corpus Christi Designer:lHazen and Sawyer By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Re tec Construction Resources Inc. (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Steven K. Aranda (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Vice President (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Resid ncy: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 76-0516513 Address for Notices: 1901 Hollister Street Houston. TX 77080 Phone: 713-957-4003 Email: steven@reytec.com Note to Bidders: All bid items must include a bid amount to be considered a responsive bid otherwise the bids are considered "Unbalance Bid" "Unbalanced Bid"means a Bid that includes a bid that is based on unit prices that are significantly less than cost for some Bid items and significantly more than cost for others. This may be evidenced by the submission of unit price Bid items where the costs are significantly higher/lower than the cost of the same Bid items submitted by other Bidders on the project. Bid Form Project: ONWSTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Page 1 of 2 Project#: 22407 Rev 2-5-26 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF O . N . Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and BafflingImprovements PROJECT NUMBER 22407 rk Hazen and Sawyer 500 N. Shoreline Blvd., Suite 203 Corpus Christi, TX 78401 (361) 500-0410 CONFORMED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS Revised May 22, 2026 Record Drawing Number: WTR-509 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page 000102 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 30 01 Bid Form 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev3-2023) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev 2-2026) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Revs-2019) Part S Standard Specifications Division 02-S Existing Conditions 02 10 20 Site Clearing and Stripping 02 10 40 Site Grading 02 20 20 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers 02 20 22 Trench Safety for Excavations 022100 Select Material 02 24 20 Silt Fence 02 52 05 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement Table of Contents 00 0100-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 02 52 23 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 02 56 12 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 02 56 20 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 02 80 40 Sodding Division 26-S Electrical 26 05 00 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 Motor-Control Centers 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 23 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 265100 Interior Lighting Division 27-S Communications 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Division 40-S Process Interconnections 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 90 02.1 Power Protection -Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 90 03 SCADA& Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning Part T Technical Specifications Division 01-T General Requirements Table of Contents 00 0100-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 01 14 00 Coordination with Owner's Operations 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Management 014200 References 016100 Product Requirements and Options 01 64 13 Owner Furnished SCADA Services 01 65 00 Product Delivery Requirements 01 66 00 Product Storage and Protection Requirements 01 71 33 Protection of Work and Property 01 73 00 Demolition and Execution of Work 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 01 75 00 Checkout and Startup Procedures 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 78 43 Spare Parts and Extra Material 01 79 00 Instruction of Owner's Personnel Division 02-T Existing Conditions 02 00 01 Mobilization Division 03-T Concrete 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 20 Reinforcing Steel 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 40 00 Precast, Prestressed Hollowcore Planks 03 60 00 Grouting Division 04-T Masonry 04 05 13 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04 05 14 Masonry Mortaring & Grouting 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories Table of Contents 00 0100-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry Division 05-T Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 14 00 Structural Aluminum Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06-T Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Division 07-T Thermal and Moisture Protection 071100 Dampproofing 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 52 00 Built-Up Bituminous Roofing 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 70 00 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 90 00 Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking Division 08-T Openings 08 11 13 Steel Doors and Frames 08 71 00 Finish Hardware Division 09-T Finishes 09 29 00 Gypsum Drywall System 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 90 00 Painting Division 10-T Specialties 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers Division 23-T Heating,Ventilation, and Air Conditioning 23 00 00 Basic HVAC Requirements 23 05 93 HVAC Balancing Table of Contents 00 0100-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 23 05 95 HVAC Field Testing 23 31 13 Metal Ducts and Duct Accessories 23 74 00 Commercial Packaged DX Units Division 26-T Electrical 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 60 Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 09 16 Electric Controls and Relays 26 29 20 Low Voltage Active Harmonic Filter System Division 40-T Process Interconnections 40 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 07 Pipe Supports 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 58 Gate Operators and Electric Gate Actuators 40 05 59.23 Fabricated Stainless-Steel Slide Gates 40 06 20 Process Pipe,Valve, and Gate Schedules 40 61 13 Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15 Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 Process Control System Testing 40 61 21.71 Factory Witness Test 40 61 21.72 Field Testing 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test 40 61 22 Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General 40 61 23 Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 24 Quality Assurance 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 40 61 90 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General 40 61 91 Process Control System Instrument List 406193 Process Control System Input-Output List 406196 Process Control Descriptions 40 62 63 Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers 40 66 00 Network and Communication Equipment 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks Table of Contents 00 0100-5 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems 40 75 13 pH Analyzers 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 56 Surge Suppressors Division 46-T Water and Wastewater Equipment 46 00 00 Equipment General Provisions 46 41 27.11 Vertical Turbine Mixers 46 70 00 Stainless Steel Baffle Walls END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-6 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 0001 01 SEALS PAGE Tyler Hudson, P.E. =�P�E OF Process Mechanical, Project Manager S:•' •.S 11 i • Hazen and Sawyer i *: •::* %.............................. Responsible for the following specifications: % TYLER HUDSON .............................. 139817 Division 00 ,f��j��`''• CENS�-�•� �`��o qSS� dw Division 01 0 ALA-�G' 40 05 00- Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 07- Pipe Supports d 40 05 19- Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 58—Gate Operators and Electric Gate Actuators 40 05 59.23—Fabricated Stainless-Steel Slide Gates 40 05 53—Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 40 06 20- Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules Division 46 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Logan Burton, P.E. Civil i............................:...I Ardurra Group, Inc. % WILLIAM LOGAN BURTON 00 Responsible for the following specifications: � o , 99383 OV ff i +iP�� �CENS.do Division 02 t� %/ANAL E�WA `�%%%V 05 20/25 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project 22407 1 of 4 0001 01 Rev 1/2022 Niclas Green, P.E. #tip \ 05/20/25 ttt Structural ...... 4 Ardurra Group, Inc. * - ► 4W * / do,....:............................... Responsible for the following specifications: I NIGLAS S. GREEN I / --- ------ -----/ Division 03 # ' 126232 Division 04 j A L Division 05 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- William H. Russell, R.A. Architectural �� MD AR Hazen and Sawyer Responsible for the following specifications: 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry �1 23360 Division 07 ,�q p Division 08 05/20/2025 Division 09 Division 10 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Samuel Barrese, P.E. tE OF '�1 HVAC C.cp►...........,�tysto Hazen and Sawyer •lit, :................. ............;.....! Responsible for the following specifications: SAMUEL BARRESE j ......................................,.... Division 23 �'110% 4 148599 .LENS \��0 AL ENS 05/20/2025 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project 22407 2of4 000101 Rev 1/2022 * Brett Bueltel, P.E. ..BRETT D. UELTEL Electrical 121398 Hazen and Sawyer 410ENS�� Responsible for the following specifications: Division 26 05/22/2026 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Soren Zomorodi, P.E. EOF Instrumentation and Controls Hazen and Sawyer Responsible for the following specifications: MOHAMMAD H.ZOMORODI 116555 Division 27 410ENSE� 40 61 13- Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15- Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing 05/22/2026 4061 21.17- Factory Witness Test 4061 21.72- Field Testing 4061 21.73- Final Acceptance Test 4061 22-Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General 4061 23-Signal Coordination Requirements 4061 24-Quality Assurance 4061 26- Process Control System Training 4061 90-Schedules and Control Descriptions, General 4061 93- Process Control System Input-Output List 4061 96- Process Control Descriptions 40 63 43- Programmable Logic Controllers ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No. 22407 3of4 000101 Rev 1/2022 40 66 00- Network and Communication Equipment 40 67 00- Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 63- Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 78 00- Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 56-Surge Suppressors 40 90 00- Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 - Instrumentation 40 90 02-Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 40 90 02.1 - Power Protection SCADA System 40 90 03-SCADA Instrumentation Testing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- END OF SECTION ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project 22407 4of4 000101 Rev 1/2022 000102 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. Sheet Title GENERAL G001 GENERAL COVER SHEET G002 ABBREVIATIONS AND LEGEND CIVIL C001 TYPICAL LEGEND SHEET C002 GENERAL NOTES C003 OVERALL SITE PLAN C004 CIVIL SITE PLAN C005 ENLARGED CIVIL SITE PLAN C006 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS C007 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION DETAILS MECHANICAL M001 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 AND 2 OVERALL DEMOLITION PLANS M002 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 DEMOLITION PLANS M003 FLOCCULATION BASIN 2 DEMOLITION PLANS M004 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 AND 2 DEMOLITION SECTIONS AND PHOTOS M005 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 AND 2 DEMOLITION SECTIONS AND PHOTOS M006 ISOMETRIC VIEW M007 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 AND 2 OVERALL MODIFICATION PLANS M008 SECONDARY SEDIMENTATION BASIN 1 AND 2 OVERALL MODIFICATION PLAN M009 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 MODIFICATION PLANS M010 FLOCCULATION BASIN 2 MODIFICATION PLANS M011 SECONDARY SEDIMENTATION BASIN 1 AND 2 MODIFICATION PLANS M012 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 SECTIONS M013 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 AND 2 SECTIONS M014 FLOCCULATION BASIN 2 SECTIONS M015 SECONDARY SEDIMENTATION BASIN 1 AND 2 SECTIONS STRUCTURAL S000 GENERAL NOTES& DESIGN CRITERIA S001 OVERALL DEMOLITION PLANS S002 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 DEMOLITION PLANS S003 FLOCCULATION BASIN 2 DEMOLITION PLANS S004 DEMOLITION SECTIONS S005 OVERALL MODIFICATION PLAN List of Drawings 00 01 02- 1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Sheet No. Sheet Title 5006 OVERALL MODIFICATION PLANS- PRIMARY BASINS S007 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 MODIFICATION PLANS S008 FLOCCULATION BASIN 2 MODIFICATION PLANS 5009 MODIFICATION SECTIONS S010 MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS AND DETAILS I 5011 MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS AND DETAILS II S012 MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS AND DETAILS III 5013 WALKWAY ALUMINUM FRAMING PLAN 5014 WALKWAY ALUMINUM FRAMING SECTIONS S015 WALKWAY CONNECTION DETAILS 5016 ALUMINUM GUARDRAIL SECTIONS AND DETAILS 5017 ALUMINUM LADDER SECTION AND DETAILS 5018 PCR-14 FOUNDATION PLAN 5019 PCR-14 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS 5020 PCR-14 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 5021 PCR-14 BUILDING SECTION S022 PCR-14 CMU WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS 5023 PCR-14 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS &T-SUPPORT ARCHITECTURE A001 PCR-14 PLANS AND SECTIONS A002 PCR-14 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A003 PCR-14 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS HVAC H001 PCR-14 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS,AND ABBREVIATIONS H002 PCR-14 SCHEDULE AND DETAILS H003 PCR-14 FLOOR PLAN H004 PCR-14 SECTIONS ELECTRICAL E001 LEGEND AND SYMBOLS E002 GENERAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS E003 PARTIAL SITE PLAN E004 FLOCCULATION AND SEDIMENTATION BASINS OVERALL TOP DEMO PLAN E005 FLOCCULATION AND SEDIMENTATION BASINS OVERALL TOP PLAN E006 FLOCCULATION AND SEDIMENTATION BASINS ELECTRICAL BASIN 1 TOP PLAN E007 FLOCCULATION AND SEDIMENTATION BASINS BASIN 2 TOP PLAN E008 PCR-14 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING PLAN E009 PCR-14 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN List of Drawings 0001 02-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Sheet No. Sheet Title E010 PCR-14 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY PLAN E011 PCR-9 SWGR-9C SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E012 PCR-14 MCC-FLCC-1 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E013 PCR-14 MCC-FLCC-1 ELEVATION E014 PCR-14 PANEL SCHEDULES AND FIXTURE SCHEDULES E015 PCR-14 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAMS E016 PCR-14 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAMS E017 PCR-14 ELEMENTARY CONTROL SCHEMATICS E018 PCR-14 CONDUIT AND WIRE SCHEDULES E019 PCR-14 CONDUIT AND WIRE SCHEDULES E020 STANDARD DETAILS INSTRUMENTATION 1001 LEGEND AND ABBREVIATION 1002 PCR-14 PARTIAL NETWORK BLOCK DIAGRAM 1003 FLOCCULATION BASIN 1 P&ID 1004 FLOCCULATION BASIN 2 P&ID 1005 STANDARD DETAILS END OF SECTION List of Drawings 0001 02-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BID FORM Project Name: O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project Number: 22407 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: JJiangang(Daniel) Deng, Ph.D., P.E.,Assistant Director of Treatment Construction,City of Corpus Christi Designer:I Hazen and Sawyer By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Federal Tx ID No. Address for Notices: Phone: Email: Note to Bidders: All bid items must include a bid amount to be considered a responsive bid otherwise the bids are considered "Unbalance Bid" "Unbalanced Bid"means a Bid that includes a bid that is based on unit prices that are significantly less than cost for some Bid items and significantly more than cost for others. This may be evidenced by the submission of unit price Bid items where the costs are significantly higher/lower than the cost of the same Bid items submitted by other Bidders on the project. Bid Form Project: ONWSTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Page 1 of 2 Project#: 22407 Rev 2-5-26 BID FORM Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT QUANTITY Base Bid Part A-GENERAL (per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) (Mobilization,Bonds and Insurance must be placed as the last part of the bid form) Al IStorm Water Pollution Prevention I LS 1 $ $ A2 iWindstorm Inspections and Certificates LS 1 $ $ SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A4) $ Part B-WATER IMPROVEMENTS(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) B1 Demolition LS 1 $ $ B2 Flocculators(Mixers and Motors) LS 1 $ $ B3 Stainless Steel Baffle Walls LS 1 $ $ B4 Sludge Pipe and Valve Modifications and LS 1 $ $ Slide Gates B5 Structural Improvements and Misc. Metals LS 1 $ $ B6 PCR-14 Building,Ancillary Equipment,and LS 1 $ $ HVAC Improvements B7 ISite Work and Restoration LS 1 $ $ B8 Electrical and I&C Improvements LS 1 $ $ SUBTOTAL PART B-WATER IMPROVEMENTS(Items B1 thru 138) $ Part D-ALLOWANCES(per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) D1 Unforeseen Conditions AL 1 $ 1,400,000.00 $ 1,400,000.00 D2 Permit Fees AL 1 $ 30,000.00 $ 30,000.00 SUBTOTAL PART D-ALLOWANCES(D1 THRU D2) $ 1,430,000.00 BID SUMMARY SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A2) SUBTOTAL PART B-STORMWATER IMPROVEMENTS(Items B1 thru 138) $ SUBTOTAL PART D-ALLOWANCES(Items D1 thru D2) $ 1,430,000.00 SUBTOTAL PROJECT BASE BID(PARTS A THRU D) $ 1,430,000.00 Part E-MOBILIZATION AND BOND AND INSURANCE Mobilization(Not to exceed 5%max multiplied by 0 E1 SUBTOTAL PROJECT BASE BID) LS 1 5/0 Bonds and Insurances (Not to exceed 2%max $ 0 multiplied by SUBTOTAL PROJECT BASE BID) LS 1 2 0 SUBTOTAL PART E-MOBILIZATION AND BOND AND INSURANCE(Items E1 thru E2) $ TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID(PARTS A THRU E) $ Bid Form Project: ONWSTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Page 2 of 2 Project#: 22407 Rev 2-5-26 S CgA_ O v �NOONPDXPSE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements 22407 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Hazen and Sawyer 500 N.Shoreline Blvd.,Suite 203 Corpus Christi,Texas, 78401 thudson@hazenandsawyer.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Jiangang(Daniel) Deng, Ph.D., P.E. 4917 Holly Rd. Bldg#5 Corpus Christi,Texas, 78411 jiangangd@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 1165 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 1195 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $1,550 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$925 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 00 52 23-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractorthat without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 00 52 23-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records,books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES (SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS) Agreement 00 52 23-5 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax Email END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 12/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Hazen and Sawyer Ardurra Group B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. All structural, mechanical, electrical, HVAC, civil, and instrumentation improvements for Basins 1 and 2 and PCR-14.The systems shall be started up,fully tested and deemed to be in satisfactory operation. City staff shall be trained and have access to preliminary O&M manuals. 2. Only the following items not yet complete in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. O&M Manuals and staff training ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.1) are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 129 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 43 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: None 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: None B. Delete Paragraph 5.03 entirely and insert the following: "5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. No reports of explorations or tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site, or drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, are known to Owner." SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: None 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to known Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site include the following: None B. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises—Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 5. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑ Required X Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑ Required X Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Cost if uninstalled Materials on Required if installing city-owned equipment Hand or storing contractor equipment on city- X Required ElNot Required owned property Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between 6:00 a.m.and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Juneteenth June 19 Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX21 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 TX29 Highway Highway Construction Projects (excluding tunnels, building structures in rest area projects & railroad construction; bascule, suspension & spandrel arch bridges designed for commercial navigation, bridges involving marine construction; and other major bridges). TX33 Heavy Pipeline-On-Shore Pipeline Construction TX34 Heavy Pipeline-Off-Shore Construction TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) TX51 Heavy Dredging projects along the Texas gulf coast area including all public channels, harbors, rivers, tributaries and the Gulf Intracoastal Waterways. TX55 Heavy Tunnel Construction Projects (Bored, 48" In Diameter Or More) "General Decision Number: TX2026002101/02/2026 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20240021 State:Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/02/2026 SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excluding Form Setting).........................$ 9.05 Concrete Finisher................$ 7.56 ELECTRICIAN...................... $ 13.37 2.58 Laborers: Common......................$ 7.25 Utility.....................$ 7.68 Power equipment operators: Backhoe.....................$ 9.21 Motor Grader................$ 8.72 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member(or person who is Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Note: Executive Order 13658 generally applies to contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act that were awarded on or between January 1, 2015 and January 29, 2022, and that have not been renewed or extended on or after January 30, 2022. Executive Order 13658 does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts regardless of when they were awarded. If a contract is subject to Executive Order 13658,the contractor must pay all covered workers at least$13.30 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2025. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under Executive Order 13658 is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 The body of each wage determination lists the classifications and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the type(s) of construction and geographic area covered by the wage determination.The classifications are listed in alphabetical order under rate identifiers indicating whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate), a survey rate, a weighted union average rate, a state adopted rate, or a supplemental classification rate. Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter identifier beginning with characters other than ""SU"", ""UAVG"", ?SA?, or?SC?denotes that a union rate was prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2024. PLUM is an identifier of the union whose collectively bargained rate prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination.The date,07/01/2024 in the example, is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all changes over time that are reported to WHD in the rates in the collective bargaining agreement(CBA) governing the classification. Union Average Rate Identifiers The UAVG identifier indicates that no single rate prevailed for those classifications, but that 100%of the data reported for Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 the classifications reflected union rates. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 01/01/2024. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the State of Ohio. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination.The date, 01/01/2024 in the example, indicates the date the wage determination was updated to reflect the most current union average rate. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January,to reflect a weighted average of the current rates in the collective bargaining agreements on which the rate is based. Survey Rate Identifiers The ""SU"" identifier indicates that either a single non-union rate prevailed (as defined in 29 CFR 1.2)for this classification in the survey or that the rate was derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As a weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SUFL2022-007 6/27/2024. SU indicates the rate is a single non-union prevailing rate or a weighted average of survey data for that classification. FL indicates the State of Florida. 2022 is the year of the survey on which these classifications and rates are based.The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination.The date, 6/27/2024 in the example, indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. ?SU?wage rates typically remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. However,the Wage and Hour Division (WHD) has the discretion to update such rates under 29 CFR 1.6(c)(1). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 State Adopted Rate Identifiers The ""SA" identifier indicates that the classifications and prevailing wage rates set by a state (or local)government were adopted under 29 C.F.R 1.3(g)-(h). Example: SAME2023-007 01/03/2024. SA reflects that the rates are state adopted. ME refers to the State of Maine. 2023 is the year during which the state completed the survey on which the listed classifications and rates are based.The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/03/2024 in the example, reflects the date on which the classifications and rates under the ?SA? identifier took effect under state law in the state from which the rates were adopted. ----------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: a) a survey underlying a wage determination b) an existing published wage determination c) an initial WHD letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter d) an initial conformance (additional classification and rate) determination On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be directed to the WHD Branch of Wage Surveys. Requests can be submitted via email to Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-10 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 davisbaconinfo@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Wage Surveys Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Regarding any other wage determination matter such as conformance decisions, requests for initial decisions should be directed to the WHD Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Requests can be submitted via email to BCWD-Office@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2) If an initial decision has been issued, then any interested party(those affected by the action)that disagrees with the decision can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Requests for review and reconsideration can be submitted via email to dba.reconsideration@dol.gov or by mail to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-11 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 interested party's position and any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.)that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Hazen and Sawyer 361-500-0410 Ardurra 361-883-1984 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/Wastewater/Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-12 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number AE P 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryl-i n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings per equipment specifications. SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Assistant Engineer: $140/hr Senior Principal Engineer-$250/hr Senior Associate-$275/hr ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data per specifications. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-13 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-14 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 3/2023 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. Demolition of the existing walking beam flocculators, replacement with new vertical turbine mixers, and construction of the associated structural upgrades in Plant 1 (Basins 1 and 2) for the new flocculators.A new electrical building, PCR-14, is to be constructed for the new vertical flocculators. Additionally, construction of new baffle walls in the secondary sedimentation basins of Plant 1. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. ONSWTP Raw Water Influent and Chemical Facilities Improvements Proiect, E17047 2. ONSWTP Chlorine Storage and Handling Facility Improvements, E10144 3. ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3, 18131A 4. Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements, 19032A 5. ONSWTP Wash Water EST Rehabilitation, 24041 6. ONSWTP Security Upgrade Design, 22408 7. ONSWTP Solids Handling& Disposal Facility, 23059 8. ONSWTP Electrical Reliability, 24016 B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. Summary of Work 01 1100-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. Basin shutdown, draining, dewatering, and solids removal in preparation for construction and installation 2. Typical operations and maintenance activities, including placing trains off line during periods of low demand. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 1100-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as"Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance D1— Unforeseen Conditions-Consists of an allowance for removal of unforeseen conditions, including underground utilities: 1. The sum of$1,400,000 to be used for the purchase of all work and materials required to remove and dispose of abandoned underground utilities encountered during the installation of facilities under this contract which may not be identified on the drawings as well as any other unforeseen conditions identified during the Work. Work shall include plugging remaining ends of pipelines removed. Utilities up to and including twelve inches in diameter up to an 8 foot depth are included in this payment Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 5/2020 item. All Work shall be authorized in writing in advance, by the OWNER.All amounts remaining in this item upon completion of the project shall be credited to the OWNER by Change Order. Contingency Allowance for Unforeseen utility relocation and conditions will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all the effort under this item. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost for all the effort under this item as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not to exceed the amount specified under this allowance item. B. Allowance D2— Permit Fees-Consists of an allowance for permit fees for agencies other than City of Corpus Christi. 1. The sum of$30,000 to be used for permit fees for agencies other than City of Corpus Christi. The CONTRACTOR shall not add any markup or overhead charges to these fees. The price of the fee paid to the respective permitting agency shall be full compensation to the CONTRACTOR. All Work shall be authorized in writing in advance, by the OWNER. All amounts remaining in this item upon completion of the project shall be credited to the OWNER by Change Order. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 5/2020 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50% of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50% completion has occurred, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2—Windstorm Inspections& Certificates 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the windstorm certificates to TWIA and Owner and inspecting the plan during the Project as needed. All required fees and certificates related to windstorm will be included in this item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50% of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50% completion has occurred, minus retainage. C. Bid Item B-1- Demolition 1. Includes furnishing all labor, supervision, equipment, materials,tools, incidentals, and related items required for the demolition and removal of internal components of the sedimentation basins. Work includes but is not limited to the demolition and removal of all structural, process mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation and controls components and structures within each basin. Includes all other services or requirements specified and/or shown in the contract documents. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. D. Bid Item B-2—Flocculators 1. Includes furnishing all labor, supervision, equipment,tools, materials, incidentals, and related items required for installation of the flocculators. Includes but is not limited to equipment, equipment testing, commissioning, startup services, and construction sequencing.This item includes all work specified and/or shown in the contractor documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that are not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by a complete and functioning flocculators (all 48). E. Bid Item B-3—Stainless-Steel Baffle Walls 1. Includes furnishing all labor, supervision, equipment,tools, materials, incidentals, and related items required for installation of all stainless-steel baffle walls. Includes but is not limited to interim flocculation baffle walls,flocculation distribution channel baffle wall, and secondary sedimentation basin baffle wall.This item includes all work specified and/or shown in the contractor documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that are not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by complete and functioning stainless-steel baffle walls. F. Bid Item B-4—Sludge Pipe,Valve Modifications, and Slide Gates 1. Includes furnishing all labor, supervision, equipment,tools, materials, incidentals, and related items required for the relocation and installation all components related to the sludge pipe, valves, gates and actuator modifications. Includes but is not limited to additional sludge piping, relocation of valves and actuators, relocation of sludge piping, new slide gates,testing, commissioning, and startup.This item includes all work specified and/or shown in the contractor documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that are not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by complete and functioning sludge piping system. G. Bid Item B-5—Structural Improvements and Misc. Metals Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 1. Includes furnishing all labor, supervision, equipment,tools, materials, incidentals, and related items required for structural improvements and miscellaneous metals requirements. Includes but is not limited to flocculation area columns and supports, grating, walkways, handrails, ladders, existing basin modifications, and flocculation distribution channel.This item includes all work specified and/or shown in the contractor documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that are not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by complete and functioning structural improvements and miscellaneous metals. H. Bid Item B-6—PCR-14 Building,Ancillary Equipment and HVAC Improvements 1. Includes furnishing all labor, supervision, equipment,tools, materials, incidentals, and related items required for construction of PCR-14. Includes but is not limited to architectural components,foundation, walls, doors, HVAC equipment, and other ancillary systems not specifically identified as part of all Electrical and Instrumentation and Controls required for Bid Item F-8.This item includes all work specified and/or shown in the contractor documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that are not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by a complete and functioning PCR-14 Building and HVAC Improvements. I. Bid Item B-7—Site Work and Restoration 1. Includes furnishing labor, equipment, materials, incidentals, and related items required for site work and restoration. Work includes, but is not limited to, excavation, fill, concrete, sidewalks, and any other services or requirements specified and/or shown on the contract documents. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by complete and functioning site work and restoration J. Bid Item B-8—Electrical and I&C Improvements 1. Includes furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, incidentals, tools, incidentals, required for all electrical and instrumentation and controls improvements. Work includes, but is not limited to,VFDs, MCCs, control panels, conduit, cable trays, overhead cable trays, pullboxes, equipment testing, commissioning, and start up. 2. Measurement for payment shall be made per lump sum basis. 3. Bid item shall be measured by complete and functioning site electrical system. K. Bid Item E-1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; and e. Demobilization. 2. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. All bid items included in the Contract Price other than Mobilization and Bonds and Insurance will be subtotaled and multiplied by 5 percent to determine if this requirement is met. 3. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon Substantial Completion of all work under the Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. L. Bid Item E-2—Bonds and Insurance (Maximum 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Bonds and Insurance may not exceed 2 percent of the total Contract Price. All bid items included in the Contract Price other than Mobilization and Bonds and Insurance will be subtotaled and multiplied by 2 percent to determine if this requirement is met. 3. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5%of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 100%of the Bonds and Insurance lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. M. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 2/2026 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mocku Data 00 30 01 Bid Form 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances 1.02.A 01 35 00 Special Procedures-MOPO 1.01.1' 01 35 00 Special Procedures-Construction Schedule 1.02.A Shop Drawin 01 50 00 Temporary Utilities and Facilities 2.05.A.1.a Shop Drawin 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 1.03 Shop Drawin 02 56 20 Portland Cement Conrete Pavement 5 Shop Drawin 26 05 00 General work requirements for electrical 1.04 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 05 19 Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1.3 Sho Drawin O&M Manual 26 05 29 1 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1.5 Sho Drawin O&M Manual 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 1.3 Shop Drawin 26 22 00 Low Voltage Tranfromers 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 24 16 Panelboards 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 24 19 Motor Control Centers 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 1.5 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 28 16 Enclosed and Circuit Breakers 1.4 Shop Drawiniz O&M Manual 26 29 23 Low Voltage Variabl Frequency Drives 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling 1.3.A Sho Drawin O&M Manual 40 05 53 Identifcation for Process Piping and Equipment 1.2.6 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 1.6 Shop Drawiniz O&M Manual 40 90 01 Instrumentation 1.3 Shop Drawin 40 90 02 SCADA System 1.2 Shop Drawin 40 90 02.1 SCADA System-Power Protection 1.2 Shop Drawin 40 90 03 SCADA&Instrumenttion Testing and Commissioning 1.2 Shop Drawing 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 61 00 Product Requirements and Options 1.03 O&M Manual 01 73 00 Demolition and Execution of Work 1.04 Shop Drawin 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 1.04 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 01 75 00 Checkout and Startup Procedures 1.03 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data O&M Manual 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 1.03 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 01 79 00 Instruction of Owner's Personnel 1.04 O&M Manual 02 21 00 Select Material 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 2.11.A Shop Drawin 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 1.05 Sho Drawin 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 1.03 Shop Drawin 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete 1.04 Sho Drawin 03 40 00 Precast Prestressed Hollowcore Plank 1.03 Shop Drawin 03 60 00 Grouting 1.04 Shop Drawin 04 05 13 Mortar and Masonry rout 1.04 Shop Drawin 04 05 14 Masonry Mortaring&Grouting 1.04 Shop Drawin 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories 1.04 Shop Drawin 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.05 Shop Drawin 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 1.04 Shop Drawin 05 14 00 Structural Aluminum framing 1.03 Shop Drawin 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.03 Shop Drawin 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 1.03 Shop Drawin 071100 Dampproofing 1.04 Shop Drawin 07 21 00 Building Insulation 1 1.04 1 Shop Drawing I Sample 07 52 00 Built-Up Bitminous Roofing 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample 07 60 00 Flashingand Sheet Metal 1.04 Sho Drawin sample 07 70 00 Roof Specialties and Accessories 1.04.A Shop Drawing Sample Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 10/2018 Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 07 90 00 Joint Fillers Sealants and Caulking 1.03.A Shop Drawing Sample 08 11 13 Steel Doors and Frames 1.04 Shop Drawing 08 71 00 Finish Hardware 1.4 Shop Drawing 09 29 00 Gypsum Drywall System 1.4 Shop Drawing 09 65 00 Resilent Flooring 1.04 Shop Drawing 09 90 00 Painting 1.04 Shop Drawing 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 1.03 S hop n O&M Manual 23 00 00 Basic HVAC Re uirmetns 1.02 O&M Manual 230593 HVAC Balancin 1.05 n230595 HVAC Field Testin 1.03 n233113 Metal Ducts and Duct Accessories 1.03 n 23 74 00 Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment 1.03 Sho Drawing O&M Manual 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 1.09 thru Shop Drawing 1.11 26 05 60 Low Voltage Electric Motors 1.03 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 09 16 Electric Controls and Relays 1.03 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 29 20 Low Voltage Active Harmonic Filter System 1.03 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 05 07 Pipe Supports 1.03 Shop Drawing 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pie 1.02 Shop Drawin 40 05 58 Gate Operators and Electric Gate Actuators 1.02 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 05 59.23 Fabricated Stainless-Steeel Slide Gates 1.02 Shop Drawing 40 61 15 Process Control Systems Submittals Shop Drawing 40 61 21 Process Control Systems Testing 1.03 Shop Drawing 40 61 21.72 Field Testing Shop Drawing 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test Shop Drawiniz 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 1.03 Shop Drawing 40 62 63 Operator Interface Terminals OIT Shop Drawin 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers Shop Drawing 40 66 00 Network and Communication Equipment 1.04 Shop Drawing 40 67 00 1 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.02 Shop Drawing 40 67 63 Uninterru tible Power Systems 1.03 Shop Drawing 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 75 13 pH Analyzers Shop Drawing O&M Manual 46 00 00 Equipment General Provisions 1.03 Shop Drawing 46 41 27.11 Vertical Turbine Mixers 1.03 ShopDrawingO&M Manual 46 70 00 Stainless Steel Baffle Walls 1.02.1' Shop Drawing O&M Manual Submittal Register 01 33 01-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 10/2018 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS A. The O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant (ONSWTP) is a critical provider of potable water to the City of Corpus Christi,TX and the surrounding seven (7) county region and is operating under the terms of a drinking water permit issued by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ). This permit, which is posted at the ONSWTP for review, specifies the water quality limits that the plant must meet prior to discharge of finished water. Work shall be performed in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the finished water quality established by the permit. The Contractor shall bear the cost of penalties imposed on the Owner for water quality violations caused by actions of the Contractor. B. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the City of Corpus Christi Drinking Water Operations and the OAR throughout construction to avoid any conflicts with operations that would negatively impact maintain the required flow range and quality from ONSWTP at all times. The ONSWTP required flow range to be maintained during specific time frames of the year are as follows: ONSWTP REQUIRED FLOW RANGE AMD FINISHED WATER STORAGE HOURS OF TIME FRAME MINIMUM FLOW MAXIMUM FLOW STORAGE CAPACITY November 1 through 60 MGD 85 MGD 1 March 31 all ears April 1 through Octobe 75 MGD 130 MGD 1.5 31 all ears C. The Contractor shall schedule the Work in accordance with the sequence defined in the contract documents so that the facility is maintained in continuous operation. All processes shall be maintained in continuous operation during the construction period. Refer to Specification 0114 00 Coordination with Owner's Operations. D. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the City of Corpus Christi Drinking Water Operations and the OAR throughout construction to avoid any conflicts with concurrent construction projects at ONSWTP listed in Section 1.03 of Specification 011100 Summary of Work, including but not limited to: 1. ONSWTP Raw Water Influent and Chemical Facilities Improvements Project, E17047 2. ONSWTP Chlorine Storage and Handling Facility Improvements, E10144 3. ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3, 18131A 4. Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements, 19032A 5. ONSWTP Wash Water EST Rehabilitation, 24041 6. ONSWTP Security Upgrade Design, 22408 7. ONSWTP Solids Handling& Disposal Facility, 23059 Special Procedures 0135 00-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 8. ONSWTP Electrical Reliability, 24016 E. Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer of planned shutdowns in writing at least 30 days in advance of any requested planned outage, unless otherwise noted. When possible, Contractor shall combine multiple tie-ins into a single shutdown to minimize impacts on City's operations and processes.The City reserves the right to grant, delay, or deny such shutdown request depending upon required treatment capacity at the time. In addition, the Contractor's overall construction schedule shall clearly highlight the anticipated scheduled shutdown dates and duration.The time of shutdown will be decided by the City as detailed in the contract documents. If the City delays or denies a required outage which impacts the critical path,the Contractor shall notify the OAR in writing and provide justification for a construction extension and any potential cost impacts. Any schedule and/or cost adjustments must be mutually agreed upon. F. Using the Maintenance of Plant Operations (MOPO)template provided in the contract documents,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner and Engineer a detailed tie-in plan for every interconnection with an existing facility, component, system,structure, panel, pipe ducts and conduits associated with the project. Every tie-in plan and its approval shall be identified as specific activities on the Contractor's overall construction schedule. G. Tie-ins and shutdowns shall not begin until all required materials are on site and ready for installation. Each tie-in and shutdown shall commence at a time approved by the Owner, and the Contractor shall proceed with the Work continuously, start to finish, until the Work is completed, and normal operation is restored.Tie-ins shall be fully coordinated with the Owner at least 72 hours before the scheduled shutdown. The time of day, schedule and duration of short term shutdowns shall be during normal City work hours as defined in Article 7 of Specification 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions. H. Any temporary work, facilities, protection of existing structures, piping, blind flanges, valves, equipment, etc.that may be required to maintain continuous and dependable plant operation shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary pumping facilities, systems, piping, valve, appurtenances, equipment, materials, and temporary utilities necessary to complete the Work without treatment bypassing. I. The Owner shall have the authority to order Work stopped,that will, in the Owner's opinion unreasonably result in interrupting the necessary plant operations. If the Contractor has shut down operations, but will not have sufficient time to complete work in the given time restrictions,the Owner or Engineer may direct the Contractor to stop tie-ins or demolition work and return the system to service. J. If the Contractor impairs plant performance or operation as a result of not complying with specified construction sequence,then the Contractor shall immediately make all repairs or replacements and do all work necessary to restore the plant operation to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. Such work shall progress continuously to completion on a 24hours per day, seven days per week basis. K. The Contractor shall provide the services of emergency repair crews on call 24 hours per day during scheduled tie-ins and scheduled shutdowns until the system is returned to full service. Special Procedures 0135 00-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 L. An unobstructed traffic route on the site access driveway and parking area shall be maintained at all times for the Owner's operations personnel and maintenance equipment. A limited amount of parking space for personal vehicles of construction personnel is available at the site.The Contractor's use of this parking is to be coordinated with the Owner's requirements. If additional parking is required,the Contractor shall be responsible for providing access to and for preparing and maintaining this additional parking area. M. Owner's personnel shall have access to all areas that remain in operation throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall locate stored material, dispose of construction debris and trash, provide temporary walkways, provide temporary lighting, and other such work as directed by the Engineer and Owner to maintain personnel access to areas in operation. Access and adequate parking areas for Owner's personnel must be maintained throughout construction. Contractor shall control overgrown grass and other vegetation in construction, staging, and parking areas. N. Electric power, lighting service and communications systems shall be maintained in uninterrupted operation in all areas that remain in operation. O. Building ventilation, if needed for the existing facilities, shall be in service for the entire construction period. Additional ventilation shall be provided by the Contractor as required to maintain facilities under construction adequately vented. P. The Contractor shall be responsible for any associated permitting with unauthorized discharges to the storm sewer that are the result of the Contractor's construction efforts. The Owner shall not be responsible for disposal of the drainage water or necessary permits related to the stormwater discharge. No uncontrolled spillage of a pipe or conduit shall be permitted. Q. The Contractor shall unload equipment and materials in the designated staging area only. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all equipment and materials within 72- hour notice in the event of a weather event or as requested by the Owner R. The Contractor shall coordinate all anchorage, bracing, and supports as shown in the structural and process mechanical drawings with the structural engineer. S. ONSWTP classifies these flocculation and sedimentation basins as Permit Required Confined Space and requires having an OSHA certified environmental technician from the Contractor's team be present at all times when work is being carried out in the flocculation and sedimentation basins. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated in Specification 0114 00, Coordination with Owner's Operations. The construction activities in sequence are proposed to accomplish the improvement work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. It should be noted that the construction sequence serves as an outline to the Contractor on how the construction of work shall be sequenced in compliance with the constraints of maintaining plant operation. However, it is the Contractor's responsibility to develop a detailed construction plan that outlines the specific details of proposed construction activities and submit to the City and Engineer for review and approval.The construction phases are based on the following constraints: 1. Only one sedimentation basin can be taken offline at a time. Special Procedures 0135 00-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 2. No basins shall be taken offline between July 1—September 30 3. Completion of shutdown requirements related to Basins for ONSWTP Raw Water Influent and Chemical Facilities Improvements Project, E17047 4. Contractor should provide a 30-day notice in advance for requesting basin shutdowns. 5. Basin shutdown shall not begin until all materials required for structural upgrades are on site. 6. At the end of each phase the basin shall be cleaned and all tools and materials shall be removed before bringing the basin back online.The next basin shutdown shall not occur until the offline basin has been filled and has been determined to be placed back in service by the City OAR. 7. In the event the City must bring a sedimentation basin back online in an emergency demand scenario,the City OAR will submit the request to the Contract in writing at least 7 days in advance.The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all tools, equipment from the basins and cleaning and restoring to satisfactory condition of the City. It is the Contractor's responsibility to develop a detailed "Maintenance of Plant Operations" (MOPO) document.This is a detailed document submitted by the Contractor to the OAR to request process shutdowns, utility connections, work in areas that may risk unanticipated outages, or flow diversions to accommodate site construction activities during a project. Such activities may include (but are not limited to) new connections to utilities or structures, mechanical modifications to process piping or equipment, demolition, bulkhead installation, and cleaning processes.The document shall detail the Contractor's proposed steps for keeping critical process units operational during construction. The MOPO template is provided in the contract documents as a guide. The Contractor shall prepare and submit MOPO for review, allowing at least two weeks for the Owner and Engineer to review, for the following conditions: 1. Shutdowns, diversions, and tie-ins to the existing facility. 2. Process start-up activities. 3. Power interruption and tie-ins; use of generators for temporary power. 4. Switch over between temporary and permanent facilities, equipment, piping, and electrical and instrumentation systems. 5. Process constraints requiring interruption of operating processes or utilities. 6. Other work when requested by the Owner or Engineer. B. Substantial and Final completion 1. After completion of all start-up and commissioning activities of all portions, the contractor shall notify the Owner and request inspection for substantial completion per conditions stipulated by the Contract. 2. After completion of punch-list items from the substantial completion per contract documents,the Contractor shall notify the Owner and request consensus on final completion. Special Procedures 0135 00-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 3. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items as stipulated in Specification Section 0114 00, Coordination with Owner's Operations. 4. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. 5. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. C. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time PCR-14 530 days Basin 1 270 days Basin 2 365 days Total 1,165 days D. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. E. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action (MOPO)for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and Special Procedures 0135 00-5 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 C. Contractor to submit first draft of MOPO 45 days prior to execution of MOPO. Contractor to submit final draft 30 days prior to begging the Work. Contractor will be required to perform walkthrough of final MOPO prior to executing MOPO unless explicitly permitted by Owner. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Critical Operation Max.Time Out of Operation Sedimentation Basins 9 months—October through June B. Submit a written plan of action (MOPO) per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. These items are critical to plant operations and meeting permit requirements. 2. Loss of operation can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The Owner will assist the Contractor in draining the existing structures. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the facilities. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 0135 00-6 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 10/2018 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-1 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-2 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-3 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-4 CNSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 2S of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 0157 00-1 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 0157 00-2 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 0157 00-3 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 0157 00-4 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Corpus Christi Bay. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi,Texas. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for Temporary Controls 0157 00-5 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 0157 00-6 ONSWTP Flocculation Upgrades and Baffling Improvements Project No.22407 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 021020 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING (S-5) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for clearing, grubbing and stripping of objectionable matter as required to complete the project, and shall include removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter as indicated on the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Tree stumps and roots shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below natural ground or 2 feet below base of subgrade, whichever is lower. Areas that underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six (6) inches of the soil. All material removed from the site under this operation shall become the Contractor's responsibility. The material shall be disposed of either at a disposal site indicated on the drawings or at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site clearing and stripping or clear right-of-way shall be measured by the acre. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for removing and disposing of objectionable matter from the site as indicated above. 021020 Rev. 1/18/01 Page 1 of 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 021040 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with Standard Specification Section 021020 "Site Clearing and Stripping". Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six (6) inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill required to bring the site to the required grades and elevations indicated on the plans. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade in layers not to exceed six (6) inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions and soft spots that develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site grading shall not be measured for pay,but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 021040 Rev. 11/1/99 Page 1 of 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES AND SEWERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipe, and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 "Trench Safety for Excavations" of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water,the Contractor,prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved, unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height; and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum, for pipes less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The 022020 Page 1 of 4 trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing,pumping,or by installation of well-points, as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storin water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Old Structures. When old masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these lines shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines, if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active sanitary sewer lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. 022020 Page 2 of 4 (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe (Initial Backfill All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable shall be granular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section, and shall be free of large hard lumps or other debris. If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench,in layers not to exceed ten(10)inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans,but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density.A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12) inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS: The backfill for that portion of trench over one(1)foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm sewer pipe) shall be selected excavated material meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall be placed in layers not more than ten(10)inches in depth(loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density,unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may only be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer.Regardless of backfill method,no lift shall exceed 10 inches and density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four(24)hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four(4) feet of backfill. If j etting is used, the top four(4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction,and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) PAVED AREAS: At utility line crossings under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm water pipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilled as shown below: From top of initial backfill (typically twelve (12)inches above top of the pipe) to three (3)feet below bottom of road base course,backfill shall be selected material meeting the requirements of 022100 "Select Material". 022020 Page 3 of 4 Asphalt Roadways The upper three(3)feet of trench below the road base course shall be backfilled to the bottom of the road base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course with cement stabilized sand as noted above,or in the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98%Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698) following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill,shall not be measured and paid for separately.It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 022020 Page 4 of 4 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer or Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer and Consultant from all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Utility Structures shall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those for manholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavation or by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Payment shall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials,personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 022022 Rev. 10/26/2000 Page 1 of 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall be non-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation, hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Liquid Limit (L.L.): < 35 Plasticity Index (P.I.) Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: as specified in the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10 inches loose depth (or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Details for Sanitary Sewers). Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 022100 Rev. 1/18/01 Page 1 of 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 022420 SILT FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing and installing silt fencing required to control sedimentation and erosion during construction of the project. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Geotextile shall meet the requirements for temporary silt fence per AASHTO M288. B. Fence Reinforcement Materials: Silt fence reinforcement shall be one of the following systems. Type 1: Self-Supported Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8- 1/2 feet apart, and geotextile without net reinforcement. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 42 inches long, embedded at least one (1) foot into the ground, and constructed of either wood or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inches in cross section and essentially straight. Hardwood posts shall be a minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 inches in cross section. Fabric attachment may be by staples or locking plastic ties at least every 6 inches, or by sewn vertical pockets. Steel posts shall be T or L shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. Attachment shall be by pockets or by plastic ties if the posts have suitable projections. Type 2: Net-Reinforced Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8-1/2 feet apart, and geotextile with an attached reinforcing net. Fence posts shall meet the requirements of Self-Supported Fence. Net reinforcement shall be galvanized welded wire mesh of at least 12.5-gauge wire with maximurn opening size of 4 x 2 inches. The fabric shall be attached to the top of the net by crimping or cord at least every 2 feet, or as otherwise specified. Type 3: Triangular Filter Dike - This system consists of a rigid wire mesh, at least 6- gauge, formed into an equilateral triangle cross-sectional shape with sides measuring 18 inches, wrapped with geotextile silt fence fabric. The fabric shall be continuously wrapped around the dike, with a shirt extending at least 12 inches from its upslope corner. C. Packaging Requirements: Prior to installation, the fabric shall be protected from damage due to ultraviolet light and moisture by either wrappers or inside storage. 022420 Rev. 11/1/99 Page 1 of 2 D. Certification and Identification: Each lot or shipment shall be accompanied by a certification of conformance to this specification. The shipment must be identified by a ticket or by labels securely affixed to the fabric rolls. This ticket or label must list the following information: a. Name of manufacturer or supplier b. Brand name and style C. Manufacturer's lot number or control number d. Roll size (length and width) e. Chemical composition 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, silt fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, placing, maintaining and removing the silt fence. 022420 Rev. 11/1/99 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 025205 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the removal and replacing of all types of pavements and surfacing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions used along with this specification shall conform to the respective following specifications: City Standard Specifications Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" Section 022100 "Select Material" Section 025223 "Crushed Limestone Flexible Base" Section 025424 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" Section 025610 "Concrete Curb and Gutter" Section 025612 "Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways" Section 025620 "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement" Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Class "A" Concrete Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. METHOD OF CUTTING The outline of the trench shall be marked upon the surface of the pavement to be cut,and all cutsinto the pavement shall be saw-cut as nearly vertical as it is possible to make them. All unwanted materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor and shall not be used as backfill material. 4. BACKFILL OF TRENCH Excavation and backfilling of trench shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 5. REPLACING STREET AND OTHER PAVEMENT 025205 Rev. 1/18/01 Page 1 of 3 All pavements, driveways, sidewalks, and curbs and gutters which are cut shall be replaced in a workmanlike manner,with like or better materials or per pavement repair details to be provided on the drawings. Pavement cuts in a street for any utility requires a permit from the Director of Development Services in accordance with City Ordinance 030040, Article III Cuts and Excavations (12-17-2013). The installation of a utility that crosses the ROW at a perpendicular or near perpendicular angle and has an OD of 6" or less will not be permitted to be installed by cutting the road section. Street excavation/cut for a utility in an asphalt roadway shall include a full lane overlay or pavement repair for parallel cuts, or a 12' wide pavement repair for perpendicular cuts. Street excavation/cut for a utility in a concrete roadway shall include full panel replacement. The drawings and/or permit application should include a site specific pavement cut and restoration plan that indicates the general nature of the pavement and roadway (for examples, concrete arterial, asphalt residential) to be cut and restored, the existing pavement section (if known), the location and approximate area of the excavation/pavement repair,including the approximate length and width of the pavement repair in relation to the roadway travel lane(s). 6. REPLACING DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT On all concrete driveway pavements, the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class "A" concrete slab with a minimum thickness of six(6)inches.The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old pavement.Reinforcement shall be#4 bars at 12 inches each way with additional diagonal bars as indicated on the drawings. Any other type shall be replaced with like or better replacement. Replacement shall, in general,be to original joint or score mark. 7. REPLACING SIDEWALKS On all sidewalk pavements, the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class "A" concrete slab four(4)inches thick. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old sidewalk. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score marks. Reinforcement shall be 4" x 4" -W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric located at mid-depth in the slab. 8. REPLACING CURB AND GUTTER On all curb and gutter, the replacement shall consist of a section conforming in all details to the original section or to City of Corpus Christi Standard curb and gutter section, if required by the Engineer. Cuts through the curb shall be replaced with Class"A"concrete.Preserve the original steel reinforcing and reinforce all new curbs with three #4 bars. Adjust grades for positive drainage. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score mark.For jointed concrete roadways,the joints in curb or in curb and gutter should match the concrete roadway joints. 025205 Rev. 1/18/01 Page 2 of 3 9. REPAIRING STREET SHOULDERS AND UNIMPROVED STREETS On streets or roads without curb and gutter where a shoulder is disturbed, it shall be restored to like or better condition. The shoulder surface shall be rolled to an acceptably stable condition. The requirements of City Ordinance 030040 as stated above apply also to unimproved streets unless a specific variance is granted by the Director of Development Services. 10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,pavement repair shall be measured by the square yard of the type of repair specified;curb and gutter replacement shall be measured by the linear foot; and sidewalk and driveway replacement shall each be measured by the square foot. Payment will be made at the unit price bid for the completed work and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials,equipment,tools,and incidentals required to complete the work.No separate measurement or payment will be made for subgrade compaction, sand leveling course,geogrid,ordinary backfill, cement-stabilized sand backfill, flexible base, prime coat, hot-mix asphaltic concrete, etc. 025205 Rev. 1/18/01 Page 3 of 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 025223 CRUSHED LIMESTONE FLEXIBLE BASE 1. DESCRIPTION This Specification shall govern all work for furnishing and placing Crushed Limestone Flexible Base required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL Crushed Limestone Flexible Base shall consist of crushed limestone produced from oversize quarried aggregate, sized by crushing and produced from a naturally occurring single source, meeting the requirements for Type `A' material as specified in Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". Crushed gravel or uncrushed gravel shall not be acceptable. No blending of sources and/or additive materials will be allowed. The material shall be free of vegetation and shall be approved by the Engineer. All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversize shall be crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform product will be produced which meets all of the physical requirements for Grade 1-2 as specified in TxDOT Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". 3. TESTING The City will engage a laboratory and pay for one test each gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, modified proctor, moisture-density relation, CBR, and necessary field densities. The Engineer may call for additional tests at any time. The cost of all retests, in case of failure to meet specifications, will be deducted from the Contractor's payment. The City will pay for proctor and soil constants and abrasion tests at the rate described in the materials testing schedule. If material changes, the Contractor shall pay the cost of additional tests required by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing and/or lime admix for small amounts for unimportant uses. 025223 Page 1 of 2 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placement of flexible base, the surface of the previous underlying course shall be finished true to line and grade as established, and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings. Grade tolerance shall be generally 1/2 inch, and highs and lows must approximately balance. If called for in the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents, geogrid, as specified in City Standard Specification Section 022040 "Street Excavation", shall be placed as indicated. Flexible base shall be delivered and spread the same day if possible (no later than the next day). Base shall be mixed as required to produce a uniform mixture with water. Base shall be placed in uniform lifts not to exceed 10 inch loose lifts or 8 inch compacted lifts. Moisture and density requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings, typical minimum 98% Modified Proctor 025223 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 (ASTM D1557) under flexible pavements or typical minimum 98% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) under concrete pavement and to within + 2% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent moisture or density tests is outside of the specified limits, and the failed test is within+1% deviation from specified moisture or density requirements. The surface of the compacted base, after meeting moisture and density requirements, shall be primed in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". On completion of compaction and priming, the surface shall be smooth and conform to lines, grades, and sections shown on the drawings. Areas with any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in lengths of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, and recompacting by repriming and rolling. Moisture and density shall be maintained until the paving is complete. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the base, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted, refinished, and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, crushed limestone flexible base shall be measured by the square yard complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, royalty, hauling, placing, compacting, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. Prime shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. Geogrid shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. 025223 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 025612 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of sidewalks and driveways, with or without reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade,in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete".Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000"Concrete Structures".Cap seal shall be "Greenstreak" or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and hand tamped and sprinkled with water. Subgrade under concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. The subgrade shall be within 0-3% of optimum moisture content at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight,free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the drawings.Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Driveways shall incorporate the gutter in a unified concrete placement as shown in the City Standard Detail for driveways. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on drawings. Unless otherwise provided by the drawings,no section shall be of a length less than 8 feet, and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. The different sections shall be separated by a premolded insert or board j oint of the thickness shown on the drawings,placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks.Where 025612 Rev. 12/1/00 Page 1 of 2 the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion joint material shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion joint material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on drawings. 5-foot wide sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 5 feet in length, by the use of approved jointing tools.For other widths of sidewalk,joints to be spaced longitudinally to match the transverse width. When completed,the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2,white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be measured by the square foot of surface area of completed sidewalks, driveways, or sidewalks and driveways, as indicated on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing and compacting the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including concrete,reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025612 Rev. 12/1/00 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer,the specific surface area of Type I and 11 cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram(Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement, expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural (beam) or compressive (cylinder) tests as required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement of concrete pavement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type of cement will be peiinitted in any one project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 025620 Page 1 of 6 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete pavements shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deforined bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 025620 Page 2 of 6 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cement and aggregate shall be stored and handled in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 5. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix confoims to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. 025620 Page 3 of 6 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction Method Desired Slump Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement(slipformed) 1.5 inches 1 inch 3 inches Concrete Pavement(formed) 4 inches 2.5 inches 6.5 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water-cement ratio, desired slump, minimum slump, maximum slump, and the strength requirements of the class of concrete for concrete pavement shall conform to the requirements of Table I and Table 2 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength (7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement Class Minimum Minimum Maximum of Flexural(Beam) Compressive Water-Cement Coarse Concrete Strength Strength Ratio Aggregate P* 450 psi(7 days) 3200 psi(7 days) 5.6 gal./sack No.2(P/z") 570 psi(28 days) 4000 psi(28 days) 0.50 * 5% entrained air 025620 Page 4 of 6 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plants shall be as specified in Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s) in-place, will be measured by the square yard or square foot for the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steel dowels as shown on the plans; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants, and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025620 Page 5 of 6 Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 025620 Page 6 of 6 SECTION 028040 SODDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and placing sod as required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Fertilizer: All fertilizer used shall be delivered in bags or containers with clearly marked analysis. A granulated fertilizer shall be used with an analysis of 10-20-10. These figures represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash nutrients, respectively, as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. The rate of application shall be not less than 350 pounds per acre (7.23 lb. per 100 SY). In the event that it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer with a different analysis, it shall be granulated fertilizer with a lower concentration. The total nutrients applied per unit area shall not be less that the specified amount of each nutrient. Sod: Sod shall consist of live Bermuda grass with thickly matted roots throughout the soil and with a minimum thickness of 3 inches or 0.25 foot, or live St. Augustine with thickly matted roots throughout the soil with a minimum thickness of 1 inch or 0.08 foot. The Contractor shall not use sod where grass is thinned out. Grass shall be mowed and raked to remove all weeds and long stems prior to extraction at the source. Sod and soil shall be kept moist at all times during the sodding process. Care must be taken at all times to retain native soil on the root system. Water: Water shall be free from oils, acids, alkalis, and salts that may inhibit grass growth. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, water shall be provided by the City and shall be transported and applied by the Contractor. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Spot Sodding; Prior to planting, the area to be sodded shall be graded and shaped. Squares of sod with a minimum width of 3 inches shall be planted in rows on 15-inch centers in both directions. Sod shall be placed so that it is firmly against the bottom of the hole, and the top of the sod shall not be more than 1/2 inch below finished grade. Soil shall be firmly packed against all sides of the sod. Soil shall not be allowed to cover the sod except for soil incidental to raking, provided that the quantity of soil is not enough to hinder the growth. Areas to be spot sodded shall be indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer in field. After sod has been planted, the area shall be fertilized and watered. 028040 Page 1 of 2 Block Sodding: Prior to planting, the area to be sodded shall be graded and shaped. Sod blocks shall be uniformly placed over the prepared area. The sodded area shall then be fertilized and watered. After the area is sufficiently dry, the area shall be rolled or tamped to form a thoroughly compacted mat. Any voids in the mats shall be filled with additional sod and tamped. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, slopes may cause displacement, areas to be block sodded shall be indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field. Mulch Sodding: The sod source shall be disked in two directions cutting the sod thoroughly to a depth of not less than 4 inches or more than 10 inches, being careful to avoid having soil containing no grass roots. The disked sod may be windrowed or otherwise handled in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The material shall be rejected if not kept in a moist condition. Prior to placing mulch sod, the cut slopes shall be scarified by plowing furrows 4 inches to 6 inches deep along horizontal slope lines at 2-foot vertical intervals. Excavated material from the furrows shall not protrude more than 3 inches above the original surface of the cut. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the area. The sod shall then be dumped upon the prepared area and spread uniformly to the required approximate thickness shown on the plans. Any section not true to lines and cross section shall be remedied by the addition of sod material. After the sod material has been spread and shaped, it shall be compacted with a corrugated roller of the "Cultipacker" type. All rolling of slope areas shall be on the contour. The area to be mulch sodded shall be indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in the field. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, spot sodding and block sodding shall be measured by the square yard taken in a horizontal plane. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, excavation, transporting, storing and placing of sod, and application of fertilizer and water. 028040 Page 2 of 2 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 00 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DIVISION XXVI This section applies to all sections of Electrical Division 26, of this project except as specified otherwise in each individual section. 1.2 General Description A. The Contractor shall submit his bid on the basis of executing all work as hereinafter specified, as indicated on the drawings, or as necessary to provide a complete and usable system. B. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. 1.3 Approval of Equipment and Materials Manufacturer's data and descriptive literature for each item listed under Submittal Data in all sections of Division 26 shall be submitted to the engineer of record, or his designated representative, for approval as soon as practical, but not later than 30 days after the award of the contract. A. Wherever a brand name or names are mentioned in the specifications and/or indicated on the drawings, they shall be understood to be followed by the words "or approved equal" unless otherwise noted. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the costs of all changes in his work and the work of other trades made necessary by the use of products and systems other than those of the first named basic manufacturers and systems specified in the Contract Documents. This cost shall include but not necessarily limited an hourly rate of$165.00 to the engineer for review of all changes as the result of manufacture substitutions. 1.4 Hazardous Areas There are no areas deemed to be hazardous from an NFPA electrical equipment safety prospective. 1.5 Submittals Submit shop drawings; manufacturers'data; certificates for equipment, materials, and finish; and pertinent details for each system where specified in each individual section, and obtain approval from the Engineer of Record before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. A. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. B. Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable industry and technical society publication references, and other information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish. C. Photographs of existing installations and data submitted in lieu of catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval. 1.6 Shop Drawings Shop drawings (when required) shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size with a minimum scale of 1/8-inch per foot, unless specified otherwise. A. Drawings shall include floor plans, sectional views, wiring diagrams, and installation details of equipment. B. Drawings of all fabrication details shall include dimensions, methods of attachment to existing structures or poles, and indicate the actual mounting location number as noted on the plan drawing contract documents. Page 1 of 4 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. D. If equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show acceptable equipment and resubmitted. 1.7 Manufacturer's Data Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cut sheets. 1.8 Standards Compliance All electrical equipment and material shall be listed, labeled and installed per a recognized electrical testing laboratory's standards. When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be submitted for approval. A. If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence unless otherwise specified in the individual sections. B. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, which is competent to perform an acceptable test. C. For materials and equipment whose compliance with organizational standards or specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, a certificate of compliance from the manufacturer shall be submitted for approval. D. This certificate shall identify the manufacturer, the product, and the referenced standard and shall simply state that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to all requirements of the project specifications and the referenced standards listed. 1.9 Delivery, Storage and Protection A. Protect all materials and finished work at all times to prevent damage or breakage either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals or mechanical injury. B. Equipment and materials shall be handled, stored, and protected to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged or defective items shall be replaced. 1.10 Guarantee and Service This Contractor shall include a 100% guarantee against faulty materials, equipment, superintendence or labor and unauthorized substitutes for a period of 12 months (or for the terms of the extended maintenance and warranty period) from the date of final acceptance. Replacement of lamps is excluded. 1.11 Standard Codes, Fees and Permits The entire installation shall conform to all local, state, and federal ordinances, codes, and regulations applying to the work in this contract. Comply with the latest editions of applicable codes. A. In the event that there is conflict between the plans and specifications and the local code requirements of governing agencies, the code requirements shall govern. However, if the contract requirements are in excess of the code requirements, the contract provisions shall govern. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all fees necessary in connection with his work. Page 2 of 4 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. At the completion of all work, the Contractor shall deliver to the owner, or his designated representative, a certificate of inspection from the inspection department having jurisdiction over the work. D. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all materials, workmanship, and tests shall be in conformance with the latest approved standard rules, regulations, and specifications of the following authorities: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). National Electrical Code (NEC). National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Insulated Power Cable Engineer's Association (IPCEA). Underwriters Laboratory(U.L.) City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1.12 Drawings Due to the scale of the drawings, it is impossible to show all fittings, offsets, and accessories. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions at all sites affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish all fittings and accessories as may be required to meet the conditions encountered. 1.13 Contractor's Responsibility A. The Contractor shall visit the proposed project site to inspect and familiarize himself with all conditions, obstructions and space limitations prior to bidding and before beginning construction. B. Refer to the civil, structural, and electrical drawings for construction details, and coordinate work with that of other trades so as to avoid unnecessary delays or damage to any part of the installation. If any omissions or discrepancies are found between the drawings and specifications or regulations, advise the owner, or his designated representative, prior to Bid Due Date. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Materials and Equipment Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products which are of similar material, design, and workmanship. A. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. B. The two-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. 2.2 Experience Required Two years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Page 3 of 4 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction A. Alternative Service Record - Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6,000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown. 2.3 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. A. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. B. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 2.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Cutting, Patching and Repairing A. The Contractor shall pay for injury or damage to the work of another Contractor which may be done by him or his employees. 3.2 Coordination A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the field coordination of his work with that of other trades and the ON. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. In the event of conflicts due to lack of field coordination, the Engineer shall be the sole arbitrator in resolving the conflict. 3.3 Manufacturer's Recommendations Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished prior to installation. A. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. B. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. 3.4 Cleaning A. Clean up and remove all debris from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, remove from the project site all unused materials and equipment. Remove all visible labels, dirt, misplaced paint, grease and stains from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approvals shall be left in place. 3.5 Testing A. See Section 3.18 in Specification 27-13-23. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V. 1.3 Action Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 Informational Submittals A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 Quality Assurance The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. (2) Alpha Wire. (3) Belden Inc. (4) Encore Wire Corporation. (5) General Cable Technologies Corporation. (6) Southwire Incorporated (7) Okonite Company(Preferred). B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN, Type THWN, Type XHHW or as indicated on drawings. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Tray cable, Type TC with ground wire. Page 1 of 3 LOW—VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES—26 0519-- December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) AFC Cable Systems, Inu. (2) Gardner Bender. (3) Hubbell Power Systems. Inc. (4) Ideal Industries, Inc. (5) Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. (6) NSi Industries LLC (7) O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. (8) 3M; Electrical Markets Division. (9) Tyco ElectronicF /Raychem (Preferred) B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 System Description A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Conductor Material Applications A. Feeders: Stranded copper B. Branch Circuits: Stranded copper. 3.2 Conductor Insulation and Multiconductor Cable Applications and Wiring Methods A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway Tray cable. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC. F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC. I. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. J. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. K. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. L. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. M. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. N. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." O. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. Page 2 of 3 LOW—VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES—26 0519-- December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 3.3 Connections A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm)of slack. 3.4 Identification A. General Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.5 Sleeve and Sleeve-Seal Installation for Electrical Penetrations A. General Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 Field Quality Control A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Contractor will perform a continuity test and megger test for each cable. 3. Perform all testing in presence of owner or owner's representative. D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 4. Procedures used. 5. Results that comply with requirements. 6. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 260519 Page 3 of 3 LOW—VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES—26 0519-- THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes: Grounding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Overhead-line grounding. 2. Underground distribution grounding. 3. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 1.3 Action Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 Informational Submittals A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control"Article, including the following: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 Closeout Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Submit final test reports: 1. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2. Include recommended testing intervals. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. Page 1 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Conductors A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)wide and thick. C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: 1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use pressure-treated fir, cypress, or cedar. D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 50 in cross section, with holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.2 Connectors A. General Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2.3 Grounding Electrodes A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Applications A. Conductors: All conductors shall be stranded conductors unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. Page 2 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 Grounding Underground Distribution System Components A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm)from the foundation. 3.3 Equipment Grounding A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. Page 3 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. G. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J- STD-607-A. 1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm) grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. H. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. 3.4 Installation A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system Page 4 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each indicated item, extending around the perimeter of buildings or areas as indicated. Page 5 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and 2/0 for taps to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm)from building's foundation. 3.5 Labeling A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." 3.6 Field Quality Control A. All Perform tests and inspections. 1. Coordinate with owner or owner representative to witness following test. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified or a maximum of 5 ohms, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. Page 6 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 Page 7 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. This Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 Performance Requirements A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of 2.5 times the applied force. 1.5 Action Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports. 1.6 Informational Submittals A. Welding certificates. Page 1 of 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 29 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1.7 Quality Assurance A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 Coordination A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. For this project, all steel supports shall be hot double dipped galvanized or aluminum materials. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. C. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. (Preferred) g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber- resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc., a division of Cooper Industries (Preferred) C. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. Page 2 of 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 29 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Hilti Inc (Preferred) C. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. d. MKT Fastening LLC. e. Simpson Strom-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 316 stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. C. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Hilti Inc (Preferred) e. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. f. MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. Page 3 of 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 29 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 Fabricated Metal Equipment Support Assemblies A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Application A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single- bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm)and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 Support Installation A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) Page 4 of 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 29 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm)thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27)complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 Installation of Fabricated Metal Supports A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications"for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. 3.4 Concrete Bases A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements as per drawings and details. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 Page 5 of 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 29 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. RNC: Rigid Non Metalic conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality-control reports. Page 1 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Metal Conduits, Tubing, and Fittings A. WWI WidCLUIerb: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube &Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13. Approved Equal B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 51413. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. Page 2 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM-26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2.2 Nonmetallic Conduits, Tubing, and Fittings A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Carlon 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson &Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO: a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651 B. H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Page 3 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric—(Preferred). 5. Approved equal. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged- and-gasketed as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson &Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 5. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. Page 4 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.5 Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets A. IV161 Ui��LU l;i 6: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company— (Preferred). 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Divisior. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures: a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold /Legrand. 18. Approved equal. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. Page 5 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with form 7 gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg)shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J. Gangable boxes are prohibited. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Raceway Application A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: PVC Coated RGS or Aluminum. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: PVC Coated RGS or Aluminum. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4X as indicated. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm)trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer longer than 72". D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. Page 6 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 Installation A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Engineer for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to PVC coated RGS or Rigid Aluminum as per conditions before rising above floor. Page 7 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm)trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm)trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm)trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: Page 8 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. Install in each run of aboveground RGS that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. BB. Install drains at low points in conduit runs. 3.3 Installation of Underground Conduit A. Duct Bank— Install duct bank per drawing and details. B. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." Page 9 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct- buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 Installation of Underground Handholes and Boxes A. General Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 Sleeve and Sleeve-Seal Installation for Electrical Penetrations A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 Protection A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 Page 10 of 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Single-rail cable trays. 3. Trough cable trays. 4. Fiberglass cable trays. 1.3 Action Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. 1.4 Informational Submittals A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:. 1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure. B. Field quality-control reports. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Performance Requirements A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 General Requirements for Cable Trays A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. Page 1 of 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 36 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. 2. All material shall be manufacture and not field fabricated. B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters: 1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. 2.3 Ladder Cable Trays A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc (Preferred) Series 47 Alum. 6" Nemave 2. Or equal. 3. Approved equal. B. Description: 1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails. 2. Rung Spacing: 12 inches (300 mm)o.c. 3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches (225 mm)at center of tray's width. 4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch (22-mm) width with radius edges. 5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a200-lb (90-kg) concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches (100 mm). 8. Straight Section Lengths: 20 feet (6 m) except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. 9. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 12 inches (300 mm). 11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 20C. 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Hardware and Fasteners: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594 stainless steel, Type 316. 14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. 15. Minimum load rating of 100 lb/ft. 2.4 Materials and Finishes A. Aluminum: 1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1 M for fabricated parts. Page 2 of 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-26 05 36 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. 3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. 2.5 Cable Tray Accessories A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 2.6 Warning Signs A. Shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 2.7 Source Quality Control A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Cable Tray Installation A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment. D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square-neck carriage bolts and locknuts. F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure. G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs. I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application. J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports. M. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. Page 3 of 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 36 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings. P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings. Q. Seal penetrations through exterior walls with weatherproof caulking. R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through cable tray penetrations of exterior walls. S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables. T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V. U. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2. V. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps. W. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. 3.2 Cable Tray Grounding A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. Cable trays with single-conductor power conductors shall be bonded together with a grounding conductor run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the tray at 72-inch (1800-mm) intervals. The grounding conductor shall be sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors," and Article 392, "Cable Trays." D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding-bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer. E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.3 Cable Installation A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm). D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm). E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches (900 mm) where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches (1800 mm) elsewhere. F. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays. 3.4 Connections A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the Page 4 of 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 36 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction connections are completed. B. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.5 Field Quality Control A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 Protection A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. 1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260536 Page 5 of 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 36 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 Action Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Comply with ANSI Al3.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 Coordination The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. Page 1 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Power and Control Raceway Identification Materials A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-)wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm)wide. Stop stripes at legends. H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.2 Armored and Metal-Clad Cable Identification Materials A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. Page 2 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. F. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. 2.3 Power and Control Cable Identification Materials A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-)thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.4 Conductor Identification Materials A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mu` thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm)wide. B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-)thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Page 3 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag. 2.5 Floor Marking Tape A. 2-inch- (50-mm-)wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.6 Underground-Line Warning Tape A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. 2.7 Warning Labels and Signs A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396- inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). Page 4 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.8 Instruction Signs A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm)and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. 2.9 Equipment Identification Labels A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2.10 Cables Ties A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black. Page 5 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black. 2.11 Miscellaneous Identification Products A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot(7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. Page 6 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 3.2 Identification Schedule A. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 30-foot(10-m) maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service and feeder conductors. a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: (1) Phase A: Black. (2) Phase B: Red. (3) Phase C: Blue. C. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: (1) Phase A: Brown. (2) Phase B: Orange. (3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Colors for 600-V and above Circuits: (1) Phase A: Brown. (2) Phase B: Orange. (3) Phase C: Yellow. e. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive- backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation. H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Page 7 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer or load shedding. O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2- inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: Page 8 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. C. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. I. Enclosed controllers. M. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. P. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Enclosed switches or breakers. S. Enclosed starters. t. Cable tray. U. Control devices and protective relays. END OF SECTION Page 9 of 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers. 1.3 Action Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 Informational Submittals A. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 1. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Source quality-control test reports. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 Close Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Page 1 of 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS—26 22 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL)as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.8 Coordination A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries 2. to on Liectricai inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 5. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 6. Square D: Schneider Electric. 7. Approved Equal 2.2 General Transformer Requirements A. Description: Factory-assembled and-tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. Page 2 of 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS—26 22 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.3 Distribution Transformers A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Cores: One leg per phase. C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray. E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None. F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity. G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor. 1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor. 2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate. K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness: a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. C. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz. L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. M. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core. N. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91. O. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows: Page 3 of 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS—26 22 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. 9 kVA and Less: 40 2. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 3. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 4. 151 to 300 kVA: 55 5. 301 to 500 kVA: 60 END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS—26 22 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 General 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. G. Temporary Thrust Bloeks, 1. Submit design to Owner. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. Page 1 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard)to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. Products 1.10 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: Page 2 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3000 feet(2000 m). B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 3000 feet(2000 m). C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.12 Warranty A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 Products 2.1 General Requirements for Panelboards A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X316 stainless steel. C. Corrosive Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316 stainless steel. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. Page 3 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder or metal frame with transparent protective cover. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra- capacity neutral bus. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 Distribution Panelboards Page 4 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company: GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric (Preferred) B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: As indicated E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.3 Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D: a brand of Schneider Electric (Preferred) B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.4 Disconnecting and Overcurrent Protective Devices A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D product indicated on drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Uni . 2. General Electric Company: GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. Approved Equal. C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Page 5 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long-and short-time pickup levels. C. Long-and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and 12t response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground- fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. 2.5 Accessory Components and Features A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. PART 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1 and as shown on drawings. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. Page 6 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Identification A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Coordinate with owner to perform inspection and testing. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Coordinate with owner or owner representative to witness inspection of components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Assist owner's agent in performing the following infrared scan tests and inspections: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: (1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Page 7 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 Adjusting A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION 262416 Page 8 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 General 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components: 1. Incoming main lugs and OCPDs. 2. Full-voltage magnetic controllers. 3. Multispeed controllers. 4. VFCs. 5. Instrumentation. 6. Auxiliary devices. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance). C. CPT: Control power transformer. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupting. F. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. G. LAN: Local area network. H. LED: Light-emitting diode. I. MCC: Motor-control center. J. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. K. MCP: Motor-circuit protector. L. NC: Normally closed. M. NO: Normally open. N. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. O. PCC: Point of common coupling. P. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. Q. PT: Potential transformer. R. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. S. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. T. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier. Page 1 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction U. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. V. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand. W. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. X. VFC: Variable-frequency controller. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. Include shipping and operating weights, features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval and production drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. C. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure and each unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices. g. Specified optional features and accessories. 2. Schematic Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. 3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. B. Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. D. Product Certificates: For each MCC, from manufacturer. E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 Closeout Submittals Page 2 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced- voltage, solid-state controllers. 5. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Delivery, storage, and Handling A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths. B. Handle MCCs according to the following: 1. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts." 2. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers." C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per vertical section. Page 3 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1.10 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C). 3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent(noncondensing). 4. Altitude: 3300 feet(1000 m) if MCC includes solid-state devices. B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service or Distribution Systems: Do not interrupt electrical service to, or distribution systems within, a facility occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCCs, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and other items. 1.11 Coordination A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. B. Coordinate features of MCCs, installed units, and accessory devices with remote pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each MCC, each controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuits, motors, required control sequences, and duty cycle of motors and loads. 1.12 Warranty A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment or devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. MCCs shall be Allen-Bradley@ CENTERLINEO 2100 2.2 Ratings A. The MCC shall be rated for the system voltage as indicated on the contract drawings. B. The MCC horizontal and vertical power bus bracing shall be rated to meet or exceed the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings, but shall not be less than 65,000 A rms symmetrical. Page 4 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. All MCC units shall have a full rated short-circuit rating that meets or exceeds the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings. D. All circuit breakers used in the motor control center shall have full-rated short-circuit interrupting ratings based on the applied MCC voltage. E. The MCC shall provide front Accessibility as defined by IEEE C37.20.9- F. 2007 `IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-enclosed Switchgear Rated up to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults'. 2.3 Enclosure A. The MCC enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1 with gasket around perimeter of doors B. Each section shall be equipped with two full metal side sheets to isolate each vertical section and to help reduce the likelihood of fault propagation between sections. C. All interior and exterior surfaces shall be painted ANSI 49 medium light gray. The vertical wireways and unit back plates shall be painted high visibility gloss white. All unpainted parts shall be plated for corrosion resistance. D. Removable closing plates on each end of the MCC shall cover all horizontal bus and horizontal wireway openings. E. Insulating sheets shall be provided on the inside of end closing plates for horizontal bus openings to help prevent burn-through of the end closing plate in the event that an internal arcing fault occurs in the horizontal bus compartment. 2.4 Structure A. The MCC shall be of dead front construction and shall consist of one or more vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid, free-standing assembly. The systems shall be designed to allow for the addition of future sections at either end and to permit the interchanging of units. B. Vertical sections shall be rigid, free-standing structures. 1. Vertical sections shall have internal mounting angles running continuously within the shipping block. 2. An external mounting channel that is required to maintain structure integrity is not acceptable. 3. Vertical sections shall be 90 in. high, 20in. deep and 20 in. Wide, except where larger dimensions are required. 4. 71 in. high, reduced height sections shall be provided, if specified on the contract drawings. 5. Vertical sections shall be provided with a removable steel lifting angle on all shipping blocks. The angle shall run the length of the shipping block. 6. Lifting eyes are not acceptable. 7. Each standard section shall be capable of being subdivided into 12 usable, unit spaces. 8. Two unit spaces shall constitute one space factor and shall be 13 in. in height. 9. One unit space shall constitute one-half space factor and shall be 6.5 in. in height. C. Horizontal Wireways 1. Horizontal wireways shall be located at the top and bottom of the MCC. Page 5 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Horizontal wireways shall be 6 in. in height and extend the full depth of the vertical section to allow maximum flexibility in locating conduit for MCC feeds and loads. a. Pull-boxes to extend the height of the top horizontal wireway by 12 in. shall be provided, if specified on the contract drawings. 3. Horizontal wireways shall be continuous across the length of the MCC, except where access needs to be denied due to electrical isolation requirements. 4. The horizontal wireways shall be isolated from the power bus. 5. The horizontal wireways shall have removable covers held in place by captive screws. D. Provide a full height vertical wireway, independent of the plug-in units, in each standard vertical section. 1. The vertical wireway shall be isolated from the vertical and horizontal buses. 2. The vertical wireway shall be covered with a hinged and secured door. 3. Wireway tie bars shall be provided. 4. Isolation between the wireway and units shall be provided. 5. Vertical wireway doors shall be provided with arc resistant latches to help keep the door latched in the event that an internal arcing fault occurs. 2.5 Bus Bars A. Horizontal Power Bus 1. The horizontal bus shall be rated as shown on the drawings. 2. The horizontal bus material shall be copper with tin plating. 3. The horizontal bus shall be supported, braced and isolated from the vertical bus with a high strength, non-conductive, non-tracking, glass polyester material. 4. For standard sections the horizontal bus shall be continuous within each shipping block and shall be braced within each section 5. Horizontal bus splices shall have at least two bolts on each side. B. Vertical Bus 1. The vertical power bus shall have an effective rating of 600 A. If a center horizontal bus construction is utilized, then the rating shall be 300 A above and below the horizontal bus for an effective rating of 600 A. If a top or bottom mounted horizontal bus is utilized, then the full bus must be rated for 600 A. 2. The vertical bus material shall be copper with tin plating. 3. The vertical bus shall attach to the horizontal bus with at least two bolts. 4. The vertical bus shall be continuously braced by a high strength, non-conductive, non- tracking, glass-filled polyester material and isolated from the unit spaces by a non- conductive, polycarbonate molded cover. 5. The vertical bus shall be isolated from the horizontal power bus except where necessary to connect the vertical power bus to the horizontal power bus. 6. Automatic shutters shall cover plug-in stab openings when units are removed. C. Ground Bus 1. Provide a ground bus system consisting of a horizontal ground bus connected to vertical ground buses mounted in each section. 2. Provide an tin-plated copper (0.25 x 1 in. or 0.25 x 2 in.) horizontal ground bus mounted in the bottom of the MCC unless otherwise specified in the drawings. Page 6 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 3. Provide a pressure-type mechanical lug mounted on the ground bus in the incoming line section. 4. Provide a unit ground stab on all unit inserts. The ground stab shall establish unit insert grounding to the vertical ground bus before the plug-in power stabs engage the power bus. The grounding shall be maintained until after the plug-in power stabs are disengaged. 2.6 Ethernet/IP Communication A. The MCC shall have Ethernet wiring incorporated into its design. 1. The MCC shall have Ethernet cabling incorporated throughout the vertical section. 2. Each motor starter, AC drive and soft starter unit in the MCC shall be supplied with a means to communicate via EtherNet/IP network. B. Ethernet Cabling 1. Ethernet Cable Ratings a. The Ethernet cable shall be 600V UL PLTC rated. b. The use of a 300V rated cable is not acceptable 2. Layout a. Cable shall connect each section to one another in the top or bottom wireways. b. Ethernet cable through the MCC section shall be routed from the top or bottom wireways. To prevent accidental mechanical damage during MCC installation, the cable shall be located behind barriers to isolate the cable from the unit space and wireways. C. Eight Ethernet ports shall be provided in the rear of each vertical wireway of standard sections to simplify installation, relocation, and addition of plug-in units. d. The EtherNet/IP device within each unit shall be factory connected to an Ethernet port in the vertical wireway by using a 600V-rated Ethernet cable. 3. Power Supplies a. The power supply shall provide 24V DC for the devices that require it. b. The MCC manufacturer shall check the user's design to ensure that adequate power supplies have been specified to conform with network requirements. C. Power supply output shall be rated 8 A, 24V DC. d. The power supply shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1606-XLSDNET8 or approved equal. e. The power supply unit shall be provided with a buffer module to provide a minimum of 500 ms ride-through at full load. f. The buffer module shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1606-XLBUFFER or approved equal. C. EtherNet/IP Interface for Motor Starter Units 1. Motor starter units shall have an electronic overload relay that incorporates the following features a. Built-in EtherNet/IP communication b. LEDs for status indication C. Test/Reset button d. Selectable trip of NEMA Class 5 to 30. Unless indicated, the trip class shall be set for NEMA Class 20 operation e. Four inputs and two outputs. Refer to the contract drawings for connection Page 7 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction requirements f. Protective functions (1) Functions shall provide a programmable trip level, warning level, time delay, and inhibit window. (2) Protective functions shall include Thermal overload, Phase loss, Stall, Jam, Underload, Current imbalance, Remote trip, and PTC thermistor input. (3) Ground fault protection [is] [is not] required. i. If ground fault protection is required, the protection range shall be 1 A to 5 A for NEMA Size 3 and smaller starters, and 20 mA to 5 A for NEMA Size 4 and larger starters. g. Current monitoring functions shall include phase current, average current, full load current, current imbalance percent, percent thermal capacity utilized, and ground fault current(if required). h. Voltage, energy, and frequency measuring capabilities shall be included. i. Diagnostic information shall include device status, warning status, time to reset, trip status, time to overload trip, and history of last five trips. j. Preventative maintenance information shall include Allowable starts per hour, required Time between starts, Starts counter, Starts available, Time until next start, total operating hours, and elapsed operating time. k. Overload relay shall include an on-board logic processor to allow basic logic to be performed within the overload relay based on network data and the status of the inputs to the overload relay. I. The overload relay shall support the following CIP messaging types: Polled 1/0 messaging, Change-of-state/cyclic messaging, Explicit messaging, Group 4 offline node recovery messaging, and Unconnected Message Manager(UCMM). M. The overload relay shall provide the following functions to minimize network configuration time: Full parameter object support, Configuration consistency value, and Add-on Profile. 2. The overload relay shall be Allen-Bradley 193-EC2/592-EC2, 193-EC3/592-EC3, or 193- EC5/592-EC5 `E3 Plus' models or approved equal. D. EtherNet/IP Interface for Variable Frequency AC Drives and Solid-State Reduced Voltage Motor Controllers 1. The EtherNet/IP communication interface shall be supplied to allow for communication between the solid-state component and the Ethernet network. E. EtherNet/IP Interface for Other Units 1. Provide a EtherNet/IP interface for other units as indicated on the contract drawings. 2. Refer to the contract drawing wiring diagrams for points to be monitored. F. Programming and Testing 1. The MCC manufacturer shall load the I Address into each unit. 2. The IP Address shall be as indicated on the contract drawings or as provided by the contractor. 3. The MCC manufacturer shall test the MCC to ensure that each unit communicates properly prior to shipment. 4. Each unit shall have a label showing the I Address for the devices within it. 5. The MCC manufacturer shall provide a disk containing applicable electronic data sheet (EDS)files for the EtherNet/IP devices. Page 8 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2.7 Unit Information A. The minimum compartment height shall be 6.5 in. and this shall be considered one-half space factor. B. NEMA Size 5 FVNR starters and below shall be provided as plug-in units. C. Plug-in units 1. Plug-in units shall consist of a unit assembly, unit support pan and unit door assembly. 2. Units shall be supplied with removable doors. The unit doors shall be fastened to the structure so that the doors can be closed when the unit is removed. 3. A unit support pan shall be provided for support and guiding units. Unit support pans shall remain in the structure when units are removed to provide isolation between units. 4. A service position shall be provided for plug-in units that allows for the unit to be supported, but disengaged from the bus. The unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the service position. This position is to be used to isolate a unit from the bus to allow service to be performed on the connected load equipment. D. Power Stabs 1. Unit stabs for engaging the power bus shall be tin-plated copper and provided with stainless back-up springs to provide and maintain a high pressure 4-point connection to the vertical bus. 2. Wiring from the unit disconnecting means to the plug-in stabs shall not be exposed on the rear of the unit. A separate isolated pathway shall be provided for each phase to minimize the possibility of unit fault conditions reaching the power bus system. 3. The power cable termination at the plug-in stab shall be a maintenance-free crimp type connection. E. Disconnect Handle 1. Plug-in units shall be provided with a heavy-duty, non-conductive, industrial duty, flange mounted handle mechanism for control of each disconnect switch or circuit breaker. 2. Use of rotary operators is not acceptable 3. The disconnect handle may pivot in the vertical or horizontal plane. 4. The on-off condition shall be indicated by the handle position, red and green color indicators with the words ON and OFF, and the international symbols 1 and O along with a pictorial indication of the handle position. 5. Handles shall be capable of being locked in the OFF position with up to three padlocks. 6. Plug-in units shall be provided with interlocks per NEMA and UL requirements. Interlocks shall be provided for the following: a. Prevention of unit insertion or withdrawal with the disconnect in the ON position b. Prevention of the unit door from being opened when the disconnect is in the ON position (1) A feature for intentionally defeating this interlock by qualified personnel shall be provided C. Prevention of the disconnect switch from being moved to the ON position if the unit door is open (1) A feature for intentionally defeating this interlock by qualified personnel shall be provided F. Pilot Devices 1. Units shall be furnished with pushbuttons, selector switches and pilot Lights for HAND- OFF-AUTO controls with RUN INDICATION Page 9 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. For units with vertically operated disconnect handles: a. When three or less pilot devices are utilized, they shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800T or 800H 30.5mm devices or approved equal. b. When more than three devices are required, the use of Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800F 22.5mm devices (or approved equal) is permitted. 3. For units with horizontally operated disconnect handles: C. The devices shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800F. G. Terminal Blocks 1. Control terminal blocks shall be provided on all contactor and starter units. a. Control terminal blocks shall be a pull-apart design on all plug-in units for easy removal of the unit from the structure. 2. Control terminal blocks on non-plug-in contactor and starter units shall be fixed type. 3. Power terminal blocks shall be provided on all contactor and starter units, rated NEMA size 3 (100 A) and below that utilize vertically operated disconnects. a. Power terminal blocks shall be pull-apart for NEMA size 1 and 2 (30 A and 60 A contactors). b. Power terminal blocks for NEMA size 3 starters (100 A contactors) shall be non-pull- apart. 4. Terminal blocks shall not be located adjacent to or inside the vertical wireway. H. Doors 1. Each unit shall be provided with a removable door mounted on removable pin-type hinges. 2. The unit doors shall be capable of being opened at least 110 degrees. 3. The unit doors shall be removable from any location in the MCC without disturbing any other unit doors. 4. The unit door shall be fastened to the structure so it can be closed to cover the unit space when the unit is removed. 5. The unit doors shall be held closed with quarter-turn latches. 6. Unit door latches shall be provided with arc resistant latches to help keep the door latched in the event that an internal arcing fault occurs. 2.8 METERING COMPARTMENT A. The MCC shall include a plug-in metering unit B. The unit shall include the following 1. Fusible disconnect with fuses a. The disconnect must be operable with the unit door closed. 2. Fused control circuit transformer 3. Current transformers shipped loose to be installed by the contractor onto incoming power conductors 4. Solid-state power monitor with door mounted display C. Power Monitor 1. The power monitor shall be capable of displaying the following: a. Line current for all three phases with plus or minus 0.2 percent full-scale accuracy b. Average three phase current with plus or minus 0.2 percent full-scale accuracy C. Line-to-neutral and line-to-line voltage with plus or minus 0.2 percent of full-scale accuracy d. Current and voltage unbalance Page 10 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction e. Real, reactive, apparent and true power with plus or minus 0.4 percent full-scale accuracy f. KWh, KVARh and kVAHnet g. True RMS to the 45th harmonic h. Frequency at plus or minus 0.5% i. Power factor at plus or minus 0.4% 2. The power monitor shall include min/max logs and trend logs with up to 45,867 data points. 3. The power monitor shall be capable of performing distortion analysis with THD, Crest Factor (I, V) and Distortion power factor. 4. The power monitor shall include a RS-485 communication port as standard and shall include EtherNet/IP communication capability. 5. The power monitor shall include two form-C relays. 6. The power monitor shall be Allen-Bradley Power monitor 3000 or approved equal. 2.9 Disconnects A. Main Disconnect 1. If no overcurrent protection is indicated, provide a main incoming-line lug com- partment. a. Lugs to accommodate the incoming power conductors as indicated on the contract drawings shall be provided by[contractor] [MCC Manufacturer]. B. Motor Starter Disconnect 1. Electro-mechanical NEMA starters: a. The disconnecting means for the across the line starters shall be motor circuit protectors. b. The unit short circuit rating shall be greater than or equal to the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings. C. Units shall be supplied based upon the rules/requirements set forth in the UL 845, NEMA ICS-18, and NFPA 70. d. Units shall be shipped as the motor circuit protector set at lowest setting per UL standards. The contractor shall field adjust the units based upon the par-ticular motor application. e. The minimum frame size shall be 150 A. f. Provide one normally open and one normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact that follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for indication of "On" or "Off/Tripped". 2. Solid State Controllers (solid-state reduced voltage motor controllers and variable frequency drives) a. The disconnecting means for solid-state controllers shall be a fusible dis-connect with current limiting fuses. b. The short circuit rating shall be 100,000 A(rms symmetrical). 2.10 Combination NEMA Rated Across the Line Starters A. Starters shall meet applicable NEMA and UL requirements. B. Starters shall be minimum NEMA Size 1. 1. Fractional NEMA sizes are not acceptable. C. The motor starter shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500 or 300 or approved equal. Page 11 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction D. Starters shall be provided with a 3-pole solid state overload relay that includes the fol-lowing features: 1. If EtherNet/IP communication 2. Selectable trip classes of 10, 15, 20, or 30. 3. Overload protection. 4. Phase loss protection. 5. Trip current adjustment range of 5:1. 6. Visual trip status indication. 7. Test/Reset button. 8. The overload relay shall be Allen-Bradley 193-EE or 592-EE "E1 Plus". E. In addition to the hold-in contact, starters shall be provided with one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact. The starter shall be capable of accommodating up to six contacts in addition to the hold-in contact. F. Provide a control power transformer with a rated secondary voltage of 120V AC. The control power transformer shall be provided with primary and secondary fusing. G. Overload relays shall have a reset button located on the outside of the unit door. H. Provide a door mounted selector switch for Hand-Off-Auto operation. The Hand mode shall provide local control at the MCC unit door. In the Auto mode, control shall be provided through a remote contact. I. Provide door mounted 120V AC push-to-test pilot lights with LED lamps for On Red and Off Green status indication. 2.11 Software A. Preconfigured Software 1. The software shall be capable of viewing multiple MCC lineups. 2. The software communication driver shall allow the software to be installed and operated on the EtherNet/IP, ControlNet, or DeviceNet network. 3. The software shall be capable of functioning as a standalone software package or as an ActiveX control in a Human Machine Interface (HMI). 4. The software shall be capable of displaying the following. a. Elevation View (1) Dynamically displays status information based on reading data from devices in the MCC lineup (2) Sizeable view to allow ease of viewing multiple MCC lineups (3) Unit nameplate information (4) Unit status indicators (ready, running, warning, fault, no communication) b. Unit Monitor View (1) Preconfigured for a specific unit (2) Real time monitoring via analog dials and trending (3) Data configurable for customized viewing (4) Modifying device parameters C. Spreadsheet View (1) User configurable for customized monitoring (2) Sorting and cascading functions (3) Custom user fields d. Event Log (1) Track history of MCC unit (2) Automatic logging of trips, warnings, and changes Page 12 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction (3) Manual entry of events e. Documentation (1) Front elevation drawings (2) Unit wiring diagrams (3) User manuals (4) Spare parts lists 2.12 Characteristics and Ratings A. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. B. Nominal System Voltage: 480 V, three phase, three wire. C. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated 65 kA. D. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 65. E. Environmental Ratings: 1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C)and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C) 3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent(noncondensing). 4. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC includes solid-state devices. F. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: as shown on drawings. G. Vertical-Bus: Minimum as shown on drawings. H. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating. I. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. J. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units. K. Phase Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, tin plated. L. Ground Bus: Minimum size required by UL 845, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors. M. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs: 1. Main Devices: Drawout and Fixed mounted. 2. Controller Units: fixed and mounted. 3. Feeder-Tap Units: Drawout and fixed mounted. 4. Sections front and rear aligned. N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit. Page 13 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction O. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C. P. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for OCPDs and other components including instruments and instrument transformers. 2.13 Source Quality Control A. MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs. B. VFC Testing: Test and inspect. 1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features specified. C. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Coordinate layout and installation of MCCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete." C. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm)centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 1. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. E. Install fuses in each fusible switch. F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Page 14 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Identification A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems"for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring. 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 4. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs. 3.4 Control Wiring Installation A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central-control system. B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 Connections A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.6 Field Quality Control A. Coordinate with owner representative to witness all test on MCCs. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. Page 15 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 7. NETA Acceptance Testing Specification allows three methods to test and inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance; the infrared (thermographic) method is the most thorough and costly. Retain "Initial Infrared Scanning" Subparagraph below if this method is preferred. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 9. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.7 Adjusting A. Assist owner representative to perform inspections per NETA ATS, up to main bus and tie breakers. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings. D. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges per Engineer's Coordination Report. 3.8 Protection A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.9 Demonstration A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. Page 16 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction END OF SECTION 262419 Page 17 of 17 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS—26 24 19 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Description A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Wall-switch. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 Administrative Requirements A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1.5 Action Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.6 Informational Submittals A. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. ' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices, uivisigii ui ;ooper Industries, Inc. tuouper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). Page 1 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass &Seymour). 5. Approval Equal. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 General Wiring-Device Requirement A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.3 Straight-Blade Receptacles A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). C. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass &Seymour: 5361 (single). 5362 (duplex). 2.4 GFCI Receptacles A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. PrgductF�: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. C. Pass &Seymour: 2095. d. Leviton: 7590. 2.5 Toggle Switches A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Single Pole: b. Cooper; AH 1221. C. Hubbell; HBL1221. d. Leviton; 1221-2. e. Pass &Seymour: CSB20AC1. 2� GonGrete Page 2 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction B. Shall have a minimum compressive StFength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Wall Plates A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. DeteGtable Finishes A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Black unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. Page 3 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3.2 GFCI Receptacles A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.3 Identification A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping. 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Document A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Related Sections A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with Page 1 of 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction requirements. C. Manufacturer's field service report. 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.10 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Page 2 of 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Fusible Switches A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - mectrical Distnaurion. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2.2 Nonfusible Switches A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - ciectricai uistribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D: a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled 2.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Caton tziectricai inc.; Cutler-crammer Business unit. 2. General Electric Company: GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D: a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Page 3 of 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long-and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long-and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and 12t response. F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. G. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 2.4 Molded-Case Switches A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. C. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2.5 Enclosures A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316SS 3. Indoor Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316SS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. Page 4 of 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Identification A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing: Assist owner representative to perform testing as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Assist owner representative to perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 Adjusting a. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Page 5 of 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 29 23 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of Ductile Iron Pipe and fittings as required to complete the project. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance). C. CPT: Control power transformer. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. NC: Normally closed. G. NO: Normally open. H. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. I. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. J. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. K. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller. L. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. 1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFCs. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. 1. Include mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Required working clearances and required area above and around VFCs. Page 1 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. 3. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. 4. Indicate field measurements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For each VFC, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Certificate of compliance. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements. D. Product Certificates: For each VFC from manufacturer. E. Harmonic Analysis Report: Provide Project-specific calculations and manufacturer's statement of compliance with IEEE 519. F. Source quality-control reports. G. Field quality-control reports. H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. C. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. d. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. e. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents. f. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. Page 2 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.9 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers and connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. 1.10 Warranty A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Toshiba, Inc. 2. Rockwell Automation, Inc; Allen-Bradley Brand. 3. ROBICON; a divison of Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Eaton Corporation 2.2 System Description A. General Requirements for VFCs: 1. VFCs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508A. B. Application: [Constant torque] [and] [variable torque] <Insert application>. C. VFC Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable- speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both." 2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." 3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Page 3 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage. F. Unit Operating Requirements: 1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 100 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F (0 deg C) and not exceeding deg F (40 deg C). 8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent(noncondensing). 9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1000 m). 10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2. 11. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds. 12. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 13. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 10 percent. 14. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. 15. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and do injection braking. G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits. H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range. 1. Signal: [Electrical] [Pneumatic]. I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFC, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2. 2. Surge Suppression: Field-mounted surge suppressors complying with Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits," UL 1449 SPD, Type 2. 3. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. 4. Under-and overvoltage trips. 5. Inverter overcurrent trips. 6. VFC and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad. 7. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 8. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 9. Loss-of-phase protection. 10. Reverse-phase protection. 11. Short-circuit protection. 12. Motor-overtemperature fault. Page 4 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction K. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. L. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged. M. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load. N. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. O. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. P. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. 1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating. 2. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFC input current rating, whichever is larger. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle. 5. NO alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 2.3 Performance Requirements A. Seismic Performance: VFCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. The designated VFCs shall be tested and certified by an NRTL as meeting the ICC-ES AC 156 test procedure requirements. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2.4 Controls and Indication A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions: 1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault. B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. 1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. 2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, Page 5 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source. C. Historical Logging Information and Displays: 1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each. D. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to: 1. Output frequency(Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency(Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac). 11. <Insert parameter>. E. Control Signal Interfaces: 1. Electric Input Signal Interface: a. A minimum of [two] <Insert number> programmable analog inputs: [0- to 10-V dc] [4- to 20-mA dc] [Operator-selectable "x"-to "y"-mA dc] <Insert signal parameters>. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs. 2. Pneumatic Input Signal Interface: 3 to 15 psig (20 to 104 kPa). 3. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems: a. 0-to 10-V dc. b. 4-to 20-mA dc. C. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 4. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) 4- to 20-mA dc, which can be configured for any of the following: a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current(load). C. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency(Hz). 5. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs Page 6 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction (120-V ac, 1 A)for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. C. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high-or low-speed limits reached. F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation. 1. Number of Loops: Two. G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with BAS to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. VFC settings shall be retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory. 1. Hardwired Points: a. Monitoring: On-off status b. Control: On-off operation 2. Communication Interface: Comply with ASHRAE 135. Communication shall interface with BAS to remotely control and monitor lighting from a BAS operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at lighting panel shall be available through the BAS. 2.5 Line Conditioning and Filtering A. Input Line Conditioning: Based on the manufacturer's harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit total demand (harmonic current) distortion and total harmonic voltage demand at the defined point of common coupling to meet IEEE 519 recommendations. B. Output Filtering: C. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2. D. EMI/RFI Filtering: 2.6 Optional Features A. Multiple-Motor Capability: VFC suitable for variable-speed service to multiple motors. Overload protection shuts down VFC and motors served by it, and generates fault indications when overload protection activates. 1. Configure to allow two or more motors to operate simultaneously at the same speed; separate overload relay for each controlled motor. 2. Configure to allow two motors to operate separately; operator selectable via local or remote switch or contact closures; single overload relay for both motors; separate output magnetic contactors for each motor. 3. Configure to allow two motors to operate simultaneously and in a lead/lag mode, with one motor operated at variable speed via the power converter and the other at constant speed via the bypass controller; separate overload relay for each controlled motor. B. Damper control circuit with end-of-travel feedback capability. C. Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFC resumes normal operation. D. Motor Preheat Function: Preheats motor when idle to prevent moisture accumulation in the motor. Overrides all other local and external inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands). Page 7 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction Forces VFC to operate motor, without any other run or speed command, at a field-adjustable, preset speed. Causes display of override mode on the VFC display. E. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault. F. Remote digital operator kit. G. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer. 2.7 Enclosures A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12. B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated." 2.8 Accessories A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons: Covered, Lockable. 2. Pilot Lights: Push to test. 3. Selector Switches: Rotary type. 4. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open. B. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. C. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings. 1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13. D. Supplemental Digital Meters: 1. Elapsed-time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt-hour meter. E. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 1 steel intake and exhaust grills; 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT. F. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure. G. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; wired. 2.9 Source Quality Control A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2. 1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features Page 8 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction specified. B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC. D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses." E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors are installed. F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Control Wiring Installation A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices Page 9 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors. 3.4 Identification A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units. 3.5 Field Quality Control A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections[with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative]. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure Page 10 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. F. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. 3.6 Startup Service A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 Adjusting A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings. D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers. E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges [as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."] F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches. 3.8 Protection A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.9 Demonstration A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs. END OF SECTION Page 11 of 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES—26 29 23 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices"for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color-rendering index. D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Page 1 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following: 1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system. D. Installation instructions. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Lighting fixtures. B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: Furnish at least 10 of each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: Furnish at least 2 of each type. 3. Ballasts: Furnish at least 4 of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.10 Warranty Page 2 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 2.2 General Requirements For Lighting Fixtures and Components A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. B. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.)for HID luminaires. Page 3 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. H. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461 E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. 2.3 Ballasts For Linear Fluorescent Lamps A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field. F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low- power-factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of approximately 30 percent. H. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment. Page 4 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2.4 Ballasts For HID Lamps A. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C). 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 2.5 Exit Signs A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. C. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. .11 Concrete A. 2-hall be i A.,-; aGGGrdanGe 'th ' n (12 31 11.12 C_QN1 `17F_=TC CTAI 1C_TI IAF_=9 B. hall have a rminorn �m �m�n ra��ve strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. 2.6 Emergency Lighting Units Page 5 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.7 Detectable Fluorescent Lamps A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 HID Lamps Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. Lighting Fixture Support Components A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm)steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm)steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. Page 6 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 December 2013 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 Identification A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 Field Quality Control A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.4 Startup Service A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent lamps, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. END OF SECTION Page 7 of 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING—26 51 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Contractor shall furnish any and all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment required for a complete and operational fiber optic communications system. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and any existing fiber optic communications equipment or fiber optic communications equipment furnished and installed under other contracts B. Any and all supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the fiber optic communications equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. E130064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all installations. C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which communications equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project communications system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents 1.2 Quality Assurance A. Contractor Qualifications: An experienced contractor who has the following qualifications as a minimum: 1. Experience utilizing directional drilling (trench-less technology) methods as described within these specifications if these methods are required. 2. The installer and tester for the fiber premises and outside cable plant shall be RCDD (Registered Communication Distribution Designer) Certified. Reference BiCSi latest edition. 1.3 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals"for all required submittal requirements. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. 1.4 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards"for all applicable standards. 1. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) Page 1 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative PART2 PRODUCTS This section contains the specifications and requirements for all communications and other devices currently approved for use in Projects initiated by the Owner. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which communications equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project communications system is fully functional and operational upon completion. A. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents. 2.2 Manufacturers A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, Corning Altos, or approved equal. 2.3 Fiber Optic Cable A. Fiber Optics Cable 1. Shall be all-dielectric loose tube and water-blocked. 2. Shall be in accordance with contract design documents. 3. Maximum attenuation shall not exceed .4 db per km 4. Shall be suitable for outdoor aerial and duct underground installation. 5. Shall be approved and listed by RUS 7 CFR 1755.900 6. Shall conform to all ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 test and design criteria. All fibers in each cable bundle assembly shall be tested and verify for continuity and light attenuation prior to leaving the factory. All test data shall be made available to the installation contractor upon acceptance of the cable. 7. Fiber optic cables shall be multi-mode type cable unless specifically noted otherwise. 8. Corning Altos or approved equal B. Connectors 1. All connectors shall be in accordance with contract design documents. 2. Fan out kits shall be outdoor buffer tube with a minimum of 24 inches tubing length. 3. Connectors shall be for use with the above multi-mode cables unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Below Grade Splice Closures (if required) 1. Shall be tested in accordance with Bellcore Testing Requirement GR-771-CORE and UL 1863. 2. Shall be suitable for submersion in 20 feet of water head. 3. Shall be configurable for future re-entry. 4. Shall be of a pre-molded port multi - section end plates with ports accepting cable diameters up to 1.25 inches. 5. Shall have the capacity of up to 72 single fusion splices. Page 2 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Shall conform to and support the splice requirements as noted in the contract drawing documents. 7. Shall be Performed Coyote Splice Closure splice trays or approved equal. 2.4 Conduit A. PVC Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of A.N.S.I. Standard C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads with PVC external coating and urethane internal coating. Exterior PVC coating shall be a minimum of 40 mil thick, internal urethane coating shall be a minimum of 2 mils thick. 1. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds Form 7 or Appleton. All fittings shall be PVC coated. 2. Boxes: Cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds or Appleton. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit with a 90°C UL rating, approved for direct burial and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or an equal. 1. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 90" elbows shall be from the factory. 2. Boxes: For use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be of the same manufacturer as the conduit. C. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit: 1. Shall be constructed of polymeric materials, which are lightweight, flexible corrosion resistant and non-conductive. 2. The duct shall be pigmented throughout the entire cross-section so as to produce a uniform color. 3. Shall be smoothwall both inner and outer surface with a controlled outside diameter in accordance with ASTM Standard D 3035 4. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Certified. 5. Shall have a minimum plastic density (polymer range) of .940 - .950 g/cc tested in accordance with ASTM Standard D 1505. 6. Shall have a crush strength of 2020 Ibs/ft length measured in accordance with a modified ASTM D 2412 test method. 7. 1-1/4 HDPE shall have a average wall thickness of .195 inches with an average OD of 1.660 inches and an average ID of 1.270 inches. 8. Shall be Dura-line SDR 9 or approved equal. D. Uses Permitted: Unless otherwise indicated, all conduit shall be as follows: 1. RGS: Exposed above grade outdoors and as a transition between HDPE underground and RGS above grade 2. HDPE: Underground direct buried via directional drilling methods (if utilized) 3. PVC: Underground, concealed in concrete. 4. Flexible: Equipment connection. Page 3 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.5 Enclosures and Boxes A. Underground Locations: Pull boxes used in underground conduit runs shall be made of polymer concrete, shall be UL Listed and shall be of a size and construction appropriate for the intended application. Concrete pull boxes intended for underground installation shall be precast in sections with parkway or traffic rated covers, clearly marked as indicated on the drawings. These boxes shall have a vertical design load of 22,568 Ibs with a test load of 33,852 lbs. Their respective traffic rated covers shall contain the proper logo on the cover and be rated for a minimum design load of 15,000 Ibs over a 10 inch square with a minimum test load of 22,568 Ibs (Quazite Type PG or approved equivalent). B. Outdoor Locations: NEMA Type 4X and 3R boxes and enclosures shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel, and shall be furnished with a gasketed weathertight cover of the same material. Enclosures and cabinets for electrical equipment shall conform to NEMA Standard 250 and U.L. Standard 50. NEMA Type 4X waterproof boxes and enclosures shall be welded 316 stainless steel, of the sizes and materials indicated on the drawings complete with screw-fastened, gasketed covers and drilled and tapped conduit entries of the proper sizes and arrangements. C. All penetrations into boxes shall be made into the bottom of the enclosure or lower 25% of the sides of the boxes, utilizing fittings made for the specific conditions in which the enclosure is installed and sealed accordingly. Penetrations into the top or back of enclosures shall not be allowed 2.6 Equipment Racks, Fasteners and Supports A. All framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel. Hot dip after fabrication. B. Nuts, bolts shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel. All stainless steel hardware shall be a minimum 316 Grade stainless steel. C. All conduit clamps shall be hot-dipped galvanized one-hole clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Pull Box Installation A. Pull-boxes shall be placed as shown on the construction drawings. Hand-holes may be moved to locations more practical when necessary upon approval by The Project Manager. B. The location of pull boxes shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only. The Contractor is responsible for verifying locations prior to placement. 3.2 Excavation and Backfill A. Excavation: 1. The trench shall be as straight as practical. The bottom of the trench shall be smooth and free from any sharp edges. The trench shall be kept clear of debris and loose rock. All changes in trench grade shall be gradual with no more than six (6) inches of vertical rise in every five (5)feet of horizontal run. 2. Any open trench shall be fenced, covered or otherwise barricaded. Exceptions are subject to approval by ONSWTP Project Manager. Good judgment and care must be exercised to prevent persons from falling into the open trench, or other damages to persons or property. 3. Roadways, which are open cut, shall be opened just prior to conduit placement. In no case shall the roadway be left impassable at the end of the day. Safety of the general Page 4 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction public is paramount and appropriate steps shall be taken to ensure safety at all times. 4. The contractor is responsible for the haul off and proper disposal of all spoils materials removed from the trench. 5. The contractor shall provide the necessary means to carry storm water away from the work area and keep the work area free of obstructions. 6. A minimum clearance of twelve inches (12") shall be maintained between existing utilities and ONSWTP conduits. 7. Trenches shall be promptly backfilled with earth and tamped with a mechanical tamper in 6 inch (15.24 cm) lifts so that the earth is restored to original grade to assure no hazard exists to vehicular, animal or pedestrian traffic. Trenches will be properly guarded or barricaded to prevent damage or injury. 8. Select backfill shall be unfrozen material, free of rocks or other debris. 9. Select backfill shall be used as a cushion and shall extend 3 inches on the sides and floor of trench to 6 inches above top of conduit. 10. Trenching processes will comply with all established Federal and State Safety Standards. B. Backfill: 1. The trench shall be backfilled and compacted to the satisfaction of the ONSWTP, promptly following duct placement. 2. The backfill shall consist of the materials previously excavated or equal materials and shall conform to the following requirements: a. The backfill shall be placed and compacted in not more than 6" lifts, from the top of the installation to the ground line. The backfill shall be of suitable material free from boulders, roots, sod or other vegetation. In areas inaccessible to tamping type rollers, a mechanical tamper of a size suitable for the work involved may be used. b. Pneumatic tampers shall be operated at pressures no less than those recommended by the manufacturer. C. A 95% minimum density compaction of backfill is required or greater if required by the governing Federal, State, County, or City agency. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all compaction tests. If the proper compaction is not achieved, the Contractor shall remove all backfill materials and the backfill and compaction will be repeated at the Contractor's expense until the compaction tests are accepted. 3.3 Trenched Road A. Pavement replacement shall match existing paving in type of pavement appearance, wear surface and durability to the maximum extent practical. Replacement shall match existing structures and shall include curbing, walkways, or any other concrete structure(s) damaged during construction. Pavement repair shall be subject to approval by The Project Manager and must conform to the requirements of the local governing authority having jurisdiction including required cutbacks, or"T"topping. Pavement repair not installed in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications shall be removed and replaced. B. Roadways shall only be trenched as a last resort. The City of Corpus Christi will not approve the open trenching of roadways unless trench-less technology methods are not applicable. 3.4 Concrete Placement A. Cement: Portland Cement shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C150 for type II Portland Cement. The cement shall be free of lumps and contamination by water other foreign matter. B. Water: Water shall potable and free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, Page 5 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction salts and other impurities. C. Sand: Sand shall be clear, hard and durable grains, free of excessive foreign matter. D. Aggregate: Nominal 1/4" durable crushed rock or limestone, free of excessive foreign matter. E. Mixing: 1. Maximum water to cement ratio: 6.5 gallons per 94 pound sack of Portland Cement 2. Mix Ratio: 1 part cement, 2 parts sand, 3 parts aggregate. 28 day compressive strength, 3000 pounds 3.5 Directional Boring A. This item includes all labor, equipment and certain materials required to install conduit using directional boring techniques. The running line of the conduit shall be kept straight and level. Any changes, either vertical or horizontal shall be gradual with no more than six (6) inches of deviation in every five (5) linear feet. Special care shall be taken to insure that the conduit connection between bores be kept straight and level. B. All utilities shall be pot holed for verification of location and depth prior to boring. C. The boring machines shall be grounded at all times during operation. The grounding method and operator's safety equipment shall comply with the manufacturer's guidelines and requirements. Adequate barricades shall be erected to limit access to the boring machine to operating personnel only. D. Excavation and backfilling of bore pits and potholes shall conform to that described in the sections noted above. E. Separation of Topsoil: Anywhere a bore pit, or other excavation exceeds 18" in width at the surface, the topsoil will be separated from the subsoil with topsoil to be placed back as the surface layer of soil when the hole is back-filled. F. Contractor shall provide the coupling machine required for the installation of the connectors on all HDPE conduits. G. The Contractor is responsible for all steel pipe and HDPE conduit broken off and lost in the borehole. H. If at any time the proposed running line crosses an existing utility, the excavated pothole shall remain open until the Project Manager or appointed representative is able to witness the bore head pass the existing utility. I. Where a pipe casing is utilized, the ends of the casing shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of water or other foreign materials. 3.6 Proving The Duct A. The duct shall be proved to verify continuity and integrity by pulling a solid rubber mandrel or a mandrel of other solid material such as steel or aluminum through the duct. The mandrel shall be a minimum of 3" long and 1" diameter. A City project representative must be present to witness all duct-proving operations. Duct that is not proved in the presence of a City Project representative shall not be considered complete. B. All duct systems shall be installed to allow for a sealed pneumatic system. The couplings are to be installed as per the manufacturer's instruction. It is the responsibility of the subcontractor to provide a clean, sealed, uniform duct to the cable placing crews. 3.7 Subsurface Obstructions A. Contractor is responsible for locating and avoiding all subsurface obstructions. It is the Subcontractor's responsibility to verify the locations of subsurface obstructions shown on the Page 6 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction drawings as well as any additional obstructions not identified on the drawings. Contractor shall notify owners and operators of foreign pipelines or other utilities at least two working days prior to excavation near the utility. B. Contractor shall pothole all existing utilities or substructure crossings before excavation crosses their locations. If potholing does not expose the existing utility the Contractor shall request that the utility be located again to verify that the utility is beyond or deeper than the trench line or that the utility has been miss-marked. A minimum of twelve inches (12") shall be maintained between existing utilities and conduits. This shall be included in the lump sum price. Damage to existing utilities is not acceptable and termination of this Contract may result from this negligence. C. Where construction will take place in areas near existing utilities, it is imperative that the Contractor meets with the approved representative responsible for the utility to resolve any depth or construction line conflicts prior to the start of construction. The City Project Engineer of Record must be notified of this meeting and may be present. D. DAMAGED UTILITIES 1. A copy of the contractors Cable Awareness Program must be submitted to the City Project Manager prior to construction. 2. Any utility damage will be reported to the utility owner and the City immediately. This includes any damage to the City owned cable. 3. Contractor will cooperate with the owner of the utility to facilitate any repairs necessary. 4. A copy of all documentation regarding the utility damage shall be submitted to the City Project Manager. 3.8 Roadway, Railroad and Other Bored Crossings A. In no case shall the completed crossing be less than 48 inches deep at its shallowest point. B. Contractor shall not excavate into the side slopes of raised track beds. C. Backfill for excavations shall be mechanically tamped in 6-inch lifts to the same density as adjoining earth. 3.9 Right of Way/ Property Protection and Restoration A. General: 1. The Contractor shall protect the Right-of-Way/Property and minimize the damage from construction operations. 2. Good soil erosion practices shall be practiced during all construction operations. B. Restoration: 1. Contractor shall keep the premises where work is being performed in a neat, clean, and orderly condition, and on completion of the work hereunder, Contractor shall remove all of its tools and equipment from the premises and any debris shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor. 2. Right-of-Way/Property located in non-paved areas shall be restored to its original or better condition within 24 hours or as soon as practicable, in the ONSWTP's opinion, following duct-placing operations. In areas where open trench methods were used and backfill mounded over the trench, grading or filling will be required for final restoration of the Right-of-Way/Property. All rock and debris brought to the surface and left after backfilling shall be removed and disposed of, as directed by the City. 3. All areas disturbed by the construction activities shall be restored and re-seeded per the requirements and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. Page 7 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. Right-of-Way/Property located in paved areas shall be restored to operation for vehicular traffic, with temporary paving or the permanent paving, within 24 hours or as soon as practicable, in The City's opinion, following duct placing operations. 5. All unit prices include the cost of seed, mulch, hay, hydro-mulch, sod, water, gravel, soil, sand, rip-rap, and all other materials required by the City or any governmental authority for site restoration. C. All rights of way clearing are included in all buried and underground outside plant placement pricing. 3.10 Fencing and Other Excavation Barricades A. Temporary safety fencing erected around the Contractor's excavations shall be installed to the satisfaction of the ONSWTP. During any non-working hours, Contractor shall place steel plates over any open trenches that would pose a threat to vehicular traffic. The steel plates shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the weight of vehicular traffic and anchored in place to prevent movement. Open trenches not exposed to vehicular traffic shall also be covered with plywood (or equal) sufficient to carry any pedestrian traffic, including motorcycles, bicycles, etc. and anchored in place. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to take all steps necessary to prevent all accidents and to protect the general public. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, maintaining and removing barricades, flashers, fences, plates, and ramps necessary to protect the public and property owner from involvement with excavations, open ditches, and other work areas 3.11 Fiber Optic Cable Installation A. The contractor shall comply with all fiber cable manufactures recommendations for the general installation of the fiber optic cable. The installation shall include but not necessarily limited to the pulling of fiber thru dedicated conduit / inner duct raceway systems, the bending of the fiber, the splicing and termination of the cable, and the testing of all cable, associated splicing and termination hardware. B. The contractor shall follow the manufacture spec#SRP-005-001 dated October 2002 entitled Fiber Optic Cable Placing — Duct from Corning Cable Systems for installation of outside plant fiber cable. C. The contractor shall use fusion splicing for all required splices. See field testing for quality control measures. D. The contractor shall use type SC connectors where required. All un-terminated cable shall be neatly coiled and bundled to prevent damage to fiber ends. E. All Fiber Optic Cable is to be placed inside duct system or in cable tray. F. Bends of small radii and twists that may damage the fiber optic cable shall be avoided. During cable placement, cable shall not be bent in a radius less than twenty (20) times the outside diameter of the cable or as specified by the manufacturer. Pulleys, sheaves or radius wheels shall be used to meet this requirement. G. Cable shall not be pulled with more than 600 lbs. of dynamic tension. Safeguards such as breakaway swivels, adjustable slip-clutch capstan winches, or pulling dynamometers shall be used. H. Cable lubricant shall be used to reduce the pulling tension on longer segments of the cable placement or at the discretion of the City. Cable lubricants must be compatible with the fiber optic cable's outer sheath. Verification of the compatibility between the fiber optic cable and the cable lubricant will be required before any application. After cable installation, the inner- duct shall be sealed at the strand level using approved foam. I. Slack coils of approximately fifty (50) feet will be neatly coiled and placed in hand-holes specified as splice locations and so noted on construction drawings. Fiber identification tags Page 8 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction shall be attached. Slack coils of approximately twenty (20) feet shall be neatly coiled and placed in hand-holes specified as fiber pull boxes and so noted on construction drawings. J. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to plan each cable pull using information about splice locations, pull box locations, staging areas, conduit layout, manhole locations, etc. K. Each cable shall be placed in a continuous piece, with termination and splice locations as shown on the construction drawings. No additional splices are allowed, unless specifically added by the City in writing. L. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and storage of the fiber optic cable. If necessary, a competent security guard shall be maintained on site when fiber optic cable is kept on the street overnight. M. All tracer wires shall be installed in the HDPE in which the fiber is installed and each tracer wire shall be spliced within each pull box. N. A telecommunication test station shall be located at each fiber optic cable splice box and the corresponding tracer wire shall be properly terminated as noted in the manufactures instruction information. 3.12 Warning Tape and Line Markers A. Contractor shall place buried cable warning tape at all times when plowing, trenching, and backhoeing for burial of conduit for fiber optic cable. B. Buried cable warning tape shall be installed for optimum protection at a depth of twelve inches (12") below final grade. C. Contractor shall install line markers at all changes in cable running line direction, splices, waterways, subsurface utilities, hand-holes and at both sides of street, bridge or railroad crossings. At no time shall any markers be spaced more than 500 feet apart. Markers shall be positioned so that they can be seen from the location of the cable and generally set facing perpendicular to the cable running line. D. A readily identifiable marker shall be placed at each right of way line where it is crossed by the buried cable. A marker should be at least 4 feet above ground and at the right of way line. Additional markers shall be placed at least every 500 feet where the cable is placed longitudinally on the right-of-way. 3.13 Splicing A. Contractor personnel performing splicing procedures shall be properly trained to splice and test fiber optic cable. B. All fibers are to be fusion spliced. (Except mechanical splices are allowed within the appropriate splice housings either existing or proposed) C. All spliced fibers will be protected by a fiber optic heat shrink sleeve. A heat oven will be used to shrink these sleeves. A heat gun which is hand applied shall not be permitted. Care must be exercised to prevent damage to exposed fibers by overheating. The acrylic coating shall not be removed beyond the areas that will be covered by the heat shrink sleeves. D. To insure acceptable splices prior to closing and encapsulating the splice case, the Contractor will monitor the splice while it is being performed using an OTDR system. Encapsulation shall be performed immediately after testing is 100% complete and accepted. E. Each splice is to be tested bi-directionally at the required cable operational wavelength. The maximum splice loss, in one direction, shall be 0.45 dB. The bi-directional average loss shall be no greater than 0.15 dB. F. Negative losses or Gainers, shall be added to positive losses and averaged to determine the bi-directional splice loss. Gainers or losses may not exceed 0.3 dB and must be within ten Page 9 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction percent(10%) of each other when tested bi-directionally. G. If after five (5) attempts or where high negative loss values are being consistently obtained after many splice attempts, the Contractor is unable to meet the average splice loss objectives due to a gainer, the City Project Manager shall be notified and the Contractor shall: 1. In the presence of the City Project Manager, the Contractor will make an additional three (3) attempts to splice the cable. If the splice meets the specifications, the Contractor will complete splicing activities at this location. 2. If the splice fails to meet the specifications after the Contractor attempts to splice the cable in the presence of the City Project Manager, the Contractor will cut off and label one meter of cable from each of the cables being spliced. The Contractor shall then re- attempt to splice the cables. If after five (5) attempts the splice fails to meet City performance objectives, the Contractor will notify the City Project Manager that they were unsuccessful and complete the splicing activities at this location. H. If the second attempt to splice the cable fails (after the one meter sections have been removed) the City will pay the Contractor as if this were an additional splice point at the unit rates specified in the pricing forms. I. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the City Project Manager of an out of specification splice. Failure to do so may result in the Contractor having to re-enter the splice location and re-splice the cable at their own expense. 3.14 Field Quality Control A. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 1. Fiber Cable Plant a. The fiber cable manufacturer shall not ship cable with any single strand failures in the cable bundle. b. The contractor shall field test each count of fiber optic cable individually prior to unrolling the fiber off the reel for field installation. The test shall be a continuity test utilizing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). All tests shall be documented. Tests that reveal a cable light reflection loss greater than 110% of the cable manufacture's published specifications or factory tests shall be rejected (typically 5db / km). A fiber cable bundle that has more than a 1% cable test failure shall be rejected and not used in this installation. Fiber cable count bundles less than 10 strands shall have 0% failures. In the event the bundle exceeds 0% failures the cable shall be rejected and not used in this installation. C. Once the cable is installed and prior to splicing or terminating, the cable should again be continuity tested as noted in paragraph B above. The same test criteria shall apply. d. Once the cable is installed and terminated all outside plant cable backbone shall be tested by: OTDR in both directions and at both wavelengths of light transmission in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.1 (an average of the two will be used). The test criteria shall then be based upon both sum of connector cable and splice attenuation. Connector attenuation shall not exceed the No. of connector pairs times the published nominal connector loss typically .75db and the splice attenuation shall not exceed the number of splices times the allowed splice loss of .3db.End to End Attenuation as per ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7. All fibers that are left un-terminated will be tested using an OTDR. e. The contractor shall use a high resolution OTDR for testing connectors and splices and shall furnish to the City Project Manager a signature trace of all tests performed. High resolution OTDR's provide accurate repeatable measurements to be taken from short distances (66ft)to several miles. Page 10 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction f. The contractor shall test each fiber transmitter and receiver in a two stage process as documented in BiSCi Standards 2000 Edition Chapter 10 Fiber Cable Tests. 3.15 Documentation A. Test data results shall be submitted to the City Project Manager on Contractor supplied test data forms no later than 5 working days after the completion of the testing. The test data forms shall be completely and legibly filled out. Test data results shall be submitted as a neatly organized and indexed document for each segment (end point to end point). The document shall contain the following: 1. Copies of all OTDR fiber tests on computer disks, labeled with endpoints, optical length of splice location, and the date of the test. 3.16 System Warranty A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all required warranty and support requirements. 3.17 Acceptance Testing The Contractor will be required to perform the following tests in order to confirm system acceptance: A. Bi-directional OTDR Splice Test 1. Each fiber at each splice point will be tested bi-directionally at the required wavelength with an OTDR capable of long range and high resolution testing. This test will be from an end point designated by the City Project Manager. The maximum loss for each splice in one direction shall be 0.15 dB and the maximum bi-directional average loss shall be 0.10 dB. The test results will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a Contractor supplied "Splice Loss Worksheet". This test will be performed in conjunction with the bi- directional segment test after the closure has been closed, encapsulated and positioned. B. Bi-directional End-To-End Segment Test 1. Each fiber of each span shall be tested at required wavelength from end point to end point. The test results will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a contractor supplied "Segment Loss Worksheet". This test will be performed after all of the splicing within the segment has been completed, splice cases closed, encapsulated and positioned. C. Bi-directional End-To-End Power Test 1. Each fiber of each span shall be tested in both directions from end-to-end using the proper wavelength stabilized light source and power meter. The average end-to-end losses must be within the ONSWTP's specifications. The loss budgets for each loop includes: 0.4 dB/km @ 1310nm and .3 dB/ km @ 1550nm (fiber loss), 0.15 dB/splice, and 0.5 dB/connector. The results of this test are to be recorded on the contractor supplied test data sheets and submitted to the City's Project Manager. 2. Contractor shall arrange to have a City representative present during power testing. Power testing performed without a City representative present will be invalid and must be re-done at the Contractor's expense. 3. The Contractor is required to utilize an OTDR capable of producing fiber test documentation on computer disks and on a laser printer. These disks, along with the software needed to view and manipulate the test data, will be turned over to the ONSWTP two (2) days after testing is completed. The Contractor shall use one of the following OTDR emulation software programs: Siecor-1001-PC, Laser Precision PC- Page 11 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction OTDR or PC-3000, or Tektronix FMTAP. 4. For the purposes of bi-directional OTDR testing, bare fiber adapters may be utilized. 3.18 As Built Drawings A. Contractor shall redline drawings during the course of construction to show the actual alignment, depth, and other variances to the construction drawings on a daily basis. The drawings will be available for review by the City's representative when requested on the job site. Additionally, all redline drawings will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a weekly basis including all actual construction to-date. B. A set of contract drawings shall be set aside for the sole purpose of redline "as built drawings". These drawings shall be maintained as outlined above. At the conclusion of the Contract, this set of drawings shall be turned over to the City Project Manager. C. All red line fiber drawings must also reflect any and all changes to the fiber cable plant interconnectivity. These notes should be reflected on the existing contract fiber interconnectivity drawings. D. Red line drawings shall be protected from the elements, as they will become part of Project records. Red line drawings shall be marked to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the work as originally shown using the following method: 1. All annotations will be made legibly with erasable red pencil. 2. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. 3. When changing text or dimensions, line through the old information and enter the new. 4. Use the same units of measure and the same precision as existing dimensions. 5. Dimensions will be referenced to the leased tract line. 6. When changing figures or details, annotate in the same drawing style as existing figures, and use a straight edge when creating lines and dimension leaders. 7. Provide any new information deemed important to the customer, but not shown on construction or shop drawings. 8. Note related change order numbers where applicable. 9. Show station numbers, offset and depth at all landmarks and 50 foot intervals. END OF SECTION Page 12 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of providing identifying devices for the following: 1. Piping 2. Equipment 3. Electrical Equipment 4. Valves 5. Fire sprinkler and piping B. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to deliver to the Owner a complete and fully functional process identification system as described in this Specification. 1.2 Submittals A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals" for all required submittal requirements. B. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets for identifying devices. 2. A list of where devices are to be installed, and the data to be included on each identifying device. 3. Any and all other requested information or data. 1.3 Standards The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: ANSI A13.1 Pipe Marking Specifications A. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Piping Identification: Pressure sensitive, adhesive-backed vinyl plastic label having the lettering indicated on background color as scheduled. Provide labels manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Corp. or Brady "Perms Code". Provide labels having an arrow to indicate the direction of flow. Provide 1-1/4-inch high letters. Page 1 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Outdoor Pipe Markers: Seton "Weather Code" Fade resistant, vinyl markers, 2-1/4 by 9 inches. C. Valve Identification: Provide Seton [Style 2961, 1-1/2-inch round, plastic tag 11 Style 250- BL Black Filled, 1-1/2-inch round, brass tag]with proper identification stamped [or incised into plastic] on tag. Tag shall have the proper prefix followed by a code number that is unique and identifies the valve from all others in the project. Provide hole in top of tag for mounting chain. Provide brass jack chain, copper metal meter seals, or brass "S" hooks as appropriat. D. Equipment Nameplate: Seton Style 2060 "Seton-ply" engraved plastic plaque, approximately 3/4 by 2-1/2 inches in size. Plaque shall be 1/16 inch thick having beveled edges and drilled with two mounting holes when attached by screws. Mounting screws shall be stainless steel. Lettering shall be approximately 3/16 inch high. Text to include equipment mark and equipment description (Example: EXHAUST FAN EF-5). Identification label on nameplate shall correspond to a typewritten legend included in the O & M Manual which includes the following. 1. Equipment identifier. 2. Location inside building (or on project site) 3. Manufacturer's model number. 4. Brief description of function. 5. Reference to shop drawings, parts lists, or other data included in the O & M Manual E. Fire Sprinkler System Signs: Signs for fire protection system shall conform to NFPA-13 and shall be equal to Seton Style SFB, furnished in porcelain with "white on red" color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Install piping complete with insulation and valves in place prior to installing identification devices. Mount electrical components, including electrical control devices. Piping shall be dry and free of oil, grease, or other contaminants. Insulation shall be completely dry. 3.2 Installation A. Install pipe labels on piping exposed to view, in any location inside buildings or structures, or in underground vaults, pump stations, basements, or other exposed locations. B. Install pipe labels on piping exposed to view, in any location inside buildings or structures, or in underground vaults, pump stations, basements, or other exposed locations. C. Name the fluid flowing inside the pipe on color coded labels with text per the schedule below. Labels shall also include an arrow indicating the direction of flow. 3.3 Valve Identification A. Install a valve tag on all valves. Attach the tag to hand wheel of valve stem so that it does not interfere with operation of valve tag brass link chains or copper meter seals furnished by the Tag Manufacturer. B. Number valves to correspond to a typewritten list included in the Operational and Maintenance Manual and include the following information: 1. Valve Number 2. Description of piping fluid or purpose Page 2 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Normal position of valve (Open or Closed) 4. Manufacturer's catalog number 5. Brief description of valve specification 6. Brief description of valve's function in the system C. Valve identification shall be based on the following example: Valve Normal Mfg's Valve Number Function Location position Cat No. Type Description P 1 Domestic Rm. 103 Open Crane Gate rising Shut off to Water Fig. 315C stem heater 3.4 Equipment Identification A. Provide an equipment identifier on each separate piece of equipment, including process equipment, HVAC equipment, plumbing equipment (other than plumbing fixtures), and electrical equipment. Provide a nameplate for each separate piece of electrical equipment, including but not limited to panelboards, switchgear, starters, disconnects, control devices and control panels. Provide name tags for each separate switch, starter, contactor, or other compartment on electrical switchgear. B. Engrave lettering on nameplates corresponding to the identification marks. Install nameplates prominently on equipment not occurring in occupied spaces. Install nameplates on the inside covers of lighting panelboards. Install nameplates on all other equipment centered and at top of equipment. Nameplates shall not be installed in a location that interferes with the equipment's ability to operate. C. Attach nameplates to exterior equipment with two 3/8-inch stainless steel screws. Interior plaque may be attached by screws, or by the adhesion method when approved by the Engineer. 3.5 Special Gases A. Provide a nameplate at each outlet of special gases at the laboratory. Attach nameplates directly above and centered on the outlet or valve. The label shall correspond with the supplied gas, and the plate color shall correspond with the incised identification disk installed on the valve. B. Install a nameplate above each active gas cylinder location with the complete name printed followed by the chemical designation (Example: Helium HE). Colors shall correspond to the color used on the cylinders as used by the Compressed Gas Association, Inc. 3.6 Electrical Outlets A. Provide a nameplate for electrical outlet listed below. The nameplate shall be white letters on red background, and shall specify the outlet's voltage and ampere rating. The nameplate on special outlets shall have an appropriate warning. Lettering shall be 1/8 inch high. Overall plate size shall be approximately 3/4 by 2-1/2 inches. B. Provide nameplates on the following: 1. 208/240 outlet: voltage and ampere rating 2. Special outlet: voltage, ampere rating and intended function (Example: Welder Outlet 240 V—40 A) 3.7 Potable and Non-Potable Water A. Provide name tags at every water hydrant or outlet. Fabricate name tags of 3/4-by-1-1/2-by- 1/8-inch aluminum with a medium, duranodic finish and plexiglas face panel. The face panel Page 3 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction shall have 1-inch high, white, helvetica medium lettering on blue background stating "Potable Water", or white lettering on green background stating "Non-Potable Water". Place signs on walls above the hydrant locations and attach to backplates. Yard hydrants shall have concrete piers which are 6 inches in diameter by 36 inches with signs attached to the face of the concrete directly in front of the hydrants. Extend the piers 4 inches minimum above finish grade. Signs shall be manufactured by Vomer Products, Inc., equal to Vocator Exterior sign series E9/12. 3.8 Schedules A. Prepare a typed schedule showing piping label requirements, valve tag identification, and equipment tags. Include each valve or piping type and the appropriate identification on the schedule. Submit the schedule to the Engineer for approval. B. Mark valve tags and pipe labels to conform with the following legend, or with requirements of standards noted. Include the full name, as appearing under the column heading "Description", and the abbreviation under the column heading "Abbrev. Legend." C. Revise schedule for each individual project. Valve ve Abbrev. Labe Pr-efix7LJ&gend (Letter on Plumbing Sewer, Sanitary W SW Black on Green Sewer, Storm SS SS Black on Green Waste, Drain W DP Black on Green Waste,Acid W AW Black on Yellow Water, Domestic, Cold P CW Black on Green Water, Domestic, Hot P HW Black on Yellow Water, Domestic, Ret. P HWR Black on Yellow Water, Distilled P DW Black on Green Water, Non-potable N NPW Black on Green Fire Protection Fire Protection, Mains F FM White on Red Fire Protection, Sprinkler F FS White on Red Gas Piping Natural Gas G NG Black on Yellow Fuel Gas G NG Black on Yellow Acetylene G AC Black on Yellow Argon G AG White on Blue Hydrogen G HG Black on Yellow Nitrogen G NI Black on Green Nitrous Oxide G NO White on Blue Methane G MT Black on Yellow Page 4 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction Valve Abbrev. Label Color Description Prefix Legend (Letter on Background Oxygen G OX Black on Yellow Compressed Air G CA White on Blue Instrument Air G IA White on Blue Vapor G VG Black on Yellow Vacuum G VP White on Blue HVAC Refrigerant, Suction H RS Black on Green Refrigerant, Liquid H RL Black on Green Chilled Water H CW Black on Green Chilled Water Ret. H CWR Black on Green Hot Water H HW Black on Yellow Hot Water, Ret. H HWR Black on Yellow Condensate H CD Black on Green Process Piping Lime PP LI White on Green Chlorine PP CH Black on Yellow Ammonia PP AM Black on Yellow Primary Effluent PP PE White on Green Primary Sludge PP PS White on Green Raw Sewage PP SR White on Green Recir. Sewage PP RS White on Green Recir. Sludge PP RR White on Green Thickened Sludge PP TS White on Green Activated Sludge PP AS White on Green Electrical Panelboards LP-1 White on Black Starters for Exhaust Fan S/EF-1 White on Black Control Panels for Exhaust CP/EF-1 White on Black Fan Disconnects for Exhaust Fan DS/EF-1 White on Black Junction Boxes JB/101 White on Black Controllers for Exhaust Fan Cl/EF-1 White on Black Page 5 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Piping Color Schedule: Description Pipe Color Potable Water Light Blue Compressed Air Light Green Instrument Air Light Green with Dark Green Bands Chlorine (gas, liquid, or vent) Yellow Chlorine (solution) Yellow with Red Bands Liquid Alum Yellow with Orange Bands Alum (solution) Yellow with Green Bands Ammonia Yellow with Brown Bands Chlorine Dioxide (solution) Yellow with Blue Bands Ferric Chloride Brown with Red Bands Ferric Sulfate Brown with Yellow Bands Polymers White with Green Bands Liquid Caustic White with Red Bands Caustic (solution) White with Orange Bands Fluoride White with Yellow Bands Ozone Stainless Steel with White Bands Settled Water Green Filter Effluent Light Blue Backwash Supply Light Blue Drain Dark Grey Raw Water Tan END OF SECTION Page 6 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope A. The General Requirements for Instrumentation and Control Systems Work as described below: 1. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall provide any and all hardware, software, and configuration and integration for a PLC-based Instrumentation and Process Control system. Contractor shall provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents: a. Provide any and all instrumentation, hardware, conductors, raceway and any other materials required for a complete and operable system that is above that specified in the Contract Documents. Provide any and all labor and materials specified in the Contract Documents. b. Provide any and all required software and configuration and programming in the PLC for a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents. C. Coordinate and fully cooperate with Owner to provide all required PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing HMI system. d. Provide all required personnel for check out, testing, calibration, commissioning and start-up of the provided new system. e. Provide personnel to train the Owner's staff as specified in this Specification. f. Provide any and all HMI software programming and configuration required to create new Operator HMI screens and modify any existing Operator HMI screens as specified. g. Provide any and all required drivers to receive and transmit data over the specified Ethernet data highway to fully communicate with the PLC system provided by the System Integrator Contractor. h. Coordinate and fully cooperate with the Owner to provide all required system programming necessary to interface with the existing SCADA system for a complete and operational system as specified. i. Create or modify all required data bases in Owner's existing SCADA system. 1.2 Quality Assurance A. General: 1. Contractor shall refer to Specification 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for overall Project quality assurance requirements. 2. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. B. Reference Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 2. Electronic Industry Association (EIA). 3. International Electro-Technical CoHMlssion (IEC). 4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Page 1 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. 6. American Societ for Testing and Materials ASTM Standards: ASTM Al53 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ASTM B68 Seamless Copper Tube ASTM D1047 Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable 7. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 8. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 9. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 10. American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 11. Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT-P- 645a. 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 edition. 14. Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standards: RP 3.1-1960 Flow Meter Installations, Seal and Condensate Chambers S5.1-1973 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification RP7.1-1956 Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test S7.3-1975 Quality Standard for Instrument Air RP18.1-1965 Specifications and Guides for the Use of General Purpose Annunciators S5.4-1976 Instrument Loop Diagrams S8.1-1968 Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments RP12.1-1960 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres RP20.1, 20.2 Specification Forms for Instruments S39.1-1972 Control Valve Sizing Equations S39.2-1972 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 15. American Petroleum Institute (API) Standards: API RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems API RP 520 Recommended Practice for the Design and Installation of Pressure- Relieving Systems in Refineries 16. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA) Standards: PM 20.1-1973 Process Measurement and Control Terminology RC5-10-1963 Resistance Thermometers 17. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. Page 2 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 18. Factory Mutual (FM). 19. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313-1971), C37.90a-1974. 20. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 1.3 Guarantees A. Refer to Section 2.9 of this Specification, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for required guarantees for materials and support. 1.4 Contractor's Qualifications A. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall be regularly engaged in the design, installation and maintenance of PLC based control systems. PCSS must submit documentation listed in Section 1.02.5 below that verifies and demonstrates the following minimum qualifications: 1. Organization Facilities and Business Viability 2. Have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. 3. Maintain adequate appropriate insurance as required as determined by the Owner's representative. 4. Maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, programming, and testing of the products and systems 5. Have adequate financial resources to successfully execute projects 6. Have employee safety training program B. Organization and Personnel Experience 1. Have experience in the Water and Waste Water industry 2. Successfully completed at least three (3) projects of$250,000.00 in scope and containing at least 350 1/0 points in the last five (5)years 3. Employ at least one (1)full time licensed and registered Professional Engineer(P.E.) 4. Employ full time degreed engineers from ABET accredited universities that have a. A minimum of five (5) years of experience working on projects and systems of similar size and scope b. Completed at least two (2) projects utilizing Plant PAX from Rockwell Automation C. Has communications networking experience d. Has Rockwell certification e. Experience with the following software (1) FactoryTalk ME (2) FactoryTalk SE (3) FactoryTalk Historian (4) RSLogix 5000 (5) RSLogix 500 f. Experience with the following hardware (1) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley ControlLogix family of PLC Page 3 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (2) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley CompactLogix family of PLC (3) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Flexl/O (4) MOXA network hardware g. Employ personnel within two hundred (200) miles of the project capable of providing on-site response within four(4) hours. h. Be an authorized Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Systems Integrator Contractor, Solutions Provider. i. Employ a PMI or PMP certified project manager 5. PCSS shall submit three (3) hard copies along with an electronic copy of the Qualification Documentation to the Owner/Engineer. The following documentation is required for qualification purposes: a. Organization Facilities and Business Viability Documentation (1) Provide copy of State documents verifying the number of years that the firm has been in business (2) Provide a Certificate of Insurance (COI) verifying adequate insurance coverage including: Commercial General Liability $2,000,000.00 Aggregate Automobile Liability $1,000,000.00 Single Limit Transit Coverage $25,000.00 min up to the value of the equipment being transported Workers Compensation Employers Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 (3) Provide address and square footage of required fully staffed service facility (4) Provide a notarized statement from an officer of the Company verifying the size of the environmentally controlled space dedicated to the production, assembly and check-out of custom controls panels (5) Provide the company legal name, address as well as the Dun & Bradstreet D-U-N- S number for the company (6) Provide copies of the firm's safety program and certify employ participation b. Organization and Personnel Experience Documentation (1) Provide an overall Company Organization Chart and resumes for personnel assigned to the project indicating water/wastewater experience (2) Provide a detailed listing of at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity successfully completed within the last five (5) years. Information must include the following for each project: (a) Project name (b) Project location (c) Owner's name, address, and phone number (d) Owner's contact person and phone number (e) Consultant/Design Engineering Firm name and contact (f) General Contractor's name (if applicable) (g) SIC's order/contract amount (h) Date project started Page 4 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (i) Date project completed (j) Technical description of provided control system in sufficient detail to verify equivalent size and complexity (3) Provide a copy of the Company's full time employed Professional Engineer's license/registration (4) Provide resumes of employees that show their experience level (5) Provide zip codes and resumes of personnel within two hundred (200) miles of the project site capable of providing on-site response within four (4) hours (6) Provide copy of organizations Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Systems Integrator Contractor, Solutions Provider certification (7) Provide copy of project manager's certification C. Quality Assurance Requirements (1) Provide documentation that demonstrates Quality Assurance/Quality Control program, process or certification (2) Provide copies of ISA association documentation (3) Provide resumes of full time employees that would respond to perform warranty or maintenance work (4) Provide a current list with contact information of Municipalities for which the Company has current and on-going Maintenance Contracts and/or existing warranty agreements (5) Provide copies of Company's standard Maintenance and/or Warranty Contracts/Agreements (6) Provide a copy of the Company's UL-508 current certification (7) Provide a copy of documentation showing active membership in the Control System Integrators Association (CSIA)or equivalent organization d. All electronic components furnished by the Contractor shall be new products of manufacturers in North America having an established reputation in the manufacture of such equipment with at least 5 years background. All PLC related equipment supplied shall be a proven product having been in field service for at least 1 year and in production for no less than 2 years. e. All materials are subject to the approval of the Owner and shall conform to all applicable state and federal codes and regulations. f. The Contractor shall warrant that all equipment will perform in accordance with published specifications, is suitable for the intended purposes and shall be free from defects in materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1)year from the date of the final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor shall also warrant all system configuration and programming for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance plus two (2) years of extended support. Where any product or system does not perform as specified during this warranty period, the Contractor shall correct any defect, including the non-conformance with any applicable specification and shall repair or replace any defective part or parts without charge to the Owner for parts and labor. g. Testing: A formal system test shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner or Owners representatives at the Contractor's test facility, prior to shipment. The purpose of the test shall be to verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. Refer to Section 40 90 03 "SCADA and Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning" for any and all SCADA and instrumentation testing and commissioning requirements. Page 5 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Acceptable Process Control Systems Suppliers 1. The following organizations comply with the Contract Documents and are approved as acceptable process control systems suppliers: a. Mission Automation, Inc. b. Prime Controls, Inc. 2. All personnel assigned to work on any and all projects shall comply with and conform to the minimum experience detailed in Paragraph 1.4.13 "Organization and Personnel Experience" of Specification 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems". D. Acceptable Power Protection SCADA Systems Suppliers 1. The following organizations comply with the Contract Documents and are approved as acceptable Power Protection SCADA systems suppliers: a. Easter-Owens Electric, Co. b. Electrical Power Products (EP2). C. System Controls, Inc. 1.5 Definitions A. The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1- 1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 1. Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific measurement or control function. 2. Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 3. Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 4. Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 5. Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating accuracy for loop is defined as root-mean-square (RMS) of individual device operation accuracies. 6. Process: A progressively continuing operation that consists of a series of controlled actions systemically directed toward a particular result, e.g., a process to mix, filter, heat, and/or cool air to a particular condition. 7. Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent of the change which should result from the input change. 8. Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for the system to accomplish its functions. 9. System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software modules serving a common set of measurement or control functions. 10. Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 11. Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete subdivision of a process. Page 6 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 12. Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing panels or access doors. 13. Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 14. Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent part of the building. 15. Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within 5 horizontal feet from the field instrument. 16. Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog portion of a digital system or 1/0 subsystems. 1.6 Submittals A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures"and shall include: 1. Contractor shall submit a Project Execution Plan to the Owner and Engineer for approval. This plan shall include, at a minimum: a. A detailed work task breakdown. b. Estimated start and end dates of each work task listed an above work task breakdown. C. Estimated duration for each task listed in the above work task breakdown. d. A Gantt chart or equivalent scheduling report shall be acceptable. e. PCSS shall provide regular updates of the Project Execution Plan to Owner and Engineer. (1) Update schedules shall be agreed upon between PCSS and Owner / Engineer during pre-submittal meetings. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 01 - General Provisions. 2. As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original manufacturer's name and catalog number (re-labeled component information is not acceptable), original manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, electrical connections diagrams, and piping connection diagrams. 3. Electrical, piping, and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal identification information. 4. Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 5. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 6. Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling information. 7. Operator console configuration drawings shall include specific location of all keys and pushbuttons. 8. Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. 9. Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard software. Page 7 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction a. Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called programs. b. Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications along with the associated signal tag number. 10. Technical Manuals: a. Supply six sets of technical manuals with software specifications to Owner's Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard-cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2-1/2 inches. (1) Contractor shall provide a full, digital copy of the technical manuals with each bound set of manuals. b. Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating specified. These manuals shall provide the Owner with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 01 - General Provisions. 11. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"shall be followed. b. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. 12. Spare Parts List: Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer's review a master spare parts list of all Division 40 items. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. Equipment shall be the manufacturer's latest and proven design. In the event of a compatibility issue, Contractor furnished equipment may match current configuration of equipment and software currently in use by the Owner, if approved by the Owners Representative. B. The Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. Page 8 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction C. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be a part of a standard off-shelf configurable system of components readily available in the marketplace and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. 1. Unless otherwise noted, specified PLC processors, 1/0 modules, PLC power supplies, chassis, etc. shall be sole-sourced from Allen-Bradley. D. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets, input/output equipment and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. E. Equipment shall have adequate test points with controls or adjustments required for alignment and maintenance accessible from the front of the equipment. These test points shall provide sufficient isolation to prevent disturbance to the system due to accidental short circuit or other mismatch during routine test or maintenance practices. F. Alarm LED or LCD indicators shall be included and be clearly visible with covers in place to indicate any alarm or off-normal condition. G. Lamps, controls and test points shall be etched or clearly marked on all electronic equipment. 2.2 Operating Conditions A. Ambient Conditions: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of 5 watts operated at 24 inches from instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B. Field Locations: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 50 C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 100 percent with condensation. C. Power Supply: Power supply will be 120-volt AC, 1-phase, 60-Hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete system. PCCS shall provide a minimum of one (1) spare power supply per project. D. Equipment shall be designed to operate over the environmental, physical and primary power limits as specified herein without the use of blowers or other means of forced air circulation Equipment Limits Full Specification Performance 0 C (32 F)to +60 C (140 F) Storage -40 C (40 F)to +80 C (176 F) Altitude 15,000 ft. Humidity 5% to 95% Maximum, non-condensing Duty Conditions Continuous 2.3 Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Equipment shall comply with the Contract Documents and shall be produced by one of the following manufacturers: a. PLC/Network Equipment: (1) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) CompactLogix and ControlLogix (sole- source) Page 9 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction b. Power Protection SCADA System Equipment: (1) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL) (sole-source) C. Uninterruptible Power Supply: (1) APC. (Sole-source). (a) UPS systems shall be network compatible d. PC Interface Software: (1) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) FactoryTalk (sole-source) (2) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) RSLogix (sole-source) (3) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL)ACSELERATOR (sole-source) e. Network Devices (1) Moxa (Preferred) (2) Phoenix Contact (3) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL) (Power Protection System only) 2.4 Information on Drawings A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control elements. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 3. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 4. Location of equipment being controlled by system. B. The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings: 1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards supplying power to any device supplied under this Contract. 3. Detailed enclosure, instrument panel and junction box layouts, PLC enclosure layouts, control console layouts, fabrication details, and wiring diagrams. 4. Detailed system configuration. 5. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. 2.5 Spare Parts A. Contractor shall furnish all standard recommended spare parts as indicated in the Manufacturer's instruction manuals, for each component in the system. B. All supplied spare parts shall become the property of the Owner. C. All Division 40 spare parts shall be turned over to the Owner at one time and stored into lockable cabinets. 2.6 Materials and Equipment A. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. De-rate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted Page 10 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction equipment with 2 mils of solderable conformal coating complying with MIL-1-46058B. Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. B. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. 2.7 Project Requirements A. As a part of this Contract, the PCCS shall coordinate with the Owner, and with all the sub- systems suppliers and manufacturers, during bidding, construction, testing, installation and start-up phases of the project. The coordination is to assure that the instruments and sub- systems are in compliance with the Contract Documents and that the necessary tie-ins and interface signals with the Owner system are provided as specified or required. B. The PCCS shall provide the Owner's staff with all required training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the Owner, in addition to In-Plant SCADA training specified in Section 2.6 of this document. The training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 01 - General Provisions of these Specifications. C. The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided new, shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/Engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, tested and calibrated per manufacturer's recommendations and per these Contract Documents. D. Follow-Up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall make four trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, including the In-Plant SCADA system. The first trip shall be 3 months after acceptance of the complete system, and thereafter every 3 months for a total of four trips. These trips are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. All trips shall be coordinated with the Owner. E. All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the Owner stored on electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final test shall be supplied on the same medium. Page 11 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.8 Training A. General 1. A comprehensive training program shall be provided by the Contractor covering the operation and maintenance of all elements of the Control System. The cost of training programs for the Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract price. Where practical, the training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied. 2. Training shall be conducted at the Owner's facilities. 3. Training shall be tailored to the specific needs and requirements of each individual project. Project-specific training requirements shall be defined by the Owner. 4. Training classes shall be tailored to the specific needs of the class participants. Separate curricula shall be developed for Operators, Maintenance Staff, and Control System Administrators. All Technicians, Operators, Engineers, and Managers of the Facility shall require training on the Process Control System (PCS). The training courses shall address operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the system provided. The courses shall be designed specifically for the type of personnel attending, such as Operators, Engineers, etc. 5. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. 6. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. 7. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to Owner. 8. Contractor shall videotape all training sessions and provide recordings in a digital format, either flash drive or externally powered hard drive as determined by the Owner, as a formal submittal to the Owner. All training digital recordings shall become the sole property of the Owner. 9. All instructors shall be highly qualified for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only Control System functionality but also professional training techniques. Trainers should have no other duties that would interrupt training. Training shall not be combined with other activities such as Control System configuration or startup. Vendor Provided Training shall be conducted by Factory Authorized and Certified Trainers. Resumes and evidence of Qualifications of Instructors shall be provided as part of the Test Plan and subject to the approval of the Owner/Engineer. 10. Complete, professional, training materials shall be provided for all training classes including training plan and schedule, training manuals (in addition to Control System documentation), and review/testing materials. The training manuals shall be designed to not only assists the student's comprehension of the course material but also to serve as reference documents after the completion of training. Training materials shall be provided to students one week prior to class. The Owner reserves the right to make additional copies of training materials. 11. Training courses shall be a combination of classroom and hands-on training. To the extent possible, hands-on training shall utilize components from the new Control System. 12. Prior to any training taking place, Contractor shall conduct workshops with the Owner and Engineer to identify specific training requirements, to define training courses, and to develop training plans for approval by Owner/Engineer. B. Training Plan 1. The training plan shall include complete descriptions of all training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed training manuals, and a description of any special training tools available Page 12 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training, etc.). 2. Owner/Engineer shall review the training plan for assurance that the training planned by the Contractor shall meet the training needs. Special emphasis shall be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors. If a concern arises about the qualifications of particular instructors, the Contractor shall provide video tapes of classes taught by the proposed instructors. If the Owner determines that the proposed instructors are not sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses, the Contractor shall identify additional qualified instructors. C. Vendor Provided Training 1. Vendor provided training is intended to provide foundational training for equipment provided by the PCSS. This training shall be conducted by factory authorized trainers for each type of equipment discussed below: 2. Control System Software Training a. HMI Software b. System Administrator Software C. Reporting Software d. Historian Software e. Network Management Software f. PLC/RTU Software Training 3. Control System Hardware Training a. HMI Hardware b. Server Hardware C. Reporting Hardware d. Historian Hardware e. Network Management Hardware f. PLC/RTU Hardware Training D. Control System Specific Training 1. Training Manuals a. Comprehensive training manuals shall be provided for all training courses. The manuals shall be professionally written to present the course material in a format that is easy to comprehend. The manuals shall serve as teaching aids during presentation of the training classes and shall additionally serve as reference material after the training has been completed. It shall not be acceptable for the Contractor to use Control System technical documentation solely as the training manuals since Control System documentation is generally not written in an instructional format. Portions of Control System documentation may be incorporated into training manuals provided that the overall manual achieves an instructional format. b. If the Contractor proposes to use standard training manuals, these manuals shall be revised or appended to reflect Control System characteristics specific to this Contract. 2. Required Training Courses a. Training courses shall be tailored to meet the specific needs of several distinct groups of Owner personnel. The specific categories and number of personnel in each category are identified in the following paragraphs. Class sizes shall be restricted to the number of students that can easily be accommodated. Classes that involve extensive hands-on activities (such as operator training, maintenance training, and software engineering) shall be limited to five students per class. Supervisor and Page 13 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction overview courses may include up to ten participants. At least two sessions of each course shall be presented to satisfy class size restrictions and conflicts in Owner personnel scheduling. Additional sessions shall be presented if required to accommodate the total number of personnel identified for each course. b. All training classes shall be scheduled Monday— Friday. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for specific times. C. The intent of the training program is to provide the Owner's personnel with comprehensive instruction in all subjects and areas necessary for the efficient configuration, troubleshooting and repair, maintenance, and use of the Control System. If the Contractor's standard training curriculum includes courses in addition to those discussed below and which are necessary for the efficient configuration, maintenance, and use of the Control System, the Contractor shall also provide these courses. Following is a description of the categories of training to be provided. 3. Operator Training a. Training courses shall be presented that instruct the Control System operators in the efficient operation of all aspects of the Control System. The course material shall include not only the general operation of the Control System but also the operation of the specific Control System features require by this Contract. In particular, the operator training shall include instruction on the use of all operational functionality including, but not limited to alarm logging, trending, and the process displays, database, reports, and control software. 4. Software Maintenance Training a. Training courses shall be presented that shall enable Owner programmers to develop and maintain all aspects of the Control System software. Separate sessions shall be presented that deal with the following topics: 1). Process database development and modification 2). Historical database development and modification 3). Process display development and modification 4). Supervisory Control strategy development and modification 5). Report development and modification 6). Web Server Application development and modification 7). Supervisory control development and modification 8). General software maintenance, including Control System backup, restoration and archiving. b. These courses shall address the procedures for the standard Control System software, plus material explaining the specific conventions and procedures used by the Contractor in developing the new Control System applications. The courses shall provide instruction in techniques for developing and maintaining current, comprehensive documentation for all applications. C. Control Application Training 1). A dedicated course shall be presented which addresses the customized software development and control strategy programming. 5. Specific Training a. Human Machine Interface (HMI) Software Training. This training shall be performed by PCSS. (1) Provide one week's manufacturer's standard training course for three (3) of Owner's personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, and installation of the HMI software supplied. Page 14 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (2) This training shall be conducted no more than two (2) months before the Witnessed Test (WFT) (3) The following training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) Database generation (b) Display generation (c) Alarm system and configuration (d) Historical data system configuration (e) Report generation (f) Security system (g) Trending system (h) Remote communications (i) Software configuration 0) OLE applications (k) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (1) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (4) Training shall include classroom and hands-on instruction such that a student with experience in process instrumentation can configure the HMI with no guidance or with only minimal supervision when attempting complex problems. b. Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) Hardware and Software (1) Provide manufacturer's standard training course for three (3) of the Owner's personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, installation, and maintenance of the PLC hardware and software supplied. The courses shall be conducted in two groups for one week each. (2) The training shall be conducted no more than two (2) months before the Witnessed Test. (3) The hardware and software courses shall not be concurrent. (4) The following hardware training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) Hardware maintenance for the PLC equipment provided (b) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (c) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (d) Component removal and replacement (e) Periodic maintenance (5) The following software training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) System configuration (b) Application specific program development/programming (c) Uploading/downloading programs (d) Documenting program/configuration (e) System backups and reload procedures (f) TCP/IP addressing procedures (g) Network communications configuration Page 15 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Integrated Process Control System Training a. Human Machine Interface (HMI) (1) Integrated Process Control System Training shall be performed by individuals directly involved in development and implementation of the Process Control System for this project. All instructors shall be highly qualified for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only HMI functionality but also professional training techniques. Training personnel shall be intimately familiar with the control system equipment, its manipulation, and configuration. Training shall be conducted by Factory Authorized and Certified Trainers. Training personnel shall command knowledge of system debugging, program modification, troubleshooting, maintenance procedure, system operation, and programming, and shall be capable of transferring this knowledge in an orderly fashion to technically oriented personnel. (2) Training and instruction shall be specific to the system that is being supplied. (3) Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner's system. (4) Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the Owner's personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, backup, and historical archival/retrieval procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation (h) Windows 7 operation and maintenance as it pertains accessing the control system - HMI for this project. (i) System backups and reload procedures 0) TCP/IP addressing procedures b. Project-specific Process Control System Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware and Software Configuration Training (1) Five (5) 1-day session for three (3) of the Owner's personnel shall be held before the FDT, but not more than one month before the FDT. (2) Training and instruction shall be specific to the system that is being supplied. (3) Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner's system. (4) Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the Owner's personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: Page 16 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, backup, and historical archival/retrieval procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation (h) Windows 7 operation and maintenance as it pertains accessing the control system - PLC for this project. C. Network equipment and devices (1) Provide training on network switches, modems, and satellite radios. (2) The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, and backup procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation d. Integrated training (1) Provide integrated training on operating the SCADA network and Process Control System as a whole. Training shall demonstrate dependencies of system element, system-level troubleshooting, health monitoring, problem diagnosis, etc. E. Field Training 1. Field Instruments a. Provide a minimum of four (4) separate one 8-hour hardware training and instruction sections on the maintenance of the field instrumentation for four (4) of the Owners instrumentation technicians. The training will be broken up into separate groups — those that maintain, those that operate and those who own the system. This training shall be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but no more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall take place at the Owners facility. As a minimum the following shall be included: (1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided (2) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract (3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (5) Periodic maintenance Page 17 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Panel Instruments a. Provide a minimum of one 8-hour hardware training and instruction in the maintenance of the panel instrumentation for four (4) of the Owners technicians. Training should be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but not more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owners facility and at a minimum the following shall be included: (1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided (2) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and configured for this Contract (3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (5) Periodic maintenance 3. Panel Functions a. Provide a minimum of two 2-hour training sessions for four (4) shifts of Owner's operations personnel on the detailed operation of the touch screen panel. This training shall be conducted within two (2) days of the completion of the Field Demonstration Test at times suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owner's facility and at a minimum, the following shall be included: (1) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract. F. Management Seminar 1. Provide Management Seminar for the Owner's personnel at the Owner's facility. The objective of this seminar is to provide non-operations/maintenance personnel with an overview understanding of the process control system. The attendees will be the Owner's management, engineering, and other non-operations personnel. The seminar shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. An overview of the process control system explaining how the hardware and software supplied under this Contract is used for the operation and control of the facilities. b. A block diagram presentation of the process control system showing how and what information flow within the System and what is done by each functional unit. C. An explanation of the operator interfaces including a demonstration of how to use an HMI to access displays, reports, control, etc. d. A walk-through of the installed system explaining each of the items covered in the functional unit's discussion. The features and functions of operator controls and interfaces shall be discussed. G. Follow-up Training 1. When requested by the Owner during the warranty period for the SCADA System and Instruments, one addition training session shall per provided for each type of training session as required in other sections of this specification. Requirements for follow-up training are the same as those stated in other training session sections of this specification. Follow-up training sessions shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner. Page 18 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.9 WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE, AND SUPPORT SERVICES A. Support Duration 1. All warranty, maintenance and support services specified shall be included in the Contract and shall be in full effect for a period of 36 months commencing upon Final Acceptance. The warranty for each piece of equipment shall transfer to the Owner and continue until expiration of the manufacturer's warranty, if period is longer. B. Technical Support 1. Technical support shall be available from a Factory Regional Office or local Authorized Trained Representative of the software Supplier. 2. Factory technical support shall be available from degreed Engineers familiar with the software and typical industrial applications. 3. Telephone technical support, voice and e-mail, shall be available weekdays and weekends and holidays. 4. Technical support shall be offered for the life of the product, and for a minimum of 1 year after it is discontinued. 5. The vendor must have a record of providing a continuous upgrade path for the product. C. Control System Warranty 1. The Control System warranty shall consist of a full scope, in-place warranty. All hardware, software and applications shall be covered by the warranty. Any failures in System functionality as compared to Final Acceptance shall be corrected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate any warranties provided by third party suppliers. 2. Warranty Requirements for Analog Devices: Each device shall perform its intended function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of 6 months. Downtime of analog devices affecting more than eight loops shall be considered a system failure. D. Preventive Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing preventive maintenance. All equipment shall be systematically inspected, cleaned, aligned, adjusted, lubricated, calibrated and otherwise serviced as required to assure proper performance. Equipment manufacturer service recommendations shall be followed where applicable. 2. The preventive maintenance service interval (time-between-service activities) for each piece of equipment shall be that recommended by the equipment manufacturer in accordance with industry practice or six months, whichever is less. The cost to provide preventive maintenance during this period including parts, labor, travel, and subsistence, shall be included in the contract price. Prior to start of in-service use of each part of the Control System, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a schedule for this maintenance service. 3. All preventive maintenance activities shall be documented with service reports which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe all work performed, and list materials used. The report shall also include the name of the technician performing the work and his signature. A copy of all service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. 4. All preventive maintenance procedures shall be planned and accomplished in such a manner as to minimize disruption of the Pump Station Control System operation. No preventive maintenance procedure shall be allowed to jeopardize the Owner's ability to monitor and Control System operation. Page 19 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. At the Owner's option, Owner's maintenance personnel may participate in any preventive maintenance procedures. E. Corrective Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing corrective maintenance on all Control System hardware and software. 2. The Contractor shall provide a 24-hour, 7-day/week-service hotline for telephone notification of Control System malfunctions. Within 2 hours from notification by the Owner of defective Control System operation, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative establish telephone contact with the Owner's maintenance personnel to discuss short-term corrective measures. 3. If it is not possible to correct the defective operation as a result of the telephone contact, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative at the location of the installed Control System within 4 hours from initial notification. 4. The service representative shall perform all necessary inspections and diagnostic tests to determine the source of the defect and to establish a corrective action plan. The corrective action plan shall be developed such that the defect is corrected as quickly as possible and with the least impact on the operation of the Owner's facilities. Prior to beginning any repair or replacement procedure, the Contractor shall review the corrective action plan with the Owner in order to inform him of the planned course of action and to allow assessment of any impact that course of action might have on the operation of the Owner's facilities. At Owner's option, Owner maintenance personnel may participate in any corrective maintenance procedures. 5. If possible, the service representative shall effect replacement or repair of the defective component before leaving the site using replacement parts from the spare parts inventory delivered with the Control System. Otherwise, the corrective action plan shall include a detailed schedule for the planned course of action. Once the defect has been corrected, the corrective action plan shall be updated indicating the source of the defect and specific corrective action taken. A copy of the updated corrective action plan shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. Any spares from the onsite supply of spares used by the Contractor in correcting the Control System malfunction shall be replaced within 15 days. 6. If 24-hour response time is not provided, or other corrective maintenance requirements are not met by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to obtain corrective maintenance from other sources and charge the Contractor reasonable costs of the alternative maintenance services, including parts, labor, travel, and subsistence. Warranty shall not be affected. 7. The Owner, at Owner's option, may elect to employ its own maintenance staff to locate and remove a defective component. Warranty shall not be affected. 8. In this case the Owner shall return the defective component to a repair location as instructed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace the defective component and return the properly working unit to the Owner within 15 days. F. Software Maintenance 1. After any equipment has been placed in service and tested, Owner personnel shall be permitted, at no additional cost to the Owner; to add, modify, and delete Owner provided software. Performance of such actions by the Owner shall not release the Contractor from satisfying any guarantee or maintenance requirements, or any other specified requirements. G. Software Update Services 1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test, and commission updates to the Control System software and computer provided software within 30 days from when such Page 20 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction updates are announced and released by the manufacturer. 2. Execution of all updates shall be subject to review and approval of the Owner prior to commencement of the work. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring proper operation of all updates, including "bug fixes" or revisions to the update for 12 months after Support Duration for updates installed less than 12 months prior to Support Duration end date. 4. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. -change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The Contractor shall schedule and administer a minimum of three (3) mandatory coordination meetings. The Contractor shall make arrangements for these meetings; prepare agendas with copies delivered to the participants at least one (1) week before the scheduled meetings. These meetings shall be held at an Owner's designated facility and shall include, as a minimum, attendance by the Owner, Engineer, Contractor's Project Engineer, Process Control System Supplier(PCSS), Project Engineer and the Electrical Sub-Contractor. 1. The first coordination meeting shall be held in advance of the first PCSS shop drawing, PLC programming and HMI screen submittals. The purpose of the first meeting shall be for the PCSS to: a. Summarize their understanding of the Project. b. Discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives. C. Schedule testing and delivery milestone dates. d. Provide a forum for the PCSS and the Owner to coordinate hardware and software related issues. e. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer. f. The PCSI shall bring draft versions of shop drawings, PLC programming and HMI screens to the meetings to provide the basis for the Owner or Engineer's input into their development. 2. The remaining coordination meetings shall be held no more than one month prior to site testing for each location. The purpose of these meetings is to discuss any remaining coordination requirements. 3. A typical agenda for the subsequent meetings may include, but shall not be limited to the following: a. Review minutes of the previous meeting. b. Review of the work in progress. C. Field observations, problems, and decisions. d. Identification of problems or issues that may impede planned progress. e. Review development of testing plans and schedules. f. Review of submittal schedule and submittal status. g. Maintenance of progress schedule. h. Corrective measures to regain progress schedules. i. Planned activities for subsequent work period. j. Coordination of work progress. Page 21 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction k. Effect of any proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. I. Other business relating to the work. 3.2 Installation A. Wire and Conduit: 1. Refer to the following specifications: a. 26.05.00 "Common Work Results for Electrical" b. 26.05.19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" C. 26.05.19.1 "Wire Connections and Devices" d. 26.05.26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" e. 40.90.01 "Instrumentation" f. Any and all other specifications pertaining to the installation, termination and grounding of instrument systems. 2. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 3. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 4. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 5. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes and equipment. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 6. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures. 7. Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is #16 AWG, unless otherwise noted. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp-on connector applied on the wire end. 8. Use the following color code for 120/240-V, single-phase wiring: Wiring Color Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green 9. Ground paired shielded at the PLC end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. The shield of shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. 10. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, enclosures, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid PVC conduit. Make connections to Page 22 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction equipment with solderless steel connections. Wire connections to ground rods shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 11. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. 12. Ground conductors shall be bare tinned copper where directly buried and insulated in all other cases. 13. Underground conduit which is not below a concrete slab on grade shall be sand encased. Conduit which is below the finished grade shall be rigid PVC. 14. At the transition from underground, protect PVC conduit from mechanical damage by extending rigid steel conduit a maximum of 12 inches and a minimum of 4 inches into the earth or concrete at the transition. 15. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3 inches from adjacent conduit and shall not be closer than 1 inch from any reinforcement bars. 16. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any exposed installations unless specified. 17. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. 18. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 18 inches deep to the top of the sand encasement. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at intervals to ensure that proper spacing's are maintained. 19. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture. Provide for automatic draining at low points. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. 20. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. 21. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the approval of the Owner's representative. 22. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3-inch separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 1 inch. 23. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces, strut channel clamps, or one-hole straps with clamp backs. 24. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints. 25. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of channels with conduit straps or clamps. 26. Flexible metal (steel) conduit shall be used for final connections to any and all instrumentation, transmitters, video cameras and vibration producing equipment, control devices, and in locations where structural conditions make the use of rigid conduit Page 23 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction impractical. Flexible metal conduit shall be of the liquid-tight type. A separate, external ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections in a spiral manner in accordance with NEC article 250-95. Flexible metal (steel) conduit lengths shall not exceed 18" unless approved by Owner or by the Owner's Representative before installation. 27. Enclosure conduit or cable entry shall be bottom or side penetrations only. No top or back penetrations into enclosures shall be allowed. Side penetrations shall occur in the lower 25% of enclosure side only unless otherwise approved by Owner or be the Owner's Representative. B. Cable Installation: 1. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 2. Cable shall be laid straight without splices except in the case of accidental damage, but without tension applied at any time. Slight snaking of the cable will be permitted. Backfill on the cable shall be pulverized material free from stones, rock or other hard or sharp materials which might damage the cable. 3. All cables shall be handled with care at all times. The cable reel shall be shaft mounted or supported in such a manner as to keep the cable and reel from coming in contact with the ground or other foreign objects which might cause damage to the cable. At no time shall the wire be dragged along the ground or across objects. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall be 24 inches in all case of direction change. Care shall be taken to see that twists or bends of small radii do not occur. Any instance of damaged wire, observed at any time whether prior to installation, during installation, or discovered by test or observation subsequent to installation, shall be immediately called to the attention of the Owner's representative. 4. The method of repair or correction of such damage shall be in accordance with the written instructions of the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall promptly repair such damage or make such corrections in accordance with such written instruction of the Owner's representative. 5. Minor damage to the outer jacket of the cable which penetrates to a depth not to exceed 0.02 inch, observed prior to or occurring during construction, may be repaired if approved by the Owner's representative by covering the damaged section of the jacketed with two layers of a suitable 10-mil vinyl tape, each layer half-lapped extending 6 inches beyond the end of the damaged section, and Glyptal coated. 6. Damage to cable of greater severity than that set forth above, observed prior to or during construction, shall be immediately called to the attention of the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall promptly repair such damage or make such corrections in accordance with such written instruction of the Owner's representative. 7. Damage to the cable subsequent to burial, discovered either through test or observation shall be repaired by a method approved by the Owner's representative. This may involve the replacement of a short section of cable with splices made in additional terminal housings, or the replacement of an entire section between terminal housings already installed. No buried splices shall be used for repairing damaged cable. 8. All splices of the cable shall be made in junction boxes or pull boxes. Where installation procedures require the Contractor to splice the cable, boxes or enclosures appropriate to the location of the splice shall be installed as required at the Contractor's expense. The location of such boxes or enclosures shall be directed by the Owner's representative. 9. Where cable is cut and box or enclosure is not immediately installed, the cable end shall be sealed by means of rubber boots, or plastic tape. Page 24 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Antennas and Coaxial Cable: 1. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 2. Antenna shall be oriented for the correct polarization and securely fastened to the mast. Mast shall be aligned so as to be vertical and clear of obstructions or overhead lines. Mast shall be mounted at least 10 feet from any components of the system being monitored. Mast shall be adequately grounded. Orient the antennas in the direction required. Coaxial cable shall be restrained from movement on mast by clamps and hangers placed at 3-foot intervals. All coaxial connections, hangers and fittings are to be tightened to ensure good contacts and secure installation. Feedline losses shall not exceed 1 dB. 3. All connections shall be waterproof and weather resistant. A drip loop shall be provided at wall penetration to avoid water migration. Care shall be exercised to avoid exceeding the bending radius or number of bends for the coaxial cable as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. For wall penetrations, a penetration kit specifically manufactured for the purpose and specified herein shall be used. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Field fabrications shall not be accepted. 5. Grounding of the coaxial cable shall be with the use of a manufactured kit specifically designed for that purpose. Field fabrications shall not be accepted. END OF SECTION Page 25 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. Contractor shall furnish any and all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment required for a complete and operational instrumentation and controls system. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and the existing instrumentation and control equipment or equipment furnished and installed under other contracts. B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. C. Any and all supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. D. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. E130064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all instrumentation installations. E. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel and with the Owner during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. F. This Specification lists and describes all instrumentation and control equipment currently approved for use by the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which monitoring and control instrumentation and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project instrumentation system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents. 1.2 Quality Assurance A. General: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer's latest and proven design. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. B. Operating Voltage: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120-volt, 1-phase, 60-Hertz AC nominal or 24-volts DC nominal, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. C. Power Supplies: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the instrumentation. Page 1 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Protection: 1. The instrumentation system supplier shall be responsible for input-output isolation of all incoming and outgoing signals. 2. Each 4-20 mA DC process measurement current loop installed on this contract which extends outside control room shall be protected by insertion of a fuse, Buss Type MKB, or circuit breaker with the amperage rating as described in the drawings and specifications. Fuses shall be installed in standard fuse blocks with blown-fuse indicators. 3. The necessary fuses, circuit breakers or switches required by the Instrumentation Manufacturer for that equipment shall be provided with the equipment. The instruments requiring an internal power supply shall have an internal On-Off switch. E. Input/Output: 1. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, analog inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as required to meet instrument specifications and to make the instrumentation system fully operational. 2. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, digital inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 24-DC status / control signals. Loop isolators, repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make instrumentation system fully operational. a. For digital signals requiring input / control voltages other than 24VDC, interposing relays with the proper coil voltage ratings shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as required to meet instrument specifications and to make the instrumentation system fully operational. 3. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, non-critical process analog and digital inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems transmitted via communications shown shall utilize MODBUS protocols. Any protocol converters shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as required to meet instrument specifications and to make the instrumentation system fully operational. a. Any analog and/or digital input or output signals transmitted via communications protocols shall be defined by the Owner, and shall be non-process critical unless otherwise noted. 1.3 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals"for all required submittal requirements. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. 1.4 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards"for all applicable standards. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. 1.5 Job Conditions A. Spare Parts: Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Page 2 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction Part 2, Section 2.5, Paragraph A: "Spare Parts"for all spare parts requirements. B. Special Tools: Contractor shall furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment (meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate any item under this Section of the specification shall be furnished. PART2 PRODUCTS This Specification lists and describes all instrumentation and control equipment currently approved for use by the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which monitoring and control instrumentation and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project instrumentation system is fully functional and operational upon completion. A. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents. 2.1 Remote Equipment A. Controls for remote electrically operated or motor driven equipment shall be complete, including any and all necessary auxiliary relays or controls so as to require only wiring and connections to the equipment control circuit. Contacts for control of remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment shall be rated not less than 10 amperes at 120 volts unless otherwise specified herein. B. Remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment shall have a separate 120-volt control circuit which operates through the dry contacts provided by the instrumentation system. 2.2 Junction Boxes/Instrument Panels A. Furnish and install any junction boxes and instrumentation panels at the locations indicated on the contract documents and drawings. Cabinets shall be NEMA 4X, made of 316 S.S. with an 11 gauge mounting panel inside. Dimensions of the cabinets shall be as indicated on the plans. Cabinets shall have a hinged front door and shall be Hoffman or approved equal. B. Instrumentation control panels shall be mounted in such a manner that the center of any primary control display screens or interface screens shall be no less than 66" (5-6") or greater than 72" (6-0") above grade or operator platform. Any deviation from these dimensions shall require Owner or Owner-Representative approval prior to any control panel installation. 1. Instrumentation or control junction boxes shall be mounted in such a manner that the center of junction box shall maintain the same elevations as defined in Paragraph 2.2.13 unless otherwise approved by Owner or Owner-Representative. C. Any front door mounted instruments shall be as indicated on the plans. In addition, cabinets may contain backplane mounted instruments and equipment. Instruments and equipment which are not indicated to be mounted on the front door by the plans shall be mounted on the backplane of the instrument panel. D. Indicating lamps on the front door shall be rated NEMA 4X, shall have a LED cluster type of lamp, operated on 120-VAC and shall be push to test. Indicating lamps shall be Square D SKT38LAA31 or approved equal. E. Pushbuttons and rotary switches shall be Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. Page 3 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction F. Instrument control panel wiring shall conform to the following: 1. Single conductor wire shall be stranded, tinned 18 AWG and TEW insulation, as manufactured by American Insulated Wire or approved equal. Control panel internal wiring shall conform to the color coding table as specified in Section 40 90 02 "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Systems", Part 2, Paragraph 2.2A.3.a. 2. Shielded pair cable for 4-20 mA DC loops shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3. Ground paired shielded cables at the PLC end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. The shield of shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. 4. Each conductor terminated under a screw head shall have a crimp on spade terminal applied to its end prior to its termination. 5. Each conductor has its own number and no number is used more than once. 6. The number of each wire is placed at both ends of the wire next to its end according to wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 7. The wire numbers, as actually installed, shall match the numbers on the shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams of the instrument panel. 8. Wiring shall be run enclosed in plastic wireway wherever possible. Wireways shall be installed as required to enclose panel wiring. Where the use of plastic wireway is not practical, conductors shall be bundled and run open. Conductors run open shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals not to exceed 6 inches with nylon ties, or approved equal. Wires within a bundle are to be run parallel to one another and not twisted. Bundles shall have a uniform appearance, circular cross-section, and shall be securely fastened to the panel framework. Conductors carrying different voltages that are from the same source may occupy the same wireway provided all are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the wireway. Wiring carrying voltages that originate at different source shall not run in the same wireway. G. Instrument control panel components shall conform to the following: 1. Interposing relays contained in instrumentation and control cabinets shall be DIN-rail mounted-type unless otherwise noted. Relays shall be rated for both 24VDC and 120- 125VAC. Relays shall be Weidmuller Model TRS24-230-VUC1CO, P/N# 1984610000 or Model TRS24-230-VUC2CO, P/N# 1123580000. Cross-Connectors shall be Weidmuller Model TERMSERIES, P/N: 1391600000. Spacers shall be installed at an interval of 4 relays per spacer to provide heat dissipation. 2. Terminal blocks shall be installed for wire terminations. Terminal blocks shall be Allen- Bradley 1492-JDG3FB, with associated accessories (Cross-Connectors: 1492-SJ8A-4, End Anchors: 1492-GM35). Terminal blocks shall be combined on steel DIN rail to form terminal strips. DIN rail shall be mounted on 3.75" (minimum) stand-off to elevate it above the enclosure back panel. Each terminal strip shall have hinged marking surfaces which snap on. Typewritten labels shall denote terminal strip numbers and shall match numbers shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. Marking surfaces shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-GMC. 3. Any analog signal wiring terminating in equipment with AC voltage exceeding 120VAC shall require signal isolators. Isolators shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, and shall have the following part numbers: a. Active Isolators: 931 S-Al Al N-DC, 931 S-A2A2N-DC b. Passive Isolator/Splitter: 931 S-A2A5N-OP Page 4 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. Instrument/ control panels requiring power supplies shall utilize SOLA 120VAC / 24VDC 30W, P/N SCP30S24-DN or SOLA 120VAC/24VDC 240W, P/N SDN 10-24-100P. H. Provide a specification grade single pole circuit breaker, Siemens 5YS-series or approved equal, for incoming and panel 120VAC power inside the instrument / control panel. Circuit breaker rating shall be adequate to power all instrument panel loads but shall not be greater than 20 amps. I. A print pocket shall be provided in the panel and shall contain an 11 x 17 control schematic and an 11 x 17 wiring diagram or diagrams. The wiring diagram shall contain all wire numbers, device names and terminal numbers. Drawings shall be laminated in clear plastic for preservation of the drawings. J. All penetrations into boxes shall be made into the bottom of the enclosure or lower 25% of the sides of the boxes, utilizing fittings made for the specific conditions in which the enclosure is installed and sealed accordingly. Penetrations into the top or back of enclosures shall not be allowed. 2.3 Tubing A. All instrumentation tubing shall be 316S.S. Stainless Steel unless dictated otherwise due to process considerations. Tubing shall be manufactured by Parker, Swagelok or approved equal. Allowable tubing sizes shall be as follows: 1. 1/4" O.D., .035" wall thickness, 5100PSI working pressure @ 200' F. 2. 3/8" O.D., .035" wall thickness, 3300PSI working pressure @ 200' F. 3. 1/2" O.D., .049" wall thickness, 3700PSI working pressure @ 200' F. B. Tubing fittings shall be 316S.S. compression-type fittings as manufactured by Parker, Swagelok or other approved equal. C. Hydraulic connections to instruments shall be made with separable stainless steel Swagelok fittings so that fittings may be separated and reassembled without reworking tubing ends and without incurring any leaks. 2.4 VenturiFlow Tubes A. Tubes shall be of the pressure differential producing type constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B. B. The throat liner shall be constructed of bronze, ASTM B61. C. Uncalibrated accuracy shall be within plus or minus 0.5 percent of actual rate. Head loss shall not exceed 6.0 percent. D. The entrance Section shall consist of the uniform arc of a circle, the radius of which shall be continuous with the throat. E. Provide flanges that match the pipe on which the flow tubes are attached. The flanges shall meet the specifications for the pipe as specified in this document. Determine that the flow tube is compatible with the pipe as indicated on the plans and specifications. F. The metering element shall not have debris collecting cavities or annular chambers, but shall have a single pressure connection at the inlet and throat. In addition, vent ports and drains shall be included on a 90-degree plane to the metering taps. Brass of 316 stainless steel ball valve type process block valves shall be connected at the high and low meter taps. G. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and performance. The data shall include: 1. Coefficient values of tolerance. 2. Effects of upstream configurations. Page 5 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Head loss as a function of the velocity head expended. H. The flow tubes shall be Type PMT as manufactured by the Badger Meter Manufacturing Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or other approved equal with a lab test of uncalibrated accuracy and loss measurement for each of the flow tubes furnished or an exact duplicate of each. 2.5 Insert VenturiFlow Tubes A. Furnish and install concentric low head loss type insert flow tubes complete with head recovery section as indicated on the plans. The upstream entrance section, holding flange, and downstream recovery core section shall be of carbon steel. The throat liner shall be stainless steel and shall include an internal annulus from which the low pressure metering taps shall be made through the holding flange, requiring no drilling or tapping of the pipeline itself. The entrance shall be nozzle type, the radius of which shall be continuous with the throat section. There shall not be any protrusion, sharp-edged annulus, or slot, or other sediment collecting areas exposed to the flow stream. B. High and low pressure ports shall have isolation valves. C. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and performance. The data shall include: 1. Coefficient values and tolerance. 2. Effects of upstream configurations. 3. Head loss as a function of the velocity head expended. D. The insert flow tubes shall be Type PMT-IF as manufactured by the Badger Meter Mfg. Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or approved equal. 2.6 Orifice Plates A. Orifice plates shall be 316 stainless steel, concentric bored, with 300 psi forged steel flanges. Orifice shall be bored per ISA recommended practices RP3.2 for puddle type orifice plates. Flanges shall conform to ANSI pressure ratings, threaded type with raised face, and 1/2-inch NPT pressure taps. Holding rings shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. Orifice plates shall be Taylor model 7-20, Foxboro or approved equal. 2.7 Parshall Flumes A. Parshall flumes shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced polyester resin laminate. Throat size shall be in accordance with the contract documents. Flumes shall have accurate internal dimensions conforming to those shown in the latest revisions of United States Department of Agriculture Circular 843. Flumes shall be molded in one integral piece containing the approach, throat, and downstream section. B. The inside surface of the flume shall be smooth and free of any irregularities. Flumes shall have a minimum 1/4-inch wall thickness, be self-supporting and require no external supporting structure, and be provided with sufficient flanges, reinforcing ribs, and/or anchoring ribs to prevent distortion during shipment, installation, and operation as well as providing for permanent anchorage in the concrete. C. One-piece flumes shall be ready and suitable for setting in the channel formwork, prior to pouring the concrete or shall be suitable for grouting into place in boxouts provided in the structural concrete. Flumes shall be furnished with fiberglass tie strips or aluminum tie rods across the top of the flumes to retain the vertical sides during concrete placement. Depending upon configuration, ties can be removed or remain in place after construction and during operation. Unit shall be provided with an integrally cast level sensor mounting track. Mounting track shall be compatible with specified level instrumentation. D. Cook's gelcoat no. 9441-181 shall be used to produce a blue flame color. Parshall flumes Page 6 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction shall be by Badger Meter, Inc., Tulsa, OK or approved equal. 2.8 Palmer Bowlus Flumes A. Palmer-Bowlus flumes for installation in the pipeline channel shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester including an integral approach section. Flumes shall have an integral mounting track for an ultrasonic sensor for flowrate measurement in the flumes. The inside surface shall be white gelcoat, smooth, and free form irregularities. The outside surface shall be provided with clips suitable for anchoring to concrete. B. Flumes shall be molded of isophthalic polyester resin and fiberglass to form a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch throughout (18 size and larger to 1/4-inch thick minimum). Flumes shall be as manufactured by Plasti-Fab, Tualatin, Oregon or approved equal. 2.9 V-Notch Weir Plates A. V-Notch weir plates shall be constructed of the dimensions indicated on the plans and shall be constructed of 1/4-inch thick 3003-H14 aluminum plate as sold by Reynolds Aluminum Co., Grand Prairie, Texas or approved equal. 2.10 Doppler Type Sonic Flow Transmitters A. Sonic flow meters shall be of the Doppler type consisting of a sensing element and a transmitter. Transmitter shall be powered by 120-volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase. Transmitter shall provide for indicating, totalizing, signal strength indication and transmitting of flow rate in a full pipe. A signal strength meter with separate loss-of-signal indication shall be provided with circuitry to drive all outputs to zero upon loss of signal. The sensor shall be of the twin- crystal type containing a separate transmit and receive device designed to operate continuously at temperatures of 300' F and shall be supplied as a single submersible assembly with jacketed flexible armored cable. The sensing element circuitry shall be solid- state and transformer isolated and designed to meet intrinsic-safe requirements. B. Transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure with gasketed shatter-proof window for rate indicator and analog signal strength indicator and shall be corrosion resistant. Electronic circuits shall to be Mil-Spec coated with anti-fungus compound. Transmitter shall include a calibration dial and adjustments for sensitivity, span and zero. Housing shall be suitable for wall and pipe stand mounting. Transmitter output shall be 4-20 mA DC proportional to flow and optically isolated. C. Each transmitter shall include integrally mounted transient protection to protect the instrument against lightening-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. D. Linearity shall be within plus or minus 0.5 percent of full span; repeatability shall be within plus or minus 0.1 percent accuracy shall be within plus or minus 2.0 percent full span. Transmitter shall be able to operate within a temperature range of-10 F to +140 F. E. Sonic flowmeters shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily in the application described below or the purchase and removal costs shall be refunded to the Owner in the event of failure. Sonic flowmeters shall be Panametrics. 2.11 Transit Time Ultrasonic Flow Transmitters A. The flowmeter shall consist of two acoustic sensors, their associated mounting hardware, an electronic transmitter and accessories as required for the installation. The flowmeter shall produce a 4-20 mA DC signal, linear with the flow in the pipe over the specified flow range. Mounting of the primary element shall be certified acceptable for seismic qualification as specified in "IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1 E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" by an independent laboratory. Page 7 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Two flow sensors shall be permanently mounted to the pipe to insure accurate and stable measurement of flow. The sensors shall be positioned in accordance with the Manufacturer's specifications with factory approved methods. Mounting templates and/or fixtures for sensor attachments shall be provided by the manufacturer. C. Ajunction box shall be mounted on the pipe, and each acoustic sensor shall be connected to this box. The electrical cables between the sensor mounting site and the junction box shall be contained in a flexible, water-tight, submersible electrically-conductive conduit. Wiring between the junction box and the electronic transmitter housing shall be as described in these specifications and all cable and wiring from sensor to flow indicating transmitter shall be in conduit unless otherwise noted to be routed in cable tray. D. For external non-penetrating sensors, stainless steel mounting bands shall be placed about the pipe circumference to secure the sensor brackets; the mounting bands shall have sufficient strength to maintain accurate sensor position. Positioning of the sensor mounting brackets shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's specifications. E. The acoustic sensors shall be securely held in the sensor brackets and shall transmit acoustic energy through the (steel, cast iron, plastic) pipe wall for measurement of flow. The transducer design shall not penetrate the pipe wall, reduce or alter the process piping integrity. Installation or maintenance on the primary element shall not cause process shutdown. Sensor design shall allow for high pressure stream cleaning and/or pig cleaning in the pipe without damage to the sensor. F. The transmitter shall contain all circuitry necessary to utilize signals from the acoustic sensors and shall produce an isolated accurate 4-20 mA DC signal linear with the flow rate. The unit shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X outdoor housing suitable for wall or pipe mounting remotely for location up to 1000 feet from the primary element. G. Setting of zero and span of the unit shall be easily accomplished and shall be non- interactive. Flow signal response time and damping shall be adjustable. The meter shall be readily re-scaled for different flow ranges. H. Accuracy shall be unaffected by changes in suspended solids or fluid density for the application range. I. Each transmitter shall include integrally mounted transient protection to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. J. Flow sampling shall be at a minimum rate of 150 samples per second, and the unit shall be able to operate with as few as 2 percent of the samples taken successfully. Unit shall have local indication of signal strength. In the event of prolonged loss of acoustic signaling in the fluid, the unit shall indicate the condition by an internal status light and shall provide for an external alarm connection. During periods of loss of signal the unit shall indicate zero flow. K. The output flow signal from the electronics shall be 4-20 mA DC. The output signal shall indicate true volumetric flow to within plus or minus 2 percent if actual or plus or minus 0.02 fps, whichever is greater. L. A space heater shall be included to maintain the interior temperature of the electronics enclosure above the dew point temperature. M. The unit shall operate with 120-volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase electrical power. Power requirements shall be less than 250 watts outdoor, with space heater. The unit shall function over an ambient temperature range of-40 F to +150 F (-40 C to +65 C) outdoor. N. External wiring connections shall be made via well-marked terminal blocks. O. The electrical signaling cable shall be supplied by the Flowmeter Manufacturer and shall be installed in an exclusive 1-inch metallic conduit, electrically continuous from the sensor junction box to the transmitter housing with a conduit drain at the conduit entrance through the flow sensor vault wall as shown in detail on the plans. P. Electronics and circuit boards shall be coated with permanent (not topicalization or anti- fungus coating) clear plastic type coating, Plasite 7122 or equal, to prevent corrosion from Page 8 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction hydrogen sulfide, chlorine or moisture. Wiring conductors shall be tinned. Screws shall be stainless steel or plated with nickel. No exposed relay contacts, exposed copper, or exposed brass surfaces shall be allowed. Q. Flow indicating transmitter shall have a totalizer installed which integrates measured flow and displays this total at front face of enclosure. Totalizer shall be resettable by switch inside the enclosure and totalizer display shall be liquid crystal type with six digits, minimum. Totalizer reading shall be retained during power outage. Flow indicating transmitter shall be housed in NEMA 4X enclosure. R. Flowmeters shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily in the applications described above or the purchase and removal costs shall be refunded to the Owner in the event of failure. The flowmeter shall be Panametrics DF 868. 2.12 Sonic Flowmeter/Indicating/Totalizing Instruments A. A sonic flowmeter instrument shall be installed in the piping as indicated on the plans and mounted in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. The unit shall have microprocessor-based electronics, a front panel menu-driven keyboard and shall produce an isolated 4-20 mA DC signal proportional to the flow, which shall be displayed on an eight digit totalizer after integration. The flowmeter shall be self-compensating for ambient temperature conditions. The flowmeter shall have as standard four relay outputs available for alarm conditions, sampling or pulsing external totalizers. The unit shall be capable of simulating flow without any external devices for verifying outputs and calibrations. Totalizer display shall always be retained after power failure without battery backup by the use of an EEPROM. B. Acoustic Sensor and Mounting Equipment: The acoustic sensor shall be permanently mounted at the measuring site and positioned according to the Manufacturer's approved method. Sensor mounting adaptor shall be supplied by the Manufacturer. The cable from the sensor to the electronics box shall be installed in an exclusive 3/4-inch rigid aluminum conduit. The sensor shall have built-in temperature compensation to maintain accuracy. The sensor shall be capable of an indefinite submergence of 30 feet without degradation. The sensor shall function over an ambient temperature of-20 F to +160 F. C. Transmitter Specifications: The transmitter shall contain all necessary circuitry and built in H/Q relationship for Parshall Flumes, Palmer-Bowlus Flumes and V-Notch Weirs to utilize the signal from the acoustic sensor and shall produce an accurate 4-20 mA DC flow signal. An RS-232 serial port connection shall be provided for computer interface for real-time communications. The transmitter shall be supplied with an LCD indicator to display flow rate and flow total and their respective flow units and multipliers. The display shall indicate if there is a fault or an alarm condition. The transmitter shall also produce four relay output connections for external alarms, sampling or pulse output to drive remote totalizer. The unit shall function over an ambient temperature range of-40 F to +150 F. Totalizer shall be such that display x 1000 = gallons. D. Unit shall be Panametrics DI 868. 2.13 Electromagnetic Flow Transmitters A. Flow element shall be of the electromagnetic type utilizing the pulsed DC type coil excitation principle with high preamp input impedance. The flow measuring system, consisting of low element, transmitter, and appurtenances, shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate with a 10:1 turndown for all flows resulting from pipe velocities of 0.5 to 30 fps. Stream fluid meter size and flow range shall be as noted. System shall operate on 120- volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase electrical power. Unit shall have zero stability feature thereby eliminating the need to stop flow to check zero alignment. B. The flow element shall be of water-tight, NEMA 4X construction, unless otherwise noted. Meter shall consist of a 304SS meter tub, 150 pound ANSI carbon steel raised-face flanges, Page 9 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction Teflon liner, and 316SS or Hastelloy electrodes, unless otherwise noted. Electrodes shall be either flush or bullet nose type. Suitable covers shall be provided for flow elements ends to protect the tube liner during shipment. C. Remote flow transmitter shall be indicating, water-tight, NEMA 4X construction and suitable for wall mounting. The transmitter output shall be a 4-20 mA DC signal in linear proportion to flow and shall drive loads with impedances in the range of 0 to 800 ohms without load adjustments for a 24-VDC supply. Output span and zero shall be manually adjustable. Both transmitter and primary element shall be powered from the same 120-volt, 60-Hz, 1-phase source. D. Sufficient special cable shall be provided for interconnection between the flow element and the transmitter. Cable(s) shall facilitate both signal and power for the flow element (120-volt, 60-Hz, 1-phase power will be made available at the transmitter). Special cables shall be installed in conduit. E. Manufacturer shall provide grounding rings if required for meter to perform properly. F. Electromagnetic flowmeters shall be Toshiba, Rosemount or approved equal. 2.14 Differential Pressure Flow Transmitters A. Flow transmitters shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4- 20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated differential pressure range. The transmitter shall have wetted parts of 316 stainless steel and a Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have a hermetically sealed enclosure with externally adjustable span and zero, and an accuracy of plus or minus 0.25 percent of span. B. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrate, and Blowdown functions. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. 2.15 Filter Loss of Head Transmitters A. Filter loss of head transmitters shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated differential pressure range. The transmitters shall have wetted parts of 316 stainless steel and a Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have an adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box with an output meter reading of 0-100 percent, and an accuracy of plus or minus 0.25 percent of span. B. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrate, and Blowdown functions. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. Each transmitter shall be provided with a sediment trap and strainer. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. 2.16 Pressure Transmitters A. Pressure transmitter shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated pressure range. The transmitter shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts and Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have a hermetically sealed enclosure with externally adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box and an accuracy of 0.25 percent of span. B. Range limits of transmitter shall be 0-40 to 0-200 psi unless specified otherwise in the Page 10 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction contract documents and drawings. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrate, and Blowdown functions. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. 2.17 Float Type Level Transmitters A. Transmitters shall be of the solid-state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the measured level. Transmitters shall have a 6-inch copper float and stainless steel tape. Transmitters shall have an indicator reading 0-10 linear. Transmitters shall be furnished with a weatherproof enclosure and pulley cover for outdoor service. Transmitter shall be Bristol Series 2008, or approved equal. 2.18 Tape Level Transmitter A. Furnish and install a purely resistive type level sensor, Metritape Type LS-NC or equal, at the location indicated on the plans. Sensor shall be a resistance shorting type of 30.5 ohm/ft. resistance with a nominal actuation sensitivity of 0.2 psi. Sensor shall be installed in a 2-inch Schedule 80 perforated PVC still pipe having an 8-by-8-by-6-inch PVC top housing including a breather assembly and a plug-in compact 2-wire transmitter Series 710 convert sensor resistance into a linear 4-20 mA output signal. The level measuring system shall be as manufactured by Metritape, Inc. P.O. Box 23266, Littleton, MA 01460, or approved equal. 2.19 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter A. Unit shall be ultrasonic type, continuous level measuring system consisting of level element, transmitter, and cable for connection from level element to transmitter. B. Level element shall be ultrasonic type transducer. Transducer shall be of water-proof construction rated NEMA 4X with operating range of -10 to +120 F at 1 atmosphere. Transducer shall be furnished with 1-inch NPT nipple for mounting. C. Transmitter shall contain solid state controls to operate transducer and to provide a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities in linear proportion to the level being sensed. Transmitter shall be provided with output indicator meter and shall have an operating range of 30 to 120 F. Transmitter scale range shall be as noted. Transmitter shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable for wall mounting. D. Level system shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of full scale and shall operate on 12-volt, 50/60-Hz, 1-phase power. E. Transmitter shall provide up to three discrete outputs, adjustable over the entire scale range. At the noted set point, unit shall transfer SPDT contacts which shall be rated for 5 amperes, continuous, at 120 VAC. Set points shall be screwdriver adjustable from inside the enclosure and shall be repeatable within plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. F. Interconnecting cable between transducer and transmitter shall be furnished with the unit with length as indicated. Splices in transducer/transmitter cable are not allowed. G. Level transmitter shall be Siemens Hydro Ranger/Probe LU or approved equal. 2.20 Transducer Level Transmitter A. Level transmitter shall be submersible level transducer type. Transmitter may be either rod- or cable type depending on application. Rod-type shall consist of two (2) elements: sensing rod and transmitter assembly. Cable-type shall consist of three (3) elements: the lower Page 11 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction assembly, the connecting cable, and the transmitter assembly. B. The transmitter assembly houses the system signal conditioning and transient protective electronics, and signal connections terminal block. The housing shall be epoxy-coated aluminum, with a NEMA 4 / IP65 ingress protection rating. Threaded process connections shall be 3/4" minimum, flanged process connections shall be 1" minimum, with 4" maximum. C. The transmitter shall be loop powered and shall provide a 4-20 mA DC level signal output with HART capabilities. Accuracy shall be <0.5% of span with an operating temperature range of-40 to 85°C. D. Level transmitter shall be Siemens Hydro SITRANS LC300. 2.21 RTD Temperature Transmitter A. Transmitter shall accept an input from a 100-ohm platinum two or three wire RTD. Temperature measurement range shall be selectable with a DIP (dual inline package) switch. Transmitter shall produce a 4-20 mA DC output with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated temperature range. Unit shall be capable of measuring and transmitting temperatures over the range 0 to 1000 F. Unit shall provide 80 percent zero and span adjustability within any user selected input range. If specified, a 3-1/2 digit, 0.8-inch high liquid crystal display (LCD) shall provide visibility up to 30 feet and the decimal point position shall switch selectable. B. In addition, the enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4X and the NEMA 4X rating shall not void the explosion-proof ratings. Transmitter shall be Action Instruments F513 or approved equal. 2.22 Process Indicators A. Indicating receivers shall be of the high visibility type and shall receive and indicate a 4-20 mA DC signal on a vertical scale 4 inches long with an accuracy of plus or minus 0.6 percent of span. Each indicator shall have an engraved nameplate to identify the service. Indicators shall be Red Lion Model LD, or approved equal. 2.23 Current Loop Isolators A. Current isolators shall accept an input of 4-20 mA DC and produce a linearly proportional 4- 20 mA DC output signal. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.1 percent of scale. Isolators shall operate on 115 VAC, 60 Hz. Output load capability shall be a minimum of 1500 ohms. Current isolators shall be Acromag Model 816, or approved equal. 2.24 Pump Control Switches A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.25 Flow Controllers A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.26 Level Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.27 Pressure Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. Page 12 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.28 Process Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.29 Annunciators A. Annunciators shall be a 24-point solid state annunciator. B. Cards shall be provided for all windows plus five spares. Window labels shall be in Capital Letters and worded as indicated on the plans. C. Controls shall include warble tone horn, Test and Acknowledge pushbuttons. D. Annunciators shall be Panalarm Model 731364, or approved equal. 2.30 Turbidity Analyzer A. Instruments shall be a continuous reading low range nephelometer, utilizing a light beam passed through a water sample to measure the amount of light scattered by the turbidity particles. Each instrument shall consist of an instrument body and master indicator. The master indicator shall be of the indicating type with ranges of 0 to 0.1, 0 to 0.3, 0 to 1, 0 to 3, 0 to 10, 0 to 30, 0 to 100, 0 to 300, and 0 to 1000 NTU. Master indicator output shall be 4-20 mA DC. B. There shall be furnished to the Owner one screw-in vial, grab sample curvette, light shield, spare lamp and fuse and accessory case, standard 0.12 NTU. C. Turbidity analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, or approved equal. 2.31 Chlorine Residual Analyzer A. The chlorine analyzer equipment shall be Hach Model CL17, or approved equal. The analyzer equipment shall include a submersible sensor probe, complete with agitator, with sufficient interconnecting power and signal cable to connect to the analyzer. The analyzer and the agitator shall operate on 120V, 60-Hz, 1-phase power. The analyzer shall be enclosed in NEMA 4X enclosures with wall mounting hardware. The analyzer and sensor probe shall be installed as indicated. B. The residual chlorine shall be indicated on a mirrored scale front panel meter, having three switch selectable ranges of 0 to 1, 0 to 5, and 0 to 10 ppm. Alarm status shall be displayed by LED indicators. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent. Temperature compensation shall be automatic from 0 to 50 C. The analyzer shall provide output of 4-20 mA DC and 0-1 mA DC. The 0-1 mA DC output shall be used to position the recorder needle. The 4-20 mA DC output shall be used as a residual level input as indicated. C. Chlorine Residual analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, or approved equal. 2.32 Sulfite Ion Residual Analyzer A. Each sulfite ion analyzer shall provide a direct measurement of the sulfite ion concentration in a water sample. The analyzer system shall be comprised of a monitor, a flowcell assembly and a sulfite sensor. The analyzer monitor shall come complete with a direct reading digital LED display, two adjustable alarms with relays, an isolated 4-20 mA DC output and flashing LED indicating low sulfite ion level. The monitor shall be capable of being wall-mounted. B. The sulfite sensor shall be a voltametric membraned sensor, composed of polarized noble metal electrodes immersed in an electrolyte. The sensor shall be isolated from the waste stream by a ion permeable membrane. The sensor shall not require reagents for operation Page 13 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction and shall not be affected by other constituents normally found in dechlorinated effluent streams. C. The sulfite ion sensor shall be placed into a flowcell assembly which shall automatically regulate the sample flowrate and pressure past the sensor. The assembly shall consist of a constant head overflow tube and a clear sensor flow chamber. A 1/4-inch hose bib shall be provided for the sample inlet and a 3/8-inch hose bib shall be provided for the drain connection. D. The sulfite ion analyzer system shall have measurement range of 0 to 19.99 ppm sulfite ion concentration as a positive display and a 0 to 1.99 ppm chlorine concentration as a negative display. The chlorine indication shall be for relative value only. The analog output shall be an isolated 4-20 mA signal and shall correspond to a selectable output range of either 0 to 1, 0 to 2, 0 to 3, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, or 0 to 20 ppm sulfite ion concentration. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent or 0.05 ppm sulfite ion concentration with a repeatability of plus or minus 1 percent or .05 ppm sulfite ion concentration. The analyzer shall operate on a 10 to 30 gph sample flow rate. E. The analyzer shall have high and low alarm setpoints with auxiliary relays and an independent zero crossover relay to indicate the presence of residual chlorine. The relays shall be SPDT rated at 3 A at 110-VAC resistive. The analyzer shall operate on 120V, 60- Hz, 1-phase power supply and shall be housed in a NEMA 4X ABS enclosure. F. Two sensors and a 25-foot cable shall be provided with each unit. An accessory polarizer shall be supplied with each unit to maintain the spare sensors ready for immediate use. G. The sulfite ion residual analyzer monitor shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI, or approved equal. 2.33 Suspended Solids Analyzer A. The suspended solids meter shall consist of an infrared measuring probe and a separate electronic transmitter. Suspended solids shall be measured using a four-beam infrared transmission system which is unaffected by or compensated for contamination, temperature, or sensor aging. B. The measuring probe shall have no moving parts, and shall be constructed of rugged materials capable of continuous operation in the process material within the specified environmental limits of the process. The measuring probe shall be designed for mounting for submersible installation in a basin, tank, or channel, or for insertion through a 2-inch ball valve into a pipeline. The measuring range of the measuring probe shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. C. The electronics unit shall provide a digital display which can be selected to show the output percentage, output current, probe signal level, power condition, and alarm levels. The electronics unit shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA DC output signal to drive 900 ohms maximum. The unit shall be calibrated by span and zero potentiometers. One high and one low limit alarm contact shall be provided (each adjustable over the full range by a potentiometer) with indicators showing when either is activated. One alarm contact shall be provided to indicate a full depletion condition, with an indicator showing when it is activated. The alarm contacts shall be rated at 3.5-A, 120-VAC general use; 2.5-A, 240-VAC general use; 5-A,30-VDC resistive, 5-A,240-VAC resistive. D. The electronic transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. A 25-foot cable, with quick-connect plug shall connect the measuring probe to the electronics unit. The unit shall operate over an ambient temperature range of -20 C to 55 C and shall be corrosion resistant. E. The suspended solids meter shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, or approved equal. The unit shall come complete with probe and necessary hardware for mounting it. Page 14 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.34 Sludge Blanket Level Detectors A. The solids level detector shall provide a continuous measurement of the depth of a liquid- solids interface in gravity or flotational separation systems. The system shall be of the ultrasonic type, and shall not require the transducer to come in contact with the interface. The system shall be capable of monitoring interfaces continuously 2 to 19 feet from the sensor with a resolution of 0.1 foot. B. The system shall consist of an analyzer and a swing bracket holding the sensor and transceiver. The analyzer shall be housed in a NEMA 4X lockable enclosure with brackets for wall or handrail mounting. The analyzer shall have a digital display and shall provide the following functions: 1. Run or operate mode. 2. Test mode. 3. Program mode. 4. Set point program mode. 5. Tank depth mode. 6. Self-diagnostics. C. The analyzer shall have a 4-20 mA DC isolated output scalable to all or any portion of the operating range. It shall also have four individually programmable SPDT relays at 7 amperes at 120 VAC. The analyzer shall also provide test outputs of 4-20 mA DC. D. The swing bracket assembly holding the sensor/analyzer assembly shall be capable of being located as far as 200 feet from the analyzer and be complete with the necessary length of connecting cable. The system shall be Royce Model 2500 with Model 25 bracket assembly. 2.35 Dissolved Oxygen Analyzers A. Furnish and install where indicated a complete dissolved oxygen monitoring system. The primary sensing device for the dissolved oxygen level shall be a galvanic, membrane type oxygen probe mounted as indicated on the plans and operated in conjunction with a dissolved oxygen analyzer. The complete system shall be as manufactured by Hach, or approved equal. B. The dissolved oxygen analyzer shall be dual range, manually selectable 0 to 15 or 0 to 3 mg/L, with a temperature range of 0 to 50 C. The output of the analyzer shall be a 4-20 mA DC signal and shall not output a temperature signal when the unit is switched to read temperature on the meter. The analyzer shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure and furnished with the necessary hardware for handrail mounting. The unit shall operate a 120V, 60-Hz, 1-phase power. Dissolved oxygen analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI or approved equal. 2.36 Oxygen Analyzers A. Dissolved oxygen analyzer shall measure dissolved oxygen at the locations where they are installed and shall have two scales, a 0 to 3 ppm scale and a 0 to 12 ppm scale. The analyzer enclosure shall be made of styrene and shall be rated NEMA 4X. The analyzer shall provide a 4-20 mA DC output signal which shall represent the dissolved oxygen value currently sensed by the analyzer. The analyzer shall operate over a temperature range of- 30 to +50 C with 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. Analyzer display shall be 4-1/2-inch dual scaled meter and unit shall be capable of functioning with sensor to analyzer distance of 600 feet. B. Provide a self-cleaning, automatically temperature compensated submersion type sensor which uses two dissimilar metals as electrodes. Sensor electrodes shall continually be cleaned by a motor operated rotating whetstone and electrode materials shall be iron and Page 15 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction silver. Membrane/electrolyte type sensor or sensors operating on a different principle shall not be accepted. C. Oxygen analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI or approved equal. 2.37 PH/Orp Analyzers A. PH/ORP analyzers shall provide PH measurements of 0 to 14 and ORP measurements of- 2000 to 2000 MV. Unit shall provide single or two point automated calibration and automatic recognition of pre-selected buffer valves. Unit shall provide diagnostic error messages for identification of abnormal conditions, shall have a 4-1/2 digit liquid crystal display (LCD) and be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure. Provide a 24-VDC power supply to supply instrument power and 4-20 mA DC loop power. Unit shall act as two-wire 4-20 mA DC transmitter to transmit PH or ORP values to remote locations. B. Provide sensor rated for-5 to +60 C operation and for insertion into liquid filled, pressurized process line without interrupting flow. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI or approved equal. 2.38 TOC (Total Organic Carbon)Analyzers A. TOC analyzers shall provide continuous, online monitoring of total organic carbon, total inorganic carbon biological oxygen demand and/or chemical oxygen demand via correlation in water. B. Analyzer shall measure total organic carbon by a two-stage advanced oxidation utilizing Hydroxyl and a manganese catalyst. C. Unit shall have internal sensors and utilize self-diagnostics to monitor analyzer status and produce alerts when maintenance or service is required. D. Unit shall have a measurement range of 0-25mgC/I. Detection limit shall be 0.06mgC/I. Unit shall have a repeatability of+/- 3% of span or+/-0.03mgC/I, whichever is greater. E. Unit shall be rated for 0 to +45°C temperature with a relative humidity of 5-85% operation and configured for 2°-60°C temperature, ambient-pressure process. F. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI or approved equal. 2.39 Ammonia Monochloramine Analyzers A. Ammonia Monochloramine analyzers shall provide continuous, online monitoring of total ammonia, Monochloramine and free ammonia in the process system. B. Unit shall have internal sensors and utilize self-diagnostics to monitor analyzer status and produce alerts when maintenance or service is required. C. Unit shall have a measurement range of 0.01-2ppm (as N), 0.1-10mg/L (as Cl). Unit shall have a repeatability of+/- 3% of span or+/-0.01 (as N), whichever is greater. D. Unit shall be rated for 0 to +45°C temperature with a relative humidity of 5-95% operation and configured for 5-50°C temperature, ambient-pressure process. E. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI or approved equal. 2.40 Analyzer Controllers A. Single Analyzer Controllers 1. Controllers shall have provisions for a minimum of two (2) digital and/or analog sensor input devices. 2. Controllers shall have provisions for a minimum of two (2) 4-20mA analog sensor Page 16 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 May 2019 Technical Specifications for Construction outputs. 3. Controller data management shall be SD card based. 4. Controller shall have MODBUS RS232/RS485, PROFIBUS DP v1.0 and HART 7.2 communications capabilities. 5. Controller manufacturer shall be Hach, Swan, ATI or approved equal. B. Multiple Analyzer Controllers 1. Controller shall have 320X240 TFT color Glas/Glas-Touch screen interface display. 2. Controller shall have up to four(4) SPDT, user-configurable contacts per probe module. 3. Controller shall have up to twelve (12) 0-20mA analog inputs per probe module. 4. Controller shall have up to twelve (12) 0/4-20mA analog outputs per probe module. 5. Controller shall have MODBUS RS232/RS485, PROFIBUS DP v1.0 and HART 7.2 communications capabilities. 6. Controller manufacturer shall be Hach SC1000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. 3.2 Field Quality Control A. The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and startup of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. B. Upon completion of installation of sample pumps, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be checked for excessive noise, vibration, alignment, general operation, etc. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. C. Upon completion of system installation Contactor shall perform a full check out and calibration of the system. D. Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. END OF SECTION Page 17 of 17 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 02 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATE ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of the furnishing of any and all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and any and all labor and superintendence necessary for the installation of, or an addition to a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)- based Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. The SCADA System shall be comprised of an integrated PLC-based facility control system. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets suitable for the environment and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be part of a standard off-shelf configurable system readily available in the market place and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of any and all equipment, programming, configuration and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to deliver to the Owner a complete and fully functional SCADA system as described in this Specification. 1.2 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals"for all required submittal requirements. 1.3 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards"for all applicable standards. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. The system shall be a continuous polling, supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA), utilizing programmable logic controllers (PLCs). System shall be configured and programmed to meet the Owner provided Sequence of Operations. B. Primary communications shall be Ethernet (copper) or fiber-optic, using the PLC manufacturer's standard protocols. C. Automatic control functions shall reside in the station PLC such that, upon loss of the Plant HMI, control of the system shall continue without interruption. The Operator, through the Plant HMI, shall have the capability to set or change any automatic control or alarm variable in the software control program. D. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of all equipment, programming, and all other labor and materials required necessary to integrate the new control system with the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant SCADA system. Integration shall be implemented in such a manner that the entire new control system can be operated from a single workstation in the O.N. Stevens Water Plant Operations Center. 1. Installation of all equipment, programming, configuration and materials including, but not Page 1 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction limited to interface equipment, additional network switches, additional development and programming of new HMI screens to be incorporated in the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant SCADA system, any and all new network switch configuration and any other hardware, software, programming and configuration required to integrate new control system into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations SCADA system. 2. Contractor shall conduct a series of interactive workshops with Water Plant Operations and SCADA personnel during preliminary SCADA design to develop all necessary screens and program control logic required to integrate new Station control into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations SCADA system. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Process Control Systems Suppliers: 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.3, "Acceptable Manufacturers"for all equipment manufacturer requirements. 2. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 1.4.C, "Process Control Systems Suppliers" for all control system supplier requirements. 2.2 Equipment A. Station PLC: 1. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system shall be the ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLC systems manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) only. Processor and associated 1/0 shall be selected as required to meet the minimum memory and 1/0 requirements of the final control programming with a minimum of 30% memory and a minimum of 30% spare 1/0 reserved for program and facility expansion. a. The PLC processor models approved for use in O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities control systems are: (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-1-72 (a) For control systems installed in critical service (as determined by the Owner in the contract documents) requiring redundancy, PLC system shall be configured so as to have a separate, redundant ControlLogix 1756-1-72 PLC processor connected to the primary operational PLC processor in a fully-redundant configuration. Fully-Redundant is defined in this case as the Stand-by processor being directly connected to the primary control processor, running the identical program concurrently as the primary processor, and will fail-over to the Stand-by processor automatically. PLC system shall be configured in such a manner that the system where, upon the failure of the primary processor, the redundant processor shall continue uninterrupted operation of the pump station. (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-L33ER 2. The PLC power supply shall be the ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLC 24-volt DC power supplies manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) for the ControlLogix or CompactLogix family of PLC's only. 3. All control panel and field instrumentation wiring to 1/0 modules shall be through heavy- duty DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks. Compression-type screw terminal blocks shall be used to provide secure wire connections. Spring-type terminal blocks shall not be used in any control panel or junction box application. Page 2 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction a. Control panel internal wiring shall conform to the following table: 24VDC + Blue 24VDC- Brown 120VAC H or L1 Yellow 120VAC N or L2 White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog Input White (Loop) Black(Signal) Analog Output Grey HART White (Loop) Orange (Signal) Digital Input(120VAC) Pink 4. All types of input/output modules shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label. 5. The PLC shall contain discrete input/output hardware consisting of the following types: a. Discrete Input Modules: (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IB16 16-point discrete input modules (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IQ16 16-point discrete input modules b. Discrete Output Modules: (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-01316I 16-point discrete output modules (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IB16I 16-point discrete output modules 6. The PLC shall contain analog input/output hardware consisting of the following types: a. Analog Input Modules (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IF16 16-point analog input modules (2) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IF8 8-point analog input modules (3) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IF16C 16-point analog input modules (4) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IF8C 8-point analog input modules b. Analog Output Modules (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-OF8 8-point analog output modules (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-OF8 8-point analog output modules 7. Contractor shall provide any and all interface modules required to seamlessly communicate with other required station equipment such as VFD's, Machine Condition and Vibration monitors, etc. 8. The PLC programming software shall be Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 with all associated required communications and configuration packages that match the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP included. B. Human/ Machine Interfaces (HMIs): 1. Human machine interfaces shall consist of network interface, personal computers, monitor, event printer, computer software PC interface software and any and all other hardware and software necessary for providing a complete and operative man machine interface. 2. The software shall be the version of Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk SE Client or FactoryTalk SE Station that match the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP for the Operator desktop workstations, and FactoryTalk Studio Enterprise on the Engineering Laptop workstations. 3. Computers shall be manufactured by Dell (sole source). Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the PCCS. 4. Monitors shall be microprocessor based, 24-inch flat-screen Color Monitor, 1280 x 1024 (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen. Page 3 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Engineering Laptop Computer(If required): a. The computer shall have the same capabilities as the aforementioned desktop workstations. b. Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the PCCS. C. All software shall be provided by the Contractor and registered in Owners name. C. PC Interface Software: 1. General: a. Interface software for interfacing the HMI to the Station PLC shall be Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 suite of configuration software, version matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP. b. All required licenses for all software and documentation shall be provided for each computer. All software provided shall be of the version of the software matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP with the latest patches and service packs applied. Licenses shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the project. C. Contractor shall modify, develop and provide any and all SCADA architecture drawings that determine clearly and unambiguously all supervisory system hardware and software requirements. 2. System Configuration: a. Graphic Displays: (1) The graphical display builder shall be Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Studio Enterprise. (2) The system shall utilize Rockwell Automation PlantPAx as the standard set of graphic symbols library, as well as any existing libraries currently in the ONSWTP graphics inventory. (3) Complete graphical displays must be able to run on any system node in a networked system, without the need to edit and/or re-establish dynamic connections. (4) New graphical displays shall mimic the look and feel of current ONSWTP Operator graphical and control screens and displays. (5) A Pop-Up Window feature shall permit graphic displays, complete with dynamic connections, to be re-sized and popped up on command anywhere on the screen during runtime. Pop-Up Windows are required to give the Operator instant access to more detail of process operation, alarm listings, and guidance. (6) Utilities are to be available for import and export of graphic files to .DXF file format for use in AutoCAD Versions 2010 or later, or other software using the .DXF file format. (7) The system shall permit the import of .BMP files for use as objects in the graphic display builder. 3. Runtime: a. Runtime operation of the system shall execute the database strategy, graphic displays, and optional functions created during system configuration. For guaranteed data integrity, the system shall operate in a true prioritized, pre-emptive real-time multi-tasking operating environment for simultaneous execution of data collection, control, graphics, alarming, trending, data logging, file transfer, and other system activities. CPU operation shall be optimized during runtime for maximum system efficiency and performance. Page 4 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction b. The runtime system shall be Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Client. Version shall match version currently in use at ONSWTP. C. New graphical displays shall mimic the look and feel of current ONSWTP Operator graphical and control screens and displays. d. A color coded Alarm/Event screen shall list pertinent information on all system alarms and events (Operator actions)as they occur, are acknowledged, and return to normal. e. Alarm/Event screens shall include date, time, alarm/event type, tagname parameter, description, value, engineering units, and return-to-normal, as applicable. f. Operator Events shall include: (1) Alarm Acknowledgement. (2) Block Parameter change (set point, output, etc.). (3) Block Auto/Manual change. (4) Block Setpoint Remote/Local Change. (5) Default Security Level Change. (6) Logging On and Logging Off. (7) Ability to take notes on individual alarms. g. Alarm and Event messages may be printed to the same printer, or to different printers, as selected by the user. h. An on-line Trend Window function shall permit display of multiple selected data points in real-time as graphs of the values versus time. The system shall support multiple Trend Windows. i. Pen assignments and time period shall be configurable on-line. j. A Zoom/Unzoom feature shall permit expanding and shrinking the amplitude scale. k. An unlimited number of variables may be selected for real-time trending. The system will automatically collect and save up to 60 samples of each parameter. I. Real-time trend points shall be buffered such that when a Trend Window is called up, it shall appear with previously sampled trend pen data, not blank. M. The Trend Window shall also permit X-Y plotting of up to four variable on the x-axis versus one variable on the y-axis. n. The system shall be supplied with a Historian for collecting, saving, and replaying selected system data. Historian shall be able to integrate with the existing ONSWTP historian system. o. The historian system shall be Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk Historian SE. P. Data logging may be started and stopped by the Operator, process conditions, or system events. q. Data may be logged to up to 100 History Files, each containing up to 100 data points. The logging rate may be manually or automatically switched between two settings on- line to permit high speed data collection during conditions of interest. r. Historical data file may be replayed on-line, and viewed in graphical or tabular form. The History Window time span and variable amplitude may be compressed or expended in logical increments by the Operator. S. The on-line Historical Replay function shall permit viewing previously saved files and/or currently active historical files. 4. Report Generation: a. A consolidated Report function shall be furnished. It shall utilize a standard Page 5 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction spreadsheet format for creation of system reports. A comprehensive built-in library of standard spreadsheet functions shall be included for selection and simultaneous manipulation of local or network data. At minimum, the library shall include mathematical, statistical, and Boolean operations. b. The Report generation function shall collect real-time and/or file data from the local node, or remote nodes via a network when used. File data shall include historical and alarm files at minimum. C. Report files shall be output on command to the local printer or to disk, as specified. Initiation of report output may be manual or automatic based on time of day, system event, or process condition. d. Freeform text may be integrated anywhere in the report. e. Provision shall be included for incorporation of Operator message fields. This shall permit capture and save of Operator comments made during runtime for inclusion in the report. f. The report shall also provide for capture and saving of text fields from system alarm and event messages. 5. Networking: a. An efficient high speed, real-time networking function shall be optimally available. It shall provide on-line real-time access to live data and file transfer simultaneously during runtime. b. The networking option shall support all Ethernet network topologies. C. Each network node shall operate independently to permit unrestricted assignment of system functions in a true distributed architecture. d. Network data exchange shall be "exception driven" rather than "polled" for maximum throughput during runtime. e. A network timekeeper function must be supplied to insure synchronization of all network node time clocks. Any node may be designated as the master timekeeper to which all other node clocks are synchronized. Should the master node fail, multiple backup nodes may be designated to continue network time synchronization. f. A global alarm capability must be provided which will allow alarms that occur anywhere on the network to be automatically broadcast over the entire network. Individual nodes may be configured to receive all alarms, only certain alarm types, or all alarms from a single or multiple pre-selected nodes. g. In order to exchange data between different networks, the networking option shall support use of more than one network adapter on a node. 6. Training: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.7, "Training"for all required training requirements. 7. Support: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all required support requirements. 8. Upgrades: a. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. -change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). Page 6 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): 1. Contractor shall provide an Uninterruptible Power Supply. UPS systems shall be manufactured by APC only (sole-sourced). 2. Uninterruptible Power Supply system shall provide 30 minute standby 120/208-VAC power for all Contractor-provided equipment, including all HMI equipment and all PLC and control equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper calculation and sizing of the required UPS. 3. The uninterruptible power supply shall have the following features: a. Input-240 V: 192-276 VAC. b. Output— 120/208 VAC: Regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. Depending on the size and configuration of the required UPS system, Output shall consist of: (1) Not less than three duplex receptacles (six receptacles). (2) Separate UPS power distribution panel. UPS distribution panel shall be mounted as close as reasonable to the HMI and / or PLC equipment to be supplied by the UPS. C. No-Break Power: The supply shall not allow any break in output power, regardless of what happens to the input power. Switching is not permitted. d. Lightning and Surge Protection: Passes ANSI-IEEE C62.41 Categories A & B. UL listed. e. Spike Attenuation: 2000:1. f. Galvanic Isolation: Qualifies as true, separately derived power source as defined by NEC Article 250-5D. Complete from line. Output neutral bonded to ground. g. Voltage Regulation: Output voltage regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. h. Output Waveform: Computer-grade sine-wave, less than 5 percent THD. i. Noise (RF) Isolation: 120 dB common mode, 60 dB normal mode. j. Output Protection: Current-limiting ferroresonant transformer. k. Efficiency: 90 percent minimum, on line. I. Audible Noise: 57 dB maximum, on line. M. UPS system shall be network compatible. 4. Contractor shall configure network and diagnostic notification as required and demonstrate their operation as part of the integrated system. 5. If required, external battery cabinets for extended run-time shall be in cabinets similar to the UPS. 2.3 Software Programming A. The Contractor shall provide a programmed database, using the equipment and software program specified, to accomplish the functions specified. B. For development of the HMI Graphics, the Contractor shall conduct a minimum of two (2) one (1) day workshops, at the Owner's facility. The Engineer will be in attendance, to help ensure compliance with the control strategies, treatment processes and that the system being developed follows the Sequence of Operations documents and the memorandum of understanding developed at the Development of Control Strategy meeting. 1. The first workshop shall consist of the Contractor showing the basic layout the graphic and popup screens, Help screens, roll-over Tooltip implementation and online Operations Manual access implementation for discussion and comment. The screens shall be at a stage that reflects the process and illustrates the required set-points for control. The Owner will be allowed to comment on layout of screens, but the not graphic Page 7 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction standards. After the workshop and before the next workshop the Contractor shall make the agreed upon changes to the screens. 2. The last workshop shall consist of the Contractor showing the final screens with database links complete. The Contractor shall show animation of screens by manipulating the HMI database. The Owner will be allowed to comment on the screens for process accuracy. The Contractor shall make corrections to the screens and shall be completed for testing at the Factory Acceptance Test. 3. Refer to Section 40 90 02.XX "Sequence of Operations" for project specific control sequence requirements and configuration. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 3, "Execution"for all execution requirements. END OF SECTION Page 8 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 02.1 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of the furnishing of any and all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and any and all labor and superintendence necessary for the fabrication, installation of, or an addition to a microprocessor-based Power Protection Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. The Power Protection SCADA System shall be comprised of information processors and controllers, motor, generator, transformer, bus, breaker, capacitor and distribution protection relays, metering, annunciation and all associated software. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets suitable for the environment (if required in the Contract documents) and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be part of a standard off-shelf configurable system readily available in the market place and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. B. Contractor shall furnish any and all supervision, labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment required for a complete and operational Power Protection SCADA system. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Fabrication of any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and the existing Power Protection SCADA system equipment or equipment furnished and installed under other contracts. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for the Power Protection SCADA system configuration programming if required by the Contract Documentation. Otherwise, configuration and programming of the Power Protection SCADA system shall be the responsibility of the Owner's representative. C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that the Power Protection SCADA is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the specified equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. D. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. E130064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all power protection SCADA system installations. E. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel and with the Owner during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the system. F. This Specification lists and describes all Power Protection SCADA equipment currently approved for use by the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which power protection SCADA monitoring and control equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project Power Protection SCADA system is fully functional and operational upon completion. Page 1 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.2 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals"for all required submittal requirements. 1.3 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards"for all applicable standards. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. The Power Protection SCADA system shall be a continuous polling, supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA), utilizing programmable real time automation controllers (RTAC). System shall be configured and programmed to meet the Owner-provided Power Protection SCADA system requirements. B. Primary communications shall be Ethernet (copper) or fiber-optic, using the RTAC manufacturer's standard protocols. C. Automatic control functions shall reside in the station RTAC such that, upon loss of the Plant HMI, control of the system shall continue without interruption. The Operator, through the Plant HMI, shall have the capability to monitor only any automatic control or alarm variable in the software control program. D. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of all equipment, programming, and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to integrate the new Power Protection system with the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant Power Protection SCADA system. Integration shall be implemented in such a manner that the entire new Power Protection system can be monitored or operated from a single, dedicated power protection system workstation in the O.N. Stevens Water Plant PCR building #1. 1. If required in the Contract documents, Contractor shall conduct a series of interactive workshops with Water Plant Maintenance personnel during preliminary Power Protection SCADA design to develop any and all necessary screens and program RTAC control logic required to integrate new Station control into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations Power Protection SCADA system. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Power Protection Systems Equipment Suppliers: 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.3, "Acceptable Manufacturers" for all Power Protection SCADA equipment manufacturer requirements. 2. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 1.4.D, "Power Protection SCADA Systems Suppliers" for all power protection system supplier requirements. Page 2 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.2 Equipment The Power Protection SCADA system equipment shall be manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. Automation controllers, protection relays and network equipment dedicated to the Power Protection SCADA system shall be selected as required to meet the specific project power protection system requirements. A. Real Time Automation Controller (RTAC): 1. The Real Time Automation Controller (RTAC) system shall be the SEL-3555 / SEL-3530 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. a. The RTAC models approved for use in O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities Power Protection SCADA systems are: (1) SEL-3550 Real Time Automation Controller(RTAC) (2) SEL-3530-4 Real Time Automation Controller(RTAC) b. The RTAC power supply shall be integral to the specified RTAC unit shall be rated for: 125-250VDC 110-240VAC, 50/60Hz 2. The SEL-3530-4 approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 3530BAlXX211XOXXXXXX Configuration Key: 7172 B. Feeder Protection Relays: 1. Feeder Protection Relays shall be the SEL-751 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL)only. 2. The SEL-751 power supply shall be integral to the specified relay and shall be rated for: 115-250VDC; 110-240VAC, 50/60Hz 125VDC/VAC Digital Input 3. The SEL-751 approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents)shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 751 A51 ACAOX74851231 Configuration Key: 0549 C. Motor Protection Relays: 1. Motor Protection Relays shall be the SEL-710 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL)only. 2. The SEL-710 power supply shall be integral to the specified relay and shall be rated for: 115-250VDC; 110-240VAC, 50/60Hz 125VDC/VAC Digital Input 3. The SEL-710 approved configurations (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 071001ACAOX71850201 Configuration Key Code: 0344 Configuration Part Number: 071001ACA9X71850201 Configuration Key Code: 0434 Page 3 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Human/ Machine Interfaces (HMIs): 1. Human machine interfaces shall consist of network interface, personal computers, monitor, computer software, PC interface software and any and all other hardware and software necessary for providing a complete and operative man machine interface. 2. The software shall be the version of SEL ACSELERATOR suite of programming software that matches the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP for the Power Protection SCADA desktop workstations and Engineering Laptop workstations. 3. Workstation computers shall be manufactured by Dell (sole source). Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the Power Protection SCADA Systems Supplier. a. Power Protection SCADA control panel computers mounted inside control panels shall be the SEL-3360 Compact Industrial P.C. series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL)only. (1) Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the Power Protection SCADA Systems Supplier. (2) The SEL-3620 approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: (TBD) Configuration Key Code: (TBD) 4. Monitors shall be microprocessor based, 24-inch flat-screen color monitor, 1920 x 1080 (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen. Power Protection SCADA control panel computers mounted in the control panel door shall be microprocessor based, 24- inch panel-mount, touch-screen monitor, 1920 x 1080 (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen and rated for industrial environments. C. Power Protection SCADA Interface Software: 1. General: a. Interface software for interfacing the HMI to the Power Protection SCADA system shall be SEL ACSELERATOR suite of programming software, versions matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP. b. All required licenses for all software and documentation shall be provided for each computer. All software provided shall be of the version of the software matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP with the latest patches and service packs applied. Licenses shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the project. C. Contractor shall modify, develop and provide any and all SCADA architecture drawings that determine clearly and unambiguously all supervisory system hardware and software requirements. 2. System Configuration: a. Graphic Displays: (1) The graphical display builder shall be Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL- 5035 ACSELERATOR Diagram Builder software. (2) Complete graphical displays must be able to run on any Power Protection SCADA system node in a networked system, without the need to edit and/or re-establish dynamic connections. Page 4 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction (3) New graphical displays shall mimic the look and feel of current ONSWTP Power Protection SCADA system graphical and control screens and displays. 3. Report Generation: a. The Report generation function shall collect real-time and/or file data from the local node, or remote nodes via a network when used. File data shall include historical and alarm files at minimum. b. Report files shall be output on command to the local printer or to disk, as specified. Initiation of report output may be manual or automatic based on time of day, system event, or process condition. 4. Networking: a. An efficient high speed, real-time networking function shall be optimally available. It shall provide on-line real-time access to live data and file transfer simultaneously during runtime. b. The networking option shall support all Ethernet network topologies. C. Each network node shall operate independently to permit unrestricted assignment of system functions in a true distributed architecture. d. Network data exchange shall be "exception driven" rather than "polled" for maximum throughput during runtime. e. A network timekeeper function must be supplied to insure synchronization of all network node time clocks. Any node may be designated as the master timekeeper to which all other node clocks are synchronized. Should the master node fail, multiple backup nodes may be designated to continue network time synchronization. f. A global alarm capability must be provided which will allow alarms that occur anywhere on the network to be automatically broadcast over the entire network. Individual nodes may be configured to receive all alarms, only certain alarm types, or all alarms from a single or multiple pre-selected nodes. g. In order to exchange data between different networks, the networking option shall support use of more than one network adapter on a node. h. Power Protection SCADA System network switches shall be the SEL-2730M series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. (1) The SEL-2730M power supply shall be integral to the network switch and shall be rated for: 125VDCNAC w/ Euro-style connector (2) The SEL-2730M Managed Network Switch shall have the following port configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents): Ports 1-4: SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) (Standard) Ports 5-8: Copper 10/100 Mbps (Standard) Ports 9-24: Twelve (12) 10/100BASE-T Four(4) 100BASE=FX Multimode (3) The SEL-2730M approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 2730MOARAX1 11 2AAAAX1 Configuration Key Code: 3160 Page 5 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction i. Security Gateway: (1) Power Protection SCADA System Security Gateways shall be the SEL-3620 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. (2) The SEL-3620 power supply shall be integral to the network switch and shall be rated for: 125/250VDC/VAC 120/240VAC (3) The SEL-3620 Security Gateway shall have the following port configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents): One (1) 10/100BASE-T One (1) 100BASE-FX (Multimode 5. Training: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.7, "Training"for all required training requirements. 6. Support: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all required support requirements. 7. Upgrades: a. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. -change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). D. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): 1. Refer to Section 40 90 02 "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System", Part 2, Section 2.2, "Equipment"for all required UPS requirements. E. Power Protection SCADA System Panels and Enclosures: 1. All control panel and field instrumentation wiring to 1/0 modules shall be through heavy- duty DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks. Compression-type screw terminal blocks shall be used to provide secure wire connections. Spring-type terminal blocks shall not be used in any control panel or junction box application. a. Control panel internal wiring shall conform to the following table: 24VDC + Blue 24VDC- Brown 120VAC H or L1 Yellow 120VAC N or L2 White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog Input White (Loop) Black(Signal) Analog Output Grey Digital Input 120VAC Pink Page 6 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 3, "Execution"for all execution requirements. END OF SECTION Page 7 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 03 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The purpose of the test plans and procedures is to bring order to the testing process and to illustrate that the PCSS is actively aware of the functional and performance requirements that must be met to properly test the equipment. B. Provide any and all testing and commissioning equipment, materials, incidentals and labor, necessary to perform and coordinate the system check-out and startup, commissioning, field testing and overall training for the Instrumentation and Controls System associated with the Project. C. The Contractor's Process Control Systems Supplier (PCSS) shall supervise and/or perform the requirements of this Section. As part of these services, the PCSS shall include, for those equipment items not manufactured by him, the services of an authorized manufacturer's representative to check the equipment installation and place that portion of the equipment in operation. The PCSS shall provide to the Owner/Engineer, prior to putting the equipment into service, installation checklists, certificates, and all manufacturer provided start-up and commissioning documentation. The manufacturer's representative shall be knowledgeable about the installation, operation, and maintenance of the manufacturer's equipment for this project. D. The PCSS shall perform any and all testing, verification, and validation of the Process Control System according to recognized and generally accepted good systems engineering practices such as V-model for systems development. System sub-systems and their respective components shall be tested, verified and documented individually by the PCCS by the same criteria described in this Specification before being assembled into the higher- order systems. When fully assembled, the entire system shall be demonstrated to perform the intended function, correctly and in stable and reliable manner. E. The PCSS shall coordinate with the electrical and instrumentation sub-contractor(s) to provide an integrated system test. F. The PCCS shall provide travel, accommodations, food, etc. for up to two (2) Owner representatives for Factory Acceptance Test witnessing, if required. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT and shall include: 1. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall prepare and submit a complete overall system testing plan. The test plan shall describe clearly and unambiguously how the PCSS will ensure and demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the supplied system meets all the requirements of the specifications. 2. The Submittal shall contain an overall process control system overview. Each area as affected by this contract shall be included. The detail shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Displays Page 1 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction b. Control strategies C. Database d. Trending e. Reports f. Programming B. Submittal Content 1. Testing Submittals shall cover the following: a. Programmable Logic Controller Programming (1) 1/0 List with register assignments. (2) Diagrams of the process control functions by each strategy. (3) Listing of inputs to the control function. (4) A short narrative of each control strategy. (5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. (6) Cross references of all 1/0, showing to which 1/0 modules or software modules, they are in. (7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. (8) An annotated program, submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. (9) Logic flow charts that explain how the control strategy implementation logic works b. Operation Interface Terminal Programming (1) 1/0 List with register assignments. (2) Listing of all Operator displays with inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Displays shall be illustrated to show data presentation. (3) Cross references of all 1/0, showing to which 1/0 modules or software modules, they are in. (4) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. C. Human Machine Interface Programming (1) 1/0 List with register assignments. (2) Displays for each process area including all necessary pop ups. (3) Listing of data points on each display. (4) A short narrative of each control usage. (5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. (6) Cross references of all 1/0, showing which software module at each point used. (7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. (8) A complete listing of all historical points. (9) Listing of all required configuration files for each SCADA client. d. Submit a proposed Training Schedule. Page 2 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Testing Documentation Submittals 1. Control System Test Plan a. The PCSS shall prepare and submit for review a System Test Plan for preparing test procedures, for performing testing and for preparing test reports for all tests. The plan shall include the anticipated testing schedules. b. The PCSS's Test Plan shall be organized to provide for witnessed tests shall address support of the Owner's personnel in conducting the Operational Readiness Test and Functional Demonstration Test. C. The plan shall also discuss the type and extent of component and subsystem testing the PCSS performs prior to the formal witnessed tests. 2. Format a. The Test Plan shall consist of the following major components, as a minimum: (1) A description of each test and its objectives (2) A description of the test program organization and the responsibilities and qualifications of test personnel (3) A description of applicable prerequisites for testing including all unwitnessed testing (4) A description of the Owner's and the PCSS's responsibilities at various test sites and facilities (5) A description of the overall test schedules (6) A description of form and content of test reports (7) Where applicable, identification of the primary test agency if other than the Contractor (8) A description of the procedures for identifying, evaluating and correcting the causes of problems or failures which occur during tests and a description of procedures for reworking and testing. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall prepare and submit for review a Control System Test Plan within sixty(60)days of the first witnessed test taking place. 3. Test Procedures a. Format (1) The PCSS shall develop test procedures for each witnessed test that clearly describe the test steps to be performed and the results expected after each step. (2) Any assumptions to be used in evaluating the test results shall be defined in the test procedure. (3) Each step in the test procedures shall be numbered and each test shall include a space for the PCSS and for the Owner to initial when the test is satisfactorily completed. (4) All equipment including communications, electrical, mechanical and computer systems shall be tested both individually and together as a system. The Owner/Engineer will not normally witness subsystem tests, but reserves the right to do so. (5) The PCSS shall prepare and document a test procedure for each type of test. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Owner for review before the scheduled start of the corresponding test. None of the formal witnessed tests shall be initiated until the corresponding test procedure has been Successfully Reviewed. Page 3 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (6) As a minimum, the following information shall be included in the procedures for each function tested: (a) A test identification number and name (b) A statement of test objective and scope (c) A cross reference to the paragraphs) of the Specification that defines the requirements of the function being tested (d) A test description (e) A list of the make and model of all test equipment required to perform the test, including simulation hardware and software (f) A list of prerequisite tests that shall be completed before the test can be performed (g) A description of the required test setup including diagrams illustrating test equipment connections and identifying test points, where applicable (h) Step-by-step instructions for performing the test, identifying the points where data are to be recorded and the limits for acceptable data (i) Instructions for recording data on data sheets or verifying that procedure steps have been completed. (j) All blank test data sheets on which all results of testing are to be recorded; data sheets shall include a section for dates, make and model of all test equipment and signatures of witnesses. (k) Space for time and date of test (1) Pass/fail signature of both the Owner and the PCSS's Project Manager and Quality Control representative. (m) Test forms similar in content to those attached to this section shall be used for each system test. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall submit for review a detailed test procedure for each test activity. The test procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the scheduled test. No test shall be performed less than 7 days after the test procedure has been successfully reviewed and approved. If necessary, the PCSS shall reschedule the test, at no additional cost to the Owner, so that this requirement is met. All test procedures shall include inputs to be applied or simulated and expected outputs to be confirmed. 4. Test Reports a. Format (1) The PCSS shall develop, maintain, and update a test report for each test. (2) Test data sheets shall be used to record applicable drawing numbers, test equipment, including serial numbers and calibration dates where applicable, discrepancies, corrective action required, and test data. Data entries shall be referenced to the applicable procedures and allowable limits for each entry shall be indicated on the data sheets. The test data sheets shall be arranged in tabular form. (3) All discrepancies and/or anomalies shall be recorded on Discrepancy Report forms and entered into the Project DR Book. After commencement of Site Demonstration Testing, Discrepancy Reports shall be submitted weekly. (4) Test reports shall contain: (a) All test data sheets as completed at the time of test. Page 4 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (b) The PCSS's analyses and conclusions of the test results. (c) A complete list of deficiencies, discrepancies and/or deviations from expected results including how and when each item is to be resolved. (d) When applicable, state system retesting requirements including a list of items to be retested and system design changes, if required, due to system testing, and verification after successful resolution. Retesting and other remedial work required as a result of failed tests shall result in no increase to the Contract price. (e) A revised test procedure if corrections or revisions were made during the test. (f) A general summary for the item tested indicating any open items that are yet to be resolved and any test that is yet to be conducted. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall submit test reports within 15 days after the completion of each scheduled test. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to delay or suspend follow- on project activities if an acceptable test report has not been provided in the required time period. 1.3 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND START-UP A. The Contractor, PCSS, and Instrument Suppliers, as applicable, shall perform the following: 1. Check and confirm the installation of all instrumentation, control components and all cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. Installation shall be in accordance with the contract documents — Plans and Specifications and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all existing instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and testing of final control actions. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in startup of the various unit processes. B. PCSS shall provide all test equipment necessary to perform the test during System checkout and startup. C. PCSS and/or system supplier shall be responsible for initial operation of the instrumentation and control system per the Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) requirements and shall make any required changes, adjustment or replacements for operation, monitoring, and control of the various processes and equipment necessary to perform the functions intended. D. PCSS shall furnish to the Owner/Engineer certified calibration/recalibration (for existing Instruments) reports for field instruments and devices specified herein as soon as calibration is completed. 1. Receipt of any calibration/recalibration certificates shall in no way imply acceptance of any work or instrument. 2. Each cal ibration/recalibration certificates shall be signed and dated by a certified authorized representative of the instrument manufacturer. Three copies of each completed certificate shall be submitted to Owner/Engineer. Page 5 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. A typical form shall be as follows: CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Tag Number/Loop Number: Loop Description Instrument Location Manufacturer Model Number Adjustable Range Calibrated Range Remarks Installation Per Manufacturer's Requirements? Yes No Installation Per Contract Documents? Yes No If"No", explain Calibration Test: Input Units Output Units Accuracy 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Switch Point Switch Setting Switch Test Upscale Point Deadband Downscal Set point 1 Set point 2 Set point 3 1 hereby certify that the above information is correct and accurate, to the best of my knowledge, and that the instrument indicated above has been supplied, installed, calibrated, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, unless otherwise noted. Authorized Mfg. Rep. Signature: Date: E. PCSS shall furnish to Owner/Engineer two copies of an installation inspection report certifying that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall itemize the equipment or shall have inspection reports for each item attached to it. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both the Contractor and the system supplier. Page 6 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.4 TESTS (GENERAL) A. The PCSS shall test all equipment at the PCSS facility prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided by the PCSS shall be tested at the PCSS facility as a single fully integrated system. B. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Un-witnessed Test(UFAT) 2. Witnessed Test(WFAT) 3. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 4. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 5. 30-Day Site Acceptance Tests (SAT) C. Each test shall require input documentation to be prepared and approved prior to the test and the output ("work product") documentation to be generated by test activities. Test activities shall execute test scenarios defined and approved by Owner/Engineer prior to the test. D. Test scenarios shall cover all normal operation, all knowable abnormal process conditions, and all knowable abnormal Process Control System conditions and malfunction. Test scenarios shall force the execution of every logical branch of the control logic. E. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement shall be satisfied. The cause and the correct effect shall be determined and documented in the test scenarios. The person conducting the test shall compare the actual effect with the expected correct effect with and shall document the outcome. F. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Owner/Engineer-approved procedures, forms, and checklists. A complete testing plan with the appropriate forms and checklists shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval prior to any testing taking place. The testing plan shall be submitted a minimum of three weeks in advance of the proposed testing date. Each specific test shall be described and followed by a section for sign off by the appropriate party after its status completion. G. Copies of these sign off test procedures, forms, and check lists will constitute the required test documentation. H. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provides suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. I. The General Contractor shall require the Integration Subcontractor to coordinate all testing with the Engineer, all affected Subcontractors, and the Owner. J. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior approved Test Procedures. K. The Owner/Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. L. No equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site until the Owner/Engineer has received all test results and approved the system as ready for shipment. M. The PCSS shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test equipment Page 7 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction and labor to perform the field tests. N. Correction of Deficiencies 1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. All deficiencies shall be corrected in no more than 24 hours. If the Integrator is unable to resolve the issue in less than 24 hours to allow the test to proceed, acceptance testing should be rescheduled. The owner shall bear no additional costs of attending subsequent re-tests. 1.5 COMMISSIONING A. Following the instrumentation and control system checkout and start-up, the PCSS shall, under the supervision of the system supplier, perform a complete system test in the presence of the Owner/Engineer to verify that all equipment and software is operating properly as a fully integrated system, and that the intended monitoring and control functions are fully implemented and operational. 1. Commissioning shall begin only after all instruments, PLC, and control panels are installed, wired and previously tested by the Contractor, in accordance with Paragraph 1.04 of this Section. The testing as required per the Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) as described in paragraph 3.03 of this specification shall be completed prior to beginning the commissioning. 2. All spare parts must be on site and accepted prior to Commissioning. 3. PCSS shall submit to the Owner/Engineer a schedule for Commissioning, including a proposed start date, at least three weeks in advance. B. Commissioning shall include, as a minimum, the following checks: 1. All wiring shall be checked at each termination point for correct wire size, type, color, termination and wire number. 2. All instruments and devices shall be checked to verify compliance with the specifications and approved shop drawings. The calibration of analog devices shall be verified including the zero and span. 3. Analog wiring shall be checked for correct polarity and ground continuity at each termination point in the loop. 4. All analog loops shall be verified at each termination point at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% signal levels. C. PCSS shall provide the following documentation for use during the Commissioning effort. 1. Checklist itemizing all required commissioning documentation, signed and dated. 2. Complete panel schematic and internal point-to-point wiring interconnect drawings. 3. Complete electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery, latest edition, and applicable NEMA standards. 4. Complete panel layout drawings. 5. Complete field wiring diagrams. Page 8 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Complete instrument loop diagrams. 7. Completed Calibration/Recalibration Certificates for all field and panel devices that require adjustment or calibration. 8. PCSS shall provide one set of Commissioning documentation for the Owner's personnel, one set for the Owner/Engineer's use, one set for field use, and the required number of sets for the Contractor's use. 9. The drawings corrected and modified during Commissioning shall form the basis for the "As-Built" record drawing requirement. 10. All documentation generated during acceptance testing (WFAT, ORD, FDT). All certificates, installation checklists, and reports delivered by equipment manufacturers. 11. Issue tracking system, such as electronic spreadsheet or a paper log book D. All PLC/RTU hardware and software shall be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation as an integrated system. System testing shall include, as a minimum, the following: 1. All digital inputs shall be activated at the field element to verify proper response to the status change on graphic displays, reports, and in automatic control algorithms. 2. All analog inputs shall be tested at the field transmitter over a full range to verify proper response on graphic displays, reports, and in automatic control algorithms. 3. All digital and analog outputs shall be forced to verify proper control operation. 4. Communications, including PLC/RTU data highway, computer local area network, PLC/RTU remote 1/0, and serial communications shall be tested between all components, including existing equipment. 5. Alarm displays and printing shall be tested for all analog and digital alarm points. 6. All automatic control algorithms shall be completely tested over various ranges and input conditions to verify proper operation. Graphic displays shall be observed to verify proper response to automatic control operations. 7. All historical data collection, trending, computation, totalizers and reporting functions shall be checked and tested to confirm proper operation and accuracy of the data. E. Any defects or problems found during the Commissioning effort or field test shall be corrected by the Contractor and then retested to demonstrate proper operation. F. Following testing and demonstration of all system functions, the Instrumentation and Control System including field sensors/transducers and instruments shall be running and fully operational for a continuous 48 hour period. The Field Test specified below shall not begin until the continuous 48 hour proving run has been successfully completed and Owner and Engineer agree that the Field Test can begin. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Control System shall undergo comprehensive testing to demonstrate that the Control System performs as an integrated system to meet all the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall conduct all element and subsystem tests necessary to ensure the proper operation of all Control System functions. Page 9 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Test procedures and written notification to the Owner/Engineer of testing activities are required for all tests. C. Before the start of any test that will be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer, the Contractor shall have conducted all prerequisite testing as well as a dry run of the entire witnessed test to ensure the success of the test. The Contractor shall provide the Owner/Engineer with a copy of the un-witnessed test report before start of the witnessed version of the test. The test report requirements shall be the same as the witnessed version of the test. D. All tools and equipment necessary to perform all required tests shall be provided by the Contractor. Test instruments shall be suitable for the purpose of measurement, with a rated accuracy commensurate to the measurement value of the equipment being tested or calibrated. Each test instrument shall be certified by an established calibration laboratory prior to the commencement of testing and recertified, without adjustment, after completion of testing to verify accuracy throughout the testing period. If recertification without adjustment is not demonstrated, the calibration instrument must be adjusted and certified, the field calibration repeated, and the recertification without further adjustment verified. Certified calibration reports traceable to the National Bureau of Standards shall be included with the test report. 1. The major documents associated with the testing are: a. System Test Plan and Forms b. Witnessed Factory Test(WFAT) Procedures c. Operational Readiness Test(ORT) Procedures d. Functional Demonstration Test(FDT) Procedures e. 30 Day Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Procedures f. Test Reports E. Each test shall be considered complete only when accepted by the Engineer and Owner. 3.2 UNWITNESSED TEST (UFAT) A. The entire system, except primary elements, final control elements, and field mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested at the PCSS site to ensure the system operates as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices/functions, and control devices/functions. B. All panels and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals, specifications, and Contract Drawings. PCSS shall submit a copy of the panel test records - point to point wiring check, etc. to the Owner and Engineer prior to scheduling the Witnessed Test. C. During the tests all digital system hardware and software shall have operated continuously or five days without a failure to verify the system is capable of continuous operation. The un- witnessed test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the Witnessed Test(WFAT). D. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Develop and present to Owner/Engineer for approval a Delivery Checklist. The checklist shall list every discrete item such as workstation, network switch, PLC panel, etc. The Contractor shall demonstrate clearly and unambiguously that every item required by the contract is present, along with all its accessories, in new and undamaged condition. Page 10 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Demonstrate operability of all equipment 3. Demonstrate operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 4. 100 percent point check of 1/0, including wiring 5. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 6. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 7. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers 8. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 9. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 10. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 11. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown. 12. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 13. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 14. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer's and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. 3.3 WITNESSED FACTORY TEST(WFAT) A. Before scheduling the Witnessed Test, the PCSS must determine through his own test and quality assurance program that the equipment is ready for shipment to the jobsite. B. All system tests specified for the Un-witnessed Test shall be repeated. C. The WFAT will be conducted at the PCSS facility. D. After receiving Un-witnessed Test approval, the PCSS shall notify the Engineer and Owner in writing that the system is ready for the Witnessed Test. In addition to notification, the PCSS shall submit to Owner/Engineer documentation from UFAT demonstrating that each test has been successfully completed and all issues have been resolved. The Engineer and/or Owner shall schedule a test date within 30 days of receipt of the "Ready to Test" letter. At the time of notification, the PCSS shall submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer. E. This test shall verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test, as determined by the Engineer, shall be the basis for approval of the system to be shipped to the site. F. The various tests performed during the Witnessed Factory Test shall be designed to demonstrate that hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Specifications and Contract drawings. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, the actual installed conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the Owner. G. The PCSS shall be responsible to simulate the 1/0 signals for any equipment or device communicating with any new or existing PLC through peer-to-peer network by using a computer system with appropriate simulation software. Simulating the 1/0 signals by forcing them from the PLC programming software will not be acceptable. Page 11 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction H. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Develop and present to Owner/Engineer for approval a Delivery Checklist. The checklist shall list every discrete item such as workstation, network switch, PLC panel, etc. The Contractor shall demonstrate clearly and unambiguously that every item required by the contract is present, along with all its accessories, in new and undamaged condition. 2. Demonstrate operability of all equipment 3. Demonstrate operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 4. 100 percent point check of 1/0, including wiring 5. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 6. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 7. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers S. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 9. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 10. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 11. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown. 12. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 13. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 14. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer's and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. 1. All analog control panels shall be included in these tests. J. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Witnessed Test as determined by the Owner/Engineer. K. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Witnessed Test: 1. All Contract Drawings and Specifications, addenda, and change orders 2. Master copy of the test procedure 3. List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number 4. Design-related hardware submittal applicable to the equipment being tested 5. Software license 6. Issue tracker log, indicating issue's severity and life cycle L. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Morning meeting to review the day's test schedule and status of outstanding issues. 2. Scheduled tests and signoffs. 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. 4. Unstructured testing period by the witnesses. M. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged and certified copies of Page 12 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction the logs shall be provided and available throughout the test to the Engineer and Owner. N. All failed tests shall require re-test till successfully completed. 3.4 OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS (ORT) A. Prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented)that it is READY for operation. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittal's and these Specifications. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer- approved forms and check lists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check off items with space for sign off by the PCSS. (1) Project Name (2) Loop Number (3) Tag Number for each component (4) Check offs/sign offs for each component b. Tag/identification C. Installation d. Termination—wiring e. Termination—tubing f. Calibration/adjustment—Check offs/sign offs for the loop g. Panel interface terminations h. 1/0 interface terminations i. 1/0 signal operation j. Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, and adjusted. k. Total loop operation— Provide space for comments 1. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each 1/0 module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign off by the PCSS: (1) Project Name (2) Loop Number (3) Component Tag Number of 1/0 Module Number (4) Component Code Number Analog System (5) Manufacturer (for Analog system element) (6) Model Number/Serial Number(for Analog system) (7) Summary of Functional Requirements: a. Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges b. Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges c. Computing Elements: Function Page 13 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction d. Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control Modes (PID) e. Switching Elements: Unit range, differential f. (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), Preset (AUTO/MANUAL) g. 1/0 Modules: Input or output 2. Calibrations: a. Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b. Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points C. Controllers: Mode settings (PID) d. 1/0 Modules: Required an actual inputs or outputs for 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (1) Provide space for comments (2) Space for sign off by the PCSS. (3) The General Contractor shall require the PCSS to maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the job-site and make them available to the Owner/Engineer at any time. (4) These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer shall review and initial all Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 3.5 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Prior to startup and the 30-Day Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the Operational Readiness Tests. The FDT will be a joint test by the PCSS and the Equipment suppliers. B. Once the facility has been started up and is operating, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis. C. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under Functional Demonstration Tests except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functionality demonstrated. D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the job-site both before and during the tests. In addition, one (1) copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Owner/Engineer at the job- site both before and during testing. See Section 01 33 06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, for O&M Manual requirements. E. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the tests shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. F. The system shall operate for 100 continuous hours without failure before this test shall be considered successful. G. Demonstrate communication failure and recovery. Page 14 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.6 30-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the PCSS shall be responsible for operation of the entire system for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non-field repairable malfunction. B. During this test, plant operating and PCSS personnel shall be present as required. For this test, the PCSS is expected to provide personnel who have an intimate knowledge of the system hardware and software. C. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of and derive benefit from the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be logged into the issue tracking system, analyzed and corrected by the PCSS. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. E. During this 30 consecutive day test period, any malfunction which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by PCSS personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered a non-field-repairable malfunction. F. Upon completion of repairs by the PCSS, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. G. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the PCSS shall perform repairs or replacement within 60 days. H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent (99.5%) during this test period. Availability shall be defined as: 1. Availability = (Total Testing Time-Down Time)/Total Testing Time I. Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or back- up power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above. J. Upon successful completion of the 30-day site acceptance test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete, and the one year warranty period shall commence. 3.7 TRAINING A. General 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.7, "Training" for all training requirements to be provided by the Contractor. 3.8 WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE, AND SUPPORT SERVICES 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all warranty, maintenance and support requirements to be provided by the Contractor. END OF SECTION Page 15 of 15 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 14 00 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for coordinating with Owner's operations during the Work and included requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work without impact on Owner's operations except as allowed in this Section. 2. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals shown, specified and required to coordinate with Owner's operations during the Work. B. General Requirements: 1. Except for shutdowns specified in this Section, perform the Work such that Owner's facility remains in continuous satisfactory operation during the Project. Schedule and conduct the Work such that the Work does not: impede Owner's production or processes, create potential hazards to operating equipment and personnel, reduce the quality of the facility's products or effluent, or cause odors or other nuisances. 2. Work not specifically covered in this Section or in referenced Sections may, in general, be completed at any time during regular working hours in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, subject to the requirements in this Section. 3. All four sedimentation basins must be in service July— September. No more than one sedimentation basin shall be out of service at a time October—June. The Contractor may propose an alternative construction sequence so long as the proposed schedule complies with dates and requirements listed above. 4. Contractor has the option of providing additional temporary facilities that can eliminate or mitigate a constraint without additional cost to Owner, provided such additional temporary facilities: do not present hazards to the public, personnel, structures, and equipment; that such additional temporary facilities do not adversely affect Owner's ability to comply with Laws and Regulations, permits, and operating requirements; that such temporary facilities do not generate or foster the generation of odors and other nuisances; and that requirements of the Contract Documents are fulfilled. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-1 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 5. Coordinate shutdowns with Owner and Engineer. When possible, combine multiple tie-ins into a single shutdown to minimize impacts on Owner's operations and processes. 6. Do not shut off or disconnect existing operating systems, unless accepted by Engineer in writing. Operation of existing equipment will be by Owner unless otherwise specified or indicated. Where necessary for the Work, Contractor shall seal or bulkhead Owner-operated gates and valves to prevent leakage that may affect the Work, Owner's operations, or both. Provide temporary watertight plugs, bulkheads, and line stops as required. After completing the Work, remove seals, plugs, bulkhead, and line stops to satisfaction of Engineer. C. Continuous Treatment Provision: 1. Contractor shall provide labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals to provide continuous treatment to the level prior to construction Work. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary pumping facilities, systems, piping, valve, appurtenances, equipment, materials, and temporary utilities necessary to complete the Work without treatment bypassing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: A"shutdown" is when a portion of the normal operation of Owner's facility, whether equipment, systems, piping, or conduit, has to be temporarily suspended or taken out of service to perform the Work. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Specification sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of Work requiring coordination with Owner's operations, to provide other contractors sufficient time for work included in their contracts that must be installed with or before Work specified in this Section. 3. When possible, combine multiple tie-ins into a single shutdown to minimize impacts on Owner's operations and processes. B. Pre-Shutdown Meetings: Contractor shall schedule and conduct meeting with Owner and Engineer prior to scheduling shutdown C. Sequencing: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-2 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 1. Perform the Work in the specified sequence. Certain phases or stages of the Work may require working 24-hour days or work during hours outside of regular working hours. Work may be accelerated from a later stage to an earlier stage if Owner's operations are not adversely affected by proposed sequence change, with Engineer's acceptance. Stages specified in this Section are sequential in performance of the Work. D. Scheduling: 1. Work that may interrupt normal operations shall be accomplished at times convenient to Owner. 2. Furnish at the Site, in close proximity to the shutdown and tie-in work areas, tools, equipment, spare parts and materials, both temporary and permanent, necessary to successfully complete the shutdown. Complete to the extent possible, prefabrication of piping and other assemblies prior to the associated shutdown Demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction that Contractor has complied with these requirements before commencing the shutdown. 3. If Contractor's operations cause an unscheduled interruption of Owner's operations, immediately re-establish satisfactory operation for Owner. 4. Unscheduled shutdowns or interruptions of continued safe and satisfactory operation of Owner's facilities that result in fines or penalties by authorities having jurisdiction shall be paid solely by Contractor if, in Engineer's opinion, Contractor did not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or was negligent in the Work, or did not exercise proper precautions in conducting the Work. 5. Work requiring service interruptions for tie-ins shall be performed during scheduled shutdowns. 6. Temporary, short-term shutdowns of smaller piping, conduits, equipment, and systems may be required. Coordinate requirements for such shutdowns with Engineer and Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals: 1. Substitute Sequence Submittal: When deviation from specified sequence is proposed, provide submittal explaining in detail the proposed sequence change and its effects, including evidence that Owner's operations will not be adversely affected by proposed change. List benefits of proposed sequence change, including benefits to Progress Schedule. Submit in accordance with Section 01 25 00 — Substitution Procedures. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-3 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 2. Shutdown Planning Submittal: a. For each shutdown, submit an inventory of labor and materials required to perform the shutdown and tie-in tasks, an estimate of time required to accomplish the complete shutdown including time for Owner to take down and start up existing equipment, systems, or conduits, and written description of steps required to complete the Work associated with the shutdown. b. Furnish submittal to Engineer at least thirty (30) days prior to proposed shutdown start date. Do not start shutdown until obtaining Engineer's acceptance of shutdown planning submittal. 3. Shutdown Notification: After acceptance of shutdown planning submittal and prior to starting the shutdown, provide written notification to Owner and Engineer of date and time each shutdown is to start. Provide notification at least 72 hours in advance of each shutdown. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. General Constraints: Specified in the Contract Documents are the sequence and shutdown durations, where applicable, for Owner's equipment, systems, and conduits that are to be taken out of service temporarily for the Work. New equipment, materials, and systems may be used by Owner after the specified field quality controls and testing are successfully completed and the materials or equipment are Substantially Complete. B. The following constraints apply to coordination with Owner's operations: 1. Operational Access: Owner's personnel shall have access to equipment and areas that remain in operation. 2. Schedule and perform equipment and system start-ups for Monday through Thursday. Equipment and systems shall not be placed into operation on Friday, Saturday, and Sunday without prior approval of Owner. 3. Dead End Valves or Pipe: Provide blind flanges, watertight bulkheads, or valves at temporary and permanent terminuses of pipes and conduits. Blind flanges and bulkheads shall be suitable for the service and braced and blocked, as required, or otherwise restrained as directed by Engineer. Temporary valves shall be suitable for their associated service. Where valve is provided at permanent terminus of pipe or conduit, also provide on downstream side of valve a blind flange with drain/flushing connection. 4. Owner will dewater process tanks, basins, conduits, and other work areas to be dewatered for shutdowns. Upon initiating shutdown of the basins the City shall have 10 days to drain and clean the basin. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-4 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 5. Draining and Cleaning of Conduits, Tanks, and Basins: Unless otherwise specified, Owner will dewater process tanks and basins at beginning of each shutdown. Owner will flush and wash down tanks and basins with plant non- potable water removing as much of the accumulated solids as possible. As needed to maintain a dry working area, the Contractor shall: a. Contractor shall remove liquids and solids and dispose of them at appropriate location at the Site as directed by Engineer. Contents of pipes, tanks, basins, and conduits undergoing modifications shall be transferred to existing process tanks or conduits at the Site with capacity sufficient to accept such discharges, using hoses, piping, pumps, or other means provided by Contractor. Discharge of fluids across floors is not allowed. b. The basins shall be washed down and the accumulated solids removed by utilizing the existing 16" basin drains and conveying to the plant process waste system. Water cannons are located around the perimeter of the basins to facilitate washdown. C. Uncontrolled spillage of pipe's or conduit's contents is not allowed. d. Spillage shall be brought to Engineer's attention immediately, both verbally and in writing, and reported in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall wash down spillage to floor drains or sumps and flush the system to prevent clogging and odors. If spillage is not suitable for discharge to the drainage system, such as chemical spills, as determined by Engineer, Contractor shall remove spillage by other method, such as vacuum truck, acceptable to Engineer. e. Contractor shall have a spill plan for any fuel stored onsite. f. Contractor is responsible for housekeeping around construction equipment and in laydown areas, including but not limited to mowing, tidiness, and trash removal. g. The Contractor shall maintain a clean and organized site such that items can be quickly secured to withstand hurricane conditions between June 1 and November 30 each year. 6. Electrical, Control, Communication, and Monitoring Systems: a. Owner's existing SCADA system and fiber optic network shall remain functional, subject to the constraints herein. b. Fiber optic communications and network connectivity shall remain operational at all times. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-5 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS C. Unless Contractor elects to use existing fiber and/or temporary fiber, at his/her discretion, at least one communication path shall be in place at all times until substantial completion. d. Each process area shall be permitted to have a single, non-concurrent, scheduled outage for the purpose of making PLC panel hardware modifications, loading the associated PLC logic, and its field testing/demonstration. Field testing and demonstration shall immediately follow modifications in an effort to keep scheduled shutdowns as short as possible. A 14-day day period of no SCADA outage shall precede each scheduled shutdown. 1.06 SUGGESTED SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Perform the Work in the specified sequence or as otherwise approved by Engineer. Certain phases or stages of the Work may require working 24-hour days or work during hours outside of regular working hours. Work may be accelerated from a later stage to an earlier stage if Owner's operations are not adversely affected by proposed sequence change, and with Engineer's acceptance. Stages specified in this Section are sequence- dependent. 1. Stage 1: PCR-14 a. Stage 1A: Perform all work related to PCR-14 as shown in the Contract Drawings, including but not limited to structural, electrical, instrumentation and controls, and HVAC work. 2. Stage 2: Plant 1 Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 1 a. Stage 2A: Demolish all Basin 1 mechanical and structural components as shown in the Contract Drawings b. Stage 213: Perform all work related to Basin 1 as shown in the Contract Drawings, including but not limited to structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation and controls work. Perform startup and testing of Basin 1 mixers per Specification Section 01 75 00. C. Stage 2C: The basin will be filled and brough back online prior to taking the next basin out of service. 3. Stage 3: Plant 1 Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 2 a. Stage 3A: Demolish all Basin 2 mechanical and structural components as shown in the Contract Drawings ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-6 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS b. Stage 3B: Perform all work related to Basin 2 as shown in the Contract Drawings, including but not limited to structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation and controls work. Perform startup and testing of Basin 2 mixers per Specification Section 01 75 00. C. Stage 3C: The basin will be filled and brough back online. 1.07 TIE-INS A. Table 01 14 00-A in this Section lists connections by Contractor to existing facilities. Table 01 14 00-A may not include all tie-ins required for the Work; Contractor shall perform tie-ins required to complete the Work. For tie-ins not included in Table 01 14 00- A, obtain requirements for tie-ins from Engineer. 1.08 SHUTDOWNS A. General: 1. Work that may interrupt normal operations shall be accomplished at times convenient to Owner. 2. Furnish at the Site, in close proximity to the shutdown and tie-in work areas, tools, equipment, spare parts and materials, both temporary and permanent, necessary to successfully complete the shutdown. Complete to the extent possible, prefabrication of piping and other assemblies prior to the associated shutdown. Demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction that Contractor has complied with these requirements before commencing the shutdown. 3. If Contractor's operations cause an unscheduled interruption of Owner's operations, immediately re-establish satisfactory operation for Owner. 4. Unscheduled shutdowns or interruptions of continued safe and satisfactory operation of Owner's facilities that result in fines or penalties by authorities having jurisdiction shall be paid solely by Contractor if, in Engineer's opinion, Contractor did not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or was negligent in the Work, or did not exercise proper precautions in conducting the Work. 5. Shutdowns shall be in accordance with Table 01 14 00-B of this Section. Work requiring service interruptions for tie-ins shall be performed during scheduled shutdowns. 6. Temporary, short-term shutdowns of smaller piping, conduits, equipment, and systems may not be included in Table 01 14 00-B. Coordinate requirements for such shutdowns with Engineer and Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-7 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS B. Treatment Process Shutdown and Site Access Constraints: 1. Owner shall have the following unit processes and equipment operational at all times during the Project, unless specified herein: a. Minimum of three (3) Sedimentation Basins 2. Owner shall have roadway access: To all plant roads. Contractor equipment or staging should not block roadway access from Owner or chemical truck deliveries. C. Shutdowns of Electrical Systems: Comply with Laws and Regulations, including the National Electric Code. Contractor shall lock out and tag circuit breakers and switches operated by Owner and shall verify that affected cables and wires are de-energized to ground potential before shutdown Work is started. Upon completion of shutdown Work, remove the locks and tags and notify Engineer that facilities are available for use. D. Shutdowns of Communications, SCADA, and Networking: 1. Permissible SCADA outages for each process area include outages less than 30 minutes duration to update software. 2. SCADA modifications required for the Work shall be implemented after completion of any local control panel. This will require the new mixers to be run locally until new signals from HMI to local control panels can be completed and tested. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. In addition to requirements of this Section, conform to requirements of Section 01 73 00 — Demolition and Execution of Work. B. Refer to Table 01 14 00-B in this Section for schedule of process equipment and service lines out-of-service during shutdown. C. Refer to Table 01 14 00-B in this Section for schedule of process equipment in operation during shutdown. D. Refer to Table 01 14 00-B in this Section for tie-ins required during each shutdown. Refer to Table 01 14 00-A in this Section for detailed tie-in schedule. E. Refer to Table 01 14 00-B in this Section for duration of each shutdown. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-8 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 3.02 DETAILED SHUTDOWN REQUIREMENTS: A. Prior to Typical Shutdown: 1. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. 2. Submittal and approval of all shop drawings required. 3. Coordinate with plant operations on timing of shutdown and provide required notice to Owner. 4. Bring necessary piping, couplings, valves, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. 5. Assist Owner in preparing to take equipment, tanks, basins, and conduits temporarily out of service. 6. Coordinate other tie-ins to be performed simultaneously. 7. Install and ensure functionality of temporary systems as applicable. B. During Typical Shutdown: 1. Owner will dewater tanks and basins. 2. Remove existing equipment, piping, and accessories as required. 3. Verify operation of new equipment, materials, and systems. 4. Following approval from Engineer, return equipment and system to operation with Owner. C. Following Typical Shutdown: 1. Verify functionality of equipment and system. 2. Verify operation of new equipment and systems, and verify that joints in piping are watertight or gastight as applicable. 3. Repair joints that are not watertight or gastight as applicable. 4. Remove temporary systems as applicable. 3.03 PROPOSED SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE A. Shutdown No. 1 Description: Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 1 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-9 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 1. General: a. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Reduction in peak flow capacity for approximately 9 months. b. Location: Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 1 C. Owner access to Site roadways: Not Applicable. 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Owner will be responsible for draining and cleaning basins. Allow for up to 10 days after initiation shutdown. 3. During Shutdown: a. Maintain clean and dry work area. Perform any additional solids removal and dewatering as necessary for Contractor's operations. b. Perform Work as described in Stage 1 in Section 1.06. C. Verify functionality of equipment and system. 4. Following shutdown: a. After cleaning and preparing Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 1 to be brought back online, notify the City OAR in writing so City may begin to re-fill and prepare the basin for service. B. Shutdown No. 2 Description: Basin 1 Potable Water Connection 1. General: a. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: No potable water piping to Basin 1 or 2 b. Location: Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 1 C. Owner access to Site roadways: Not Applicable. 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-10 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS b. Contractor will be responsible for draining pipe for connections C. Confirm potable water is not needed downstream of closed valve for isolation 3. During Shutdown: a. Perform Work as described in the Contract Documents b. Verify functionality of equipment and system. C. Shutdown No. 3 Description: Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 2 1. General: a. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Reduction in peak flow capacity for approximately 9 months. b. Location: Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 2 C. Owner access to Site roadways: Not Applicable. 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of proposed shutdown planning submittal and shutdown notification submittal. b. Owner will be responsible for draining and cleaning basins. Allow for up to 10 days after initiation shutdown. 3. During Shutdown: a. Maintain clean and dry work area. Perform any additional solids removal and dewatering as necessary for Contractor's operations. b. Perform Work as described in Stage 2 in Section 1.06. C. Verify functionality of equipment and system. 4. Following shutdown: a. After cleaning and preparing Flocculation and Sedimentation Basin 2 to be brought back online, notify the City OAR in writing so City may begin to re-fill and prepare the basin for service. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 14 00-11 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS m \ \ \ \ 2 9 \ \ / (n ® } \ / T - \ / $ / ƒ n g ( g ( g ( g \ ƒ ) 0 \ \ \ \ \ / E E E E m LU I ƒ ƒ ƒ / O § z g � ® / e co I I co § a Cl) a C14 2 0 0 Q « g 2 . y § 5 § ± \ b # 2 \ e gg � a = a = a = n O U Z a) U)0 0 U) 4 ` m ° § > § » § / § / ? Q / \ \ / \ \ \ E / � / � ƒ 3 � 0 0 0 2 § I D / / � $ \ m 3 � 04 E ° / t / Cl) / / 2 $ co G G G $ \ 006 2 / LL E < E $ I I w / < 2 g L Lli w c > « 0 � 0 E § i '0f / n / } § (0 (.0 G G \ 2 / � g U O -i E I \ \ k r # $ p 0 m 2 O � ± E c 0 o o ƒ Ek2@ / / 0 � f ¥ 2 ¥ f / 20 E E E LU M C) m 2 3: d 0 z # z 4 w I � � 2 O _ Q _ 00 C = k_ § / m N 2 _ _- _ § 2 \ 2 /� \ 2 R 2 CO 2 � ƒ \ Mcn CY) LU � = - \I = C teaC: G 2 § = 5 § m = e c u 0 .2: .2 2 � § - 2 -9 > 5 � O _ o -0 CL m = & _ _ � o\ $ 2 \ � 2 c = 7 / E o 0 LL 22 O w q2 ? w 2 . w q a 2 @c z / j ■ % § \ 2 -0 co - $ \ k / § / 2 L � � / co \ ƒ / 2 E \ E I ƒ ja \ 7 \ k / 2 = 2 = < CL ? co / § m � Lli w / / § \ 9 J § 5 \ \ \ o § / 0- } a_ \ 2 Q < K D U U § Z ^ C 2 LL I \ g 2 0 Y z Q J m LL LU J J J Q z O H z LU z LU O Q n SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Procedural requirements for product substitutions. 2. Procedural requirements for substitute construction methods or procedures, when construction methods or procedures are specified. B. Requests for substitutions of equipment and material shall conform to the requirements of the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions. C. Procedure for substitution requests and review including evaluation, reimbursement, acceptance, and determination shall be in accordance with General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. "Acceptable Manufacturers" considered for substitution include Suppliers of equipment and material of proven reliability, and as manufactured by reputable manufacturers having experience in the production of specified equipment and material. Equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the industry accepted practices and shall operate satisfactorily when installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. "Products" includes materials, equipment, machinery, components, fixtures, systems, and other goods incorporated in the Work. Products do not include machinery and equipment used for preparing, fabricating, conveying, erecting, or installing the Work. Products include Owner-furnished goods incorporated in the Work where use of such goods is specifically required in the Contract Documents. 1.03 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 0 N A. Contractor's Responsibilities: In submitting request for substitution, Contractor p N represents that: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 25 00-1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1. Contractor has investigated proposed substitution and determined that it is equivalent to item, product, method, or procedure specified, as applicable. 2. Contractor will provide the same or better guarantees or warranties for proposed substitution as for the specified product, manufacturer, method, or procedure, as applicable. 3. Contractor waives all Claims for additional costs or extension of time related to proposed substitution that subsequently may become apparent. 4. Contractor shall submit a minimum of five (5) successful installations of the manufacturer's equipment of the same model, size, and type as specified in the Contract Documents. 5. All costs associated with incorporation of a substitution shall be borne by the Contractor, including but not limited to, the cost of redesign and construction provisions. B. Engineer's Review: A proposed substitution will not be accepted for review if: 1. Approval would require changes in design concept or a substantial revision of the Contract Documents. 2. Approval would delay completion of the Work or the work of other contractors. 3. Substitution request is indicated or implied on a Shop Drawing or other submittal, or on a request for interpretation or clarification, and is not accompanied by Contractor's formal request for substitution. 4. If the substitution is not clearly substantiated by performance criteria as providing an equivalent or superior performing installation. 5. All costs associated with Engineer's review of a substitution shall be recorded by Engineer, submitted to Owner, and charged to Contractor. C. If Engineer does not approve the proposed substitute, Contractor shall provide the specified product, manufacturer, method, or procedure, as applicable. D. Approval of a substitution request will not relieve Contractor from requirement for submitting Shop Drawings as set forth in the Contract Documents. E. Product Substitutions Procedure: 1. Requests for approval of substitute products or items will be considered for a period of 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. After end of specified ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 25 00-2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES period, requests will be considered only in case of unavailability of a specified product or other conditions beyond Contractor's control. 2. Submit copies of request for substitution. 3. Submit separate request for each substitution. 4. In addition to requirements of the General Conditions and information required on substitution request forms, include with request the following: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards with which product complies. C. Samples, if appropriate. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation. e. Certified tests, where applicable, by an independent laboratory attesting the proposed substitution is equal. f. Cost information for the proposed substitution and the specified products. g. Lead time information for the proposed substitution and specified products. h. All other submittal requirements indicated in the individual Specification Sections associated with the specified equipment and material. F. Construction Methods Substitutions Procedures: 1. Where construction methods or procedures are specified, for a period of 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Engineer will consider Contractor's written requests for substitute construction methods or procedures specified. 2. Submit copies of request for substitution. 3. Submit separate request for each substitution. 4. In addition to requirements of the General Conditions and information required on substitution request forms, include with request the following: a. Detailed description of proposed method or procedure. b. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the specified method or procedure. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 25 00-3 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES C. Drawings illustrating method or procedure. d. Other data required by Engineer to establish that proposed substitution is equivalent to specified method or procedure. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 25 00-4 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Contractor shall provide submittals in accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. 2. Contractor is responsible to confirm and correct dimensions at the Site, for information pertaining to the fabrication processes and to techniques of construction, and for coordinating the work of all trades. Contractor's signature of submittal's stamp and letter of transmittal shall be Contractor's representation that Contractor has met their obligations under the Contract Documents relative to that submittal. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 25 00 — Substitution Procedures. 2. Section 01 78 23 — Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Section 01 78 39 — Project Record Documents. 4. Section 01 78 43 — Spare Parts and Extra Material. 5. Section 01 79 00 — Instruction of Owner's Personnel. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Types of Submittals: When type of submittal is not specified and is not specified in this Section, Engineer will determine type of submittal. 1. Action/Informational Submittals: a. Shop Drawings. A N A b. Product data. C. Delegated design submittals in accordance with the General Conditions and as modified by the Supplemental Conditions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES d. Samples. e. Testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations. f. Design data not sealed and signed by a design professional retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. g. Pre-construction test and evaluation reports, such as reports on pilot testing, subsurface investigations, potential Hazardous Environmental Conditions, and similar reports. h. Supplier instructions, including installation data, and instructions for handling, starting-up, and troubleshooting. i. Sustainable design submittals (other than sustainable design closeout documentation). j. Lesson plans for training and instruction of Owner's personnel. 2. Closeout Submittals: a. Maintenance contracts. b. Operations and maintenance data. C. Bonds, such as maintenance bonds and bonds for a specific product or system. d. Warranty documentation. e. Record documentation. f. Sustainable design closeout documentation. g. Software. 3. Maintenance Material Submittals: a. Maintenance materials schedule and checklist. b. Spare parts. C. Extra stock materials. d. Tools. 4. Quality Assurance Submittals: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES a. Performance affidavits. b. Certificates. C. Source quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of shop testing. d. Field or Site quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of operating and acceptability tests at the Site. e. Supplier reports. f. Special procedure submittals, including health and safety plans and other procedural submittals. g. Qualifications statements. B. Submittal Requirements: 1. Contractor shall submit electronic copy of submittals for Engineer's review via Procore Document Management, unless otherwise specified in individual Specification Sections. Acceptable electronic formats are Adobe PDF, Microsoft Word, Autodesk DWF and AutoCAD. 2. Submittals shall be furnished in two dimensional PDF. 3. Submittal shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal containing date, project title, Contractor's name, number and title of submittal, list of relevant Specification Sections, notification of deviations from Contract Documents, and other material required for Engineer's review. 4. Submittals with internet hyperlinks and other references to online content shall not be considered, reviewed, and included as part of the submittal review procedure. Hyperlinks and other electronic references shall not be used to comply with specified requirements of the Contract Documents, unless specifically stated in the individual technical Specification Section. 5. Electronic Submittal File Format Requirements: a. Files shall be electronically searchable for submitted equipment and material. b. Provide bookmarks within files in excess of 20 pages for submitted equipment and material including, but not limited to, the following: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1) Each chapter and subsection listed in the files table of contents 2) Each figure, table, and appendix. 3) Each drawing. C. Scheduling: 1. Provide submittals well in advance of the Work following Engineer's approval or acceptance of the associated submittal. Work covered by a submittal will not be included in progress payments until approval or acceptance of related submittals has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Submittals shall be provided by Contractor with at least thirty (30) working days for review and processing. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Submittals, as specified in this Section: 1. Timing: a. Provide submittal within time frames specified in the Contract Documents. b. Provide updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated Progress Schedule. 2. Content: In accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. Requirements for content of preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent submittals of the Schedule of Submittals are identical. a. Identify submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed tasks. Indicate submittals that are on the Project's critical path. b. Indicate the following for each submittal: 1) Date when submittals are requested and received from Supplier. 2) Date when certification is received from Supplier and when submitted to Engineer. 3) Date when submittals are submitted to Engineer and returned with disposition from Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 4) Date when submittals are revised by Supplier and submitted to Engineer. 5) Date when submittals are returned with "Furnish as Submitted" (FAS) or"Furnish as Corrected" (FAC) disposition from Engineer. 6) Date when approved submittals are returned to Supplier. 7) Date of Supplier scheduled delivery of equipment and material. 8) Date of actual delivery of equipment and material. 9) Whether submittal will be for a substitution or "equal". Procedures for substitutions and "or equals" are specified in the General Conditions and the Section 01 25 00— Substitution Procedures. 10) For submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid delaying the work of other contractors. 3. Prepare Schedule of Submittals using same software, and in same format, specified for Progress Schedules. 4. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule. 5. Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that does not indicate submittals on the Project's critical path, or that places extraordinary demands on Engineer for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do not include submittals not required by the Contract Documents. 6. In preparing Schedule of Submittals: a. Considering the nature and complexity of each submittal, allow sufficient time for review and revision. b. Reasonable time shall be allowed for: Engineer's review and processing of submittals, for submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning submittals to Contractor. C. Identify and accordingly schedule submittals that are expected to have long anticipated review times. 1.04 ACTION/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following Submittals in accordance with the individual Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, the following: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. Product Data: a. Catalog cut-sheets b. Descriptive bulletins/brochures/specifications C. Material of construction data, including details on all components including applicable ASTM designations. d. Lifting, erection, installation, and adjustment instructions, and recommendations. e. Finish/treatment data, including interior and exterior shop coating systems. f. Equipment/material weight/loading data, including total uncrated weight of the equipment plus the approximate weight of shipped materials. Support locations and loads that will be transmitted to bases and foundations following installation. Size, placement, and embedment requirements of anchor bolts. g. Complete information regarding location, type, size, and length of all field welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the American Welding Society. Special conditions shall be fully explained by notes and details. h. Motor data including horsepower; enclosure type; voltage; insulation class; temperature rise and results of dielectric tests; service-rating; rotative speed; motor speed-torque relationship; efficiency and power factor at %2, 1/4, and full load; slip at full load; running, full load, and locked rotor current values; safe running time-current curves; motor protective devices; and interconnection diagrams. i. Engineering design data, calculations, and system analyses j. Digital system documentation k. Operating sequence descriptions I. Software/programming documentation M. Manufacturer's instructions 2. Shop Drawings: a. Equipment and material layout drawings, including panel layout drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES b. System schematics and diagrams including, but not limited to, piping systems; HVAC and ventilation systems; process equipment systems; electrical operating systems; wiring diagrams; controls, alarm and communication systems. C. Layout and installation drawings (interior and exterior) for all pipes, valves, fittings, sewers, drains, heating and ventilation ducts, all electrical, heating, ventilating and other conduits, plumbing lines, electrical cable trays, lighting fixture layouts, and circuiting, instrumentation, interconnection wiring diagrams, communications, power supply, alarm circuits, etc. d. Layout and installation drawings shall show connections to structures, equipment, sleeves, valves, fittings, etc. e. Drawings shall show the location and type of all supports, hangers, foundations, etc., and the required clearances to operate valves, equipment, etc. f. Drawings for pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., shall show all 3 inch and larger electrical conduits and pressure piping, electrical cable trays, heating and ventilation ducts or pipes, structure, manholes or any other feature within four (4) feet (measured as the clear dimension) from the pipe duct, conduit, etc., for which the profile is drawn. g. Equipment and material schedules. 3. Delegated design submittals, which include documents prepared, sealed, and signed by a design professional retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work. Delegated design submittals do not include submittals related to temporary construction unless specified otherwise in the related Specification Section. Delegated design submittals include: design drawings, design data including calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such design professional. B. Samples: 1. General Requirements: a. Conform submittal of Samples to the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and the Specification Section in which the Sample is specified. b. Furnish at the same time Samples and submittals that are related to the same unit of Work or Specification Section. Engineer will not review ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES submittals without associated Samples and will not review Samples without associated submittals. C. Samples shall clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product, all related parts and attachments, and full range of color, texture, pattern, and material. 2. Submittal Requirements: a. Securely label or tag Samples with submittal identification number. Label or tag shall not cover, conceal, or alter appearance or features of Sample. Label or tag shall not be separated from the Sample. b. Submit number of Samples required in Specifications. If number of Samples is not specified in the associated Specification Section, provide at least one identical Samples of each item required for Engineer's approval. If Contractor requires Sample(s) for Contractor's use, notify Engineer in writing and provide additional Sample(s). Contractor is responsible for furnishing, shipping, and transporting additional Samples. C. Deliver one Sample to Engineer's field office at the Site. Deliver balance of Samples to location directed by Engineer. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with the individual Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Maintenance contracts 2. Bonds for specific products or systems 3. Warranty documentation 4. Sustainable design closeout documentation. 5. Software programming and documentation. B. On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document furnished original signature of entity issuing the document. C. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 — Operations and Maintenance Data. D. Record Documentation: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39— Project Record Documents. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES E. Disposition: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. For spare parts, extra stock materials, and tools, submit quantity of items specified in associated Specification Section. Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 43 — Spare Parts and Extra Materials. B. Disposition: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall review, coordinate, and verify submittals with Subcontractors, Manufacturers, and Suppliers, including field measurements at Site, in accordance with the General Conditions and as modified by Supplemental Conditions prior to submitting material for Engineer's review. B. Contractor shall clearly and concisely indicate and mark equipment and material being submitted to meet the intent of the Contract Documents. Equipment and material not being submitted shall be deleted, stricken through, or otherwise designated not being submitted. Equipment and material data sheets shall be included once with cross references throughout the submittal. Multiple equipment and material data sheets for the same item within a submittal may receive a rejected disposition until corrected. 1. Individual Specification Sections require a Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter to be included with the submittal. When specified, submittals provided without the CD&E letter shall receive a rejected disposition without review. 2. CD&E letter requirements: a. Include a copy of entire Specification section with each paragraph and subparagraph noted with "C", "D", or"E" to indicate if equipment and material being provided is in compliance (C), deviates (D), or exceptions (E) are taken with the Contract Documents. 1) Compliance (C): Full compliance with the specified requirement. 2) Deviation (D): Deviation from the specified requirement. 3) Exception (E): Exception with the specified requirement. b. Include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Contract Documents by the Contractor and Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Any requirements with the letter"D" or"E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. d. Address deviations and exceptions taken to each Contract Drawing related to the Specification section. C. Contractor shall provide Contractor's stamp of approval certifying submittal material has been reviewed and conform to the Contract Documents prior to submitting material for Engineer's review. D. Contractor shall provide written notice of deviations or variations that submittal may have with the Contract Documents. E. Contractor shall provide bound, dated, labeled, tabulated, and consecutively numbered submittals as specified in the individual Specification Section. Label shall contain the following: 1. Specification Section. 2. Referenced Drawing number. 3. Subcontractor or Supplier name. 4. Type of equipment and/or materials. F. Contractor shall perform the following after receiving Engineer's review disposition: 1. Order, fabricate, or ship equipment and materials included in the submittal (pending Engineer's review of source quality control submittals)with the following disposition: a. "Furnish as Submitted" (FAS). b. "Furnish as Corrected" (FAC). C. "Furnish as Corrected — Confirm" (FACC), only portions of Work that do not require resubmittal for Engineer's review. 2. Resubmittal requirements: a. Partial resubmittal of"Furnish as Corrected — Confirm" (FACC) returned dispositions, until Engineer's disposition is either"Furnish as Submitted" (FAS) or"Furnish as Corrected" (FAC). b. Full resubmittal of material with Engineer's disposition of"Revise and Resubmit" (R&R), until Engineer's disposition is "Furnish as Submitted" ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES (FAS), "Furnish as Corrected" (FAC), or"Furnish as Corrected — Confirm" (FACC) that requires a partial resubmittal. C. Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer's charges to Owner if submittals are not approved within the number of specified submittals in accordance with the General Conditions. Engineer's charges shall include, but not limited to, additional review effort, meetings, and conference calls with Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. Engineer's review of the Contractor's submittal shall not relieve Contractor's responsibility under the Contract Document in accordance with the General Conditions and as modified in the Supplemental Conditions. An acceptance of a submittal shall be intended to mean the Engineer does not have specific objection to the submitted material, subject to conformance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. B. Engineer's review of Contractor's submittal shall be confined to general arrangement and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall not be for the purpose of checking dimensions, weights, clearances, fittings, tolerances, interferences, coordination of Subcontractor work, etc. C. Review Dispositions: 1. "Furnish as Submitted" (FAS)— No exceptions are taken. 2. "Furnish as Corrected" (FAC)— Minor corrections are noted for Contractor's correction. 3. "Furnish as Corrected — Confirm" (FACC) — Corrections are noted and partial resubmittal shall be made as noted. 4. "Revise and Resubmit" (R&R)— Corrections are noted and complete resubmittal shall be made. Submittal does not conform to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Revise submittal and re-submit to indicate acceptability and conformance with the Contract Documents. 5. "Receipt Acknowledged" (RA)— a. Information included in submittal conforms to the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is acceptable. No further action by Contractor is required relative to this submittal, and the Work covered by the submittal may proceed, and products with submittals with this disposition may be shipped or operated, as applicable. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES b. Information included in submittal is for Project record purposes and does not require Engineer's review or approval. 6. "Rejected" (R)— Information included in submittal does not conform to the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is unacceptable. Contractor shall submit products and materials as specified in the Contract Documents or provide required information for substitution as specified in the Contract Documents for consideration by Engineer. D. Electronic Submittal Return to Contractor: Electronic submittals shall be returned electronically with dispositions provided. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 33 00-12 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 4000 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-1 QUALITY MANAGEMENT d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work though Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-2 QUALITY MANAGEMENT H. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed, or might be damaged by corrective actions. 1.02 QUALITY MANAGEMENT ACTIVITIES BY THE OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 1.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 1.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non- performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF OPT'S TEST REPORTS A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-3 QUALITY MANAGEMENT the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these tests results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implementing the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents they are not in compliance and why it ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-4 QUALITY MANAGEMENT does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 1.05 STANDARDS A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 1.07 VERIFICATION TESTING FOR CORRECTED DEFECTS A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 1.08 TEST REPORTS A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-5 QUALITY MANAGEMENT b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the test was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and M. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 1.09 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-6 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 1.10 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-7 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 1.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 1.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-8 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 IMPLEMENT CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Includes the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-9 QUALITY MANAGEMENT requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. C. Conduct a review of the Work one month prior to the expiration of the correction period prescribed in the General Conditions with the OPT. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-10 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 40 00-11 QUALITY MANAGEMENT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Definitions and terminology applicable to all the Contract Documents are included in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: Common abbreviations that may be found in the Contract Documents are listed below: alternating current a-c ampere A Architectural Barriers Act ABA Americans with Disabilities Act ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility ADAAG Guidelines ante meridian a.m. average avg biochemical oxygen demand BOD brake horsepower bhp British thermal unit Btu Centigrade (or Celsius) C chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC Code of Federal Regulations CFR cubic inch cu in cubic foot cu ft cubic yard cdu yd, or CY cubic feet per minute cfm cubic feet per second cfs ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-1 REFERENCES degree Centigrade(or Celsius) degrees C or °C degrees Fahrenheit degrees F or F diameter dia direct current d-c dollars $ each ea efficiency eff Fahrenheit F feet ft feet per hour fph feet per minute fpm feet per second fps figure Fig flange flg foot-pound ft-lb gallon gal gallons per hour gph gallons per minute gpm gallons per second gps gram g grams per liter g/L Hertz Hz horsepower hp or HP hour hr human-machine interface HMI inch in. inches water gage in. w.g. inch-pound in.-lb ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-2 REFERENCES inside diameter ID iron pipe size IPS thousand pounds kips thousand pounds per square inch ksi kilovolt-ampere kva kilowatt kw linear foot Iin ft or LF liter L maximum max mercury Hg milligram mg milligrams per liter mg/I or mg/L milliliter ml millimeter mm million gallons per day mgd or MGD million gallons MG minimum min national pipe threads NPT net positive suction head NPSH net positive suction head available NPSHA net positive suction head required NPSHR nominal pipe size NPS number no. operator interface terminal OIT ounce oz ounce-force ozf outside diameter OD parts per hundred pph ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-3 REFERENCES parts per million ppm parts per billion ppb polyvinyl chloride PVC post meridian p.m. pound lb pounds per square inch psi pounds per square inch absolute psia pounds per square inch gauge psig pounds per square foot psf process control system PCs programmable logic controller PLC revolutions per minute rpm second sec specific gravity sp gr or SG square sq square foot sq ft or sf square inch sq in. square yard sq yd or SY standard std standard cubic feet per minute scfm total dynamic head TDH B. Definitions: Terminology used in the Specifications includes: 1. "Indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar locations in the Contract Documents. 2. "Shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference without limitation on the location. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-4 REFERENCES 3. "Installer", "applicator", or"erector" is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor, either as an employee or subcontractor, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application or similar Work. Installers shall be experienced in the Work that installer is engaged to perform. 4. "Experienced", when used with the term "installer" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; being familiar with Laws and Regulations; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with requirements of the Supplier of the material or equipment being installed. 5. Trades: Use of a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter", unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or required by Laws or Regulations. Such terminology also does not imply that specified requirements apply exclusively to trade personnel of the corresponding generic name. 6. "Assigned specialists" and similar terms: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by specialists recognized as experts in those operations. Engage said specialists for those activities, and their engagement is a requirement over which Contractor has no option. These requirements do not conflict with enforcement of building codes and other Laws and Regulations. Also, such requirements are not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Reference Standards: 1. Refer to General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, relative to reference standards and resolving discrepancies between reference standards and the Contract Documents. Provisions of reference standards are in effect in accordance with the Specifications. 2. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in the Work shall be familiar with reference standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable reference standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where reference standards are needed for a construction activity, obtain copies of standards from the publication source. 3. Abbreviations and Names: Where reference standards, specifications, codes, manuals, Laws or Regulations, or other published data of international, national, regional or local organizations are referred to in the Contract Documents, the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-5 REFERENCES organization issuing the standard may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. 4. Following acronyms or abbreviations that may appear in the Contract Documents shall have the meanings indicated below. Listing is alphabetical by acronym. AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ACIFS American Cast Iron Flange Standards ACS American Chemical Society ADC Air Diffusion Council ADSC International Association of Foundation Drilling. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA)) AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHDGA American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIChE American Institute of Chemical Engineers AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-6 REFERENCES AMP National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, Architectural Metal Products Division ANSI American National Standards Institute APA The Engineered Wood Association API American Petroleum Institute APHA American Public Health Association AREA American Railway Engineering Association ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA American Standards Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASNT American Society for Non-Destructive Testing ASQ American Society for Quality ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BAAQMD Bay Area Air Quality Management District BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators CBMA Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association CDA Copper Development Association ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-7 REFERENCES CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung eV(German Institute for Standardization) DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ETL Intertek Testing Services, Inc. (formerly ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.) FCC Federal Communications Commission FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency FHWA Federal Highway Administration FM Factory Mutual (FM Global) FRPI Fiberglass Reinforced Plastics Institute FS Federal Specification GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America HEW United States Department of Health, Education and Welfare HI Hydraulic Institute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HUD United States Department of Housing and Urban Development IBC International Building Code ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-8 REFERENCES ICC International Code Council ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute IFCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society(formerly Instrument Society of America) ISO Insurance Services Office IOS International Organization for Standardization LPI Lightning Protection Institute MIA Marble Institute of America ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association MS Military Specifications MSS Manufacturers' Standardization Society MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NAPF National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. NARUC National Association of Regulatory Utilities Commissioners NBHA National Builders Hardware Association NBS United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electric Code NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-9 REFERENCES NETA International Electrical Testing Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NHPMA Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association NIST United States Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation NSSGA National Stone, Sand, and Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PFI Pipe Fabrication Institute PPI Plastics Pipe Institute PGMC Primary Glass Manufacturers Council PS Product Standards Section, United States Department of Commerce RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (part of AISC) RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SCAQMD Southern California Air Quality Management District SCPRF Structural Clay Products Research Foundation SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-10 REFERENCES SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association SPI Society of the Plastics Industry SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Society for Protective Coatings SWI Steel Window Institute TCNA Tile Council of North America TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. USAB United States Access Board USDOE United States Department of Energy USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency USGBC United States Green Building Council USGS United States Geological Survey USPHS United States Public Health Service WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association WCMA Wood Component Manufacturers Association MDMA Window and Door Manufacturers Association WWEMA Water and Wastewater Equipment Manufacturers Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-11 REFERENCES PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 42 00-12 REFERENCES SECTION 01 61 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Common requirements for products. 2. Contractor's options for selecting products. 3. Requirements for consideration of"or equal" products. 4. Warranty requirements of products. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. "Products" includes materials, equipment, machinery, components, fixtures, systems, and other goods incorporated in the Work. Products do not include machinery and equipment used for preparing, fabricating, conveying, erecting, or installing the Work. Products include Owner-furnished goods incorporated in the Work where use of such goods is specifically required in the Contract Documents. 2. "Special Warranties" includes additions or modifications to standard warranty requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Log Book: 1. Submit warranty log book prepared specifically for this Project. Submittal shall include a summary listing of all equipment and material warranties furnished in the Contract, date received, and start/end date of warranty period. Individual warranty documentation shall be provided in the submittal. 2. Submit prior to submittal of final application for payment. B. Patent Documentation: Submit licensing arrangement and agreement documentation. 0 N O A N O ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 61 00-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS 1.04 REQUIREMENT A. Common Products: 1. Provide products that have not been previously incorporated into another project or facility unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide products of the same generic kind from a single source. 3. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items shown, indicated, or required for a complete installation for the indicated use and performance. 4. Standard Products: When available, and unless custom or nonstandard options are specified or indicated, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 5. Visual Matching: Where required in the Contract Documents, provide products that match referenced existing construction, approved mock-ups, or approved Sample, as determined by Engineer. 6. Where the Contract Documents include the phrase "as selected" for product color, finish pattern, option, or similar phrase, provide products selected by Engineer as follows: a. Standard Range: Where the Contract Documents include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, provide color, pattern, density, or texture selected by Engineer from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where the Contract Documents include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Engineer will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's entire product line, including standard and premium items. B. Product Compatibility: 1. Similar products by the same Supplier shall be compatible with each other, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide products compatible with products previously selected or installed on the Project. C. Product Options: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 61 00-2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS 1. For products specified only by reference standard or description, without reference to Supplier, provide products meeting that standard, by a Supplier or from a source that complies with the Contract Documents. 2. For products specified by naming one or more products or Suppliers, provide the named products that comply with the Contract Documents, unless an "or equal" or substitute product is approved by Engineer. 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or Suppliers and the term, "or equal", when Contractor proposes a product or Supplier as an "or equal", submit to Engineer a request for approval of an "or equal" product or Supplier. 4. For products specified by naming only one product or manufacturer and followed by words indicating that no substitution is allowed, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. D. Concerning Patents: 1. Owner shall be provided a guarantee by Contractor and equipment Supplier that equipment and material furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents is not the subject of patent litigation. 2. Patent litigation or controversy shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. Actual furnished equipment and material the is subject or could be subject to patent litigation or is known to infringe on a patent. b. Furnished equipment and material that may result in a process that use of equipment and material in a manner that infringes upon or violates a patent. 3. When patent infringement may occur, Contractor and Supplier shall submit license arrangements among parties, including Contractor, Supplier, and patent owner (controller of patent) at a minimum, which shall permit use of equipment and material as specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Supplier shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to any infringement or patent rights or copyrights incident to the use of equipment and material specified in the Contract Documents and as required in General Conditions and as modified in the Supplemental Conditions. E. "Or Equal" Products: 1. For proposed products not named in the Contract Documents and considered as an "or equal" as defined in the General Conditions, Contractor shall request in writing Engineer's approval of the "or equal". Request for approval of an "or equal" ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 61 00-3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS product shall accompany the Shop Drawing or product data submittal for the proposed product and shall include: a. Contractor's request that the proposed product be considered as an "or equal" in accordance with the General Conditions, accompanied by Contractor's certifications required in the General Conditions. b. Documentation adequate to demonstrate that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that proposed product is consistent with the Contract Documents, and that proposed product will produce results and performance required in the Contract Documents, and that proposed product is compatible with other portions of the Work. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with the products and manufacturers named in the Contract Documents. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, performance and specific features and requirements shown or indicated. d. Evidence that proposed product manufacturer will furnish warranty equal to or better than specified, if any. e. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and physical addresses of installation along with the names, telephone numbers, email addresses and physical address of design professionals and owners associated with the referenced installation, if requested. f. Samples, if requested. g. Other information requested by Engineer. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranties specified for products shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, Contractor's general warranty and guarantee and requirements for the required correction period. Disclaimers and limitations in specific product warranties do not limit Contractor's general warranty and guarantee. 1. Product manufacturer's warranty is preprinted written warranty published by product manufacturer and specifically endorsed by product manufacturer to Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 61 00-4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS 2. Equipment and material shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and/or materials for a period of one (1) year unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification Section for a Special Warranty. 3. Warranty period shall start on the date of substantial completion of the portion of Work that the particular equipment and material is included. In a project, there may be multiple substantial completion dates based on the sequence of construction. Prior to warranty period, the requirements specified in Section 01 75 00— Checkout and Startup Procedures for start-up certification and specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall be met. 4. Warranty requirements may be added to or modified in the individual Specification Sections. Special warranty is written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by product manufacturer's warranty or to provide increased rights to Owner. 5. Special warranty information, if any, will be located in the Specification Section for that product. B. Requirements for Special Warranties: Provide written special warranty document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by product manufacturer and Owner. Submit draft warranty with submittals required for product. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed by product manufacturer and other parties as appropriate. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Contract Documents, prepare written document, properly executed by product manufacturer and Owner, using appropriate form. 3. Refer to Specifications for content and requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submit product manufacturer's warranties and special warranties as submittals in accordance with Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 61 00-5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 64 13 OWNER FURNISHED SCADA SERVICES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. All application programming, configuration services and tuning of the Process Control System shall be performed by the Owner to accomplish the functionality specified in Section 40 61 96, Process Control Descriptions. Manufacturer/Vendor-supplied control systems shall be programmed, configured and tuned by the respective manufacturer and/or vendor. B. Except for equipment specifically identified as Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE), all other SCADA equipment required to complete the Work, as shown on the Drawings, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all startup/field tests, as specified in Section 40 61 21.72 - Field Testing. 1.02 FIELD TESTING PLAN A. The Contractor shall submit the Field Testing Plan to the Owner. These plans will be reviewed by the Owner and transmitted back to the Contractor. The test plans shall include time for thoroughly testing programming provided by the Owner such as PLC logic and HMI graphics. B. Contractor shall review and incorporate the test plans in the overall construction schedule by assigning activities for the tests and linking them to predecessor and dependent activities. C. Contractor shall ensure readiness of equipment provided or installed by Contractor for the purpose of completing the field tests prior to startup. D. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to prepare plant operations and processes for the tests (e.g., a tank may need to be filled with water, valves may need to be opened, etc.). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The Contractor shall coordinate a meeting between the Contractor, Owner, I&C and Electrical Subcontractors, and Engineer to discuss the following: 1. Review the overall work plan for the project; each entity shall submit their work plan prior to the meeting for review by the Owner. 2. Ensure all entities have an adequate understanding of the project requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 64 13-1 OWNER FURNISHED SCADA SERVICES 3. Ensure compliance with all hardware and software requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Review qualifications of staff assigned to the project. 5. Schedule of key activities and deliverables. B. Factory Testing 1. The I&C Subcontractor shall complete Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT) for all equipment listed in Section 40 61 21.71 and provide a Factory Acceptance Test report with the factory acceptance test results. FAT procedures and test forms shall be provided for review and approval before performing the tests. 2. The Owner will not witness any FAT. The control system software and configuration tests will be performed at the plant. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT ITEMS FURNISHED BY THE OWNER A. None 2.02 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR A. Except for equipment specifically identified as OFE, all other materials required to complete the Work shall be provided by the Contractor. B. All materials provided by the Contractor are subject to approval by the Engineer prior to their installation into the Work. The Contractor shall provide submittals for all materials and components it proposes to furnish along with such data as necessary to allow the Engineer to determine their fitness for the Work. C. Furnish and install all new conduits as shown. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. The Contractor and Owner shall coordinate, assist and provide support during equipment and system testing. B. For vendor supplied control panels, the Contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers to provide information to the Owner as required to integrate the monitoring and control features and prepare SCADA software for testing. C. Contractor's schedule must include time in the Start-up plan for the following on-site testing and commissioning activities for each process area: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 64 13-2 OWNER FURNISHED SCADA SERVICES 1. Instrument calibration and commissioning (e.g., level, pressure, flow, analytical instruments) by Contractor. 2. Final control element testing and commissioning using local controls (e.g., pumps, motorized valves, chemical feeders) by Contractor. 3. Signal loop testing between PI-Cs and field instruments and final control elements by Contractor. 4. Control system startup and testing: a. Contractor shall include a minimum of 2 weeks for testing PLC and HMI programming by the Owner after Contractor has performed loop testing for the associated process area. b. All equipment within each process area shall be tested under actual operating conditions or Owner-approved simulated conditions, in accordance with Section 04 61 21.72 — Field Testing. c. Testing shall be conducted jointly by the Contractor and the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for physical equipment testing, including verification of wiring between PLC panels and electrical gear, local control panels and stations, vendor- supplied control panels, and field instruments. The Owner shall be responsible for testing control logic through PLC application programs and verifying remote monitoring and control functionality via the HMI workstation. d. The Owner will coordinate with Contractor to test network control logic across multiple systems. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 64 13-3 OWNER FURNISHED SCADA SERVICES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 65 00 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements for preparing for shipping, delivering, and handling materials and equipment. 2. Contractor shall make all arrangements for transporting, delivering, and handling of materials and equipment required for prosecution and completion of the Work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements relative to delivery and handling materials and equipment. 1.03 SHIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. When practical, factory-assemble materials and equipment. Match mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable, protective coating. B. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate the associated purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by name, Owner's contract name and number, Contractor name, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing lists and bills of materials with each shipment. C. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry and dust-free at all times. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Advance Notice of Shipments: 1. Keep Engineer informed of delivery of all materials and equipment to be N incorporated in the Work. p N O E. Do not ship materials and equipment until: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 65 00-1 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 1. Related Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals have been approved or accepted (as applicable) by Engineer, including, but not necessarily limited to, Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered. 2. Manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by Engineer in accordance with the Specifications. 3. Results of source quality control testing (factory testing), when required by the Contract Documents for the associated materials or equipment, have been reviewed and accepted by Engineer. 4. Facilities required for handling materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions are in place and available. 5. Required storage facilities have been provided. 1.04 DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries: 1. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. a. Equipment and material shall not be delivered to the Site prior to 90 days in advance of scheduled installation unless approved by Engineer. b. Partial payment requests will not be processed for materials delivered prior to 90 days before installation or for materials that are improperly stored. C. Contractor may request exemption to the above requirement for specific equipment and materials to be approval by Engineer and Owner. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for and duration of storage of materials and equipment at the Site or delivery location, as applicable. 3. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at Site, and to accommodate the following: a. Work of other contractors and Owner. b. Owner's operations and maintenance. C. Storage space limitations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 65 00-2 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS d. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling materials and equipment. e. Owner's use of premises. 4. Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours. 5. Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project, including work of other contractors, as applicable. Deliver anchor system materials, including anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete or masonry, in ample time to avoid delaying the Work. B. Deliveries: 1. Shipments shall be delivered with Contractor's name, Subcontractor's name (if applicable), Site name, Project name, and contract designation clearly marked. 2. Site may be listed as the "ship to" or"delivery" address; but Owner shall not be listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by Engineer. 3. Provide Contractor's telephone number to shipper; do not provide Owner's telephone number. 4. Arrange for deliveries while Contractor's personnel are at the Site. Contractor shall receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site when Contractor is not present will be refused by Owner, and Contractor shall be responsible for the associated delays and additional costs, if incurred. C. Containers and Marking: 1. Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. D. Inspection of Deliveries: 1. Immediately upon delivery, Contractor shall inspect shipment to verify that: a. Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. b. Quantities are correct. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 65 00-3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS C. Materials and equipment are undamaged. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. e. Materials and equipment are properly protected. 2. Promptly remove damaged materials and equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment, and remedy incomplete or lost materials and equipment to furnish materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work. 3. Advise Engineer in writing when damaged, incomplete, or defective materials and equipment are delivered, and advise Engineer of the associated impact on the Progress Schedule. 1.05 HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle materials and equipment, including those furnished by Owner, by methods that prevent soiling or damaging materials and equipment and packaging. B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring, and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending and overstressing. D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. E. Handle materials and equipment in safe manner and as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off delivery vehicles or at other times during handling. Hand-carry or use suitable handling equipment. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 65 00-4 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. General requirements of storing and protecting equipment and materials. 1.02 STORAGE A. Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall make all arrangements and provisions necessary for, and pay all costs for, storing materials and equipment. Construction equipment, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be placed to avoid injuring the Work and existing facilities and property, and so that free access is maintained at all times to all parts of the Work and to public utility installations in vicinity of the Work. Store materials and equipment neatly and compactly in locations that cause minimum inconvenience to Owner, other contractors, public travel, and owners, tenants, and occupants of adjoining property. Arrange storage in manner to allow easy access for inspection. C. Areas available at the Site for storing materials and equipment are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as approved by Engineer. D. Store materials and equipment to become Owner's property to facilitate their inspection and ensure preservation of quality and fitness of the Work, including proper protection against damage by freezing, moisture, and high ambient temperatures. Store in indoor, climate-controlled storage areas all materials and equipment subject to damage by moisture, humidity, heat, cold, and other elements, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner. E. Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage (including theft) to stored materials and equipment. F. Do not open manufacturer's containers until time of installation, unless recommended by the manufacturer, directed by Engineer or otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 0 N O A N O ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 66 00-1 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS G. Do not store materials or equipment in structures being constructed unless approved by Engineer in writing. H. Do not use lawns or other private property for storage without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. I. Contractor shall not store unnecessary equipment and materials at the Site. J. Contractor shall prevent structures from being loaded with a weight that endanger its security and/or safety of persons. K. Stored equipment and materials shall not be placed within 10 feet of fire hydrants. L. Gutters, drainage channels and inlets shall be kept unobstructed at all times. 1.03 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide temporary storage containers/facilities, if required, to protect equipment and materials at the Site. B. Equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipping, handling, and storage, in accordance with Section 01 65 00— Product Delivery Requirements. C. Store all materials and equipment off the ground (or floor) on raised supports such as skids or pallets. D. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted equipment surfaces that are damaged or marred shall be repainted in their entirety in accordance with equipment manufacturer and paint manufacturer requirements, to the satisfaction of Engineer. 1.04 SPECIFIC STORAGE REQUIREMENTS A. Uncovered: 1. The following types of materials may be stored outdoors without cover on supports so there is no contact with the ground: a. Piping, except polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated PVC (CPVC) pipe. B. Covered: 1. The following materials and equipment may be stored outdoors on supports and completely covered with covering impervious to water: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 66 00-2 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS a. Grout and mortar materials. b. Rough lumber. C. PVC and CPVC pipe. 2. Tie down covers with rope, and slope covering to prevent accumulation of water. C. Fully Protected: 1. All materials and equipment not named as uncovered or covered in this Section, shall be stored on supports in buildings or trailers that have concrete or wooden flooring, roof, and fully closed walls on all sides. Covering with plastic sheeting or similar material in space without floor, roof, and walls is not acceptable. Comply with the following: a. Provide heated storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by low temperatures or freezing. b. Provide air-conditioned storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by high temperatures. C. Protect mechanical and electrical equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, and moisture. d. Maintain humidity at levels recommended by manufacturers of electrical and electronic equipment. e. Energize space heaters for electrical equipment and material. D. Maintenance of Storage: On scheduled basis, periodically inspect stored materials and equipment to ensure that: 1. Condition and status of storage facilities is adequate to provide required storage conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Materials and equipment exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 1.05 RECORDS A. Keep up-to-date account of materials and equipment in storage to facilitate preparation of Applications for Payment, if the Contract Documents provide for payment for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 66 00-3 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 66 00-4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 71 33 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Protection of existing utilities and structures. 2. Protection of installed equipment and materials. 3. Protection during inclement weather. 4. Reporting of accidents. 5. Barricades and warning signals. B. Contractor shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs, and taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property and facilities from damage, as specified in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. C. To prevent damage, injury, or loss, Contractor's actions shall include the following: 1. Storing apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that does not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or work of other contractors or utility companies. 2. Providing suitable storage facilities for equipment and materials subject to damage or degradation by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or other cause. 3. Placing upon the Work or any part thereof only loads consistent with the safety and integrity of that portion of the Work and existing construction. 4. Frequently removing and disposing of refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by Contractor's operations so that, at all times, the Site is safe, orderly, and workmanlike in appearance. D. Contractor has full responsibility for preserving public and private property and facilities 0 on and adjacent to the Site. Direct or indirect damage done by, or on account of, any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct by Contractor in executing the Work, shall be restored ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 71 33-1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY by Contractor, at their expense to condition equal to that existing before damage was done. E. Contractor shall comply with safety regulations required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall comply with and correct unsafe conditions created or caused by Contractor's personnel. In the event Contractor fails to comply, Owner receives the right to take necessary measures to correct conditions or practices for reimbursement by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. "Existing utilities" shall refer to both publicly-owned and privately-owned utilities such as, but are not limited to, electric power and lighting, telephone, water, gas, storm drains, process lines, sanitary sewers and all appurtenant structures. 2. "Surface structures" are existing buildings, structures, and other facilities at or above ground surface, including their foundations or any extension below ground surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls, channels, open drainage, exposed piping and utilities, poles, exposed wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, fencing, and other facilities visible at or above ground surface. 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Location of Existing Utilities and Structures: 1. Contractor shall confirm and verify location of existing utilities and structures at the Site prior to commencing the Work. 2. Contractor shall notify and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction prior to performing the Work in the vicinity of the existing utilities and structures. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES A. General: 1. Contractor shall satisfy Engineer that methods and procedures for protection have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to proceeding with the Work. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 71 33-2 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 2. Contractor shall provide temporary support and protection, as required, to existing utilities and structures during the Work, including support of excavation. a. Temporary support and protection of existing utilities shall be provided in accordance with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. b. Temporary support and protection of existing structures shall be provided as required to ensure structural integrity is not compromised. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred for temporary support or protection provided by a third-party or authority having jurisdiction to insure safety of the existing utility, Owner, and public and private parties. B. Existing Buried Utilities: 1. Contractor shall perform field investigate to identify conflicts or interferences between existing utilities and utility Work prior to excavation Work. a. Investigation of conflicts and interferences shall be performed on Site locations, elevations, slopes, etc. of the existing utilities determined during the field investigations. b. Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner in writing of identified conflicts or interferences. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until written authorization is provided by the Engineer. C. Identified conflicts and interferences shall be handled in accordance with the Contract Documents. If required, potential modification to the Contract Documents shall be performed in accordance with Section 01 26 00 — Contract Modification Procedures. 2. Contractor shall perform the Work to prevent disruption of existing service and damage to existing utilities. a. Temporary connections shall be provided, as required, to provide un- interrupted service of existing utilities. b. Contractor shall repair damage to existing utilities as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction at Contractor's own expense. C. Contractor shall be responsible for damages and repair costs to the authority having jurisdiction if third-party or authority having jurisdiction personnel repair damaged existing utilities. C. Protection of Existing Structures: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 71 33-3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 1. Contractor shall sustain existing surface structures in existing place and protect from direct or indirect injury located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Such sustaining and supporting shall be done carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure or facility. 2. Contractor shall bear all risks attending the presence or proximity of all surface structures within or adjacent to limits of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by their Work to structures and facilities. 4. Contractor shall repair immediately damage caused by their Work, to the satisfaction of owner of damaged structure or facility at no cost to the Owner. 5. Contractor shall provide temporary weather protection for existing structures and buildings where exterior walls or roofs are modified or disturbed in the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate protection of existing structures and building. D. Relocation of Surface Structures: Existing surface facilities, including but not limited to guard rails, posts, guard cables, signs, poles, markers, curbs, and fencing, that are temporarily removed to facilitate the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original condition at Contractor's expense. 3.02 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Contractor shall protect installed equipment and materials to prevent damage, injury or loss from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed prior to completion of the Work. B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. C. Coverings: Provide coverings to protect materials and equipment from damage. 3.03 PROTECTION DURING INCLEMENT WEATHER A. Contractor shall not perform Work during inclement or unsuitable weather that will affect the quality of the completed Work. B. Contractor shall take necessary precautions in the event of impending inclement weather to protect equipment, materials and Work from damage or deterioration due to floods, driving rain, wind, or snow storms. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 71 33-4 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 1. Owner reserves the right to require additional protection measures beyond Contractor's proposed protection measures to protect the Work. 2. Contractor shall not claim additional compensation for additional protection measures required by Owner nor for damages to equipment, material, or Work due to the inclement weather. C. When directed by Engineer, Contractor shall stop Work and protect new Work by protective covering during rain storms for, but not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete mixing and placement. 2. Paving placement. 3. Masonry installation. 4. Buried piping, valve and appurtenance installation. 5. Additional inclement weather requirements and limitations are specified in individual Specification Sections. 3.04 REPORTING OF ACCIDENTS A. Contractor shall immediately report, in writing, to Engineer and Owner accidents out of, or in conjunction with, the performance of Work. 1. Accident reporting includes on Site and adjacent to Site, which cause death, personal injury, or property damage. 2. Written report shall provide full details and witness statements. 3. If claim is made against Contractor, Supplier, or Subcontractor due to accident, Contractor shall promptly report facts, in writing, to Engineer and Owner, with full account of the claim. B. Contractor shall immediately report death, serious injury, or serious damage caused by telephone or messenger to Engineer and Owner. 3.05 BARRICADES AND WARNING SIGNALS A. General: 1. Where the Work is performed on or adjacent to roadway, access road, right-of- way, or public place: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 71 33-5 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY a. Provide barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, danger signals, watchmen, and take other precautionary measures for protecting persons, property, and the Work. b. Paint barricades to be visible at night. C. From sunset to sunrise, furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade. d. Erect sufficient barricades to keep vehicles from being driven on or into Work under construction. e. Furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect the Work. B. Provide temporary barricades to protect personnel and property for Work not in or adjacent to vehicular travel areas, including indoor work, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor's responsibility for maintaining temporary barricades, signs, lights, and for providing watchmen shall continue until the Work is accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 71 33-6 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY SECTION 01 73 00 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required for execution of the Work as specified in this Section, including the following: a. Construction Electronic Documentation b. Demolition C. Cutting and Coring d. Patching e. Installation 2. Requirements for demolition, removal and disposal of existing buildings, structures, pavement, curbs, and sidewalks and electrical, plumbing, heating and ventilation equipment and materials as indicated in the Contract Documents for demolition. 3. General requirements for installation of equipment and material. Additional installation requirements are included in the individual Specification Sections. 4. General requirements for connections to existing facilities. Requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work are included in Section 01 14 00 — Coordination with Owner's Operations. a. To extent possible, materials, equipment, systems, piping, and appurtenances that will be placed into service upon completion of connection to existing facilities shall be checked, successfully tested, and in condition for operation prior to making connections to existing facilities, if valves, gates, or similar watertight and gastight isolation devices are not provided at the connection point. 0 A N_ N N ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-1 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 5. Requirements for cutting and coring, and rough and finish patching of holes and openings in existing construction. Provide cutting, coring, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and fill, required to complete the Work, and to: a. Remove and replace defective Work. b. Remove samples of installed Work as specified or required for testing. C. Remove construction required to perform required alterations or additions to existing work. d. Connect to completed Work not performed in proper sequence. e. Remove or relocate existing utilities and pipes that obstruct the Work in locations where connections must be made. f. Make connections or alterations to existing or new facilities. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 14 00 — Coordination with Owner's Operations 2. Section 01 57 00 —Temporary Controls 3. Section 01 61 00 — Product Requirements and Options 4. Section 01 66 00 — Product Storage and Protection Requirements 5. Section 01 71 33 — Protection of Work and Property 6. Section 01 74 00 — Cleaning and Waste Management 7. Section 01 79 00 — Instruction of Owner's Personnel 8. Section 02 41 00 — Site Demolition 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. "Manufacturer's installation instructions" includes manufacturer's written instructions; drawings; illustrative, wiring, and schematic diagrams; diagrams identifying external connections; and other such information pertaining to installation of equipment and materials. Installation instructions are printed instructions, including those attached to the equipment and materials, all inclusive. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-2 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 2. "Salvage" items are equipment and materials shown on the Contract Documents for selective removal by the Contractor to furnish to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for removal, handling, and depositing of equipment and material to location designated by Owner. B. Reference Standards: 1. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA. 2. ANSI A10, Construction and Demolition Operations 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of Work for connections to existing facilities to prevent delay of the Work. 3. Remove and dispose of equipment and materials indicated for demolition on the Contract Documents, unless indicated as salvage items for the Owner. Contractor shall obtain ownership of removed equipment and materials following Engineer and Owner approval. Disposal of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents B. Sequencing: 1. Contractor shall remove and demolish equipment and materials in sequence specified in Section 01 14 00— Coordination with Owner's Operation and following approval by Engineer and Owner. 2. Contractor shall replace equipment and materials removed without proper authorization from Engineer, which are necessary for the operation of the existing facilities. Re-installation of equipment and materials shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Owner C. Title to Equipment and Materials: 1. Equipment and materials indicated for demolition and removal in the Contract Documents, and not designated as Owner's salvaged items, shall become the Contractor's property following removal from the Site. Contractor shall be responsible for legally disposing of the equipment and material. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-3 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 2. Contractor shall have no right or title to any of the equipment, materials, or other items to be removed until the elements have been removed from the Site. 3. Contractor shall not sell or assign or attempt to sell or assign any interest in the equipment, materials, or other items until removal from Site. 4. Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner because of the absence of equipment, fixtures, and materials. D. Salvage Equipment and Materials: 1. Contract Documents indicate equipment and materials that shall be retained by Owner. Owner has the right to request any demolished equipment and materials be retained at their discretion. 2. Contractor shall move salvaged equipment and materials to storage areas located at the Site as instructed by Owner. 3. Architectural equipment and materials may be salvaged for incorporation into the Work when approved by Engineer. E. Use of Explosives: Contractor shall not use explosives or blasting equipment and material in the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals: 1. Construction electronic documentation as specified in this Section. 2. Demolition Plan: Submit detailed description of methods, equipment, and sequence for demolition Work, including means of ensuring stability of structures during demolition activities. 3. Cutting and Patching Request: a. Submit written request to Engineer, well in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects one or more of the following: 1) Design function or intent of Project. 2) Work of Owner or other contractors. 3) Structural value or integrity of an element of the Project. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-4 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 4) Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 5) Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 6) Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. b. Request shall include: 1) Identification of Project and contract name and number. 2) Description of affected Work of Contractor and work of others (if any). 3) Necessity for cutting. 4) Effect on work of Owner, other contractors (if any), and on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5) Description of proposed Work, including scope of cutting and patching; trades who will be executing the Work; products proposed to be used; extent of refinishing; schedule of operations; alternatives to cutting and patching, if any. 6) Designation of entity responsible for cost of cutting and patching, when applicable. 7) Written permission of other contractors (if any) whose work will be impacted. 4. Recommendation Regarding Cutting and Patching: a. Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate a change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to Engineer including: 1) Conditions indicating change. 2) Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. 3) Items required with substitution request, in accordance with the substitution request requirements of the Contract Documents and Section 01 61 00— Product Requirements and Options. 5. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the protective compound to be applied to core-drilled surfaces and cut concrete surfaces, as well as means of protecting exposed reinforcement or other metal embedments. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-5 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 6. Informational Submittal: Submit written indication designating the day and time that the construction associated with cutting and patching will be uncovered, to allow observation. Do not begin cutting or patching operations until submittal is accepted by Engineer. 7. Comply with submittal requirements of individual Specification Sections for patching materials. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Owner does not assume responsibility for the actual condition of structures and equipment to be demolished and removed. B. Existing Site conditions shall be maintained to the greatest extent possible by the Owner to the time of Notice to Proceed. C. Contractor shall perform investigations, explorations, and probes as necessary at the Site prior to initiating demolition Work to ascertain any required protective measures before proceeding with demolition and removal. Contractor shall give particular attention to shoring and bracing requirements to prevent damage to the Work and existing structures. D. Contractor shall verify measurements, dimensions and other conditions of each existing structure, system, equipment, and material indicated in the Contract Documents for new Work prior to ordering equipment and materials. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide materials and products in accordance with the individual Specification Sections and the Contract Documents. 2. Provide materials and products that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible for exposed surfaces. 3. If not indicated in the Contract Documents, provide materials and products that are identical to existing materials and products affected by the Work. 4. If identical materials and products are unavailable, provide materials and products that shall equal or exceed performance requirements of existing materials and products. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-6 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK B. Protective Coating Applied to Core-Drilled Surfaces and Cut Concrete Surfaces: 1. All concrete surfaces exposed due to cutting or core drilling shall be coated with an epoxy resin coating such as Sikagard 62 by Sika Corporation, Durakote 240 by Tamms Industries or approved equal. 2. Reinforcement or other metal embedment exposed by concrete cutting or core drilling shall be burned back a minimum of% inch below surface and resulting void shall be filled with an epoxy resin binder. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION A. Pre-Construction Documentation 1. Contractor shall take photographic and video documentation of the Site where Work is being performed. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation. 2. Contractor shall provide both photographic and video documentation at grade-level and aerial of the Site prior to commence Work. 3. Contractor shall submit pre-construction documentation to Engineer and Owner for review. Contractor, Engineer, and Owner shall visit Site to field verify electronic documentation prior to commencing the Work. Site visit verification shall establish existing conditions prior to commencing Work. B. Construction Progress Documentation 1. Contractor shall document Work progress at locations and construction as directed by Engineer, at a minimum. 2. Contractor shall provide electronic documentation prior to and following any shutdown, switchover, demolition, de-commissioning, cutting, patching, repair, etc. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation. 3. Contractor shall document following exposure of buried utilities, piping, valve, appurtenances, and other underground elements. 4. Engineer reserves the right to provide construction progress documentation to confirm Contractor electronic documentation. C. Post-Construction Documentation ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-7 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 1. Contractor shall take photographic and video documentation of the Site where Work has been completed and prior to Substantial Completion or partial utilization by Owner. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation. 2. Contractor shall provide both photographic and video documentation at grade-level and aerial of the Site following completion of the Work. D. Submittal Requirements: 1. Documentation shall be time stamped for verification, including date and time. 2. Documentation shall be organized in a logical manner, such as by structure, building, physical site location, etc. for easy of comparison. 3. Photographic documentation shall be high resolution electronic versions. 4. Documentation shall be submitted to Engineer for review and approval prior to commence Work and at completion of the Work. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. General: 1. Demolition Work shall comply with the applicable provisions and recommendation of ANSI A10, Construction and Demolition Operations standards, all governing codes, and as specified in this Section. 2. Contractor shall furnish competent and experienced personnel for the various type of demolition and removal Work. Demolition and removal Work shall be performed with regard to the safety of Owner employees, individuals at the Site, and the public. 3. Contractor shall confirm absence of embedded utilities prior to cutting, coring, or demolishing existing concrete and facilities. Verification shall be performed by portable x-ray, ground penetrating radar, or other non-invasive methods. a. Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner if embedded utilities are located during the investigation. Contractor shall clearly mark and document location of embedded utilities prior to performing the Work. b. Contractor shall be responsible for repair and damages caused by exploration, investigation, and performance of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-8 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 4. Contractor shall remove temporary work, such as enclosures, signs, guards, etc. when such temporary Work is no longer required or when directed at the completion of the Work. 5. Contractor shall perform patching, restoration and Work in accordance with individual Specification Sections and details shown on Contract drawings. 6. Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by demolition Work to existing structures, equipment and materials indicated for reuse or to remain at no additional cost to Owner. 7. Contractor shall maintain a clean working environment during the demolition Work in accordance with Section 01 74 00— Cleaning and Waste Management. 8. Contractor shall proceed with the demolition work in a sequence designed to maintain the plant in operation in accordance with Section 01 14 00— Coordination with Owner's Operations. 9. Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and debris. Select fill or structural fill shall be used where specifically required on Contract Drawings. 10. All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a properly permitted facility as part of the work of this Contract. All regulations covering material handling and disposal shall be followed. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed. All other material shall be disposed of off-site by the Contractor at his expense. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted at the site. B. Protection during Demolition: 1. Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain catch platforms, lights, barriers, weather protection, warning signs and other items as required for proper protection of the public, occupants of the building, personnel engaged in demolition Work, and adjacent construction. 2. Contractor shall provide and maintain weather protection at exterior openings to fully protect the interior premises against damage from the elements until such openings are closed by the Work. 3. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary protection of the existing structure designated to remain where demolition, removal and Work is being done, connections made, materials handled, or equipment moved. Temporary protection ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-9 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 71 33 — Protection of Work and Property. 4. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent dust from rising by wetting demolished masonry, concrete, plaster, and similar debris. Unaltered portions of the existing buildings affected by the operations in the Contract Documents shall be protected by dust proof partitions and other adequate means. Dust control shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 57 00 —Temporary Controls. 5. Contractor shall perform the demolition Work with minimum traffic interference. Contractor shall not close or obstruct walkways, passageways, or stairways. Contractor shall not store or place materials in passageways, stairs, or other means of egress. 6. Contractor shall minimize disturbances to exterior walls and roofs to small sections that are readily repaired and patched to maintain watertight conditions in existing structures and buildings. C. Performance of Demolition: 1. Equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances: a. Contractor shall drain equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances prior to demolition Work. Contractor shall be responsible for collection, transport, and disposal of drained contents at no additional cost to the Owner. b. Contractor shall provide line stops, plugs, blind flanges, etc. for equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenance required to remain in service during the Project. Contractor shall provide temporary or permanent supports in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Supports, pedestals and anchors shall be removed with the equipment and piping unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. d. Concrete bases, anchor bolts and other supports shall be removed to approximately 1 inch below the surrounding finished area and the recesses shall be filled with epoxy resin binder. e. Wall and roof openings shall be closed, and damaged surfaces shall be patched to match the adjacent areas, in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. f. Wall sleeves, wall pipes, and wall castings shall be plugged or blanked off in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-10 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK g. Openings in concrete shall be closed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. 2. Electrical components and equipment: a. Contractor shall de-energize panelboards, lighting fixtures, switches, circuit breakers, electrical conduits, motors, limit switches, pressure switches, instrumentation such as flow, level and/or other meters, wiring, and similar electrical equipment prior to removal. b. Contractor shall relocate or isolate electrical equipment and materials that serve equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenance that are to remain in service during the Project. Relocation or isolation Work shall be sequenced and scheduled in accordance with Section 01 14 00 — Coordination with Owner's Operations. 3. Reused and relocated equipment: a. Contractor shall receive approval from Engineer prior to removal and relocation of equipment and material. Equipment and materials removed by Contractor prior to Engineer's approval that is required for Owner's operation of the facility shall be reinstalled at no cost to the Owner. b. Prior to removal and relocation Work, equipment and materials indicated for reuse and relocation shall be operated by Owner with Contractor and Engineer present to witness existing functionality and operation. C. Contractor shall provide personnel responsible for reinstallation of equipment and material for the removal Work. d. Contractor shall be responsible and provide storage and protection of equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 66 00— Product Storage and Protection Requirements until relocation and reinstallation Work is performed. e. Contractor shall provide replacement equipment and material that is damaged during the removal Work at new cost to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible to provide same type, model, electrical components, etc. equipment and material as approved by Engineer and Owner. 4. Structural removal: a. Contractor shall provide and install temporary shoring, struts, and bracing required for the demolition Work to ensure stability during entire demolition process. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-11 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK b. Contractor shall cut and remove structural material at the interface of demolition Work and the existing structural element. Cutting and removal shall occur in small sections, including masonry units, to prevent instability of structural elements. C. Contractor shall patch, repair, and refinish adjacent surfaces that remain following demolition Work. 1) Adjacent surfaces shall be repaired and refinished to the condition prior to the demolition Work and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, loose paint, etc., prior to refinishing. d. Contractor shall limit cutting of existing roof areas designated to remain to the limits required for the proper installation of the Work. 1) Cut and remove insulation, joists, flashing, membranes, shingles, and metals, etc. in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer for installation of the Work. 2) Provide temporary weather tight protection as required until new roofing and flashings are installed. 5. Architectural repairs and removal Work, not specifically shown on the Drawings, may include, but not limited to, the following: a. Brickwork: Re-pointing; removing and replacing broken, cracked, disintegrating and missing materials. b. Windows: Removing cracked or disintegrating sealant material; replacing missing or broken glass; re-caulking and sealing frames; glazing sealants. C. Re-finishing: Removing rust, sealing, or peeling paint from surfaces by scraping, sanding or wire brushing; priming and repainting surfaces. d. Roofing: Patching and repairing membrane or built-up roofing; metal flashing repair; correcting roof pitch to eliminate ponding; cleaning and/or replacing roof drains. e. Masonry: Cutting and installing new expansion and control joints. f. Parapets: Removing and construction of new walls and copings; clean and patching of copings; replacing copings where broken. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-12 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK g. Concrete surfaces: Patching, cleaning, sealing and resurfacing floors, walls, lintels, sills, and trim. Replace lintels where broken. Patching or replacing broken, spalled, cracked and disintegrating concrete encased steel columns and piers. h. Openings: Cutting and modifying as required for new Work. Provide new lintels, doors, and frames. i. Doors: Patching and refinishing doors and frames. j. Ceilings: Patching, refinishing, and replacing. k. Guards, handrails, and appurtenances: Cleaning and repainting steel materials. Replacing steel material with new aluminum material. I. Demolished Exterior Openings: Remove window sash, frame, sill, stool and trim at exterior doors indicated for enclosure and sealing. Provide brick and/or masonry block for closure and sealing. D. Maintenance during Demolition: 1. Contractor shall maintain the buildings, structures, and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish, generated by the demolition Work. 2. Contractor shall provide cleaning and waste management of demolition equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00 — Cleaning and Waste Management. 3.03 CUTTING AND CORING A. General: 1. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing and receiving Engineer's approval prior to cutting load bearing walls (concrete or masonry) and structural concrete floors. 2. Perform cutting and coring to limit extent of patching required. 3. Structural Elements: Do not cut or core structural elements in manner that would change structural element's load-carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. 4. Operating Elements: Do not cut or core operating elements in manner that would reduce capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut or core operating elements or related components in manner that would increase maintenance requirements or decrease operational life or safety. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-13 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK 5. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and coring Work. Contractor shall use methods that do not void required or existing warranties. 6. Provide temporary or permanent bypass provisions prior to cutting existing pipe, conduit, ductwork, or other utilities serving facilities scheduled to be removed or relocated in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. Inspection: Examine and prepare surfaces prior to commencing Work. Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 8. Preparation: a. Provide temporary support required to maintain structural integrity, to protect adjacent Work from damage, and to support the element(s) to be cut or cored. b. Protection of Existing Construction During Cutting and Coring: 1) Protect existing structures, equipment, and materials during cutting and coring to prevent damage. 2) Provide protection from adverse weather conditions that will be exposed during cutting and coring Work. 3) Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 9. Restoration: a. Clean equipment, materials, piping systems, valves, conduit and appurtenances that were damaged due to the Work prior to applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe coverings, including insulation, to original condition. B. Cutting: 1. General: a. Cut existing structures and appurtenances that provide surfaces for installation or repair of the Work. Cut existing construction using methods to ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-14 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK minimize damage and disturbance to retained and adjoining construction elements. b. Cutting equipment used shall be hand or small power tools suitable for sawing or grinding. Avoid using hammering or chopping equipment for cutting Work. C. Cut holes and slots as small as possible and to size required for incorporation of the Work and in accordance with the Contract Documents. d. Cut or drill from exposed or finished side to concealed side to avoid marring finished surfaces. e. Provide adequate bracing of area to be cut prior to cutting. f. Provide equipment and material to remove cut spoils. g. Provide temporary protection for cut openings where and when Work is not being performed. 2. Concrete and Masonry: a. Cut through concrete and masonry using concrete wall saw with diamond saw blades. b. Provide control for slurry generated during sawing on both sides of element being cut. C. After cutting concrete and before installing new Work on or through the opening, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material specified in this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Coring: 1. Core-drill holes through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches, in accordance with the Contract Documents, unless written authorization is furnished by Engineer. 2. Protection: Protect existing structures, equipment, materials, utilities, and adjacent areas from water and other damage by core-drilling Work. 3. Coring: a. Perform coring with non-impact rotary tool using diamond core-drills. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-15 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK b. Size holes for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment, or mechanical seals, as required, to be installed through the penetration and in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. After core-drilling and before installing equipment and material through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material specified in this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Cleaning: Vacuum or otherwise remove slurry and tailings from the work area following core-drilling. 3.04 PATCHING A. General: 1. Construction shall be patched by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing-up, and similar methods at completion of the Work. 2. Provide equipment and materials in accordance with the Contract Documents for patching Work. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Provide airtight connections to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces when patching the Work. Provide durable patching seams that minimize visual appearance. 4. Patched areas shall be tested to demonstrate integrity of installation as directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide testing equipment, material, and services for patch testing. B. Restoration: 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas to minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. Contractor shall extend refinishing and restoration into adjoining areas to blend patched areas with existing adjacent areas. a. Refinish to nearest intersection for continuous surfaces. b. Refinish the entire assembly and system for equipment and materials. C. Repair and rehang existing ceilings to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-16 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK d. Apply plaster and finishes to match adjacent interior walls and partition areas for openings sealed with brick and/or masonry block. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with the Contract Documents, approved Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's installation instructions. When manufacturer's installation instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding. B. Preparation of surfaces shall be performed prior to installation of equipment and material. 1. New floor finishes: Repair and patch with concrete, asphalt latex type emulsion and underlayment as required for existing surfaces or new flooring surfaces. 2. Ceramic tile flooring or bases installed over concrete floors: Grind away cove, if present, for installation of new Work. C. Concrete surfaces shall achieve compression strength in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to installation of equipment and materials. 1. Anchor bolts and templates shall be provided by Contractor and as specified in the individual Specification Sections. 2. Concrete foundations shall be treated with sealer to prevent oil from seeping into concrete as specified in the individual Specification Sections. D. Maintain the work area in a broom-clean condition while installing materials and equipment. E. Contractor shall be responsible for equipment for hoisting, lifting, moving, rigging, etc. for installation of equipment and materials. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for design of temporary installation system used for the installation Work, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing structure, equipment, and material caused prior, during, and following installation of the Work with the Contractor furnished temporary installation system at no cost to Owner. Repairs shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, shall return to condition prior to installation Work, and as directed by the Engineer. 3. Owner's hoists, monorails, bridge cranes, rigging, etc. shall not be used by the Contractor unless written authorization is provided by Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-17 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK F. Alteration or repair of new equipment and materials shall not be permitted without written authorization from Engineer. G. Field welding or burning of new equipment and materials shall not be permitted unless indicated in the Contract Documents or without written authorization from Engineer. H. Contractors shall install temporary shoring and bracing where necessary during installation of the Work where required: 1. System shall be provided in accordance with the Contract Documents and code requirements. 2. Temporary system shall consist of adjustable sound timbers or rolled shapes easily removable following installation of the Work. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing structures and new Work during installation, utilization, and removal of the temporary system at new additional cost to the Owner. I. Manufacturer's Installation Services: Provide competent, qualified manufacturer's representatives of equipment and material for services specified in the individual Specification Sections, including, but not limited to: 1. Supervising installation 2. Checking the completed installation 3. Adjusting and testing of equipment and materials 4. Instructing Owner's operations and maintenance in accordance with Section 01 79 00 — Instruction of Owner's Personnel. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 73 00-18 DEMOLITION AND EXECUTION OF WORK SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Administrative and procedural requirements for progress and closeout cleaning at the Site. 1. Contractor shall execute cleaning during the Project, at completion of the Work, and as required by the General Conditions and this Section. 2. Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work. B. Administrative and procedural requirements for disposing of non-hazardous excavation and construction waste. 1. Contractor shall comply with the requirements and procedures for construction waste management and disposal, including developing and implementing a plan for construction waste management and disposal. 2. Extent of required construction waste management and disposal includes within the Project limits, as shown or indicated. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. "Waste Management Coordinator' is the person responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting the status of the Waste Management Plan. Although available for other assignments, the Waste Management Coordinator shall be present at the Site full time for the duration of the Work. 2. "Construction waste" is building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. 3. "Demolition waste" is building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. N W O 4. "Disposal" is removal to an off-Site location of demolition and construction waste A and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or disposal in a landfill or incinerator ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-1 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT conforming to Laws and Regulations and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Reference Standards: NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations 1.03 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Waste Management Plan: 1. General: Develop preliminary plan consisting of waste identification. Indicate quantities by weight or volume. Use the same units of measure throughout waste management plan. 2. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of excavation waste generated by the Work. 3. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether waste will be disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. a. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in the Work, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporating them into the Work. b. Disposed Materials: Provide information on how and where materials will be disposed. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility that will be used. C. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Provide information on the method(s) that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location at the Site where materials separation will be located. B. Failure of Contractor to Maintain Clean Site and Waste Management Plan: 1. Owner will provide written notification to Contractor for failure to maintain a clean Site and waste management plan. 2. Written notification shall provide five (5) days for Contractor to remedy Site cleaning and waste management to the Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction. 3. Following the five (5) day remedy period, Owner shall without prejudice to any other rights provide services to clean Site to the satisfaction of Owner and ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-2 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursement of Owner's costs and expenses for the cleaning work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals: 1. Preliminary Waste Management Plan: Prepare in accordance with this Section and submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed and prior to removing waste from the Site. 2. Final Waste Management Plan: Submit within 14 days of receiving Engineer's comments on the preliminary waste management plan. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Provide copy of receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Replace loaded containers with empty containers as demand requires. B. Deposit recyclable materials in containers free from debris. C. Transport and deposit waste in containers to minimize dust. Close container covers immediately after materials are deposited. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by Contractor at least weekly. Dispose of materials in accordance with the General Conditions and the following: 1. Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-3 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 2. Do not hold non-combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When temperature is less than 80 degrees F, dispose of non-combustible materials within seven days of their generation. 3. Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately. B. Work Areas: 1. Clean areas where the Work is in progress to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly and immediately report spills to Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum entire work area, as appropriate. 4. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. C. Installed Work: Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of material or equipment installed, using only cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment manufacturer. If manufacturer does not recommend specific cleaning agents or methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. D. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion. E. Cutting and Patching: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 2. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. F. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-4 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT protective covering where required for protection from damage or deterioration, until Substantial Completion. G. Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction period. 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK NEAR PUBLIC OR PRIVATE PROPERTY A. Contractor shall provide cleaning and either temporary or permanent restoration where Work is located in or near streets, right of ways, easements, or private property. B. Contractor shall backfill, compact, grade, and restore excavation or disturbed area to functional condition to permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic and original use of the area as the Work progresses. C. Temporary storage of excavation spoils, including earth, stones, boulders, and debris, shall be removed from the Site or area of disturbance. 3.03 CLOSEOUT CLEANING A. Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Clean and remove from the Site rubbish, waste material, debris, and other foreign substances. 2. Sweep paved areas broom-clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 3. Hose-clean sidewalks and loading areas. 4. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 5. Repair pavement, roads, sod, and other areas affected by construction operations and restore to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre- construction condition. 6. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition, free of spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, films, and similar foreign substances. 7. Leave the Site clean, and in neat, orderly condition, satisfactory to Owner and Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-5 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 3.04 WASTE MANAGEMENT IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement the waste management plan approved by Engineer. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items required to implement the waste management pan during the Project. B. Training: Train all installers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers as required on proper waste management procedures required for the Work. 1. Distribute the waste management plan as required within three days of Engineer's approval. 2. Distribute the waste management plan to Contractor's personnel, Subcontractors, and Suppliers prior to these entities starting the Work. Review with installers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers the waste management plan's procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent facilities. Designate and label specific areas of the Site necessary for separating materials to be disposed. 3.05 WASTE DISPOSAL A. General: Except for items or materials to be recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from the Site and properly dispose of waste in facility such as permitted landfill or incinerator or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, remove from the Site all waste and debris from the Work as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work, remove materials, equipment, waste, and debris and leave the Site clean, neat, and orderly. Comply with the Contract Documents regarding cleaning and removal of trash, debris, and waste. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Properly dispose of waste materials, surplus materials, debris, and rubbish off the Site. 4. Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, into storm sewers or sanitary sewers. 5. Do not discharge wastes into surface waters or drainage routes. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-6 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT B. Burying: Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Site. C. Burning: Do not burn waste materials at the Site. D. Disposal: Transport waste materials to proper location at site other than Owner's property for disposal in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting, and disposing of waste. 3.06 SNOW AND ICE REMOVAL A. The Contractor shall remove snow and ice from the following areas: 1. The sidewalks and parking areas associated with the Engineer's field office. 2. All construction access roads. a. Any walkways which cannot be accessed by the Owner's snow removal equipment due to construction activities. b. Any additional areas designated by the Engineer. 3. Snow and ice removal shall be completed prior to starting daily Work activities. 4. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall begin snow and/or ice removal immediately. 5. Contractor shall haul the removed snow and ice for disposal as per the applicable local rules. 6. Spreading of Salt and Sand a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to provide the following services specifically requested and authorized in writing by the Engineer: 1) Spread calcium chloride over all areas of the Engineer's parking lot and spread sand on the steps and platforms at the entrances to the Engineer's field office. 2) Salt and sand shall be spread prior to a snowstorm. 3) Upon termination of a snowstorm, the Contractor shall remove all sand from the steps and platforms at the entrances to the Engineer's field office. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-7 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT b. Disposal of sand shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 74 00-8 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT SECTION 01 75 00 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Checkout of products and equipment. 2. Startup procedures of products and equipment B. Contractor shall initially start up and place equipment installed under the Contract into successful operation, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions and as instructed by Supplier at the Site. C. Provide all material, labor, tools, and equipment required to complete equipment checkout and start-up. D. Provide all filters, lubricants, and other expendables required for initial start-up of equipment unless otherwise specified. Water and power to be provided by the Owner. E. General activities include: 1. Cleaning, as required under other provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Removing temporary protective coatings. 3. Checking and correcting (if necessary) leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchorage devices, fasteners, and alignment of piping, conduits, and ducts that may place stress on the connected equipment. 4. All adjustments required. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: 1. Displacement, as used herein, shall mean total peak-to-peak movement of vibrating equipment, in mils; velocity or speed of the vibration cycle, measured in distance per time, velocity and acceleration of the vibration cycle. Displacement, velocity and acceleration shall be measured by instruments/equipment equal to a I RD Mechanalysis, Bentley, Nevada. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-1 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate checkout and start-up with other contractors performing Work at the Site. 2. Do not start up system or subsystem for continuous operation until all components of that system or subsystem, including instrumentation and controls, have been tested to the extent practicable and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract Documents. 3. Responsibility for proper operation is by Contractor. 4. Supplier shall be present during checkout, start-up, and initial operation, except as otherwise specified. 5. Do not start up system, unit process, or equipment without submitting acceptable preliminary operations and maintenance manuals by Contractor, in accordance with Section 01 78 23 — Operations and Maintenance Data. C. Contractor's Requirements Prior to Owner's Responsibility: 1. Owner will assume responsibility for the equipment upon Substantial Completion. 2. Prior to turning over to Owner responsibility for operating and maintaining system or equipment shall be in accordance with this Section and the following requirements: a. Submit acceptable final operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23— Operations and Maintenance Data. b. Provide training of operations and maintenance personnel in accordance with Section 01 79 00— Instruction of Owner's Personnel. C. Complete system field quality control testing in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not limited to, the following: 1) Start-up certification shall be performed and completed by the equipment Supplier for the equipment and material prior to be placed into intended use by Owner as specified in the Contract Documents. 2) Equipment and material shall be operated for a minimum 30-day operational period to verify performance. In addition to specific requirements specified in the individual specification sections, process data that is recorded in the PLC shall be submitted to the Engineer in tabular format showing hourly process performance data. A log of all ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-2 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES alarms shall also be submitted, along with notes describing corrective measures applied in response to alarm condition. 3) If equipment and material does not perform satisfactorily during the 30- day operational period, then the warranty period start shall be delayed until satisfactorily performance is verified. a) Contractor shall repair or replace equipment and material that does not perform satisfactorily at no cost to Owner. b) Contractor shall furnish all equipment and material, labor, and incidentals necessary to provide equipment and material to the performance level required by the Contract Documents. d. Obtain from Engineer final certificate of Substantial Completion for either entire Work or the portion being turned over to Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Startup Schedule: Detailed summary of schedule, duration, manpower requirement, and Contractor's means and methods for startup. B. Vibration testing results C. Closeout Submittals: Manufacturer's certification of installation in accordance with this Section. D. Startup testing and operational demonstration performance data. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to the start-up of the facilities, Contractor shall have prepared and tested all equipment, subsystems and systems in accordance with the requirements of the individual Specification Section to check its ability for sustained operation, including inspections and adjustments by Manufacturer's representative. B. Contractor shall develop and submit schedule in accordance with this Section. C. After the facilities are sufficiently complete to permit start-up, Contractor shall furnish competent personnel to start-up the facilities. Contractor will be responsible for startup of all facilities constructed under this Contract. During the initial start-up period the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-3 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES Contractor shall check and provide for mechanical operation in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers' Field Services: 1. When specified, furnish services of factory trained representatives of material and equipment manufacturers as specified, including supervising installation, adjusting, checkout, start-up, and testing of materials and equipment. 2. Certification: a. When services by manufacturer are required at the Site, within 14 days after first test operation of equipment, submit to Engineer a letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating that materials and equipment are installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and installation instructions, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Include in the final operations and maintenance manual for the associated equipment a copy of the letter or completed form, as applicable. 3. Manufacturer shall bring any discrepancies to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. Contractor shall promptly correct any discrepancies noted by the Manufacturer. Manufacturer shall coordinate correction of discrepancies with the Contractor. Discrepancies and their correction shall be noted in inspection records and in all required reports. Any corrections that result in changes to the work as shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their execution. 3.03 VIBRATION TESTING A. Stationary rotating equipment, products and materials shall have vibration testing performed at the Site with a rated horsepower exceeding 66 horsepower. B. Vibration testing shall be performed by an experienced factory-trained and authorized third-party analysis expert shall be provided for and paid for by the Contractor. Each unit or pump system shall be tested separately without duplicate equipment running. All field testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer shall be furnished with seven (7) certified copies of vibration test data for each test performed. C. General testing requirements: 1. Variable speed drives—Tests shall be conducted at the full range of speeds between maximum and minimum. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-4 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES 2. Two-speed drives —Tests shall be conducted at both speeds. 3. Constant-speed drives —Tests shall be conducted under various loading conditions as determined by the Engineer. 4. Frequency of vibration, in frequency (i.e. Hz, cycles per second) and cycles per minute (cpm), shall be determined when vibration exceeds specified levels or as otherwise necessary. Vibration shall be measured on the bearing housing and the motor, unless other additional locations are deemed necessary by the Engineer and/or specified, the vibration analyst and/or published industry standards. 5. Vibration shall be checked in the radial and axial directions. Vibration shall be limited to the latest version of the following published standards: ISO, Hydraulic Institute (HI). a. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, axial vibration shall not exceed 0.1 in/sec; and radial vibration shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec. For pumps radial vibration shall not exceed that permitted by the Hydraulic Institute Standards except that, at vibration frequencies in excess of 8,000 cpm, the velocity shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec. 6. Noise or vibration in any rotating equipment which the Engineer judges to be excessive or damaging, shall be cause for rejection. D. Test results: 1. Contractor shall correct deficiencies within thirty days when vibration field test results exceed source quality control tests results, Manufacturer's recommendations, or the limits specified in the Contract Documents. 2. After corrections have been completed, the vibration testing shall be re-run at the Contractor's expense and the results re-submitted to the Engineer for review. 3.04 SYSTEM START-UP A. Equipment and materials shall be provided in conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Provide start-up services as specified in the individual Specification Sections. C. Contractor shall furnish consumables specific to the equipment being started up. Owner shall provide power and water. Contractor shall provide a plan and coordinate with Owner for disposal of water used for testing unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. D. General system requirements: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-5 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES 1. Start-up of the plant by Contractor shall include all mechanical systems, including but not limited to, pumps, compressors, and like equipment, and the ventilating, air conditioning (or heating), plumbing, and electrical systems. Start-up of either the heating or air conditioning systems is dependent upon the time of year that the plant start up is initiated. Contractor will be required to return at the beginning of the next heating or air conditioning season (whichever is applicable) to start the appropriate system. 2. Cleaning as required under provisions of the Contract Documents. 3. Remove temporary protective coatings. 4. Flushing and replacing greases and lubricants as required by Manufacturer 5. Lubrication. 6. Verify the following: a. Shaft and coupling alignments and reset where needed. b. Set motor, pump and other equipment rotation, safety interlocks, and belt tensions. C. Leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchor bolts, fasteners, and alignment of piping, conduits and ducts that may apply stress on equipment. 7. Valves: a. Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage but allow valve stems to operate without galling. b. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is determined to be complete. C. Replace packing on valves that continue to leak. d. Remove and repair bonnets that leak. e. After cleaning, coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation of"Molycote" or"Fel-Pro". 8. Verify that control valve seats are free of foreign matter and are properly positioned for intended service. 9. Tighten flanges and other pipe joints after system has been placed in operation. 10. Replace gaskets that show signs of leakage after tightening. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-6 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES 11. Inspect all joints for leakage: a. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust other corrosion to form. b. Clean threads on both parts and apply compound and remake joints. 12. After system has been placed in operation, clean valve seats and headers in fluid system to ensure freedom from foreign matter. 13. Remove rust, scale, and foreign matter from equipment and renew defaced surfaces. 14. Repair damaged insulation. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 75 00-7 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Substantial Completion. 2. Final inspection. 3. Request for final payment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Substantial completion procedures for requesting and documenting are in the General Conditions, as modified by Supplemental Conditions. 2. Final inspection procedures for requesting and documenting are in the General Conditions, as modified by Supplemental Conditions. 1.03 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Request for Final Payment: 1. Procedure: Submit request for final payment in accordance with the Agreement and General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Request for final payment shall include: 1. Documents required for progress payments in Section 01 29 01 — Measurement and Basis for Payment. 2. Documents required in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. Releases or Waivers of Lien Rights: 0 w N a. Provide a final release or waiver by Contractor and each Subcontractor and Supplier that provided Contractor with labor, material, or equipment totaling $10,000 or more. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 77 19-1 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS b. Provide list of Subcontractors and Suppliers for which release or waiver of Lien is required. C. Each release or waiver of Lien shall be signed by an authorized representative of the entity submitting release or waiver to Contractor, and shall include Subcontractor's or Supplier's corporate seal, when applicable. d. Release or waiver of Lien may be conditional upon receipt of final payment. e. Manufacturer's Affidavit of Release of Liens—furnish a separate, completed form from the manufacturer. 4. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 77 19-2 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for operation and maintenance data, manuals, and documentation. 1. Submit operation and maintenance data, in accordance with this Section and in accordance with requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, as instructional and reference manuals by operations and maintenance personnel at the Site. 2. Required operation and maintenance data groupings are listed in this Section. At minimum, submit operation and maintenance data for: a. All equipment and systems b. Valves, gates, actuators, and related accessories C. Instrumentation and control devices d. Electrical gear 3. For each operation and maintenance manual, submit the following: a. Preliminary Submittal: Printed and bound copy of entire operation and maintenance manual or electronic copy, except for test data and service reports by Supplier. b. Final Submittal: Printed and bound copy of complete operations and maintenance manual and electronic copy, including test data and service reports by Supplier. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Quantity Required and Timing of Submittals: 1. Preliminary Submittal: a. Printed Copies: One copy, exclusive of copies required by N a Contractor. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA b. Electronic Copies: One copy. C. Submit to Engineer, whichever occurs first: 1) 60 days prior to starting training of operations and maintenance personnel. 2) 30 days prior to field quality control testing at the Site. 3) 30 days prior to unloading equipment and material at the Site. d. Furnish preliminary operation and maintenance data submittal in acceptable form and content, as determined by Engineer, before associated materials and equipment will be eligible for payment. 2. Preliminary Submittal shall be reviewed by Engineer. One printed or electronic copy shall be returned to Contractor with required revisions noted. 3. Final Submittal: Provide 14 days prior to checkout and startup procedures specified in Section 01 75 00— Checkout and Startup Procedures, unless Submittal is specified as required prior to an interim Milestone. a. Printed Copies: Two copies. b. Electronic Copies: One copy. B. Format of Printed Copies: 1. Binding and Cover: a. Bind each operation and maintenance manual in durable, permanent, stiff-cover binder(s), comprising one or more volumes per copy as required. Binders shall be minimum one-inch wide and maximum of three-inch wide. Binders for each copy of each volume shall be identical. b. Provide the following information on cover of each volume: 1) Title: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". 2) Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. 3) Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as "Volume_of_", with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4) Name of Project and, if applicable, Contract name and number. 5) Name of building or structure, as applicable. C. Provide the following information on spine of each volume: 1) Title: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS'. 2) Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. 3) Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as "Volume_of_", with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. 4) Project name and building or structure name. 2. Drawings: a. Bind into the manual drawings, diagrams, and illustrations up to and including 11 inches by 17 inches in size, with reinforcing. b. Documents larger than 11 inches by 17 inches shall be folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets bound into the manual. Mark pockets with printed text indicating content and drawing numbers. Include no more than three drawing sheets per pocket. 3. Copy Quality and Document Clarity: a. Contents shall be original-quality copies. Documents in the manual shall be either original manufacturer-printed documents or first- generation photocopies indistinguishable from originals. If original is in color, copies shall be in color. b. Clearly mark in ink to indicate all components of materials and equipment on catalog pages for ease of identification. In standard or pre-printed documents, indicate options furnished or cross out inapplicable content. 4. Organization: a. Provide table of contents in each volume for each chapter or section. b. Use dividers and indexed tabs between major categories of information, such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, and other major subdivisions of data in each manual. C. Format of Electronic Copies: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Each electronic copy shall include all information included in the corresponding printed copy. 2. Submit electronic copy via transferable method and format acceptable to Engineer. 3. File Format: a. Acceptable formats include Adobe PDF, Microsoft Word, Autodesk DWF, and AutoCAD. b. Files shall be electronically searchable. C. Submit separate file for each separate document in the printed copy. d. Within each file, provide bookmarks for the following: 1) Each chapter and subsection listed in the corresponding printed copy document's table of contents 2) Each figure 3) Each table 4) Each appendix 4. Submit drawings and figures in one of the following formats: ".bmp", ".tif', "jpg" " gif "dwf" or "dwg„ D. General Content Requirements: 1. Prepare each operations and maintenance manual specifically for the Project. Include in each manual all pertinent instructions, as-built drawings as applicable, bills of materials, technical bulletins, installation and handling requirements, maintenance and repair instructions, and other information required for complete, accurate, and comprehensive data for safe and proper operation, maintenance, and repair of materials and equipment furnished for the Project. Include in manuals specific information required in the Specification Section for the material or equipment, data required by Laws and Regulations, and data required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Submit complete, detailed written operating instructions for each material or equipment item including: function; operating characteristics; limiting conditions; operating instructions for start-up, normal and emergency conditions; regulation and control; operational troubleshooting; and ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA shutdown. Also include, as applicable, written descriptions of alarms generated by equipment and proper responses to such alarm conditions. 3. Submit written explanations of all safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance procedures. 4. Submit complete, detailed, written preventive maintenance instructions including all information and instructions to keep materials, equipment, and systems properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that materials, equipment, and systems function economically throughout their expected service life. Instructions shall include: a. Written explanations with illustrations for each preventive maintenance task such as inspection, adjustment, lubrication, calibration, and cleaning. Include pre-startup checklists for each equipment item and maintenance requirements for long-term shutdowns. b. Recommended schedule for each preventive maintenance task. C. Lubrication charts indicating recommended types of lubricants, frequency of application or change, and where each lubricant is to be used or applied. d. Table of alternative lubricants. e. Troubleshooting instructions. f. List of required maintenance tools and equipment. 5. Submit complete bills of material or parts lists for materials and equipment furnished. Lists or bills of material may be furnished on a per-drawing or per-equipment assembly basis. Bills of material shall indicate: a. Manufacturer's name, address, telephone number, fax number, and Internet website address. b. Manufacturer's local service representative's or local parts supplier's name, address, telephone number, fax number, Internet website address, and e-mail addresses, when applicable. C. Manufacturer's shop order and serial number(s) for materials, equipment or assembly furnished. d. For each part or piece include the following information: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1) Parts cross-reference number. Cross-reference number shall be used to identify the part on assembly drawings, Shop Drawings, or other type of graphic illustration where the part is clearly shown or indicated. 2) Part name or description. 3) Manufacturer's part number. 4) Quantity of each part used in each assembly. 5) Current unit price of the part at the time the operations and maintenance manual is submitted. Price list shall be dated. 6. Submit complete instructions for ordering replaceable parts, including reference numbers (such as shop order number or serial number). 7. Submit manufacturer's recommended inventory levels for spare parts, extra stock materials, and consumable supplies for the initial two years of operation. Consumable supplies are items consumed or worn by operation of materials or equipment, and items used in maintaining the operation of material or equipment, including items such as lubricants, seals, reagents, and testing chemicals used for calibrating or operating the equipment. Include estimated delivery times, shelf life limitations, and special storage requirements. 8. Submit manufacturer's installation and operation bulletins, diagrams, schematics, and equipment cutaways. Where materials pertain to multiple models or types, mark the literature to indicate specific material or equipment supplied. Marking may be in the form of checking, arrows, or underlining to indicate pertinent information, or by crossing out or other means of obliterating information that does not apply to the materials and equipment furnished. 9. Submit original-quality copies of each approved and accepted Shop Drawing, product data, and other submittal, updated to indicate as-installed condition. Reduced drawings are acceptable only if reduction is to not less than one-half original size and all lines, dimensions, lettering, and text are completely legible on the reduction. 10. Submit complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams, including complete point-to-point wiring and wiring numbers or colors between all terminal points. 11. Submit copy of warranty bond and service contract as applicable. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 12. When copyrighted material is used in operations and maintenance manuals, obtain copyright holder's written permission to use such material in the operation and maintenance manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals: Submit preliminary schedule (listing) of operations and maintenance data for Engineer's review. Preliminary operations and maintenance data shall be grouped as major equipment and material systems and divided into sub-systems as required for clarity, subject to Engineer's approval. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Submit the operations and maintenance data indicated in the Contract Documents, grouped into submittals as approved by Engineer. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 23-7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for recording changes to record documents. 2. Requirements for electronic files furnished by Engineer. B. Contractor shall maintain and submit to Engineer with record documents in accordance with the Specifications, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Maintenance of Record Documents: 1. The following record documents shall be maintained in the Contractor's field office: a. Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda. b. Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Contractor submittals, including records of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by Engineer. C. Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, photographic documentation, survey data, and all other documents pertinent to the Work. 2. Update record documents on a monthly basis, minimum. 3. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to record documents. 4. Make record documents available for inspection upon request of Engineer or Owner. 5. Do not use record documents for purpose other than serving as Project record. Do not remove record documents from Contractor's field office without Engineer's approval. B. Submittal of Record Documents: 0 w N 1. Submit to Engineer the following record documents: Drawings. 2. Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to Engineer one copy of final record documents. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial submittals. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 39-1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3. Submit record documents with transmittal letter on contractor letterhead complying with letter of transmittal requirements in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures. 4. Record documents submittal shall include certification, with original signature of official authorized to execute legal agreements on behalf of Contractor. C. Electronic Files Furnished by Engineer: 1. CADD files will be furnished by Engineer upon the following conditions: a. Contractor shall submit to Engineer a letter on Contractor letterhead requesting CADD files and providing specific definition(s) or description(s) of how files will be used, and specific description of benefits to Owner (including credit proposal, if applicable) if the request is granted. b. Contractor shall execute Engineer's standard agreement for release of electronic files and shall abide by all provisions of the agreement for release of electronic files. C. Layering system incorporated in CADD files shall be maintained as transmitted by Engineer. CADD files transmitted by Engineer containing cross-referenced files shall not be bound by Contractor. Drawing cross- references and paths shall be maintained. If Contractor alters layers or cross-reference files, Contractor shall restore all layers and cross-references prior to submitting record documents to Engineer. d. Contractor shall submit record drawings to Engineer in same CADD format that files were furnished to Contractor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: Provide record documentation as specified in this Section. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, "PROJECT RECORD" using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be two inches high. B. Keep record documents current. Make entries on record documents within two working days of receipt of information required to record the change. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 39-2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS C. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded. D. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from Engineer-accepted record documents. E. Marking of Entries: 1. Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes, revisions, additions, and deletions to record documents. 2. Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use straight-edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files. 3. Date all entries on record documents. 4. Call attention to changes by drawing a "cloud" around the change(s) indicated. 5. Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for subsequent changes. 3.02 RECORDING CHANGES TO DRAWINGS: A. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of Contractor-originated or- produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on the Drawings is unacceptable. B. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. C. Record actual construction including: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum. 2. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. 3. Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 4. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by Contractor when required to document changes. 3.03 RECORDING CHANGES FOR SCHEMATIC LAYOUTS: A. In some cases, on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 39-3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by Contractor subject to acceptance by Engineer. B. Record on record documents all revisions to schematics on Drawings, including: piping schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and circuitry diagrams, electrical one-line diagrams, motor control center layouts, and other schematics when included in the Contract. Record actual locations of equipment, lighting fixtures, in-place grounding system, and other pertinent data. C. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections on the Drawings show the Work schematically, indicate on the record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and similar items 1. Clearly identify the Work item by accurate notations such as "cast iron drain", "rigid electrical conduit", "copper waterline", and similar descriptions. 2. Show by symbol or note the vertical location of Work item; for example, "embedded in slab", "under slab", "in ceiling plenum", "exposed", and similar designations. For piping not embedded, also provide elevation dimension relative to Project datum. 3. Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to Specifications. D. Engineer may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown on plans and sections when, in Engineer's judgment, dimensioned layouts of Work shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on waiver(s) being issued. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS: A. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by Engineer or Contractor supplement the Drawings and shall be included with record documents submitted by Contractor. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings provided with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders and that cannot be incorporated into the Drawings due to space limitations. B. Supplemental drawings provided with record drawings shall be integrated with the Drawings and include necessary cross-references between drawings. Supplemental record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings. C. When supplemental drawings developed by Contractor using computer-aided drafting/design (CADD) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic files for such drawings in AutoCAD (latest version) as part of record drawing submittal. 3.05 RECORDING CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA: A. Mark each Section to record: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 39-4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually provided. 2. Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3.06 RECORDING CHANGES TO DRAWING MODELS A. Record changes on Engineer supplied electronic models to generate record drawings. B. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. C. Record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. 2. Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by Contractor when required to document changes. D. When required, electronic models shall be updated with as-built asset information in accordance with the Contract Documents. Asset information shall be entered and coordinated with electronic model files. Asset information includes equipment, instrumentation, and appurtenance tagging, pipe and valve identification information, and Owner identified equipment and material. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 39-5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall furnish spare parts data and extra materials for materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1. Provide spare parts, extra stock materials, maintenance supplies, and special tools required for maintenance ("spare parts and extra materials") for one year of operation (unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification Section). a. Provide Supplier recommended lubricating oil and grease in accordance with this Section and the Contract Documents. 2. Provide list of Supplier recommended spare parts and extra material. a. Include list of four standard lubricants, minimum, that shall be interchangeable for each type of lubricant required in the Contract Documents. b. Include unit prices in current United States funds C. Source(s) of supply for each. C. Packaging and Labeling: 1. Furnish spare parts and extra materials in manufacturer's unopened cartons, boxes, crates, or other original, protective covering suitable for preventing corrosion and deterioration for maximum length of storage normally anticipated by manufacturer. 2. Packaging of spare parts and extra materials shall be clearly marked and identified with name of manufacturer, applicable equipment, part number, part description, and part location in the equipment. 3. Protect and package spare parts and extra materials for maximum shelf life 0 normally anticipated by manufacturer. p N O ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 43-1 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL D. Finishes: Spare parts and extra material shall have painting, protective coating, and finishes identical to original installed equipment and material. Where painting, protective coating, or finishes are not specified, suitable provisions shall be furnished to protect from corrosion. E. Special Tools: Contractor shall provide special tools necessary to operate, disassemble, service, repair, and adjust equipment and material in accordance with the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. Special tool requirements shall be the same as spare parts and extra material specified in this Section. F. Storage Prior to Delivery to Owner: Prior to furnishing spare parts and extra materials to Owner, store spare parts and extra materials in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturers' recommendations. G. Delivery Time and Eligibility for Payment: 1. Deliver to Owner spare parts and extra materials prior to date of Substantial Completion for equipment or system associated with the spare parts and extra materials. Do not deliver spare parts and extra materials before commencing start- up for associated equipment or system. 2. Spare parts and extra materials are not eligible for payment until delivered to Owner and Contractor's receipt of Owner's countersignature on letter of transmittal. H. Procedure for Delivery to Owner: 1. Deliver spare parts and extra materials to Owner's permanent storage rooms at the Site or area(s) at the Site designated by Owner. 2. When spare parts and extra materials are delivered, Engineer and Owner will mutually inventory the spare parts and extra materials delivered to verify compliance with the Contract Documents regarding quantity and part numbers. 3. Additional procedures for delivering spare parts and extra materials to Owner, if required, will be developed by Engineer and complied with by Contractor. I. Transfer Documentation: 1. Furnish on Contractor letterhead a letter of transmittal for spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specification Section. Letter of transmittal shall accompany spare parts and extra materials. Do not furnish letter of transmittal separate from associated spare parts and extra materials. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 43-2 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL 2. Furnish three original, identical, signed letters of transmittal for each Specification Section. Upon delivery of specified quantities and types of spare parts and extra materials to Owner, designated person from Owner will countersign each original letter of transmittal indicating Owner's receipt of spare parts and extra materials. a. Owner will retain one fully signed original. b. Contractor shall submit one fully signed original to Engineer. C. Contractor shall retain one fully signed original for Contractor's file. 3. Letter of transmittal shall include the following: a. Information required for letters of transmittal in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures. b. Transmittal shall list spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specification Section. List each individual part or product and quantity furnished. C. Provide space for countersignature by Owner as follows: space for signature, space for printed name, and date. J. Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to spare parts and extra materials until spare parts and extra materials are received by Owner. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals: Individual Specification Sections that require spare parts, extra material, or tools, Contractor shall submit inventory checklist for each individual Specification Section that includes the following information: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Name of spare parts, extra material, or tools. 3. Manufacturer, part number and description. 4. Quantity specified and furnished. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 43-3 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 78 43-4 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL SECTION 01 79 00 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall furnish services of operation and maintenance training specialists to instruct Owner's personnel in recommended operation and maintenance procedures for materials and equipment furnished, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall provide a combination of classroom and field training at the Site, unless otherwise required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Owner reserves the right to record training sessions on video for Owner's later use in instructing Owner's personnel. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: 1. Training -Manufacturer's verbal, visual, and written presentation of materials to Owner's staff to ensure that any Owner personnel undergoing training understand the Manufacturer's recommended procedures to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems for the expected service life. B. Qualifications: 1. Contractor's instructors shall be factory-trained by manufacturer of material or equipment. 2. Contractor's instructors shall be proficient and experienced in conducting training of type required. 3. Qualifications of instructors are subject to acceptance by Engineer. If Engineer does not accept qualifications of proposed instructor, furnish services of replacement instructor with acceptable qualifications. C. Scheduling: 1. General: 0 V W O_ n W ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-1 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL a. Contractor shall coordinate training services with start-up and initial operation of materials and equipment on days and times, and in manner, acceptable to Owner, in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Training may be required outside of normal business hours to accommodate schedules of operations and maintenance personnel. Furnish training services at the required days and times at no additional cost to Owner. C. Prerequisites to Training: Training of Owner's personnel shall commence after acceptable preliminary operation and maintenance data has been submitted and work required in Section 01 75 00 — Checkout and Startup Procedures is complete. 2. Training Schedule Submittal: a. Training Schedule Required: Contractor shall prepare and submit proposed training schedule for review and acceptance by Engineer and Owner. Proposed training schedule shall show all training required in the Contract Documents, and shall demonstrate compliance with specified training requirements relative to number of hours of training, number of training sessions, and scheduling. b. Timing of Training Schedule Submittal: Submit initial training schedule at least thirty days before scheduled start of first training session. Submit final training schedule, incorporating revisions in accordance with Engineer's comments, no later than seven days prior to starting the first training session. C. Owner reserved the right to modify personnel availability for training in accordance with process or emergency needs at the Site. D. Video Recording 1. Contractor shall provide a training specialist for a minimum of three (3) days, for each item of equipment specified, to meet with the Engineer to prepare training scripts and to participate in video recording of training. Video recorded training sessions shall be conducted separately from training sessions held for the Owner's personnel. 2. Manufacturer shall be the ownership rights to one unedited and one edited copy of the video recorded training. 3. As an alternative to video recording training at the Site, the Manufacturer may submit pre-recorded digital media covering the equipment supplied for approval. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-2 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL Submitted pre-recorded digital media shall meet the intent of this Section for approval consideration. If approved, Owner shall have the right to permanent ownership and use of at least one complete copy. 1.03 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS A. General Lesson Plan Requirements: 1. Contractor's lesson plan shall describe specific instruction topics, system components for which training will be furnished, and training procedures. Handouts, if any, to be used in training shall be included with the lesson plan. Describe in lesson plan "hands-on" demonstrations planned for training sessions. 2. Submit acceptable lesson plan 7 days prior to starting associated training. 3. Lesson plan shall include estimated duration of each training segment. B. Specific Lesson Plans Requirements: 1. Equipment overview shall cover the following: a. Equipment's operating (process)function, performance objectives, and fundamental operating principles. b. Equipment's mechanical, electrical, and electronic components and features. Group related components into subsystems and describe function of subsystem and subsystem's interaction with other subsystems. C. Support equipment and appurtenances. d. Safety and potential hazards. e. Safety and control interlocks. 2. Operations personnel training shall cover the following: a. Equipment overview: As described in this Section. b. Operation: 1) Principles, operating, start-up, and shutdown procedures. 2) Abnormal or emergency start-up, operating, and shutdown procedures. 3) Alarm conditions and responses. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-3 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL 4) Monitoring and recordkeeping. 5) Housekeeping. C. Troubleshooting: Required corrective maintenance or an operating parameter adjustment. 3. Maintenance personnel training: a. Equipment overview: As described in this Section. b. Equipment preventive maintenance: 1) Inspection procedures: a) Operation. b) Trouble symptoms and anticipate breakdowns. c) Predictive maintenance. 2) Preventative maintenance intervals. 3) Lubricant and replacement parts. 4) Cleaning practices and intervals. 5) Special tools required. 6) Removal, installation, and disassembly and assembly procedures. 7) "Hands-on" demonstrations of preventive maintenance procedures. 8) Measuring instruments and procedures 9) Torqueing, mounting, calibrating, and aligning procedures and settings requirements. 10) Check and test equipment following corrective maintenance. 4. Equipment Troubleshooting: a. Systematic troubleshooting procedures. b. Checklists. C. Testing and diagnostic procedures. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-4 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL d. Corrective maintenance procedures with "hands on" demonstrations. C. Training Aids: 1. Contractor's instructor shall incorporate training aids as appropriate to assist in the instruction. Provide handouts of text, tables, graphs, and illustrations as required. Other appropriate training aids include: a. Audio-visual aids b. Equipment cutaways and samples C. Tools, including special tools 2. Podium presentation aids: Presentation shall cover equipment, products and materials provided. Provide electronic version of presentation material to Engineer. a. Electronic version of presentation aids shall be Microsoft PowerPoint or equivalent format. b. Presentation shall include the following sections: 1) Complete system overview including, but not limited to, related and associated equipment specific to the system. 2) Specific equipment requirements and how equipment functions within the overall system. 3) Site specific system and equipment requirements. C. Hardcopy handouts of the electronic presentation aids shall be provided prior to each training section for review during podium presentation. d. As an alternative to the Electronic presentation, Manufacturer may submit, for approval by the Engineer and the Owner, prerecorded DVD(s) or digital media covering the equipment supplied. Approval of such DVD(s) or digital media shall be contingent upon their content meeting the lesson plan requirement of this Section. If prerecorded DVD(s) or digital media are approved by the Engineer and the Owner, the Owner shall have the right to permanent ownership and use. 3. Handouts: a. Contractor's instructor shall distribute and use descriptive handouts during training. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-5 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL b. Handouts should be coordinated with the instruction C. Provide at least ten copies of handouts for each training session 4. Audio-visual Equipment: Training provider shall provide audio-visual equipment required for training sessions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals: 1. Training Schedule: Detailed schedule of training sessions, demonstrating compliance with number of training sessions, hours required in the Contract Documents, and complying with the Contract Times. Submit training schedule submittals in accordance with timeframes specified in this Section. 2. Lesson Plan: Acceptable lesson plan for training on each material or equipment item, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Lesson plan shall comply with requirements of this Section. Include with lesson plan copy of handouts that will be used during training sessions. Provide lesson plan submittals in accordance with timeframes specified in this Section. 3. Podium presentation material, electronic version. 4. Qualifications: Credentials of Contractor's proposed operations and maintenance instructor(s). Credentials shall demonstrate compliance with requirements of this Section and shall include brief resume and specific details of instructor's operating, maintenance, and training experience relative to the specific material and equipment for which instructor will provide training. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Trainee sign-in sheet for each training session. Submit to Owner's training coordinator. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Qualifications: Credentials of Contractor's proposed operations and maintenance instructor(s). Credentials shall demonstrate compliance with requirements of this Section and shall include brief resume' and specific details of instructor's operating, maintenance, and training experience relative to the specific material and equipment for which instructor will provide training. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 "HANDS-ON" DEMONSTRATIONS A. Contractor's instructor shall provide "hands-on" demonstration of operations and maintenance of equipment and materials for each training session. B. Contractor shall furnish tools and appurtenances required for demonstrations. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall furnish the hours of training and number of sessions indicated, at a minimum. Travel time and expenses are the responsibility of the manufacturer and are excluded from required training time indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Owner's operations at the Site occur 24 hours per day, divided into three shifts. Training shall be scheduled during day shift, normal working hours unless otherwise approved by Engineer. C. Training shall be provided for a minimum of one session, unless otherwise specified, with each session scheduled for different weeks. D. Training Schedule: 1. Refer to individual equipment Specifications END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 01 79 00-7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 02 00 01 MOBILIZATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This item shall consist of the mobilization of equipment and materials at the project site in preparation for beginning work on other contract items. Mobilization shall include, but is not limited to, the movement of equipment, materials, supplies, etc. to and from the project site and the establishment of a field office and other facilities necessary prior to beginning the work. PART 2— MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2.01 MOBILIZATION A. Mobilization will not be measured. Payment for mobilization shall be full compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for completion of the work. Partial payments for the lump sum bid for mobilization will be authorized as shown below. The adjusted contract amount for construction items as used below is defined as the total contract amount less the lump sum bid for mobilization. 1. When at least five percent (5%) of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, subject to usual retainage amount. 2. Upon completion of all work under this contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, subject to usual retainage amount. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 02 00 01-1 MOBILIZATION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 00 20 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. B. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. PART 2— MATERIALS 2.01 CEMENT A. The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: B. C150, modified as follows: The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: 1. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter—TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. C. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. D. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. E. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE F. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. G. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. H. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the Requirements of these specifications. 2.02 MIXING WATER A. Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as SO4. B. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. C. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. 2.03 COARSE AGGREGATE A. Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410- A. B. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. C. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE D. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in table 1. TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-'/2 2 1-'/z 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2(467)* 1-�/z in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4(57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. E. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex- 406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller 2.04 FINE AGGREGATE A. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex- 408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-3 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE B. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. C. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. D. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85,the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. E. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex- 203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. F. For concrete Classes `A' and 'C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. G. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. 2.05 MINERAL FILLER A. Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-4 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 2.06 MORTAR (GROUT) A. Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. 2.07 ADMIXTURES A. Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: B. A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. C. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. 1. Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: a. The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. b. The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. C. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 2. Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: a. The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. b. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-5 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin 2.08 STORAGE AND CEMENT A. All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. B. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 2.09 STORAGE AND AGGREGATE A. The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. B. When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. C. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. D. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 2.10 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS A. The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. B. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. C. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-6 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 2.11 CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. B. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. C. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. D. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. E. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. F. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. G. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. H. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. I. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-7 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 2.12 CONSISTENCY A. In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. B. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Desi.ng ation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or 4 inches 5 inches less) (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns, Piers, 3 inches 4 inches Wall Sections over 9", etc. 5 inches 6 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other 2.5 inches 4 inches Miscellaneous Concrete NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-8 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 2.13 QUALITY OF CONCRETE A. General 1. The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. 2. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. B. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. C. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. D. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. E. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. F. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70OF and 90°F. G. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty- eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Compressive Class Min. Beam Maximum Coarse Strength(fc) ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-9 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE of Sacks Cement 28-Day(psi) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 7-Day (psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** 13* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air(slabs,piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only(except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type II Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break,requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. Refer to Technical Specification Section 025620"Portland Cement Concrete Pavement"for Class P concrete requirements. 2.14 MIXING CONDITIONS A. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. B. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 2.15 MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT A. All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-10 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE B. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. C. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. D. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. E. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. F. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. G. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. H. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. I. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. J. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. K. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. L. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. M. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-11 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE N. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 2.16 READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. 1. Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) 2. Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: a. Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. b. Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. 3. Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. 1. Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-12 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 2. Mixers and Agitators. a. General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. b. Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. C. Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm) will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. d. Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-13 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 2.17 OPERATION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT. A. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. B. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. C. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. D. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. E. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. F. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. G. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. H. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. I. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-14 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE J. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 2.18 PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING A. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". PART 3— MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. B. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 00 20-15 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 2. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Formwork (Vertical Structures): 1. Basis of Measurement: By the square foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes form materials, placement, placing accessories, stripping. B. Formwork (Horizontal Supported Structures): 1. Basis of Measurement: By the square foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes form materials, placement, placing accessories, stripping. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 117, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-1CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 2. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Forest and Paper Association: AF&PA, National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. C. The Engineered Wood Association: APA/EWA PS 1, Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. E. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 2. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB): Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to design and applicable code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Forms shall be designed with consideration of rate, method of placing concrete, and construction loads to be encountered, including vertical, horizontal, and impact loads. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Information on the Contractor's proposed forming system: Submit in such detail as the Engineer may require assuring himself that the intent of the specifications can be complied with by use of the proposed system. B. Approval by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide forms adequate and satisfactory for the purpose required. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-2CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF&PA. C. Install work in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design formwork under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Texas. B. Qualifications of Formwork Manufacturers: Use only forming systems manufactured by manufacturers having minimum 5 years' experience, except as otherwise specified, or accepted in writing by the Engineer. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work requiring attachment of components to formwork. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Lumber Forms: 1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete. 2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, shiplapped or tongue and groove, "Standard" Grade Southern Yellow Pine, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. Surface boards on four sides. B. Plywood Forms: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-3CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete. 2. Forms: Conform to PS 1; five-ply plywood sheets made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement; full size 4 feet by 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with grade trademark of APA/EWA. 3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 3/4 inch thick; APA/EWA "B-B Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade. 4. Plywood where "Smooth Finish" is required, as indicated on Contract Drawings: APA/EWA "HD Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade, minimum of 3/4-inch thick. 2.02 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Preformed Steel Forms: Rigidly constructed matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. B. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. C. Steel Forms: Sheet steel, suitably reinforced, and designed for particular use indicated on Contract Drawings. D. Form Liners: Smooth, durable, grainless and non-staining hardboard, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. E. Framing, Studding and Bracing: Southern Yellow Pine No. 2 with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: 1. General: a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by a recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. b. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 004CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES C. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during placement of concrete. B. Cone-Snap or Flat Bar Form Ties: 1. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and 1-1/2 inches deep. 2. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the concrete. C. Taper Ties: 1. Neoprene Plugs for Taper Tie Holes: Size so that after they are driven, plugs are located in center third of wall thickness. 2. Dry-Pack Mortar for Filling Taper Tie Holes: a. Consist of mix of 1 part of Portland cement to 1 part of plaster sand. b. Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be such that mortar can be driven into holes and be properly compacted. C. Admixtures or Additives: Are not to be used in dry-pack mortar. D. Spreaders: Standard, non-corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete face. Wire ties, wood spreaders or through bolts are not permitted. E. Form Anchors and Hangers: 1. Do not use anchors and hangers exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at concrete surface. 2. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members to minimize twisting or rotation of member. 3. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted. F. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-5CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES G. Corners: Chamfer, rigid plastic, or wood strip type; 3/4 inch bevel unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings; maximum possible lengths. Provide 1/4 inch bevel at expansion and construction joints. H. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according to label directions. I. Dovetail Anchor System: System consisting of dovetail slots cast into the concrete, dovetail anchors that tie the masonry veneer to dovetail slots, and continuous wires that are embedded in the masonry and connect to the dovetail anchors: 1. Dovetail Slot: 18-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A167, foam filled and in 10-foot lengths. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Hauppauge, NY; Model No. 305. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; Chicago, IL; Model No. 100. b. Substitutions: Submit substitutions for approval. 2. Dovetail Anchors: 23 gage, 1 inch wide, Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A167, and with seismic notch for attachment to wire embedded in masonry. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Hauppauge, NY; Model No. 303SV. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; Chicago, IL; Model No. 361. 3) Substitutions: Submit substitutions for approval. 3. Wire Reinforcement: 9-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel wire in accordance with ASTM A580. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Hauppauge, NY. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; Chicago, IL. J. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel or rigid PVC, 22-gauge thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-6CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES K. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751. L. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength, and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Contract Drawings. B. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Engineer. C. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical and electrical inserts or other embedded items. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Earth Forms: 1. Trench earth forms neatly, accurately, and at least 2 inches wider than footing widths indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Trim sides and bottom of earth forms. 3. Construct wood edge strips at top of each side of trench to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. 4. Form sides of footings where earth sloughs. 5. Tamp earth forms firm and clean forms of debris and loose material before depositing concrete. B. Formwork- General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. 2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-7CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete. C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood, or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish. 3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped. D. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms. After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. E. Framing, Studding and Bracing: 1. Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum for boards and 12 inches on center maximum for plywood. 2. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Construct beam soffits of material minimum of 2 inches thick. 4. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected. 5. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement, or accidental impact. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-8CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES F. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318. G. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. H. Obtain Engineer's approval before framing openings in structural members not indicated on Drawings. I. Install chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists, columns, and slabs exposed to view. J. Do not reuse wood formwork more than three times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Do not coat forms for concrete indicated to receive "scored finish". Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel. 3.04 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-9CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES D. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical, and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 5. Cone-Snap Rod and Bar Ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill tie holes as follows: a. Remove form ties from surfaces. b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair. C. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar. 6. Taper Ties: a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows: 1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes. 2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy. 3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during driving: a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical recess. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-1000NCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES b. Dry-Pack of Taper Tie Holes: After installing plugs in tie holes: 1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry- pack mortar: 2) Dry-Pack Mortar: Place in holes in layers with thickness not exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer. 3) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days after the inside of the hole has been dry packed. 4) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side of water containing structures and the outside of below grade walls: a) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel. b) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend minimum of 2 inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes. c) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or other voids. H. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete. I. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true, and sharp. J. Embedded Items: 1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers, water stops, and other features. 2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-11CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under other Specification sections. 4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete. 5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations. K. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Contract Drawings. Establish exact locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings. L. Screeds: 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water. M. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. 2. Staking through membrane is not permitted. N. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris, and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air just before concrete is placed. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-12CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 3.05 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.06 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Engineer. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Vertical Forms: 1. Remain in place minimum of 36 hours after concrete is placed. 2. If, after 36 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist surface or other damage, forms may be removed. E. Other Forms Supporting Concrete and Shoring: Remain in place as follows: 1. Sides of Footings: 24 hours minimum. 2. Vertical Sides of Beams, Girders, and Similar Members: 36 hours minimum. 3. Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified strength f'c or until shoring is installed. 4. Shoring for Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Shore until concrete strength reaches specified strength. 5. Wall Bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-13CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES F. Green Concrete: 1. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. 2. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of specified strength f'c. G. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces, and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.07 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Tolerances: 1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances listed below at time of acceptance of project. 3. Construct formwork to produce completed concrete surfaces within construction tolerances specified in ACI 117, paragraphs 2.1 through 2.2 and paragraphs 4.0 through 4.6, except as modified herein: a. Slabs: 1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on the Drawings. 2) Slabs Indicated to be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade. b. On Circular Tank Walls: The Contractor may deviate from finish line indicated on the Drawings by use of forms with chord lengths not to exceed 2 feet. C. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances required for proper installation and operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains. d. Maximum Tolerances: As follows: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-14CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES Item Tolerance Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8 inches Projected Ends of Anchor Bolts Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0 inches Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 Minus 1/16 inches 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Notify Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but minimum 48 hours prior to placing concrete. C. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 10 00-15CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Reinforcement accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. 350, Environmental Structures: Code Requirements. 4. 530.1, Specifications for Masonry Structures. 5. SP-66, ACI Detailing Manual. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A82/A82M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A184/A184M, Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Al85/A185M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-1 CONCRETE REINFORCING 4. A496/A496M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. A497/A497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. A704/A704M, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. A706/A706M, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. A767/A767M, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 10. A775/A775M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 11. A884/A884M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Shop Drawings according to ACI 315. Reproductions of Drawings are not acceptable. Do not scale dimensions from Drawings. Include bar sizes, spacings, locations, bends, assemblies, splices, mechanical connections, dimensions, and quantities of reinforcing steel. Include bending and cutting schedules and supporting and spacing devices. Submit shop drawings and obtain Engineer's approval prior to fabrication. C. Certificates: Submit AWS qualification certificate for welders employed on the Work. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-2 CONCRETE REINFORCING 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice, ACI 301 and/or ACI 318. B. Prepare Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66. C. Maintain one copy of each document on Site. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00, Administrative Requirements: Coordination and Project conditions. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed steel bars, plain finish. B. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16-gauge annealed type, unfinished. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic-coated steel hot-dip galvanized metal spacers with plastic tips, Stainless steel, or plastic spacers type; size and shape to meet Project conditions. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice and ACI 318. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-3 CONCRETE REINFORCING B. Form standard hooks for 180-degree bends, 90-degree bend, stirrup and tie hooks, and seismic hooks as indicated on Drawings. C. Reinforcing shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the Drawings. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. D. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. E. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318. F. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices. G. Form spiral column reinforcement from minimum 3/8-inch diameter continuous deformed bar or wire. H. Form ties and stirrups from the following: 1. Bars No. 10 and Smaller: No. 3 deformed bars. 2. Bars No. 11 and Larger: No. 4 deformed bars. I. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Submit location of splices to Engineer for review and approval. 1. Refer to TxDOT Standard Specification Item 440, Article 440.2.E for nomenclature. 2.04 DELIVERY/ STORAGE A. Bundles of reinforcing bars shall be delivered to the Site with tags showing quantity, grade, size, and suitable identification to allow checking, sorting, and placing. B. Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes separately. Store all reinforcing steel off ground on protective cribbing, platforms, skids and/or other supports and protect from oil, grease, dirt, or other deleterious materials. Rusting of reinforcing steel is a basis for rejection. C. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-4 CONCRETE REINFORCING 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, dimensions shown for reinforcing bars are out to out of steel. 3. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections. Where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, tie every other intersection. 4. Reinforcing steel shall be supported and tied in such a manner as to provide a sufficiently rigid cage of steel. 5. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, over-turning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. 6. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to ensure that the reinforcement remains in the proper position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. Check drawing requirements (plans, sections, and details) for additional reinforcing steel at all openings. D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 of one bar diameter, but not less than 1 inch. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars. E. For cast-in-place concrete, maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 as follows: Reinforcement Location Minimum Concrete Cover Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3 inches Concrete exposed to earth or No. 6 bars and larger 2 inches weather No. 5 bars and smaller 1-1/2 inches ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-5 CONCRETE REINFORCING Concrete not exposed to No. 14 bars and larger 1-1/2 inches weather or in contact with ground; slabs,walls &joists No. 11 bars and smaller 3/4 inches Beams and Columns 1-1/2 inches Shell and Folded Plate Members No. 6 bars and larger 3/4 inch No. 5 bars and smaller 1/2 inch F. Minimum concrete cover over reinforcement shall be as specified in the table above unless specifically noted otherwise on the "Issued for Construction" Drawings. Splice reinforcing where indicated on Drawings and in accordance with splicing device manufacturer's instructions. G. Development and splices of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with ACI 318. H. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, grease, oil, concrete laitance, or other foreign matter prior to concrete placement. I. Reinforcing shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. J. Install additional top and bottom corner bars, same size and quantity as the beam, footing or wall reinforcing, shown on the Drawings and at all beam corners and interior/exterior beam, footing or wall intersections. K. Unless noted otherwise, corner or intersection bar lap lengths shall be a minimum of 40-bar diameters in both directions. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members: Concrete Cover Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Tolerance Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-6 CONCRETE REINFORCING Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch B. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall implement a quality control plan to ensure that the reinforcing size, type, finish, spacing, cover, splicing, material and placement are in accordance with the "Issued for Construction" Drawings. B. If the project requires reinforcing inspections, no concrete shall be deposited until the engineer has inspected the reinforcing steel and has given permission to proceed with concrete placement. Notify the engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to the planned concrete pour. C. The Contractor shall provide free access to Work and cooperate with the Engineer or Engineer's appointed inspector. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 00-7 CONCRETE REINFORCING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 20 20 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. PART 2— MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. B. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. C. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. D. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. E. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. F. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-1 REINFORCING STEEL G. The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Nominal Weight per Bar Size Diameter, Nominal Area, Linear Foot, Number In. Sa. In. Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Equivalent Equivalent Gauge Diameter, Gauge Diameter, Number Inches Number Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-2 REINFORCING STEEL 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 2.02 BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3, #4, #5 4d #6, #7, #8 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru #8 6d -- #9, #10 8d -- #11 8d 8d #14, #18 10d -- 2.01 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-3 REINFORCING STEEL 2.02 TOLERANCES A. Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: - Plan Dimon_ r 3/4" T/8- Bar or Smog4ar--r-1tarrt, DIM400- s lJ2 I" Bar Or Larger --Plan_ Daman. t �" 1-f = owrr 6"--f, 1MWW � z4kro or r{= G or+a lass-Dirnan. • Z#ro or1 C7— H 7/8- 9ar or Smniiar-4pia m i7iwmwn. * l 1'` Bar or L a r qer—?7 an 04M en. * •, piral or Circular Tint Tia or Starw.o� Plan DirnVan.tM Pia Cm n * l!2 2.03 STORING A. Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 2.04 SPLICES A. No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-4 REINFORCING STEEL B. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements Lea Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d = bar diameter in inches C. Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. D. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. E. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. F. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 2.05 PLACING A. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-5 REINFORCING STEEL B. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. C. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. D. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. E. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. F. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one- half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. G. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. H. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. I. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-6 REINFORCING STEEL PART 3— MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 20 20-7 REINFORCING STEEL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following: 1. Supported slabs and slabs on grade. 2. Free-standing columns and walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. CT, Concrete Terminology. 2. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. 305, Hot Weather Concreting. 4. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5. 308.1, Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 6. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 7. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 8. 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 9. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 03 30 00-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 3. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 6. C78, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). 7. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens). 9. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 10. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 11. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 12. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 13. C192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 14. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 15. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 16. C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 17. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 18. C496, Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 19. C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 20. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 21. C685, Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 22. C845, Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. 23. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 24. C989, Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 25. C1017, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 26. C1064, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 27. C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 28. C1116, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. 29. C1157, Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 30. C1218, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 31. C1240, Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. 32. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 33. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 34. D1752, Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 35. D6690, Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 36. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 37. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 38. E154, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 03 30 00-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 39. E1643, Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 40. E1745, Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): CRSI Design Handbook. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Barrier Permeance: Maximum 0.01 Perms (grains/ft2 * hr * in.Hg) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method or water method. 1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms (grains/ft2 * hr* in.Hg) after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E154 Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured products, admixtures, and vapor barrier. C. Design Data: 1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength/class indicated on Drawings a minimum of fifteen days prior to concrete placement. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: a. Hot and cold weather concrete work. b. Air entrained concrete work. 2. Identify mix ingredients, including type, brand, source, and proportions of cement, fly ash, and admixtures, as well as aggregate gradation and chemical composition. Also include applicable reference specifications and copies of test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and will be suitable for job conditions. 3. Admixtures shall not contain chloride ions. D. Certificate of Compliance: Submit to the Engineer for approval for each strength/class of concrete indicated on Drawings: 1. Aggregates. 2. Admixtures. 3. Cement. 03 30 00-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Fly Ash. 5. Epoxy Grout. E. Obtain approval by Engineer before concrete placement. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather. D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work. E. Maintain one copy minimum of each document on Site. 1.07 DELIVERY A. Do not deliver concrete until forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement and Engineer's inspection has been completed satisfactorily. B. Packing and Shipping: Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7 days. B. Maintain high early strength concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 3 days. C. Concrete temperature at time of delivery shall not exceed 85 degrees F. Any temperature above this will not be accepted. Measures shall be taken to ensure proper temperature at time of placement. 03 30 00-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of joint devices, sleeves, penetrations, openings, conduits, piping, etc. with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Consistency of concrete mixtures shall be such that: 1. The mortar will cling to the coarse aggregate. 2. The aggregates will not segregate in the concrete when it is transported to the place of deposit. 3. The concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, will flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edge of the pile will stand and not flow. 4. The concrete and mortar will show no free water when removed from the mixer. 5. The concrete will slide and not flow into place when transported in metal chutes at an angle of thirty (30) degrees with the horizontal. 6. The surface of the finished concrete will be free of a surface film of"laitance". 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Normal weight concrete for all concrete shall be Type II and have a 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Admixtures shall not contain chloride ions in any form. B. Site Mixed Cement: 1. Cement used to make concrete shall be as indicated above. 2. Cement shall be of a standard brand manufactured by a reputable firm. 3. Only one brand of cement will be permitted unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 4. Each bag of cement shall be plainly marked with the name of the manufacturer and shall weigh no less than 94 pounds net. 03 30 00-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Cement must be in good condition at the time it is delivered, and it shall be properly protected against dampness after delivery. 6. No cement will be accepted which has become caked. C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. The source of supply of fine and coarse aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer before any material is delivered. If required, samples of the fine or coarse aggregates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2. Each sample shall be accompanied by complete information as to the source, name of producer, capacity and type of plant. 3. Aggregates shall conform to the "Specification for Concrete Aggregates", ASTM C33, except that with written permission of the Engineer, aggregates may be used which have shown by tests or actual service that they will produce concrete of the required strength, durability, water tightness, fire resistance and wearing qualities. 4. The nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall be no larger than 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: In accordance with ACI 318. E. Water: ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions, oils, acids, alkali, salts, organic material, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. 2.03 ADMIXTURES A. Manufacturers: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems. 2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 3. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. 4. Sika Corporation. 5. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 03 30 00-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Chemical: ASTM C494. 1. Type A, Water Reducing. 2. Type D, Water Reducing and Retarding. 3. Type F, Water Reducing, High Range. 4. Type G, Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618; Class F; 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight, maximum. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240. F. Prohibited admixtures include calcium chloride, thiocyanates, and all admixtures that contribute free chloride ion in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, Polyvinyl Acetate, Latex emulsion, or two- component modified epoxy resin. 1. Manufacturers: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. Meadows, W.R., Inc. C. QUIKRETE. d. Sika Corporation. e. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745 Class A; 15 mil thick extruded polyolefin membrane; type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint tape recommended by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: a. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries, LLC. b. VaporGuard by Griffolyn. C. Zero-Perm by Alumiseal. 03 30 00-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE d. Substitutions: Not Permitted. C. Curing Compound: A curing compound, which may be sprayed on the surface of the concrete to prevent evaporation of moisture, may be used with the Engineer's prior approval. This curing compound must be compatible with the sealer. 2.05 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Construction Joint Devices: Not Applicable. B. Expansion Joint Devices: 1. Paving Joints: a. Manufacturers: 1) Greenstreak No. 610 or No. 628 by Greenstreak, Inc. 2) Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. C. Expansion Joint Filler Material: 1. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D994; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt; thickness as specified on Drawings; tongue and groove profile. 2. Joint Filler: Treated pine expansion board; thickness as specified on Drawings. D. Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric, self-leveling polyurethane sealant or as indicated on Drawings. 2.06 CONCRETE MIX A. Select proportions for concrete in accordance with ACI 318 trial mixtures or field experience. B. Provide structural concrete to the following criteria, unless indicated otherwise on Structural Series Drawings: Minimum Compressive Maximum Strength Max. Water- (f'c) Aggregate Slump Cement Cement 28-day(psi) Size(in) (in) Type Ratio Types of Structures 3500 Pea gravel 4+/-1 Type II 0.5 Roof concrete (5/8) Normal topper 03 30 00-9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4000 1 5+/-1 Type II 0.45 Slab on grade Normal foundations, suspended slabs, beams, roof slabs, walls, retaining walls 5000 3/4 7+/-1 Type II 0.40 Free-standing Normal columns,walls, and roof slabs in water retaining structures C. Slump Requirements: 1. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water/cement ratio is not exceeded. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the concrete being within the permissible ranges of slump. 2. The maximum allowable slump may be increased to 5 inches for concrete utilizing fly ash for 25 percent of the total cementitious material, however, do not exceed the maximum slump specified herein. 3. Maximum slump for Concrete containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): 8-inches after admixture is added to concrete with 3-inch to 5-inch slump. Approved superplasticizers are DARACEM 100 by Grace GCP or approved equal. 4. Allowable slump for foundations shall be within the following limits: Slump in Inches Element Minimum Maximum Foundations,footings, walls, and roofs 4 6 D. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Engineer. 1. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 3. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather. 03 30 00-10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Add air entrainment admixture to concrete mix for work exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals. 5. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit fly ash, pozzolans, silica fume, and slag content as required by applicable code. E. Average Compressive Strength Reduction: Not permitted. F. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 1. When a truck mixer is used for delivery of concrete, no water from the truck water system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of the mixing water, except when on arrival at the Job Site the slump of the concrete is less than that specified. 2. Certification: The manufacturer of the concrete shall furnish to the Contractor with each batch of concrete before unloading at the Site, a delivery ticket on which is printed, stamped, or written the following information: a. Name of ready-mix batch plant. b. Serial number of ticket. C. Date and truck number. d. Name of Contractor. e. Designation of job. f. Class or designation of concrete. g. Amount of concrete (cubic yards). h. Time loaded. i. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials. j. Type, name, and amount of admixture. G. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 318. 03 30 00-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. Mortar Mixes for Concrete Finishes: 1. Mortar Mix for F4 Finish: Consist of 1-part cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand passing No. 100 screen, mixed with enough water and emulsified bonding agent to have consistency of thick cream. 2. Mortar Mix for F5 Finish: Consist of 1-part cement to 1-1/2 parts of sand which passes No. 16 screen. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere or move from position with placing concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and epoxy as indicated on Drawings. C. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates. D. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed. E. Before beginning work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully on the methods of construction, which he proposes to follow, including the amount and character of the equipment which he plans to use on the work. F. Contractor is responsible for the safety and correctness of his method of construction, and for the adequacy of his equipment to carry out and complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Concurrence on the part of the Engineer in any proposed method of construction, approval of equipment or the approval of concrete form plans shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of his responsibility to provide for the safety of workers and the public. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350 as applicable. B. Notify testing laboratory and Engineer minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of operations. Engineer shall be permitted to inspect the forms, reinforcing steel 03 30 00-12 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE placement and the preparations for placing the concrete with ample time for Contractor to correct any and all noted deficiencies before concrete arrives on Site. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all concrete placed under any and all-weather conditions. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, and other cast-in items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. When it is necessary to continue mixing, placing, and finishing concrete after daylight hours, the work area shall be brilliantly lighted so that all operations are plainly visible. F. In general, concrete placing shall be so regulated that all finishing will be completed during daylight hours. G. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints and seal watertight in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. H. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing steel. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas and seal watertight in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. I. Apply sealants in joints in accordance with Section 07 90 00, Joint Protection. J. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final position. Prevent segregation of m ix. K. Concrete placed with a tremie pipe shall not be allowed to free fall more than 6 feet, with the exception of concrete piers. L. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints. M. Consolidate concrete immediately after placing by use of internal concrete vibrators supplemented by hand spading, rodding, and tamping. 1. Air entrained concrete shall not be vibrated for more than 12 seconds. 2. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete inside forms. 3. The vibrating equipment shall at all times be adequate in number of units and power to properly consolidate all concrete. 4. Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing objectionable segregation. 03 30 00-13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Vibrators shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. 6. Where conditions make consolidation difficult or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing the same proportions of cement, sand, and water used in the concrete shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least 1 inch. N. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. O. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. P. Do not interrupt successive placement between planned/approved joint locations; do not permit cold joints to occur. 1. A cold joint, as defined by ACI CT, is a joint or discontinuity resulting from a delay in placement of sufficient duration to preclude intermingling and bonding of the material. Q. Place floor slabs in saw-cut pattern as indicated on Drawings. R. Contractor shall submit construction joint placement plans for Engineer approval prior to placing concrete. S. Saw cut joints within 8 hours after placing. Use 3/16-inch-thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness or 3/4-inch minimum, whichever is greater, or as specified on Drawings. T. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8-inch in 10 feet. 3.04 TRANSPORTING REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete mixed in stationary mixers or paving mixers and transported by non-agitating equipment shall be placed in the forms within 45 minutes from the time ingredients are charged into the mixing drum. B. Concrete that is truck mixed or transported in truck mixers or truck agitators shall be delivered to the Site of the work and discharge completed in the forms within the time specified in ASTM C94. C. Transit-mixed concrete that is completely mixed at the Site of concrete placement or batched cement and aggregates transported to mixers shall be placed in forms within 90 minutes after cement has been added. 03 30 00-14 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Concrete shall be placed in forms within 15 minutes after discharge from the mixer at the Job Site. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING — DESCRIPTION A. Cement for Finishes: Addition of white cement may be required to produce finish which matches color of concrete to be finished. B. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Use following finishes for vertical concrete surfaces as indicated in section "Concrete Finishing —Application": 1. F1 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work and fill depressions 1 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 2. F2 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work, remove fins, fill depressions 1/2-inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 3. F3 Finish: Repair defective work, remove fins, offsets, and curing membrane, and grind projections smooth. Fill depressions 1/4 inch or larger in depth or width and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 4. F4 Finish: a. Same as specified for F3 finish, and in addition fill depressions and holes 1/16-inch or larger in width with mortar. b. "Brush-Off' sandblast surfaces prior to filling holes to expose all holes near surface of the concrete. C. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and depressions while surfaces are still damp. d. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over entire area with clean burlap, sponge rubber floats, or trowels. e. Do not let any material remain on surfaces, except that within pits and depressions. f. Wipe surfaces clean and moist cure. 5. F5 Finish: Receive same finish specified for F3 Finish, and in addition, receive special stoned finish in accordance with the following requirements: a. Remove forms and perform required repairs, patching, and pointing as specified in this Section. 03 30 00-15 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE b. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush and rub with hard wood float dipped in water containing 2 pounds of Portland cement per gallon. C. Rub surfaces until form marks and projections have been removed. d. Spread grindings from rubbing operations uniformly over surface with brush in such manner as to fill pits and small voids. e. Moist cure brushed surfaces and allow to harden for 3 days: 1) After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with carborundum stone of approximately No. 50 grit until entire surfaces have smooth texture and uniform color. 2) Continue curing for remainder of specified time. f. If any concrete surface is allowed to become too hard to finish in above specified manner, sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed to view, whether finished or not. 1) While still damp, rub over surface, plastic mortar, as specified for brushed surfaces and handstoned with No. 60 grit carborundum stone, using additional mortar for brushed surfaces until surface is evenly filled without excess of mortar. 2) Continue stoning until surface is hard. 3) After moist curing for 3 days, make surface smooth in texture and uniform in color by use of No. 50 or No. 60 carborundum stone. 4) After stoning, continue curing until 7 day curing period is completed. C. Horizontal Concrete: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, use following finishes for horizontal concrete surfaces as indicates in section "Concrete Finishing— Application": 1. S1 Finish: Screed to grade and leave without special finish. 2. S2 Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish. 3. S3 Finish: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks. Provide smooth finish free of all irregularities. 4. S4 Finish: Steel trowel finish, without local depressions or high points, followed by a light hairbroom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or brushes. Perform brooming parallel to slab drainage. Provide resulting finish that is rough 03 30 00-16 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE enough to provide nonskid finish. Finish shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Owner and/or Engineer. 5. S5 Finish: Nonslip abrasive: After concrete has been screeded level and hardened enough to support a man standing on a board, sprinkle abrasive from shake screen into surface at a uniform rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square feet of surface area, wood float into finish, then trowel abrasive into surface with steel trowel properly exposing abrasive in surface as required to provide non slip surface. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING -APPLICATION A. Finish concrete surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. Where not specified or indicated on the Drawings, finish surfaces as follows: 1. F4 Finish for Following Vertical Surfaces: a. Concrete surfaces specified or indicated to be painted. b. Concrete surfaces, interior or exterior, exposed to view. 2. Surfaces in Open Channels, Basins, and Similar Structures: a. F3 Finish for vertical surfaces which are normally below water surface. b. F4 Finish for vertical surfaces located above normal water surface and exposed to view. C. Remove fins and fill tie holes from concrete surfaces located in closed boxes or channels where there is normally no access or passageway. 3. S4 Finish for Following Surfaces: a. Exterior walkways. b. Tops of exterior walls or beams which are to serve as walkways. C. Tops of exterior walls or beams which are to support gratings. 4. S3 Finish for Following surfaces: a. Building and machine room floors which are not covered with surfacing material: Provide floors that are free from trowel marks. 5. S2 Finish for Following Surfaces: a. Tops of corbels. 03 30 00-17 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE b. Tops of walls and beams not covered above in S4 Finish. C. Tops of slabs not covered in S1 Finish below. d. All other surfaces not specified to be finished otherwise. 6. S1 Finish for Following Surfaces: a. Basin bottoms to which layer of grout is to be applied. b. Projecting footings which are to be covered with dirt. C. Slab surfaces which are to be covered with concrete fill. B. Concrete Floor Surfaces to which Surfacing Material is Applied: 1. Finish smooth with tolerance within 1/8-inch in 10 feet in any direction from lines indicated on the Drawings. a. Wood float surfaces receiving quarry tile, ceramic tile or terrazzo with full bed setting system. b. Steel trowel surfaces receiving carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, or thin set ceramic tile. C. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on Drawings. D. Defects: Concrete with excessive honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcing, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects) which affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished as specified above. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 308.1 and ACI 318. C. Curing shall be continuous for a minimum of 7 days or until 70 percent of the specified compressive strength has been obtained. 03 30 00-18 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Contractor shall submit the curing method selected from those published in ACI 308.1 to the Engineer of Record for approval. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory, retained by the Owner at his expense, in accordance with ACI 318. 1. Two copies of all test reports shall be furnished directly to the Owner. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed testing firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Engineer for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Concrete Inspections: 1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. 2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures. E. Strength Test Samples: 1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172. 2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31, cylinder specimens, standard cured. 3. Sample concrete and make one set of four 6-inch diameter by 12-inch long test cylinders or five 4-inch diameter by 8-inch long test cylinders for every 50 cu yds or less of each class of concrete placed each day, or any fraction thereof. 4. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than five sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than five batches are used. 5. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting and field cure. F. Field Testing: 1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143. 2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. 3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064. 03 30 00-19 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Measure slump and temperature at commencement of concrete placement, for each compressive strength concrete sample, and for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete. 5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete at commencement of concrete placement, for each compressive strength concrete sample, and for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete. G. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Test Method: ASTM C39. 2. Test one cylinder at 7 days. 3. Test two 6-inch diameter by 12-inch long cylinders or three 4-inch diameter by 8-inch long cylinders at 28 days. 4. Retain one cylinder for testing when requested by Engineer. 5. Dispose of remaining cylinders when testing is not required. H. Core Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Sampling and Testing Procedures: ASTM C42. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Drill three cores for each failed strength test from concrete represented by failed strength test. I. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. 3.09 DEFECTS A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Concrete with honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcing, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects)which affects the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. 1. As described in ACI 309R, honeycomb occurs when the mortar does not fill the space between the coarse aggregate particles and when it shows on a surface, it is necessary to chip out the area and make a repair. C. The surface of the concrete shall not vary in alignment more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347. 03 30 00-20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished as specified in the "Concrete Finishing" paragraphs above. E. Patch imperfections as directed by Engineer. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, design strength, tolerances, or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. D. Failure to Meet Strength Requirements: 1. The Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions, or to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens, which failed. 2. If additional curing does not give the strength required, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or removal and replacement of those portions which fail to develop required strength. 3. Specimens will be considered to have failed when average strength for any period of placing is less than values indicated in the following table: No. Days Consecutive Placing of Any Percent of Strength One Class of Concrete Specified 1 85 2 95 3 95 5 or more 100 4. When additional curing of portions of the structure is ordered by the Engineer, it shall be done at Contractor's expense and no claim for extra compensation for such additional curing shall be allowed. 03 30 00-21 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. In no case shall the Contractor be required to provide such additional curing beyond a total of 21 days, except where average strength of specimens, representing concrete placed on any three consecutive days, fall below 80 percent of the value specified in the "Concrete Mix" section of this specification. In this case, curing shall be continued until cores drilled from portions of the structure involved show an average strength equal to that specified in the "Concrete Mix" section of this specification. Cores shall have a diameter of approximately three times the maximum size aggregate and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C42. END OF SECTION 03 30 00-22 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 40 00 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. These specifications cover product design, manufacturing, transportation and installation of precast, prestressed, concrete, hollowcore plank, including grouting of all joints. B. Related Sections: 1. 03 30 00— Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. 03 45 00—Architectural Precast Concrete 3. Underlayments (Floor and/or Roof Leveling) 4. 07 92 00— Caulking and Sealants C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Plant Certification Program and shall be certified in category C2. B. Erector Qualifications: Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute PCI Qualified Erector program and regularly engaged for at least 5 years in the erection of precast structural concrete similar to the requirements of this project. C. Welder Qualifications: In accordance with AWS D1.1. D. Codes and Standards: Comply with provision of following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise indicated. 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete". ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-1 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK 2. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete".Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". 3. Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL - 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast Concarete Products". 4. Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL - 135, "Tolerance Manual for Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete Construction". 5. Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL - 120, "PCI Design Handbook". 6. Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL — 127 " Erection Manual Standards and Guidelines for the erection of precast concrete products." 7. Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL — 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete." 8. American Welding Society, AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel", D1.4 "Structural Welding Code— Reinforcing Steel", D1.6 "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel", C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding". 9. ASTM Specifications—As referred to in Part 2-Products, of this Specification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND DESIGN A. Shop Drawings: 1. Erection Drawings 2. Plans locating and defining all hollowcore planks furnished by the manufacturer, with all major openings shown. 3. Sections and details showing connections, weld plates, edge conditions and minimum support conditions of the hollowcore plank units. 4. All dead, live and other applicable loads used in the design. 5. Fire rating. 6. Shop tickets are typically not required for approval. B. Approvals: 1. Submit a copy of erection drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Fabrication not to proceed prior to receipt of approved drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-2 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK C. Product Design Criteria: 1. Loadings for design 2. Handling and erection stresses. 3. All dead and live loads as specified on the contract documents. 4. All other loads specified for hollowcore plank where applicable. 5. Approximate camber and deflection values and how they may affect the project should be reviewed with the manufacturer. 6. Fire rating shall be 2 hours. MNL-124 maybe used to determine fire rating. 7. Design steel plank support headers at openings when headers are determined necessary by the manufacturer's engineer. 8. Design calculations shall be performed by an engineer, registered in the state that the project is located in, and be experienced in precast prestressed concrete design. Design calculations shall be submitted for approval upon request. 9. Design shall be in accordance with ACI 318 and other applicable codes and standards. D. Tests and Reports: 1. Perform all concrete testing in accordance with PCI MNL-116 requirements. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C150 —Type I or III. B. Admixtures: 1. Water Reducing, Retarding, Accelerating, High-Range Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494 C. Aggregates: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-3 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK 1. ASTM C33 or C330 D. Water: 1. Potable or free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and embedded steel. E. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Bars: 2. Deformed Steel: ASTM A615— Grade 60 Deformed Low Alloy Steel: ASTM A706 3. Wire: 4. Cold Drawn Steel: ASTM A82. F. Prestressing Strand: 1. Uncoated, 7-Wire, Low Lax strand: ASTM A416 (including supplement) — Grade 250K or 270K. G. Welded Studs: In accordance with AWS D1.1. H. Structural Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A36. I. Bearings Strips: 1. Plastic: Multi-monomer plastic strips shall be non-leaching and support construction loads with no visible overall expansion. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES A. 28-day compressive strength: Minimum of 5,000 psi B. Release strength: Minimum of 3,000 psi C. Use of calcium chloride or admixtures containing chlorides is not permitted. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Manufacturing procedures and tolerances shall be in compliance with PCI MNL 116. B. Openings: Opening locations will be determine by the appropriate trades and provided to the manufacturer. Manufacturer shall provide openings 12 inches square ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-4 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK or larger and shown on the architectural and structural drawings. Small openings (less than 12 inches square) shall be drilled or cut by the respective trades after plank is grouted. Prior to field cutting, openings must be approved by the manufacturer. C. Finishes: Bottom surface shall be a smooth steel form finish from an extrusion process, without major chips, spalls and imperfections. Top surface is a uniform screed finish. Consult the plank manufacturer for other surface finish requirements. 2.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: 1. Hollowcore plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing, stockpiling, transporting and erection operations only at the lifting or supporting points designated by the manufacturer. 2. Transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed by qualified personnel with acceptable equipment and methods. B. Storage: 1. Store all units off ground on firm, level surfaces with dunnage placed at bearing points. 2. Place stored units so that identification marks are discernible. 3. Separate stacked units by dunnage across full width of each plank. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Site Access: Erection access suitable for cranes and trucks to move unassisted from public roads to all crane working areas as required by erector, or otherwise indicated herein, shall be provided and maintained by the general contractor. Obstructing wires shall be shielded or removed and, when applicable, snow removal and winter heat shall be provided by the general contractor. B. Stability of the building structure during erection shall be the responsibility of others. C. Preparation: The general contractor shall be responsible for: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-5 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK 1. Providing true, level, bearing surfaces on all field-placed bearing walls and other field-placed supporting members. Masonry wall bearing surfaces shall be bond beams with properly filled and cured concrete. D. All pipes, stacks, conduits and other such items shall be stubbed off at a level lower than the bearing plane until after the plank are set. Masonry, concrete or steel should not be installed above plank-bearing surface until after the plank is in place. E. Installation: Installation of hollowcore slab units shall be performed by a PCI Qualified Erector or have a minimum five years experience installing precast concrete. Members shall be lifted at points determined by the manufacturer. Bearing strips shall be set where required. F. Alignment: Members shall be properly aligned. Variations between members shall be leveled out by jacking, bolting or any other method recommended by the manufacturer. G. The general contractor shall provide and maintain all safety barricades, rebar caps and opening covers required for plank in accordance with current industry safety standards. H. Hollowcore plank units may be drilled or "shot" with approval from the manufacture. 3.02 GROUTING A. Grout: 1. Cement grout: Grout shall be a mixture of not less than one part Portland cement to three parts fine sand, and the consistency shall be such that joints can be completely filled without seepage over adjacent surfaces. The grout shall achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Any grout that seeps from the joint shall be completely removed before it hardens. Typically non-shrink grout is not required. 2. Grout keys shall be filled and cured properly prior to loading the deck with building materials, equipment or field cut openings. 3. Loading the deck with building materials and equipment should be reviewed with the manufacturer. 4. Cold Weather construction requirements shall apply when grouting in winter conditions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-6 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK 3.03 WELDING A. Field welding shall be done by qualified welders using equipment and materials compatible to the base material. 3.04 PATCHING A. Patching will be acceptable providing the structural adequacy of the hollowcore unit is not impaired. Patching shall be preformed in accordance with the plank manufactures approved details. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove rubbish and debris resulting from hollowcore plank work from premises upon completion. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 40 00-7 PRECAST, PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE PLANK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 03 60 00 GROUTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portland cement grout. 2. Rapid curing epoxy grout. 3. Non-shrink cementitious grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing. 1.02 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Grout: 1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes preparation of substrate, grout, placement, consolidation, troweling and curing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. B. American Society of Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. 3. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-1 GROUTING 4. ASTM C191 - Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle. 5. ASTM C307 - Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 6. ASTM C531 - Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 7. ASTM C579 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 8. ASTM C827 - Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. 9. ASTM C1107— Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). C. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Concrete Research Division (CRD): 1. CRD C621 - Non-Shrink Grout. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product data on grout proposed for use. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's instructions for mixing, handling, surface preparation and placing epoxy type and non-shrink type grouts. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 66 00 — Product Storage and Protection Requirements. B. Deliver grout in manufacturer's unopened containers with proper labels intact. C. Store grout in a dry shelter, protect from moisture. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to manufacturer's literature or contact the manufacturer for any special physical or environmental limitation that may be required for use of products. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-2 GROUTING B. Maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F before, during, and at least 72 hours after grouting placement, until grout has set. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I and II. B. Water: 1. Potable; containing no impurities, suspended particles, algae or dissolved natural salts in quantities capable of causing: a. Corrosion of steel. b. Volume change increasing shrinkage cracking. C. Efflorescence. d. Excess air entraining. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Washed natural sand. 2. Gradation in accordance with ASTM C33 and represented by smooth granulometric curve within required limits. 3. Free from injurious amounts of organic impurities as determined by ASTM C40. D. M ix: 1. Portland cement, sand and water. Do not use ferrous aggregate or staining ingredients in grout mixes. 2.02 RAPID CURING EPDXY GROUT A. Manufacturers: 1. Chockfast Red — ITW Engineered Polymers. 2. EG-96HP—W.R. Meadows. 3. Substitutions: Submit substitutions for approval. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-3 GROUTING B. Rapid Curing Epoxy Grout: High strength, three component epoxy grout formulated with thermosetting resins and inert fillers. Rapid-curing, high adhesion, and resistant to ordinary chemicals, acids and alkalies. Property Test Result Compressive Strength ASTM C579 12,000 psi at 7 days Tensile Strength ASTM C307 2,000 psi minimum Coefficient of Expansion ASTM C531 30xl0-6 in per degree F Shrinkage ASTM C827 None 2.03 NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT A. Manufacturers: 1. Non-Metallic Grout: where grout is exposed to view or weathering: a. "Five Star Grout" - Five Star Products, Inc. b. "Supergrout 1000" - Conchem, Inc. C. "MasterFlow 713" or "Set Grout" - Master Builders, Inc. d. "Crystex" - L&M Chemicals e. "Euco NS" - Euclid Chemical Company 2. Metallic Grout: Where covered by earth, concrete or masonry, or otherwise concealed from view, Contractor, at his option, may use: a. "Embeco 885" or"Embeco 636"— Master Builders, Inc. b. "Ferro-Grout" — L&M Chemicals C. "Firmix"— Euclid Chemical Co. 3. Substitutions: Submit substitution for approval. B. Non-shrink Cementitious Grout: Factory pre-mixed ready for use formulation requiring only addition of water; non-shrink, non-corrosive, non-metallic, non-gas forming, no chlorides. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-4 GROUTING C. Properties: Certified to maintain initial placement volume or expand after set and meet the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with CRD-C621 and ASTM C1107, for Grades B and C non-shrink grout: Property Test Time Result Setting Time ASTM Initial 2 hours (Approx) C191 Final 3 hours (Approx) Expansion 0.10% - 0.4% Maximum Compressive Strength ASTM 1 day 3,400 psi C1107 7 days 7,000 psi 28 days 8,500 psi to 10,800 psi 2.04 FORMWORK A. Refer to Section 03 10 00 for formwork requirements. 2.05 CURING A. Prevent rapid loss of water from grout during first 48 hours by use of approved membrane curing compound or with use of wet burlap method. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall inspect all work for location and readiness for grouting. Do not proceed until unacceptable areas are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound, clean concrete surface is achieved. B. Roughen concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout. C. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. D. Align, level and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted. E. Saturate concrete surfaces with clean water; remove excess water, leave none standing. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-5 GROUTING 3.03 INSTALLATION - FORMWORK A. Construct leak-proof forms anchored and shored to withstand grout pressures. B. Install formwork with clearances to permit proper placement of grout. 3.04 MIXING A. Portland Cement Grout: 1. Use proportions of 2 parts sand and 1 part cement, measured by volume. 2. Prepare grout with water to obtain consistency to permit placing and packing. 3. Mix water and grout in two steps; pre-mix using approximately 2/3 of water; after partial mixing, add remaining water to bring mix to desired placement consistency and continue mixing 2 to 3 minutes. 4. Mix only quantities of grout capable of being placed within 30 minutes after mixing. 5. Do not add additional water after grout has been mixed. 6. Capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 48 hours and 7000 psi in 28 days. B. Mix and prepare rapid curing epoxy grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Mix and prepare non-shrink cementitious grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Mix grout components in proximity to work area and transport mixture quickly and in manner not permitting segregation of materials. 3.05 PLACING GROUT A. Place grout material quickly and continuously. B. Do not use pneumatic-pressure or dry-packing methods. C. Apply grout from one side only to avoid entrapping air. D. Do not vibrate placed grout mixture, or permit placement when area is being vibrated by nearby equipment. E. After grout has acquired its initial set, trim to lower edge of bearing place and remove excess material. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-6 GROUTING F. Thoroughly compact final installation and eliminate air pockets. G. Do not remove leveling shims for at least 48 hours after grout has been placed. H. Provide and maintain protection to ensure that work to be grouted is maintained at proper temperature and in its set position during grouting operation and until the grout has thoroughly hardened. 3.06 CURING A. Immediately after placement, protect grout from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. After grout has attained its initial set, keep damp for minimum of 3 days. C. Follow all manufacturers' instructions for curing. 3.07 FIELD CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of grout to Engineer for approval prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of grout components may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 03 60 00-7 GROUTING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 04 05 13 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein. B. Principal items of work include: 1. Mortar for unit masonry work. 2. Grout for grouting masonry. 3. Mortar for pointing and touchup. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 05 23— Masonry Accessories B. Section 04 20 00 — Unit Masonry 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM C91 — Standard Specification for Masonry Cement 2. ASTM C144 —Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 3. ASTM C150 —Standard Specification for Portland Cement 4. ASTM C207 —Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 5. ASTM C270 —Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 6. ASTM C476 —Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 7. ASTM C979 — Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete N N 8. ASTM C1019— Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Grout 9. TMS 602 — Specification for Masonry Structures ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 13-1 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's data and mixing instructions for each product. 2. Certificate of compliance with these specifications for each material specified below. 3. Mix Design for Masonry Grout. 4. Test reports. 5. Samples of colored masonry mortar. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, bearing labels indicating product and manufacturer's name. B. Store cementitious materials in waterproof locations to prevent damage by elements. Reject containers showing evidence of damage. C. Store aggregates in separate bins to prevent intrusion of foreign particles. Do not use bottom 6 inches of sand or other aggregate stored in contact with the ground. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications provide products manufactured by one of the following: 1. LaFarge, Reston, VA 2. Lehigh Cement Company, Allentown, PA 3. Holcim, Inc., Dundee, MI 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mortar and Grout Materials ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 13-2 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 1. Materials used in the production of masonry grout shall meet the requirements of specification 03 33 00, Cast— in — Place Concrete, PART 2— Products, except coarse and fine aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 404. 2. Hydrated lime: ASTM C-207, Type "S". 3. Sand: Clean, coarse, free of loam, salt, organic and foreign matter and conforming to ASTM C-144. 4. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S and meet the following criteria: a. Prepackaged masonry cement shall contain Portland Cement, hydrated lime and plasticizing admixtures or hydraulic hydrated lime. Masonry cements which contain other materials, including ground limestone, ground slag, or other cementitious and non-cementitious materials, are not acceptable. 5. Water- clean, fresh, potable, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalis, salts, organic matter or other deleterious substances. B. Admixtures 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Provide water repellant admixture in mortar used for architectural concrete masonry units. Admixture shall be compatible with ACMU water repellant admixture. 3. Do not use admixtures, without written approval of Engineer. C. Mortar pigment 1. Natural or synthetic iron oxide and chromium oxides meeting the requirements of ASTM C979. 2. Pigment shall not exceed 10% of the weight of Portland cement. Carbon black shall not exceed 2% of Portland cement. 3. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.03 GROUT AND MORTAR MIXES A. Masonry mortar shall be Type "S" according to ASTM C-270. Proportions for masonry mortar shall be one of the following: 1. Proportions by volume: 1 part Portland cement to 1/4 - 1/2 parts hydrated lime, and aggregate volume of not less than 2-1/4 or more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 13-3 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 2. Proportions by volume: 1/2 part Portland cement to 1 part masonry cement, and aggregate volume of not less than 1-1/4 or more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. B. Proportions for pointing mortar. 1. Proportions by volume: 1 part Portland cement to 1/4 part hydrated lime and 2 parts extra fine sand. C. Masonry Grout shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 476 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, strength of grout, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019 shall be equal to fm as specified in Section 04 20 00— Unit Masonry, but not less than 2,000 psi. 1. Test grout for every 5,000 square feet of masonry, with a minimum of one test per structure. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD MORTAR MIXING A. Mixing shall be by mechanically operated batch mixer. Entirely discharge before recharging. Mix sand, lime, cement and admixtures dry for two (2) minutes minimum, add water and mix for three (3) minutes minimum. Control batching procedures by measuring materials by volume. Measurement by shovel count shall not be permitted. Mix mortar with less water than the maximum amount, consistent with workability, to provide near maximum tensile bond strength. Mix only quantity that can be used before initial set, or within the first one-half hour. B. Mixers, wheel barrows, mortar boards, etc., shall be kept clean. C. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted and mortar allowed to stand more than one (1) hour shall not be used. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with TMS 602. 3.03 REPOINTING MORTAR A. Prehydrate the mortar by mixing ingredients together dry, and then add only enough water to make a damp, stiff mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. After one to two hours, add water to bring it to the proper consistency. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 13-4 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT SECTION 04 05 14 MASONRY, MORTARING, AND GROUTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. 530.1, Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C94, Ready-Mixed Concrete. 2. C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. C150, Portland Cement. 4. C199, Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortar. 5. C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 6. C270, Mortar for Unit Masonry. 7. C404, Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 8. C476, Grout for Masonry. 9. C595, Blended Hydraulic Cement. 10. C780, Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 11. C1019, Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 14-1 MASONRY MORTARING & GROUTING 12. C1072, Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength. 13. E447, Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 14. E514, Water Permeance. 15. E518, Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry. C. IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council): 1. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 2. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include design mix, indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. B. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. C. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. D. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019. Design shall be for flowable mix grout. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on Site. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 14-2 MASONRY MORTARING & GROUTING 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 PREMIX MORTAR A. Premix mortar is not acceptable. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. B. Masonry Cement: Masonry cement is not acceptable. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. E. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Bonding Agent: Latex type. 2.03 MORTAR COLOR A. Mortar Color: Match existing. Submit for Owner approval. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Plasticizer for Grout: Manufactured by W. R. Grace. B. Integral Water Repellent Admixture for Mortar—ASTM E514, Class E - Dry-Block Mortar Admixture by Forrer Industries. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Proportion specification. B. Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Proportion specification. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 14-3 MASONRY MORTARING & GROUTING C. Mortar for Engineered Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using the Proportion specification. D. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight. 2.06 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. Water repellent admixture required only for exterior wythes of exterior masonry walls. D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 60 degrees F. 2.07 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams, Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8 inches to 10 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8 inches to 10 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. 2.08 GROUT MIXING A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 fine grout. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.09 MIX TESTS A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780 for compressive strength, consistency. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 14-4 MASONRY MORTARING & GROUTING B. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. Insure existing concrete surface is clean, dry, and free of foreign matter. Follow Manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation. B. Plug clean-out holes with brick or block masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. Mortar with water repellent admixture is required at masonry walls. Install grout in accordance with ASTM C476. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 24 inches 3 CMU courses without consolidating grout by rodding. D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed as required. B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C109. C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. D. Test mortar and masonry units to ASTM E447; test in conjunction with masonry unit sections specified. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 14-5 MASONRY MORTARING & GROUTING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein. B. Principal items of work include: 1. Metal joint reinforcement for masonry. 2. Accessories for masonry construction. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 05 13— Mortar and Masonry Grout B. Section 04 20 00 — Unit Masonry 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM Al064/1064M — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 2. ASTM A153— Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 3. ASTM A 951 — Standard Specification for Steel Wire Masonry Joint Reinforcement 4. ASTM D1056— Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Extruded Rubber 5. TMS 602 — Specifications for Masonry Structures 1.04 SUBMITTALS 0 A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Provide manufacturer's complete product data. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 23-1 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 2. Provide manufacturer's certification attesting compliance of material and source of each material specified below. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR MASONRY REINFORCEMENT A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products manufactured by the following: 1. AA Wire Products, Company, Chicago, IL 2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL 3. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL. 4. Holman and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Multi Wythe Joint Reinforcement 1. Steel ladder type reinforcement conforming to ASTM A 951 with adjustable pintel and eye assembly; 3/16 inch side rods and 9 gauge continuous cross rods; manufactured with wire conforming to ASTM A1064/1064M, with widths 2-inches less than nominal wall thickness. Provide seismic clip with 9 gauge continuous wire. B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement 1. Steel ladder type reinforcement conforming to ASTM A 951 with 3/16 inch side rods and 9 gauge continuous cross rods; manufactured with wire conforming to ASTM Al064/1064M, with widths 2-inches less than nominal wall thickness. C. Anchors: Cast into concrete or weld to steel. 1. Dovetail Slot shall be 1 inch back by 1 inch deep by 5/8 inch throat, 22 gauge, foam filled. 2. Dovetail Anchor- accessory for anchoring triangular flexible tie to dovetail slot, shall be 12 gauge by 1 inch wide 1/2 inch long dovetail section. 3. Wire/Strap Anchor- 1/4 inch wire or 12 gauge x 3/4 inch x length required, welded or mechanically attached to back up structure. D. Ties ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 23-2 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 1. Triangular Flexible Tie: 3/16 inch wire, sized to suit application. 2. Adjustable Tie: Pintel and eye full tie; properly sized for application, 3/16 inch cold drawn steel. E. Seismic Clip and Continuous Wire 1. Seismic clip shall be impact resistant PVC with retaining ridges to accept continuous wire. 2. Continuous wire shall be 9 gauge galvanized steel. F. Top of Wall Anchor 1. Top of wall anchor shall be a 3/8" diameter rod welded to a 3/16" plate with two anchor holes. Provide a plastic tube to allow vertical deflection. G. Finish 1. Reinforcements, anchorages and ties shall be hot dipped galvanized, Class B-2, after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Expansion and Joint Filler Material 1. Closed cell neoprene material conforming to ASTM D 1056, with a minimum compressibility of 50%. Horizontal joint filler shall be 1/4 inch thick. Expansion joints shall be a minimum 3/8" thick. B. Weep and Vent Holes 1. Cellular vent 3/8" wide by 2 Y2" high x 3 5/8" length. CellVent by Mortar Net or equal. Color to closely match mortar. C. Control Joint 1. Wide flange rapid preformed neoprene or PVC gasket. D. Hardware Cloth 1. 1/2-inch hardware cloth. E. Through Wall Flashing ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 23-3 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 1. Self-sealing, fully adhering composite flashing consisting of 32 mil rubberized asphalt bonded to an 8 mil cross laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall 40 mil thickness. 2. Provide Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing by W.R. Grace, Flash-Bond by Wire-Bond or Poly-Barrier Wall Flashing by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. F. Cavity Drainage Mat 1. CavClear Masonry Mat by CavClear, Hudson WI. Or approved equal. Description: Fluid conducting, non-absorbent, mold and mildew resistant polymer mesh consisting of 100% recycled polymer with PVC binder. Thickness of actual air space minus tolerances recommended by manufacturer. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. In masonry wall panels, place horizontal joint reinforcement at a vertical spacing of 16 inches on center, unless otherwise noted. B. Lap side rods at each end joint a minimum of 6 inches. C. Install prefabricated corner and tee assemblies at each wall corner and intersection. D. Mitre and butt end joints are prohibited. E. Place horizontal joint reinforcement in approximate center of out-to-out wall assembly and assuring a 5/8 inch, minimum, mortar coverage on exterior face and 1/2 inch on interior face. F. Veneer ties and wire anchors shall be length required to provide a minimum of 1 '/2" engagement into the veneer and assuring a 5/8 inch, minimum, mortar coverage on exterior face and 1/2 inch on interior face. G. Adjustable anchor assemblies may be offset no more than that which is stated in manufacturer's published instructions. Pintles may be installed either up or down. H. Install horizontal joint reinforcement continuous, terminating only at vertical control joints. I. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend 24 inches minimum each side of opening. J. Place joint reinforcement continuous and at 8 inches on center vertically above roof. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 23-4 MASONRY ACCESSORIES K. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement. Maintain position with '/2 inch to true dimension. L. Coordinate and verify that dowels and anchorages embedded in concrete and attached to structural steel members are properly placed. M. Provide wall ties for masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Place at maximum 8 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. N. Masonry adjacent to steel and concrete columns to be attached to the column with masonry anchors at 16 inches on center. Anchors to be attached to each face of the column which is adjacent to a masonry wall, unless otherwise noted. 3.02 DOVETAIL SLOTS AND ANCHORS A. Provide dovetail slots to concrete contractor for placement into the concrete construction. Dovetail slots shall be placed vertically and spaced 16 inches on center horizontally. B. Remove slot filler after forms are removed. C. Hook dovetail anchor into slots and set in masonry joints at 16 inches on center. 3.03 BENDING, CUTTING AND SPLICING REINFORCEMENT A. Make bends and splices in reinforcement only where indicated, or prior-approval by Engineer. Bend reinforcement only when cold, and prior to any placement in construction, forming around a steel pin of diameter at least 6 times the reinforcement size. Cut bars only by approved sawing, shearing or welding methods. Make ends of reinforcement straight, square, clean and free of defects before splicing. Do not heat or weld bends and splices at points of maximum stress. Clip and bend any tie wires as required to direct the ends away from external surfaces of masonry walls. B. Where welding is necessary, provide materials and perform welding in accordance with AWS requirements. C. All lap splices to be 48 bar diameters, unless otherwise noted. 3.04 THROUGH WALL FLASHING A. Clean areas to receive flashing. Surface shall be free of voids, spalled areas, or sharp protrusions. Concrete surfaces shall be cured a minimum of 7 days. B. Apply Primer as recommended by manufacturer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 23-5 MASONRY ACCESSORIES C. Apply flashing in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Sidelaps shall be a minimum of 2'/2 inches. End laps shall have a 6" minimum lap. Provide end dams at ends of lintels and other interruptions. D. Seal flashing where vertical reinforcing penetrates flashing with a mastic approved for use by manufacturer. 3.05 CAVITY DRAINAGE MAT A. Install cavity drainage mat in air-space between insulation and masonry veneer construction full height of cavity. B. Cavity drainage mat shall be temporarily fastened in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 05 23-6 MASONRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified work. 1. Principal items of work include: a. Exterior masonry wall construction. b. Interior masonry wall construction. C. Installation of masonry reinforcement and accessories. d. Masonry unit lintels. e. Installing dampproofing, insulation, flashing and work required to be built into masonry work. f. Building into masonry work all anchors, inserts, hangers, and other appurtenances provided under other Sections. g. Pointing and cleaning of exposed masonry surfaces. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 21 00 — Reinforcing Steel B. Section 04 05 13— Mortar and Masonry Grout C. Section 04 05 23— Masonry Accessories D. Section 07 11 00— Dampproofing E. Section 07 21 00 — Building Insulation F. Section 07 60 00 — Flashing and Sheet Metal 0 m 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS N A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-1 UNIT MASONRY 1. TMS 402 — Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures 2. TMS 602 — Specifications for Masonry Structures a. TMS 602 shall be considered minimum specifications for all materials, workmanship, methods, and techniques for all masonry work. b. Obtain a copy of the above Specifications prior to beginning any work in this Section. 3. ASTM C62 — Standard Specification for Building Brick 4. ASTM C90 — Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 5. ASTM C140 —Standard Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units 6. ASTM C216 —Standard Specification for Facing Brick 7. ASTM C744 — Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units 8. ANSI A41.1 R70 — Code Requirements for Masonry 1.04 TESTING A. Tests 1. The Owner reserves the right to test materials for compliance with these specifications. Sampling and testing will be done in accordance with the ASTM standard, by an independent testing agency employed by the Owner. Materials that fail to meet requirements are considered defective. Subsequent tests to establish compliance (of the same or new materials) shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Samples of each material to be used showing full range of colors. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and certifications of compliance to the Specifications, including results of tests on masonry units showing such compliance, for each type of masonry. Provide handling, storage, and installation instructions along with protection instructions. Indicate by transmittal that installer has received copies of each instruction. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-2 UNIT MASONRY 3. Detailed placing and shop fabricating drawings, prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI Detailing Manual - (SP66), shall be furnished for all deformed bar reinforcing. These drawings shall be made to such a scale as to clearly show joint locations, openings, and the arrangement, locations, spacing and splicing of the bars. 4. Cold and/or hot weather construction procedures in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 sections 2.3.2.2. and 2.3.2.3. 5. Cleaning procedures and cleaner for each masonry type. 1.06 MOCK-UPS A. Build mock-ups at the site, where directed, full thickness and approximately 4 feet x 4 feet, indicating the proposed color range, texture, and workmanship for each type of masonry. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start of masonry work. Do not alter, move, or destroy mock-ups until Work is completed and removal is directed by the Engineer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unbroken, undamaged, and unopened packaging with labels bearing the name of the manufacturer and the product. Masonry units and brick shall be factory packaged and strapped, delivered to the site and stored on skids. B. Store and handle materials to prevent inclusion of water or foreign matter and to prevent damage of any nature. C. Distribute materials on floor slabs to prevent overloading. Designated live loads shown for floor shall not be exceeded. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide special shape, type or size indicated or for application requiring a form, size or finish which cannot be produced from standard masonry units by sawing. Provide solid units where masonry unit is exposed. B. Masonry units for fire-rated walls shall comply with Underwriter's Laboratory requirements for fire rating shown on the Drawings. C. Deformed bar reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of specification 03 21 00 — Reinforcing Steel. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-3 UNIT MASONRY 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mortar 1. In accordance with Section 04 05 13— Mortar and Masonry Grout B. Face Brick 1. ASTM C-216, Type FBS, SW. modular as manufactured and distributed by Belden Brick Company, Glen-Gery Corporation, Cherokee Sanford Group, Inc. or equal. Face brick shall be selected and approved by the Owner from samples submitted. Select color from manufacturer's gray and brown color range. Sand finished brick shall not be accepted. 2. Net area compressive strength of brick masonry units shall be a minimum of 3,350 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. Compressive strength of masonry (f'm) shall be a minimum of 1,500 psi in accordance with ACI 530.1 when these units are used with the mortar specified in Section 04 05 13— Mortar and Masonry Grout. C. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Provide units conforming to ACI 530.1 unless otherwise specified. 2. Provide light weight units meeting the requirements of ASTM C90 for hollow and solid load bearing CMU. 3. Manufacture units of Portland Cement, conforming to ASTM C-150 and light weight aggregate conforming to ASTM C331 and ASTM C33. Weight of unit shall not exceed 105 lb. per cu. ft. when measured in accordance with provisions of ASTM C140. Units shall be nominally 8 inches x 16 inches x thicknesses shown or as required. Masonry units shall be manufactured not less than 30 days prior to being used and stored under cover until shipment. All units shall have true, sharp edges and corners, free from cracks or other defects. Provide half special sizes and shapes as required by the Drawings or to meet job conditions. 4. Net area compressive strength of concrete masonry units shall be a minimum of 2,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140. Compressive strength of masonry (f'm) shall be a minimum of 2,000 psi in accordance with ACI 530.1 when these units are used with the mortar specified in Section 04 05 13— Mortar and Masonry Grout. D. Concrete Masonry Lintels ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-4 UNIT MASONRY 1. Specially formed units with reinforcing bars and grout fill provided where shown and wherever openings in masonry are indicated without structural steel or other supporting lintels. E. Glazed Architectural Concrete Masonry Units 1. Plane face, colored, satin finished units conforming to ASTM C-744. 2. Concrete masonry unit for glazing: ASTM C-90 for hollow and solid load bearing units. 3. Surface burning Characteristics of Facing: ASTM E-84; flame spread less than 25, fuel contribution zero, smoke density less than 50. 4. Size: Nominal face dimension 8 inches x 16 inches x thickness as required and shown on the Drawings. 5. Colors: Owner to select from manufacturer's complete color selections. Provide a minimum of 60 colors. 6. Acceptable Products: Spectra-Glaze by Burns and Russell Company, Asta-Glaze by Trenwyth Industries, Inc., or equal. F. Sound Absorptive Concrete Masonry Units 1. 8-inch by 8-inch by 16-inch and Type RSC/RF4 by Sounblox. 2. Units shall meet the requirements of ASTM C90. 3. The fillers shall have metal septa laminated to one side of the fibrous material and installed with the septa facing away from the slots at the factory. Cut filler and septa accurately to size and install as recommended by the Manufacturer. G. Glass Block 1. Size: 8"x8"x4" 2. Color: Clear. 3. Pattern: None. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers a. J. Weck GmbH u. Company, Arlington Heights, IL b. Pittsburg Corning Corp., Pittsburg, PA. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-5 UNIT MASONRY H. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units 1. Scored smooth and split-face CMU shall be manufactured by firm producing architectural concrete masonry units for a minimum of five years. 2. Units shall conform to ASTM C-90, Type I, normal weight. 3. Provide units with integral water repellant admixture. Absorption shall not exceed 10 Ibs per cubic foot. 4. Minimum compressive strength shall be 2700 psi on wet area of a single unit. 5. Color shall be selected from manufacturer full line of colors. Up to two colors shall be selected. I. Insulated Block System 1. Pre-Insulated specially formed masonry units with individually molded insulation. Units shaped to reduce cross-web thermal conductance. CMU and Insulation shall be configured to provide a near continuous insulated plane within wall. a. Provide light weight units conforming to ASTM C90. Weight of unit shall not exceed 105 lb. per cu. ft. when measured in accordance with provisions of ASTM C140. b. Individually molded expandable polystyrene, conforming to ASTM C578. C. Reinforced insulated block system wall thermal resistance shall be R-10, minimum. d. Exterior finish shall be split faced. e. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1) Korfil Hi-R Masonry Wall System, by Concrete Block Insulating Systems, West Brookfield, MA. 2) Omni Block Insulated Concrete Block, by Omni Block, Las Vegas, NV. 3) Or Approved Equal. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-6 UNIT MASONRY PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examine areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Do not wet concrete masonry units. C. Brick having absorption rates in excess of 0.025 oz. per square inch per minute (as determined per ASTM C 67) shall be wetted sufficiently so that the rate of absorption, when brick is laid, does not exceed this amount. D. Clean reinforcing, removing loose rust, ice, or other coatings from bars, before placement. E. Thickness of cavity and composite walls, and other masonry construction shall be the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual size of masonry units. F. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. G. Build other work into masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work and grouting to assure anchorage. H. Cut masonry units with motor driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown or specified, and to fit adjoining work neatly. I. Cold and hot weather construction. 1. No masonry shall be erected when ambient temperature has dropped below 45OF unless it is rising and at no time when it has dropped below 40°F. Provisions shall be made for heating and drying of materials, and the complete work shall be protected in accordance with the ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Section 2.3.2.2. Masonry shall not be laid with ice or frost on its surfaces, and no masonry shall be laid on frozen work. Any work which freezes before the mortar has set shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's own expense. Do not use any admixtures or antifreeze in the mortar. 2. When the temperature is above 100°F or 90°F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, mortar beds shall be spread no more than 4 feet ahead of masonry and masonry units shall be set within one minute of spreading mortar. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-7 UNIT MASONRY 3.02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10', 112" maximum. B. Variation from level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown on plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. D. Variation in Cross Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2". E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8". 3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half size units at corners,jambs, and wherever possible at other locations. B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh mortar. E. Cover top of walls at the end of each day. Protect wall from water infiltration from the top until wall is capped. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-8 UNIT MASONRY F. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of hardware cloth in the joint below and rod grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise noted. 4. Seal masonry tight around wall penetrations such as beams, joists, pipes, ducts, and conduit by cutting masonry units to fit as tightly as possible, then closing final gap all around with mortar, or joint filler and caulking as necessary. 3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay solid masonry units with filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs with mortar in starting courses on footing or floors, and where adjacent cells are to be reinforced or filled with grout. For starting courses where cells are not grouted, spread full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Maintain joint widths of 3/8", except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. D. Tooling: Joints shall be tooled to a uniform concave joint. Head joints first and then the bed joints. E. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners and jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.05 JOINT REINFORCING A. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints not more than 16" o.c. vertically. B. Parapets: Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal joints at 8" o.c. vertically. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-9 UNIT MASONRY C. Reinforced masonry openings greater than 12" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcements 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints. D. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. F. Intersecting Load-bearing Walls: Provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c vertically. Embed ends in mortar-filled cores. G. Non-loadbearing Interior Partitions: Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or structure above, unless shown otherwise. Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 3.06 CAVITY WALLS A. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavity, flush. B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up wythe of masonry with horizontal joint reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically. C. Coordinate placement of dampproofing and insulation board with work to ensure there are no gaps or air spaces between pieces of insulation board. D. Weep joints shall be placed in exterior wythe of cavity wall, spaced a maximum of 32" o.c. horizontally, immediately above ledges, at lintels over openings, and as shown. 3.07 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Provide and install insulation as shown and as specified in Section 07 21 00— Building Insulation. 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide vertical and horizontal expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build-in related items as the masonry work progresses. 3.09 LINTELS A. Install galvanized steel lintels where indicated. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-10 UNIT MASONRY B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 8" for brick size units and 1'-4" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or poured-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. C. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed "U"-shaped lintel units with reinforcement bars placed as shown and filled with grout. D. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb. 3.10 FLASHING A. Provide flashing as shown and as specified in Section 07 60 00 — Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Vertical reinforcement shall be held in place by means of frames or other suitable means. Place horizontal joint reinforcement as masonry work progresses. Provide minimum clear distance between longitudinal bars equal to nominal diameter of bar. Minimum thickness of mortar or grout between masonry and reinforcement shall be 1/4", except 6 gage or smaller wires may be laid in 3/8" mortar joints. Collar joints which contain both horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall have a minimum width of 1/2" larger than the diameter of the horizontal and vertical reinforcement. B. Bar splices shall be contact lap splices. Length of splice shall be as shown on Structural Drawings. C. Low lift grouting shall be used when grout space is less than 2" in width. Place grout at maximum intervals of 24" in lifts of 6 to 8 inches as the work progresses. Cores to be grouted shall be clean of mortar, mortar dropping and debris. Agitate grout to assure complete filling and coverage of reinforcement. Hold grout 1-1/2 inches below to top of masonry if work is discontinued for more than an hour. D. High lift grouting may be used when the grout space is greater than 2". Grout shall not be placed in lifts greater than 4 feet. Grout core shall be kept clean of mortar, mortar dripping and debris. Provide cleanout holes as required for inspection and cleaning. Replace cleanout plugs after inspection and acceptance. Place grout in accordance with TMS 402 and TMS 602. Hold grout 1-1/2 inches below top of masonry if work is discontinued for more than an hour. E. Forms and shoring shall be substantial and tight to prevent leakage of mortar or grout. Brace and shore forms to maintain position and shape. Do not remove forms or shoring until masonry gains enough strength to sufficiently carry its own weight and any other loads, temporary or permanent, placed on it during construction. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-11 UNIT MASONRY 3.12 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be protected from staining. Tops of wall shall be covered with nonstaining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress. Installed material shall be secure in high winds. B. Protection shall be provided for all openings in the walls to prevent damage to sills, jambs, etc., from all causes. Aluminum or steel frames and other finish materials shall be protected from damage during masonry work. 3.13 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing of Masonry: At the completion of the masonry work, all holes in exposed masonry shall be pointed. Defective joints shall be cut out and tuckpointed solidly with mortar. Pointing and tuckpointing shall be done with a pre-hydrated mortar. The mortar cement shall be controlled so that, after curing of the mortar, no difference in texture or color exists with that of adjacent masonry. C. Masonry Cleaning: While laying masonry units, good workmanship and job housekeeping practices shall be used to minimize the need for cleaning the masonry work. Protect the base of the wall from mud splashes and mortar droppings. The technique for laying masonry shall be such that mortar does not run down the face of the wall or smear onto the face. 1. After the joints are tooled, cut off mortar failings with the trowel and brush excess mortar burrs and dust from the face of the masonry, use a bricklayer's brush made with medium soft hair. 2. Remove all large mortar particles with a hardwood scraper. 3. If, after using the above outlined techniques, additional cleaning of the walls is found necessary, allow the walls to cure one month prior to initiating further cleaning processes. D. Clean masonry to comply with the masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins or BIA technical notes and the following requirements. 1. Saturate the wall with clean water. The wall shall be thoroughly saturated prior to and at the time the cleaning solution is applied. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-12 UNIT MASONRY 2. Clean masonry with an approved cleaning solution for each type of masonry applied with a brush, starting at the top of the wall. Approved cleaners shall be composed primarily of detergents, wetting agents, buffering agents, and a maximum of 10% muriatic acid. Do not use acids on masonry surfaces that will be damaged by use of an acid cleaner. The use of any of the above cleaning agents shall first be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the masonry being cleaned and the Engineer. The concentration, method of application of the cleaning solution, and method of scraping shall be as outlined on the container by the manufacturer. 3. High pressure water and sandblasting shall not be used for cleaning except with the recommendation of the masonry manufacturer and the written approval of the Engineer. 4. Immediately after cleaning a small area, the wall shall be rinsed thoroughly with quantities of water. 5. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials during masonry cleaning operations. 6. After the walls are cleaned, take the necessary precautions to ensure that other contractors and subcontractors do not damage or soil the walls. Mud protection around the base of walls shall be left in place until the grading work is done. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 20 00-13 UNIT MASONRY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Placement of fabricated steel items. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 05 14— Masonry Mortaring & Grouting: Mortar and grout. 1.04 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institut (ACI): 1. 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. 530.1, Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A82, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A123, Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. A525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. A615, Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. A641, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 6. C126, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. 7. C90, Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 8. C129, Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): 1. Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 2. Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. B. Installers: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Hot Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-2 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00 PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Texas Industries, Product CMU. B. Featherlite, Product CMU. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU — 2-cell): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled; light weight at all 6-inch and 8-inch masonry. B. Exposed vertical corners shall be rounded CMU. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Blok-Lok Limited; www.blok-lok.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. (including Dur-O-Wall brand); www.h-b.com. 3. Wire-Bond; www.wirebond.com. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A1064 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153 Class B, 9-gauge side rods with 9-gauge cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; fabricated with moisture drip; ASTM A1064 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153, Class B, 9-gauge side rods with 9-gauge cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. E. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1-1/4 inch width, 0.105 inch thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123, Class B. F. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face. G. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 14-gauge, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 inch. H. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: As appropriate to the required function and as approved by the Engineer. 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 14, Masonry, Mortaring, and Grouting. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt. B. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. C. Centering Clips: Provide clips that prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during the course of construction. D. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-4 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running bond unless otherwise shown; stack bond at 8 by 8 by 8 decorative unit. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave and uniform in appearance at interior wall surfaces; struck flush at exterior surfaces. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform Job Site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, resilient base is scheduled, cavity insulation adhesive is applied, or bitumen damp-proofing is applied. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-5 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY I. Inside corner units. Provide 45-degree angle CMU corner filler at all inside 90-degree corners. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES -SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches OC in bed joints of CMU. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Reinforce CMU unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches OC. F. Reinforce CMU as indicated on plans. G. Exposed vertical corners of CMU shall be bull nosed. H. Install reinforced bond beam at tops of all CMU walls and where scheduled. Reinforce as indicated on plans. 3.06 LINTELS A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings. B. Do not splice reinforcing bars. C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. E. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. F. Maintain minimum 4-inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.07 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beam as shown on plans. B. Reinforce bearing walls as shown on plans. C. Lap splices minimum 24-bar diameters. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-6 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. F. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches (two cores) either side of opening. 3.08 BUILT-IN WORK A. As Work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, stainless steel access doors, (if required), wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the Work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door and frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other items. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-7 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed. B. Test all masonry work as indicated on Drawings. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.13 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 04 22 00-8 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural shapes. 2. Channels and angles. 3. Hollow structural sections. 4. Structural pipe. 5. Structural plates and bars. 6. Floor plates. 7. Bolts, connectors, and anchors. 8. Grout. B. Work Included: 1. Work consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment necessary for completion of the following work: a. Structural steel framing and support members, tension rods or cables, pipe columns, struts and braces complete with required braces, connection plates, welds, washers, bolts, nuts, shims, anchor bolts and templates. b. Base plates, cap plates, and shear stud connectors. C. Erecting, connecting, field welding and adjusting for plumb and level. d. All other work normally related to the above, as shown on Drawings, or specified under this section. C. Work Furnished but not Installed: Anchor bolts, anchor bolt templates, loose bearing plates and embedded items installed under Division 3 and/or Division 4 sections. D. Definitions: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Structural Steel: That work defined in Section 2.1 of the AISC "Code of Standard Practice", as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. E. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 60 00, Grouting: Grout for setting base and bearing plates. 2. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. 341, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. 19, Standard Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. Al23/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. Al93/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 6. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 7. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 8. A354, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 9. A449, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. 10. A490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 11. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 12. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 13. A514/A514M, Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding. 14. A529/A529M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. 15. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 16. A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel. 17. A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100-mm) Thick. 18. A618/A618M, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High- Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. 19. A786/A786M, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High- Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. 20. A847/A847M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. 21. A852/A852M, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi (485 MPa) Minimum Yield Strength to 4 in. (100 mm) Thick. 22. A913/A913M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST). 23. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 24. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-3 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 25. E94, Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. 26. E164, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 27. E165, Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination. 28. E709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. 29. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 30. F959, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 31. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 32. F1852, Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 33. F2329, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners. D. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. E. Green Seal (GC): 03-2nd Edition, January 7, 1997 -Anti-Corrosive Paints. F. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. G. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. Paint 20, Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 3. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. 4. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 5. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-4 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with the following: 1. Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, for miscellaneous steel supports other than structural steel. B. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and attend a meeting prior to beginning steel erection at the Site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and size and type of bolts. 2. Connections: Connections not detailed. 3. Cambers, loads, and clearances. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. State AWS pre- qualified weld designations for all types of groove welds used. Clearly indicate net weld lengths, sizes, and welding sequences. B. Erection Drawings: 1. Submit erection drawings defining location of each assembly or piece within the structure. a. Provide sufficient details to describe all field welding. b. Clearly identify all high strength bolts not required to be tensioned (a snug tight as defined by AISC). C. If drawings are submitted in multiple packages, each submittal shall be complete with all erection drawings, details, and piece drawings. d. Subsequent submittals of erection drawings which modify or add to earlier versions will be clearly marked. 2. Submit setting drawings for bolts and plates installed by others. a. Submit this information to the concrete contractor also so it may be utilized for installation of such items. C. Reproduction of the Contract Documents is not permitted. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-5 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING D. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, and destructive and non- destructive test analysis. F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. G. Welding Procedure: Submit one copy welding procedure to Engineer of record and one copy to the testing agency for review. Welding procedures shall minimize distortions due to welding and through thickness stresses due to restraint of welding shrinkage. 1. Submit welding procedure specifications per AWS D1.1 for all groove welds. H. Contractor Requested Changes: 1. All Contractor requests for substitutions of member sizes or material grades or modification of the strength or configuration of the structural framing for the Contractor's convenience, erection sequence, or construction equipment, shall be subject to the Owner's written approval. Additional costs for such changes shall be borne by the Contractor. 2. Contractor shall compensate the structural engineer of record to make these changes or review the design calculations of others and modify the Construction Documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Structural Steel: AISC 303, ASIC 341 and AISC 360. 2. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: AISC 303, Section 10. 3. High Strength Bolted Connections: RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 4. Steel Cable Structures: ASCE 19. B. Unidentified Members: Structural steel members shown on plans but not identified as to size, section and/or material grade will be included in the bid price for the Work by assuming sizes, sections and/or material grades, shown for similarly loaded members having approximately the same overall length. 1. All such members and their associated cost will be identified in the Bid for the Work. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-6 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience for projects of similar size. C. Shop Painter: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Structural M-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Structural S-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W-shapes. E. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. F. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. G. Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. H. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. ASTM A-500, Grade B, or ASTM A-501 excluding furnace butt welding. I. Structural Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. J. Floor Plates: ASTM A786/A786M; pattern as indicated on Drawings. K. Sliding Bearing Plates: Teflon coated. L. Suspension Cable: wire rope as indicated on Drawings. 2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Bolts: Heavy hex, structural type. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-7 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. ASTM A325; Type 1, plain unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, or Type 3, plain, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. ASTM A490; Type 1 or Type 3, plain. B. Nuts: ASTM A563; heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Plain, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, circular. 1. Finish: Plain, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959; Type 325, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Tension Control Assemblies: ASTM F1852; Type 1, heavy hex head, twist off type; complete with washers and heavy hex nuts. 1. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. F. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108; 60 ksi ultimate stress; headed, unfinished and in accordance with AWS D1.1; Type B. G. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554; Grade 55, weldable, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Shape: Hooked, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M. H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. I. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type with current ICC-ES approved and published ICC-ES Evaluation Report. Complete with required nuts, washers, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Size and manufacturer as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: Conditioned environments free from potential moisture; provide carbon steel anchors. a. Finish: Zinc plating in accordance with ASTM 13633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1). ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-8 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: Exposed or potentially wet environments and attachment of exterior cladding materials; provide galvanized carbon steel conforming to ASTM A153 or stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel nuts shall conform to ASTM F594. a. Type: Galvanized, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Nuts and washers shall match alloy group of anchors and shall have minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full- size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. C. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Owner, provide one of the following: a. Kwik Bolt 3, ICC ESR-1385 and ESR-2302— Hilti Fastening Systems. b. Trubolt, ICC ESR 2251 — ITW Red Head. C. Wedge-All, ICC ESR-1396— Simpson Strong-Tie. J. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded carbon steel rod conforming to ASTM A36 complete with required nuts, washers, adhesive system, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Current ICC-ES approval and published ICC-ES Evaluation Report required. Size and manufacturer as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: Conditioned environments free from potential moisture; provide carbon steel anchors a. Finish: Zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1). 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: Exposed or potentially wet environments and attachment of exterior cladding materials; provide galvanized carbon steel conforming to ASTM A153 or stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel nuts shall conform to ASTM F594. a. Type: Galvanized, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Nuts and washers shall match alloy group of anchors and shall have minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full- size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. C. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-9 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Owner, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Fastening Systems; HIT-RE 500 SD, ICC ESR-2322. b. Simpson Strong-Tie; SET22, ICC ESR-1772. K. Drilled-In Inserts: Size and type as noted on the Drawings. L. Forged Structural Steel Hardware: 1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085. 2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM Al08; Grade 1030. 3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018. 4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon steel. 2.03 WELDING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 1. Rebar used for welding shall meet the requirements of ASTM A706. Rebar bends shall meet the minimum bend diameters listed in ACI 318. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent practicable, in accordance with reference standards cited herein and final Shop Drawings. 2. Use detailing and fabrication procedures that account for distortion and shrinkage due to welding processes, both in the shop and in the field. 3. Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation. Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. B. Connections: 1. Provide connections as shown or noted on the Drawings. The design of connections not shown or noted shall be provided by the Owner upon request. Standard framing connections not shown shall be bid on the basis of connection tables on pages 4-9 thru 4-31 of the AISC A Manual of Steel Construction, ASD. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-10 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2. Alternate connections designed by the Contractors Engineer may be submitted with one set of design calculations, signed, and sealed by a Texas Registered Professional Engineer, for review and approval. 3. Alternate connection concepts shall be pre-approved during bidding. 4. All connections shall be designed for 110 percent of the value noted on plans. 5. Welds not specified shall be 3/16-inch fillet continuous but not less than the AISC minimum based on the thickness of the parts joined. C. Space shear stud connectors at as indicated on Drawings. 1. Automatically end weld according to AWS D1.1, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Shop weld where possible. 3. Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached. Remove mill scale by grinding or sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to interfere with proper welding. D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. E. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. F. Develop required camber for members. G. Mark all members in protected, plainly visible locations in accordance with reference numbers on setting diagrams. 1. The member work point at each end of columns shall be determined and marked in the shop with a center punch or other acceptable means. 2. Marking shall be placed on the flanges and web at each end of columns. 3. Work point shall be as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 7.11.2(a). H. Perform all necessary cutting, fitting, and drilling for the accommodation of other trades. 1. Secure correct information for required openings both before and after steel is delivered. 2. No cutting or drilling will be permitted on the job without the acceptance of the Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING I. Splicing of members to obtain the required lengths will not be permitted without prior acceptance of the Owner, unless shown on the Drawings. J. Camber beams and girders where indicated on the Drawings. K. Where exact sizes and weights called for are not readily available, secure the Owner's acceptance of suitable sizes in time to prevent delay due to such substitutions. 2.05 FINISHES A. Prepare structural component surfaces to be covered in the completed structure in accordance with SSPC SP 3. B. Prepare structural component surfaces exposed to weather in the completed structure in accordance with SSPC SP 6. C. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted friction type (slip critical) connections. D. Galvanizing: ASTM Al23/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication where shown on Drawings. E. Galvanizing for Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors: Where shown on Drawings 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: Bolts,Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F2329. Connectors and Anchors: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. B. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide, minimum 2 coats at 2 oz per square foot. C. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type I Inorganic or Type II Organic. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-12 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: 1. Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. a. Retention by the Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing all Work in accordance with the contract documents. B. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests. C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. D. Furnish the testing agency with the following: 1. Access onsite to a complete set of field use shop and erection drawings with Engineer's approval stamp. 2. Mill test reports. 3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops. 4. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material. 5. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop, and field. 6. Representative sample pieces requested for testing. 7. Welding procedure specification. E. Assign an identifying symbol or mark to each person installing connections. Identify all shop and field connections with this mark so that the inspector can refer back to the person making the connection. F. Shop welds, including stud and rebar welds to embed plates and assemblies shall be tested before arriving at the Job Site. G. Contractor shall notify testing agency at least 10 working days in advance of any qualification testing for welding required herein. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-13 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation. Report all deviations to the General Contractor. B. Verify anchor rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct exposure for steel attachment. Report all deviations to the General Contractor. C. Do not proceed with erection until all unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor rods and embedments in concrete and masonry work. 1. Templates shall be permanently marked with column center lines and north arrow. B. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete and masonry work to the Project Site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete and masonry work operations. C. Storage of Structural Steel: 1. Support structural steel members which are stored at the Project Site above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports, upright to prevent twisting. 2. Protect steel from corrosion. 3. Store other materials in weather-tight and dry place, until ready for use. 4. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. 5. Where materials are to be stored on structure, store in a manner that will not cause distortion or damage the supporting structure. 6. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications, including supplements, with additional requirements of this section. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-14 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Consider all structural steel as non-self-supporting steel frames until permanently secured. 2. Permanently secured is when the structure has its complete gravity and lateral load resisting systems in place including floor and roof diaphragms, vertical bracing and/or shear walls and foundations. 3. Contractor shall coordinate installation of all non-structural steel items which will load the non-self-supporting structural steel frame. The structural steel frame temporary supports shall resist all loads from these non-structural steel items. C. Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. D. Set base and bearing plates level and at correct elevations on roughened surfaces cleaned of all bond reducing materials. Temporarily support on steel wedges or shims until supported members are plumbed and grouting is completed. E. Field weld components and shear connectors indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Clean existing surfaces before welding to existing steel. F. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; torque all high strength bolts used in column splices, connections of beams and girders to columns, and where noted on the Drawings to the minimum tension shown in Table J3.7 of AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ASD", June 1, 1989; tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections. 1. All A325 and A490 bolts specified as slip critical or fully pre-tensioned shall be tightened and inspected using Direct Tension Indicating washers. 2. No drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair holes will be allowed. Make minor corrections by reaming. 3. Serious defects may not be corrected in the field but shall be called to the attention of the Owner for a decision as to the method and/or procedure for correction. G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Engineer. H. Splice only where indicated on Drawings. I. Fasten splices in compression after bearing surfaces have been brought into contact. Clean bearing surfaces before assembly. Close all gaps 1/32 inches wide or greater by driving non-tapered mild steel shims full depth of the bearing surface along the full length of the gap. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-15 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING J. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes. K. Drilled-In Inserts: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth. Where adhesive inserts are used, clean hole in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Do not drill holes in concrete until material has achieved full design strength. 3.04 GROUT INSTALLATION A. Grout under base plates as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with Section 03 60 00. B. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation, snug tighten anchor bolts. C. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air pockets. D. Moist cure grout. E. Remove forms after grout is set. Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed 45 degrees. F. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days, or as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Comply with Requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, except as follows: 1. Columns: a. Maximum deviation of column from established column line shall not exceed 1 inch, accumulative from all sources. b. Bases of all columns shall be located on established centerlines (plan dimension) within plus or minus 1/8 inch. Bases shall be at specified elevation plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Maximum variation between top elevation of all columns shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Maximum variation between top elevations of any two adjacent columns shall not exceed 1/8 inch. 2. Members Connecting to Columns: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-16 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING a. Horizontal deviation of member working point from position with respect to supporting column working line shall not exceed plus or minus 1/16 inch from the location shown on Drawings. b. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice line of supporting column shall not exceed plus 1/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch from the elevation shown on Drawings. 3. Cambered Steel Beams: Fabrication camber shall be adjusted to compensate for conditions of shipping, handling, and erection. Maximum deviation of vertical camber at mid span of beam after erection, prior to placing deck, plus 3/8 inch or minus 0 inch maximum. 4. Other Members: Deviation of member working point horizontal location and elevation with respect to the supporting member shall not exceed plus or minus 1/16 inch from the location and elevation shown on the Drawings. 5. Leveling and Plumbing: Base leveling and plumbing on a mean temperature of 70 degrees F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Erection Tolerances: 1. Surveys, made by a surveyor with experience on similar projects, employed by the General Contractor and acceptable to the Owner shall be made as follows: a. Determine actual plan location and elevation at the top and bottom of each column immediately upon completion of erection. 2. Survey reports shall be submitted to the Owner within 24 hours after recording the data. Such reports shall, in addition, identify all deviations of member location and/or elevation in excess of allowable tolerances specified. B. Shop inspection by the Testing Agency for all columns and 20 percent of beams and girders shall include examination of steel for straightness and alignment, conformance to length and camber tolerances, fissures, mill scale and other defects and deformities, as described in ASTM A6 and examination of aforementioned fabricated pieces for conformity with approved Shop Drawings. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC 303 and "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts". 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections. Verify the specified surface preparation of the faying surface has been correctly prepared. If twist off(self-indicating) bolts are used, verify that all torque-off splines have been sheared off. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-17 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2. Inspect the bolt tightness of 10 percent of the bolts (minimum of two), selected at random, in each high strength bolted connection. a. If rejectable bolts are found in any connection, all remaining bolts in that connection shall be inspected for tightness. 3. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959. Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2. 4. When splines of twist off bolts are not sheared, or indicator washers are not properly deformed, the Testing Agency shall determine that proper bolt tension has been achieved by the application of a properly calibrated testing torque or the Contractor may, at his option, remove and replace all bolts with unsheared splines and all bolts without properly deformed indicator washers. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Drilled-In Inserts: 1. Self-Expanding Inserts: The testing Agency shall inspect self-expanding, drilled-in inserts shown on the structural Drawings as follows: a. Prior to installation, the Testing Agency shall determine that the installing contractor has the proper materials and equipment for drilling holes in the receiving surface of required diameter and length. b. All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that they have been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to the proper depth. 2. Adhesive-Bonded Inserts: The Testing Agency shall inspect adhesive-bonded, drilled in inserts as follows: a. The Testing Agency shall be present at the Site to observe the installation of the first 10 inserts placed. Such observation shall be to ensure that drilled holes are of required diameter and depth, holes are properly cleaned prior to installation of the insert, and that holes are completely filled with properly mixed adhesive after installation. b. All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that the insert has been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. E. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-18 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in Work. Record Work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Inspection of welding by the Testing Agency will be such as to assure that the Work conforms to specified requirements, and will include: a. Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to the requirements herein. b. Ascertain that the welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who are properly certified. C. Ascertainment that the fit-up, joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and the Drawings, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without approval of the Owner. 3. Visually inspect all welds. 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full and/or partial penetration groove welds. 5. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 6. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on 10 percent of all other welds. 7. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94; performed on may be substituted for ultrasonic inspection with prior approval. 8. All embedded plates and assemblies manufactured by the steel fabricator and supporting structural elements shall be tested. 9. Test components of those embedded plates and assemblies as follows: a. Welded reinforcing bars and deformed anchors: 100 percent visual and 10 percent magnetic particle. 100 percent ultrasonic for all complete penetration groove welds to reinforcing bars. b. Stud connectors shall have all studs visually and acoustically tested in accordance with AWS D1.1. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-19 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Plates: Embedded plates thicker than 3/8 inch shall be ultrasonically tested along the center line of the plate width. Such tests shall be made after stud/rebar shop welding. 1) Any discontinuity shall be cause for rejection. 10. If defective welds are discovered, the remaining uninspected welds shall receive such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be required by the Owner. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. 11. The welding inspector will have the authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion the weldment would not pass a more detailed investigation. 12. Reports by the Testing Agency's inspector will contain, as a minimum, an adequate description of each weld tested, the identifying mark of the welder responsible for the weld, critique of any defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and a statement regarding the acceptability of the weld tested, as judged by current AWS standards. Reports shall be distributed as early as possible, but not later than one work week after the tests have been performed. The Owner shall be notified by phone if, in the judgment of the inspector, test results require immediate comment. F. Correct defective bolted connections and welds. 1. The cost of re-inspection of previously defective bolted and/or welded connections shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 0 0 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 12 00-20 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05 14 00 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and the General Requirements of the Subcontract apply to this section. 2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply to work under this section. B. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum framing members, support members, bracing members and connections. 2. Base plates, leveling plates, leveling nuts and bolts. 3. Grouting under base plates. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Section 05 50 00— Metal Fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. General: 1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall apply. 2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of commencement of the Work. 3. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for the list of applicable regulatory requirements. B. Aluminum Association: Aluminum Design Manual. C. ASTM International (ASTM): ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-1 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING 1. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. B308 / B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 3. B429, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. D. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.2, Structural Welding Code, Aluminum. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01, General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. For aluminum fabrications as follows: a. Complete fabrication and erection plan and procedures giving full information on all aspects of the erection that will affect alignment, plumb and dimensional accuracy of the structure. b. Connections, including size and spacing of bolts and welds. C. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, camber, and attachments. d. Indicate welded connections with AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. include details of welding materials, equipment, sequence, and technique to be used. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit certification that manufactured products (including bolts, nuts, and washers) meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Deliver manufactured products to the Site in unopened containers. Certification numbers must appear on product containers for bolts, nuts and washers and the numbers shall correspond to the identification numbers on the Manufacturer's Certificate. The Manufacturer's symbol and grade markings must appear on bolts, nuts, and washers. D. Mill Test Reports: Submit mill test reports indicating structural strength, destructive and nondestructive test analysis and chemical analyses from the aluminum used in the Work. E. Welders' Certificates: Documentation certifying welders employed by the Subcontractor meet AWS qualifications. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-2 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING F. Submit the following as specified elsewhere in this section: 1. Written welding procedures in accordance with AWS D1.2 for each proposed joint. 2. Procedure qualification records in accordance with AWS D.1.2 for procedures qualified by testing. 3. Inspection reports of the Subcontractor's independent testing laboratory. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate aluminum members in accordance with Aluminum Design Manual "Specification for Aluminum Structures - Building Load and Resistance Factor Design." B. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.2 for each process, position, and joint configuration. C. Maintain one copy of each referenced document on Site. D. Delegated Design Responsibilities: Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under the direct supervision of a Structural Engineer experienced in design of aluminum and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify dimensions on Shop Drawings in the field. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rolled and Extruded Members: Alloy and temper 6016-T6 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Aluminum Tubing: Alloy and temper 6016-T6. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. Bolts and Nuts in Structural Connections: ASTM A-325 bolts unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563; heavy hex type. Finish: Plain, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. 3. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, circular. Finish: Plain, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-3 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING D. Welding Materials: 1. Filler Metals: AWS D1.2. 2. Electrodes and Equipment Settings: As recommended by the filler metal manufacturer for the position, thickness, and conditions of use. 3. Furnish written verification to the Engineer of Record that filler metal is appropriate to the materials and welding process. E. Sliding Bearing Plates: Teflon coated. F. Grout: As specified in Section 03 60 00, Grouting. 2.02 CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, weld, and field connections, except moment connections that shall be bolted. Weld in accordance with approved welding procedures. B. The Subcontractor is responsible for the design of the connections not detailed on the Drawings. C. Design connection components to resist the loads and moments indicated on the Drawings; if the reaction or load is not indicated on the Drawings, design connections as follows: 1. The minimum connection angle length will be half the depth of the beam depth. 2. Horizontal and vertical bracing connections shall have a minimum of two bolts. D. Connect gusset plates connecting horizontal and vertical bracing to beams and/or columns to both adjacent members; where this is not practical, make provisions for the moment induced by the eccentricity of the load to the work point of the connection. 1. Locate gusset plates for horizontal bracing within the top two rows of bolts of beam connection angles, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. The minimum thickness of gusset plates in single shear shall be 5/16-inch for bolts in single shear and 3/8-inch for bolts in double shear. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum members in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. Where practical, fabricate and assemble in the shop. B. Obtain field measurements necessary for fabrication. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-4 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING C. Dimensional Tolerances: 1. Overall length of members with both ends milled shall vary by not more than 1/32-inch. 2. Overall length of members without milled ends shall vary by not more than 1/1 6-inch for lengths less than 30 feet and not more than 1/8-inch for lengths 30 feet and over. D. Where structural joints are welded, the detail of the joints, welding technique, weld quality and appearance, and methods for correcting defective welds shall conform to the AWS D1.2. 1. Welding Process: Inert shielded gas or resistance welding process. E. Where milling is indicated on the Drawings, machine the contact surfaces true to obtain full and complete contact. F. Structural members are selected from generally available rolled sections. 2.04 FINISHES A. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces as follows: 1. Where aluminum members are in contact with steel, prime both aluminum and steel members with one coat of paint meeting Federal Specification TT-P 645. Paint t aluminum with an additional coat of varnish containing 2 pounds of aluminum pigment per gallon. 2. Where aluminum members are in contact with porous materials, masonry, or concrete, apply to the contact surfaces of the aluminum members a heavy coat of alkali resistant bituminous paint. 3. Where aluminum members are embedded in concrete containing admixtures which are corrosive to aluminum, or in concrete subjected to highly corrosive environments, prime the aluminum with one coat of paint meeting Federal Specification TT-P-645. Otherwise, aluminum members embedded in concrete need not be painted. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports and internal braces necessary to support structure during erection. Temporary supports and braces shall be adequate for anticipated wind, ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-5 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING seismic, equipment and erection loads. Remove temporary shoring after the erection is complete. B. Before erection, paint contact surfaces between dissimilar materials. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready for erection. B. Beginning of installation means Subcontractor accepts that existing conditions meet the requirements for installation. 3.03 ERECTION A. Where members can not be properly assembled due to misfabrication or deformation due to handling or transportation, report the condition to the Engineer of Record with a proposed method of correction for approval. Erect structure to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the Shop Drawings. B. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of the Engineer of Record. C. Grout base plates with non-shrink grout. Clean concrete bearing surfaces from bond- reducing materials, and roughen if necessary, to improve bond to surfaces. Grout base plates in accordance with Section 03 60 00, Grouting. Paint the bottom surface of base plate. Set base plate on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the base plate has been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Grout solidly between the bearing surfaces to ensure that no voids remain. D. Where field welding to existing structural members is required, confirm the weldability of the existing aluminum by cutting or drilling samples and having them tested by the Subcontractor's Independent Testing Laboratory. The testing laboratory shall recommend the location for taking samples, provide a report on weldability, recommend the type of electrode, and weld and inspect the final welds. 1. Be responsible for preparing the existing structure for welding and touch-up of the surfaces. 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 35 00, Special Procedures. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for in-house visual inspection and implementing a quality control program. B. Notify the Engineer of Record of the fabrication and erection schedules and permit the Engineer's representative to observe shop assembly, make visual inspections, nondestructive tests of welds, observe erection and perform field testing. Correct defective work, rejected by the Engineer of Record at no additional cost to the City. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-6 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING C. A certified welding inspector employed by the Engineer's Independent Testing Laboratory will verify that welds are made in accordance with approved welding procedures and visually inspect shop and field welding operations as directed by the Engineer of Record. D. Nondestructive testing of welding to the criteria in AWS Chapter 5 by the Engineer's Independent Testing Agency 1. Perform visual, dye penetrant ultrasonic radiographic testing of welds in the fabricator's shop. 2. Column flanges in moment frames are to be inspected 6 inches above and below the point where girder flanges and continuity plates are attached. Any recordable discontinuity causing complete loss of back reflection, and which can not be encompassed within the larger of a 3-inch diameter circle or one half the plate thickness will be cause for rejection. E. Full penetration groove welds shall be ultrasonic radiographic tested by a qualified technician who will operate the equipment, record any defects found and their disposition. The technician will be under the supervision of a Level II or Level III ASNT technician. Repair and re-test defective welds at no additional cost to the City. F. Initially, 100 percent of the welds which require ultrasonic radiographic testing shall be tested to establish the qualifications of each individual welder. If the reject rate of a welder's work is demonstrated to be less than 5 percent of the tested welds, then the frequency of testing may be reduced to 25 percent. If the reject rate of a welder's work increases to 5 percent or more, 100 percent shall be re-established until the rate is reduced to less than 5 percent. The percentage of rejection shall be calculated and recorded for each welder. The body of data used to calculate the reject rate shall contain at least 40 tests. The reject rate is defined as the number of rejected welds divided by the number of welds completed multiplied by 100. For evaluating the reject rate of continuous welds over 3 feet long, each 12-inch increment one inch or less thick, shall be considered one weld and each 6 inch increment over 1 inch thick, shall be considered one weld. G. When base metal thicker than 1-1/2 inches is subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, the welds shall be 100 percent ultrasonically radiographically tested for discontinuities after completion of the joint. END OF SECTION 0 0 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 14 00-7 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM FRAMING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment to accomplish all miscellaneous metal work; including, but not limited to lintels, support angles and frames, their anchorage and OTHER ITEMS OF FERROUS METALS INDICATED OR REQUIRED FOR COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 12 00 — Structural Steel Framing 2. Section 05 14 00 —Aluminum Framing 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Aluminum Association: 1. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 2603 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for PIGMENTED ORGANIC COATINGS ON ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS AND PANELS. 3. AAMA 2604 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 4. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. C. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A14.3 -American National Standard (ASC)for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 50 00-1 METAL FABRICATIONS D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - STEEL. 3. AWS D1.2/D1.2M — Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 4. AWS D1.6/D1.6M - STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - STAINLESS STEEL. E. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M- Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM Al 93/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 6. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 7. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 8. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 9. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 10. ASTM A312/A312M - Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. 11. ASTM A325/A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 50 00-2 METAL FABRICATIONS 12. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 13. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 14. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 15. ASTM A554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. 16. ASTM A563/A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 17. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. 18. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 19. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 20. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 21. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 22. ASTM B26/B26M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 23. ASTM B85/B85M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings. 24. ASTM B177/B177M - Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating. 25. ASTM B209/B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 26. ASTM B210/13210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. 27. ASTM B211/13211 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire. 28. ASTM B221/B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 50 00-3 METAL FABRICATIONS 29. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 30. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 31. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength. F. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.20 - American National Standard for Strap and Tee Hinges and Hasps. G. California Department of Health Services: 1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. H. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 4. SSPC SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.04 INSERTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be built into other work for installation of miscellaneous metal items; coordinate delivery to job site to avoid delay. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 50 00-4 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING: A. Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B. D. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366. E. Anchors: ASTM F 1554; Grade 55, hooked, weldable unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Furnish with nut and washer. F. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, Grade G90 zinc coating. (Minimum 2 oz. per square foot of surface area.) G. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron (ASTM A 47) or cast steel (ASTM A 27) inserts, with steel bolts, washers and shims; hot dip galvanized. H. Shop Paint: FS TT-P-86, Type II, or, SSPC-Paint 14. Apply to cleaned and degreased steel surfaces at rate to provide a 2.0-mil dry film thickness, minimum 2 coats. I. Galvanizing: ASTM A 386 for a assembled products; A 153 for iron and steel hardware. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION, GENERAL 3.02 FIT AND SHOP-ASSEMBLE ITEMS IN LARGEST PRACTICAL SECTIONS FOR DELIVERY TO SITE. A. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. B. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Shop paint all items not specified to be galvanized after fabrication. C. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. D. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where possible. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 50 00-5 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.03 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish Custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for framing and supporting and anchoring woodwork. Galvanize, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 LOOSE BEARING PLATES A. Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as shown. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. Galvanize after fabrication. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide as required to complete work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate lengths of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other work; spaced not more than 24" o.c. 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown; continuous welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 3.07 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other work. B. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with bedding mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to three parts sand and only enough water for packing and hydration, or use commercial non-shrink grout material. C. Touch up shop paint after installation. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces. 0 0 END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 05 50 00-6 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Principal items of work include: 1. Wood blocking, nailers, grounds, furring, ties, centering, etc., necessary or required for attachment or support of work under this Section and other Sections. 2. Fasteners, including nails, screws, bolts, anchors and other fastenings, required to secure work under this Section. 3. Temporary enclosures and protective boarding. 4. Wood preservative treatment for all wood members in contact with roofing, masonry, concrete, and exposed to the elements. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. AWPA-CA— Preservative Standards, Lumber and Plywood 2. AWPA-C20— Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process 3. AWPC-C27 — Plywood Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process 4. AWPA-M4 — Standards for Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products 5. APA— Guide to Plywood Grades 6. FM 1-49 — Perimeter Flashing 1.03 SUBMITTALS 0 m 0 A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Certifications of Preservative and Fire Retardant Treatment. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 06 10 00-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Warranty of treatment manufacturer. 3. Certification of type and grade of lumber to be used. 4. Certification of type, rating and conformance to APA Standards. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Take all measures necessary to protect products against damage during delivery and storage. B. Store lumber in enclosed places in such a manner to provide ventilation and protection from the weather. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Blocking, nailers, grounds and the like: Eastern Spruce or Douglas Fir- No. 3 Dimension Lumber or Construction Grade, with a moisture content not to exceed 19%. B. Plates, blocking, and nailers in contact with concrete or masonry: Pressure treated southern yellow pine or Douglas Fir. C. Plywood: Identified with APA Grade trademarks of the American Plywood Association, in thickness as shown on the Drawings. 1. Exterior: AC-EXT-APA where exposed to view or a finish is required, CD-EXT-APA where concealed. 2. Interior: AC-INT-APA where exposed to view or a finish is required, CD-INT-APA where concealed. D. Structural Framing Lumber: Douglas Fir No.1 grade with fb = 1,500 pounds per square inch and E = 1,700,000 pounds per square inch, 19 percent moisture content. E. Fasteners: Provide clamps, connectors, straps, nails, bolts, screws, anchors, ties and other accessories and fasteners shown or required to properly secure all rough carpentry. Fasteners and accessories shall be stainless steel, galvanized, or other noncorrosive metal recommended for use. Fasteners used with pressure treated wood shall be compatible with the wood preservative treatment to prevent corrosion of fasteners. F. Wood Preservative Treatment: Waterborne pressure treatment in conformance with the American Wood Preservers' Association standard P5. Retention shall be in accordance with AWPA Standards and be a minimum of 0.40 pounds per cubic foot for contact with ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 06 10 00-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY or below ground, concrete, or masonry and 0.25 pounds per cubic foot for above ground. Stamp each piece of treated wood with a trademark identifying the classification of the treatment or a certificate from the processor for each shipment. G. Fire Retardant Treatment: Fire-retardant lumber and plywood must have an Underwriters Laboratories stamp signifying a FR-S rating and certifying a 25 or less flame spread and smoke developed value, when tested in accordance to UL 723, ASTM E 84, and NFPA 255 "Tunnel Test", and when the test is extended for 20 additional minutes. Treatment formulation shall contain no halogens, sulfates, chlorides or ammonium phosphate. Smoke toxicity shall be no more than that of untreated wood. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with all trades as to nailers, blocking, grounds and the like required for the attachment of their work and other items requiring same. Carry out all work as required to cooperate work of other trades. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in conformance manufacturer's recommendations and specifications, industry, national and local standards and codes. B. Layout, cut, fit and erect rough blocking, nailers, furring and other rough carpentry. Do cutting work in connection with carpentry and finish for other trades. Brace plumb and level all members in true alignment and rigidly secure in place with sufficient nails, spikes, screws and bolts. Defects which render any piece or part unable to serve its intended purpose shall be discarded or, cut out and replaced. C. Provide all bracing, supports and shoring required to support construction. D. Protect all masonry including edges of concrete platforms and similar items. Remove protective covering when directed. Take special precautions at masonry openings and corners of the building. E. Set all rough hardware, such as plates, spikes, bolts, nails, lag screws, lagging bolts, anchors, etc., as required to hold woodwork together or to anchor or secure it to other materials and construction. F. Provide wood grounds, nailing strips and similar items wherever necessary or required throughout the project for the support, proper erection or installation of the work and support of mirrors, cabinets, shelf cleats, base and similar items. Thoroughly secure in place by approved means. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 06 10 00-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY G. Secure wood grounds, nailing strips and similar items to metal plugs set in masonry, toggle or expansion bolts. Give the mason all necessary information to enable them to lay out correctly the location for metal wall plugs. Wood plugs will not be accepted. H. Construct joints to support dead loads, live loads, snow loads, wind loads, or combinations in conformance with "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings", recommended by National Forest Products Association. I. Nailers and Blocking: Provide and secure wood nailers, blocking, for the reception of roof curbs, roofing, etc. in accordance with FM 1-49, or as required by the Building Code, whichever is most stringent. Coordinate attachment with roofing system, where roofing system design includes design of nailers provide attachment in accordance with engineered roofing design. 1. Provide nailers of sizes, shapes and profiles indicated on the Drawings. Nailers shall not be less than 2 x6. Build up nailers as required to achieve thickness of insulation or as required to provide proper attachment of roofing and curbs. Provide anchors as required for secure attachment of roofing systems, copings, gravel stops or other edge terminations. 3.03 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. Provide and install all temporary protection in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, OSHA regulations, and as follows: 1. Temporary protection shall include wood doors, railings, protection of floor or roof openings, temporary partitions, and the like; adequately maintained in good repair during the life of the Contract. 2. Furnish and set temporary partitions with wood doors at all exterior doorways, exterior openings or in locations exposed to weather. Substantially build and hang, with proper hinges, locks and other necessary hardware, and remove and reset whenever required to accommodate the Work and keep in good repair. 3. Provide substantial temporary wood covering or guards for openings left in floor or roof slabs for ducts, shafts, etc., using rough planking at least 2 inch thick, cleated together and otherwise made sufficiently strong and put in place wherever required immediately after the forms have been removed. 3.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. If the installation of metal frames and glass does not promptly follow the completion of the exterior enclosures, and if the absence of enclosures would cause damage, close in all such openings temporarily by the use of heavy polyethylene plastic sheeting, or canvas stretched over and nailed to frames of 1 inch x 2 inch or heavier strips. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 06 10 00-4 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.05 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY WORK A. Remove all temporary protection when so directed, or prior to acceptance of this project. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 06 10 00-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 11 00 DAMPPROOFING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of work as shown on Drawings and specified herein. B. Principal items of work include: 1. Dampproofing on exterior side of interior wythe of masonry cavity walls above grade. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00 — Unit Masonry 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM D 449 — Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturers product literature, specification data sheets and installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers identified with name, brand, type, grade, class and all other qualifying information. B. Store materials in dry location to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Remove damaged materials from the job site. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0711 00-1 DAMPPROOFING PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject with compliance with the Specifications provide products from one of the following: 1. Karnak Corp. 2. W.R. Meadows 3. Koch Materials Co. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer. B. Dampproofing: Non-asbestos, fibrated mastic conforming to ASTM D-1227, Type II, Class 1, compatible with cavity wall insulation. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES A. Examine all surfaces and installation of work done by other trades. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Prime surfaces with manufacturers recommended primer. Apply dampproofing at the rate of 6 gallons per 100 square feet. B. Apply dampproofing to substrates to provide a complete moisture resistant coating. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of materials. Repair work damaged during dampproofing operations. B. Take precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery, storage and installation of flammable materials. Comply with local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials. 3.04 CLEANING o N_ A. Clean adjacent materials and finishes which have been soiled. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0711 00-2 DAMPPROOFING END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0711 00-3 DAMPPROOFING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work as shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00 — Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00 — Unit Masonry C. Section 09 29 00 — Gypsum Drywall System 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM C726 — Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Fiber) 2. ASTM C 578 — Specification for Preformed, Block Type Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 3. ASTM C 665 — Specification for Mineral fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, installation instructions, technical data, and general recommendations. 2. Samples of each type of insulation specified. 3. Shop drawing for tapered insulation. 0 N_ ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0721 00-1 BUILDING INSULATION 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in unopened, undamaged original packaging with bearing the manufacturer's name. B. Store materials in clean, dry, protected areas. Do not leave materials exposed to the weather or sunlight, except to the extent necessary to perform the work. C. Protect against ignition. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following: 1. Manufacturers of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation a. Amoco Foam Products Company b. DuPont C. UC Industries 2. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Manville Corporation C. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation 3. Manufacturers of Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation a. RMax. b. Atlas Energy Products. C. Johns Manville. 4. Manufacturers of Sprayed Polyurethane Foam a. Demilec LLC b. BASF ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0721 00-2 BUILDING INSULATION C. NCFI Polyurethanes d. Icynene 5. Manufacturers of Sprayed Polyurethane Foam (Gap Sealant) a. The DuPont b. Or approved equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Thermal Batt Insulation: Aluminum foil faced, 3-1/2 inch thick R-11 for walls, 6 inch thick R-19 for ceilings or as indicated on the Drawings. Provide batts conforming to ASTM C665 Type-III. Where insulation is exposed to interior spaces provide material with a flame spread of 25 and smoke development of less than 100 and approved for use without a covering. B. Under Slab and Foundation Wall Insulation: Expanded polystyrene extruded into 2 inch thick boards for under slabs and over foundation waterproofing, or as indicated on Drawings. Provide insulation conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 578, Type IV; with a 5 year aged R-value of 5. C. Unit Masonry Insulation: Fill ungrouted cells of masonry with foamed in place two component thermal insulation. Insulation shall be a Class A material with an R value of 4.9 per inch. Provide masonry insulation as manufactured by CORE-FILL 500 as manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products, Hickory, NC, or acceptable equal. D. Cavity Wall Insulation: Extruded polystyrene insulation boards meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C578, Type IV, and with a "K" factor of 0.20 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. Provide insulation 1-1/2 inches thick unless otherwise shown. E. Roof Insulation: Provide polyisocyanurate insulation or as shown on Drawings and achieve energy code compliance. Provide a minimum of two staggered layers, unless otherwise indicated. Provide tapered insulation where roof structure does not slope. Roof insulation shall be approved by roofing manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of the roofing warranty. Roof insulation shall meet the requirements of roof manufacturer. Insulation shall have a minimum aged R-value of 5 per inch. The minimum R-Value of the insulation system shall be R-30 unless otherwise noted. Secure insulation as required by the roofing manufacturer to resist wind. Install '/2' glass faced gypsum roof cover board above insulation in accordance with roof manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0721 00-3 BUILDING INSULATION F. Mineral Wool Batt Insulation: Semi-rigid boards for use as fire stop. Materials shall conform to requirements of UL penetration systems. Mineral wool material shall meet the requirements of ASTM E-136. G. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam: Apply by factory trained or certified installers. Foam blowing agent shall have zero ozone depleting potential, no VOC's and be formaldehyde free. Foam shall be a closed cell with a 2 lb. density and provide a minimum R value of 5 per inch. Foam shall be Class I product in accordance with ASTM E84. Exposed surfaces shall be sprayed with an approved 15 minute intumescent barrier or approved thermal barrier. H. Spray-Applied Slag/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Slag/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type I (materials applied with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), and Type II (materials containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation; intended only for enclosed or covered applications). Insulation shall have postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. Insulation shall have maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5 and 0, respectively, per ASTM E 84 and rated as non-combustible as defined by NFPA 220 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. Provide K-13 Cellulose Spray-Applied Insulation manufactured by International Cellulose Corporation, Houston, TX, or acceptable equal. I. Adhesive and Fasteners: Type compatible with insulation, masonry, concrete, or other substrate and as recommended or produced by the insulation manufacturer. J. Sealer and Tape: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and having perm rating and fire resistance characteristics similar to that of the insulation. K. Gap Sealant: General Purpose Type: single-component polyurethane sealant. Gun- applied and Straw-applied products, Thermal Value R3.5 per inch. Provide GREATSTUFF PROTm Gaps & Cracks Insulating Foam Sealant as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company or approved equal. Provide Substrate Cleaner as recommended by foam sealer manufacturer. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Insulation shall be provided in walls, slabs and roofs and where shown on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions to provide maximum sound and thermal benefits for material specified. Install to fill or cover voids. Cut neatly to snugly fit angles, corners and irregular areas and carefully wrapped around ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0721 00-4 BUILDING INSULATION pipes, conduits, outlets, switches, beams, etc., to maintain continuity of insulation. Avoid gaps or bridges. B. Foundation and Under-Slab Insulation 1. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Stagger vertical joints, except ends over line of expansion joints. 2. On horizontal surfaces, set units level, unless otherwise noted. C. Cavity Wall Insulation 1. On vertical surfaces of masonry adhere to inner wythe of block. 2. Joints between insulation board units shall coincide with masonry joint reinforcing. D. Block Insulation: Install foamed in place two component thermal insulation in all ungrouted cells of masonry in exterior walls and interior walls shown on Drawings. E. Thermal Batt Insulation: Friction fit, with vapor barrier on the warm side, during Winter, of wall between conditioned and unconditioned rooms or spaces. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. F. Roofing Insulation: Install roofing insulation in accordance with insulation and roofing manufacturer printed instructions and recommendations. G. Mineral Wool Batt Insulation: Install insulation in accordance with UL design requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. H. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Separate final installation with code approved thermal barrier. I. Spray-Applied Slag/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. J. Gap Sealant: Seal all gaps at perimeter of walls and penetrations and openings. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Remove excess gap sealant to finish flush with the adjacent materials where visible or required to allow installation of finish materials. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adequately protect Work from damage resulting from subsequent construction operations. Replace damaged or soiled Work. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0721 00-5 BUILDING INSULATION END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0721 00-6 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07 52 00 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 10 00 — Rough Carpentry B. Section 07 21 00 — Building Insulation C. Section 07 60 00 — Flashing and Sheet Metal D. Section 07 70 00 — Roof Specialties and Accessories 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM D41 —Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing 2. ASTM D312 —Asphalt Used in Roofing 3. ASTM D2178—Asphalt Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 4. FS HH-1-1972/GEN — Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Product data for glass fiber ply sheet, modified bitumen sheet membrane, insulation and base flashing materials. 0 0 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Shop Drawings including roof plan and flashing details and other details to show extend of work.. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 52 00-1 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 4. Certification that materials meet or exceed specified requirements. 5. Certification that installer is approved by the manufacturer. 6. Copy of manufacturer's 20 year system warranty. 7. Samples of each product. 8. Color samples of cap sheet. 9. Field report at the end of all roofing and related work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company well experienced in modified bitumen roofing membrane application and approved by product manufacturer. B. Products and installation shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification. 2. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): Roof assembly classification, FMRC, Approval Standard 4470, Class I, and 190 approvals. 3. Design roof to meet wind design criteria in the current Building Code of the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located 4. Field Report: After all work has been completed, including setting of roof top equipment, and other work required on the roof, provide a report from a Professional Engineering firm or manufacturer's representative verifying watertight and quality installation conforming to all warranty conditions. Report shall include sub surface moisture evaluations and recommendations for necessary repairs of defects and irregularities. C. Manufacturer's Representative: Provide a minimum of three site visits including one at start of work, one during progress and one at completion. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surfaces. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during the same day. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 52 00-2 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING D. At lower air temperatures, to assure sound adhesion, care must be exercised to provide asphalt, at the point of application, at the asphalt's equiviscous temperature (EVT) plus 20 degrees Fahrenheit or at 400 degrees Fahrenheit, whichever is higher. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Provide a twenty year total system guarantee covering the repair of leaks which result from either material or workmanship, including insulation, and attributable to ordinary wear and tear. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in factory sealed cartons and crating bearing the manufacturer's labels. B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Maintain membranes above 50 degrees Fahrenheit prior to their installation. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications provide products manufactured by one of the following: 1. The Garland Company 2. Tremco Roofing 3. Johns Manville 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Four ply, hot asphalt applied modified bitumen membrane system with mineral granule surface cap sheet as the fourth ply. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Sheets: Glass Fiber 6 Ply Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type VI, UL Type G1 BUR. B. Membrane: Premium, fire-retarding, modified bitumen membrane and surfaced with light colored mineral granules. ASTM D6162 Type III cap sheet shall have the following properties: 1. Minimum Thickness: 140 mils ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 52 00-3 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 2. Tensile Strength — (ASTM D-5147): 400 lbs. 3. Tear Strength — (ASTM D-5147): 400 lbs. 2.04 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type IV B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, Asphalt/Concrete Primer C. Asbestos-Free Cement: ASTM D 4586 Type II 2.05 INSULATION A. Provide insulation approved by the manufacturer and in accordance with the requirements of Section 07 21 00— Building Insulation. B. Provide manufacturer's recommended high density fiberboard, 1/2 inches thick, above insulation where required by manufacturer to meet design requirements. 2.06 FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Manufacturer's recommended modified bitumen flashing. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Nails: Galvanized or non-ferrous type and size as required to suit application. B. Pressure Relieving Vents: Plastic or Metal one-way valves. Provide vents in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Mechanical Fasteners for Insulation: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners and as required to meet FM 1-90 requirements. D. Traffic Surfacing: Manufacturer's standard cap sheet of a color contrasting. Provide traffic surfacing from point of access to roof installed equipment, and each side of roof installed equipment PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify deck surface is dry, sound, clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to gutter. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of the surface of the substrates. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 52 00-4 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where work must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. 3.03 INSULATION APPLICATION A. For structural concrete decks, prime deck surface with Asphalt/Concrete Primer then embed in a 25 pound per square (plus or minus 20%) mopping of ASTM Type III or IV asphalt, two layers of insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Lay second layer of insulation with joints staggered from first layer. B. Lay insulation boards with tightly butted, staggered joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around protrusions through roof. C. Install no more insulation than can be properly covered by the end of the each day with roofing membrane. 3.04 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Install glass fiber ply sheets and modified bitumen sheets and flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prime all masonry and metal surfaces with GAF Asphalt/ Concrete Primer and allow to dry thoroughly. C. Asphalt should be heated so that felts are installed with the asphalt within its equiviscous temperature range. Mop applied sheets must be installed with ASTM D 312, Type III or IV asphalt at a minimum temperature of 400 degrees Fahrenheit, at the point of application, with a target temperature of 425 degrees Fahrenheit, or 20 degrees Fahrenheit above the EVT, whichever is higher. The maximum allowable asphalt temperature, in the kettle, is 500 degrees Fahrenheit. Heat the asphalt in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. D. Install glass fiber ply sheets using Type IV asphalt at a rate of 25 pounds per square (plus or minus 20%). E. Install membrane by solidly mopping in 25 pounds per square (plus or minus 20%) of asphalt to base. F. Apply glass fiber ply sheets and membrane smoothly without wrinkles, fishmouths or tears. Provide membrane side laps of 4 inches and 6 inch end laps. Side and end laps should have 1/4 inch minimum flow out of bitumen. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 52 00-5 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING G. Extend glass fiber ply sheets and membranes 2 inches past the top of the cants onto vertical surfaces. H. When inclement weather is expected, install a water cut-off at the end of the day's operation. Mop three plies of base sheets and one ply of membrane. Install cut-off at all exposed edges of roofing and at roof penetrations. Remove water cut-off upon resumption of work. 3.05 TRAFFIC SURFACING A. Using maximum 10' lengths of the cap sheet membrane solidly mop one ply of smooth membrane and one surfaced membrane to the surface of the applied roof. Allow 6"-12" openings between adjacent sheets for drainage. 3.06 FLASHING A. Install flashing according to Manufacturer's specifications. B. Install one pressure relief vent per 1,000 square feet, or part thereof, of roof surface. C. Seal flashing and flanges on all items setting on or protruding through the membrane. Seal flanges between two plies of membrane. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and testing will be performed by a Professional Engineering firm or manufacturer's representative approved by the Engineer. B. Correct defects and irregularities reported. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to those instructions. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 52 00-6 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00 — Unit Masonry B. C. Section 07 70 00 — Roof Specialties and Accessories D. Section 07 90 00 —Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCES SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. OF-506C— Flux, Soldering, Paste, and Liquid 2. ASTM A176— Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip 3. ASTM B32 —Specifications for Solder Metal 4. ASTM D1187—Test Method for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for use as Protective Coatings for Metal 5. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 6. FM Global Data Sheet 1-49, Perimeter Flashing 1.04 SUBMITTALS 0 0 A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature and installation instructions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 60 00-1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2. Complete layout and installation Drawings and schedules with clearly indicated dimensions. 3. Provide drawings of proposed flashing. 4. Color samples. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a clean dry protected area in such manner to preclude damage by denting, warping, or other distortion. PART 2— MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing 1. Exposed to View: Provide prefinished 0.050 inches aluminum. Finish shall be dark bronze anodized in accordance with AA-C22A44, Class 1. Provide a full-strength Kynar 500 baked-on paint finish with a 20 year warranty. 2. Concealed from View: Provide a minimum of 22 ga. galvanized. steel sheet, stainless steel sheet, or mill-finished aluminum sheet. B. Nails, screws, rivets, bolts and other fasteners: same material as sheet metal being attached. Nails shall be 18 gauge diameter shank, 1/4 inch diameter flat head, annular- thread, diamond point, long enough to penetrate backing by at least 1 inch. Nails shall be spaced 3 inches on center unless other spacing is indicated. Exposed fasteners shall match finish of metal being fastened. C. Reglets shall be formed of 300 series stainless steel, minimum of 0.020 inch. Reglets shall be Model CO for insertion in concrete, MA-4 for insertion in masonry as manufactured by FRY Reglet Corporation. Corners shall be factory made, mitered and sealed. Furnish reglets to proper trade in sufficient time to be incorporated into the masonry or concrete work. D. Bituminous plastic cement shall conform to ASTM D4586. E. Sealants shall be silicone type or as recommended for specific application. F. Sealer tape shall be polyisobutylene tape specifically manufactured for setting flanges on bituminous roofing or as recommended by roofing manufacturer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 60 00-2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate Work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and applicable requirements of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry standards. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, and damage or deterioration of the work. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Roof penetration sheet metal work shall be provided and coordinated with the roofing system. The design and details shall conform to SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Sheet metal items shall be built into roofing in strict accordance with the instructions of the roofing manufacturer. C. Perimeter flashing related to roof systems shall be installed in accordance with FM 1-49 reqquirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 60 00-3 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 07 70 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 10 00 — Rough Carpentry B. Section 07 60 00 — Flashing and Sheet Metal C. Section 07 90 00 —Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. TT-P-641 (1)— Primer Coating, Zinc Dust- Zinc Oxide (for galvanized surfaces) 2. ASTM A 525— Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process 3. ASTM A 526 — Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip Process, Commercial Quality 4. ASTM B 209— Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' (ASMM) 6. The Aluminum Association "Specification for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction." 7. American Welding Society (AWS). 8. FM Global Data Sheet 1-28 Wind Design 0 N_ 9. FM Gobal Data Sheet 1-49 Perimeter Flashing ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 70 00-1 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturers literature and installation instructions. 2. Samples, of each material listed. 3. Provide shop drawings for the full extent of each item to be provided. Provide overall plans and details of each transition. Provide details of each item. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in factory packed unopened cartons and crating bearing the manufacturer's labels. B. Store materials in clean, dry protected area in such manner to preclude damage of any nature. C. Handle all materials with proper care to avoid denting, marring, warping or other distortions during delivery, storage and handling. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide roof specialties and accessories of design and construction compatible and approved for use with roofing manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Provide all fasteners and attachments required to secure item to substrate and support loads required by applicable Building Code. Use only non-corrosive fasteners which are compatible with materials being joined. C. Colors: Colors shall be selected by Owner. 2.02 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Material: 0.040 inch aluminum. B. Design: Manufacture gutters tapered and notched to provide telescoping joint. Design gutters and downspouts to accommodate expected thermal movement. C. Supports and Fasteners: Provide manufacturers' standard straps, brackets and fasteners. Place supports and fasteners at 36 inches on center or as recommended by ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 70 00-2 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES the manufacturer. Finish of supports, brackets and fasteners shall match gutter and downspout. D. Accessories: Provide end caps, flashing, trim, and other items required for a complete installation. E. Finish: Baked on Kynar, with 20 year warranty. 2.03 ROOF CURBS A. Material: 18 gauge, G-90 galvanized steel, 12 inches high with mitered and continuous welded corners and seams, factory installed pressure treated wood nailers, and rigid fiberglass insulation. B. Design: Provide roof curb units manufactured to fit manufactured roof panels. Provide integral water diverter. Design roof curb to support weight of equipment. Coordinate roof curb unit with roof panel manufacturer to ensure proper fit. Roof curb shall be approved for use by manufacturer. C. Accessories: Provide interior liner, flashing, trim and other items required for a complete installation. 2.04 GRAVEL STOPS A. Fascia: 0.050 inches extruded aluminum of 6063-T5 alloy. B. Cant Dam: Commercial 24 gauge galvanized steel. C. Concealed Splice Plates: 0.032 inches aluminum and finished to match fascia. Allow 1/4" at ball butt joints per twelve feet of length for expansion. D. Accessories 1. Prefabricated Corners: Provide manufacturer's standard mitered and welded units. 2. Scuppers: Manufacturer's standard. E. Finish: Color Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A44, Class 1 or Clear Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A41 or "Baked" on Kynar, with 20 year warranty. 2.05 COPINGS A. Material: 0.050 inches aluminum with smooth surfaces. B. Splice Plate: Aluminum and finished to match coping. Provide six inch wide units at twelve foot centers with extruded butyl seal strips. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 70 00-3 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES C. Anchor Plate: Galvanized steel. Anchor to substrate with anchors as recommended by manufacturer. D. Finish: Color Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A44, Class 1. *** or Clear Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A41 or "Baked" on Kynar, with 20 year warranty. E. Guarantees: Twenty year performance guarantees relative to blow-off, leaktightness and finish. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install roof accessories and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide a complete watertight and weatherproof installation. Install with provision for expansion and contraction. 3.02 DAMAGED MATERIAL A. Repair or replace materials damaged during installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Check levels and adjust as necessary after roofing and flashing is complete. B. Protect materials from damage by other trades. Remove protective coatings at completion of project. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 70 00-4 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 90 00 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ASTM C-920 — Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM D-1056— Flexible Cellular Materials— Sponge or Expanded Rubber 3. SWRI —Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturers literature and installation instructions. Label each product submitted with Type as indicated in paragraph 2.01 A. 2. Color samples of each type of sealant. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall be a company specializing in the installation of sealants with a minimum of five years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in unopened labeled packages. B. Store materials in location protected from freezing or damages. o N_ C. Reject and remove from the site materials within broken or damaged packaging. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 90 00-1 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealants 1. Type 1: Multi-component, non-sag, low-modulus polyurethane rubber sealant meeting ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, A, and O. Capable of withstanding 25% in extension or compression such as Sikaflex-2C NS/SL, Sika Corporation, or Sonolastic NP-2, Sonneborn, or DynaTrol II by Pecora Corporation. 2. Type 2: Single component polyurethane sealant meeting ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, and O. Capable of withstanding 25% in extension or compression such as Sikaflex 1A by Sika Corporation, DynaTrol 1-XL by Pecora Corporation, or Sonolastic NP-1 by Master Builders Solutions. 3. Type 3: Single component, low-modulus moisture curing silicone meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, G, and A. Capable of withstanding 50% extension and compression. Pecora 890 by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Omni Seal by Master Builders Solutions. 4. Type 4: Single component, mildew resistant, moisture-curing silicone meeting ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, and A. Pecora 898 by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Omni Plus by Master Builders Solutions. 5. Type 5: Single component, acrylic latex meeting ASTM C-834. AC-20+ Silicone by Pecora Corporation, Sonneborn Sonolac by Master Builders Solutions. 6. Type 6: High grade butyl sealant meeting Federal Specification TT-S-00-1657. BC- 158 by Pecora Corporation or equal. 7. Type 7: Multi-component chemical resistant polysulfide sealant conforming to ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 such as Deck-O-Seal by W.R. Meadows, Tammsflex by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or Synthacalk GC2+ by Pecora Corporation. 8. Type 8: Nonsag, Multi Component, traffic grade polyurethane sealant meeting ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use T, M, A, and O. DynaTread by Pecora Corporation, MasterSeal CR 195 by Master Builders Solutions. B. Primer: Non-staining primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for the substrates on this project. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 90 00-2 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING C. Backer Rod: Closed cell foam, nonreactive with caulking materials, non-oily, and approved by the sealant manufacturer. Minimum density shall be 2.00 pounds per cubic foot. Use no asphalt or bitumen-impregnated fiber with sealants. D. Joint Cleaner: Recommended by sealant or caulking compound manufacturer. E. Bond breaker: Either polyethylene film or plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. F. Color: Where manufacturer's standard colors do not closely match materials being sealed, provide a custom color. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordinate work with details shown on approved shop drawings prepared by other trades. B. Verify conditions in the field. C. Schedule work to follow closely the installation of other trades. D. Apply sealants and related items in temperatures and dry conditions recommended by the manufacturers. E. Do not paint sealant, unless recommended by sealant and paint manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect finished surfaces adjoining by using masking tape or other suitable materials. B. Clean and prime joints before starting any caulking or sealing work. C. Thoroughly clean joints and spaces of mortar and other foreign materials. Cleaning agent shall be Xylol or similar non-contaminating solvent to remove any film from metal surfaces. Masonry or concrete surfaces shall be brushed or air jet cleaned. D. Joint Requirements 1. All joints and spaces to be sealed in exterior work shall be less than '/z-inch deep and not less than 1/4 inch wide. If joints in masonry are less than that specified herein, the mortar shall be cut out to the required width and depth. All joints and spaces to receive sealant shall be completely prepared and thoroughly dry before installation of sealant. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 90 00-3 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING 2. Unless otherwise specified, joints and spaces which are open to a depth of 1/2 inch or greater shall be solidly filled with back-up material to within 1/4 inch of the surface. Back-up material shall be packed tightly and made continuous throughout the length of the joints. Bond breaker shall be applied as required. If joints are less than '/4-inch deep, the back-up material may be omitted, a bond breaker substituted and the joint completely filled with sealant. The back-up material shall not project beyond the '/4-inch depth of the open space in any joint. The following width-to-depth ratio table shall be adhered to, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Sealant Depth Joint Width Minimum Maximum '/4 inch 1/4 inch 1/4 inch Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to width Over 1/2 inch to 1 inch 1/2 inch Equal to width Over 1 inch to 2 inches 1/2 inch 1/2 of width 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exercise care before, during, and after installation so as not to damage any material by tearing or puncturing. All finished work shall be approved before covering with any other material or construction. B. Apply sealant by an approved type of gun except where the use of a gun is not practicable, suitable hand tools shall be used. Avoid applying the compound to any surface outside of the joints or spaces to be sealed. Mask areas where required to prevent overlapping of sealant. C. All joints shall be waterproof and weathertight. D. Point sealed joints to make a slightly concave joint, the edges of which are flush with the surrounding surfaces. Exposed joints in the interior side of the door and other frames shall be neatly pointed flush or to match adjacent jointing work. E. Adjacent materials which have been soiled shall be cleaned immediately and the work left in neat and clean condition. F. Comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 90 00-4 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Remove misplaced sealant compounds promptly using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer, as the work progresses. B. Allow sealants to cure and remove protective edging, of doors, louvers, saddles windows etc. as directed by the Engineer. 3.05 SCHEDULE Schedule of Sealants Application Sealant Color Vertical and horizontal expansion and construction To closely match adjacent surfaces or joints in concrete structures unless noted Type 1 mortar and as selected by the Owner. otherwise herein or on Drawings. Vertical and horizontal joints bordered on both sides by masonry, precast concrete, natural stone Type e 2 To closely match adjacent surfaces or or other porous building material, unless noted mortar and as selected by the Owner. otherwise herein or on Drawings. Vertical and horizontal joints bordered on both sides by painted metals, anodized aluminum, mill T 3 To closely match adjacent surfaces and finished aluminum, PVC, glass or other non-porous ype as selected by the Owner. building material. Masonry expansion and control joints less than Type 2 To closely match adjacent surfaces and 1/4"wide. as selected by the Owner. Masonry expansion and control joints equal or Type 1 To closely match adjacent surfaces and greater than 1/4 inches wide and not to exceed 2". as selected by the Owner. Interior—wood trim and finish joints. Type 5 Color to be selected by Owner Sanitary areas,joints in ceramic tile,around plumbing fixtures, countertops,and back Type 4 To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner. splashes.' Perimeter sealing of doors,windows, louvers, Type e 2 OR T yp e 3 To closely match adjacent surfaces and piping, ducts, and electrical conduit.2 as selected by the Owner. Below thresholds. Type 6 Manufacturer's standard Submerged in liquids.3,4 Type 1 Manufacturer's standard Submerged in liquids with high concentration of Type 7 Manufacturer's standard chlorine(>2 ppm)or wastewater. Horizontal Joints exposed to vehicular or Type 8 To closely match adjacent surfaces. pedestrian traffic. Other joints indicated on the drawings or e ded by To closely match adjacent surfaces and recomm customarily sealed but not listed. manufacturer as selected by the Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 90 00-5 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING Sealant for Laboratory Countertop shall be as recommended by countertop manufacturer. z Provide UL approved sealants for penetrations thru fire-rated walls s Sealants which will come in contact with potable water shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. a Where sealant will be immersed in liquid chemicals verify compatibility prior to installation of sealant. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 07 90 00-6 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS, AND CAULKING SECTION 08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, material, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00 — Unit Masonry B. Section 08 71 00 — Finish Hardware C. Section 09 90 00 — Painting 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ANSI/DHI A115 — Series Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware 2. ANSI/SDI 100 — Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames 3. ASTM A153 — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 4. ASTM A366/A 366M — Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold- Rolled Commercial Quality 5. ASTM A525 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process 6. ASTM E152 — Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 7. NFPA 80 — Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 1.04 SUBMITTALS m A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0811 13-1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Complete layout and installation drawings and schedules with clearly marked dimensions. Indicate details of construction, profiles, gauges, reinforcing and location of doors and frames. 3. Certify that shop applied primer is compatible with finish coats specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100. B. Locations where fire-rated door and frame assemblies are required, provide assemblies which comply with NFPA 80 and have been tested and labeled in accordance with ASTM E152 by agency acceptable to governing authorities. C. Provide certificate or label for fire-rated doors which exceed sizes tested from a independent testing and inspection agency. Certificate or label shall indicate that door and frame assembly conforms to the requirements of the design. D. Provide stairwell doors which have temperature rise rating of 450 degrees F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products boxed or crated suitable for storage. B. Store products under cover, raised above ground level, and stacked to prevent warping and damage. C. Replace items damaged during delivery, storage, or handling. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Curries Company, Mason City, Iowa 2. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 3. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0811 13-2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheets: Commercial quality hot or cold rolled. Galvanize sheet steel in accordance with ASTM A525, commercial quality, A60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. B. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge. C. Fasteners and Inserts: Galvanized units standard with manufacturer. D. Primer: Rust-inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish coatings specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop-fabricate assemblies to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate exterior and interior doors, frames and louvers from hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Where exposed screws and fasteners are used, provide countersunk, flat Phillips-head fasteners. D. Fabricate exterior, vestibule and other doors indicated to be insulated in the schedule with foam in place insulation. Door and frame assembly shall have a maximum calculated core U-Value of 0.10 BTU per hour per square foot per degree F in accordance with ASTM C518. E. Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series specifications for door and frame hardware preparation. Prepare door and frame using final hardware schedule and templates from hardware supplier. F. Shop Painting 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly before beginning painting operations, removing rust, scale, oil, grease and other contaminants. 2. Apply primer evenly to provide full protection of all exposed surfaces. 2.04 STEEL (HOLLOW METAL) DOORS A. Provide doors of size and style indicated. 1. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 4, seamless, 16 gauge for doors less than four feet wide and 14 gauge for doors greater than four feet wide. 2. Interior Doors: SDI 100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 3, seamless, 18 gauge for doors less than four feet wide and 16 gauge for doors greater than four feet wide. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0811 13-3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Top and bottom closures on all doors and a weather tight cap on all exterior doors. C. Where indicated, provide doors with sightproof and weatherproof louvers with frames formed of 18-gauge (minimum) frame and 24-gauge (minimum) galvanized steel blades. Provide louvers with 50% free area. Exterior doors indicated to have louvers shall include an 18x14 aluminum insect screen. D. Glass lite kits shall be provided to accommodate glass shown or specified. Fame material shall be 20 gauge (minimum) cold rolled steel with mitered corners. 2.05 STEEL (HOLLOW METAL) DOOR FRAMES A. Fabricate door frames with mitered and welded corners. B. Provide concealed fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide galvanized plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of finish hardware cutouts. D. Drill frames to receive three silencers on strike jamb of side swinging doors, and two silencers on heads of double doors, unless doors are to receive weatherstripping. E. Provide a minimum of three jamb anchors per jamb for doors 96 inches or less in height and one additional anchor for each additional 24 inches of height. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All doors and frames specified herein shall be neatly installed in designated locations indicated on Drawings. B. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and as herein specified. C. Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 and as herein specified. D. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Provide protection against stains, dirt or damage to the finished installation. Adjust doors for proper operation. B. Immediately after erection and prior to finish painting, remove rusted or damaged prime coat and apply touch-up primer compatible with original primer and final coats. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0811 13-4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0811 13-5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work as shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 08 11 13— Steel Doors and Frames 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ANSI/BHMA 156 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturers data for each item of hardware. Include installation and maintenance instructions. 2. Furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to receive hardware. 3. Hardware schedule organized into "hardware sets," indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work (such as hollow metal frames)which may be critical in the project construction schedule. Furnish final draft of schedule after samples, manufacturer's data sheets, coordination with shop drawings for other work, delivery schedules and similar information has been completed and accepted. 4. Prepare a keying schedule in consultation with the Owner. 0 0 N ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-1 FINISH HARDWARE 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide materials, assemblies, equipment and services from a single source for each category except that locksets, latchsets and cylinders must originate from the same manufacturer. B. Replace any item of finish hardware which cannot be installed or will not function properly. C. Provide hardware complying with NFPA 80 and UL labeled for fire rated openings. D. Furnish templates or information to door and frame manufacturer. Coordinate between the manufacturers where two or more articles of hardware are to be mounted on the same door. Verify all dimensions, new and existing. E. Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle, store, distribute, protect and install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions or recommendations. Deliver packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Properly mark or label, so each piece of hardware is readily identifiable with the approved hardware schedule. Tag each change key or otherwise identifying the door of which its cylinder is intended. Where double cylinder functions are used or where it is not obvious which is the key side of a door, appropriate instructions shall be included with the lock and hardware schedule. C. Provide secure storage area for hardware. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Hand of Door 1. Drawings show swing or hand of each door leaf(left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish hardware for proper installation and operation of door. B. Manufacturer's Name Plate ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-2 FINISH HARDWARE 1. Do not use manufacturer's products which have name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels. C. Base Metals 1. Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's non-corrosive metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness but in no case of lesser quality material than specified. D. Fasteners 1. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 2. Furnish stainless steel fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Exposed finish (under any condition) to match hardware finish or surfaces of adjacent work. Match the finish of adjacent work as closely as possible, including surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide fasteners which are compatible with unit fastened and the substrate, and which will not cause corrosion of deterioration of finish hardware, base material or fastener. E. Tools for Maintenance 1. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of builder's hardware. F. Hardware Finishes 1. Stainless steel, US32D unless otherwise noted. 2. Closers shall have a LISP finish unless otherwise noted. G. Field Checks 1. Make periodic checks during installation of finish hardware to ascertain the correctness of the installation. After completion of the work, certify in writing, that all items of finish hardware have been installed, adjusted and are functioning in accordance with Specification requirements. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCTS A. Hinges ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-3 FINISH HARDWARE 1. Stainless steel full mortise concealed oil impregnated ball bearing type, five knuckle with non-rising pins for interior doors, and non-removable and non-rising pins for exterior doors. Tips shall be flat. 2. Sizes and weights of hinges: a. Doors up to 36 inches—4-1/2 inches regular weight. b. Doors 36 inches to 40 inches— 5 inches regular weight. C. Doors 40 inches to 48 inches— 5 inches heavy weight. d. Fire Rated Doors up to 36 inches —5 inches regular weight. 3. Provide three hinges per door leaf up to and including 90 inches and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Stanley Hardware, Hager Hardware B. Continuous Geared Hinges 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Ives Hager Select 112HD 780-112HD SL11 HD 224HD 780-224HD SL24HD 2. Provide one of the above models of continuous hinges as specified. Coordinate hinge types with the door supplier. Hinges shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 3. Clearance: Coordinate clearance requirements between hinge, door and frame. 4. Fasteners: Per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Material: Aluminum 6063-T6 6. Length: Hinge length shall be full height of door minus manufacturer requirements (1" max). 7. Door Reinforcement: Minimum 16 gauge channel. 8. Frame Reinforcement: Minimum 16 gauge channel. 9. Provide electric power transfer (EPT) cutouts, or electric through-wire options as specified in hardware groups. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-4 FINISH HARDWARE C. Locksets and Latchsets 1. Stainless steel, heavy-duty mortise type conforming to ANSI A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1. 2. Wrought steel box strikes. 3. Stainless steel deadbolt with 1" throw approval. 4. 2 3/4 inch back set, 3/4 inch throw, two-piece anti-friction latchbolt. 5. Non-ferrous critical internal parts. 6. Cylinders shall be manufactured to conform to grand master key program. 7. Trim Design: LWM with wrought escutcheon by Corbin\Russwin or equal lever with return. Provide knurling on all levers leading into hazardous rooms and electrical rooms. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Yale, Corbin\Russwin, Schlage D. Keys and Keying 1. Provide construction keyed, removable core master key system as directed by the Owner. 2. Furnish ten core removal keys and a quantity of master keys as directed by the Owner, not to exceed ten each per group. Furnish a minimum of 15 change keys per cylinder. 3. Furnish cylinders with six pin cores. 4. Provide a key schedule showing all key numbers and spaces to which each permits entry. The schedule and key cabinet, along with key gathering envelopes containing keys for each lock endorsed with lock number and space designation, shall be turned over to the Owner. Install keys with proper tags in the key cabinet. Establish a construction master key, and apply to locks and cylinders, except for closets, within major spaces. Locks for closets shall be shipped unlocked and the keys delivered to the Owner with the balance of the keys. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Yale, Corbin\Russwin, Schlage E. Key Cabinet 1. Provide a wall mounted key cabinet with baked enamel interior finish and exterior prime coat with cylinder keyed to project master key system. Cabinet shall accommodate all keys in the project, plus twenty (20) percent additional. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-5 FINISH HARDWARE a. Provide cabinet with key control system consisting of permanent key markers, temporary key markers, "out" key control tags, and cross indexing cards. Instruct Owner personnel how to use system. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Yale, Bommer F. Closers 1. Cast iron case with seamless one-piece forged steel spring tub. 2. Heavy duty forged steel arm. 3. Non-sized fully adjustable from size 1-6. 4. Backcheck intensity and location valves. 5. Delayed action closing. 6. Full metal cover. 7. Mechanical hold open device, except at fire rated doors. 8. ANSI 156.4, Grade 1. 9. Conforms to ADA 5 Ibf. maximum door opening force requirement for non-fire rated interior doors. 10. Provide mounting brackets, and fasteners required for proper attachment. 11. Provide closers at fire rated doors. 12. Acceptable manufacturers: Corbin/Russwin, LCN, Norton G. Overhead Door Holder 1. Heavy duty bronze, surface mounted with positive grip holder. 2. Track: extruded bronze. 3. Degree of opening: 85 — 110. 4. Finish: Satin Chrome Plated. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: Corbin/Russwin, Glynn-Johnson, Norton. H. Door Stops and Bumpers ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-6 FINISH HARDWARE 1. Finish: Satin chrome plated. 2. Floor mounted door stops. a. Acceptable manufacturers and products: H.B. Ives 444, Hager Hardware Model 267F, and Glynn-Johnson Model FB36. 3. Wall bumpers a. Acceptable manufacturers and products: H.B. Ives Model 407, Hagar Hardware Model 234W, and Glynn-Johnson Model 60C. I. Flush Bolts 1. U.L. listed. 2. Forged brass construction, 1/2" diameter flattened bolt tip, 12" long rod for doors 7'-4" tall or less. Provide longer rod for taller doors to keep lever about six foot above floor. 3. Provide flush bolts top and bottom of door. 4. Fit standard ANSI door preparation. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson, Hager Hardware, and H.B. Ives. J. Automatic Flush Bolts 1. U.L. listed. 2. Forged brass or stainless steel construction, 1/2" diameter flattened bolt tip, 12" long rod. 3. Fully automatic. 4. Provide top and bottom bolts. 5. Operation shall incorporate an override function. 6. Tested for a minimum of 100,000 cycles. 7. Provide dust proof strikes. 8. Acceptable manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson, Hager Hardware, and H.B. Ives. K. Push Plates and Pulls ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-7 FINISH HARDWARE 1. Push and pull plates: 4"x16"x0.050" stainless steel. 2. Pulls: through bolted, 1" diameter, 2 1/2" projection, 12" centers, stainless steel. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: H.B. Ives, Hager Hardware, and Builders Brass Works. L. Coordinator 1. U.L. labeled and tested for 100,000 cycles. 2. Stop mounted, provide filler strips to fully cover stop. 3. Adjustable holding power and override feature. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: Gylnn-Johnson, Hager Hardware, and H.B. Ives. M. Kickplates 1. Stainless steel, 0.050" thick, beveled 3 sides, 8" high, width 2 inches less than door width. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: H.B. Ives, Hagar Hardware, and Builders Brass Works. N. Silencers 1. Rubber silencers: 3 for each single door and 2 for each double doors. 2. Rubber Silencers at fiberglass door locations shall be self-adhesive type. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and products: (Hollow metal doors and frames): Glynn- Johnson Models 64 or 65, Hager Hardware Models 308D or 307D, H.B. Ives Models 20 or 21. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and products: (Fiberglass doors and frames): H. B. Ives Model SR66 or equal. O. Thresholds 1. Extruded aluminum saddle type and fiberglass for opening with fiberglass door and frames. Provide with stainless steel fasteners. Six inches wide or as shown on drawings. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: Pemko, National Guard Products, Incorporated, and Zero International. Fiberglass threshold by fiberglass door and frame manufacturer. P. Door Bottom Seal ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-8 FINISH HARDWARE 1. Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Pemko Model 57, Zero International Model 328 and National Guard Products, Inc. Model 96. Q. Weatherstripping 1. Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal. 2. U.L. Labeled. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Pemko Model 294, National Guard Products, Inc. Model 190, and Zero International Model 328. R. Knox Box 1. Furnish a Knox Box for emergency entry access mounted to main gate or as directed by the local fire official. Knox Box shall be Model required by fire official complete with spare key to unlock doors on site. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Templates 1. After the hardware schedule is approved furnish to the various manufacturers, required blueprint templates for fabrication purposes. Templates shall be made available not more than ten (10) days after receipt of the approved hardware schedule. B. Packaging and Marking 1. Ship hardware with proper non-corrosive fastenings for secure application. Each package of hardware shall be legibly marked indicating the part of the work for which it is intended. Markings shall correspond with the item numbers shown on the approved hardware schedule. Keys shall be tagged within each package set and plainly marked on the face of the envelope with the key control number, door designation and all identification as necessary. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in a manner which will eliminate cracks on surfaces. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-9 FINISH HARDWARE B. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" by BHMA, except as otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as is necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with factory standards. F. Cut and fit thresholds and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. G. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal. H. Set thresholds in a bed of either butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function. Lubricate moving parts as recommended by manufacturer. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application. B. Final Adjustment 1. One week prior to acceptance or occupancy make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices and compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct Owner personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-10 FINISH HARDWARE 3.4 HARDWARE SETS A. The door hardware sets on the Drawings indicates functional and general requirements. Items shall be quality and finish as specified. Hardware set identification refers to set numbers indicated on the Drawings. Provide hardware required to meet Code requirements. Consult Drawings for set number required. B. Hardware shall be as follows: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-11 FINISH HARDWARE Table 1: Hardware Sets Set Items Set Items 1. Cylinder(Provide Padlocks for 1. Hinges Roll Up Doors) 2• Push/Pull 1 2. Remainder of hardware by door 9 3. Door Closer/Holder manufacture 4. Kickplates 5. Silencers 1. Hinges 2. Entrance Lockset 1. Hinges 3. Overhead Door Closer Holder 2. Entrance (each leaf) 3. Door Closer(each leaf) 4. Flush Bolts 4. Flush Bolts 2 5. Coordinator 10 5. Coordinator 6. Kickplate 6. Kickplates (each leaf) 7. Threshold 7. Threshold 8. Door Bottom Seal 8. Door Bottom Seal 9. Weatherstripping 9. Smoke Seal Qamb astragal) 10. Astragal w/Weatherstripping 1. Hinges 1. Hinges 2. Entrance Lock Set 2. Office 3. Door Closer 3. Door Closer 3 4. Kickplate 11 4. Kickplate 5. Threshold 5. Wallbumper 6. Door Bottom Seal 6. Threshold 7. Weatherstripping 7. Door Bottom Seal 8. Smoke Seal (jamb) 1. Hinges 1. Hinges 2. Passage Latchset 2• Push/Pull 4 3. Kickplate 12 3. Door Closer/Holder 4. Silencers 4. Kickplate 5. Door Bumpers 5. Threshold 6. Silencers 8. Hinges 1. Hinges 9. Office 2. Passage Latchset 5 10. Kickplate 13 3. Door Closer 11. Wallbumper 4. Kickplate 12. Silencers 5. Silencers 13. Hinges 1. Hinges 14. Store Room 2. Panic Hardware 15. Overhead Door Stop 3. Door Closer 6 16. Kickplate 14 4. Kickplate 17. Wallbumper 5. Weatherstripping 18. Silencers 6. Threshold 7. Door Bottom Seal 19. Hinges 1. Hinges 20. Bathroom 2. Panic Hardware 7 21. Kickplate 3. Door Closer(each leaf) 22. Wallbumper 4. Coordinator 23. Silencers 15 5. Automatic Flush Bolts 24. Hinges 6. Kick Plate 8 25. Office 7. Weatherstripping 26. Overhead door stop 8. Threshold 27. Kickplate 9. Door Bottom Seal ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-12 FINISH HARDWARE Set Items Set Items 28. Wallbumper 29. Silencers END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 0871 00-13 FINISH HARDWARE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09 90 00 — Painting 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM C-1396— Specification of Gypsum Board 2. ASTM C-840 — Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 3. ASTM C-754 — Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Product information on each item specified. 2. Metal stud span tables or engineered calculations showing proper size and gauge for spans and anticipated loads. 3. Installation details including headers, bridging, bracing, etc. 1.5 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Store materials in a completely enclosed area. Remove from the site and do not use gypsum board, and accessories, which get wet. N A_ m B. Stack gypsum wallboard flat with sufficient support underneath to avoid sagging. Take precautions to avoid damage to edge, corners and surfaces. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 29 00-1 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. National Gypsum Co. 2. United States Gypsum Co. 3. Georgia Pacific 2.2 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board Products incorporated into project shall be mold resistant. B. Regular Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch thick or thickness as shown on Drawings, with long edges tapered on the face side, and conforming to ASTM C-1396. C. Fire Retardant Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch thick or thickness as shown on Drawings, with square edges conforming to ASTM C-1396 and fire rated by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide at rated partitions. D. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch thick or thickness as shown on Drawings, with tapered edges on the face side and conforming to ASTM C-630. Provide in kitchen, toilet, laboratories,janitors, water foundation areas where finish is indicated as paint. E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: 1/2-inch gypsum core ceiling board with additives to enhance the sag resistance of the core and surfaced with paper, with tapered edges. F. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: Thickness as shown on Drawings, with tapered edges on the face side and conforming to ASTM C-1629. 1. Classification: Surface Abrasion: Level 2 Surface Indention: Level 2 Soft Body Impact: Level 3 Hard Body Impact: Level 3 G. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: 1/2-inch gypsum core soffit panel with additives to enhance sag resistance of the core and surfaced with water repellant paper, tapered edges and complying with ASTM C931. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 29 00-2 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM H. Tile Backer Board: 5/8-inch thick or thicknesses as shown on Drawings, with glass mesh and reinforced edges and conforming to ASTM D3273. Provide where ceramic tile finish is indicated. I. Metal Trim: paper faced corrosion resistant steel, manufactured by United States Gypsum or equal. Provide trim at ceiling, casings, outside corners, control joint and other locations shown on the Drawings. J. Tape and Joint Compound: As approved by manufacturer of gypsum board. K. Screws and other fastenings: Type S-12 bugle head with length at least 3/8 inch longer than thickness of gypsum board. L. Adhesive: As approved by manufacturer of gypsum board. M. Metal framing for interior non-load bearing walls under 12'-0" high. Interior walls shall be designed to support 5 psf load and as required by Building Code and loads associated with equipment, casework, etc. mounted to wall. Framing shall be designed to have a maximum deflection of L/360 or as required by materials being supported. 1. Studs: 1-5/8 inch, 2'/2 inch, 3-5/8 inch, 4 inch, and 6 inch C-shaped, minimum 22 gage unless shown otherwise on Drawings or required to meet design loads, galvanized steel and complying with ASTM C-645. Flange width shall be 1 1/4 inch minimum. Use size shown on Drawings or as required to conceal electrical conduit, electrical boxes, structural steel, HVAC ducts, etc. Gauge and size shall be verified with tables or engineered calculations. 2. Track: U-shaped track with 1-1/4 inch legs, minimum 22 gage unless shown on Drawings or required to meet design loads, galvanized steel complying with ASTM C-645. Size as required by studs. 3. Main Furring Channels: 1'/2 inch cold rolled steel channel, minimum 0.054 inch or required to meet design loads , galvanized steel. 4. Cross Furring Channels: 3/ inch cold rolled steel channel, minimum 0.054 inch or required to meet design loads, galvanized steel. 5. Rigid Furring Channel: 7/8 or 1%2 inch hat channel, minimum 25 gage unless shown on Drawings or required to meet design loads, galvanized steel and conforming to ASTM C-645. Use size as required to conceal electrical conduit, electrical boxes, pipes, etc. 6. Z-Furring Channels: Z-shaped channels with a minimum base steel of 25 gage unless shown on Drawings or required to meet design loads, galvanized, and complying with ASTM C645. Size as indicated on Drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 29 00-3 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM N. Ceiling Access Panels: Provide 12"x12", unless otherwise shown, access panels by Babcock, Milcor, Acudor, or equal. Provide in walls or ceilings where access to valves, dampers or require access through a gypsum drywall wall or ceiling system. Panels shall be galvanized and primed. Provide access panels will fire rating where installed in a fire rated assembly. Provide with continuous hinge on one side and a screwdriver operated latch on the other side. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY A. Verification: Examine all Drawings covering the work of this Section and refer to other Drawings which may affect this work or require coordination by this trade. Execution of work of this trade constitutes acceptance of adjoining work and other conditions as being satisfactory in every respect. Later claims of defects in such cases will not constitute relief in any way from the requirement of the Specifications. B. Cooperation: Cooperate with all trades supplying materials or performing work in connection with the work under this Section to those of other trades whose work is affected. Provide to the job items required to be built into the work in ample time to avoid delaying the normal progress of such other work. C. Installation of metal framing shall be in accordance with metal framing manufacturer's requirements. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, case work, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with metal framing manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards, considering weight or loading resulting from each item supported. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise specified, methods of installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the GA 216, the Gypsum Association, and the approved manufacturer. B. Minimum temperature in areas where gypsum board is to be installed shall be 65 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and after installation. Provide adequate heat and ventilation to remove any moisture. C. Butt all wallboard joints loosely together. Butt ends shall not be placed against tapered edges. Gap at end joints shall be 1/8-inch minimum. D. Install in maximum practical lengths to span walls without butt joints. If butt joints do occur, stagger joints and locate as far as possible from center of walls. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 29 00-4 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM E. Support end joints on framing members. Apply end joints compounds to back of board along end joints. F. No end joints shall align with edges of openings. Install expansion and/or control joints where shown or required. G. Install metal trim at doors, corners, edges and elsewhere as shown in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. H. Openings cut in wallboard to fit mechanical and electrical items shall fit snugly and be small enough to be covered by escutcheons and plates. Both face and back paper shall be cut when cutouts are not made with a saw. I. Adhesive and joint finishing compounds shall be mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Mix only enough at one time to be used during the recommended pot life of the compound. J. Fasteners shall be installed as follows: 1. Install no closer than 3/8-inch to end or edge. 2. Begin from center of wallboard and proceed to outer edge. 3. Pressure shall be applied on wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to ensure a tight fit of wallboard to the support without puncturing the paper. K. Drive screws with a power screw driver as recommended by the manufacturer. Surface of head shall finish below the surface of the paper without puncturing the paper. L. Where Gypsum Board is adhered directly to a masonry substrate, scrape, clean and remove all loose particles, dust, oil, grease or other foreign material as required or recommended by adhesive and gypsum board manufacturer. Apply adhesive according to manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Place gypsum board, hold with temporary blocking if required and recommended by manufacturer, so panels are straight, plumb and in proper alignment. M. Install continuous sound absorbing blanket in partitions indicated on the Drawings. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's directions. N. Cutting and Fitting: Do all cutting and fitting of the work of this Section as required for the installation of the work of other trades. Do all cutting and fitting in a neat manner, and leave all work in a first-class and presentable condition. O. Cleaning: At all times during the progress of the work keep all parts clean and remove all rubbish and debris caused by the work of this Section. Upon completion, remove any ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 29 00-5 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM and all protective coatings, clean off all parts of the work of this Section and leave the entire installation in presentable and orderly condition. P. Defective Work: All defective, damaged, defaced or other work of sub-standard quality shall be replaced with new work in accordance with this Specifications, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISH A. Execute joint treatment in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and the Specifications. Provide a minimum level 4 finish in accordance with ASTM C-840. B. A second and third coat of joint compound or joint finishing compound shall be applied to corner beads, tape and screws after each preceding coat has been allowed to thoroughly dry. Coats shall be spread over tape and the tapered portion of edge and feathered out at the edge. C. Sand compound when thoroughly dry; avoid roughing surfaces of finish wallboard. D. Leave all surfaces smooth and uniform, ready to receive paint. 3.4 PATCHING AND REPAIRING A. After trim is applied, correct all surface damage and defects as required, to the Engineer's satisfaction, so that blemishes will not show through the decoration. B. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the wallboard is unrepairable, remove same and replace it with new material at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.5 INSPECTION A. Wall surfaces, when prepared for painting, or other finish materials, shall be inspected and approved before proceeding further. B. Wall surfaces shall be prepared and painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 — Painting. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 29 00-6 GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials and labor required to complete the work required for the complete execution of the work including but not limited to: 1. Vinyl Composite Tile in electrical rooms and spaces designated "VCT" on Finish Schedule on the Drawings. 2. Luxury Vinyl Tile in spaces designated as "LV7 on Finish Schedule. 3. Rubber Base in rooms and spaces receiving "VCT" and placed on walls, curbs, bases where VCT terminates at a vertical surface. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00 — Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATION, CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM F 1066—Standard Specification for Vinyl Composite Floor Tile B. ASTM F 1861 —Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base C. ASTM E 84—Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Samples of each product clearly marked to show the manufacturers name, product identification, color and pattern 2. Manufacturer's technical literature, installation instruction and maintenance instructions. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING N V_ W A. Deliver manufactured materials in original, unbroken packages, containers or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 65 00-1 RESILIENT FLOORING B. Carefully store as recommended by the manufacturer in an area that is protected from the elements. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the products and marring of their finishes. 1.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 1 carton of extra material to Owner. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers are approved for use. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Mannington Commercial 3. Tarkett North America 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. The Owner will select the color and texture from the manufacturer's full range of materials within each category specified. More than one color or texture of each material may be selected. B. Accessory materials which are necessary for proper installation and for problem areas shall be as recommended or specified in the manufacturer's published specifications and installation instructions. C. Adhesives shall be solvent-free premium latex adhesive and be approved by the manufacturer of the floor covering or wall base being used. The adhesive shall be resistant to both alkali and moisture and shall be capable of securely holding the floor covering or wall base firmly in place and hermetically sealing and binding the joints. Adhesive shall comply with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Rubber base shall meet requirement of ASTM F 1861-98, Group 2, Style B, Type TP, top-set cove type, 1/8 inch thick in heights indicated on the Drawings. Provide premolded internal and external corners and end pieces. Colors shall be selected from manufacturer's full range of colors by the Owner. B. Edge strips shall be one inch wide by 1/8 inch thick with one edge beveled and rounded. Edge strips shall be extruded vinyl as produced by the manufacturer of vinyl flooring. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 65 00-2 RESILIENT FLOORING C. Underlayment, primers and adhesives shall be of the waterproof type, compatible with materials with which used and as manufactured or recommended by the approved flooring manufacturer. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATORY WORK A. Prior to commencing any Work, test the substrate for moisture to ascertain its acceptability to receive the finish flooring. Remove all dirt, grease, oil and other foreign matter which might impair the proper bond of materials. Do all straightening, leveling and smoothing as required for level floor. Inspect dividing and edging strips for position and elevation. B. Commencement of any Work of this Section will be construed to mean that all surfaces and conditions were found to be acceptable and subsequently will be construed as a waiver to any claim to the contrary. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and instructions governing each type of flooring. B. Lay all flooring flush with adjacent surfaces whether or not surfaces are similar or dissimilar. Where the substrate requires filling or building-up to produce flush surfaces with adjacent material, such work shall be done in an approved manner, without additional cost to the Owner. 1. Remove excessive cement and all stains from the surfaces. C. Cutting of flooring shall be neatly done and closely fit, with all contours neatly scribed and cut. D. Joints shall be as tight and inconspicuous as possible with all surfaces smooth, straight and free from buckles, waves or projecting edges. 1. Lay joints parallel and at right angles to surrounding walls, symmetrical about the center line of the room. E. Sheet flooring shall be installed with heat welded seams. Install with flash cove 4" tall with stainless steel cove cap and in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 CLEANING, WAXING AND POLISHING A. After installation thoroughly clean off any surface dirt or dust then wax and buff dry by machine, bringing the surface to a sheen. Inspect the work and make immediate ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 65 00-3 RESILIENT FLOORING adjustment, after the final buffing. All tile showing broken edges, corners, or fracture lines partially or entirely across their surface, shall be carefully removed and new materials of same color and thickness installed. 3.04 REPLACEMENT MATERIAL A. Provide one additional box of each type, color and pattern of resilient flooring and base used on the project and store them where directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 65 00-4 RESILIENT FLOORING 'SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and Specified herein. B. Section Includes: 1. Paint Materials 2. Shop Painting 3. Field Painting a. Surface Preparation b. Piping and Equipment Identification C. Schedule of Colors d. Work in Confined Spaces e. OSHA Safety Colors 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 40 05 97 — Piping and Equipment Identification Systems B. Section 07 90 00 —Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. SSPC—The Society for Protective Coatings Standards a. SSPC-Vis 1 — Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Structures b. SSPC-SP2 — Hand Tool Cleaning ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-1 PAINTING C. SSPC-SP3— Power Tool Cleaning d. SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 —White Metal Blast Cleaning e. SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 — Commercial Blast Cleaning f. SSPC-SP7/NACE 4 — Brush-off Blast Cleaning g. SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 — Near-White Metal Blast h. SSPC-SP11 — Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal i. SSPC-SP13/NACE6— Surface Preparation of Concrete 2. ICRI — International Concrete Repair Institute 3. NACE — National Association of Corrosion Engineers 4. NAFP —The National Association of Pipe Fabricators 5. ASTM D1737—Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus 6. ASTM B117— Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 7. ASTM D4060 —Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coating by the Taber Abraser 8. ASTM D3359— Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature and Material Safety Data Sheets for each product. 2. Painting schedule identifying surface preparation and paint systems proposed. Cross reference with Tables 1 and 2. Provide the name of the paint manufacturer, and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's representative who will inspect the work. Submit schedule for approval as soon as possible following the Award of Contract, so approved schedule may be used to identify colors and specify shop paint systems for fabricated items. Manufacturer shall substitute paint 0 system with equal performance where required for VOC compliance. 3. Contractor shall submit Q.C. Inspection plan describing all tests and inspections task to be performed. Include copy of daily log showing environmental conditions ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-2 PAINTING measurements and frequency. Copy of completed log shall be provided at completion of work. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work shall include surface preparation, paint application, inspection of painted surfaces and corrective action required, protection of adjacent surfaces, cleanup and appurtenant work required for the proper painting of all surfaces to be painted. Surfaces to be painted are designated within the Painting Schedule and may include new and existing piping, miscellaneous metals, equipment, buildings, exterior fiberglass, exposed electrical conduit and appurtenances. B. Perform Work in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and instructions, unless the Engineer stipulates that deviations will be for the benefit of the project. C. Paint surfaces which are customarily painted, whether indicated to be painted or not, with painting system applied to similar surfaces, areas and environments, and as approved by Engineer. D. Submerged ferrous metal, piping, and internal pump surfaces within potable water facilities or potable water distribution systems shall be painted with NSF 61/600 approved coatings. E. Piping and equipment shall receive color coding and identification. Equipment shall be the same color as the piping system. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Painting operations shall be accomplished by skilled craftsman and licensed by the state/commonwealth to perform painting work. B. Provide a letter indicating that the painting applicator has five years of experience, and 5 references which show previously successful application of the specified or comparable painting systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the Owner of each installation for which the painting applicator provided services. C. Contractor shall coordinate Q.0 Inspections. D. Notify Owner and Engineer at completion of surface preparation, priming application and final cure to allow inspection by Owner and Engineer or their Third-Party Inspector. 1.07 STORAGE AND DELIVERY A. Bring materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-3 PAINTING B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2— MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL INFORMATION A. The term "paint" is defined as both paints and coatings including emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, and other coatings whether organic or inorganic and whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Purchase paint from an approved manufacturer. Manufacturer shall assign a representative to inspect application of their product both in the shop and field. The manufacturer's representative shall submit a report to the Engineer at the completion the Work identifying products used and verifying that surfaces were properly prepared, products were properly applied, and the paint systems were proper for the exposure and service. C. Provide primers and intermediate coats produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and only within manufacturer's recommended limits. D. Ensure compatibility of total paint system for each substrate. Test shop primed equipment delivered to the site for compatibility with final paint system. Provide an acceptable barrier coat or totally remove shop applied paint system when incompatible with system specified, and repaint with specified paint system. E. Use painting materials suitable for the intended use and recommended by paint manufacturer for the intended use. F. Require that personnel perform work in strict accordance with the latest requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for construction. Meet or exceed requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction and the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. Maintain a copy of all Material Safety Data Sheets at the job site of each product being used prior to commencement of work. Provide and require that personnel use protective and safety equipment in or about the project site. Provide respiratory devices, eye and face protection, ventilation, ear protection, illumination and other safety devices required to provide a safe work environment. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-4 PAINTING 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Tnemec Company Inc. 2. PPG 3. CARBOLINE 4. Sherwin-Williams 5. International Paints (Akzo Nobel) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP PAINTING A. Shop prime fabricated steel and equipment with at least one shop coat of prime paint compatible with finish paint system specified. Prepare surface to be shop painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations and as specified. Finish coats may be shop applied, if approved by the Engineer. Package, store and protect shop painted items until they are incorporated into Work. Repair painted surfaces damaged during handling, transporting, storage, or installation to provide a painting system equal to the original painting received at the shop. B. Identify surface preparation and shop paints on Shop Drawings. Verify compatibility with field applied paints. C. Coordinate shop painting and field coating to ensure item is delivered and field coating occurs within recoat window of shop painted system requirements. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General 1. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry, and free of dust, rust, scale, and foreign matter. No solvent cleaning, power or hand tool cleaning shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. 2. Protect or remove, during painting operations, hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, nameplates, lighting fixtures, and similar items not intended to be painted prior to cleaning and painting. Reposition items removed upon completion of painting operations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-5 PAINTING 3. Examine surfaces to be coated to determine that surfaces are suitable for specified surface preparation and painting. Report to Engineer surfaces found to be unsuitable in writing. Do not start surface preparation until unsuitable surfaces have been corrected. Starting surface preparation precludes subsequent claim that such surfaces were unsuitable for the specified surface preparation or painting. 4. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. Provide additional surface preparation, and fill coats where manufacturer recommends additional surface preparation, in addition to requirements of specification. 5. Touch-up shop or field applied coatings damaged by surface preparation or any other activity, with the same shop or field applied coating; even to the extent of applying an entire coat when required to correct damage prior to application of the next coating. Touchup coats are in addition to the specified applied systems, and not considered a field coat. 6. Protect motors and other equipment during blasting operation to ensure blasting material is not blown into motors or other equipment. Inspect motors and other equipment after blasting operations and certify that no damage occurred, or where damage occurred, the proper remedial action was taken. 7. Field paint shop painted equipment in compliance with Color Coding and as approved by Engineer. B. Metal Surface Preparation 1. Prepare all welds to a minimum NACE weld preparation level "C" per NACE Standard SP0178. Provide additional weld preparation where required by the coating manufacturer. Contractor shall provide NACE SP0178 weld mold visual aids on site for evaluation of all weld preparation. 2. Conform to current The Society for Protective Coatings Standards (SSPC) Specifications for metal surface preparation. Use SSPC-Vis-1 pictorial standards or NACE visual standards TM-01-70 or TM-01-75 to determine cleanliness of abrasive blast cleaned steel. 3. Perform blast cleaning operations for metal when following conditions exist: a. Moisture is not present on the surface. b. Relative humidity is below 80%. C. Ambient and surface temperatures are YF or greater than the dew point temperature. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-6 PAINTING d. Painting or drying of paint is not being performed in the area. e. Equipment is in good operating condition. f. Proper ventilation, illumination, and other safety procedures and equipment are being provided and followed. 4. Abrasive blast ferrous metals to be shop primed, or component mechanical equipment in accordance with SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast. 5. Abrasive blast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC-SP10, Near White Metal Blast, where metal is to be submerged, in a corrosive environment, or in severe service. Provide a 3.0 mil minimum angular anchor profile unless recommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer in writing. 6. Abrasive blast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast, where metal is to be used in mild or moderate service, or non- corrosive environment or weathering exposure. Provide a 1.5 mil minimum angular anchor profile unless recommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer in writing. 7. Clean nonferrous metals, copper, or galvanized metal surfaces in accordance to SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or give one coat of metal passivator or metal conditioner compatible with the complete paint system. Galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-16. Abrasive blast clean to increase mechanical adhesion in accordance with ASTM D6386, Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting when required by coating manufacturer. Provide a 1.5 mil minimum angular anchor profile unless recommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer in writing. 8. Abrasive blast clean internal and external ductile iron pipe surfaces prior to coating in accordance with NAPF 500-03-04, Surface Preparations Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Ductile Iron Pipe. Abrasive blast clean internal and external cast ductile iron and cast-iron fitting surfaces in accordance with NAPF-03-05. 9. Prime cleaned metals immediately after cleaning to prevent rusting. 10. Clean rusted metals down to bright metal by abrasive blasting and immediately field primed. C. Concrete Surface Preparation 1. Cure concrete a minimum of 28 days at 75' F before surface preparation, and painting begins. Allow more time at lower temperatures if specified by paint manufacturer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-7 PAINTING 2. Test concrete for pH and salts using test methods recommended by the paint manufacturer. A minimum of one test per 1000 square feet of area to be coated shall be performed unless approved otherwise by Engineer. Do not begin surface preparation, or painting until acceptable to manufacturer. 3. Moisture content of concrete and masonry surfaces shall conform to manufacturer's recommended limits, and as listed in SSPC-SP13/NACE 6 Section 6 Acceptance Criteria Table 1. Floor surfaces to be coated shall be tested in accordance with ASTM F1869— Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride or as required by the coating manufacturer. Moisture vapor transmission shall not exceed three pounds per 1,000 square feet in a 24-hour period or less if specified by Coating Manufacturer. Vertical and horizontal overhead surfaces shall be tested in accordance with ASTM F2170 —Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete using in situ Probes (relative humidity shall not exceed 80% or as required by the coating manufacturer) or with ASTM D4263 — Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Test Method (test results shall be no moisture present). Engineer or Coating Manufacturer Representative shall specify all test locations. A minimum of one test per 1000 square feet of area to be coated shall be performed unless approved otherwise by Engineer. 4. Prepare concrete surfaces to receive coatings in accordance with NACE 6/SSPC- 13—Joint Surface Preparation Standards and ICRI Technical Guidelines. Remove contaminants, open bugholes, surface voids, air pockets, and other subsurface irregularities using abrasive blasting, shot blasting, water jetting or mechanical abrading. Use dry, oil-free air for blasting operations. Surface texture after blasting shall achieve profile as required by manufacturer or where not defined by manufacturer, profile shall be a minimum ICRI-CSP 5 surface profile. Remove residual abrasives, dust, and loose particles by vacuuming or other approved method. 5. Surface defects, such as hollow areas, bugholes, honeycombs, and voids shall be filled with polymeric or waterborne epoxy cementitious filler compatible with painting system. Complete fill coats may be used in addition to specified painting system and as approved by the Engineer. Fins, form marks, and all protrusions or rough edges shall be removed. 6. Repair existing concrete surfaces which are deteriorated to the point that surface preparation exposes aggregate with fill coats or patching mortar as recommended by paint manufacturer and as directed by the Engineer. 7. Clean concrete of all dust, form oils, curing compounds, oil, tar, laitance, efflorescence, loose mortar, and other foreign materials before paints are applied. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-8 PAINTING 8. To ease coating around outside corners, provide 3/-inch chamfered edges on all new concrete outside corners and grind existing concrete outside corners to a minimum radius of%-inch. 9. Unless recommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer, provide '/4" deep by '/4" wide tool cut terminations at 1-inch maximum from all coating edges for anchorage. Provide terminations around all equipment, piping, openings, gates, top and bottom of walls, stop locations of each day's work and overlap onto previously completed work. Transition coating 3-inches onto interior lining of piping except where coating compatibility concerns are noted by coating manufacturer. 10. Apply epoxy or polymeric filler compatible with painting system to all inside corners of areas to be coated with a margin trowel to form a continuous 45-degree cant cove across corners with a minimum dimension of 1.5-inch. Roughen or prepare cured filler as recommended by coating manufacturer for proper coating adhesion. 11. All equipment grouting shall be installed and cured prior to starting coating work. Coating shall be applied over grout up to the edges of all equipment, gates and uninterrupted piping unless specifically noted otherwise. D. Wood 1. Clean wood surfaces free of all foreign matter, with cracks and nail holes and other defects properly filled and smoothed. Remove sap and resin by scraping and wipe clean with rags dampened with mineral spirits. 2. Saturate end grain, cut wood, knots, and pitch pockets with an appropriate sealer before priming. 3. Prime and backprime wood trim before setting in place. 4. After prime coat has dried, fill nailholes, cracks, open joints, and other small holes with approved spackling putty. Lightly sand wood trim prior to applying second coat of paint. E. Castings 1. Prepare castings for painting by applying a brush or a knife-applied filler. Fillers are not to be used to conceal cracks, gasholes, or excessive porosity. 2. Apply one coat of primer with a minimum thickness of 1.2 mils in addition to coats specified. Allow sufficient drying time before further handling. F. Masonry ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-9 PAINTING 1. Cure for a minimum of 30 days prior to paint application. 2. Clean masonry surfaces free from all dust, dirt, oil, grease, loose mortar, chalky deposits, efflorescence, and other foreign materials. 3. Test masonry for moisture content. Use test method recommended by paint manufacturer. Do not begin painting until moisture content is acceptable to manufacturer. G. Gypsum Drywall 1. Sand joint compound with sandpaper to provide a smooth flat surface. Avoid sanding of adjacent drywall paper. 2. Remove dust, dirt, and other contaminants. H. Previously-Painted Surfaces 1. Totally remove existing paint when: surface is to be submerged in a severe environment, paint is less than 75% intact, brittle, eroded or has underfilm rusting. 2. Surfaces which are greater than 75% intact require removal of failed paints and then spot primed. Spot priming is in addition to coats specified. 3. Remove surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers. 4. Clean and dull glossy surfaces prior to painting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Check existing paints for compatibility with new paint system. If incompatible, totally remove existing paint system or apply a barrier coat recommended by the paint manufacturer. Remove existing paints of undetermined origin. Prepare a test patch of approximately 3 square feet over existing paint. Allow test patch to dry thoroughly and test for adhesion. If proper adhesion is not achieved remove existing paint and repaint. 3.03 APPLICATION OF PAINT A. Apply paint by experienced painters with brushes or other applicators approved by the Engineer, and paint manufacturer. B. Apply paint without runs, sags, thin spots, or unacceptable marks. C. Apply at rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve at least the minimum dry mil thickness specified. Apply additional coats, if necessary, to obtain thickness. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-10 PAINTING D. Special attention shall be given to nuts, bolts, edges, angles, flanges, welds, etc., where insufficient film thicknesses are likely. Stripe paint outside corners and edges in accordance with SSPC PA Guide 11. Stripe painting shall be in addition to coats specified. E. Perform thinning in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and with the full knowledge and approval of the Engineer and paint manufacturer. F. Allow paint to dry a minimum of twenty-four hours between application of any two coats of paint on a particular surface, unless shorter time periods are a requirement by the manufacturer. Longer drying times may be required for abnormal conditions as defined by the Engineer and paint manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended drying time between coats. G. Suspend painting when any of the following conditions exist: 1. Rainy or excessively damp weather. 2. Relative humidity exceeds 85%. 3. General air temperature cannot be maintained at 50OF or above through the drying period, except on approval by the Engineer and paint manufacturer. 4. Relative humidity will exceed 85% or air temperature will drop below 40OF within 18 hours after application of paint. 5. Surface temperature of item is within 5 degrees of dewpoint. 6. Dew or moisture condensation are anticipated. 7. Surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Where application of coating across concrete control joints or expansion joints has the potential to crack, turn coating into joints and caulk joints with a sealant compatible with coating rated for the intended service per Section 07 90 00 — Joint Fillers, Sealants, Caulking. 3.04 INSPECTION A. Each field coat of paint will be inspected and approved by the Engineer or the Engineer's authorized representative before succeeding coat is applied. Tint successive coats so that no two coats for a given surface are exactly the same color. Tick-mark surfaces to receive black paint in white between coats. B. Use magnetic dry film thickness gauges and wet fiber thickness gauges for quality control. Furnish magnetic dry film thickness gauge for use by the Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-11 PAINTING C. Coatings shall pass a holiday detector test. D. Determination of Film Thickness: Randomly selected areas, each of at least 107.5 contiguous square feet, totaling at least 5% of the entire control area shall be tested. Within this area, at least 5 squares, each of 7.75 square inches, shall be randomly selected. Three readings shall be taken in each square, from which the mean film thickness shall be calculated. No more than 20 percent of the mean film thickness measurements shall be below the specified thickness. No single measurement shall be below 80 percent of the specified film thickness. Total dry film thickness greater than twice the specified film thickness shall not be acceptable. Areas where the measured dry film thickness exceeds twice that specified shall be completely redone unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. When measured dry film thickness is less than that specified additional coats shall be applied as required. E. Holiday Testing: Holiday test painted ferrous metal surfaces which will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Mark areas which contain holidays. Repair or repaint in accordance with paint manufacturer's printed instructions and retest. 1. Dry Film Thickness Exceeding 20 Mils: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness exceeding 20 mils: Pulse-type holiday detector such as Tinker& Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the specified coating thickness. 2. Dry Film Thickness of 20 Mils or Less: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness of 20 mils or less: Tinker& Rasor Model M1 non-destructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75-volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flow, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. F. Paint manufacturer's NACE certified representative shall provide their services as required by the Engineer. Services shall include, but not be limited to, inspecting existing paint, determination of best means of surface preparation, inspection of completed work, and final inspection of painted work 11 months after the job is completed. 3.05 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PAINT AND FINISHED SURFACES A. Use covers, masking tape, other method when protection is necessary, or requested by Owner or Engineer. Remove unwanted paint carefully without damage to finished paint or surface. If damage does occur, repair the entire surface adjacent to and including the damaged area without visible lapmarks and without additional cost to the Owner. B. Take all necessary precautions to contain dispersion of abrasive blasting debris and paint to the limits of the work. Take into account the effect of wind and other factors ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-12 PAINTING which may cause dispersion of the abrasive blasting debris and paint. Suspend painting operations when abrasive blasting debris or paint cannot be properly confined. Assume all responsibilities and cost associated with damage to adjacent structures, vehicles, or surfaces caused by the surface preparation and painting operations. 3.06 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Piping and equipment identification shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 97— Piping and Equipment Identification Systems. 3.07 SCHEDULE OF COLORS A. Match colors indicated. Piping and equipment colors are indicated in Section 40 05 97 — Piping and Equipment Identification Systems. Colors which are not indicated shall be selected from the manufacturer's full range of colors by the Engineer. No variation shall be made in colors without the Engineer's approval. Color names and numbers shall be identified according to the appropriate color chart issued by the manufacturer of the particular product in question. 3.08 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES A. Provide and maintain safe working conditions for all employees. Supply fresh air continuously to confined spaces through the combined use of existing openings, forceddraft fans and temporary ducts to the outside, or direct air supply to individual workers. Exhaust paint fumes to the outside from the lowest level in the contained space. Provide explosionproof electrical fans, if in contact with fumes. No smoking or open fires will be permitted in, or near, confined spaces where painting is being done. Follow OSHA, state/commonwealth, and local regulations at all times. 3.09 OSHA SAFETY COLORS A. Paint wall around wall-mounted breathing or fire apparatus with the appropriate safety red color; area not to exceed 2 feet wide by 3 feet high, unless apparatus covers the area. Fire apparatus include fire hoses, extinguisher, and hydrants. B. Paint hazardous areas and objects in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3.10 VOC REGULATIONS A. Provide paint systems in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. Where paint systems shown in schedule do not comply, substitute equal products with VOC limits which comply with local, state, and federal regulations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-13 PAINTING Table 1: Painting Schedule Product Total Min. Surface Application Painting System and No. of Reference Dry Film Coats (Table 2) Thickness Mils Concrete and Masonry Interior masonry and concrete 75-85 walls, columns, beams, and All new structures 1 coat sealer 101 sq.ft./gal. ceilings 2 coats acrylic epoxy 116 4-6/coat Interior masonry and concrete 1 coat sealer 117 60-80 walls, columns, beams, and 2 coats epoxy polyamide 102 sq.ft./gal. ceilings in chemical rooms 4-6/coat Exterior masonry cavity walls All new structures Dampproofing See Section on cavity face of inner wythe 0711 00 Accessible areas (e.g. Exterior below grade if interior pipe galleries, pump Waterproofing See Section is dry rooms, basements, 07 13 50 etc. Water retaining side of new wall surfaces 2 coats NSF 61/600 approved Submerged or occasional where opposite side of epoxy polyamide contact with potable or raw wall is interior and dry Provide filler as required and 105 4-6/coat water and where indicated "epoxy waterproofing" recommended by manufacturer on drawing Water retaining side of new wall surfaces where opposite side of 2 coats high solids epoxy Submerged wastewater wall is interior and dry Provide filler as required and 119 6-1 0/coat and where indicated recommended by manufacturer "epoxy waterproofing" on drawing Interior and exterior Containment Liner' secondary containment 2 coats high solids epoxy 119 6-1 0/coat floors, tank supports coating and walls Metals SL Interior and exterior nonsubmerged (gloss) All new blowers, 1 coat epoxy polyamide primer 104 4-6 pumps, motors and 1 coat epoxy polyamide mechanical equipment, 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane 102 4-6 piping, etc. 115 3-5 Interior insulated 1 coat acrylic latex 103 4 Submerged or occasional All metal piping, 2 coats NSF 61/600 approved contact with potable or raw mechanical equipment, epoxy polyamide 105 4-6/coat water etc. —Submerged Wastewater 2 coats high solids epoxy 119 8-1 0/coat Steel doors,windows and door frames, steel stairs, 102 5-8 monorails, structural steel, 1 coat epoxy polyamide misc. metals(steel), 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane 115 3-4 —galvanized lintels, Aluminum surfaces in contact 2 coats coal tar 107 26 with concrete ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-14 PAINTING Product Total Min. Surface Application Painting System and No. of Reference Dry Film Coats (Table 2) Thickness (Mils) Shop Primed Pre-Engineered 1 tie coat 113 2-3 Structural Steel Buildings, steel joists 1 coat epoxy 114 3-4 1 coat epoxy 120 3-4 Other AN Interior: Gypsum Wallboard All new structures 2 coats acrylic latex matte or 103 2-3/coat satin Interior:Tar-dipped piping 1 coats epoxy resin sealer 112 2-3/coat where color is required 1 coats epoxy polyamide 102 5-8/coat PVC Piping 1 coat epoxy polyamide 102 5-8 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane 115 3-4 1 Painting manufacturer shall verify compatibility of containment liner and chemical to be contained.Where incompatible substitute a compatible coating system. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 09 90 00-15 PAINTING 3 x z x x o § m o / \ 0 5 5 0 ƒ m \ \ £ o r m > # o = # E E E E # I = # r Q a) co\ / / � \ m \ - 7 § / \ » j E « \ E 0 5 » 7 3 E t f ' ' _ § / 3 i 0 \ e > e ouf ƒ t 2 o e 3 0 / $ / \ \ / \ 2 7 f / \ E / n S = u = = / / _ o _ _ > > _ \ \ C: c > _ < ( m 0 > 2 ) > 7 7 12 2 E co �e o = = r r o 0 = 3 g = 2 Q ? ? \ \ 2 2 2 = m o 3 3 2 2 2 �� \ g § o n n = _ § g § g o q (Dm \ S e e g c o2 = ) =\ 2 g # m em =m 2 =mFI 2 2 = _ m e & / conoc7 % S S \ G / g 7 / gj / a e G G r = oz = = $ k / cg % = % ® E E / / _ � _ � ƒ _ � _ � k k f f 2 Q m = O O O E a 2 = = o O O O m m m e a s o o / / g a ƒ = o ® c 0 ƒ ƒ -j o o f i i g o 0 Co 2 ® \ 3 > _ _ - _ - = 3 2 2 e o f # c / � � � ® ^ / / / / 2eoI0I �e ? ^ j O o I < - - < O = 0 = Q = o IL g o \ Q o 0 / / / e / e o k ƒ k C / 2 z C) 0 o 0. _ _ I 0 o 0 g e » e » o E _ E _ < E i o 0 § E \ / E ƒ E E z \ z \ E 2 m = m / I (n < ) i _ = e > LU LU L E < E < > < < > F _ ± w > I < E < 7 7 7 I I < < / / 7 \ < \ \ / A _ $ f 2 \ $ e _? \ / I % § § c » / # - k \ z / 6 ^ \ \ 2 a / / 2 = / $ O � I o ® Z ® G 2 3 7 2 _ I U- \ 7 = k \ \ \ 0 LU § \ \ \ \ 00 0 / CD \ \ k E � / k / / § \ ° 9 u o - o o e : + - _ - » _ _ - o § j £ £ 3 £ 5 ƒ I IL E \ m 2 E iE m a a § m \ E E e m a s g - EL e E = E E In @ E E E E ± 2 < / ® Of 0 I _ / x \ / x 9 - / / 0 = w \ t / / \ r $ E o E a E E _ _ = x = E = e E - c O } = c % % = E 2 2 E 3 m ° < a 3 / ` ° - ° 2 = c 0- E J / o ( a E E / E \ 2 = ( 0 = o f > t 5 e = t t = m < » t m U E ) J / 7 J J i k E ] k / I 2 E < E E I ± o ± ƒ 1 @ \ / G 3 - 3 - - CD - o a co # z o w c o \ C) CD CD C) C) C) C) � 2 0 CD z y Z_ 2 Q 0 w w z co J 'a O o m � u U m O IL 0 o O N m Y O O a O a J cm W = z < N 0 Q C) J � C) N 3 W N d OL LL Z a� a p U y � N 4) Z _N W E W O H � d (7 Z ~ _ Z J W LL cG W W Q � y m N 0 0 CL L) ZCL d o Q a U — w 0 Q a Z) Z O Q N X J Q � N w U U O J LL 0- >- w Of N z Z 0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish and install fire extinguishers as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these Specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. NFPA 10 — Portable Fire Extinguishers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Complete detail and installation drawings for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. 2. Manufacturer's data sheets and verification of U.L. ratings. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Kidde Fire Extinguisher Company 2. Ansul Fire Protection 3. Potter— Roemer 4. J. L. Industries 2.02 MATERIALS N O N A. Dry Chemical (DC) Fire Extinguishers ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 10 44 16-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. Provide where indicated on Drawings, 10 lb. capacity, hand portable, with wall mount, tri-class dry chemical type, with Underwriters' Laboratories rating of 4-A: 60 BC. B. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Fire Extinguishers 1. Provide 10 lb. capacity, portable carbon dioxide type with wall mounts, having Underwriters' Laboratories rating of 10-13C. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fire extinguishers shall be installed where directed by the Engineer. B. Wall mounts for extinguishers shall be securely mounted to masonry with lag bolts and shields. C. Fire extinguishers shall be installed so that the top of the fire extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above the floor. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 10 44 16-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 23 00 00 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and material for the complete installation of the heating, ventilation, air conditioning, piping, etc. as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Air conditioning systems shall be furnished and installed to operate as a system. The Contractor shall coordinate all requirements between manufacturers to ensure unit responsibility and compatibility of the systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all equipment, accessories and appurtenances and all fabrication work or other mechanical and air conditioning work required, all in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures. B. Data to be submitted shall include but not be limited to: 1. Catalog data consisting of specifications, illustrations and a parts schedule that identifies the materials to be used for the various parts and accessories. The illustrations shall be in sufficient detail to serve as a guide for assembly and disassembly. 2. Complete assembly, and installation drawings with clearly marked dimensions. This information shall be in sufficient detail to serve as a guide for assembly and disassembly and for ordering parts. 3. Weight of all component parts and assembled weight. 4. Electrical characteristics, wiring, diagrams, etc. 5. Sample data sheet of equipment nameplate(s) including information contained thereon. 6. Insulation materials, coating, jackets, detail density, thermal conductivity and w thickness of all insulation materials to be furnished. N N 7. Details of special fasteners and accessories. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-1 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 8. Type of adhesives, binders,joint cement, mastics. 9. Proposed insulation procedures and installation methods. 10. Spare parts list 11. Special tools list C. The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit to the Engineer copies of the results of all certified shop tests. D. The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit to the Engineer copies of certified letters of compliance in accordance with the Specifications. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manual in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted for all equipment. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with manufacturer's data. B. All changes from the installation procedures in manufacturers' data shall be submitted for approval in accordance with the requirements for shop drawings. C. Keep all manufacturers' data provided in a secure manner at the job site at all times. Catalog and index this data for convenient reference. D. Manufacturers' data shall be available for the information of the Owner, Engineer, and the use of other trades. E. Turn over all data to the Owner through the Owner's representative at completion of the Work and final testing. F. Furnish Owner, indexed and bound in loose leaf binders, three (3) complete sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions and pertinent manufacturers' literature and information on all of the apparatus and equipment under this Division of the Specifications. G. Submit all instruction books and manuals in accordance with Division 01. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-2 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 1.05 CODES, PERMITS AND STANDARDS A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and shall comply with all laws and codes that apply to the Work. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all added expense due to their choice of equipment, materials or construction methods. C. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest State rules and regulations or publications including those of the State Fire Marshall, the Uniform Plumbing Code, and all local codes. Nothing in the Plans and/or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to the above codes, rules and regulations. D. All equipment, materials and installations shall conform to the requirements of the most recent edition with latest revisions, supplements and amendments of the following, as applicable: 1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 2. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) 3. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (AS H RAE) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 8. Factory Mutual (FM) 9. National Electric Code (NEC) 10. NFPA 90A- Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems 11. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA) 12. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 13. Standard Building Code- 1985 edition 14. Standard Mechanical Code - 1985 edition 15. Standard Plumbing Code - 1985 edition ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-3 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 16. State and local codes, ordinances and statutes 17. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 18. Others as designated in the specifications. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All material and equipment shall be the latest design, new, undeteriorated, and the first quality standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and equipment. B. When two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. C. All work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers skilled in their respective trades, and all materials and equipment shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturers and in accordance with specified codes and standards. D. Touch up and/or repaint to match original finishes all factory finished or painted equipment and materials which are scratched or marred during shipment or installation. E. Products Criteria: 1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years (or longer as specified elsewhere). The design, model and size of each item shall have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three installations for approximately three years. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls, instruments, computer work station, shall be the current generation of technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years. See other Specification Sections for any exceptions and/or additional requirements. 2. Refer to all other Sections for quality assurance requirements for systems and equipment specified therein. 3. All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall assembly. 4. The products and execution of work specified in Division 23 shall conform to the referenced codes and standards as required by the specifications. Local codes and amendments shall be enforced, along with requirements of local utility companies. The most stringent requirements of these specifications, local codes, ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-4 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS or utility company requirements shall always apply. Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's representative. 5. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be of the same manufacturer and model number, or if different models are required they shall be of the same manufacturer and identical to the greatest extent possible (i.e., same model series). 6. Assembled Units: Performance and warranty of all components that make up an assembled unit shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer of the completed assembly. 7. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. 8. Use of asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos is prohibited. F. HVAC Mechanical Systems Welding: Before any welding is performed, Contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements: 1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME BPVC Section IX. Provide proof of current certification. 2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping". 3. Certify that each welder and welding operator has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current. 4. All welds shall be stamped according to the provisions of the AWS or ASME as required herein and by the associated code. G. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Owner's representative with submittals. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material and removal by the Contractor and no additional cost or time to the Owner. H. Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-5 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 1. Apply and install all items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Refer conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents to the Owner's representative for resolution. Provide written hard copies and computer files on CD or DVD of manufacturer's installation instructions to the Owner's representative with submittals prior to commencing installation of any item. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received and approved by the Owner's representative. Failure to furnish these recommendations is a cause for rejection of the material. 2. All items that require access, such as for operating, cleaning, servicing, maintenance, and calibration, shall be easily and safely accessible by persons standing at floor level, or standing on permanent platforms, without the use of portable ladders. Examples of these items include, but are not limited to, all types of valves, filters and strainers, transmitters, control devices. Prior to commencing installation work, refer conflicts between this requirement and contract documents to the Owner's representative for resolution. Failure of the Contractor to resolve, or point out any issues will result in the Contractor correcting at no additional cost or time to the Owner. 3. Complete coordination/shop drawings shall be required in accordance with Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Construction work shall not start on any system until the coordination/shop drawings have been approved by the Owner's representative. 4. Workmanship/craftsmanship will be of the highest quality and standards. The Owner reserves the right to reject any work based on poor quality of workmanship this work shall be removed and done again at no additional cost or time to the Owner. I. Upon request by the Owner's representative, provide lists of previous installations for selected items of equipment. Include contact persons who will serve as references, with current telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection of Equipment: 1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Owner has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage or theft. 2. Large equipment such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, fans, and air handling units if shipped on open trailer trucks shall be covered with shrink on plastics or water proof tarpaulins that provide protection from exposure to rain, road salts and ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-6 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS other transit hazards. Protection shall be kept in place until equipment is moved into a building or installed as designed. 3. Repair damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition and appearance; or, replace same as determined and directed by the Owner's representative. Such repair or replacement shall be at no additional cost or time to the Owner. 4. Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation. 5. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work. 6. Protect plastic piping and tanks from ultraviolet light (sunlight). B. Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems: 1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping. 2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems. 3. Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Owner. 4. Boilers shall be left clean following final internal inspection by Owner's insurance representative or inspector. 5. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from failure to provide clean systems. 1.08 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the contract documents and shown in the maintenance manuals. In addition, provide bar code identification nameplate for all equipment which will allow the equipment identification code to be scanned into the system for maintenance and inventory tracking. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 90 00 — Painting. B. Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) high of brass with black-filled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-7 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS specified in Section 09 90 00— Painting permanently fastened to the equipment. Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc. C. Exterior (Outdoor) Equipment: Brass nameplates, with engraved black filled letters, not less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) high riveted or bolted to the equipment. D. Control Items: Label all instrumentation, temperature and humidity sensors, controllers and control dampers. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams. E. Valve Tags and Lists: 1. HVAC and Mechanical Rooms: Provide for all valves. 2. Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 15 mm (1/2 inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) for service designation on 19-gauge 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. 3. Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 215 mm (8-1/2 inches) by 275 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each service or system. Punch sheets for a 3-ring notebook. 4. Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color-coded thumb tack in ceiling. F. Ceiling Grid Labels: 1. 50 mm (2 inch) long by 15 mm (1/2 inch) wide by 0.025 mm (1 mil) thick UV resistant metalized polyester label with red border color and black custom lettering on white background interior. Peel and stick adhesive backing. Label and adhesive manufactured specifically for use in equipment inventory tagging. 2. Custom print labels with above ceiling HVAC equipment numbers. G. Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct markers. Conform to the following color codes: Yellow/Green Supply air Blue Exhaust,outside, return and mixed air Include the following: Nomenclature Direction of air flow. Duct service(supply, return, exhaust, etc.) ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-8 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 1.09 GASKETS AND CONNECTORS A. Provide new gaskets wherever gasketed mating equipment items or pipe connections have been dismantled. Gaskets shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Replace all assembly bolts, studs, nuts and fasteners of any kind which are bent, flattened, corroded or have their threads, heads or slots damaged. C. Furnish all bolts, studs, nuts and fasteners for make-up of all connections to equipment and replace any of these items damaged in storage, shipment or moving. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Each item of equipment shall be furnished and installed complete with all supports, mounting frames, duct work, piping, louvers, panels, grilles, electric drive units and controls, mechanical equipment, electrical work, insulation and appurtenances ready for operation. B. All equipment and appurtenances shall be anchored or connected to supporting members as specified or as indicated on the Plans. C. All mechanisms or parts shall be amply proportioned for the stresses which may occur during operation or for any other stresses which may occur during fabrication and erection. Individual parts furnished which are alike in all units shall be alike in workmanship, design, and materials and shall be interchangeable. All equipment shall be of the manufacturer's top line, industrial-commercial grade. D. The Contractor shall ascertain that all chassis, shafts, and openings are correctly located, otherwise they shall cut all new openings required at the Contractor's expense. Cutting of new openings shall be coordinated with other trades. Proposed new cutting shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to cutting. E. The Plans shall be taken as diagrammatic. The Contractor shall check the Structural Plans and sections for detail dimensions and clearances. Sizes of ducts and their locations are indicated, but not every offset, fitting, or structural obstruction is shown. F. Alignment of ducts may be varied where necessary to account for slight architectural changes or to avoid conflict with the Work of other trades without additional expense to the Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-9 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS G. All supports required for the proper installation of the equipment, but not forming an integral part of the building structure, shall be provided, unless specifically noted otherwise. Equipment shall be supported on spring-type vibration isolators. 2.02 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays. B. To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening. 3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. C. Penetrations through beams or ribs are prohibited but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of Owner's representative. D. Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moisture-resistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below. E. Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve. F. Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms, laundry work rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate. G. Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate. H. Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall construction. I. Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-10 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. J. Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 90 00— Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking. 2.03 DUCT PENETRATIONS A. Provide curbs for roof mounted piping, ductwork and equipment. Curbs shall be 450 mm (18 inches) high with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strip, interior baffle with acoustic insulation, curb bottom, hinged curb adapter. B. Provide firestopping for openings through fire and smoke barriers, maintaining minimum required rating of floor, ceiling or wall assembly. See Section 07 84 00— Firestopping. 2.04 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A. Furnish, and turn over to the Owner's representative, tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished. B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease required for each motor or other equipment. C. Refrigerant Tools: Provide system charging/Evacuation equipment, gauges, fittings, and tools required for maintenance of furnished equipment. D. Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for intended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the Owner's representative. E. Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (1 quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (1 pound) of grease, of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application. 2.05 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. B. Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025 inch)for up to 80 mm (3-inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035 inch) for larger pipe. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-11 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS C. Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified. 2.06 ASBESTOS A. Materials containing asbestos are prohibited. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. If an installation is unsatisfactory to the Owner's representative, the Contractor shall correct the installation at no additional cost or time to the Owner. 3.02 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A. Location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment, access provisions shall be coordinated with the work of all trades. The coordination/shop drawings shall be submitted for review. Locate piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Equipment coordination/shop drawings shall be prepared to coordinate proper location and personnel access of all facilities. The drawings shall be submitted for review. Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified. B. Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: Select and arrange all equipment and systems to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gauges and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Do not reduce or change maintenance and operating space and access provisions that are shown on the contract documents. C. Equipment and Piping Support: Coordinate structural systems necessary for pipe and equipment support with pipe and equipment locations to permit proper installation. D. Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with equipment and piping locations. E. Cutting Holes: 1. Cut holes through concrete and masonry by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill is prohibited, except as permitted by Owner's representative where working area space is limited. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-12 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 2. Locate holes to avoid interference with structural members such as slabs, columns, ribs, beams or reinforcing. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by Owner's representative. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural members, this matter shall be referred to Owner's representative for approval. 3. Do not penetrate membrane waterproofing. F. Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and other service are not shown but must be provided. G. Electrical Interconnection of Instrumentation or Controls: This generally not shown but must be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control devices, control and instrumentation panels, instruments and computer workstations. Devices shall be located so they are easily accessible for testing, maintenance, calibration, etc. The Owner's representative has the final determination on what is accessible and what is not. Comply with NFPA 70. H. Protection and Cleaning: 1. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Owner's representative. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the Owner's representative, shall be replaced. 2. Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment. I. Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and non-shrink grout 20 MPa (3000 psig) minimum, specified in Section 03 30 00 — Cast-In-Place Concrete. J. Install gauges, thermometers, valves and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Locate and position thermometers and gauges to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work. K. Install steam piping expansion joints as per manufacturer's recommendations. L. Switch gear/Electrical Equipment Drip Protection: Every effort shall be made to eliminate the installation of pipe above electrical and data/telephone switchgear. If this is not possible, encase pipe in a second pipe with a minimum of joints. Installation of piping, ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-13 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS ductwork, leak protection apparatus or other installations foreign to the electrical installation shall not be located in the space equal to the width and depth of the equipment and extending from to a height of 1.8 m (6 feet) above the equipment or to ceiling structure, whichever is lower (NFPA 70). M. Inaccessible Equipment: 1. Where the Owner determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance or inspections, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost or time to the Owner. 2. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, conduit and raceways, piping, hot surfaces, and ductwork. The Owner's representative has final determination on whether an installation meets this requirement or not. 3.03 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Continuity of operation of existing facilities will generally require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping. B. The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The requirements of Paragraph, Arrangement and Installation of Equipment and Piping apply. C. Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining in service. 3.04 RIGGING A. Design is based on application of available equipment. Openings in building structures are planned to accommodate design scheme. B. Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered by Contractor and will be considered by Owner under specified restrictions of phasing and maintenance of service requirements as well as structural integrity of the building. C. Close all openings in the building when not required for rigging operations to maintain proper environment in the facility for Owner's operation and maintenance of service. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-14 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS D. Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility. Upon request, the Owner's representative will check structure adequacy and advise Contractor of recommended restrictions. E. Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall offer a rigging plan designed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. F. All modifications to structures, including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility. G. Follow approved rigging plan. H. Restore building to original condition upon completion of rigging work. 3.05 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels designed by a structural engineer, secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the Owner's representative. B. Use of chain pipe supports; wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing; or, hangers suspended from piping above are prohibited. Replace or thoroughly clean rusty products and paint with zinc primer. C. Hanger rods shall be used that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 15 mm (1/2 inch) clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work. D. HVAC Horizontal Pipe Support Spacing: Refer to MSS SP-58. Provide additional supports at valves, strainers, in-line pumps and other heavy components. Provide a support within one foot of each elbow. E. HVAC Vertical Pipe Supports: 1. Up to 6-inch pipe, 30 feet long, bolt riser clamps to the pipe below couplings, or welded to the pipe and rests supports securely on the building structure. 2. Vertical pipe larger than the foregoing, support on base elbows or tees, or substantial pipe legs extending to the building structure. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-15 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS F. Overhead Supports: 1. The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed by equipment and piping to be supported overhead. 2. Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of equipment and piping. 3. Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs. G. Floor Supports: 1. Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel systems for support of equipment and piping. Concrete bases and structural systems shall be anchored and doweled to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure. 2. Bases and supports shall not be located and installed until equipment mounted thereon has been approved. Bases shall be sized to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch) excess on all edges. Chiller foundations shall have horizontal dimensions that exceed chiller base frame dimensions by at least 150 mm (6 inches) on all sides. Structural contract documents shall be reviewed for additional requirements. Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting. 3. All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular space between sleeves and bolts with a granular material to permit alignment and realignment. 3.06 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION A. Rigging access, other than indicated on the contract documents, shall be provided by the Contractor after approval for structural integrity by the Owner's representative. Such access shall be provided without additional cost or time to the Owner. Where work is in an operating plant, provide approved protection from dust and debris at all times for the safety of plant personnel and maintenance of plant operation and environment of the plant. B. In an operating facility, maintain the operation, cleanliness and safety. Owner's personnel will be carrying on their normal duties of operating, cleaning and maintaining equipment and plant operation. Confine the work to the immediate area concerned; maintain cleanliness and wet down demolished materials to eliminate dust. Debris accumulated in the area to the detriment of plant operation is prohibited. Perform all ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-16 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS flame cutting to maintain the fire safety integrity of this plant. Adequate fire extinguishing facilities shall be available at all times. Perform all work in accordance with recognized fire protection standards. Inspection will be made by personnel of the Owner, and Contractor shall follow all directives of the Owner's representative with regard to rigging, safety, fire safety, and maintenance of operations. C. Unless specified otherwise, all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the equipment not re-used in the new work shall be completely removed from property per Section 01 74 00 — Cleaning and Waste Management. This includes all concrete pads, pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building structural systems. All openings shall be sealed after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with contract documents where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the contract documents of the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled. D. All indicated valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gauges and thermometers with wells shall remain Owner's property and shall be removed and delivered to Owner's representative and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these contract documents. Such material shall be removed from the property expeditiously and shall not be allowed to accumulate. 3.07 CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the Owner, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted. Refer to Section 09 90 00— Painting. B. In addition, the following special conditions apply: 1. Cleaning shall be thorough. Solvents, cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers shall be used for the specific tasks. All rust shall be removed prior to painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Repair scratches, scuffs, and abrasions prior to applying prime and finish coats. 2. The following material and equipment shall not be painted: a. Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches. b. Control and interlock devices. C. Regulators d. Pressure reducing valves. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-17 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS e. Control valves and thermostatic elements. f. Lubrication devices and grease fittings. g. Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces. h. Valve stems and rotating shafts. i. Pressure gauges and thermometers. j. Glass. k. Nameplates. 3. Control and instrument panels shall be cleaned, damaged surfaces repaired, and shall be touched-up with matching paint obtained from panel manufacturer. 4. Pumps, motors, steel and cast-iron bases, and coupling guards shall be cleaned, and shall be touched-up with the same paint type and color as utilized by the pump manufacturer. 5. Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats. This may include painting exposed metals where hangers were removed or where equipment was moved or removed. 6. Final result shall be smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items. Completely repaint the entire piece of equipment if necessary to achieve this. 7. Lead based paints are prohibited. 3.08 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) high, designating functions, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers, relays, meters, control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws. B. Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance. C. Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 90 00 — Painting. D. Attach ceiling grid label on ceiling grid location directly underneath above-ceiling air terminal, control system component, valve, filter unit, fan etc. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-18 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 3.09 MOTOR AND DRIVES A. Use synchronous belt drives only on equipment controlled by soft starters or variable frequency drive motor controllers without a bypass contactor. Use V-belt drives on all other applications. B. Alignment of V-Belt Drives: Set driving and driven shafts parallel and align so that the corresponding grooves are in the same plane. C. Alignment of Synchronous Belt Drives: Set driving and driven shafts parallel and align so that the corresponding pulley flanges are in the same plane. D. Alignment of Direct-Connect Drives: Securely mount motor in accurate alignment so that shafts are per coupling manufacturer's tolerances when both motor and driven machine are operating at normal temperatures. 3.10 LUBRICATION A. All equipment and devices requiring lubrication shall be lubricated prior to initial operation. Field-check all devices for proper lubrication. B. All devices and equipment shall be equipped with required lubrication fittings or devices. A minimum of 1 quart of oil and 1 pound of grease of manufacturer's recommended grade and type for each different application shall be provided; also provide 12 grease sticks for lubricated plug valves. Deliver all materials to Owner's representative in unopened containers that are properly identified as to application. C. All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to remove access plates. D. All lubrication points shall be extended to one side of the equipment. 3.11 STARTUP, TEMPORARY OPERATION AND TESTING A. Perform tests as recommended by product manufacturer and listed standards and under actual or simulated operating conditions and prove full compliance with design and specified requirements. Tests of the various items of equipment shall be performed simultaneously with the system of which each item is an integral part. B. When any defects are detected, correct defects and repeat test at no additional cost or time to the Owner. C. Startup of equipment shall be performed as described in equipment specifications. Vibration within specified tolerance shall be verified prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall be their sole discretion if allowed. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-19 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 3.12 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00 — General Requirements, Article, Tests, and in individual Division 23 Specification Sections and submit the test reports and records to the Owner's representative. B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost or time to the Owner. C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then conduct such performance tests and finalize control settings for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. Rescheduling of these tests shall be requested in writing to Owner's representative for approval. D. No adjustments may be made during the acceptance inspection. All adjustments shall have been made by this point. 3.13 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for 4 hours to instruct the personnel responsible in operation and maintenance of the system. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 00 00-20 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 05 93 HVAC BALANCING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Electrical Room AC Constant Volume Air System. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. AABC — Associated Air Balance Council. B. Adjust— To regulate fluid flow rates and air patterns at the system or terminal level. At the system level an example would be reducing fan speed; at the terminal level an example would be changing a damper position. C. Balance— To proportion air or water flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches and terminals with respect to design quantities. D. Draft— A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. Independent— Not affiliated with or in employment of any Contractor. F. NEBB — National Environmental Balancing Bureau. G. Procedure— An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. H. Report Forms — Data sheets for recording data in logical order. 0 I. Static Head —The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of o measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. W ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-1 HVAC BALANCING J. Suction Head — The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. K. System Effect—A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. L. System Effect Factors —Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. M. TABB— Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau N. Balancing Specialist— An entity engaged to perform balancing work. O. Balancing Agent—The entity responsible for performing and reporting the balancing procedures. P. Terminal —A point where the controlled medium (fluid or energy) enters or leaves the distribution system. 1.04 PROCEDURES A. Testing and balancing of the equipment and systems of the facility shall be performed in the following order: 1. Equipment Checkout (See Specification 23 05 95— HVAC Field Testing for testing requirements 2. Equipment Testing (See Specification 23 05 95 — HVAC Field Testing for testing requirements 3. Balancing 4. System Testing (See Specification 23 05 95— HVAC Field Testing for testing requirements B. Balancing shall not be started until the Contractor has submitted and received approval on the Equipment Checkout and Equipment Testing of the respective equipment for the system being balanced. C. Certified Data. The Contractor shall provide the Agency with the certified data on pumps, chillers and other equipment required for proper balancing of the system. D. Adjustment. The Agency shall supervise or perform necessary adjustments to valves, pumps and other controls as required to properly balance the system. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-2 HVAC BALANCING E. Balancing. The Agency shall follow balancing procedures published by the AABC, or NEBB. F. Reports: Compile the data on report forms as listed in the AABC "National Standards for Total System Balance". 1.05 SUBMITTALS 1. Submit a TAB report in accordance with section 3 of this specification. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the Balancing specialist and this Project's Balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.0. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit Balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article. E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article. F. Certified Balancing reports: Within 60 days of completion of balancing work, submit AABC-certified Balancing report. G. Submit one copy of the final Balancing Report directly to the design professional of record. Provide five additional copies to the contractor H. Sample report forms. I. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-3 HVAC BALANCING 5. Dates of calibration. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Articles, Quality Assurance and Submittals in Section 23 00 00 — Basic HVAC Requirements. B. Qualifications: 1. Balancing Agency: The Balancing agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall report to and be paid by the General Contractor. 2. The Balancing agency shall be either a certified member of AABC, TABB, or NEBB to perform Balancing services for HVAC, water balancing and vibrations and sound testing of equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the Resident Engineer and submit another Balancing firm for approval. Any agency that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any work related to the Balancing. All work performed in this Section and in other related Sections by the Balancing agency shall be considered invalid if the Balancing agency loses its certification prior to Contract completion, and the successor agency's review shows unsatisfactory work performed by the predecessor agency. 3. Balancing Specialist: The Balancing specialist shall be either a member and certified member of AABC, TABB, or NEBB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the Resident Engineer and submit another Balancing Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC, TABB, or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including Balancing. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the Balancing specialist shall be considered invalid if the Balancing Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor. 4. Balancing Specialist shall be identified by the General Contractor within 60 days after the notice to proceed. The Balancing specialist will be coordinating, scheduling and reporting all Balancing work and related activities and will provide necessary information as required by the Resident Engineer. The responsibilities would specifically include: a. Shall directly supervise all Balancing work. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-4 HVAC BALANCING b. Shall sign the Balancing reports that bear the seal of the Balancing standard. The reports shall be accompanied by report forms and schematic drawings required by the Balancing standard, AABC, TABB, or NEBB. C. Would follow all Balancing work through its satisfactory completion. d. Shall provide final permanent markings of settings of all HVAC adjustment devices. e. Permanently mark location of duct test ports. 5. All Balancing technicians performing actual Balancing work shall be experienced and must have done satisfactory work on a minimum of 3 projects comparable in size and complexity to this project. Qualifications must be certified by the Balancing agency in writing. The lead technician shall be certified by AABC, TABB, or NEBB C. Balancing Equipment Criteria: The instrumentation shall meet the accuracy/calibration requirements established by AABC National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems and instrument manufacturer. Provide calibration history of the instruments to be used for balancing purpose. D. Balancing Criteria: 1. One or more of the applicable AABC, NEBB or SMACNA publications, supplemented by ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications" Chapter 38, and requirements stated herein shall be the basis for planning, procedures, and reports. 2. Flow rate tolerance: The following tolerances are allowed. All tolerances are based on the design flowrates listed in the contract documents. For tolerances not mentioned herein follow 2011 ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications", Chapter 38, as a guideline. Air Filter resistance during balancing, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 100 percent of manufacturer recommended change over pressure drop values for pre-filters and after-filters. a. Air handling unit and all other fans, cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent. b. Air terminal units (maximum values): Minus 2 percent to plus 10 percent. C. Exhaust hoods/cabinets: 0 percent to plus 10 percent. d. Minimum outside air: 0 percent to plus 10 percent. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-5 HVAC BALANCING e. Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above: Minus 5 percent to plus 10 percent except if the air to a space is 100 CFM or less the tolerance would be minus 5 to plus 5 percent. f. Heating hot water pumps and hot water coils: Minus 5 percent to plus 10 percent. g. Chilled water and condenser water pumps: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent. h. Chilled water coils: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent. 3. Systems shall be adjusted for energy efficient operation as described in PART 3. 4. Typical Balancing procedures and results shall be demonstrated to the Resident Engineer for one air distribution system (including all fans, three terminal units, three rooms randomly selected by the Resident Engineer) and one hydronic system (pumps and three coils) as follows: a. When field Balancing work begins. b. During each partial final inspection and the final inspection for the project if requested by Owner's Representative. E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 —Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 — System Balancing. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire Balancing period. Cooperate with Owner during Balancing operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during Balancing operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide one of the following performance guarantees: 1. AABC National Project Performance Guarantee 2. NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-6 HVAC BALANCING 3. Balancing Quality Assurance Program Guarantee 4. TABB Project Performance Guarantee B. Guarantee shall include provisions that the certified Balancing firm has balanced systems according to the Contract Document and that the systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES A. Permanent Test holes covers to be Ventlock#699. B. Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes. 2.02 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL A. See Section 23 07 00 — HVAC Insulation. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for Balancing work. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper balancing of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for balancing. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. F. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean permanent filters are installed, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-7 HVAC BALANCING G. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected, configured by the controls contractor, and functioning. H. Examine strainers to verify that mechanical contractor has replaced startup screens with permanent screens and that all strainers have been cleaned. I. Examine two-way valves for proper installation and function. J. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. L. Examine air vents to verify that mechanical contractor has removed all air from all hydronic systems. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare a Balancing plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be balanced. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. B. Prepare system-readiness checklists, as described in the "AABC National Standards for Total System Balance," for use by systems installers in verifying system readiness for Balancing. These shall include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Ductwork is complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. C. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Variable-frequency controllers' start-up is complete and safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-8 HVAC BALANCING g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. C. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. g. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. i. Variable-frequency controllers' start-up is complete and safeties are verified. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING A. Perform balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section. 1. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for balancing procedures. 2. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. 3. Adjust fan speeds by maximizing adjustable sheaves and pump impeller speeds if required to obtain air and water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be attained, notify the Resident Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-9 HVAC BALANCING 4. Take report balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP)units. 3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare balancing reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain approved submittals and recommended balancing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare single-line schematic diagram of systems for the purpose of identifying HVAC components. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. H. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. 3.06 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside air, return air and relief air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. C. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-10 HVAC BALANCING b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air- handling system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust sub-main and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. Re-measure each sub-main and branch duct after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure airflow at all inlets and outlets. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after all have been adjusted. D. Verify final system conditions. 1. Re-measure and confirm minimum outdoor air, return and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary. 2. Re-measure and confirm total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, static profile. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Run system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust, if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-11 HVAC BALANCING 7. Record final fan-performance data. 3.07 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. C. Record fan and motor operating data. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.09 FINAL BALANCE REPORT A. The report shall be a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, items outstanding, and any deviations found during the balancing process. The final report also provides a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and/or operations personnel. All measurements and results that appear in the reports must be made on site and dated by the AABC technicians or balancing engineers. B. The report must be organized by systems and shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Title Page: a. AABC, TABB, or NEBB certified company name b. Company address C. Company telephone number d. Project identification number e. Location ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-12 HVAC BALANCING f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project number j. Date of report k. AABC or NEBB Certification Statement I. Name, signature, and certification number of AABC, TABB, or NEBB 2. Table of Contents. 3. AABC National Performance Guaranty. 4. Report Summary: a. The summary shall include a list of items that do not meet design tolerances, with information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies. 5. Instrument List: a. Type. b. Manufacturer. C. Model. d. Serial Number. e. Calibration Date. 6. Balancing Data: a. Provide data for specific systems and equipment as required by the most recent edition of the "AABC National Standards." C. One copy of the final balancing report shall be sent directly to the design professional of record. Provide five additional copies to the contractor. 3.10 VERIFICATION OF BALANCING REPORT A. Final Verification: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-13 HVAC BALANCING 1. After balancing is complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final verification be made by design professional. 2. The Balancing Agency shall conduct the verification in the presence of design professional. 3. Design professional shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of"FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final verification, the balancing shall be considered incomplete. 3.11 REVERIFICATION A. Balancing Agency shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments as required to complete the balancing. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second verification. B. If the second verification also fails, design professional may contact the applicable certification bureau. 3.12 ADDITIONAL BALANCING REQUIREMENTS A. Seasonal Periods: If initial balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak conditions, the engineer may request a temperature recheck to further verify performance at near-peak conditions. B. Sound Testing 1. After the systems are balanced and the spaces are architecturally complete, read and record sound levels at 5 locations as designated by the design professional. 2. Instrumentation: a. The sound-testing meter shall be a portable, general-purpose testing meter consisting of a microphone, processing unit, and readout. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-14 HVAC BALANCING b. The sound-testing meter shall be capable of showing fluctuations at minimum and maximum levels, and measuring the equivalent continuous sound pressure level (LEQ). C. The sound-testing meter must be capable of using 1/3 octave band filters to measure mid-frequencies from 31.5 HZ to 8000 HZ. d. The accuracy of the sound-testing meter shall be ±1 decibel. 3. Test Procedures a. Perform test at the quietest background noise period. Note any cause of unpreventable sound that may affect the test outcome. b. Equipment should be operating at design values. C. Calibrate the sound-testing meter prior to taking measurements. d. Use a microphone suitable for the type of noise levels measured that is compatible with the meter. Provide a windshield for outside or in-duct measurements. e. Record a set of background measurements in dB(A), and sound pressure levels in the eight un-weighted octave bands 63 HZ to 8000 HZ with the equipment off. f. Take sound readings in dB(A), and sound pressure levels in the eight un- weighted octave bands 63 HZ to 8000 HZ with the equipment on. g. Take readings no closer than 3' from a wall or from the operating equipment, and approximately 5' from the floor, with the meter held or mounted on a tripod. h. For outdoor measurements, move the sound-testing meter slowly and scan the area that has the greatest exposure to the noise source being tested. (This type of reading is generally performed using the A-Weighted scale). 4. Reporting a. The report must record: the location, the system tested, the dB(A) reading, and the sound pressure level in each octave band with equipment on and off. b. Plot all the sound pressure levels on the NC work sheet, with the equipment on and off. C. Vibration Testing: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-15 HVAC BALANCING 1. After the systems are balanced and the spaces are architecturally complete, read and record vibration levels on all equipment with motor horsepower equal to or greater than 10 hp. 2. Instrumentation: a. The vibration meter should be portable, battery-operated, and microprocessor-controlled, with or without a built-in printer. b. The meter shall automatically identify engineering units, filter bandwidth, amplitude and frequency scale values. C. The meter shall be able to measure machine vibration displacement in mils of deflection, velocity in inches per second, and acceleration in inches per second squared. 3. Test Procedures: a. Verify that the vibration meter calibration date is current before taking readings. b. To ensure accurate readings, verify that the accelerometer has a clean, flat surface and is mounted properly. C. With the unit running, set up the vibration meter in a safe, secure location. Connect the transducer to the meter with the proper cables. Hold the magnetic tip of the transducer on top of the bearing, and measure the unit in mils of deflection. Record the measurement, then move the transducer to the side of the bearing, and record in mils of deflection. Record an axial reading in mils of deflection by holding the nonmagnetic, pointed transducer tip on the end of the shaft. d. Change the vibration meter to velocity (inches per second) measurements. Repeat and record the above measurements. e. Record the CPM or the RPM. f. Read each bearing on the motor, fan, and/or pump as required. Track and record vibration levels from the rotating component through the casing to the base. 4. Reporting a. The report must record the location and the system tested. b. Include horizontal-vertical-axial measurements for all tests. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-16 HVAC BALANCING C. Verify that vibration limits follow specifications, or, if not specified, follow the "General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart" or"Vibration Acceleration General Severity Chart" from the AABC National Standards. Acceptable levels of vibration are normally "Smooth" to "Good." d. Include in the report the Machinery Vibration Severity Chart, with conditions plotted. 5. Reporting a. The report shall include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and any variations from specified conditions END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 93-17 HVAC BALANCING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 23 05 95 HVAC FIELD TESTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 23. B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures for field testing the HVAC systems. Requirements include developing a detailed testing plan and executing the testing plan to meet design requirements as indicated in this specification. Actions include but are not limited to measurement of the fluid quantities of the HVAC systems, operating HVAC equipment, proving control strategy requirements, and adjustments to meet control strategy requirements. C. The testing and balancing of the equipment and systems of the facility shall be performed in the following order: 1. Equipment Checkout— Physical Checkout 2. Equipment Testing — Short Run Test 3. Balancing (See Section 23 05 93— HVAC Balancing for balancing requirements) 4. System Testing — Full Controls Test and Control Strategy Proving D. The Contractor shall submit and obtain approval for the Equipment Checkout and Equipment Testing prior to beginning balancing. E. The Contractor shall submit and obtain approval for the HVAC System Balancing prior to beginning the System Test. F. Where a system consists of multiple pieces of equipment (i.e., air handler and exhaust fans, etc.), all parts of the system shall have their Equipment Checkout and Equipment Testing submitted and approved before Balancing begins. Similarly, Balancing shall be completed, submitted, and approved for all system components before System Testing can begin. 1. Where this action would be deleterious or prohibitive to the system or component parts, the Contractor shall specifically include the reason in the Testing Procedure submittal and receive approval. w ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-1 HVAC FIELD TESTING G. The following HVAC systems shall be field tested: 1. Electrical Room air conditioners H. This Section does not include specifications for materials for patching HVAC systems, or specifications for materials and installation of temporary devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper system testing or to execute the system control strategy, they shall be provided. I. The respective equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for Equipment Checkout and Equipment Testing activities. The representative shall sign all testing reports related to these portions of the testing report. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Systems testing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes the balance of air distribution, water distribution, the adjustment of total system to provide design quantities, the electrical measurement, and the verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. 1. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. 2. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). 3. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities. 4. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. 5. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. 6. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. These are supply inlets or supply outlets on air terminals and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods. 7. Main: Duct containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. 8. Submain: Duct containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-2 HVAC FIELD TESTING 9. Branch Main: Duct serving two or more terminals. 10. Branch: Duct serving a single terminal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner, Owner's representative, or the Resident Engineer. C. The Contractor shall submit a detailed testing procedure for approval. The Contractor shall have the testing procedure approved 30 days before testing is scheduled to begin. The detailed testing procedure shall include forms, procedures and diagrams for the Equipment Checkout, Equipment Test, and System Test procedures described in Part 3 of this specification. The testing procedure shall include: 1. Detailed step by step instructions as to how the equipment tests will be performed including but not limited to temporary layout modifications, any special procedures for testing equipment functionality, and how system actions will be activated. 2. All testing for systems that require seasonal outside air conditions shall be conducted when outside air conditions are suitable for such testing. When approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may conduct seasonal testing of the system during off-seasonal conditions. When this condition is approved, the report shall indicate how the test will accommodate testing of seasonal systems when seasonal conditions are not present. 3. A list of any additional or temporary equipment necessary to perform the tests such as pumps, heat exchangers, heating or cooling equipment. 4. A list of any instruments necessary to verify instrument signals in the HVAC system. The list shall include current calibration information. All instruments shall be within their calibration expiration at the date the testing is performed. 5. Provide tables for recording all required readings, action results, and comments. 6. Provide a checklist of items that will be checked during the test as listed in relative sections of Part 3 of this specification. Each action or step shall have a separate row. Each action or step shall be initialed by the Contractor's Testing Technician conducting the test. All tests shall be signed and dated by the Contractor, the Testing Technician, and the Owner, Owner's Representative, or Resident Engineer. The Equipment Checkout and Equipment Test shall also be signed by the respective equipment manufacturer's representative. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-3 HVAC FIELD TESTING D. As each section of the Testing Procedure is completed, the Contractor shall compile and submit all signed results to the Owner for acceptance. E. The equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for all testing. The Equipment Checkout and Equipment Testing results shall include a letter from the Manufacturer's representative stating that the equipment has been installed per the Manufacturer's installation requirements and is in satisfactory working order. F. Submit proof that the Testing Technician assigned to supervise the procedures, and the individual technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below. G. The Contractor shall submit the signed results of the testing to the Owner for acceptance. The equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for all testing. The results shall include a letter from the Manufacturer's representative stating that the equipment has been installed per the Manufacturer's installation requirements and is in satisfactory working order. Any deficiencies noted by the Manufacturer's representative shall be corrected and testing repeated. 1. The calibration data for all instruments used to verify HVAC system instrument readings shall be refreshed. All instruments shall be within their calibration expiration at the date the testing was performed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Personnel Qualifications: The personnel responsible for testing the specified systems shall have at least three years of experience in testing systems similar to this project and shall be an employee of the installer or an independent testing agency. B. Codes and Standards: 1. NEBB, "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." 2. ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. C. The Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, tools, ladders, and labor etc. to complete all testing activities. D. Instrumentation shall be in accordance with NEBB,AABC, or SMACNA requirements and shall be calibrated to the accuracy standards demanded by these organizations. E. The Contractor shall keep dust, dirt, and debris to an absolute minimum and reinstall all removed ceiling components to their original positions at the end of each day. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-4 HVAC FIELD TESTING F. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for removal and reinstallation of ceiling system and replacement of any component damaged. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. PART 2— SECTION NOT USED PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 HVAC TESTING SEQUENCING A. The HVAC testing shall be performed in the following sequence. 1. Pre-Start-up Inspection 2. Equipment Test 3. Balancing (See Section 23 05 93— HVAC Balancing for balancing requirements) 4. Individual System Test 5. Whole HVAC System Run Test B. HVAC PRE-START-UP INSPECTION AND EQUIPMENT TESTING 1. All HVAC equipment shall have a Pre-Start-up Inspection and Equipment test performed. The specific requirements for equipment indicated below shall be performed in addition to any requirements of the Manufacturer for startup and initial operation. All other equipment shall be inspected per the Manufacturer's requirements and run for 1 hour trouble free. 2. The equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for all testing. 3. Fans: a. Pre Startup Inspection: 1) Verify proper equipment mounting and setting 2) Verify that control, interlock and power wiring is complete 3) Verify alignment of motors and drives ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-5 HVAC FIELD TESTING 4) Verify proper belt tension 5) Verify proper duct connections and accessories 6) Verify that lubrication is completed 7) Verify that equipment is in good condition and free from damage 8) Verify that all packing materials, temporary stops, and temporary supports used during shipping have been removed 9) Verify that equipment and associated ducts are free from debris 10) Verify that equipment is installed per the Manufacturer's requirements b. Equipment Test: 1) Prior to energizing motor, verify and record voltage of power supply 2) Bump motor to verify direction of rotation 3) Run the fan for 1 hour of continuous trouble free operation. Any issues or stops required for tuning or repairs shall cause the test to be restarted from the beginning of this procedure. 4) Monitor heat build-up in bearings. Bearing temperature shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations. 5) Monitor for any abnormal noises or vibration. Abnormal noises and vibration shall be assessed and determined by the equipment manufacturer's representative. 6) Check motor loads against nameplate data 7) Record fan sound levels ten (10) feet from the surface of the fan in five (5) minute intervals during 1 hour run period. Sound levels shall be below 90 dB at all times. C. Cooling Equipment (Refrigerant based) 1. Pre Startup Inspection: a. Verify proper equipment mounting and setting b. Verify that control, interlock and power wiring is complete C. Verify proper duct connections and accessories ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-6 HVAC FIELD TESTING d. Verify that lubrication is completed e. Verify that equipment is in good condition and free from damage f. Verify that all packing materials, temporary stops, and temporary supports used during shipping have been removed g. Verify that equipment and associated ducts are free from debris h. Verify that the refrigeration system has been evacuated and charged per the Manufacturer's requirements i. Verify that equipment is installed per the Manufacturer's requirements 2. Equipment Test: a. Prior to energizing unit, verify and record voltage of power supply b. Run the unit for 1 hour of continuous trouble free operation, with no unexpected shutdowns, alarms or operational issues. Any issues or stops required for tuning or repairs shall cause the test to be restarted from the beginning of this procedure. If the ambient air temperature is too low to have the refrigeration system running constantly for 1 hour, the Contractor shall take into account any additional measures required to accomplish the testing based on the ambient air temperature. The Contractor shall provide any temporary heating equipment required to run this test including but not limited to temporary fans, ductwork, heaters, generators, heat exchangers, combustion equipment, and fuel storage and pumping at no cost to the project. Use of any heating equipment that was installed as part of this work shall not be permitted to be used as a heat source. C. Monitor discharge and return air temperatures and compare to the manufacturer's submitted values. d. Monitor for any abnormal noises or vibration. Abnormal noises and vibration shall be assessed and determined by the equipment manufacturer's representative. e. Record fan sound levels ten (10) feet from the surface of the equipment in five (5) minute intervals during 1 hour run period. The sound levels shall not exceed 90 dB. 3. Equipment Test: a. Prior to energizing unit, verify and record voltage of power supply ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-7 HVAC FIELD TESTING b. Run the unit for 1 hour of continuous trouble free operation with no unexpected shutdowns, alarms or operational issues in heating mode and for 1 hour of continuous trouble free operation in ventilating mode. Any issues or stops required for tuning or repairs shall cause the test to be restarted from the beginning of the respective 1 hour test. Any safety trips will cause this testing to be restarted from the beginning of this procedure. If the ambient air temperature is too high to have the unit heating constantly for 1 hour, the Contractor shall adjust the setpoint temperature of the unit. The Contractor shall coordinate this testing with all other trades. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling this testing and shall take into account any additional measures required to accomplish the testing based on the ambient air temperature. The Contractor shall not raise the temperature in the space to a point where it will cause damage to any equipment in the space or create unsafe or uncomfortable working conditions for the workers as determined by the Owner. If the Owner determines that the ambient conditions will not allow the testing of this equipment because the Contractor has scheduled the testing for a point in the season known to be warm, the Contractor shall provide any temporary cooling required to run this test including but not limited to temporary fans, ductwork, chillers, generators, cooling towers, make-up water supplies, heat exchangers, or air conditioners at no additional cost to the project. C. Monitor heat build-up in bearings. Temperature shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations. d. Monitor for any abnormal noises or vibration. Abnormal noises and vibration shall be assessed and determined by the equipment manufacturer's representative. e. Check unit loads against nameplate data f. Record fan sound levels ten (10) feet from the surface of the fan in five (5) minute intervals during both 1 hour continuous operating periods. 3.02 INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM TESTING A. The Contractor shall coordinate with other trades as required to complete the testing activities with minimal disruption to the owner's staff and operation of the facility. B. All systems shall be tested to verify the system operates per the respective equipment specifications and Control Strategies. The testing shall systematically test all control functions including but not limited to all logic sequences, modes of operation, interlocks, alarms, safeties, adjustable setpoints, and instrument readings at all control panels. 3.03 REPAIR FOLLOWING TESTING PROCEDURES ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-8 HVAC FIELD TESTING A. All repair work shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Cut insulation and ductwork for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings using materials identical to those removed. D. Seal ducts, test, and repair leaks created during the testing procedures on the hydronic and air systems. E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier at all locations where the vapor barrier was disturbed during the testing procedures. F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with suitable permanent means of identification. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 05 95-9 HVAC FIELD TESTING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all ductwork, fittings, and accessories as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the Specifications. B. The equipment shall be furnished complete with all accessories, special tools, base attachments, mountings, anchor bolts and other appurtenances as specified or as may be required for a complete installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all new and modified ductwork, accessories and appurtenances and all fabrication work required for all equipment specified in this Section in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures. B. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for supports for new and modified ductwork. The shop drawings shall locate and identify each support, brace, hanger, guide, component and anchor. Ductwork support systems shall be designed and Shop Drawings prepared and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located and shall comply with Section 01 73 23— Anchorage and Bracing of Non-Structural Components. Include sealed calculations used to support the final support design. C. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for support of multi-section dampers and louvers. The shop drawings shall identify all supports and reinforcement required to allow the multi-section dampers and louvers to be rated for the maximum pressure of the individual damper and louver sections. The support system shall be designed and calculations prepared and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 1.03 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Warranty and Guarantee shall be as specified in Section 46 00 0 — Equipment General Provisions with the exception that the warranty period shall be for two (2) years. 0 w N N N ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-1 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work shall be constructed and installed in a first-class workmanlike manner in accordance with the recommendations given in the latest edition of the Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards and Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, unless otherwise specified. B. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the Schedule of Duct Construction Standards listed on the last page of this Section. Transverse duct connections shall be bolted, gasketed connections. C. All ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints, and shall not be decreased at any point to avoid obstructions. No piping, conduit or structural work shall be installed in or through any ductwork. All ductwork shall be run as close as possible to structural members, walls and ceilings. Duct work shall be as shown on the drawings, subject to such modifications as may be necessary to suit field conditions. D. Where existing walls, floors or roofs must be penetrated, the Contractor shall neatly cut the required openings and patch the existing work to provide a neat and finished appearance. E. All ducts shall be made reasonably tight throughout and shall have no openings other than those required for the proper operation and maintenance of the systems. F. Minimum thickness for metal ducts shall be per SMACNA guidelines, but in no instance shall be less than 20 gauge for steel ducts and 14 gauge for aluminum ducts. G. Supports for ducts shall be provided and securely fastened in place at every change in direction and as required to prevent deflection. H. Changes in size of ducts shall be by means of a taper transformation piece, the included angle of the taper being not more than 20 degrees. I. All duct work joints shall be sealed to achieve a SMACNA Seal Classification Rating as indicated in the ductwork schedule of this specification. J. The weight of material used for ducts and stiffeners, the fabrication methods, cross breaking or beading of flat duct surfaces, and assembling of the ductwork shall conform to the Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-2 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES K. All duct panels shall be braced or reinforced as necessary, in addition to the minimum requirements in the ASHRAE Guide, to eliminate vibration and noise and to prevent deflection from the indicted shapes and dimensions. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL AND ALUMINUM DUCT A. Ductwork material shall be as indicated in the duct schedule in Part 3 of this specification. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480/A480M, Type 316 having a number 2D finish for all applicable ducts and of adequate strength and rigidity to meet the conditions of the service and installation requirements and shall be properly protected where subject to mechanical injury. C. Aluminum: ASTM B209, alloy 1100, 3003, or 5052 for all applicable ducts and of adequate strength and rigidity to meet the conditions of the service and installation requirements and shall be properly protected where subject to mechanical injury. D. Transverse duct connections for rectangular ducts shall be bolted, gasketed connections made with standard Ductmate 35 System as manufactured by Duct Mate Industries, W.D.C.I., Elgen, or approved equal. TDC/TDF (T-25) rolled on flanges are acceptable when provided in accordance per SMACNA duct construction guidelines for stiffening and reinforcement. All longitudinal seems shall be Pittsburg Z, or better. Duct flange system material shall match the duct material. Gaskets shall be suitable for exposure to hydrogen sulfide 2ppm. E. Transverse duct connections for round ducts shall be bolted, gasketed connections in accordance with chapter 12 of SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards. Duct connections shall be the same material as the duct. Utilize longitudinal seam ductwork. Gaskets shall be suitable for exposure to hydrogen sulfide 2 ppm and outdoor use. F. All ductwork shall be shop fabricated in sections with flanged ends. Where Ductmate 35 flange system is used, it shall be factory spot welded to the ductwork. No field welding of ductwork shall be permitted. Welding equipment and electrodes shall be of a type specifically suited for welding light gauge 316 stainless steel or aluminum, as applicable, to provide consistently good quality welds. G. All duct sections shall be constructed and installed without forming dips and traps. H. All ducts shall have a minimum clearance of three (3) inches from all combustible material. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-3 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All ductwork shall be securely hung and anchored to the building structure. Unless otherwise shown or specified, hangers and stiffeners for ducts shall conform with the recommendations given in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction standards and SMACNA seismic restraint manual. Ducts shall be supported on trapeze hangers consisting of angles and rods. Use of strap hangers and straps is prohibited. B. All hangers, rods, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and appurtenances shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork that it supports. C. All ductwork shall be supported from trapeze type hangers. Stainless steel hanger rods shall be minimum 3/8 inch for all ducts with half perimeter up to 72 inches, and inch diameter for all ducts with half perimeter larger than 72 inches. Aluminum hanger rods shall be of sufficient diameter to achieve the equivalent strength of the stainless steel hanger rods for the sizes indicated. A pair of rods shall be provided at each duct support point. Maximum hanger spacing shall be 8 feet for ducts with half perimeter up to 72 inches and 6 feet for ducts with half perimeter larger than 72 inches. D. Hanger Construction and installation shall conform to SMACNA Standards, except as specified. No sheet metal duct hangers or straps will be allowed. E. Support shall be furnished at each fitting. Material of supports shall match duct material. F. Seismic & Wind Requirements: All ductwork shall be provided with seismic and wind restraints in accordance with the Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, as published by SMACNA, in accordance with the Texas Building Codes, the indicated design wind speed, and ASCE-7 to the extent that the most stringent provisions are utilized. Material of seismic and wind restraints shall be as specified herein. A calculation signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located shall be provided verifying that the installed supports meet the seismic and wind requirements. See Section 01 73 23 — Anchorage and Bracing of Non-Structural Components and the Structural Design Drawings for additional details and requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Manual Volume & Backdraft Dampers in Rectangular Stainless Steel or Aluminum Duct: 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Greenheck b. Ruskin ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-4 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES C. Nailor d. or equal 2. Frame, blade, axle, bearings, jamb seal, and linkage materials: Match ductwork. 3. Blades: a. Opposed blades for volume dampers and parallel blades for backdraft dampers; b. Vinyl edge seals, thermoplastic elastomer seals for corrosive/chemical services. 4. Damper shafts shall be solid hexagonal or square shape. 5. Linkage shall be concealed in damper frame. 6. Provide outside handle, quadrant and approved position indicator and locking device on volume dampers. 7. Reference: SMACNA Standards. B. Stainless Steel Motorized Dampers: 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Ruskin b. Greenheck C. or equal 2. Frame, blade, axle, bearings,jamb seal, and linkage materials: 316 Stainless Steel. 3. Blades: a. Opposed blades (control) and Parallel blades (shut-off) b. Vinyl edge seals, thermoplastic elastomer seals for corrosive/chemical services. 4. Damper shafts shall be solid hexagonal or square shape. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-5 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 5. Actuators shall be externally mounted to the damper and shall be a minimum of NEMA 2. All actuators shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X case unless otherwise specified. Actuators located in classified spaces shall be enclosed in a NEMA 7 case unless otherwise specified. 6. Damper leakage rate shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. at 1" w.g. 7. Reference: SMACNA Standards. C. Aluminum Motorized Dampers: 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Ruskin b. Greenheck C. Or equal 2. Frame, blade, axle, bearings,jamb seal, and linkage materials: 6063T5 Aluminum 3. Blades: a. Opposed blades (modulating control) and Parallel blades (2 position shut-off) b. Neoprene blade edge seals and flexible metal compressible jamb seals. 4. Damper shafts shall be solid hexagonal or square shape. 5. Actuators shall be externally mounted to the damper and shall be a minimum of NEMA 2. All actuators shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X case unless otherwise specified. Actuators located in classified spaces shall be enclosed in a NEMA 7 case unless otherwise specified. 6. Reference: SMACNA Standards. D. Stationary Louvers: 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Ruskin b. Greenheck C. Or equal ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-6 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 2. Frame, blade, and jamb seal materials: 6063T5 Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel 3. Inside and outside of all aluminum parts shall be coated with a corrosion resistant coating. The coating shall be Kynar 500 or approved equal. Final color selection shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall submit a full color chart for selection and approval. 4. Frame shall be a minimum 0.125 inches thick for aluminum and 18 gauge for stainless steel 5. Blades: a. Drainable with minimum wall thickness of 0.081 inch for aluminum and 18 gauge for stainless steel b. Blades shall be angled at 37 degrees 6. Drain gutters shall be in head frame and each blade 7. Downspouts in jambs shall drain water from louver 8. Provide bird screens in identical material to match louver. Screens shall be expanded and flattened type. E. Sheet Metal Safing: Provide sheet metal safing of the same material as the duct, to close off and seal airtight all unused areas behind louvers. F. Screens: '/2-inch (13 mm) mesh, with screen material matched duct material, framed with bolt holes unless indicated otherwise. G. Registers and Grilles: 1. Manufacturer: Provide product(s) of one of the following: a. Titus (Basis of Design, model numbers scheduled on drawings) b. Anemostat C. Price Industries d. Nailer Industries, Inc. e. Hart and Cooley. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-7 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 2. Units shall be factory-fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel construction for stainless steel and FRP ductwork and aluminum for aluminum ductwork. They shall distribute the specified air volume (cubic feet per minute). 3. Outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level shall be as required for specified performance. 4. Diffusers and registers shall be provided with volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device will be acceptable. Volume dampers shall be opposed blade type for all diffusers and registers. 5. Registers shall be provided with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. 6. An additional volume damper shall be installed in duct stub to each air outlet for balancing of air volume. 7. Supply Registers: a. Supply registers shall be double deflection type, complete with adjustable vertical face bars and a key operated opposed blade damper. 8. Exhaust and Return Registers and Grilles: a. Exhaust and return registers shall be furnished with fixed vertical face bars, set straight, and a key operated opposed blade damper. H. Duct-Mounted Access Doors and Panels: 1. Provide access doors at all duct connections dampers for access and maintenance of damper motor actuators and linkages. 2. Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 3. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene. 4. Door and frame to be of same material as duct. I. Instrument Test Holes: Material to suit duct material, including screw. Size holes to allow insertion of pitot and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness. J. Turning Vanes: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-8 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 1. Turning vanes shall be double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. 2. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 2-3 of the 1995 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible" Second Edition standard. Rail systems with non-standard tab spacing shall not be accepted. 3. Due to tensile loading, vanes shall be capable of supporting 250 pounds when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions. K. Drip Pans 1. Drip pans shall be welded 16 gauge, type 316 Stainless Steel. 2. Drip pans shall extend 2" beyond the dimensions of the equipment of ductwork above on all sides. 3. Drip pan shall have a minimum V lip. 4. Drip pan shall be sloped to a W copper type L drain line such that pooling or standing water is prevented. The drain shall be continuously sloped a minimum of 1/8" per foot. The drain shall terminate 6" above the sink or nearest floor drain. 5. Provide a dielectric coupling between the stainless steel drip pan and copper drain line to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. 6. Contractor shall coordinate drip pan supports with the existing structural construction above. The Contractor shall provide all supplemental beams and channels needed. The support system shall be capable of supporting the weight of a full drip pan plus an additional 300 lb. load. 7. See Section 23 05 93 — Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC for drip pan testing procedures. 2.05 DUCT INSULATION A. Products and Manufacturers: 1. Provide insulation as made by one of the following: a. Armacell —AP/Armaflex FS b. Aeroflex—Aerocel C. or equal ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-9 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES B. Insulation 1. Type: Elastomeric Closed Cell Foam 2. FM Approved 3. Application a. 1.5-inch thick where insulation is required. See Part 3 for required insulation installation locations. 4. Average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.28 (Btu-in)/(hr-FT2-°F) at mean temperature of 75°F, temperature range -400 to 2200 F; permeability not to exceed 0.20 by ASTM E96; water absorption 3 percent by ASTM D1056 and ozone resistant. The insulation shall have a flame spread rating of less than 25 and a smoke development of less than 50 per ASTM-E84. 5. Insulation shall be sealed vapor tight using an adhesive at all joints. The adhesive shall have a flame spread of less than 25 and a smoke development of less than 50 when tested per ASTM-E84. C. Jacket 1. All insulation shall receive a 316 stainless steel jacket for stainless steel ductwork and aluminum for all other duct materials. The jacket shall be a minimum of 0.016 nominal thickness. Exposed insulation ends such as duct discharge points or overlapping insulation shall receive caps made of the same material as the jacketing. 2. Jacketing shall be secured with straps of the same material as the jacketing. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. B. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. If necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-10 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. B. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices, Manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA standards to achieve the seal and leakage classes indicated in the Duct Construction Table at the end of this specification. C. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. D. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. E. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop- fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. F. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. G. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 3" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. H. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. I. Turning vanes shall be installed in all miter elbows to permit air to make the abrupt turns with a minimum of turbulence. The turning vanes shall be quiet and free from vibration when the system is in operation. Vanes shall be installed in all short radius elbows in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction standards. J. The dial regulators for manual volume dampers shall be marked so that the "open" and "shut" positions are clearly identified. The dial regulators on insulated ductwork shall be mounted on an elevated platform which will finish flush with the surface of the insulation. Manual volume dampers shall be located at accessible points and wherever possible some distance from a duct transition or fitting. Care shall be taken during installation to make certain that sheet metal fasteners do not protrude into the duct and interfere with ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-11 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES damper operation. Volume dampers shall be provided in each branch duct take off and in both ducts downstream of each trunk duct split. K. Duct access doors shall be provided before and after duct mounted coils, within working distance of, and on the fusible link side of all fire dampers, adjacent to volume dampers, on the linkage side of automatic dampers, duct mounted sensors, and at all other apparatus requiring service or inspection in the duct system. Access doors shall be a minimum of 15 x 18 inches; where the size of the duct will not accommodate this size the doors shall be made as large as practical. The doors shall be rigid and airtight, and provided with neoprene gaskets, hinges and sash locks. Whenever space requirements are such that a hinged access door is impractical, a screw fastened lift-out door shall be provided instead. L. Test openings shall be installed in the ductwork at the points listed below. The test openings shall be a minimum of 3/8" and shall be sealed by a screw cap and gasket, and shall be installed so that the insulation is not disturbed when the cap is removed. The test openings shall be located as follows in all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and dehumidification systems: 1. Upstream and downstream of each coil, duct heater, filter bank, or other inline equipment that heats, cools, humidifies, dehumidifies, or filters air. 2. In the outside air, supply, and return ducts adjacent to the respective connections on all AHUs, HVs, DHUs, etc. 3. In the main supply duct on single zone units and in each zone supply duct on multizone units 4. As indicated on the Contract Drawings M. Air filter gauges for measuring the differential pressure through all filter banks shall be supplied and installed; one gauge shall be installed for each bank. The gauge shall be of the inclined tube differential type complete with 1" thick acrylic plastic body, mirror-polished scale, built-in level vial, over pressure safety traps, signal flags, 2 vent valves for zeroing gauge, 2 static pressure tips, two 5-foot lengths of 1/4" stainless steel tubing, 2 compression fittings, mounting hardware, a bottle of red gauge oil and instructions. The gauges shall have a range of 0-1.0 inch water column with minor divisions of .02 inch water column. N. The Contractor shall install prefabricated roof curbs before the installation of roofing. O. All air outlets shall be with rigid connection to the ductwork. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-12 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES P. After the installation is completed, the Contractor shall seal all joints air tight. Sealants and tape shall have a flame spread not greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not over 50 per ASTM E-84. 3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be installed on all outdoor ductwork carrying conditioned air, all ductwork carrying conditioned air through unconditioned spaces, and all ductwork carrying unconditioned air through conditioned spaces. Conditioned air is any air that has received any heating, cooling, or dehumidification from HVAC equipment. Conditioned spaces are any spaces that receive conditioned air. Return and exhaust ductwork serving a conditioned space is considered conditioned air. B. Ductwork carrying cooled conditioned air passing through spaces that only receive heated conditioned air shall be insulated. Ductwork carrying cooled air for spaces that require year-round cooling such as electrical rooms, shall be insulated when passing through spaces that are provided heated conditioned air during the heating season. C. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended adhesives. The installation method shall provide a continuous vapor barrier. D. The insulation vapor barrier shall be maintained through all supports, flanges, reinforcement, and penetrations. Where the duct weight would deform the insulation material at supports, the Contractor shall use fiberglass insulation blocks. The blocks shall be the same thickness as the insulation. The vapor barrier shall be maintained using a system approved by the insulation manufacturer for spanning the insulation block. 3.04 DAMPER AND LOUVER INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install dampers and louvers per the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. The Contractor shall install all reinforcement required for multi-section dampers and louvers to all the assembly to withstand the rated velocity and pressure of the individual damper and louver sections. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-13 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. B. At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. 3.07 DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Duct Construction Schedule Service Pressure Duct Material Seal Leakage Construction Class I Class I Class Standards All Ductwork +/-2 inwg. Stainless Steel A 6 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 2331 13-14 METAL DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 74 00 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The entire air handling system shall be provided by one manufacturer with sole responsibility for the satisfactory manufacture, factory testing, installation supervision, and performance of the systems. Refer to equipment schedule for equipment performance and capacity requirements. The scope of this specification shall include: 1. Air handling units 2. Unit-mounted controllers 3. Roof curbs 4. Unit startup and testing B. System shall utilize R-454B or an alternate refrigerant with global warming potential compliant with current regulatory requirements. System shall include necessary safeties and sensors required to detect refrigerant leaks. C. System shall be complete package with factory tested refrigerant and controls systems. Controls shall be factory mounted and wired. System capacities and efficiencies shall be rated in accordance with AHRI 210/240 or 340/360. D. Wiring and Conduit: 1. Wiring and conduit for all single and three-phase power fed from the electrical distribution system, feeding equipment or field devices, shall be provided under Division 26 — Electrical, installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. 2. Wiring and conduit for controls, between HVAC controllers and HVAC field devices such as thermostats, instruments, or dampers, shall be installed and terminated by the HVAC Contractor. 3. Wiring and conduit between HVAC controllers and non-HVAC systems (such as SCADA or FACP) shall be provided under Division 26 — Electrical, installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Wire terminations in HVAC controllers shall be by the HVAC Contractor and terminations for non-HVAC systems shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. 4. Wiring and terminations shall meet all requirements of Division 26. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-1 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) B. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (AS H RAE) D. National Electric Code (NEC) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings on all equipment, accessories and appurtenances and all fabrication work or other mechanical and air conditioning work required, all in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures. B. Data to be submitted shall include but not be limited to: 1. Catalog data consisting of specifications, illustrations and a parts schedule that identifies the materials to be used for the various parts and accessories. Identify component materials of construction such as: casing and insulation, floor, curb/foundation, access panels, drain pan, filter support racks, dampers, fan housing and supports 2. Physical drawings indicating unit dimensions, required O&M clearances, field connection locations, shipping splits, and support/curb drawings. 3. Catalog data for all components such as fans, motors, VFDs, vibration isolators, coils, dampers and actuators, valves, compressors, filters, airflow measuring stations, airflow switches, filter differential sensors/switches, condensate switches, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, smoke detectors, controllers, etc. 4. Coatings, including supplemental coatings as specified. 5. Coil heating and cooling performance characteristics. Report coil performance in accordance with the applicable AHRI standard. 6. Supply fan performance characteristics. Report fan performance in accordance with AMCA or AHRI rating system. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-2 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS 7. Sound performance characteristics at unit inlet and outlet connections. Report sound power in accordance with a recognized standard such as AHRI, AMCA, ANSI, or ISO. 8. Losses for each component that induces a static pressure drop. 9. Unit casing deflection and leakage performance. 10. Electrical characteristics, wiring, diagrams, etc. 11. Unitary and system control information including wiring diagrams, input/output modules, thermostats, field devices, and other relevant controls information. 12. Piping connection drawings. 13. Include all specification technical exceptions in the submittal. The manufacturer agrees that the equipment is in compliance with Specification Sections that are not identified in the list of technical exceptions. C. Testing and startup documentation: 1. Submit results of all refrigerant testing and charging, including quantity of refrigerant charge. 2. Submit manufacturer installation checklists after completion. 3. Submit results of functional testing performed by manufacturer's representative. D. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manual in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted for all equipment. 1. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor replacement, spare parts lists and wiring diagrams. 2. In addition to a full set of manuals with closeout documentation, each unit shall ship with its own manual in a watertight enclosure. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years of documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product. B. All material and equipment shall be the latest design, new, not deteriorated, and the first quality standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and equipment. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-3 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS C. When two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. D. All work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers skilled in their respective trades, and all materials and equipment shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturers and in accordance with specified codes and standards. E. Touch up and/or repaint to match original factory finishes or specially applied corrosion resistant coatings for all finished or painted equipment and materials which are scratched or marred during shipment or installation. F. Warranty 1. All components, parts, and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year. The period of such warranties shall start on the date the particular equipment is placed in use by the Owner with corresponding start-up certification provided by the manufacturer's technical representative as specified herein, provided that the equipment demonstrates satisfactory performance during the thirty day operational period after the equipment startup. If the equipment does not perform satisfactorily during the thirty day operational period, the start of the warranty period will be delayed until the equipment demonstrates proper operation. The Equipment Supplier shall repair or replace without charge to the Owner any part of equipment which is defective or showing undue wear within the guarantee period, or replace the equipment with new equipment if the mechanical performance is unsatisfactory; furnishing all parts, materials, labor, etc., necessary to return the equipment to its specified performance level. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under the provisions of Division 1. B. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. D. Protect openings in casing and seal them with plastic wrap to keep dirt and debris. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs. E. Wrap indoor units with a tight sealing membrane. Wrapping membrane shall cover entire AHU during shipping and storage. Cover equipment, regardless of size or shape. Alternatively, AHU must be tarped for shipment and storage. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-4 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS F. Wrap equipment, including electrical components, for protection against rain, snow, wind, dirt, sun fading, road salt/chemicals, rust and corrosion. Keep equipment clean and dry. G. Tarp outdoor units to protect against rain and road debris during shipping. H. Clearly mark AHU sections with unit tag number, segment sequence number, and direction of airflow. Securely affix safety-warning labels. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR HANDLING UNITS UP TO 25 TONS A. Provide packaged air handling unit(s) manufactured by one of the following: 1. Trane Precedent (Basis of Design) 2. Daikin 3. Carrier 4. York, Division of JCI (Johnson Controls) 5. Or Approved Equal. B. Unit Casing, Frame and General Construction: 1. Unit shall comply with UL 60335-2-40. 2. Provide a structural base rail under the full perimeter of the unit, formed from galvanized steel. Base of unit shall be provided with foil-faced closed-cell insulation. 3. Unit Casings: a. The air handling unit casing shall be constructed in a watertight and airtight manner, with zinc-coated, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel with coating of paint meeting ASTM B117, 672 salt spray test. b. Vertical panels and top covers shall be insulated with a cleanable foil-faced fire-retardant, odorless fiberglass material. C. Provide removable maintenance access panels. Fasteners shall provide a watertight and airtight seal. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-5 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS d. Base pan shall have no penetrations other than openings for downflow units. Openings for downflow units shall include a 1-inch lip to prevent any water that accumulates on base pan from entering ductwork. 4. Provide water tight roof curb for downflow units to connect to supply and return ducts. Curb shall be constructed of galvanized steel, furnished with foam board or closed-cell insulation and a wood nailing strip. Where manufacturer does not provide insulation, contractor shall field-install insulation on vertical walls of curb. C. Drain Pans: 1. Provide drain pans constructed of Type 304 stainless steel on airside with insulation between pan and casing for all cooling coils. 2. Any condensation from the drain pan or drain connection shall be corrected by unit manufacturer to the satisfaction of the Owner, and at no expense to the Owner. 3. Drain pans must be sloped for complete drainage and in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 62. Drain pan shall be of adequate size to collect all condensate produced by the coil in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62. Unit condensate drain inlet shall be centered on bottom of drain pan to allow complete drainage. 4. Provide float switch for monitoring of condensate high-level in drain pan. High- level in drain pan shall shut down air handler and generate alarm on unit controller. D. Fan Sections: 1. Provide direct drive plenum fan(s) with high-efficiency variable speed motor(s). E. Heating and Cooling Sections: 1. General: a. Coils are to be rated in accordance with AHRI certified data to meet or exceed the required capacities in accordance with listed parameters, water flow, temperatures and airflow rates as scheduled on the Drawings. b. Select air velocity and row quantity for cooling coils to prevent moisture carry over. 2. Refrigerant System: a. Provide AHRI rated direct expansion (DX) cooling coils. b. Evaporator and condenser coils shall be designed for use with R-454B or R- 32 with aluminum fins bonded to copper tubes. Provide hail guards for condenser coils. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-6 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS C. Determine number of rows and circuiting arrangement to achieve performance; coil performance data shall be certified in accordance with AHRI. d. Headers shall have bottom connections for gravity drainage of oil. e. Individual coils shall be leak-tested 600 psig followed by a leak-test of the assembled unit at 465 psig. f. Unit shall be provided with field-installed accessories to extend cooling operation down to 0 'F. g. Unit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil for humidity control. h. Unit shall be provided with direct-drive, hermetic, scroll-type compressors with centrifugal oil pumps. Compressors shall be protected with internal overloads and crankcase heaters. Cooling-only DX systems shall be ultra high-efficiency, utilizing variable speed compressors or multi-stage compressors with no less than 3 stages. i. Factory installed and tested refrigerant piping system shall include the following components: indoor coil thermal expansion valves, service valves, low and high pressure switches, filter drier, and compressor discharge thermostat. 1) Heat pump units shall also include a 4-way valve, outdoor thermostatic expansion valve, and outdoor coil temperature sensor to support heat pump operation and defrost. 2) Units with hot gas reheat shall also include check, solenoid, and 3-way valves needed for dehumidification control,. j. Unit shall be provided with direct-drive condenser fans, statically and dynamically balanced, with permanently lubricated bearings and built-in thermal overload protection. F. Filter Section: 1. Provide disposable 2-inches deep. Filter shall be UL 900 listed with a minimum rating of MERV 8, unless otherwise specified. Filter modules shall have a maximum width of 24 inches. 2. Air shall not be allowed to bypass around filters. Provision shall be made to positively lock filters in place to prevent shifting and bypassing. 3. The air handling unit manufacturer shall provide one (1) set of scheduled filters for each air handling unit as shown on the Drawings. The filters shall be boxed and ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-7 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS placed within the air handling unit during shipment. The box shall identify the type of filter and be labeled with the corresponding air handling unit identification tag number. 4. Filter Switches: Provide a differential pressure switch to indicate filter status and generate alarm. G. Mixing Box and Economizer Section: 1. Provide rain hood with automatic motorized damper. 2. Provide unit with mixing box for introducing outdoor ventilation air with return air and capable of air-side economization. 3. Outdoor and return air motorized dampers shall be fully-modulating, constructed of double-skin airfoil design with compressible metal jamb seals and flexible blade- edge seals on all blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings and rated at no greater than 4 cfm/sf at 1.0 inwg pressure differential (AMCA 511 Class 1). 4. Provide barometric relief damper. Where indicated on the equipment schedule, provide a powered exhauster to control building pressure during economizer operation. 2.02 ELECTRICAL A. Fan Motors 1. Provide fan motors built in accordance with the latest standards of the NEMA and IEEE. 2. Provide AHU and fan motors in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1. 3. Provide fan motors with the following characteristics: a. Voltage, Frequency and Phase, as scheduled. b. Motor RPM, as scheduled C. Minimum service factor of 1.15 d. Premium efficiency, or as required to meet ASHRAE 90.1 e. NEMA design ball bearing type f. Rated for continuous duty at full load in a 104°F (40°C) ambient g. Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) as scheduled. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-8 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS h. Suitable for use in variable frequency application, per NEMA MG-1 Part 30 i. Premium Efficiency Inverter ready per NEMA STD MG1 PART 31.4.4.2 B. Provide UL or ETL listed molded case single-point disconnect switch within a watertight enclosure and wiring to the unit's incoming power terminal block. C. Provide UL or ETL listed VFD or EC motor controller to modulate fan speed, within a weathertight enclosure. D. Provide phase monitor to protect equipment from phase loss, phase reversal, and phase unbalance. E. Provide factory installed marine lights in each section and a GFCI convenience outlet. Lights and receptacles shall be powered by an independent source to allow unit service while power circuit to unit has been locked out. 2.03 FACTORY-ENGINEERED AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Controls shall be factory supplied, wired to the manufacturer's standard system controller(s) and tested to facilitate field commissioning of the unit. Field mounted components, such as thermostats and duct detectors, shall be shipped loose for field installation with designated terminals in the unit's controller or a factory-installed terminal board. B. Units provided with a factory wired, installed and tested unit controller(s), shall be capable of standalone unit operation, or tied into a Building Management System (BMS) through Bacnet communication. All factory mounted control points in unit shall be tested prior to shipment. C. Unitary controls shall be coordinated with Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) supplied to ensure compatibility and to provide all functionality and signals as specified, capable of controlling all unitary or system functions including but not limited be to: 1. Programmable thermostat and on-board controller capable of standalone control functions such as: a. Occupied / unoccupied modes including temperature setback and outdoor air damper closure during occupied mode. b. Capable of providing continuous ventilation during occupied mode, regardless of heating or cooling demand. C. Capable of providing morning warm-up or cool-down prior to occupancy. d. Capable of discharge air reset at part load conditions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-9 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS e. Capable of communicating with VAV boxes when unit switches to heating mode. f. Capable of operating as a single zone unit based on discharge air or zone temperature. 2. Supply fan start/stop and speed control. Provide supply duct static pressure sensor to control fan speed. 3. Outdoor air and/or return air damper modulation, including economizer controls. 4. Electric heating coil modulation. 5. Gas furnace capacity modulation and safety controls. 6. DX cooling/heating capacity modulation and safety controls, including humidity control. 7. Refrigerant leak detection sensor and controls to execute mitigating actions such as: circulate airflow for dilution, disable compressors, output to open zone dampers, and output to energy supplemental ventilation equipment. 8. Supply and return air smoke detectors. 9. Discharge air temperature sensor. 10. Ventilation override operation allowing functions such as smoke purge, pressurization, and exhaust. 11. Unit controller shall be suitable for interfacing with a Building Management System via BACnet. 12. Economizer controller shall include a Fault Detection and Diagnostics component that is capable of performing all monitoring, status indication, and fault detection as required in the Energy Conservation Code. D. Refer to control sequence and drawings for additional information, including interlocked or other system components such as return fans, exhaust fans, purge fans, VAV boxes, zone thermostats, occupancy sensors, etc. E. Additional considerations: 1. All factory wiring shall be internal to the unit to minimize casing leakage. 2. All wiring at unit splits shall be connected with quick-connects- no field splicing of wiring is allowed. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-1000MMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS 3. Control panels shall be factory mounted and all end devices shall be terminated either directly to the controller or to a terminal block. 4. Control panels shall include integral 24VAC transformers with circuit breaker overloads. 5. No low voltage controls or communication wiring can be run in the same tray, conduit or proximity as any medium or high voltage wiring. 6. Mount averaging temperature sensors to cover as much cross-sectional area of the interior unit as possible. Provide end and support brackets to support sensing element and eliminate strain. 7. When mounting probe temperature sensing elements at discharge and air inlet openings, use support brackets to provide a solid mounting location to minimize vibration effects. 8. Mount all actuators for control dampers within the frame of the damper. Actuators are to be mounted on the access side of the damper to facilitate commissioning and servicing. 9. Mount high temperature cut out sensors so that the manual reset switch is accessible from the fan section access door. The temperature sensor should be mounted in the discharge air stream. 10. High and low pressure cutout devices should be mounted so that the manual reset switch is accessible from the fan section access door without putting operator at risk. 11. The differential pressure switch for filters should have pressure pick up points located on either side of the filter section. 12. Factory mounted control panels shall be mounted to the exterior wall of the supply fan section. Internal unit wiring is brought into the panel through a single rear knockout. The penetration should be sealed to prevent air and leakage moisture leakage. Unless single point power option is selected, power to the control panel requires a field—supplied connection. 13. Factory packaged controls shall be factory tested using a functional test method. All inputs (Al, BI, DI) and outputs (AO, BO, DO) shall be tested. All sensors and switches shall be cycled through a change of state. All actuators shall be stroked to verify correct operation and rotation through the full operating range. The factory test data results shall be fully documented including all operational conditions. A factory test report document shall be available for each unit. The factory test report shall be provided to the commissioning agent. 2.04 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-11 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS A. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe: Drain, waste and sanitary pipes and fittings shall be DWV Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM D2665. 2. Joints: Chemical weld with manufacturers recommended solvent. 2.05 APPURTENANCES A. Provide rain hoods on outdoor unit air intakes, as shown on drawings. Provide moisture screens on outdoor air inlet rain hoods. B. Provide steel, (structural formed or welded) base rails suitable for rigging and lifting, as shown on product drawings. C. Provide safety grates over bottom openings, as shown on drawings. 1. Safety grates shall be capable of supporting a 300 lb. center load. D. Provide lifting lugs where required. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Install in conformance with AHRI standards. D. Condensate drain piping shall be pitched at % inch per foot from the air handling unit. E. Make joints and connections fully gasketed and airtight. F. Contractor shall furnish and maintain and replace clean pre-filter media in each air handling unit as listed in the equipment schedule on the Drawings during start-up and construction. The Contractor shall install the tagged set of new filter products provided by the air handling unit manufacturer for each unit after it has been tested, commissioned and receives final acceptance by the Owner. G. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been tested run under Owner representatives' observation. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-12COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS H. Equipment Cleaning 1. Clean dirt and marks and other debris from exterior of equipment. 2. Remove debris and waste material resulting from installation. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Furnish services of qualified manufacturer's factory trained service personnel to assist in the installation of the equipment, check the installation before it is placed into operation, supervise initial operations and instruct plant operators in the care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. B. Pre-Startup Inspections and Equipment Startup: 1. All pre-startup checklists shall be completed and submitted to Engineer. 2. Results of manufacturer's standard startup procedures shall be submitted to Engineer. Startup shall demonstrate system's ability to perform all operating sequences and modes of operation. C. Owner Training: 1. Training for system operation and maintenance shall be provided to the Owner. Refer to Division 01 specifications for additional requirements. 3.03 GUARANTEE A. All components, parts, and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year. The period of such warranties shall start on the date the particular equipment is placed in use by the Owner with corresponding start-up certification provided by the manufacturer's technical representative as specified herein, provided that the equipment demonstrates satisfactory performance during the thirty day operational period after the equipment startup. If the equipment does not perform satisfactorily during the thirty-day operational period, the start of the warranty period will be delayed until the equipment demonstrates proper operation. The Equipment Supplier shall repair or replace without charge to the Owner any part of equipment which is defective or showing undue wear within the guarantee period, or replace the equipment with new equipment if the mechanical performance is unsatisfactory; furnishing all parts, materials, labor, etc., necessary to return the equipment to its specified performance level. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-13COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 23 74 00-1 COMMERCIAL PACKAGED DX UNITS SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for, or incidental, to the furnishing and installation of all electrical work as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and completely coordinate with the work of other trades involved in the general construction. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be furnished and installed as part of this work. The Contractor shall obtain approved Shop Drawings showing wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, roughing-in and hook up details for all equipment and comply therewith. All electrical work shall be complete and left in operating condition in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and the Specifications for the electrical work. B. Reference the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). All requirements within the Division 26 specifications and the Standard Detail Drawings included in the City Standards apply to this project unless otherwise specified herein. Where there is a conflict in the referenced specifications and these specifications, the stricter requirements of this project shall take precedence. C. The electrical scope of work for this project primarily includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Demolition of electrical equipment and raceway systems as shown on the Drawings. 2. Modifications of existing electrical equipment as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 3. Furnish and install low voltage motor control equipment. 4. Furnish and install power panelboards, lighting panelboards, dry-type transformers, and other low voltage electrical power distribution equipment. 5. Furnish and install all aboveground raceway systems including cable tray, conduit, fittings, boxes, supports, and other pertinent components. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 6. Furnish and install all low voltage wire and cable resulting in a complete and operable electrical system. 7. Furnish and install new lighting systems and wiring devices. 8. Furnish and install complete grounding and bonding systems. 9. Other electrical work as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. D. All material and equipment must be the product of an established, reputable, and approved manufacturer; must be new and of first class construction; must be designed and guaranteed to perform the service required; and must bear the label of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., where such approval is available for the product of the listed manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. E. When a specified or indicated item has been superseded or is no longer available, the manufacturer's latest equivalent type or model of material or equipment as approved by the Engineer shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Where the Contractor's selection of equipment of specified manufacturers or additionally approved manufacturers requires changes or additions to the system design, the Contractor shall be responsible in all respects for the modifications to all system designs, subject to approval of the Engineer. The Contractor's bid shall include all costs for all work of the Contract for all trades made necessary by such changes, additions or modifications or resulting from any approved substitution. G. Furnish and install all stands, racks, brackets, supports, and similar equipment required to properly serve the equipment which is furnished under this Contract, or equipment otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. H. All electrical components and systems (e.g., cable tray, conduit and other raceways, freestanding equipment, etc.) and their anchorage, including electrical equipment foundations, shall be designed to resist the controlling load combination of gravity loads, operational forces, wind forces, seismic forces, thermal loads, and any other applicable forces required in accordance with the governing Building Code. 1.02 EQUIPMENT LOCATION A. The Drawings show the general location of equipment, feeders, transformers, outlets, cable tray, conduits, and circuit arrangements. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the details involved. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange such 0 work accordingly; furnishing such fittings, junction boxes, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. The Contractor shall refer to the entire Drawing set to verify openings, special surfaces, and location of other equipment, or other special ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-2 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS equipment prior to roughing-in for panels, switches, and other outlets. The Contractor shall verify all equipment dimensions to ensure that proposed equipment will fit properly in spaces indicated. B. Where outlets are shown near identified equipment furnished by this or other Contractors, it is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings that the outlet be located at the equipment to be served. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of these outlets to be near the final location of the equipment served whether placed correctly or incorrectly on the Drawings. 1.03 LOCAL CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall examine the site and become familiar with conditions affecting the work. The Contractor shall investigate, determine, and verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near the site, and shall determine such locations in conjunction with all public and/or private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. All costs, both temporary and permanent to connect all utilities, shall be included in the Bid. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordinating with the local utility for temporary and permanent services. B. In addition, the Contractor shall relocate all duct banks, lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches, boxes, and other electrical equipment as necessary to facilitate the Work included in this project. Costs for such work shall be included in the Bid. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures and the requirements of the individual Specification Sections, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 3. Spare Parts List 4. Proposed Testing Methods and Reports of Certified Shop Tests 5. Reports of Certified Field Tests 6. Manufacturer's Representative's Certification B. Submittals shall be sufficiently complete in detail to enable the Engineer to determine compliance with Contract requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-3 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Submittals will be approved only to the extent of the information shown. Approval of an item of equipment shall not be construed to mean approval for components of that item for which the Contractor has provided no information. D. Some individual electrical specification sections may require a Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter to be submitted. If the CD&E letter is required and shop drawings are submitted without the letter, the submittal will be rejected. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor AND Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. This letter shall include a copy of this specification section. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter"C", "D", or"E" shall be typed or written in. The letter"C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. Any requirements with the letter "D" or "E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to the applicable specification section(s). E. Submit design for all nonstructural electrical components and systems and their anchorage in accordance with the governing Building Code. 1.05 APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS A. Conformance 1. Unless otherwise noted, all work, equipment, and materials furnished shall conform with the latest available version of the rules, requirements, and specifications of the following: a. Insurance Rating Organization having jurisdiction b. The serving electrical utility company C. The currently adopted edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) d. The National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) e. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) f. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) g. The American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) h. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-4 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS i. The requirements of the Occupational Safety Hazards Act (OSHA) j. The National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Standard of Installation k. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) I. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) m. All other applicable Federal, State/Commonwealth and local laws and/or ordinances. 2. All equipment and materials shall be Listed by and shall bear the Label of Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated (UL), if the material and equipment is of the type/class inspected by said laboratories. B. Nonconformance 1. Any paragraph of requirements in these Specifications or Drawings deviating from the rules, requirements, and specifications of the above organizations shall be invalid and their (the above organizations) requirements shall hold precedent thereto. The Contractor shall be held responsible for adherence to all rules, requirements, and specifications as set forth above. Any additional work or material necessary for adherence will not be allowed as an extra, but shall be included in the Bid. Ignorance of any rule, requirement, or specification shall not be allowed as an excuse for nonconformity. Acceptance by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from the expense involved for the correction of any errors which may exist in the drawings submitted or in the satisfactory operation of any equipment. C. Certification 1. Where applicable, upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain certificate(s) of inspection and approval from the the inspection organization having jurisdiction and shall deliver same to the Engineer and the Owner. 1.06 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall reference the General Conditions and Section 01 11 00 — Summary of Work. 1.07 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER A. The Contractor shall reference the General Conditions and Section 01 50 00—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.08 TESTS ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-5 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall perform tests for operation, load (Phase) balance, overloads, and short circuits. Tests shall be made with and to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. B. The Contractor shall perform all field tests and shall provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing and shall pay for electric power required for the tests. All defective material and workmanship disclosed shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating condition. Test shall be such that each item of control equipment will function not less than five (5) times. C. Refer to each individual specification section for detailed test requirements. D. The Contractor shall complete the installation and field testing of the electrical installation at least two (2) weeks prior to the start-up and testing of all other equipment. During the period between the completion of electrical installation and the start-up and testing of all other equipment, the Contractor shall make all components of the Work available as it is completed for their use in performing Preliminary and Final Field Tests. E. Before each test commences, the Contractor shall submit a detailed test procedure, and also provide test engineer resume, personnel and scheduling information for the approval by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish detailed test procedures for any electrical equipment required as part of the field tests of other systems. 1.09 INFRARED INSPECTION A. Just prior to the final acceptance of a piece of equipment, the Contractor shall perform an infrared inspection to locate and correct all heating problems associated with electrical equipment terminations. The infrared inspection shall be performed by a third party, independent testing agency, not the Electrical Contractor. B. The infrared inspection shall apply to all new equipment and existing equipment that is in any way modified under this Contract. All heating problems detected with new equipment furnished and installed under the Scope of this Contract shall be corrected by the Contractor. All problems detected with portions of existing equipment modified under this Contract shall also be corrected by the Contractor. C. Any issues detected with portions of existing equipment that were not modified under this Contract are not the responsibility of the Contractor. Despite the Contractor not being held responsible for these problems, the Contractor shall report them to the Owner and Engineer immediately for resolution. D. The infrared inspection report shall include both digital and IR pictures positioned side by side for all equipment inspected. Both the digital and IR pictures shall be clear and high quality. Fuzzy, grainy, or poorly illuminated pictures are not acceptable. The IR picture shall be provided with a temperature scale beside it, and an indication of the hot spot ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-6 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS temperature in each picture. Reports shall be furnished in a 3-ring binder, with all pages printed in full color, with equipment assemblies separated by tabs. 1.10 PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a field services organization to adjust, set, calibrate and test all protective devices in the electrical system. The organization shall be a subsidiary of or have a franchise service agreement with the electrical equipment manufacturer. The qualifications of the organization and resumes of the technicians as well as all data forms to be used for the field testing shall be submitted. B. All protective devices in the electrical equipment shall be set, adjusted, calibrated and tested in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations, the coordination study, and best industry practice. C. Proper operation of all equipment associated with the device under test and its compartment shall be verified, as well as complete resistance, continuity and polarity tests of power, protective and metering circuits. Any minor adjustments, repairs and/or lubrication necessary to achieve proper operation shall be considered part of this Contract. D. All solid state trip devices shall be checked and tested for setting and operation using manufacturers recommended test devices and procedures. E. Circuit breakers and/or contactors associated with the above devices shall be tested for trip and close functions with their protective device. F. When completed, the Contractor shall provide a comprehensive report for all equipment tested indicating condition, readings, faults and/or deficiencies in same. Inoperative or defective equipment shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Engineer. G. Prior to placing any equipment in service, correct operation of all protective devices associated with this equipment shall be demonstrated by field testing under simulated load conditions. 1.11 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES A. The Contractor shall provide a short circuit study, coordination study, arc flash study and arc flash labels for all equipment modified, and all new equipment provided under this contract. Studies shall be performed by a registered professional engineer currently registered in the State of Texas. B. The Contractor is responsible for providing all required info to the preparer of the studies. C. A preliminary study shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to submitting electrical distribution equipment submittals to verify equipment ratings. After preliminary approval of the studies, and after approval of all equipment shop drawings, a final study shall be ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-7 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS submitted with updated calculations based on the final approved shop drawings. The Contractor shall apply arc flash labels provided by the preparer of the study at the completion of the project. 1.12 SCHEDULES AND FACILITY OPERATIONS A. Since the equipment testing required herein shall require that certain pieces of equipment be taken out of service, all testing procedures and schedules must be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval one (1) month prior to any work beginning. When testing has been scheduled, the Engineer must be notified 48 hours prior to any work to allow time for load switching and/or alternation of equipment. In addition, all testing that requires temporary shutdown of facility equipment must be coordinated with the Owner/Engineer so as not to affect proper facility operations. B. At the end of the workday, all equipment shall be back in place and ready for immediate use should a facility emergency arise. In addition, should an emergency condition occur during testing, at the request of the Owner, the equipment shall be placed back in service immediately and turned over to Owner personnel. C. In the event of accidental shutdown of Owner equipment, the Contractor shall notify Owner personnel immediately to allow for an orderly restart of affected equipment. D. Maintaining the operation of these facilities during the duration of the construction period is essential and required. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary equipment as required to maintain facility operation. All costs for temporary equipment shall be included in the Bid. 1.13 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SPARE PARTS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials arriving on the job site shall be stored in such a manner as to keep material free of rust and dirt and so as to keep material properly aligned and true to shape. Rusty, dirty, or misaligned material will be rejected. Electrical conduit shall be stored to provide protection from the weather and accidental damage. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be stored on even supports and in locations not subject to direct sun rays or excessive heat. Cables shall be sealed, stored, and handled carefully to avoid damage to the outer covering or insulation and damage from moisture and weather. Adequate protection shall be required at all times for electrical equipment and accessories until installed and accepted. Materials damaged during shipment, storage, installation, or testing shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting with the approval of the Engineer. If space heaters are provided in a piece of electrical equipment, they shall be temporarily connected to a power source during storage. The Contractor shall store equipment and materials in accordance with Division 01. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-8 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS B. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal for each Section, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. C. Spare parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts number. D. Spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended. E. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such spare parts until completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. 1.14 WARRANTIES A. Unless otherwise specified in an individual specification section, all electrical equipment and electrical construction materials shall be provided with a warranty in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions and the General Conditions. 1.15 TRAINING A. Unless otherwise specified in an individual specification section, all training for electrical equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be provided under this Specification shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of all such items and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. The products shall conform to the applicable standards of UL and NEMA, unless specified otherwise. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured, and labeled in compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable. B. All items of the same type or ratings shall be identical. This shall be further understood to include products with the accessories indicated. C. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless indicated or specified otherwise. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-9 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS D. The Contractor shall submit proof if requested by the Engineer that the materials, appliances, equipment, or devices that are provided under this Contract meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., in regard to fire and casualty hazards. The label of or listing by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., will be accepted as conforming to this requirement. E. Where the above items are Labeled by (bearing the certification mark of) an OSHA Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) other than UL, and the NRTL is authorized by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) to test and certify those items to the same standard(s), then the certification mark of that NRTL shall be considered equivalent to the `UL' certification mark. F. Where product requirements are not specified herein, the Contractor shall reference the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). Any omissions shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to submitting a Bid for the Work. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, any reference in the Specifications or on the Drawings to any article, service, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing the type, function, and standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases may use any article, device, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 2.03 CONCRETE A. The Contractor shall furnish all concrete required for the installation of all electrical work, Concrete shall be Class A unless otherwise specified. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall meet the appropriate requirements of Division 03 of the Specifications. B. The Contractor shall provide concrete equipment pads for all free-standing electrical apparatus and equipment located on new or existing floors or slabs. The Contractor shall provide all necessary anchor bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required. The exact location and dimensions shall be coordinated for each piece of equipment well in advance of the scheduled placing of these pads. Equipment pads shall be 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to standard detail for equipment pads shown on the Contract Drawings. Equipment pads shall not have more than 3 inches of excess concrete beyond the edges of the equipment. C. The Contractor shall provide concrete foundations for all free-standing electrical apparatus and equipment located outdoors or where floors or slabs do not exist and/or are not or provided by others under this Contract. The Contractor shall provide all necessary anchor bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required. The location and dimensions shall ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-10 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS be coordinated for each piece of equipment well in advance of the scheduled placing of the foundations. Equipment foundations shall be constructed as detailed on the Drawings or if not detailed on the Drawings shall be 6 inches thick minimum reinforced with #4 bars at 12-inch centers each way placed mid-depth. Concrete shall extend 6 inches minimum beyond the extreme of the equipment base and be placed on a compacted stone bed (#57 stone or ABC) 6 inches thick minimum. 2.04 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Reference Section 26 05 19 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. All individual power and control conductors shall be XHHW. 2. Power wire installed between the output terminals of a VFD and the respective motor shall be shielded VFD cable as specified herein. a. Shielded VFD cable shall consist of three (3) individually insulated copper phase conductors and three (3) bare copper grounding conductors with an overall cable shield and jacket, suitable for use with variable frequency drives. The phase conductors and ground conductors shall be symmetrically arranged within the cable assembly. Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C in both wet and dry locations, and 2000V (2kV). Insulated conductors shall be UL Listed as NEC Type RHW-2 or XHHW-2. The jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame in accordance with UL 1277. Cable shall be UL Listed as NEC Type TC-ER (Tray Cable for Exposed Runs). b. Phase conductors shall be sized as shown on the Drawings. Ground conductors shall have a combined circular mil area equivalent to the equipment grounding conductor size required by NEC Table 250.122, minimum. Filler material shall be included in the cable assembly as necessary to make the cable round. C. Cable shields shall consist of a helically applied bare copper tape with 50% overlap, minimum. For small conductor sizes where copper tape shields are not available, shields shall be permitted to consist of a layer of tin-coated copper braid covered by a layer of overlapped aluminum/polyester tape/foil. All cable shields shall provide 100% coverage. d. Conductors shall be annealed stranded copper per ASTM B3 and B8. e. Shielded VFD cable shall be manufactured by Belden Wire and Cable, the Okonite Company, General Cable, Southwire, or AmerCable Inc. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-11 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 3. All instrumentation cable to be rated 600V, 90'C for both wet and dry locations. Cable shall be UL 1277 listed as NEC Type TC. a. Cable and group shields shall consist of overlapped aluminum/polyester tape/foil providing 100% coverage. Instrumentation cables shall include an overall copper shield drain wire. Cables containing multiple twisted pairs or triads shall also include group shield drain wires. b. Conductors, including drain wires, shall be tin or alloy coated (if available), soft, annealed copper, stranded per ASTM B-8, with Class B stranding unless otherwise specified. C. Instrumentation signal conductor size shall be no smaller than No. 16 AWG. d. Instrumentation cable shall be Okoseal-N Type P-OS (for single pair or triad applications) or Okoseal-N Type SP-OS (for multiple pair or triad applications) as manufactured by the Okonite Company, Belden equivalent, Southwire Company equivalent, or equal. 4. Splicing of conductors or cables is not acceptable unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If unique field conditions exist or pulling calculations indicate that splices may be required, the Contractor shall submit a detailed request indicating why splices are required to the Engineer. The Engineer shall be under no obligation to grant such request. 5. Cables shall be terminated in accordance with the cable and/or termination product manufacturer's instructions for the particular type of cable. 6. Shielded VFD cables shall be terminated with kits required by or recommended by the approved shielded VFD cable manufacturer. Termination kits shall be installed in strict accordance with the shielded VFD cable manufacturer's and termination kit manufacturer's instructions. 2.05 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Reference Section 26 05 26 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding systems complete in accordance with the requirements established by Article 250 of the NEC. Article 250 of the NEC shall be considered as a minimum requirement for compliance with this Specification. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-12 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Grounding of all instrumentation and control systems shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the manufacturer/system requirements and IEEE 1100. Conflicts shall be promptly brough to the attention of the Engineer. 3. Underground bare copper conductors used for ground grid shall be buried a minimum of 30" below finished grade and 3'-0" minimum from foundation as indicated on the Drawings. 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Reference Section 26 05 29 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. All support channel, support channel fittings, threaded rod, and fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers) shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. The Contractor shall furnish leveling channels for all motor control centers and similar floor mounted equipment. The leveling channels shall be provided for embedment in the equipment housekeeping pads. Coordination of the installation of these channels with the concrete pad is essential and required. Pad height shall be as required to maintain concrete coverage of the reinforcement bars while not causing associated equipment to exceed the maximum mounting height requirements of the NEC. 3. Actual designs for supporting framework should take the nature of a picture frame of support channels and bracket with a plate for mounting the components. The Contractor is responsible for the design of supporting structure; Contractor shall submit design details to the Engineer for acceptance before proceeding with the fabrication. 4. Support design for all nonstructural electrical components (e.g., conduit and other raceways, freestanding equipment, etc.) shall be provided in accordance with the governing Building Code. 2.07 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Reference Section 26 05 33 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. EMT, IMC, ENT, HDPE, and RTRC conduit, tubing, and fitting types shall not be utilized for this project. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-13 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Rigid aluminum conduit and associated fittings shall be used for all exposed rigid conduit applications. Rigid conduit shall be UL 6A Listed. 3. PVC coated rigid Aluminum conduit shall be utilized where exposed conduit is in direct contact with the ground, concrete, grout, or other materials detrimental to aluminum conduit. 4. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) and associated fittings shall be utilized to connect to vibrating equipment and instruments to allow for maintenance and provide a degree of movement. a. LFMC conduit shall be UL 360 Listed for 80 degrees C dry, 60 degrees C wet. b. Conduit termination fittings shall be constructed of either Type 316 stainless steel or an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated on the exterior with a 40 mil (minimum) PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a 2 mil (minimum) layer of urethane. PVC coated fittings shall have a sealing sleeve constructed of PVC which covers the connection to conduit. 5. All outdoor boxes and enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel or aluminum. 6. All indoor boxes and enclosures, located in an environmentally conditioned space, shall be NEMA 12 painted steel. 2.08 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Reference Section 26 05 36 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). 2.09 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Reference Section 26 05 53 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Reference Section 26 24 16 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). 2.11 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS A. Reference Section 26 24 19 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-14 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2.12 WIRING DEVICES A. Reference Section 26 27 26 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. Replace references of TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor with SPD: Surge Protective Device. 2. All wiring devices shall be listed for use with stranded conductors. 2.13 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Reference Section 26 28 16 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards). 2.14 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Reference Section 26 29 23.02 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. Low voltage variable frequency drives shall be incorporated into the motor control center lineup as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Primary controls and monitoring for the variable frequency drives shall be 120vac hardwired controls as indicated on the drawings. Ethernet connectivity shall be provided for supplemental remote monitoring. 2.15 LIGHTING A. Reference Section 26 5100 from the City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Project E13064, Rev 0 24 May 2018 (City Standards) except as follows: 1. Remove all references to fluorescent and HID fixtures. All fixtures provided under this Contract shall be LED type fixtures. 2. Reference the fixture schedule on the Contract Drawings for fixture types, fixture options, and other requirements. 2.16 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS A. Reference Section 26 09 16 for requirements for pilot devices, control relays,timing relays, local control stations, and terminal blocks. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-15 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2.17 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER A. Reference Section 26 29 20 for requirements for active harmonic filters. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Coordination 1. The Work shall be coordinated between all trades to avoid delays and unnecessary cutting, channeling and drilling. Sleeves shall be placed in concrete for passage of conduit wherever possible. B. Damage 1. The Contractor shall perform all chasing, channeling, drilling and patching necessary to the proper execution of this Contract. Any damage to the building, structure, or any equipment shall be repaired by qualified mechanics of the trades involved at the Contractor's expense. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the repair of damaged equipment would not be satisfactory, then the Contractor shall replace damaged equipment at the Contractor's expense. C. Existing Equipment 1. Provide a suitable cover or plug for openings created in existing equipment as the result of work under this Contract. For example, provide round plugs in equipment enclosures where the removal of a conduit creates a hole and the enclosure. Covers and plugs shall maintain the NEMA rating of the equipment enclosure. Covers and plugs shall be watertight when installed in equipment located outdoors. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfill required for the installation of all electrical work. All excavation and backfilling shall be in complete accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 31. 3.03 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come into contact, the Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with neoprene washers, nine (9) mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-16 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 00-17 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 26 05 60 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into satisfactory operation all low voltage electric motors as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All motors required for this Contract shall comply with this Section unless otherwise noted. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Motors and related accessories shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) a. IEEE 112 —Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) a. NEMA MG 1 — Motors and Generators 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 547 — Standard for Safety Thermal Protectors for Motors b. UL 674 — Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations C. UL 1004-1 — Standard for Rotating Electrical Machines d. UL 1004-3— Standard for Thermally Protected Motors e. UL 1004-8— Standard for Inverter Duty Motors 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Spare Parts List. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Individual shop drawings for electric motors shall be submitted in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, unless submitted as a part of the shop drawings for the driven equipment. D. Shop drawings for electric motors shall include motor data sheets, dimensioned drawings, wiring diagrams for devices such as space heaters, temperature devices, and shaft grounding rings. Shop drawings shall identify electric characteristics and design, mechanical construction, manufacturer's name, type and pertinent specifications for the use intended, along with the name of the equipment to be driven. Submittal of motor data for acceptance shall include, as a minimum, the following: 1. Manufacturer's type and frame designation 2. Horsepower rating 3. Time rating (per NEMA Standards) 4. Ambient temperature rating 5. Motor winding insulation system designation 6. RPM at rated load 7. Frequency 8. Number of phases 9. Rated-load amperes 10. Voltage ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS 11. Code letter (starting KVA per horsepower) 12. Design letter for integral horsepower induction motors (per NEMA Standards) 13. Service factor 14. Temperature rise at full load and at service factor load 15. Efficiency at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and full load 16. Power factor at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and full load 17. Motor outline, dimensions and weight 18. Motor winding insulation system description 19. Horsepower required by connected machine at specified conditions (load curves) shall be supplied for all motors. E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. Electric motors shall be manufactured by Baldor/Reliance Electric Company; Nidec Motors; Toshiba Industrial and Power Systems, Inc.; Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.; General Electric Company; or Engineer approved equal. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS 2.02 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA, including, but not limited to MG-1 and MG-2, IEEE, ANSI and to the requirements specified herein. B. Type 1. Unless otherwise noted, motors specified herein shall be polyphase squirrel cage, NEMA Design B, or single phase capacitor or repulsion start induction motors. Special equipment requiring a motor drive with unusual characteristics shall be equipped with a definite purpose motor to meet the necessary requirements. 2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all motors 1/2 horsepower or larger shall be three- phase, 60 Hertz, NEMA Design B, squirrel cage induction motors designed for operation at 480 volts or greater as specified herein or shown on the Drawings. 3. Unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification for the driven equipment, or as required by the dynamic characteristics of the load as determined by the manufacturer of the machine to be driven, all polyphase squirrel cage motors shall be designed to withstand the starting voltage shown on the Drawings and shall have torque and locked rotor current characteristics as specified for NEMA Design B motors. 4. All motors 2 horsepower and smaller shall have windings encapsulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with the manufacturer's premium quality system which shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. 5. Unless otherwise noted, all motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall be standard single-phase capacitor start or repulsion start induction type designed for operation on 120 volts or 208 volts, 60 Hz alternating current. The motor shall deliver rated load without exceeding a 80 degrees C temperature rise while operating in a 40 degrees C ambient temperature. Small fan motors less than 1/4 HP may be split-phase or shaded pole type. Shaded pole motors rated more than 1/4 horsepower are not acceptable. Fractional horsepower motors shall be completely equipped with all necessary auxiliary components for starting and labeled as "Thermally Protected". Insulation shall be Class B, except that submersible motors shall have epoxy encapsulation. Unless otherwise noted, the motors shall be totally enclosed. Small fan motors may be of the open type where they are suitably protected from moisture dripping and lint accumulation. Motors shall be provided with sealed ball bearings lubricated for 10 years of normal use. 6. Where specified, vertical hollowshaft motors shall be designed to carry the motors', pumps', and associated equipment's full thrust. The motors shall be equipped with grease lubricated spherical roller thrust bearings and lower radial guide bearings. Vertical hollowshaft motors shall be fitted with nonreversing ratchet assemblies ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS where required by equipment specifications. Vertical adjustment shall be provided by means of a lockable nut at the top of the shaft. 7. Vertical hollowshaft motors shall have adequate thrust bearings to carry all motor loads and any other operating equipment loads. Horizontal motors shall not be installed where subjected to external thrust loads. C. Rating 1. Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service through its acceleration range and throughout its rated load range. The rating of the motors offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower shown on the Drawings or elsewhere specified. It should be noted that the motor sizes indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified herein, are motor sizes required to operate the specific equipment which is specified. Higher rated motor sizes may be determined from the actual equipment submitted, approved, purchased, and installed. Protective devices, motor starters, disconnect switches, and other necessary equipment shall be furnished and installed for the actual motor sizes required at no additional cost. 2. Motor ratings shall be based on continuous operation. The maximum temperature rise for open and drip proof type motors shall not exceed 90 degrees C, and for totally enclosed type motors shall not exceed 80 degrees C. D. Motor Winding Insulation 1. Insulation shall be as specified for each particular type or class of motor. The insulation system shall provide a high dielectric strength, long life covering for the windings which may be required to operate in a continually damp, corrosive, and/or chemically contaminated environment. The insulation shall be resistant to attack by moisture, acids, alkalies, abrasives, and mechanical and thermal shock. Leads shall be sealed with a non-wicking, non-hydroscopic insulation material. 2. Motor insulation resistance may be checked at any time after delivery to the job site or during the warranty period. Encapsulated motor stators may be subjected to insulation testing while completely submerged in water. Any motor not meeting the requirements specified herein will be rejected and shall be promptly replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3. Torque and locked rotor current characteristics for three phase motors shall be NEMA Design B. The locked rotor KVA/HP input at full voltage for 10 horsepower. motors and larger shall not exceed that permitted for Code Letter "J", except for specialized equipment requiring a motor drive with special definite characteristics. 4. Unless otherwise specified, non-inverter duty motors shall be furnished with a Class F insulation system. Unless otherwise specified, inverter duty motors shall ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-5 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS be furnished with a Class H insulation system. In either case, temperature rise shall be limited to that for Class B insulation. Output torque and speed characteristics of each motor shall be suitable to operate the driven equipment through the full range of acceleration and operating load conditions without exceeding the nameplate current rating, and/or temperature rise. E. Nameplates 1. The motor manufacturer's nameplate shall be engraved, embossed, or stamped on a stainless steel sheet and fastened to the motor frame with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Printed or laser-etched nameplates are not acceptable. 2. Nameplates shall include as a minimum, Items 1 through 14 as listed in Article 1.04 D in addition to that required by NEMA standards. The nameplate shall be positioned so as to be readily visible for inspection as installed in the facility. F. Design 1. Motors shall be designed to accelerate and drive the connected equipment under all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings. 2. Motors specified for operation with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated. Motors shall be considered inverter duty rated only if they meet all of the requirements for NEMA MG-1 Part 31. 3. Motors shall be designed to output 100 percent of nameplate horsepower under continuous duty service without exceeding the temperature rise specified herein when controlled by the actual drives furnished. Inverter duty motors shall be designed to operate down to 10% of full load speed without the need for a line powered cooling fan. 4. Unless otherwise specified, electric motors shall be furnished with service factors in accordance with NEMA MG-1 as follows: Type of Motor Service Factor Non-inverter Duty 1.15 Inverter Duty 1.0 5. Design selection with respect to the driven machine shall be such that the requirements do not exceed 85 percent of the motors' maximum rating modified by service factor, ambient temperature, enclosure, altitude and electrical service. The electrical service conditions shall be assumed to be 10 percent undervoltage, 5 percent underfrequency, and 3 percent voltage unbalance. Altitude shall be ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-6 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS assumed to be the project site elevation plus 10 percent. Ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 95 degrees F in exterior locations, 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) in interior locations, and 122 degrees F (50 degrees C)within housings or enclosures; except where higher temperatures may be encountered within or on individual items of equipment. The applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG-1 shall be used in making the design selection. 6. Motors used with belt drives shall have sliding bases to provide for belt take up. 7. Terminal boxes shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the required quantity and size of conduits. Gasketed terminal boxes shall be furnished with all splash-proof and totally enclosed motors. NEMA ratings of the terminal boxes shall be suited for the application. Terminal boxes shall be sized to accommodate accessory equipment such as motor differential current transformers, where required. 8. Terminal boxes for horizontal motors shall be located on the left-hand side when viewing the motor from the drive shaft end and shall be so designed that conduit entrance can be made from above, below, or either side of the terminal box. G. Construction 1. Frames, mounting means, and shafts shall meet NEMA Standards for the horsepower, RPM, and enclosure selected. Enclosures shall be selected according to the degree of mechanical protection required and shall not be of aluminum construction. All motors shall have a manufacturer's standard shop machinery finish, consisting of a rust-resisting priming coat of zinc chromate and a finish coat of alkyd machinery enamel. Reference Section 09 90 00— Painting. 2. Motors shall have cast iron frames and a heavy gauge steel terminal box, with neoprene gaskets between the frame and the box and between the box and its cover. A grounding lug(s) shall be provided inside the terminal box. 3. Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be equipped with at least one lifting eye. All lifting hardware shall be corrosion resistant. 4. When located outdoors, or elsewhere if specified, motors shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated (TENV) or totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) machines, unless otherwise noted. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with two (2) 1/4 inch drain holes drilled through the bottom of the frame, which allows complete drainage of the frame. Where specified, TEFC motors controlled by a variable frequency drive shall be provided with a separately powered cooling fan motor that runs at 60HZ to ensure proper cooling of the motor at low speeds. Cooling fan motor shall be suitable for 120VAC, single phase operation. Vertically oriented motors located outdoors shall be provided with a drip cover over the fan end to prevent accumulation of precipitation. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-7 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS 5. Unless otherwise specified, motors located outdoors, in unheated structures, in below grade areas, or as otherwise indicated, shall be furnished with space heaters and embedded motor winding high temperature switches with leads brought out of the motor terminal box. Space heaters shall be suitable for 120VAC operation and for a maximum surface temperature of less than 200 degrees C. Space heaters shall be of sufficient wattage to maintain the internal temperature of the motor at approximately 10 degrees C above the ambient temperature when the motor is not running. a. Embedded motor winding temperature switches shall operate at temperatures well below the temperature rating of the motor winding insulation system. 6. If so specified and when located in indoor areas which are heated and weatherproof, motors shall be open drip-proof machines. Ventilation openings shall be arranged to prevent the entrance of drops of liquid or solid particles at any angle from zero to 15 degrees downward from vertical. 7. Unless otherwise specified, or required, motors rated less than 200 horsepower shall be furnished with bearings of the grease lubricated, antifriction ball type with conveniently located grease fittings and drain plugs. A means of preventing bearings from becoming over-greased shall be provided. Bearings shall have a minimum B-10 life of 20,000 hours. 8. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Rotor windings shall be one-piece cast aluminum. Where applicable, rotors shall be constructed with integral fins. 9. Externally mounted motor shaft grounding rings shall be provided to protect motors against motor shaft and bearing currents. Grounding rings shall be provided for all motors controlled by VFDs, with the following exceptions: a. Motors rated less than 1 horsepower b. Submersible motors 10. All motors shall be provided with factory-installed one-hole terminations (ring terminals) on the ends of all motor leads. Terminations shall be identified for use with cables that have stranding other than Class B and shall be the irreversible compression type. H. Power Factor and Efficiency 1. All motors shall be designed specifically for energy efficiency and high power factor. The motor efficiency and power factor shall meet or exceed the values listed in the table below when the motors are tested in accordance with the NEMA ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-8 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS preferred test method IEEE 112A, Method B, Dynamometer. Each motor shall meet the minimum guaranteed efficiency value indicated in the table below. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the procedures contained in NEMA Standard MG1-12.58. Table 12-11 FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES OF ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS ENCLOSED MOTORS 2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE 8 POLE HP Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 1 75.5 72 82.5 80 80 77 74 70 1.5 82.5 80 84 81.5 85.5 82.5 77 74 2 84 81.5 84 81.5 86.5 84 82.5 80 3 85.5 82.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 84 81.5 5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 85.5 82.5 7.5 88.5 86.5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 85.5 82.5 10 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 86.5 15 90.2 88.5 91 89.5 90.2 88.5 88.5 86.5 20 90.2 88.5 91 89.5 90.2 88.5 89.5 87.5 25 91 89.5 92.4 91 91.7 90.2 89.5 87.5 30 91 89.5 92.4 91 91.7 90.2 91 89.5 40 91.7 90.2 93 91.7 93 91.7 91 89.5 50 92.4 91 93 91.7 93 91.7 91.7 90.2 60 93 91.7 93.6 92.4 93.6 92.4 91.7 90.2 75 93 91.7 94.1 93 93.6 92.4 93 91.7 100 93.6 92.4 94.5 93.6 94.1 93 93 91.7 125 94.5 93.6 94.5 93.6 94.1 93 93.6 92.4 150 94.5 93.6 95 94.1 95 94.1 93.6 92.4 200 95 94.1 95 94.1 95 94.1 94.1 93 250 95.4 94.5 95 94.1 95 94.1 94.5 93.6 300 95.4 94.5 95.4 94s.5 95 94.1 350 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 95 94.1 400 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 450 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 500 95.4 94.5 95.8 95 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-9 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS Table 12-12 FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES FOR NEMA PREMIUMTm EFFICIENCY ELECTRIC MOTORS RATED 600 VOLTS OR LESS (RANDOM WOUND) OPEN MOTORS 2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE HP Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 1 77 74 85.5 82.5 82.5 80 1.5 84 81.5 86.5 84 86.5 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 86.5 84 87.5 81.5 3 85.5 82.5 89.5 84 88.5 86.5 5 86.5 84 89.5 84 89.5 87.5 7.5 88.5 86.5 91 89.5 90.2 88.5 10 89.5 87.5 91.7 90.2 91.7 90.2 15 90.2 88.5 93 91.7 91.7 90.2 20 91 89.5 93 91.7 92.4 91 25 91.7 90.2 93.6 92.4 93 91.7 30 91.7 90.2 94.1 93 93.6 92.4 40 92.4 91 94.1 93 94.1 93 50 93 91.7 94.5 93.6 94.1 93 60 93.6 92.4 95 94.1 94.5 93.6 75 93.6 92.4 95 94.1 94.5 93.6 100 93.6 92.4 95.4 94.5 95 94.1 125 94.1 93 95.4 94.5 95 94.1 150 94.1 93 95.8 95 95.4 94.5 200 95 94.1 95.8 95 95.4 94.5 250 95 94.1 95.8 95 95.4 94.5 300 95.4 94.5 95.8 95 95.4 94.5 350 95.4 94.5 95.8 95 95.4 94.5 400 95.8 95 95.8 95 95.8 95 450 95.8 95 96.2 95.4 96.2 95.4 500 95.8 95 96.2 95.4 96.2 95.4 NOTES: (Motor data for continuous duty, NEMA Design B, 1.15 service factor,40 degrees Celsius ambient,Class F insulation,3 phase,460 volt,at listed speed rating. (TEFC efficiencies apply to both horizontal and vertical motors. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Motors shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Motors shall be properly protected from weather hazards. Motors shall not be allowed to be wrapped tightly in plastic while outdoors. Motors delivered to the site which will not be put in service for a time in excess of 30 calendar days, whether in storage or installed, shall have the shafts rotated a minimum of five (5) rotations every 30 days. B. Motors provided with space heaters shall have temporary power applied to the heaters no later than 30 calendar days after delivery to the site until permanent power can be applied to the heaters. C. Motors that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have not been properly protected shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative. Any required electrical corrections for testing shall be made at the Contractor's expense prior to acceptance and/or use. D. All motors shall operate without any undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of phase unbalance. 3.03 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Witnessed Shop Tests a. All motors shall be shop tested and inspected in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's standard procedures. The manufacturer's testing and inspection procedures shall demonstrate that the equipment tested conforms to the requirements specified, all other applicable requirements, and shall be approved by the Engineer. At least 10 days' notice shall be given the Engineer prior to tests and inspection dates. b. In addition to the efficiency and power factor testing specified herein, each motor shall be tested to determine compliance with the applicable requirements of the IEEE, ANSI and NEMA. Tests shall be as follows: 1) Motors less than 50 HP: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-11 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS a) Each motor shall be subjected to a standard, short commercial test including the following: i. Running current, no load ii. Locked rotor current iii. High potential iv. Winding resistance V. Bearing inspection 2) Motors between 50 and 100 HP a) Each motor shall be subjected to the above tests and shall be furnished with certified test results. 3) Motors larger than 100 HP a) Each motor shall be furnished with certified test results. Each motor shall be subjected to a complete test consisting of full load heat run, percent slip, running load current, locked rotor current, breakdown torque (calculated), starting torque, winding resistance, high potential, secondary current and voltage at collector rings (wound rotor), efficiencies at 100, 75 and 50 percent of full load, power factors at 100, 75 and 50 percent of full load and bearing inspection. Tests will be witnessed by the Engineer where specifically indicated. 4) Test Reports a) All test results for motors over 100 horsepower shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Copies of witnessed test raw data shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately upon completion of such tests. 2. Field Tests a. Field tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 — Basic Electrical Requirements. b. All electric motors furnished for this project one (1) horsepower or larger shall have the information required in the following tabulation completed. See Exhibit "A" on following page. C. All field testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-12 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS (EXHIBIT A) MOTOR TEST RECORD Nameplate Measured Motor Identification Location Specified Nameplate Amperage Amperage Under Remarks Horsepower Horsepower (FLA) Normal Operating Conditions ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-13 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 05 60-14 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS SECTION 26 09 16 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory operation all electric controls and relays as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Electrical control and relay systems shall be assembled using NEMA rated components. Components designed and built to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured and labeled in compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable. C. Reference the following Specification Sections: 1. Section 26 05 00— Basic Electrical Requirements 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Products specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, and/or Listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. UL 508A— Standard for Industrial Control Panels 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 0 m 1. Shop Drawings 2. Spare Parts List ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-1 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets. D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. In addition to the manufacturer recommended spare parts, the following spare parts shall be provided for the local control stations: 1. One (1) contact block of each type furnished on the project 2. One (1) indicating light lens of each color furnished on the project 3. One (1) LED lamp of each color furnished on the project B. Reference Section 26 05 00 — Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and handling requirements. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers 1. Control components shall be manufactured by Eaton, The Square D Company, GE by ABB, Allen-Bradley, or Engineer approved equal. B. Pilot Devices ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-2 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS 1. General a. All pilot devices shall be provided with a legend plate. Legend plates shall have a dark grey background and white lettering and indicate the function of the respective pilot device. The text shown on the Drawings or indicated in the specifications shall be used as the basis for legend plate engraving (i.e. HAND-OFF-AUTO, RUN, EMERGENCY STOP, etc.). b. All pilot devices shall be selected and properly installed to maintain the NEMA 250 rating of the enclosure in which they are installed. All pilot devices shall be UL 508 Listed. C. All pilot devices shall be 30.5mm in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 22mm devices are not acceptable. d. Pilot devices for all electrical equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Pushbuttons a. Pushbuttons shall be non-illuminated, black in color, and have momentary style operation unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Pushbuttons shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each pushbutton. Contacts shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the application. C. Pushbuttons shall be provided with a full guard around the perimeter of the button. Where a lockout style pushbutton is specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide a padlockable guard. 3. Selector Switches a. Selector switches shall be non-illuminated, black in color, and have the number of maintained positions as indicated on the Drawings and as required. Handles shall be the extended type that provide a greater surface area for operation. b. Selector switches shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1) spare normally open and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each selector switch. Contacts shall be ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-3 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the application. C. Where indicated in the Drawings or Specifications, provide spring return positions. d. Selector switches shall be provided with an indexing component that fits into the keyed portion of the cutout for the device and prevents the switch from spinning when operated. 4. Indicating Lights a. Indicating lights shall be LED type, with the proper voltage rating to suit the application, and push-to-test feature. b. Indicating light lens colors shall be as required in equipment specifications and/or as indicated on the Drawings. If lens colors are not indicated, the following colors shall be used: Color Designation Red "Run", "On", "Open" Green "Off', "Closed" Amber "Alarm", "Fail" White "Control Power On" 5. Emergency Stop and Tagline Switches a. Emergency stop switches shall be non-illuminated, red in color, with a minimum 35mm diameter mushroom head. Once activated, switch shall maintain its position and require a manual pull to release/reset. b. Tagline switches shall have a plunger that activates upon tension from the associated safety cable. Once activated, switch shall maintain its position and require a manual release/reset. C. Emergency stop and tagline switches shall have the quantity of normally closed and/or normally open contacts as indicated on the Drawings and as required. In addition to the required contacts, one (1)spare normally open and one (1) spare normally closed contact shall be installed at each switch. Contacts shall be rated for 5A at 250VAC/DC (minimum), but no less than required for the application. C. Relays and Timers ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-4 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS 1. General a. Relays and timers shall be furnished with an integral pilot light for positive indication of coil energization. b. Relays and timers shall have tubular pin style terminals with matching 11-pin DIN rail mount socket. Spade or blade style terminals are not acceptable. C. Relays and timers for all electrical equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Control and Pilot Relays a. Relays shall have a clear or translucent housing that allows the contacts to be visually inspected without disassembly. b. Relays shall have coil voltage as required to suit the application and/or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Relays shall be provided with contacts rated for 10A (resistive), minimum, at 120/240 VAC and 28 VDC. Relays shall have 3-pole, double-throw (3PDT) contact arrangement. 3. Time Delay Relays a. Timers delay relays shall utilize electronic timing technology. Mechanical timing devices are not acceptable. b. Relays shall have coil voltage as required to suit the application and/or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Relays shall be provided with contacts rated for 10A (resistive), minimum, at 120/240 VAC and 28 VDC. Relays shall have double-pole double-throw (DPDT) contact arrangement. d. Time delay ranges shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or as required to suit the application. Timing range shall be adjustable from the front of the relay. On delay and off delay timer configurations shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings and/or as required to suit the application. 4. Elapsed Time Meters a. Elapsed time meters shall be non-resettable type with no less than a 4 digit display. Coil voltage shall be as required to suit the application and/or as indicated on the Drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-5 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS D. Control Terminal Blocks 1. Control terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized steel DIN mounting rails securely bolted to the enclosure or subpanel. Terminals shall be tubular screw type with pressure plate that will accommodate wire size range of#22 —#8 AWG. 2. Control terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts and 20A. Separate terminal strips shall be provided for each type of control used (i.e. 120VAC vs. 24VDC). Quantity of terminals shall be provided as required to suit the application. In addition, there shall be a sufficient quantity of terminals for the termination of all spare conductors. 3. Terminals shall be marked with a permanent, continuous marking strip, with each terminal numbered. One side of each terminal shall be reserved exclusively for incoming field conductors. Common connections and jumpers required for internal wiring shall not be made on the field side of the terminal. 2.02 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS A. Local control stations shall be furnished and installed complete with pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, and other devices as indicated on the Drawings. B. Specific devices installed in local control stations shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. C. Local control stations shall be furnished with the following enclosure type and material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area in which they are to be installed. Area Designation Enclosure Type and Material Indoor Wet Process Area NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel Indoor Dry Process Area NEMA 12, Die Cast Zinc Indoor Dry Non-process Area NEMA 12, Die Cast Zinc All Outdoor Areas NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel D. Conduit hubs shall be external to the enclosure. E. Local control stations for use in non-hazardous locations shall be UL-508 Listed. F. Provide a nameplate on each local control station in accordance with Section 26 05 53 — Identification for Electrical Systems. The name and/or number of the equipment associated with each control station shall be engraved on the nameplate, followed by the words "LOCAL CONTROL STATION". ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-6 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Local control stations shall be provided in the enclosure type and material of construction required for the area in which it is installed. Reference the requirements in Part 2 herein. B. All control components shall be mounted in a manner that will permit servicing, adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component's mounting shall be oriented in accordance with the component manufacturer's and industries' standard practices. C. Pilot devices shall be properly bonded to the equipment enclosure door where they are installed. If proper bonding cannot be achieved through the locknuts that affix the device in place, a green colored bonding screw shall be provided on the pilot device. The bonding screw shall be bonded to the equipment enclosure through the use of an insulated green bonding conductor. D. Local control station covers shall be bonded to the local control station enclosure through the use of an insulated green bonding conductor. E. Wiring to devices at each local control station shall be provided with enough slack to permit the local control station cover to be removed and pulled at least 6 inches away from the enclosure. F. Terminal strips, relays, timers, and similar devices shall not be installed on the rear of the panel/cabinet doors. Terminal strips, relays, timers, and similar devices shall not be installed on the side walls of panel/cabinet interiors without written permission from the Engineer. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 09 16-7 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 26 29 20 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in satisfactory operation the low voltage active harmonic filter systems (AHF) as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Reference the following Specification Sections: 1. Section 26 05 00 — Basic Electrical Requirements C. The active harmonic filter(AHF) system manufacturer shall coordinate with the low voltage motor control center manufacturer(s) for factory installation of current transformers (CTs) and associated CT wiring and appurtenances within the motor control center. The CTs shall be provided (factory installed and pre- wired inside the motor control center) by the motor control center manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of the AHF system manufacturer for field connection to the standalone AHF system equipment. D. The active harmonic filter systems specified under this Section shall be provided to meet the requirements of IEEE 519 for electrical system harmonic current and voltage distortion limits. The active harmonic filter shall maintain a system power factor between 0.95 and 0.999 lagging when operated within limits. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All equipment shall be Listed by and shall bear the Label of Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated (UL). B. The active harmonic filter system shall be designed, manufactured, and/or Listed to the latest editions of the following standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): a. ANSI/IEEE 519— Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic V Control in Electric Power Systems. A 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-1 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM a. NEMA 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. UL 508 — Standard for Industrial Control. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in General Conditions and Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Spare Parts List. 4. Proposed Testing Methods and Reports of Certified Shop and Field Tests. 5. Manufacturer's Startup Certification. 6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings for each active harmonic filter system shall include but not be limited to: 1. A Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter. If the shop drawings are submitted without this CD&E letter, the submittal will be rejected. The letter shall include all comments, deviations, and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor AND Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-2 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM This letter shall include a copy of this Specification Section. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter"C", "D", or "E" shall be typed or written in. The letter"C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. The letter"D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. Any requirements with the letter "D" or"E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. 2. Product Data Sheets. 3. Individual unit ratings and characteristics including heat rejection (watt loss). 4. Plan, front, and side view drawings, including overall dimensions of each AHF unit. Show conduit entry and stub-up area locations on the Drawings. 5. Approximate total shipping weight of each AHF unit. 6. Wiring diagrams showing field connections. 7. Manufacturer's Warranty Statement. D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "Soft Cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. B. Reference Section 26 05 00— Basic Electrical Requirements for spare parts delivery and handling requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-3 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM 1.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Each AHF unit shall be identified with the identification number indicated on the Drawings. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each AHF unit. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 26 05 00— Basic Electrical Requirements. 1.08 WARRANTY A. All active harmonic filter systems, associated hardware, and supporting components shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and in accordance with the instructions provided, for a period of five (5) years after acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. B. Any component or subassembly contained within the active harmonic filter system that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the specified warranty period shall be replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The active harmonic filter systems shall be HCU2 as manufactured by Eaton, PowerLogic AccuSine PCS+ as manufactured by Square D, or HarmonicGuard Active as manufactured by TCI. 2.02 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. The active harmonic filter system shall electronically supply the non-fundamental current demanded by the non-linear load that results in a near sinusoidal current being drawn from the supply. B. In a steady state condition, the active harmonic filter system shall have a response time of less than one (1) line cycle. In the event of a load change or transient condition, the response time shall be within three (3) line cycles. C. The active harmonic filter system shall be suitable for operation as part of a 480 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hertz power distribution system. The complete harmonic filter system shall withstand the mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions when ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-4 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM connected directly to a power source having available fault current of 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical (minimum) at rated voltage. Where the upstream equipment supplying the AHF units (e.g., switchgear, switchboard, motor control center, etc.) has a lower short circuit rating, the AHF units shall be permitted to have the same short circuit rating as the upstream equipment D. Performance of the active harmonic filter system shall be independent of the impedance of the power source. All performance levels shall be attained whether on the normal utility power source, engine driven generator, or UPS. E. The active harmonic filter system shall limit the 2nd through 50th order harmonic current to <5% TDD at each the point of common coupling (MCC horizontal bus). Levels for individual harmonic orders shall comply with respective levels established in the latest revision of ANSI/IEEE standard 519. F. The active harmonic filter system shall limit the THD (V) added to the electrical system immediately upstream of the active line conditioner location(s) to less than or equal to 5%. The active harmonic filter shall not correct for utility supplied voltage distortion levels. G. Reactive Current Compensation shall improve power factor to be to between 0.95 and 0.999 lagging. H. The active harmonic filter system shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Active harmonic filter units shall be defined as power electronic devices which consist of power semiconductors and a DC bus that acts to inject current into the AC line to mitigate undesirable harmonic currents drawn by the load. A DC bus shall store power for power semiconductor switching. A digital microcontroller shall control the operation of the unit. B. Active harmonic filter units shall feature fully digital synchronous frame controls for selected harmonics to enhance drive load compatibility. C. Active harmonic filter units shall feature a fully digital, broadband current regulator with progressive gains to eliminate system resonance tuning issues. D. Active harmonic filter units shall feature single processor control of all power electronic devices per a single active filter to reduce fault response latency and harmonic correction loop times. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-5 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM E. Each unit shall be designed with over-current and current limiting self-protection. Operation shall continue indefinitely at manufacturer defined safe operating levels without trip off or destruction of the active harmonic filter unit. F. Units with a capacity greater than 150A shall have built in redundancy so at least one half of the corrective current capacity is available after a normal single point fault. G. All inductive elements in the power circuit of active harmonic filter unit shall be coreless in order to maintain constant inductance and avoid saturation at high current levels. H. Two distinct levels of faults shall be employed: critical and non-critical faults. Non- critical faults shall allow for automatic restart and a return to normal operation upon automatic fault clearance. Critical level faults shall stop the function of the unit and await operator action to restart. 1. AC line power loss shall be considered a non-critical fault. 2. All other faults shall be considered critical faults and stop the active harmonic filter unit. The run relay shall be disabled and the fault relay enabled. User shall be required to initiate a power reset (cycle power off and on) to restart the active harmonic filter. I. The control logic of the active harmonic filter shall monitor the load current by utilizing current transformers (CTs) mounted in the associated electrical distribution equipment, as specified herein, to direct the function of the power electronic converter. J. Multiple active harmonic filter units may be installed in parallel to inject current. The units shall function independently. If one unit is stopped or faulted, the remaining units shall continue to operate normally. K. Where multiple parallel active harmonic filter units are required to achieve the specified harmonic correction, provisions shall be made within the primary AHF enclosure to connect all secondary AHF units in parallel. Provisions shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Power distribution terminal blocks. 2. Additional current transformers configured to measure the total current injected by the active harmonic filter system. 2.04 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. The following operating conditions shall apply to active harmonic filter system equipment furnished under this Specification Section: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-6 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM 1. Ambient Temperature: 0°C to 40°C. 2. Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing. 3. Altitude: up to 1,000 feet. 2.05 OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INTERFACE A. Active harmonic filter units shall require minimal field programming. B. The units shall include a color touch screen display with the following features: 1. A minimum display size of 5.6 inches, 65k colors, and LED backlight. 2. Easily navigable screens, including Home, Status, Fault and Setup screens. 3. Display voltage and current waveform data along with RMS metering data. 4. A gauge-based indicator of active filter current usage, from 0 to 100% of capacity. Dual state indications of nominal operation and "at capacity" operation. 5. An alarm history buffer saved in non-volatile memory. Buffer information shall persist between power outages, with a minimum of 128 event entries. 6. Ability to set the end user Line/Load CT ratio of the active harmonic filter system. 7. The Operator Interface shall show THD, Power Factor, RMS Current, RMS Voltage, and Fault History. C. The units shall automatically begin to correct harmonic currents after power up without the need for operator intervention. D. The units shall have the ability to operate in three (3) modes (all three control modes shall be configurable from the local operator color touch screen display): 1. Harmonic correction only mode, 2. Power factor correction only mode, or 3. Combination harmonic and power factor mode. E. The units shall include the ability to load and save operational parameters in non- volatile persistent memory and the ability to revert to factory default parameter settings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-7 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM F. The units shall have the ability to display trend history data for four variables selectable by the user. G. The units shall include a configurable discrete run/stop command input in addition to the manual and auto run/stop commands. H. The units shall include a configurable discrete fault output contact and fault indicating light. Each contact shall be rated for 5A at 120V (minimum). I. The units shall include an integrated industry-standard serial TIA/EIA-485/ RS-485 fieldbus network connection such as Modbus RTU for remote monitoring and operation of the system. J. The units shall have the ability to communicate over a standard industrial Ethernet communications network such as Ethernet/IP. K. The units shall include a configurable network-based run/stop command input in addition to the manual and auto run/stop commands. 2.06 ENCLOSURE A. Each active harmonic filter unit shall be provided in an oversized NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Reference the Drawings for maximum dimensions of each active harmonic filter unit. B. All enclosed units shall have means to prevent the door from being opened when the unit is energized. A door-interlocked circuit breaker shall provide power interruption when the door is opened. The circuit breaker shall be lockable in the power-off position. C. Freestanding units shall include lifting provisions by forklift truck and lifting lugs. Wall mount units weighing more than 80 pounds shall be equipped with a means of lifting, such as lifting lugs. D. A door mounted digital HMI operator interface shall be accessible from the exterior of the enclosure. E. All units shall be provided with a grounding lug. F. The paint shall be the manufacturer's standard type and color. 2.07 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS A. Current transformers installed external to the active harmonic filter equipment shall be provided by the low voltage motor control center manufacturer(s) and installed per manufacturer recommendations as specified in Part 1 herein. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-8 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM B. Two current transformers are required at each metering point and shall be mounted on phases 'A' and 'C'. C. Current transformers shall be rated for 400 hertz and be Class 1 accuracy or better. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The AHF systems shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install AHF systems to allow complete door swing required for component removal. This is specifically required where an AHF systems is installed in the corner of a room. 3.02 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: 1. Witnessed Shop Tests a. None required. 2. Certified Shop Tests and Reports a. Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus. Submit notarized and certified copies of all test reports. b. Submit factory bench-test data to indicate that the manufacturer's proposed equipment has been tested in the specified arrangement and found to achieve specified accuracy. 3. Field Tests a. Field tests shall be performed in accordance with requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00— Basic Electrical Requirements. b. Coordinate AHF system field tests and harmonic distortion tests with VFD system testing. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-9 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM d. The Contractor shall retain the services of an independent, third-party testing agency to field measure actual harmonic distortion under full-load operation as follows: 1) Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the harmonic distortion measurements shall be made at each load center where VFDs are present. 2) Harmonic distortion measurements shall be made after VFD and equipment installation to demonstrate performance under actual system load conditions. One set of measurements shall be made with the VFD loads inactive, and one set of measurements shall be made with the VFD loads running at design capacity. 3) Harmonic distortion test reports shall be included in the O&M Manual. 3.03 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified, factory-trained manufacturer's technical representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and testing of all equipment furnished under this Contract. The manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. No further testing or equipment startup may take place until this certification is accepted by the Owner. B. The manufacturer's technical representative shall perform startup and functional testing of the equipment as specified herein. C. The Contractor shall provide training for Owner personnel. Training shall be conducted by the manufacturer's factory-trained representative who shall instruct Owner personnel in operation and maintenance of all equipment provided under this Section. Training shall be provided for two (2) sessions of two (2) hours each. Training shall be at times coordinated with the Owner. Training shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. D. The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided for a period of not less than as follows: 1. For each building/structure where active harmonic filter systems are furnished under this project: one (1) trip of two (2) working days during the installation and startup of the equipment. 2. One (1) trip of one (1) working day two (2) months before the warranty expiration to identify any issues to be corrected under warranty. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-10 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM 3. One (1) trip of one (1) working day to perform training as specified herein. E. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall be at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 26 29 20-11 LOW VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER SYSTEM THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install to the required line and grade, all piping together with all fittings and appurtenances, required for a complete installation. Piping to be backfilled and/or encased in concrete is considered to be buried piping. Piping that is not buried is considered to be exposed. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install fittings, couplings, connections, sleeves, adapters, harness rods and closure pieces as required to connect pipelines of dissimilar materials and/or sizes herein included under this Section and other concurrent Contracts for a complete installation. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services required for the furnishing, installation and testing of all piping as shown on the Drawings, specified in this Section and required for the Work. Piping shall be furnished and installed of the material, sizes, classes, and at the locations shown on the Drawings and/or designated in this Section. Piping shall include all fittings, adapter pieces, couplings, closure pieces, harnessing rods, hardware, bolts, gaskets, wall sleeves, wall pipes, hangers, supports, and other associated appurtenances for required connections to equipment, valves, or structures for a complete installation. D. Piping assemblies under 4-inch size shall be generally supported on walls and ceilings, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, being kept clear of openings and positioned above "headroom" space. Where practical, such piping shall be run in neat clusters, plumb and level along walls, and parallel to overhead beams. E. The Contractor shall provide taps on piping where required or shown on the Drawings. Where pipe or fitting wall thicknesses are insufficient to provide the required number of threads, a boss or pipe saddle shall be installed. F. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Connections to existing pipelines. 2. Test excavations necessary to locate or verify existing pipe and appurtenances. 0 N 3. Installation of all new pipe and materials required for a complete installation. N 0 N A 4. Cleaning, testing and disinfecting as required. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 01 — General Requirements B. Division 02 — Existing Conditions C. Division 05 — Metals D. Division 09 — Finishes E. Division 26 — Electrical F. Division 46 —Water and Wastewater Equipment 1.03 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner(through the Engineer) a Material Certification stating that the pipe materials and specials furnished under this Section conform to all applicable provisions of the corresponding Specifications. Specifically, the Certification shall state compliance with the applicable standards (ASTM, AWWA, etc.)for fabrication and testing. B. Shop Drawings for major piping (2-inches in diameter and greater) shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit laying schedules and detailed Drawings in plan and profile for all piping as specified and shown on the Drawings. C. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, complete piping layout, pipe material, sizes, class, locations, necessary dimensions, elevations, supports, hanger details, pipe joints, and the details of fittings including methods of joint restraint. No fabrication or installation shall begin until Shop Drawings are approved by the Engineer. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All specials and every length of pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, class, and the date of manufacture. Special care in handling shall be exercised during delivery, distribution, and storage of pipe to avoid damage and unnecessary stresses. Damaged pipe will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Pipe and specials stored prior to use shall be stored in such a manner as to keep the interior free from dirt and foreign matter. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-2 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS B. Testing of pipe before installation shall be as described in the corresponding ASTM or AWWA Specifications and in the applicable standard specifications listed in the following sections. Testing after the pipe is installed shall be as specified in Part 3. C. Joints in piping shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. D. All buried piping shall have restrained joints for thrust protection unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. All exposed piping shall have flanged joints, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. E. The Drawings indicate work affecting existing piping and appurtenances. The Contractor shall excavate test pits as required of all connections and crossings which may affect the Contractor's work prior to ordering pipe and fittings to determine sufficient information for ordering materials. The Contractor shall take whatever measurements that are required to complete the work as shown or specified. F. Fiberglass duct shall be as specified in Section 23 31 16 — Nonmetal Ducts and Duct Accessories. 2.02 WALL PIPES A. Where wall sleeves or wall pipes occur in walls that are continuously wet on one or both sides, they shall have water stop flanges at the center of the casting or as shown on the Drawings. Ends of wall pipes shall be flange, mechanical joint, plain end, or bell as shown on the Drawings, or as required for connection to the piping. Wall pipes shall be of the same material as the piping that they are connected to. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, waterstop flanges shall conform to the minimum dimensions shown below: Pipe Size Waterstop Waterstop Flange Diameter Flange Thickness 4"- 12" OD +3.10" 0.50" 14"-24" OD +4.15" 0.75" 30"-36" OD +4.50" 1.00" 42"-48" OD +5.00" 1.25" 54" OD +5.90" 1.50" ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 2.03 SLEEVES A. Unless shown otherwise, all piping passing through walls and floors shall be installed in sleeves or wall castings accurately located before concrete is poured or placed in position during construction of masonry walls. Sleeves passing through floors shall extend from the bottom of the floor to a point 3 inches above the finished floor, unless shown otherwise. Water stop flanges are required on all sleeves located in floors or walls which are continually wet or under hydrostatic pressure on one or both sides of the floor or wall. B. Sleeves shall be cast iron, black steel pipe, or fabricated steel in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the details of sleeves he proposes to install; and no fabrication or installation thereof shall take place until the Engineer's approval is obtained. Steel sleeves shall be fabricated of structural steel plate in accordance with the standards and procedures of AISC and AWS. Steel sleeve surfaces shall receive a commercial sandblast cleaning and then be shop painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 — Painting. C. When shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, the annular space between the installed piping and sleeve shall be completely sealed against a maximum hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. Seals shall be mechanically interlocked, solid rubber links, trade name "Link-Seal", as manufactured by Garlock Pipeline Technologies (GPT) or equal. Rubber link, seal-type, size, and installation thereof, shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. For non-fire rated walls and floors, pressure plate shall be glass reinforced nylon plastic with EPDM rubber seal and 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. For fire rated walls and floors, two independent seals shall be provided consisting of low carbon steel, zinc galvanized pressure plates, silicon rubber seals and 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. D. Cast iron mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be Clow# 1429, as manufactured by the Clow Corp., or equal. Mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be provided with suitable gasket, follower ring, and bolts to affect a proper seal. In general, sleeves installed in walls, floors, or roofs against one side of which will develop a hydrostatic pressure, or through which leakage of liquid will occur, shall be so sealed. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange. 2.04 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Flanged coupling adapters shall be furnished as required and as shown on the Drawings. B. Flanged coupling adapters shall be of ductile iron or carbon steel construction and shall be rated for the same pressure as the connected piping. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-4 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS C. All flanged coupling adapters shall be harnessed by tying the adapter to the nearest pipe joint flange using threaded rods and rod tabs unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. D. Flanged coupling adapters shall be manufactured by Smith-Blair Model 912 or 913, Romac Industries Model FCG or FC 400, Dresser Industries Model 128-W, or equal. E. Flanged coupling adapters shall be provided with manufacturer's fusion bonded epoxy painting system. 2.05 DISMANTLING JOINTS A. Dismantling joints shall be furnished at locations shown on the Drawings. B. Dismantling joints for sizes less than 12-inch shall be of ductile iron or carbon steel construction and shall be rated for the same pressure as the connected piping. Dismantling joints for sizes greater than 12-inches shall be of carbon steel construction and shall be rated for the same pressure as the connected piping. C. Flanges for dismantling joints shall match the bolt pattern and pressure rating of the flanges for the connected piping. D. All dismantling joints shall be restrained utilizing restraining rods provided by the manufacturer. Restraining rods shall be constructed from ASTM A193 Grade B7 steel. Restraining rods and restraint system shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Dismantling joints shall be provided with manufacturer's fusion bonded epoxy painting system. F. Dismantling joints shall be manufactured by Smith Blair Model 975, Romac Industries Model DJ400, or equal. 2.06 GROOVED COUPLINGS A. Grooved end pipe couplings shall be furnished as specified or shown on the Drawings. B. Materials shall be of malleable iron and couplings shall be rated for the same pressures as the connecting piping. C. Gaskets shall be rubber. Bolts and nuts shall be 316 Stainless Steel. D. After installation, buried couplings shall receive two heavy coats of an approved coal tar which is compatible with the finish of the coupling. Exposed couplings shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00— Painting. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-5 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS E. Couplings shall be manufactured by Victaulic Company of America Style 31 or equal. 2.07 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING SADDLES A. Tapping sleeves shall be similar to Mueller Outlet Seal, American Uniseal or Kennedy Square Seal. All sleeves shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. All sleeves larger than twelve (12) inches shall be ductile iron. All taps shall be machine drilled; no burned taps will be allowed. B. Tapping saddles may be used on mains sixteen (16) inches and larger where the required tap size does not exceed one-half the size of the main (i.e. 8-inch tapping saddle for use on a 16-inch main). Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of ductile iron providing a factor of safety of at least 2.5 at a working pressure of 250 psi. Saddles shall be equipped with a standard AWWA C-110-77 flange connection on the branch. Sealing gaskets shall be "O" ring type, high quality molded rubber having an approximate seventy durometer hardness, placed into a groove on the curved surface of the tapping saddles. Straps shall be of alloy steel. The tapping saddle shall be the American tapping saddle, U.S. Pipe tapping saddle, or equal. All taps shall be machine cut, no burned taps will be allowed. 2.08 UNIONS A. For ductile iron, carbon steel, and grey cast iron pipes assembled with threaded joints and malleable iron fittings, unions shall conform to ANSI B16.39. B. For copper piping, unions shall have ground joints and conform to ANSI B16.18. C. For PVC and CPVC piping, unions shall be socket weld type with Viton O-ring. 2.09 THERMOPLASTIC TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Thermoplastic tubing shall be manufactured from polyallomor tubing. Tubing shall be protected from ultraviolet radiation degradation with a black coating or integral color conforming to ASTM D-1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 3. Fittings and connectors used with thermoplastic tubing shall be the flareless tube type constructed of brass conforming to SAE CA377, SAE CA360 or equal. Brass sleeves shall be used. B. Assembly of the thermoplastic tubing shall consist of pushing the tubing into the fitting and hand tightening the nut with final tightening with a wrench. Care shall be taken not to overtighten the nut. Plastic tube racks and bend holders shall be provided for holding the tubing in position. Needle valves used with thermoplastic tubing shall be the globe type constructed with a brass body, stem and seat and Buna-N "O"-ring seals. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Thermoplastic tubing shall be the Impolene (polyallomor) system and needle valves, fittings and connectors ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-6 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS shall be the Poly-Flo with 261 UB Universal Nut and Sleeve system as manufactured by Imperial Eastman, or equal. 2.10 FLEXIBLE RESTRAINED EXPANSION JOINTS A. Restrained expansion joints shall be manufactured of 60-42-10 ductile iron conforming to material and other applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. B. Each pressure containing component shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the materials requirements of, and tested in accordance with, ANSI/AWWA C213 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C550. C. Seals shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. D. All bolts used in the assemblies shall be stainless steel and shall be coated with a premium quality epoxy. E. Flanged ends shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, with the addition of 0-ring groove and 0-ring. F. Mechanical joint ends shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. G. Restrained expansion joints shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi with a minimum safety factor of 3:1. Each assembly shall be tested at 350 psi before shipment. H. Restrained expansion joints shall provide for self-restraint without tie rods and shall provide for expansion and contraction capabilities cast as an integral part of the end connection. I. Flexible restrained expansion joints shall allow for 8-inches (+6"-2") minimum expansion. J. Flexible restrained expansion joints shall consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint having a minimum of 15u deflection per ball. K. Restrained expansion joints shall be the Single Ball or Double Ball FLEX-TEND Expansion Joint as manufactured by EBAA Iron Inc., or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be installed by skilled workmen and in accordance with the best standard practice for piping installation as shown on the Drawings, specified or recommended by ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-7 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS the pipe manufacturer. Proper tools and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and installing of the pipe and fittings shall be used. Great care shall be taken to prevent any pipe coating from being damaged on the inside or outside of the pipe and fittings. All pieces shall be carefully examined for defects, and no piece shall be installed which is known to be cracked, damaged, or otherwise defective. If any defective pieces should be discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound one in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor and at his own expense. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept clean until they are accepted in the complete work. All piping connections to equipment shall be provided with unions or coupling flanges located so that piping may be readily dismantled from the equipment. At certain applications, Dresser, Victaulic, or equal, couplings may also be used. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship. Unless otherwise shown or approved, provided a minimum headroom clearance under all piping of 7 feet 6 inches. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all waste and vent piping shall pitch uniformly at a 1/4-inch per foot grade and accessible cleanouts shall be furnished and installed as shown and as required by local building codes. Installed length of waste and vent piping shall be determined from field measurements in lieu of the Drawings. C. All excavation shall be made in such a manner and to such widths as will provide ample room for properly installing the pipe and permit thorough compaction of backfill around the pipe. The minimum trench widths shall be in strict accordance with the "Trench Width Excavation Limits" as shown on the Drawings. All excavation and trenching shall be done in strict accordance with these specifications and all applicable parts of the OSHA Regulations, 29CFR 1926, Subpart P. D. ALL EXCAVATION REQUIRED BY THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE UNCLASSIFIED. NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ROCK EXCAVATION REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF PIPE OR STRUCTURES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. E. Enlargements of the trench shall be made as needed to give ample space for operations at pipe joints. The width of the trench shall be limited to the maximum dimensions shown on the Drawings, except where a wider trench is needed for the installation of and work within sheeting and bracing. Except where otherwise specified, excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides which will cause disturbance of the subgrade, damage to adjacent areas, or endanger the lives or safety of persons in the vicinity. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-8 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS F. Hand excavation shall be employed wherever, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary for the protection of existing utilities, poles, trees, pavements, or obstructions. G. No greater length of trench in any location shall be left open, in advance of pipe laying, than shall be authorized or directed by the Engineer and, in general, such length shall be limited to approximately one hundred (100) feet. The Contractor shall excavate the trenches to the full depth, width and grade indicated on the Drawings including the relevant requirements for bedding. The trench bottoms shall then be examined by the Engineer as to the condition and bearing value before any pipe is laid or bedding is placed. H. No pressure testing shall be performed until the pipe has been properly backfilled in place. All pipe passing through walls and/or floors shall be provided with wall pipes or sleeves in accordance with the specifications and the details shown on the Drawings. All wall pipes shall be of ductile iron and shall have a water stop located in the center of the wall. Each wall pipe shall be of the same class, thickness, and interior coating as the piping to which it is joined. All buried wall pipes shall have a coal tar outside coating on exposed surfaces. I. JOINT DEFLECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 75 PERCENT OF THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED DEFLECTION. Excavation and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 00 01 — Earthwork, and as specified herein. Maximum trench widths shall conform to the Trench Width Excavation Limits shown on the Drawings. All exposed, submerged, and buried piping shall be adequately supported and braced by means of hangers, concrete piers, pipe supports, or otherwise as may be required by the location. J. Following proper preparation of the trench subgrade, pipe and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench so as to prevent dirt and other foreign substances from gaining entrance into the pipe and fittings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ANY OF THE MATERIALS BE DROPPED OR DUMPED INTO THE TRENCH. K. Water shall be kept out of the trench until jointing and backfilling are completed. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be securely closed so that no water, earth, or other substance will enter the pipes, fitting, or valves. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged, or capped, and anchored as required. L. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and/or contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-9 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship. Pipes crossing within a vertical distance of less than or equal to one (1) foot shall be encased and supported with concrete at the point of crossing to prevent damage to the adjacent pipes as shown on the Drawings. M. The full length of each section of pipe shall rest solidly upon the bed of the trench, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells, couplings, joints, and fittings. Before joints are made, each pipe shall be well bedded on a solid foundation; and no pipe shall be brought into position until the preceding length has been thoroughly bedded and secured in place. Pipe that has the grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid by the Contractor at his own expense. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for work. N. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for the safe convenient handling and laying of pipe shall be used and shall in general agree with manufacturer's recommendations. O. AT THE CLOSE OF EACH WORK DAY, THE END OF THE PIPELINE SHALL BE TIGHTLY SEALED WITH A CAP OR PLUG SO THAT NO WATER, DIRT, OR OTHER FOREIGN SUBSTANCE MAY ENTER THE PIPELINE, AND THIS PLUG SHALL BE KEPT IN PLACE UNTIL PIPE LAYING IS RESUMED. P. During the laying of pipe, each pipe manufacturer shall provide his own supervisor to instruct the Contractor's pipe laying personnel in the correct procedure to be followed. Q. Ordinarily only full lengths of pipe (as furnished by the pipe manufacturer) shall be used exceptions: closure pieces at manholes and areas where joint deflection is required. R. For gravity sewer installations, the Contractor shall use a laser device to maintain the trench and pipe alignment. The laser device shall be re-checked for correct elevation and pipe alignment prior to pipe installation if the device is left in the pipe overnight. Corrected invert elevations at each manhole and any adjustments will be coordinated and approved by the Engineer. S. ALL PIPING SHALL HAVE TYPE "A" BEDDING AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED HEREIN OR INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 3.02 JOINTS IN PIPING A. Restrained joints shall be provided on all pipe joints as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Restrained joints shall be made up similar to that for push-on joints. B. Push-on joints include a single rubber gasket which fits into the bell end of the pipe. The gasket shall be wiped clean, flexed and then placed in the socket. Any bulges in the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-10 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS gasket which might interfere with the entry of the plain end of the pipe shall be removed. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the gasket surface which will come into contact with the spigot end of the pipe. The lubricant shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer. The plain end of the pipe, which is tapered for ease of assembly, shall be wiped clean and a thick film of lubricant applied to the outside. The pipe shall be aligned and carefully entered into the socket until it just makes contact with the gasket. The joint assembly shall be completed by entering the pipe past the gasket until it makes contact with the bottom of the socket. The pipe shall be pulled "home" with an approved jack assembly as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. If assembly is not accomplished by reasonable force, the plain end shall be removed, and the condition corrected. C. Flanged joints shall be brought to exact alignment and all gaskets and bolts or studs inserted in their proper places. Bolts or studs shall be uniformly tightened around the joints. Where stud bolts are used, the bolts shall be uniformly centered in the connections and equal pressure applied to each nut on the stud. Pipes in all lines subject to temperature changes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place to compensate for expansion when hot. D. Mechanical joints shall be made up with gaskets, glands and bolts. When a joint is to be made up, the bell or socket and plain end shall be cleaned and washed with a solution of mild soap in water; the gland and gasket shall be slid onto the plain end and the end then entered into the socket until it is fully "home" on the centering ring. The gasket shall then be painted with soapy water and slid into position, followed by the gland. All bolts shall be inserted and made up hand tight and then tightened alternately to bring the gland into position evenly. Excessive tightening of the bolts shall be avoided. All nuts shall be pulled up using a torque wrench which will not permit unequal stresses in the bolts. Torque shall not exceed the recommendations of the manufacturer of the pipe and bolts for the various sizes. Care shall be taken to assure that the pipe remains fully "home" while the joint is being made. Joints shall conform to the applicable AWWA Specifications. E. Threaded and/or screwed joints shall have long tapered full depth threads to be made with the appropriate paste or jointing compound, depending on the type of fluid to be processed through the pipe. All pipe up to, and including 1-1/2-inches, shall be reamed to remove burr and stood on end and well pounded to remove scale and dirt. Wrenches on valves and fittings shall be applied directly over the joint being tightened. Not more than three pipe threads shall be exposed at each connection. Pipe, in all lines subject to temperature changes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place to compensate for expansion when hot. Joints in all piping used for chlorine gas lines shall be made up with a glycerine and litharge cement. Joints in plastic piping (PVC/CPVC) shall be laid and joints made with compounds recommended by the manufacturer. Installation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2774 and ASTM D2855. Unions required adjacent to valves and equipment. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-11 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS F. Soldered joints shall have the burrs removed and both the outside of pipe and the inside of fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned by proper tools recommended for that purpose. Flux shall be applied to both pipe and inside of fittings and the pipe placed into fittings and rotated to insure equal distribution of flux. Joints shall be heated and solder applied until it shows uniformly around the end of joints between fitting and pipe. All joints shall be allowed to self-cool to prevent the chilling of solder. Combination flux and solder paste manufactured by a reputable manufacturer is acceptable. Unions required adjacent to valves and equipment. G. Welded joints shall be made by competent operators in a first class workmanlike manner, in complete accordance with ANSI B31.1 and AWWA C206. Welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM A233, and welding rod shall conform to ASTM A251. Only skilled welders capable of meeting the qualification tests for the type of welding which they are performing shall be employed. Tests, if so required, shall be made at the expense of the Contractor, if so ordered by the Engineer. Unions shall be required adjacent to valves and equipment. H. Copper joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and the end of pipes uniformly flared by a suitable tool to the bevels of the fittings used. Wrenches shall be applied to the bodies of fittings where the joint is being made and in no case to a joint previously made. Dimensions of tubing and copper piping shall be in complete accordance with the fittings used. No flare joints shall be made on piping not suited for flare joints. Installations for propane gas shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and/or 58. I. Solvent or adhesive welded joints in plastic piping shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations, including necessary field cuttings, sanding of pipe ends, joint support during setting period, etc. Care shall be taken that no droppings or deposits of adhesive or material remain inside the assembled piping. Solvent or adhesive material shall be compatible with the pipe itself, being a product approved by the pipe manufacturer. Unions are required adjacent to valves and equipment. Sleeve-type expansion joints shall be supplied in exposed piping to permit f- inch minimum of expansion per 100 feet of pipe length. J. Dielectric isolation such as flange isolation kits, dielectric unions, or similar, shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are connected according to the following table. Q N E 0 N q1 7 C C_ 00 N N y N N N (7 Q V G Cn V m Zinc • • • . • • • ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-12 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS c m ° _ a) Z co N E 0 G7 N O N i N •C �_ = d Cn y N N > C C1 E R N Q N Galvanized Steel • • • . • • • Aluminum . • • • . • • • Cast Iron • . • . • • Ductile Iron • • • • • • Mild Steel/ Carbon Steel Copper • . • • • . • Brass • • • • • • • Stainless Steel • • • • • • • • Notes: •signifies dielectric isolation is required between the two materials noted. Consult Engineer for items not listed in table. Provide flange isolation kits for all flanged connections of dissimilar metals and hardware including connections to equipment. Contractor shall include all isolation descriptions with piping submittals. K. Eccentric reducers shall be installed where air or water pockets would otherwise occur in mains because of a reduction in pipe size. L. Joints in polypropylene and polyvinyl idelene fluoride pipe shall be butt fusion weld. All butt welding shall follow the requirements of ASTM D-2657 and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. All piping shall be properly flushed and tested unless specifically exempted elsewhere in the Specifications or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Air and gas pipelines shall be flushed and tested with compressed air. Gravity sewer piping shall be flushed and tested. Polymer piping shall be tested with mineral oil or as recommended by the polymer chemical supplier. All other liquid conveying pipelines shall be flushed and tested with water. The Contractor shall furnish and install all means and apparatus necessary for getting the air or water into the pipeline for flushing and testing including pumps, compressors, gauges, and meters, any necessary plugs and caps, and any required blow-off piping and fittings, etc., complete with any necessary reaction blocking ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-13 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS to prevent pipe movement during the flushing and testing. All pipelines shall be flushed and tested in such lengths or sections as agreed upon among the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. Test pressures shall be as specified in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules and shall be measured at the lowest point of the pipe segment being tested. The Contractor shall give the Owner and Engineer reasonable notice of the time when he intends to test portions of the pipelines. Do not test exterior, exposed pipelines if air temperature is expected to fall below 32 degrees F. The Engineer reserves the right, within reason, to request flushing and testing of any section or portion of a pipeline. B. The Contractor shall provide water for all flushing and testing of liquid conveying pipelines. Raw water or non-potable water may be used for flushing and testing liquid pipelines not connected to the potable water system. Only potable water shall be used for flushing and testing the potable water system. C. Air and gas piping shall be completely and thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, scale, and dirt prior to start-up of the air or gas system. D. At the conclusion of the installation work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all new liquid conveying pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, etc., which may have entered the pipe during the construction period. If after this cleaning any obstructions remain, they shall be corrected by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Liquid conveying pipelines shall be flushed at the rate of at least 5.0 feet per second for a duration suitable to the Engineer or shall be flushed by other methods approved by the Engineer. E. Compressed/service air and gas piping shall be flushed by removing end caps from the distribution lines and operating one (1) compressor, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. After flushing, all air piping shall be pressure and leak tested prior to coating and wrapping of welded joints. Immediately upon successful completion of the pressure and leak test, welded joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, scale, rust, and discoloration and coated in accordance with the Specifications. G. All process air piping shall be leak tested by applying a soap solution to each joint. Leak tests shall be conducted with one (1) blower in service at normal operating pressure. H. During testing the piping shall show no leakage. Any leaks or defective piping disclosed by the leakage test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight. I. All buried process air piping shall be pressurized to 25 psig and tested for leaks by applying a soap solution to each joint. The air supply shall be stopped and the pipe pressure monitored. System pressure shall not fall by more than 0.5% of the 25 psig test ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-14 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS pressure over a one hour test period. Should the system fail to hold the required pressure for one hour, the cause shall be determined and corrected and the test repeated until a successful test of the entire system is obtained. J. Field leakage tests shall be performed for all submerged process air piping. The procedure shall consist of operating the system under clear nonpotable water for visual identification of all leaks. All field leakage tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. All submerged piping shall be installed free of any leaks. K. After flushing, all liquid conveying pipelines shall be hydrostatically tested at the test pressure specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules. The procedure used for the hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600. Each pipeline shall be filled with water for a period of no less than 24 hours and then subjected to the specified test pressure for 2 hours. During this test, exposed piping shall show no leakage. Allowable leakage in buried piping shall be in accordance with AWWA C600. L. Any leaks or defective pipe disclosed by the hydrostatic test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight. M. After flushing, all gas piping shall be leak tested in accordance with all local codes and regulations and in conformance with the recommendations or requirements of any National Institute or Association for the specific service application. 3.04 DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES A. Following acceptable pressure testing, flush and disinfect all sections of the water distribution system and receive approval thereof from the appropriate agencies, prior to placing in service. Do not disinfect exterior, exposed pipelines if air temperature is expected to fall below 32 degrees F. Advance notice of 24 hours shall be provided to the Owner and Engineer before disinfecting procedures start. The flushing and disinfection shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA Standard C651, "Disinfecting Water Mains" and all appropriate approval agencies. B. Administration shall be by any of the several methods described in AWWA Standard C651 and as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall submit a proposal describing the desired disinfection method, which shall be approved by the Owner and Engineer prior to commencement of the disinfection process. C. The initial chlorine dose shall be as described in AWWA C651 for the selected disinfection method. Chlorinated water must be retained in the pipeline long enough to destroy all non-spore forming bacteria, and not less than the retention time recommended for the selected disinfection method per AWWA C651. After the chlorine ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-15 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS treated water has been retained for the required time, the chlorine residual at the pipe extremities and at other representative locations shall be as described in AWWA C651 for the selected disinfection method. D. During the period that the chlorine solution or slug is in the section of pipeline, valves shall be opened and closed to obtain a chlorine residual at hydrants and other pipeline appurtenances. Care shall be taken to ensure that no chlorinated water enters any active pipeline. E. Following contact with chlorine solution, the system shall be thoroughly flushed out per Section 4.9 of AWWA C651. All highly chlorinated water shall be flushed out within 72 hours of filling the main with highly chlorinated water. Samples shall then be taken using sterile containers obtained from the local regulatory agency. Samples shall be taken by the Contractor and delivered to the local regulatory agency or approved laboratory for analysis at the Contractor's expense. F. If samples test positive for coliform organisms, the disinfection procedure shall be repeated until two series of satisfactory samples are obtained, the period between such series of samples to be a minimum of 24 hours. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with repeat tests. The Contractor shall obtain certificates of satisfactory bacteriological tests and furnish them to the Owner before the request is made for acceptance of the work. Bacteriological testing shall conform to Section 5 of AWWA C651. G. Chlorine residual tests will be performed after flushing to assure that residual is no higher than what is acceptable to the Owner based on the normal prevailing residual in the drinking water distribution system. Testing shall be performed at multiple locations throughout the piping system to verify residual values. H. Following disinfection, pipelines and appurtenances shall remain isolated from any operational water system facilities until evidence has been submitted to Owner demonstrating that the pipelines and appurtenances have been adequately and properly disinfected. Normally, pipelines and appurtenances shall be isolated for at least 48 hours, unless a longer period is dictated by the Owner. I. Sanitary construction methods must be followed during installation of the final connections so no contamination of the new or existing water main with foreign material or groundwater occurs. Materials used for final connections shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 4.10 of AWWA C651. J. All water used in testing and disinfecting the portions of pipeline, including that used for retesting, shall be disposed of following such testing, retesting, and disinfecting, by the Contractor at its own expense. If required by any agency having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall apply a reducing agent to the solution to neutralize residual chlorine or ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-16 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS chloramines remaining in the water. The disposal of water shall, in all cases, be carried out in strict observance of the water pollution control requirements of the local and state regulatory agencies. The flow of water from the portions of the pipeline shall be controlled to prevent erosion of surrounding soil, damage to vegetation, and altering of ecological conditions in the area. 3.05 PAINTING AND COLOR-CODING SYSTEM A. All exposed piping specified shall be color coded in accordance with the Owner's standard color designation system for pipe recognition. In the absence of a standard color designation system, the Engineer will establish a standard color designation for each piping service category from color charts submitted by the Contractor in compliance with Section 09 90 00— Painting. B. All piping specified in this Section shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 — Painting, except as follows: 1. Copper pipe 2. Stainless steel pipe. Flanges and supports or hangers shall be painted. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 00-17 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 05 07 PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and design calculations required to provide pipe supports in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 03— Concrete B. Section 05 05 23— Metal Fastening C. Section 05 10 00 — Metal Materials D. Section 05 50 00 — Metal Fabrications E. Section 40 05 00— Basic Mechanical Requirements 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Pipe support submittals will not be reviewed prior to review and acceptance of pipe layout submittal. Pipe support submittal shall be fully coordinated with approved pipe layout submittal. Contractor shall use approved piping layout submittal drawings to show proposed pipe support type and location with accurate dimensions to demonstrate that supports meet all specified requirements. B. Applicable and associated cut sheets and drawings for materials and support components shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings in accordance with or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00— Submittals, Section 40 05 00— Basic Mechanical Requirements and other referenced Sections above. 1. Catalog cut information on all system components such as pipe supports, hangers, guides, anchors, and channel-type supports. 2. Drawings of the piping support systems, locating each support, brace, hanger, guide, component and anchor. Identify support, hanger, guide and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number. 0 w N W 3. With each piping support system Shop Drawing, the Contractor shall attach N calculations prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located, showing that the piping support ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 07-1 PIPE SUPPORTS system complies with the specified requirements, including all building code and seismic code requirements pertaining to support of piping and other non-structural components. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all piping support systems unless noted otherwise herein. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of providing a pipe support design sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. Standard details for pipe supports have been included on the Drawings to define minimum requirements as to the types of Contractor designed pipe supports that will be acceptable. B. Where a specific location or type of support is shown on the Drawings, the location and type shall be incorporated in the Contractor's pipe support design. C. Where special pipe support fabrications are required, products and execution shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00— Metal Fabrications and other related and referenced Sections of the Specifications. D. Existing piping support systems to support new piping shall only be used if the Contractor can show and demonstrate by submitting supporting calculations that they are adequate for the additional load imposed by the new piping, or if they are strengthened to support the additional load. E. Contractor's pipe support design should include, but not be limited to, the following criteria and loads imposed on the piping system: 1. Thrust Loads based on the design pressures as specified in Piping Schedules in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve and Gate Schedules. Pipe support design shall not utilize process equipment for thrust restraint or support of piping loads. 2. Dead loads and live loads per the latest version of ASCE/SEI 7 or the local building code if more stringent. Loads shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Weight of pipe b. Weight of pipe contents C. Weight of insulation ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 07-2 PIPE SUPPORTS d. Ice loads (If applicable by location, ice loads per code shall be applied as indicated in the governing building code) e. Seismic loading requirements and conditions as specified in the governing building code and referenced seismic design codes. Refer to the structural code drawing for project specific seismic design criteria. Seismic and sway bracing shall be provided at maximum 10-foot centers. f. Wind loads 3. Loads associated with thermal expansion and contraction of the piping system over the full range of potential temperatures the piping system could experience that should include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Ambient temperature range per local historical weather data (historic high and low obtained from NOAA) b. Process operating temperature range C. Exposure to sunlight where applicable 4. Additional pipe support design considerations shall include the following: a. A minimum safety factor of 2 or as approved by the Engineer, based upon the yield strength of the support material, shall be used for pipe supports, braces, hangers, and guides as well as for beam and column members used in channel-type support systems. b. The horizontal pipe hanger and/or floor support spacing shall be as recommended by the pipe and/or hanger manufacturer but shall not exceed 10 feet on center unless indicated otherwise herein or on the Drawings. C. The design, sizing and spacing of anchor bolts, including concrete anchors, shall be based on withstanding shear and pullout loads imposed by loading at each particular support. The minimum anchor bolt size shall be inches in diameter. Refer to Section 05 05 23— Metal Fastening. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be adequately supported and braced by means of steel hangers and/or supports, concrete piers, supplemental lateral bracing components, pre-fabricated brackets, or otherwise as may be required by the location and forces applied per governing code, including gravity and lateral forces from earthquake and/or wind (if outdoors). Generally, concrete supports shall be used where pipe centerline is less than 3 feet above floor, and hangers above 6 feet unless specified or shown otherwise. Supports shall be not more than 10 feet on center for steel and cast iron, 5 feet on ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 07-3 PIPE SUPPORTS center for plastic unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required by the specific manufacturer. All necessary inserts or appurtenances shall be furnished and installed in the concrete or structures for adequately securing hangers and supports to the structure. Refer to Standard Detail Drawings. 1. Metal pipe support materials, where stainless steel pipe is supported, shall be Type 304L stainless steel meeting the requirements of Section 05 13 00— Stainless Steel. 2. Metal pipe support materials, where carbon steel, ductile or other ferrous pipe is supported, shall be galvanized carbon steel meeting Section 05 12 00— Structural Steel and Section 05 05 13— Galvanizing unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications or by the Engineer. 3. Metal pipe supports indicated as standard type pipe hangers are designed and detailed for gravity loading only. Resulting lateral loads from wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads per code, or special loading conditions during construction, shall be applied to the pipe in accordance with the governing building code. Supplemental lateral stiffening members (when necessary) shall be provided along pipe or at gravity supports using appropriate supplemental members and connections when required by calculations. The Contractor shall include design calculations and details with all pipe hangar and support submissions for review by the Engineer. The main structure and structural components that will support the pipe hangers and other appurtenant components of the facility have been designed to resist all resulting secondary lateral loading from pipe hangers and other non-structural members for gravity and resulting lateral loads. B. Hangers and supports shall conform to the following requirements: 1. All fabricated metal hangers and supports shall be capable of adjustment after installation. Different types of hangers and supports along a pipe length, including bends, shall be kept to a minimum. 2. Hanger rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap, or perforated bar hangers shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from other piping. 3. Vertical piping shall be properly supported at each floor and between floors by stays or braces to prevent rattling and vibration. 4. Supports and hangers for plastic and FRP piping shall include wide saddles or bands as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer to distribute load and thus avoid localized deformation of the pipe. 5. Hanger and supports shall prevent contact between dissimilar metals by use of copper plated, rubber, vinyl coated or stainless-steel hangers. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 07-4 PIPE SUPPORTS 6. Ferrous pipes to be painted shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00— Painting. Ferrous pipes that require painting or galvanizing shall be supported by galvanized hangers and supports. Stainless steel piping shall be supported by stainless steel saddles and straps (if required). 7. Copper piping shall be supported by plastic coated or copper plated steel hangers and supports. 8. Plastic piping shall be supported by plastic coated steel hangers and supports. 9. Hangers and supports shall provide for thermal expansion throughout the full operating temperature range. 10. Expansion and adhesive type anchors used for pipe hangers and supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Metallic hangers and supports may be standard make by Anvil International, Inc., "Witch" by Carpenter& Paterson, Ltd., B-Line Systems, Inc., or equal; and data on the types and sizes to be used shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval. Metallic support system brackets, rods, support clips, clevis hangers, hardware, etc. shall be cast iron or welded steel construction. All gravity type hangers and supports shall be restrained laterally to resist seismic loading and other loading as required by the governing code. D. Non-metallic support system shall be a heavy-duty channel framing system. Channel frames shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process using corrosion grade polyester or vinylester resins. All fiberglass construction shall include suitable ultraviolet inhibitors for UV exposure and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84. Piping accessories, pipe clamps, clevis hangers, support posts, support racks, fasteners, etc., shall be constructed of vinylester or polyurethane resin. Non-metallic support systems shall be standard make Aickinstrut by Aickinstrut, Inc., Unistrut Fiberglass by Unistrut, Inc., Enduro Fiberglass Systems, or equal. The Contractor shall submit data on the types and sizes of approval. Unless otherwise shown or specified the Contractor shall provide support spacings in the conformance with the pipe and support system manufacturer's requirements. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. B. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, flow meters and appurtenances independently of the connected piping. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 07-5 PIPE SUPPORTS C. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. D. Support piping at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints, expansion joints, and couplings, and where shown. E. The Contractor shall not install piping supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. F. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. G. Install pipe anchors (fixed supports and/or guides) where shown and/or as may otherwise be required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. The Contractor may install additional pipe anchors and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that complete details describing location, pipe supports and hydraulic thrust protection are submitted. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 07-6 PIPE SUPPORTS SECTION 40 05 19 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 09 90 00— Painting. B. Reference Section 40 05 00 — Basic Mechanical Requirements C. Reference Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules, for pressure rating requirements for specific applications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 33 00 —Submittal Procedures. B. The Contractor shall submit a certificate from the Manufacturer stating that all linings have been provided in accordance with the specification requirements herein. PART 2— PRODUCT 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All ductile iron pipe and specials shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, weight, thickness class, the date of manufacture, and the word "Ductile". B. Ductile iron pipe of the sizes shown or specified shall conform to AWWA C151/A21.51, Grade 60-42-10 for ductile iron pipe centrifugally cast in metal molds or sand-lined molds. C. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C150/A21.50 for thickness design and shall be supplied in 18-foot or 20-foot nominal lengths or as required to meet the requirements of the Drawings. D. Fittings and specials shall be cast iron or ductile iron and conform to the requirements of AWWA C110/A21.10 and AWWA C153/A21.53. 0 A O E. Minimum Class 53 pipe shall be used for flanged spools. N W ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 19-1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 2.02 PIPE COATINGS A. All buried ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a bituminous coating of standard thickness on the exterior surfaces in accordance with AWWA C151/A21.51. B. All exposed ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a shop-applied prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00— Painting. 2.03 PIPE LININGS A. All pipe and fittings, with the exception of epoxy and glass lined pipe and sleeves, shall be cement mortar lined. Cement mortar linings shall conform to American Standard Specifications for Cement Mortar Lining for Cast Iron Pipe and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, AWWA C104/A21.4 and shall be standard thickness. The mortar lining shall be protected with a bituminous seal coat. B. Epoxy-Lined Pipe 1. Epoxy-lined ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed where specified in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. 2. Epoxy-linings shall be Induron Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lining, Tnemec Perma- Shield PL Series 431, or equal. 3. The finished lining shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils, except at the gasket groove and spigot end up to six inches back from the end of the spigot which shall be 6 mils dry film thickness, minimum. 4. Lining application shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions by an applicator approved by the coating manufacturer and under controlled conditions at the applicator's shop or the pipe manufacturer's plant. C. Glass-Lined Pipe 1. Glass-lined ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed where specified in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. 2. Glass-lined ductile iron pipe shall be provided in accordance with ASTM 131000. 3. Glass linings shall be Ervite Type SG-14, as manufactured by the Ervite Corporation; Ferrock MEH 32, as manufactured by Water Works Supply and Manufacturing, Co; or equal. 4. The finished lining shall have a dry film thickness between 8 and 12 mils; a hardness between 5 and 6 on the Mohs Scale; a density between 40 and 50 grams per cubic inch (2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter) as measured in ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 19-2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE accordance with the requirements of ASTM D792; and be capable of withstanding a thermal shock of 350°F without crazing, blistering, or spalling. 5. Glass-lined pipe and fittings that have been lined must be handled from the outside. No forks, chains, hooks, etc. shall be placed inside the pipe and fittings for lifting, positioning, or laying. 6. Cutting of glass lined pipe in the field shall be limited to only one piece per run of pipe, and this shall be for closure purposes only. Spalling of the glass liner shall be no more than 1/8inch back from the cut. Flanges and bolt holes on spool pieces shall be aligned following the glass lining process and shall be sealed and tested prior to shipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Warping of flanges and/or pipe may be cause for rejection as determined by the Engineer. 2.04 PIPE JOINTS A. Requirements for various types of joints are described in the following paragraphs. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED HEREIN OR ON THE DRAWINGS, ALL EXPOSED DUCTILE IRON PIPING SHALL HAVE FLANGED JOINTS. B. Flanged Joints 1. Flanged joints and fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi with 125 lb. American Standard flanges. 2. All flanges and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.1. 3. Flanges shall be ductile iron and shall be of the threaded or screw on type. 4. The face of the flanges shall be machined after installation of the flange to the pipe. No raised surface shall be allowed on flanges. 5. Flanged pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C115/A21.15. 6. Pipe lengths shall be fabricated to meet the requirements of the Drawings. 7. Gaskets shall be Toroseal by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Flange-Tyte by US Pipe, or equal. Gaskets shall be full-face, 1/8-inch minimum thickness cloth inserted rubber, red rubber, neoprene, or superior elastomer and shall be compatible with the fluid being conveyed. Gaskets shall have an allowable maximum working pressure and temperature equal to or greater than the service in which it is installed. 8. Bolts shall be of the size and length called for and in accordance with the "American Standard" and comply with the requirements of the ANSI/AWWA Standards. Bolts used for exposed flanged joints shall be a minimum ASTM A307, ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 19-3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Grade B carbon steel, and be in accordance with AWWA C110/A21.10. Bolts used for flanged joints in submerged applications shall be Type 316 stainless steel and installed with dielectric isolation flange kits and anti-seize. All bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts of the same material as the bolt. No washers shall be used. C. Bell and Spigot Joints 1. Bell and spigot pipe shall be provided with push on, Oring rubber gasket, compression type joints and shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings and specials shall be supplied with mechanical joints as specified for mechanical joint pipe. If required by installation conditions, pipe shall have caston lugs for adequately tying it together. D. Mechanical Joints 1. Mechanical joints and fittings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C111/A21.11. Joints shall be made employing a tapered rubber gasket forced into a tapered groove with a ductile iron follower ring. If required by installation conditions, pipe and fittings shall have caston lugs for adequately tying the pipe and fittings together. These shall be in conformance with standard practice and as outlined under the appropriate AWWA Specifications. 2. Bolts for mechanical joints shall be high-strength low-alloy steel tee-head bolts with hexagonal nuts per AWWA C111/A21.11. 3. Mechanical coupling joint pipe and fittings shall be split type, shouldered end. Coupling materials shall be malleable iron. Couplings shall have a minimum pressure rating and service equal to that of the connected piping. 4. Gaskets shall be of rubber. 5. After installation, buried couplings shall receive two heavy coats of coal tar epoxy (min. 24 mil thickness) which is compatible with the finish of the couplings. 6. Couplings shall be as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America Style 31, or equal. E. Restrained Joints 1. Restrained joint pipe shall consist of factory manufactured bolted retainer rings, ductile iron locking segments held in place by rubber retainers, or ductile iron retaining rings that lock over the bell of the joint and are secured to prevent rotation, and factory welded retainer beads or rings on the spigot of the pipe. All components of the bolted or snap ring assemblies shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant, high strength, low-alloy steel. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 19-4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE 2. Restrained joint pipe shall be Flex-Ring or Lock-Ring type joints as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, HP LOK or TR Flex as manufactured by US Pipe, Bolt-Lok or Snap-Lok as manufactured by Griffin Pipe Products, TR Flex or Super Lock as manufactured by Clow Water Systems Co., or approved equal. 3. Restrained fittings for piping systems 16-inches in diameter and greater shall have factory restraint systems identical to the factory restrained joint pipe specified above. All fittings shall be minimum pressure Class 250 unless otherwise specified. 4. Restrained fittings for pipe systems 14-inches in diameter and smaller shall be Mechanical Joint fittings with restraint assemblies such as Stargrip by Star Pipe Systems, Mega Lug by EBAA Iron, ONE LOK by Sigma, Grip Ring by Romac, or approved equal. Restraint assemblies including all hardware shall be painted with two heavy coats of coal tar epoxy after installation. Where threaded-rods are allowed, the rods and tabs shall be designed for the specified restraint system design pressure, shall have lengths less than 10 feet between fittings, and shall be painted with two heavy coats of coal tar epoxy after installation. 5. The manufactured systems for thrust restraint indicated above shall be used where restrained joint ductile iron pipe and fittings are specified or indicated on the drawings. Gripping gaskets are not an acceptable form of restraint. Thrust restraint and harnessing systems such as threaded-rods, friction clamps, retainer glands shall be used only where specifically specified herein, indicated on the drawings or if allowed by the Engineer in isolated applications where conditions warrant and necessitate their use. Concrete thrust blocks may be used in accordance with the schedule indicated on the drawings, if applicable. 2.05 OUTLETS A. The Contractor shall provide taps on piping where required or shown on the Drawings. Where pipe or fitting wall thicknesses are insufficient to provide the required number of threads, the Contractor shall not use taps and shall refer to Section 40 05 00— Basic Mechanical Requirements for requirements. 2.06 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A. Wrap all buried ductile iron pipes, valves and fittings with 8 mil polyethylene film per ANSI A21.5/AWWA C-105. Use only tube type for pipe. Complete the wrap prior to placing concrete anchors, collars, supports or thrust blocks. Repair polyethylene if damaged during installation. 2.07 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe shall conform to the standards of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) Specification HS-67, and also ANSI Specification A-112.5.2 for Hub & Spigot ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 19-5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE pipe or A.112.5.1 for Hub & Spigot pipe or A.112.5.1 for No-Hub Pipe. Pipe class shall be "Extra Heavy:(XH). END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 19-6 DUCTILE IRON PIPE SECTION 40 05 58 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTUATORS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions and Section 40 05 00— Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Reference Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules for additional information on gates and operators/actuators. C. Gate operators and electric gate actuators shall be designed to unseat, open or close, and seat the gate under the most adverse operating condition to which the gates will be subjected. D. Operator mounting arrangements shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the manufacturer and/or Engineer. There shall be no mounting restrictions on the electric gate operator. E. The gate operators shall be the full and undivided responsibility of the gate manufacturer in order to ensure complete coordination of the components and to provide unit responsibility. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted in accordance with, or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures and Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions: 1. Shop Drawings 2. O&M Manuals 3. Certification that the force required to operate all gates is as specified herein. 0 V N N_ n W ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 58-1 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTAUTORS PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Electric actuators shall be provided where specified in the Gate Schedules in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. Manual operators shall be provided on all gates which do not receive electric actuators. B. Manual operators and electric actuators shall be mounted on either a floorstand or a benchstand as specified in the Gate Schedules in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules and as shown on the Drawings. 1. Floorstands shall consist of a cast iron pedestal designed to position the input shaft or handwheel approximately 36-inches above the operating floor. Floorstands shall be of the straight or offset design as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. 2. Benchstands shall be provided with a rectangular cast iron base machined and drilled for mounting purposes. C. All operators/actuators shall be provided with a clear, butyrate plastic rising stem cover to protect the rising stem from moisture, dirt, and damage. 1. The stem cover shall not discolor or become opaque for a minimum of five (5) years after installation. 2. "Fully Open" and "Fully Closed" positions shall be marked on each cover with mylar labels. 3. Covers shall be graduated in one (1) inch increments. 4. The top of the stem cover shall be closed and the bottom shall be designed for easy field mounting to the gearbox. 5. The bottom of the stem cover shall be designed to mount to the gearbox in such a way that all moisture is drained out to protect the stem and gearbox. Accumulated moisture of any amount on top of the gearbox inside the stem cover is unacceptable. 2.02 MANUAL OPERATORS A. Manual operators shall be provided by the gate manufacturer. Manual operators shall be handwheel or handcrank operated as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Gate Schedule. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 58-2 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTAUTORS 1. Manual operation shall require no greater than a 40 pound pull on the crank or handwheel with the specified operating head on the gate. 2. Manual operators shall be provided with a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. Tapered anti-friction roller or ball thrust bearings shall be provided above and below a flange on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. 3. Lubricating fittings and extensions shall be provided for the lubrication of all gears and bearings. 4. An arrow with the word 'open" shall be permanently attached or cast on the floorstand, benchstand, or handwheel indicating the direction of rotation to open the gate. Unless otherwise noted, all operators shall turn counter-clockwise to open. 5. All sluice gates and slide gates 3 ft. wide and larger shall be crank-operated, unless otherwise indicated herein as shown on the Drawings. B. Handwheel operators shall be furnished without gear reduction. The removable handwheel shall be fabricated steel or cast iron, designed for rough treatment and minimum weight. Handwheels shall not be less than 12 inches in diameter. The maximum diameter of any handwheel shall not exceed 24 inches. C. Crank-operated type manual operators shall have either single or double gear reduction depending upon the lifting capacity required. 1. Crank operators shall be suitable for operation by a portable gate operator. 2. Gearing shall be steel or cast iron with machine cut teeth designed for smooth operation. 3. The pinion shafts on crank-operated floorstands, either single or double, shall be stainless steel, and supported on tapered roller bearings. 4. All components shall be totally enclosed in a cast iron weather-proof housing with cover. 5. Positive mechanical seals shall be provided on the operating nut and the pinion shafts where they extend from the cast iron case or gear box to retain lubricant and to exclude moisture and dirt. 6. The removable crank shall be cast iron with a revolving brass grip. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 58-3 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTAUTORS PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions and shall include the following site visits for electric actuators: Service Number of Number of Trips Days/Trip Installation and Testing 1 1 Startup and Training 1 1 Services after Startup 1 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All gate actuators shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and the applicable Specification Sections for gates and motor controls. B. Gate actuators shall be factory coated in accordance with the manufacturer's standard paint system. 3.03 SHOP TESTING A. Shop testing shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions and with the following additional requirements: 1. Conduct a complete functional check of each unit. Correct any deficiencies found in shop testing prior to shipment. 2. Submit written certification that: a. Shop tests for the electrical system and all controls were successfully conducted; b. Electrical system and all controls provide the functions specified and required for proper operation of the gate operator system. 3. Each actuator shall be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free of charge. The test equipment shall simulate each typical gate load and the following parameters should be recorded: a. Current at maximum torque setting ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 58-4 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTAUTORS b. Torque at maximum torque setting C. Flash Test Voltage d. Actuator Output Speed or Operating Time e. In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification, such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic drive, closing direction, and wiring diagram code number. f. Verification of actuator torque rating with gate. 3.04 FIELD TESTS A. Field testing shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions and with the following additional requirements: 1. Gate actuators shall be field-tested together with the associated gates. 2. Perform field tests to check and adjust system components, and to test and adjust operation of the overall system, in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. a. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to start-up. b. Final field tests conducted during start-up. 3. Preliminary and final field tests shall be conducted at a time approved by the Engineer. 4. Test all gates at the operating pressures at which the particular line will be used. 5. Test all gates for control operation as directed. 6. Field testing shall include optimization of opening and closing times of the gates. Gate opening and closing times shall be adjusted based on process requirements to optimize operation of the gates. Final gate opening and closing times as determined by field tests shall be approved by the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the system. B. Preliminary Field Tests 1. General: Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to start-up and shall include a functional check of the entire gate operator system and all system components. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 58-5 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTAUTORS 2. Scope: Preliminary field tests shall demonstrate that the gate operator system performs according to specifications and that all equipment, gates, controls, alarms, interlocks, etc., function properly. 3. Based on results of preliminary field tests, the Contractor shall make any adjustments required to settings, etc., to achieve the required gate closing time and operation, as specified or otherwise directed. C. Final Field Tests 1. Final field tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500. 2. Final field tests shall be conducted simultaneously with the start-up and field testing of the pumps. 3. Final field tests shall be conducted for the full range of operating modes and conditions specified and as directed by the Engineer. Each of the gates shall be tested at minimum, maximum, and normal head/flow conditions, and under all specified conditions of opening and closing. 4. Certification of Equipment Compliance: After the final field tests are completed and passed, submit affidavit according to Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 58-6 GATE OPERATORS AND ELECTRIC GATE ACTAUTORS SECTION 40 05 59.23 FABRICATED STAINLESS-STEEL SLIDE GATES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all fabricated stainless-steel slide gates complete with all accessories, special tools, spare parts, mountings, anchor bolts and other appurtenances as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as required for a complete and operating installation. The gates and appurtenances shall be supplied in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C561 Fabricated Stainless-Steel Slide Gates, except as modified herein. Leakage shall not exceed 0.05 gallon per minute per foot of wet perimeter, which is half the allowable leakage rate listed in the latest revision of AWWA C561. B. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions and Section 40 05 00 — Basic Mechanical Requirements. C. Refer to Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules for further detail on gate location, dimensions, design criteria, number required, etc. D. Manual and electric gate actuators (operators) shall be as specified in Section 40 05 58 — Gate Operators and Electric Gate Actuators. E. The Contractor shall coordinate all details, locations, clearances, and other conditions with the various equipment suppliers, so that the gates function as part of a complete system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings, in accordance with or in addition to, the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures and Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions: 1. Shop drawings showing dimensions, general construction, and materials used for all parts of the gate and gate appurtenances. These drawings shall include sufficient detail to determine if the proposed equipment meets the requirements specified herein and must include individual drawings for each typical gate to be provided. a N N ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 59.23-1 FABRICATED STAINLESS-STEEL SLIDE GATES 2. Certification that submitted gates are in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA C561, except as modified herein. 3. Design calculations demonstrating anchor bolt sizing and spacing in compliance with AWWA C561. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products manufactured by Fontaine-Aquanox, Golden Harvest, Hydro Gate, Rodney Hunt, RW Gate Company, Waterman, Whipps, or approved equal. The same manufacturer shall furnish all fabricated stainless-steel slide gate assemblies. B. The gates and appurtenances shall be designed for installation in the structures shown on the Drawings. C. Gates shall be configured as self-contained or non-self-contained and shall be designed to mount directly to concrete (surface mounted or embedded) as indicated in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. D. Gates shall be either submerged or free surface gates as indicated in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. 1. Submerged gates shall be sealed on all 4 sides. 2. Free surface gates shall be sealed on the bottom and both sides. E. Gates shall be either flush bottom or conventional closure as shown on the Drawings. F. Gate actuator shall be as identified in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. G. Stainless-steel nameplates shall be permanently attached to each pedestal (floor stand), yoke (bench), or torque tube (bench stand), indicating gate invert elevation, the Owner's gate tag number per Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules, and the Manufacturer's identification number. 2.02 FRAME AND GUIDES A. The guides shall be integral with the frame. The frame assembly, including the guide members, invert member, and yoke member, shall be constructed of formed stainless steel plate with a minimum thickness of/4-inch. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 59.23-2 FABRICATED STAINLESS-STEEL SLIDE GATES B. Flush-bottom closure type gates shall have a replaceable compressible resilient seal attached to the invert member of the frame. The seal shall be held in place with a retainer bar or molded into the frame invert. Designs that require the invert seal to be mounted on the slide shall not be allowed. C. The guides shall be provided with holes for anchor bolts at a maximum spacing of 18- inches. 2.03 SLIDE A. The slide (disc) shall be stainless-steel plate reinforced with structural shapes of the same alloy welded to the plate. B. Slide deflection shall not exceed 1/720 of gate width at maximum design head, or 1/16 in., whichever is less. 2.04 ACTUATOR SUPPORT/MOUNTING A. Non-self-contained gates shall have an offset pedestal, aligned with the gate stem, for cantilevered actuator support with wall mounted brackets as shown on the Drawings. The cantilevered actuator support shall be designed and provided by the Manufacturer. Manufacturer shall provide load calculations signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer. 2.05 STEMS AND STEM GUIDES A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all gates shall be rising stem. B. Operating stems shall be designed to transmit in compression at least 2-1/2 times the rated output of the operating mechanism with a 40-pound effort on the crank or handwheel, or 2 times the stalled motor torque of the electric actuator, whichever is greater. C. Stem design calculations shall use the stem minor diameter for calculating stem cross sectional area and stresses due to compression and tension loads. D. Keys or pins shall be stainless steel materials matching the alloy of the gate stem. All threaded and keyed couplings of the same size shall be interchangeable. E. Gates wider than 48 inches and having a width greater than twice the height shall have dual stems. Any gates not meeting these criteria shall have a single stem unless otherwise designated in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedules. Dual stem gates shall be equipped with two lifting mechanisms connected with a ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 59.23-3 FABRICATED STAINLESS-STEEL SLIDE GATES jackshaft for synchronization. The jackshaft shall be constructed of the same material as the stems. F. Stem guides shall be adjustable in two directions and shall be placed according to Manufacturer's recommendation, but in no case shall spacing exceed 10 feet on center. In addition, stem slenderness ratio (1/r) shall not be greater than 200. G. Rising stem gates shall be provided with an adjustable stop collar on the stem above and below the actuator lift nut. Collars below the nut shall not be required for self- contained gates where the frame height equals the gate height plus the range of travel of the slide. 2.06 MATERIALS A. Materials for gates shall conform to the following specifications: Frame Assembly Yoke, and Retainers Stainless Steel, Type 316L, ASTM A240 Slide and Stiffeners Stainless Steel, Type 316L, ASTM A240 Stem and Anchor Studs Stainless Steel, Type 316, ASTM A276 Stem Couplings and Stop Collars Stainless Steel, Type 316, ASTM A276 or Bronze, ASTM B584 (UNS C87200 or C87300) Fasteners and Nuts Stainless Steel, Type 316,ASTM F593/F594 or ASTM A276 Invert Resilient Seal Neoprene or EPDM, ASTM D-2000 Gate Seat/Seals and Facing UHMW Polyethylene, ASTM D4020 Non-Rising Stem Thrust Nuts Bronze, ASTM B584 (UNS C87200 or C87300) or Bronze ASTM B505 (UNS C95800) Actuator Lift Nuts Bronze, ASTM B584 (UNS C86300 or C86500) or Bronze ASTM B505 (UNS C95800) Pedestal and Actuator Wall Brackets Stainless Steel, Type 316L, ASTM A276 Actuator Housing Cast Aluminum or Ductile Iron Stem Guide Brackets Stainless Steel, Type 316L, ASTM A276 Stem Guide Bushings UHMW Polyethylene,ASTM D4020 PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions and shall include the following site visits for each series of gates: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 59.23-4 FABRICATED STAINLESS-STEEL SLIDE GATES Service Number of Number of Trips Days/Trip Installation and Testing 2 2 Startup and Training 1 1 3.02 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Installation - The gates shall be set carefully in the locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with the installation manual furnished by the gate manufacturer. 1. The stems shall be provided with wall-mounted guides where required. 2. All gates shall be operated and tested to assure proper installation. B. Concrete Surface Mounting/Grouting — once gate has been properly anchored per manufacturer's requirements, gate shall be formed and grouted with flowable non-shrink grout per Section 03 60 00— Grout to fill all voids between gate frame and wall. Dry packing of grout shall not be considered acceptable. C. Testing - The completely assembled and installed gates shall be inspected for proper seating. 1. The gate slide shall be fully opened and closed in its guide system to ensure that it operates freely. 2. Pedestals shall be shop operated to ensure proper assembly and operation. D. All gates shall be certified that at the operating head conditions indicated on the Gate Schedule, leakage shall not exceed 0.05 gallon per minute per foot of wet perimeter. 3.03 PAINTING A. All ferrous parts, except stainless steel, of the gates and stem guides shall be blast- cleaned and painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 — Painting. B. All machined iron surfaces, including drilled and tapped holes, shall be coated with a protective grease. C. The surfaces of the wall thimbles in contact with concrete shall remain uncoated. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 05 59.23-5 FABRICATED STAINLESS-STEEL SLIDE GATES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 06 20 PROCESS PIPE, VALVE, AND GATE SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 PIPING SCHEDULES A. Piping requirements for this Section are outlined on the Drawings and in the Piping Schedules. In the absence of a specified test pressure, pipe shall be tested at the greater of: 1) 150 percent of working pressure as determined by the Engineer or 2) 10 psig, unless the Schedule indicates no test is required. B. If the pipe material is not shown on the Piping Schedule or otherwise specified, the following materials shall be used. PIPE SIZE MATERIAL TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/DESIGN TEST PRESSURE FLANGED(EXPOSED) CLASS 53 4-IN AND LARGER DIP (1) RESTRAINED(BURIED) PRESSURE CLASS 350 LESS THAN 4-IN PVC/CPVC(2) SOCKET SCH 80 (1) (1)Test at 150 percent of working pressure or 10 psi,whichever is greater. (2)For all PVC/CPVC designations,if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required,CPVC shall be used. Otherwise,PVC shall be used. 1.03 VALVE SCHEDULES A. All valves shall be tagged by the manufacturer according to the control valve designations listed in this Section. B. Valves not listed in this Section shall be manually operated, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 0 1.04 GATE SCHEDULES A. Gates shall be tagged by the manufacturer according to locations listed in this Section. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING PROCESS PIPE, VALVE, IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 06 20-1 AND GATE SCHEDULES m 2 � w § g \ R 2 { C) E z ( m a. \A c jU) w \ (D 2 a. w ƒ § Of ) \ w w 0- o -i \ j % 2 § _ L = 2 § / j ƒ & q An 2 w w / k \ p I § ® \ 3 LU ) = o f » S _I § \ \ oIL § w Cl) 2 } 5 _ CD EL U) ° CD > o G � c \$ }-\§ 2 /< i e\ � // IL / } \ 7/ \-z \f IT \ k/ qQ LU e r a)S (D « o a « }\ E az ? ® max = w (D � 22j2 ( \ \ \ f 2 o -Jw » LU ƒ oo \ \\ co ƒ k ° � \ & \ 2 / Izz LU C: S 0- cl k \ w ) \ \ \ § \ 2 I % \ / f\ \ \ S ¥ w g ƒ< ® 0 2 c C4 2 o / \ 0 ƒ q D ) (D 3 O � \ U)s 2 w ± ) § qf / w k ®_0 2 U E » # G7 9 K / \ ] # g < O U m 2 03 : = / 2 0 � � � > 0- p z o ) � L k � » ] 02 bo \ m 7 =ƒ m�§ a m mO yE �§a. / 22 ƒ 2 »SCRm O k m w ° L � z z z z § / } / k / k / k / Z: k U) w § 2 Z < « « § § § § 3 E2 § § § § 2 2 k < E « § LU § § i k k k -i ¢ L « > zEzE LL E LL E0 w ) jL w eLL E < E < m < m < « zSw« \ je \ je \ je \ j e m w CD 2 / & / & / & / 2 pw o U F § } }} } } } } O = J = J ± L)« } ° o § § § §2 _ _ _ _ » o » oS of zz ® w k § a_ _ a_ a_« a o o _ _ _ _ 0 0La w o ? a = _ _ = 9 Cl) § v § § § § w = LL § w w w C) w m § § § § C) m = _ _ _ IT j m m m m 0 io z ^ r r r r z w � / / q 2 m m 2 / 2 2 e r r r e 3: LL 2 LU § § E / / / / [ LL w m x D ® _ E 2 % f « m _LU m : b o § Cl "T LL § s 00= f f f \ J CN CM k � ? k 2 . . . . / Z ¥ LO § E 2 LLJ U O_ 2 � § - < } < } < } < \ O _ _ « Of a @ � / } / } z } E U m\\j \ j \ jj\ co p z L k g ƒ 2 ) \ p ] m § / / } p R THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall provide, through the services of an instrumentation and control system subcontractor, components, system installation services, as well as required and specified ancillary services in connection with the Instrumentation, Control and Information System. B. The System includes materials, labor, tools, fees, charges, and documentation required to furnish, install, test and place in operation a complete and operable instrumentation, control and information system. C. The system shall include measuring elements, signal converters, transmitters, local control panels, digital hardware, signal and data transmission systems, interconnecting wiring, and pertinent accessories. D. The scope of the work to be performed under this Division includes but is not limited to the following: 1. The Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for the instrumentation and control system as specified herein. 2. Furnish and install process instrumentation and associated taps and supports as scheduled or shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted or supplied by equipment vendors. 3. Furnish and install local control panels, field panels and associated cabinets and panels as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 4. Furnish and install digital control system hardware as specified in Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 5. Final termination and testing of instrumentation and control system signal wiring and power supply wiring at equipment furnished under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 6. Furnish, install and terminate special cables for devices (e.g., instruments, printers, radios). Furnish and terminate control system communication network cables. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 7. Furnish and install surge protection devices for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this Division, including connections to grounding system(s) provided under Division 26. 8. Coordinate grounding requirements with the electrical subcontractor for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this Division. Terminate grounding system cables at equipment provided under this Division. 9. Provide system testing, calibration, training and startup services as specified herein and as required to make systems fully operational. E. The PLC and HMI software programming services shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and scheduling. Reference Section 01 64 13— Owner Furnished SCADA Services. F. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to construct a complete and working installation. Items of equipment or materials that may reasonably be assumed as necessary to accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically stated herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 64 13—Owner Furnished SCADA Services 1.03 RELATED ITEMS A. Field mounted switches, torque switches, limit switches, gauges, valve and gate operator position transmitters, sump pump controls, and other instrumentation and controls furnished with mechanical or electrical equipment not listed in the instrument schedule shall be furnished, installed, tested, and calibrated as specified under other Divisions unless otherwise indicated. B. Additional and related work performed under Division 26 includes the following: 1. Instrument A.C. power source and disconnect switch for process instrumentation, A.C. grounding systems, and A.C. power supplies for equipment, control panels and accessories furnished under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. 2. Conduit and raceways for instrumentation and control system signal wiring, grounding systems, special cables and communication network cables. 3. Instrumentation and control system signal wiring. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 4. Install control system communication network cables. 5. Furnish and install grounding systems for digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive and where included. Grounding systems shall be complete to the equipment provided under Sections 40 60 00 through 40 79 99, inclusive, and where included, ready for termination by the instrumentation subcontractor. 6. Termination of instrumentation and control system signal wiring at equipment furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. 7. Final wiring and termination to A.C. grounding systems and to A.C. power sources (e.g., panelboards, motor control centers, and other sources of electrical power). 1.04 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. Where manufacturers are named for a particular item of equipment, it is intended as a guide to acceptable quality and performance and does not exempt such equipment from the requirements of these Specifications or Drawings. B. In order to centralize responsibility, it is required that equipment (including field instrumentation and control system hardware and software) offered under this Division shall be furnished and installed by the instrumentation subcontractor, or under the supervision of the instrumentation subcontractor, who shall assume complete responsibility for proper operation of the instrumentation and control system equipment, including that of coordinating signals, and furnishing appurtenant equipment. C. The Contractor shall retain total responsibility for the proper detailed design, fabrication, inspection, test, delivery, assembly, installation, activation, checkout, adjustment and operation of the entire instrumentation and control system as well as equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery of detailed drawings, manuals and other documentation required for the complete coordination, installation, activation and operation of mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control systems and related equipment/systems and shall provide for the services of a qualified installation engineer to supervise activities required to place the completed facility in stable operation under full digital control. D. The instrumentation and control system shall be capable of simultaneously implementing all real time control and information system functions, and servicing all operator service requests as specified, without degrading the data handling and processing capability of other system components. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS E. Control system inputs and outputs are listed in Section 40 61 93— Process Control System Input/Output List. This information, together with the functional control descriptions, process and instrumentation diagrams, and electrical control schematics, describes the real time monitoring and control functions to be performed. In addition, the system shall provide various man/machine interface and data reporting functions as specified in the software sections of this Specification. F. The mechanical, process, and electrical drawings indicate the approximate locations of field instruments, control panels, systems and equipment as well as field mounted equipment provided by others. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the mechanical, process and electrical drawings to determine actual size and locations of process connections and wiring requirements for instrumentation and controls furnished under this Contract. The instrumentation subcontractor shall inspect equipment, panels, instrumentation, controls, and appurtenances, either existing or furnished on the Project to determine requirements for interfacing with the control and information system. The Contractor shall coordinate the completion of required modifications with the associated supplier of the item furnished. G. The instrumentation subcontractor shall review and approve the size and routing of instrumentation and control cable and conduit systems furnished by the electrical subcontractor for suitability for use with the associated cable system. H. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of each supplier to aid in interfacing systems. This effort shall include, but shall not be limited to, the distribution of approved shop drawings to the electrical subcontractor and to the instrumentation subcontractor furnishing the equipment under this Division. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a signal transmission system free from electrical interference that would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the instrumentation and control system equipment. J. The Owner shall have the right of access to the subcontractor's facility and the facilities of his equipment suppliers to observe materials and parts; witness inspections, tests and work in progress; and examine applicable design documents, records, and certifications during all stages of design, fabrication, and tests. The instrumentation subcontractor and his equipment suppliers shall furnish office space, supplies, and services required for these observation activities. K. The terms "Instrumentation," "Instrumentation and Control System," and "Instrumentation, Control and Information System" shall hereinafter be defined as equipment, labor, services, and documents necessary to meet the intent of the Specifications. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.05 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM SUBCONTRACTORS A. Instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall be regularly engaged in the detailed design, fabrication, installation, and startup of instrumentation and control systems for water and wastewater treatment facilities. Instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall have a minimum of five years of such experience and shall have completed a minimum of three projects of similar type and size as that specified herein. Where specific manufacturers/models of major hardware or software products (PLC, HMI software, network, etc.) are specified to be used on this project, the instrumentation and control system subcontractor shall have completed at least one project using that specified hardware or software. As used herein, the term "completed" shall mean that a project has been brought to final completion and final payment has been made. B. Acceptable instrumentation and control system subcontractor shall be Prime Controls; or equal. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Solid State: Wherever the term solid state is used to describe circuitry or components in the Specifications, it is intended that the circuitry or components shall be of the type that convey electrons by means of solid materials such as crystals or that work on magnetic principles such as ferrite cores. Vacuum tubes, gas tubes, slide wires, mechanical relays, stepping motors or other devices will not be considered as satisfying the requirements for solid state components of circuitry. B. Bit or Data Bit: Whenever the terms bit or data bit are used in the Specification, it is intended that one bit shall be equivalent to one binary digit of information. In specifying data transmission rate, the bit rate or data bit rate shall be the number of binary digits transmitted per second and shall not necessarily be equal to either the maximum pulse rate or average pulse rate. C. Integrated Circuit: Integrated circuit shall mean the physical realization of a number of circuit elements inseparably associated on or within a continuous body to perform the function of a circuit. D. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF): The MTBF shall be calculated by taking the number of system operating hours logged during an arbitrary period of not less than six months and dividing by the number of failures experienced during this period plus one. E. Mean Time to Repair (MTTR): The MTTR shall be calculated by taking the total system down time for repair over an arbitrary period of not less than six months coinciding with that used for calculation of MTBF and dividing by the number of failures causing down time during the period. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS F. Availability: The availability of a non-redundant device or system shall be related to its MTBF and MTTR by the following formula: A = 100 x (MTBF/ (MTBF + MTTR)) Percent The availability of a device or system provided with an automatically switched backup device or system shall be determined by the following formula: A = A2 + 1 - ((1 - Al) * (1 -Al)) where: Al = availability of non-redundant device or system A2 = availability of device or system provided with an automatically switched backup device or system G. Abbreviations: Specification abbreviations include the following: 1. A- Availability 2. ADC -Analog to Digital Converter 3. Al -Analog Input 4. AO - Analog Output 5. AVAIL -Available 6. BCD - Binary Coded Decimal 7. CSMA/CD - Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect 8. CPU - Central Processing Unit 9. CRC - Cyclic Redundancy Check 10. CS - Control Strategy 11. DAC - Digital to Analog Converter 12. DBMS - Data Base Management System 13. DI - Discrete Input 14. DMA- Direct Memory Access ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-6 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 15. DO - Discrete Output 16. DPDT - Double Pole, Double Throw 17. DVE - Digital to Video Electronics 18. EPROM - Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory 19. FDM - Frequency Division Multiplexing 20. FSK- Frequency Shift Keyed 21. HMI - Human Machine Interface (Software) 22. 1/0 - Input/Output 23. LAN - Network and Communication Equipment 24. LCD - Liquid Crystal Display 25. LDFW- Lead Follow 26. MCC - Motor Control Center 27. MTBF - Mean Time Between Failures 28. MTTR - Mean Time to Repair 29. OS - Operating System 30. PAC - Programmable Automation Controller 31. PCB - Printed Circuit Board 32. PID - Proportional Integral and Derivative Control 33. PLC - Programmable Logic Controller or Programmable Controller 34. PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory 35. RAM - Random Access Memory 36. RDY - Ready 37. RMSS - Root Mean Square Summation 38. RNG - Running ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-7 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 39. ROM - Read Only Memory 40. RTU - Remote Telemetry Unit 41. SPDT - Single Pole, Double Throw 42. ST/SP - Start/Stop 43. TDM - Time Division Multiplexing 44. UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply 45. VFD -Variable Frequency Drive H. To minimize the number of characters in words used in textual descriptions on displays, printouts and nameplates, abbreviations may be used subject to the Engineer's approval. If a specified abbreviation does not exist for a particular word, an abbreviation may be generated using the principles of masking and or vowel deletion. Masking involves retaining the first and last letters in a word and deleting one or more characters (usually vowels)from the interior of the word. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for ambient conditions specified. All system elements shall operate properly in the presence of telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment. B. Inside control rooms and climate-controlled electrical rooms, the temperature will normally be 20 to 25 degrees C; relative humidity 40 to 80 percent without condensation and the air will be essentially free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. Appropriate air filtering shall be provided to meet environmental conditions (e.g., dust). C. Other indoor areas may not be air conditioned/heated; temperatures may range between 0 and 40 degrees C with relative humidity between 40 and 95 percent. D. Field equipment including instrumentation and panels may be subjected to wind, rain, lightning, and corrosives in the environment, with ambient temperatures from -20 to 40 degrees C and relative humidity from 10 to 100 percent. All supports, brackets, interconnecting hardware, and fasteners shall be aluminum, type 316 stainless steel, or metal alloy as otherwise suitable for chemical resistance within chemical feed/storage areas shown on the installation detail drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-8 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENT A. Payment to the Contractor for Control and Information System materials, equipment, and labor shall be in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. The schedule of values submitted as required by the General and Supplementary Conditions shall reflect a breakdown of the work required for completion of the Control and Information System. The breakdown shall include sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to administer payment for the Control and Information System. B. Requests for payment for materials and equipment that are not installed on site, but are required for system construction and the factory witness test (e.g., digital hardware), or are properly stored as described in the General and Supplementary Conditions and herein, shall be accompanied by invoices from the original supplier to the instrumentation subcontractor substantiating the cost of the materials or equipment. C. Any balance remaining within the schedule of values for field instruments and other materials installed on the site, or for other materials for which payment is made by invoice, will be considered due upon completion of the Final Acceptance test. 3.02 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials. B. Upon completion of the instrumentation and control work, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that has accumulated during the construction work. The entire area shall be left neat, clean, and acceptable to the Owner. 3.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance of the Instrumentation and Control System will be determined complete by the Owner and Engineer, and shall be based upon the following: 1. Receipt of acceptable start up and commissioning completion and availability reports and other documentation as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Completion of the Availability Demonstration. 3. Completion of control system training requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-9 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 4. Completion of punch-list items that are significant in the opinion of the Owner and Engineer. 5. Receiving all final submittals as listed in Section 40 61 15. B. Final acceptance of the System shall mark the beginning of the warranty period. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 13-10 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 40 61 15 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall submit for review complete Shop Drawings for all equipment in accordance with the General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 01 of the Specifications. All submittal material shall be complete, legible, and reproducible, and shall apply specifically to this project. B. All submittal materials shall be tailored to this project by highlighting relevant items or crossing out non-applicable items. Generic submittals without identified options will be returned the Contractor without review. C. Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) Letter: 1. Where a named manufacturer and product is specified and a substitution or an "or equal' product is submitted, the submittal shall be accompanied by a "Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter." If the required submittal is submitted without the letter, the submittal will be rejected. 2. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor, subcontractor (if applicable), and the equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. This letter shall include a copy of the Specification Section to which the submittal pertains. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter"C", "D", or "E" shall be typed or written in. a. The letter "C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. b. The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. C. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. 3. Any requirements with the letter"D" or"E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions shall not be acceptable. 4. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures B. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions 1.03 EXISTING CONDITIONS /AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL A. Prior to modifying, demolishing, removing, or decommissioning equipment, thoroughly investigate and document the existing conditions. Please note that Owner's record drawings alone are not sufficient for documentation. The record drawings, if present, shall be verified in the field prior to submitting. Submit drawings, markup, sketches, information, or other materials for documenting the following existing conditions: 1. All 1/0 on PLC modules that have its wiring modified or new 1/0 terminated or for any PLC that is being decommissioned/removed/demolished. Document module number, point number, wire numbers, terminal numbers, destination, and function. 2. All wiring entering or leaving a PLC that is being decommissioned, removed, or demolished that is not otherwise accounted for. B. When all information has been gathered, it shall be submitted to Engineer along with a clear and unequivocal statement that the existing conditions have been documented and understood. Contractor shall be held responsible for all issues that arise due to Contractor's modifications, demolition, removal, or decommissioning of existing equipment, including necessary reversion back to previous conditions. 1.04 DIGITAL HARDWARE SUBMITTALS A. Submit system block diagram(s) showing: 1. All equipment to be provided. 2. All interconnecting cable. 3. Equipment names, manufacturer, and model numbers. 4. Equipment locations. B. Submit information for all digital equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. 5. Mounting requirements. 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 1.05 SOFTWARE SUBMITTALS A. Software submittals shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Bill of materials with software names, vendors, and complete listings of included software modules. 2. Standard manufacturer's literature describing the products. 3. Description of function of software in Control and Information System. 4. Limitations or constraints of software. 5. Minimum system (processor and memory) requirements. 6. Operation and maintenance requirements. B. Submit information on the following software: 1. Third-party software, including: a. Operating system. b. Operator workstation (SCADA or HMI) software, including all add-in software provided to perform specific functions (alarm dialers, schedulers, backup creation software, etc.). C. Office-type products, such as spreadsheets, word processors, etc. d. Database management software. e. Communication software, including all applicable local and wide area network software. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS f. Programmable controller programming software (where applicable). 2. Software configuration, including: a. Graphic display organization. b. Database configuration for operator workstations and database management system. C. Trends. d. System security. e. Formats for all reports, including all required calculations. f. Intercommunications between software products required to implement system functions. g. Equipment backup configuration and requirements. C. Control Strategies 1. Description of automatic logic and all non-standard manual logic using plain English, for non-technical persons, and written in Contractor's own words. The write-up shall include references to associated 1/0, tag/loop numbers, alarming/interlocks. 2. Submitting language verbatim to Section 40 61 96— Process Control Descriptions shall not be acceptable. D. Application Software 1. Provide application software documentation that contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. 2. Application software includes all custom routines developed specifically for this project, or pre-written routines used for accomplishing specified functions for this project. This shall include any add-in custom software. E. Graphic Displays 1. Submit all graphic displays required to perform the control and operator interface functions specified herein. Submitted graphic displays shall be for both new and modified graphics. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 2. Submit the complete set of graphic displays for review by the Owner and the Engineer at least 60 days prior to commencement of factory testing. 3. Where a large number of graphic displays are required, submit an initial set of example displays for review before the complete set of displays is submitted. This initial set shall include examples of all basic graphic display design features and parameters and is intended to allow the Contractor to obtain preliminary approval of these features and parameters prior to beginning main graphic display production. 4. The Contractor shall allow for one major cycle of revisions to the displays prior to factory testing and one minor cycle of revisions following factory test. A cycle of revisions shall be defined as all revisions necessary to complete a single set of changes marked by the Engineer and the Owner. Additional corrections shall be performed during start-up as required to accommodate changes required by actual field conditions, at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. The required submittals in each revision cycle shall be full color prints of the entire set of displays. 6. Displays shall be printouts of actual process graphics implemented in the system. 1.06 CONTROL PANEL SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided for all control panels, and shall include: 1. Exterior panel drawings with front and side views, to scale. 2. Interior layout drawings showing the locations and sizes of all equipment and wiring mounted within the cabinet, to scale. 3. Panel area reserved for cable access and conduit entry. 4. Location plans showing each panel in its assigned location. B. Submit information for all exterior and interior panel mounted equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 5. Mounting requirements. 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. C. Submit panel wiring diagrams showing power, signal, and control wiring, including surge protection, relays, courtesy receptacles, lighting, wire size and color coding, etc. 1.07 INSTRUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Submit information on all field instruments, including but not limited to the following: 1. Product (item) name and tag number used herein and on the Contract Drawings. 2. Catalog cuts, including complete part number breakdown information. 3. Manufacturer's complete model number. 4. Location of the device. 5. Input output characteristics. 6. Range, size, and graduations. 7. Physical size with dimensions, NEMA enclosure classification, and mounting details. 8. Materials of construction of all enclosures, wetted parts and major components. 9. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable. 10. Certified calibration data on all flow metering devices. 11. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 12. Associated surge protection devices. 13. Installation drawings/details. 1.08 WIRING AND LOOP DIAGRAMS A. Submit interconnection wiring and loop diagrams for all panels and signals in the Control and Information System. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-6 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS B. Electrical interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, including terminations to equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions, complete with equipment and cable designations. Where applicable, interconnection wiring diagrams shall be organized by input/output card. Interconnecting diagrams shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner on 11 X 17-inch reproducible prints. C. Loop drawings shall conform to the latest version of ISA Standards and Recommended Practices for Instrumentation and Control. Loop Drawings shall conform to ISA S5.4. D. Loop drawings shall not be required as a separate document provided that the interconnecting wiring diagrams required in Paragraph B., above, contain all information required by ISA 5.4. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver equipment operation and maintenance manuals in compliance with Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures. Operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals shall consist of two basic parts: 1. Manufacturer standard O&M manuals for all equipment and software furnished under this Division. 2. Custom O&M information describing the specific configuration of equipment and software, and the operation and maintenance requirements for this particular project. B. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed drawings, wiring diagrams, and instructions necessary for installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment. The illustrated parts shall be numbered for identification. All modifications to manufacturer standard equipment and/or components shall be clearly identified and shown on the drawings and schematics. All information contained therein shall apply specifically to the equipment furnished and shall only include instructions that are applicable. All such illustrations shall be incorporated within the printing of the page to form a durable and permanent reference book. C. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. The instructions shall be bound in locking 3-D-ring binders with bindings no larger than 3.5 inches. The manuals shall include 15% spare space for the addition of future material. The instructions shall include drawings reduced or folded and shall provide the following as a minimum. 1. A comprehensive index. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-7 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 2. A functional description of the entire system, with references to drawings and instructions. 3. A complete "as built" set of all approved shop drawings, which shall reflect all work required to achieve final system acceptance. 4. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges, and pertinent data. 5. Full specifications on each item. 6. Detailed service, maintenance, and operation instructions for each item supplied. 7. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. 8. Complete parts lists with stock numbers and name, address, and telephone number of the local supplier. 9. References to manufacturers' standard literature where applicable. 10. Warning notes shall be located throughout the manual where such notes are required to prevent accidents or inadvertent misuse of equipment. D. The operating instructions shall clearly describe the step by step procedures that must be followed to implement all phases of all operating modes. The instructions shall be in terms understandable and usable by operating personnel and maintenance crews and shall be useful in the training of such personnel. E. The maintenance instructions shall describe the detailed preventive and corrective procedures required, including environmental requirements during equipment storage and system operation, to keep the System in good operating condition. All hardware maintenance documentation shall make reference to appropriate diagnostics, where applicable, and all necessary wiring diagrams, component drawings and PCB schematic drawings shall be included. F. The hardware maintenance documentation shall include, as a minimum, the following information: 1. Operation Information: This information shall include a detailed description of how the equipment operates and a block diagram illustrating each major assembly in the equipment. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-8 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 2. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include all applicable visual examinations, hardware testing and diagnostic routines, and the adjustments necessary for periodic preventive maintenance of the System. 3. Corrective Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include guides for locating malfunctions down to the card replacement level. These guides shall include adequate details for quickly and efficiently locating the cause of an equipment malfunction and shall state the probable source(s) of trouble, the symptoms, probable cause, and instructions for remedying the malfunction. 4. Parts Information: This information shall include the identification of each replaceable or field repairable component. All parts shall be identified on a list in a drawing; the identification shall be of a level of detail sufficient for procuring any repairable or replaceable part. Cross references between equipment numbers and manufacturer's part numbers shall be provided. G. Software documentation shall conform to a standard format and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. A program abstract that includes: a. Program Name - The symbolic alphanumeric program name. b. Program Title - English text identification. C. Program Synopsis - A brief text shall be provided that specifies the need for the program, states when it shall be used and functionally describes all inputs, outputs and functions performed. This descriptive text shall be written in a language that is understandable by non-programming-oriented readers. 2. A program description that shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Applicable Documents- List all documents (standard manufacturer's literature, other program descriptions, etc.) by section, if practical, that apply to the program. One complete copy of all applicable reference material shall be provided. b. Input Output - Identify each input and output parameter, variable, and software element used by the program. State the purpose of all inputs, outputs, and variables. C. Processing - This section shall contain a description of the overall structure and function of the program. Describe the program run stream and present a detailed description of how the program operates. Describe the timing and sequencing of operations of the program relative to other programs. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-9 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS Describe all interactions with other programs. Processing logic that is not readily described without considerable background information shall be handled as a special topic with references to an appendix or to control strategy document that details the necessary information. Reference shall also be made to an appendix or control strategy document for equation and program algorithm derivations. d. System Configuration - Describe in detail the system configuration or status required for program implementation, if appropriate. e. Limitations and Constraints - Summarize all known or anticipated limitations of the program, if appropriate. f. Storage - Define program storage requirements in terms of disk or RAM memory allocation. g. Verification - Describe, as a minimum, a test that can be used by the operator to assure proper program operation. Define the required system configuration, input requirements and criteria for successful test completion. h. Diagnostics - Describe all program diagnostics, where applicable. Descriptions shall list each error statement, indicate clearly what it means, and specify what appropriate actions should be taken. i. Malfunction Procedures - Specify procedures to follow for recovering from a malfunction due to either operator error or other sources. 1.10 FINAL SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION A. All documentation shall be delivered to the Owner prior to final system acceptance in accordance with the Contract Documents. As a minimum, final documentation shall contain all information originally part of the control system submittals. B. Provide a complete set of detailed electrical interconnection diagrams required to define the complete instrumentation and control system. All diagrams shall be 11 X 17-inch original reproducible prints. All diagrams shall be corrected to describe final "as built" hardware configurations and to reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. C. Provide system software documentation for the operation and maintenance of all system software programs provided as a part of the digital system. All system software documentation shall be amended as required to delineate all modifications and to accurately reflect the final as built software configurations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-10 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS D. Provide application software documentation that contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. E. Provide control strategy documentation which shall include control strategy (block oriented or ladder logic) diagrams to describe the control of all processes. Control strategy documentation shall reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. Control strategy documentation shall conform to the submittal requirements listed hereinabove. F. O&M documentation shall be amended with all final, adjusted values for all setpoints and other operating parameters for Owner reference. G. The Owner recognizes the fact that not all possible problems related to real time events, software interlocks, and hardware maintenance and utilization can be discovered during the Acceptance Tests. Therefore, the instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall investigate, diagnose, repair, update, and distribute all pertaining documentation of the deficiencies that become evident during the warranty period. All such documentation shall be submitted in writing to the Owner within 30 days of identifying and solving the problem. 1.11 PROGRAMS AND SOURCE LISTINGS A. Provide one copy of all standard, of-the-shelf system and application software (exclusive of firmware resident software) on original media furnished by the software manufacturer. B. Provide one copy of source listings on digital media, acceptable to Engineer, for all custom software/logic written specifically for this facility, all database files configured for this facility, and all control strategies. All source listings shall include a program abstract, program linkage and input/output data. Comments describing the program flow shall be frequently interspersed throughout each listing. C. All software/logic shall be in both its native format and in Adobe Portable Document Format. 1.12 SUBMITTAL/DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. All drawing-type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in the latest version of AutoCAD. B. All textual-type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in the latest version of Microsoft Word or in searchable Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). Raster scans will not be accepted. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-11 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS 1.13 ELECTRONIC O&M MANUALS A. Subject to acceptance by the Engineer, the O&M information may be submitted in part or in whole in an electronic format on digital media. B. Electronic O&M manuals shall contain information in standard formats (searchable Adobe PDF, Word, AutoCAD, HTML, etc.) and shall be easily accessible using standard, "off-the-shelf" software such as an Internet browser. Raster scans will not be accepted. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 15-12 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMITTALS SECTION 40 61 21 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall test the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21.71 — Factory Witness Test C. Section 40 61 21.72 — Field Testing D. Section 40 61 21.73— Final Acceptance Test 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For each of the specified tests, submit a test plan to the Engineer at least one month in advance of commencement of the tests. The test plan shall contain the following at a minimum: 1. A schedule of all testing to be conducted. 2. A brief description of the testing to be performed 3. Test objectives. 4. Testing criteria per the Specifications. 5. Check lists and procedures for performing each of the specified tests. 6. Sample test result documentation. 7. Requirements for other parties. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All system start-up and test activities shall follow detailed test procedures; check lists, etc., previously approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified at least 21 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 21-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING days in advance of any system tests and reserves the right to have his and/or the Owner's representatives in attendance. B. The Contractor shall provide the services of experienced factory trained technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect, and adjust all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. C. The Contractor (or designee) shall maintain master logbooks for each phase of installation, startup and testing activities specified herein. Each logbook shall include signal, loop or control strategy tag number, equipment identification, description and space for sign-off dates, Contractor signature and Engineer signature. Example test documentation specific to each phase of testing shall be approved prior to initiation of that testing, as specified hereinabove. D. All test data shall be recorded on test forms, previously approved by the Engineer. When each test has been successfully completed, a certified copy of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all specified test requirements have been met and that the system is operating in accordance with the Contract Documents. E. The Engineer will review test documentation in accordance with the Contract Documents and will give written notice of the acceptability of the tests within 10 days of receipt of the test results. F. All testing shall include time for unstructured testing where Owner and Engineer shall have access to the equipment for testing previously undefined normal and abnormal aspects, situations, and functions. Contractor or his/her designee shall provide assistance during this time, including but not limited to documenting the unstructured testing. Owner's and Engineer's unstructured testing scenarios may not be available prior to the testing period. G. If, in the Engineer's or Owner's opinion, Contractor is not ready for witness testing and Engineer is present, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer's labor to attend the test. Witness testing shall then be rescheduled, with sufficient notice. In the event that Engineer has traveled, even if only to the project-site, for the testing, Engineer's travel costs shall also be reimbursed. In the event that the Owner has traveled for the testing, Owner's travel costs shall also be reimbursed. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 21-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 21-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 21.71 FACTORY WITNESS TEST PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform a Factory Witness Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.72 — Field Testing D. Section 40 61 21.73— Final Acceptance Test 1.03 FACTORY WITNESS TEST A. The Control and Information System equipment shall not be shipped until the Contractor receives notice of acceptability of the factory tests. B. Each item of equipment shall be fully factory inspected, calibrated and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. Exceptions shall be approved in writing by the Engineer. C. Each subsystem shall be fully factory tested for function and operation. D. System performance shall be tested using a fully integrated system, including all software and hardware. To achieve this, the entire control system, including all peripheral devices and all interconnecting cables (field instruments are not included in this requirement), shall be assembled on the factory test floor and the complete operational program loaded and simulated inputs applied. E. All hardware and software required to perform the specified testing shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. F. The instrumentation subcontractor shall perform a 100-hour full system test, during which the entire system shall operate continuously without failure in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If a system component fails during the test, the 100-hour test period shall be restarted after its operation is restored. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.71-1 FACTORY WITNESS TEST G. The factory testing shall demonstrate all aspects of system sizing and timing including: 1. Monitoring and control scan times at the PLC level. 2. Response times at the operator workstation level. H. The overall system as well as individual component hardware shall be tested under conditions of power failure to ensure proper response as specified herein. I. PLC Operation - All functions comparable to those demonstrated for the operator workstations shall be demonstrated on the PLCs. This shall include the following: 1. On-line and off-line diagnostics. 2. For redundant units, fail-over operation and reconfiguration. 3. System initialization and restart. 4. Network communications, including fieldbus communications where required. 5. Non-volatility of memory. 6. Operation of all control logic shall be demonstrated as described herein. J. Process 1/0 Simulation - Process input/output simulation for PLCs shall be performed with a manual simulation control panel, a separate programmable logic controller, network-based simulation software, analog signal generators, and/or jumpering of discrete signals between outputs and associated inputs, or some combination of these. Alternate process 1/0 systems such as plug-in circuit cards or 1/0 test modules may be utilized subject to approval by the Engineer to provide the specified simulation functions. The simulation system shall provide analog and discrete 1/0 hardware devices in sufficient quantity to allow complete and thorough testing of the control strategies and functions of the system. The process 1/0 simulation system shall be used in several ways as follows: 1. To provide a means of communications checkout from the operator workstations through the various levels of software in the PLCs and to the process, i.e., the simulation panel. Likewise, a discrete or analog input shall be initiated from the simulation panel and the result monitored at the workstations. 2. Alarm response to discrete status changes or analog value limits shall be verified. Database entries or attributes such as engineering units and conversion equations shall be verified by varying analog inputs. 3. To provide data for use at all levels of the control system at the time of system integration. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.71-2 FACTORY WITNESS TEST K. Control Strategy Testing - Provision shall be made to test all control strategies to prove the integrity of each strategy and the process control language in which it is implemented. For each control strategy, all functions shall be tested individually (where possible) and collectively to verify that the control strategy performs as described herein and as required for overall functionality within the control system. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.71-3 FACTORY WITNESS TEST THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 21.72 FIELD TESTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform field testing on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.71 — Factory Witness Test D. Section 40 61 21.73— Final Acceptance Test E. Section 40 70 00 — Instrumentation for Process Systems 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Control system start-up and testing shall be performed to ensure that all plant processes shall be systematically and safely placed under digital control in the following order: 1. Primary elements such as transmitters and switch devices shall be calibrated and tested as specified in Section 40 70 00— Instrumentation for Process Systems. 2. Each final control element shall be individually tested as specified hereinafter. 3. Each control loop shall be tested as specified hereinafter. 4. Each control strategy shall be tested under automatic digital control as specified hereinafter. 5. The entire control system shall be tested for overall monitoring, control, communication, and information management functions, and demonstrated for system availability as specified hereinafter. B. System start-up and test activities shall include the use of water, if necessary, to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges and environmental conditions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.72-1 FIELD TESTING C. Each phase of testing shall be fully and successfully completed and all associated documentation submitted and approved prior to the next phase being started. Specific exceptions are allowed if written approval has been obtained in advance from the Engineer. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall ensure that all mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control system equipment and related equipment and/or systems are tested for proper installation, adjusted and calibrated on a loop-by-loop basis prior to control system startup to verify that each is ready to function as specified. Each test shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of meetings with all affected trades. A meeting shall be held each morning to review the day's test schedule with all affected trades. Similarly, a meeting shall be held each evening to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule as appropriate. C. The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical subcontractor conforms to the start-up, test and sign-off procedures specified herein to assure proper function and coordination of all motor control center control and interlock circuitry and the transmission of all discrete and/or analog signals between equipment furnished by the electrical subcontractor and the control system specified herein. D. The Contractor shall ensure that the HVAC subcontractor conforms to the start-up, test and sign-off procedures specified herein to assure proper function of all HVAC system control and interlock circuitry and the transmission of all discrete and/or analog signals between HVAC equipment and controls and the control system specified herein. 1.05 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT TESTING A. The proper control of all final control elements shall be verified by tests conducted in accordance with the requirements specified herein. B. All modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate speed or position response by applying power and input demand signals, and observing the equipment for proper direction and level of reaction. Each final control element shall be tested at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of signal input level and the results checked against specified accuracy tolerances. Final control elements, such as VFDs, that require turndown limits shall be initially set during this test. C. All non-modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate position response by applying and simulating control signals, and observing the equipment for proper reaction. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.72-2 FIELD TESTING 1.06 LOOP CHECKOUT A. Prior to control system startup and testing, each monitoring and control loop shall be tested on an individual basis from the primary element to the final element, including the operator workstation or loop controller level, for continuity and for proper operation and calibration. B. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. All modes of control shall be exercised and checked for proper operation. C. The accuracy of all DACs shall be verified by manually entering engineering unit data values at the operator workstation and then reading and recording the resulting analog output data. D. The accuracy of all ADCs shall be verified using field inputs or by manually applying input signals at the final controller, and then reading and recording the resulting analog input data at the operator workstation. E. Each loop tested shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.07 CONTROL SYSTEM STARTUP AND TESTING A. Control system startup and testing shall be performed to demonstrate complete compliance with all specified functional and operational requirements. Testing activities shall include the simulation of both normal and abnormal operating conditions. B. All digital hardware shall be fully inspected and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. All diagnostic programs shall be run to verify the proper operation of all digital equipment. C. Final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested under start-up and steady-state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using local area control panels, motor control center circuits, and local field mounted control circuits. All hardwired control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control to final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. D. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses for final control elements. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. E. Each control strategy shall be tested to verify the proper operation of all required functions. The control system start-up and test activities shall include procedures for ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.72-3 FIELD TESTING tuning all control loops incorporating PID control modules, and for adjusting and testing all control loops as required to verify specified performance. F. The control system start-up and test activities shall include running tests to prove that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System is capable of continuously, safely and reliably regulating processes, as required by the Contract, under service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal plant operating ranges and environmental conditions. G. A witnessed functional acceptance test shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance of individual monitoring and control loops and control strategies. At least one test shall be performed to verify that the control and instrumentation system is capable of simultaneously implementing all specified operations. H. Each loop and control strategy test shall be witnessed and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.08 FACILITY STARTUP COORDINATION A. Facility start-up shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents and those requirements specified herein. Facility start-up shall commence after all previously described start-up and test activities have been successfully completed and shall demonstrate that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System can meet all Contract requirements with equipment operating over full operating ranges under actual operating conditions. B. The control system start-up period shall be coordinated with process startup activities and shall be extended as required until all plant processes are fully operational and to satisfy the Engineer that all control system Contract requirements have been fulfilled in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. The instrumentation subcontractor's personnel shall be resident at the facility to provide both full time (eight hours/day, five days/week) and 24 hours on call (seven days/week) support of operating and maintenance activities for the duration of the start-up period. D. At least one qualified control systems technician shall be provided for control system startup and test activities and at least two when loop checkout is being performed. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.72-4 FIELD TESTING SECTION 40 61 21.73 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform the Final Acceptance Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 21 — Process Control System Testing C. Section 40 61 21.71 — Factory Witness Test D. Section 40 61 21.72 — Field Testing 1.03 AVAILABILITY DEMONSTRATION AND FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Upon completion of all control system startup activities and prior to final system acceptance, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the availability of the entire control system, including operation under conditions of digital equipment fail-over, initiated either automatically or manually, shall be not less than 99.8 percent during a 30-day availability test period. The Owner shall be given two (2) weeks' notice of the starting date of the 30-day availability test. B. For purposes of determining availability figures, downtime of each system or portions of each system resulting from the causes specified hereunder will not be considered system failures. 1. Downtime of any network-connected device that is automatically backed-up upon failure shall not be considered a system failure provided that the downtime of the failed component does not exceed 24 hours. 2. Downtime of a PLC that is not automatically backed-up shall be considered a system failure if the downtime of the failed controller exceeds one (1) hour. 3. Downtime of a portion of the system resulting from failure of any field sensor shall not be considered a system failure provided that the system operates as specified under this condition. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.73-1 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST 4. Downtime of the following devices shall not be considered a system failure provided the failed device is repaired within the specified time: a. Hard disc (one day) b. Workstations (one day) C. Communication interfaces (eight hours) d. Printer (three days) e. Process control system networks (eight hours) f. Off-line (optical, etc.) storage units (one day) g. UPS unit (one day) 5. Total shutdown of a single PLC resulting from a software fault shall be considered a system failure. 6. An erroneous command to the process that can be specifically related to a software fault shall be considered as one (1) hour of downtime. 7. The inoperability of any subsystem resulting from a software fault shall be considered a system failure. 8. The failure of the same component more than one time during the 30-day test shall be considered a system failure. C. If the system fails the 30-day availability test, the 30-day test period shall be restarted after the failed component or software is repaired/replaced and full operation is restored. The system shall be demonstrated for the full 30-day period following the restart. D. The Contractor shall submit an availability demonstration report that shall state that all system availability requirements have been met. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 21.73-2 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST SECTION 40 61 22 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS, GENERAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide tools, supplies, and spare parts as specified herein for the operation and maintenance of the Control and Information System. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLIES A. The Contractor shall provide supplies as specifically required in other Sections of Division 40. 2.02 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare parts for items of control and instrumentation equipment as recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Furnish all spares in moisture-proof boxes designed to provide ample protection for their contents. Label all boxes to clearly identify contents and purpose. C. The Contractor shall replace all spare parts consumed during installation, testing, start-up, the system availability demonstration, and the guarantee period. D. Refer to individual digital hardware and instrument sections for additional requirements specific to those devices. PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 22-1 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS, GENERAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 23 SIGNAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall conform to the signal coordination requirements specified herein. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating signal types and transmission requirements between the various parties providing equipment under this Contract. This shall include, but not be limited to, distribution of appropriate shop drawings among the equipment suppliers, the electrical subcontractor, and the instrumentation subcontractor. C. Analog signals shall be signals for transmitting process variables, etc. from instruments and to and from panels, equipment PLCs and Control System PLCs. D. Discrete signals shall consist of contact closures or powered signals for transmitting status/alarm information and control commands between starters, panels, equipment PLCs, the Control System, etc. 1.02 ANALOG SIGNAL TRANSMISSION A. Signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments, controllers, and all equipment and control devices shall be individually isolated, linear 4-20 milliamperes and shall operate at 24 VDC. B. Signal output from all transmitters and controllers shall be current regulated and shall not be affected by changes in load resistance within the unit's rating. C. All cable shields shall be grounded at one end only, at the control panel, with terminals bonded to the panel ground bus. D. Analog signal isolation and/or conversion shall be provided where necessary to interface with instrumentation, equipment controls, panels, and appurtenances. E. Non-standard transmission systems such as pulse duration, pulse rate, and voltage regulated shall not be permitted except where specifically noted in the Contract Documents. Where transmitters with nonstandard outputs do occur, their outputs hall be converted to an isolated, linear, 4-20 milliampere signal. F. The Contractor shall provide 24 V power supplies for analog signals and instruments where applicable and as required inside panels, controls, etc. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 23-1 SIGNAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS G. Where two-wire instruments transmit directly to the Control and Information System, the instrumentation subcontractor shall provide power supplies at the PLC-equipped control panels for those instruments. H. Where four-wire instruments with on-board loop power supplies transmit directly to the Control and Information System, the instrumentation subcontractor shall provide necessary signal isolators or shall otherwise isolate the input from the Control and Information System loop power supply. Similar provisions shall be made when a third element such as a recorder, indicator, or single loop controller with integral loop power supply is included in the loop. 1.03 DISCRETE INPUTS A. All discrete inputs to equipment and Control and Information System PLCs, from field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be unpowered (dry) contacts in the field device or equipment, powered from the PLCs, unless specified otherwise. B. Sensing power (wetting voltage) supplied by the PLC shall be 24 VDC. 1.04 DISCRETE OUTPUTS A. All discrete outputs from local control panels and Control and Information System PLCs to field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be dry contact relay outputs. B. PLC powered discrete outputs shall energize 24 VDC pilot relay coils in the field devices, starters, panels, etc. which in turn open or close contacts in the associated control circuit. The 24 VDC relay coil, contacts, and associated control circuitry shall be furnished integral with the field device, starter, panel, etc. by the supplier and contractor furnishing the field device, starter, or panel. C. Where required or specified herein, discrete outputs from equipment and Control and Information System PLC's to field devices, starters, panels, motor operated valves, etc., shall be dry contact or relay outputs. D. Outputs to solenoid valves shall be 120 VAC, powered from the PLC or control panel unless specified or shown otherwise. 1.05 OTHER DISCRETE SIGNALS A. Discrete signals between starters, panels, etc. where no 24 VDC power supply is available may be 120 VAC, as long as such contacts are clearly identified in the starter, panel, etc. as being powered from a different power supply than other starter/panel components. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 23-2 SIGNAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS B. Where applicable, warning signs shall be affixed inside the starter, panel, etc. stating that the panel is energized from multiple sources. C. Output contacts in the starter, panel, etc., that are powered from other locations shall be provided with special tags and/or color-coding. Disconnecting terminal strips shall be provided for such contacts. D. The above requirements shall apply to all starters and panels, regardless of supplier. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 23-3 SIGNAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 24 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. It is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to secure high quality in materials, equipment and workmanship in order to facilitate operations and maintenance of the facility. The Contractor shall provide equipment and services to meet this intent. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All Work shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code, National Electric Safety Code, OSHA, State/Commonwealth, local and other applicable codes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE - GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be new and the products of reputable recognized suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items. B. For uniformity, only one manufacturer and model will be accepted for each type of product. Where differing models are required, equipment from a single manufacturer shall be provided. C. Equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged construction, of ample strength for stresses that may occur during fabrication, transportation, and erection as well as during continuous or intermittent operation. They shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored and shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be given consideration in the design of details. D. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of industrial grade, unless otherwise noted, which shall be of sturdy and durable construction and be suitable for long, trouble-free service. E. Electronic components shall be de-rated to assure dependability and long-term stability. F. Printed circuit boards in field mounted equipment shall be suitable for the specified environmental conditions. G. Alignment and adjustments shall be non-critical, stable with temperature changes or aging and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 24-1 QUALITY ASSURANCE H. Components of specially selected values shall not be inserted into standard electronic assemblies in order to meet the performance requirements of this specification. 1.04 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT A. Optional or substituted equipment or both requiring changes in details or dimensions required to maintain structural, mechanical, electrical, control, operating, maintenance or design features incorporated in these Specifications and Drawings shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. In the event that the changes are necessary, calculations and drawings showing the proposed revisions shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall coordinate changes with other affected trades and contracts and pay additional charges incurred. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. The instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall install, maintain and guarantee the Instrumentation, Control and Information System as specified under the General Conditions and Division 01 of the Specifications. Maintenance personnel provided by the instrumentation subcontractor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation, adjustment, calibration and repair of the equipment being serviced. Preventive and corrective activities shall be documented with service reports, which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe Work performed and list materials used. A copy of service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the Work is performed. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technician(s) at least twice during the guarantee period, for the purpose of performing preventive hardware maintenance. C. Corrective hardware and software maintenance during the guarantee period shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and, in addition, shall meet the following requirements: 1. Corrective hardware maintenance shall be performed by factory-trained service technician(s) specifically trained to service the digital equipment provided. Technicians possessing suitable training and experience shall be provided to perform corrective maintenance on other equipment. The hardware service technician(s) shall be available on-site within 24 working hours after notification by the Owner. 2. Corrective software maintenance shall be performed for software provided by the instrumentation subcontractor and incorporated into the system prior to the completion of system commissioning. Software service programmer(s) shall be available for consultation within four business hours and, if required, on-site within 16 business hours after notification by the Owner. Corrective software ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 24-2 QUALITY ASSURANCE maintenance shall include the supply, installation and startup of application software upgrades released during the guarantee period. 3. Corrective hardware and software maintenance performed during the guarantee period shall be performed at no cost to the Owner. 4. As used herein, the term "working hours" shall be defined as those of the treatment facility (seven days per week, 24 hours per day). The term "business hours" shall be defined as the hours between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., local time, Monday through Friday; excluding holidays. 5. The guarantee period shall commence upon final acceptance of the completed treatment facility in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. D. The instrumentation subcontractor shall submit to the Owner a proposed maintenance agreement incorporating the following features: 1. Extension of preventive hardware maintenance services as described above for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the warranty period. 2. Provisions for corrective hardware or software maintenance Work on a will-call basis for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the warranty period. Corrective maintenance Work shall be performed by properly trained personnel as described above. E. The proposed agreement shall include provisions for payment based upon an annual fee for preventive maintenance and cost plus expenses for corrective maintenance Work. The portion dealing with corrective maintenance shall be written to include corrective maintenance caused by actions of the Owner during the warranty period and shall contain clauses for re-negotiation of contract prices based upon changes in recognized economic indicators published by the United States Department of Commerce. 1.06 SHIPPING HANDLING AND STORAGE A. In addition to shipping, handling and storage requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, air conditioning/heating shall be provided for storage of field instrumentation, panels, digital equipment and ancillary devices to maintain temperatures between 20 and 25 degrees C and relative humidity 40 to 60 percent without condensation. The air shall be filtered and free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. 1.07 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of equipment shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 24-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment to job site. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations. C. Equipment approval at the factory only allows the equipment to be shipped to the project site. The Contractor shall provide for the proper storage, installation and satisfactory start-up and operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer, the instrumentation subcontractor, and the Engineer. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Instrumentation and control system installation Work, whether new construction or modifications to existing equipment/panels/structures, shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall assign a competent representative who shall provide full time coordination and supervision of on-site instrumentation and control system construction Work from commencement of construction through completion and final acceptance. C. Labor shall be performed by qualified craftsmen in accordance with the standards of workmanship in their profession and shall have had a minimum of three years of documented experience on similar projects. D. Equipment and materials shall fit properly in their installations. Work required to correct improperly fit installations shall be performed at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Hardware and instrumentation shall be installed in accordance with requirements specified herein, in accordance with industry best practices, in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, and in a manner suitable for ease of operation, inspection, and maintenance. Wiring shall be neatly bundled, run in wireway, and terminated. Spare wiring shall be neatly coiled and clearly labeled at both ends for future use by the Owner. Work not meeting these requirements shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner. F. Sufficient common-mode and differential-mode noise rejection shall be provided to ensure proper operation of the plant process control system. General practices shall include: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 24-4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Maintaining crossings between noisy wires and signal wires at right angles. 2. Maintaining separation between noisy wires and signal wires as wide as practical. 3. Grounding all signals, shields and power supplies at the process control unit or local control panel. 4. Providing passive filters on signals with time constant compatible with scan intervals and overvoltage protection. 5. Eliminating cable splices. Splices in instrumentation and control system signal, network, and instrument manufacturer furnished cables shall be approved in advance by the Engineer. 6. Providing a floating output for transmitters that have their own power sources. G. DC and AC power grounding shall be performed in accordance with the digital hardware manufacturer's recommendations as well as all applicable code requirements. H. The case of each field instrument and control panel shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electric Code. I. Power wires shall be separated from parallel-running signal wires by the following minimum spacing: 1. 120 VAC: 12 in 2. 240 VAC: 18 in 3. 480 VAC: 18 in 4. 2000 VAC and above: 24 in J. The Contractor shall provide all required cutting, drilling, inserts, supports, bolts, and anchors, and shall securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. Embedded supports for equipment furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed as shown specified herein and shown on the Drawings. K. Following acceptance of the factory tests by the Engineer, and in accordance with the construction schedule, the Contractor shall commence installation of the digital control system hardware. Digital system equipment items shall not be installed, however, until all architectural, mechanical, HVAC and electrical Work has been completed in the equipment rooms, MCCs, control rooms and all structural and mechanical Work has been completed within 50 feet of equipment locations. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 24-5 QUALITY ASSURANCE L. Upon completion of the above construction Work, the Contractor shall request an inspection of the above-named areas. The Engineer will issue a written approval to proceed with delivery and installation only after being satisfied that all Work described above has been properly performed. Digital equipment shall remain at the factory site or storage prior to approval for delivery to the project site. Partial shipments may be required to meet construction schedule requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 24-6 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 40 61 26 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. To familiarize the Owner's personnel with the process control system and field instrumentation, training shall be provided as detailed hereunder. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. A minimum of 60 days prior to beginning training, submit a detailed training plan describing the following: 1. A listing of all courses to be conducted. 2. Course content. 3. Applicability of each course to management, operations, maintenance, laboratory, etc., personnel. 4. Course schedules. 5. Qualifications and experience of individual(s) providing training. B. A minimum of 14 days prior to beginning each training course, submit documentation for use by the Owner's personnel during training. The training documentation shall be specific to the particular course, and shall include the following: 1. A listing of all subjects to be covered. 2. Course schedule. 3. Documentation/lesson plans covering all subjects to be covered during the course instruction. Information shall be in a "how to" format, with sufficient background documentation and references to manufacturer literature to provide a thorough and clear understanding of the materials to be covered. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 26-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All costs of providing the training courses shall be borne by the Contractor. B. As used herein, the term "day" shall mean an eight-hour day, and the term "week" shall mean a five-day, 40-hour week. C. Training courses, especially those for operator training, may be required to be scheduled during non-standard business hours (i.e., not between the hours of 8:00 am and 5:00 pm) to accommodate the working schedule of the Owner's personnel. No additional compensation will be awarded to the Contractor for training at non-standard hours. D. All training courses shall complement the experience and skill levels of the Owner's personnel. E. Training courses shall be structured in order of increasing capability or security levels. The purpose of this requirement is to allow personnel with lesser training requirements or security password levels to drop out of the training at certain times while the training continues for personnel with greater requirements or higher security levels. F. All training courses shall include lecture as well as "hands on" experience for each of the attending personnel. The Contractor shall provide sufficient equipment for this to be accomplished. For example, training in which the instructor uses the computer and the Owner's personnel passively observe as the instructor demonstrates system functions shall not be acceptable. G. Unless otherwise specified, all training courses shall be conducted in the Owner's facilities. H. All training shall be completed prior to system acceptance. I. Standard manufacturer training courses are acceptable pending approval by the Engineer and Owner. 1.05 MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. One half-day course shall be conducted for at least six persons prior to the start-up of digital equipment at the Owner's plant. Instruction shall be provided in the following: 1. Operating all digital equipment, including system start-up and shutdown procedures. 2. The use of hardware diagnostic routines, test equipment and test procedures as required to enable the Owner's personnel to detect and isolate system faults to the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 26-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING circuit board or module level and to implement repairs by replacing failed circuit boards or modules. 3. Calibration and routine maintenance procedures for all analog and digital equipment. B. Step by step written procedures shall be provided for all preventive maintenance tasks and for identifying hardware faults to the circuit board or module level for all items of digital equipment. C. All digital equipment preventive and corrective maintenance training activities shall be limited to the use of commercially available off-the-shelf test equipment and to the use of diagnostic routines and hardware items which are the same as those to be provided as part of the system. 1.06 INSTRUMENT TRAINING A. One half-day course shall be provided at the Owner's facilities no more than three months prior to system start-up to instruct a minimum of five persons each in the calibration and preventive maintenance of the field instruments provided under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 26-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 90 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all hardware and software required to provide the Control and Information System as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 91 — Process Control System Instrument List B. Section 40 61 93— Process Control System Input/Output List C. Section 40 61 96— Process Control Descriptions PART 2— CONVENTIONS 2.01 PLANT NUMBERING SYSTEM A. The plant equipment numbering system is based on the following scheme: Plant#- Equip ID -Area# Sequence# [- Suffix] B. The numbering system is broken down as follows: Plant# Equip ID Area# Sequence# Suffix Plant 2-3 letters, see 2 digits, see 2 digits to Parallel identification Table 1 below for Table 3 identify sub- designation number— process below process and suffix, if — equipment and trains needed 31 for ONSWTP Table 2 for Instrumentation C. Table 1 Equipment Identification Letters ID Equipment Description ID Equipment Description A Automobiles,Trucks MJ Jets, Ejectors AC Air Conditioners MOV Motor Operated Valve ARV Air Release Valve MR Refrigeration Unit ATS Automatic Transfer Switch MS Miscellaneous Equipment ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 90-1 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL ID Equipment Description ID Equipment Description B Basin MX Mixer, Flocculator BLDG Building NAS Network Attached Storage C Compressor, Fan, Blower NSW Network Switch CPL Control Panel OE Office Equipment CT Cooling Tower P Pump CTK Compressed Air Tank PB Power Boiler D Drum PCR Power Control Room DC Dust Collector PK Packaged Units DF Dry Feeder PLC Programmable Logic Controller DP Distribution Panelboard POV Pneumatically Operated Valve DR Dryer PRN Printer DV Divert Valve PRV Pressure Relief Valve EDC Eductor PT Power Turbine EM Electric Motor QC Quench Condenser EST Elevated Storage Tank R Reactor F Filter RES Reservoir FPP Fiber Patch Panel SC Extruder Screw G Generator SCR Scrubber GT Gearbox Transmission SCU Sludge Collection Unit HE Heat Exchanger SRV Server HOV Hand Operated Valve SOV Solenoid Valve ICE Internal Combustion Engine SWG Switchgear JBE Junction Box, Electrical T Tower JBP Junction Box, Process TK Storage Tank KB Computers And Keyboard Device TR Transformer LP Lighting Panelboard V Pressure Vessel MB Bagger VFD Variable Frequency Controller MC Conveyors, Elevator WH Water Heater MCC Motor Control Center WC Water Chiller MFE Rotary Feeder WS PC Workstation MG Grinder, Pulverizer, Crusher WSO Water Softener 1. Equipment tag example: Plant water Booster Pump No.1: 31-P-2101 D. Table 2 Instrument Identification Letters ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 90-2 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL First Letter Succeeding Letters Measured or Readout or Output Letter Initiating Modifier Passive Function Modifier Variable Function A Analysis Alarm User's choice B (Not Used) User's choice User's choice C (Do Not Use) Control Density, D Specific Differential Gravity Sensor E Voltage (Primary Element F Flow Rate Ratio (Fraction) G User's choice Glass,Viewing Device H Hand High Current (Electrical) Indicate J Power Scan Time,Time Time Rate K Schedule of Change Control station L Level Light Low M (Do Not Use) Momentary Middle, Intermediate N User's choice User's choice User's choice User's choice O User's choice Orifice, Restriction P Pressure, Point(Test Vacuum Connection) Q Quantity Integrate, Integrate or Totalize totalize R Radiation Record S Speed, Safety Switch Frequency T Temperature Transmit U Multivariable Multifunction Multifunction Multifunction Vibration, Valve, V Mechanical Damper, Analysis Louver W Weight, Force Well ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 90-3 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL First Letter Succeeding Letters X Unclassified X axis Unclassified Unclassified Unclassified Event, State or Relay, Y Presence Y axis Compute, Convert Drive, Position, Actuator, Z Dimension Z axis Unclassified Final Control Element 1. Instrument tag example: Water Softeners Discharge Header Pressure Transmitter, 31-PIT-2102 E. Table 3 Functional Areas Area# Functional Area 0 Reserved 1 Plant Wide 2 Plant Power(AEP Yard and Generators) 3 Raw Water Junction 4 Pre-sedimentation 5 Receiving Unit 6 Chlorine System 7 North Chemical Storage 8 West Chemical Storage 9 Chemical Building 10 Plant 1 Rapid Mixing and Sedimentation 11 Plant 2 Rapid Mixing and Sedimentation 12 Plant 1 (North) Filtration 13 Plant 1 (South) Filtration 14 Wash Water Return Pit 15 Wash Water Supply 16 Wash Water Recycle 17 East Chemical Storage 18 Clearwell 1 & HS1 19 Clearwell 2 & HS2 20 Future Clearwell 3 and HS3 21 OSG System and Ancillaries ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 90-4 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL PART 3- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 90-5 SCHEDULES AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 91 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INSTRUMENT LIST PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all instrumentation as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 90 — Schedules and Control Descriptions, General B. Section 40 61 93— Process Control System Input/Output List C. Section 40 61 96— Process Control Descriptions PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES A. Items of equipment listed in the instrument schedule, control panels, and digital hardware items shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for maintenance and repair shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall include, as necessary, the equipment identification number, description, calibrated range, and set point(s). Abbreviations of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/1 6-inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16-inch high on a black background. Nameplates attached to instruments may be black laser etched 1/8-inch high text on stainless steel with sharp edges made smooth. Stamped text shall not be acceptable. C. Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by NEMA rated stainless steel screws and to other surfaces by an epoxy-based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drilled and N attached to the associated device by means of a braided stainless steel wire affixed with a permanent crimp. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 91 - 1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INSTRUMENT LIST D. Submit sample nameplate of each type. PART 3— INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE pH Analyzers—Section 40 75 13 Tag Number Service Description State/Span Remarks AE/AIT-1001 Flocculator 1 0— 14 pH Remote-mount transmitter pH/Temperature Analyzer 32— 122 °F AE/AIT-1002 Flocculator 2 0— 14 pH Remote-mount transmitter pH/Temperature Analyzer 32— 122 °F END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 4061 91 - 2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INSTRUMENT LIST SECTION 40 61 93 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT/ OUTPUT LIST PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all control system inputs and outputs as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 90 — Schedules and Control Descriptions, General B. Section 40 61 91 — Process Control System Instrument List C. Section 40 61 96— Process Control Descriptions PART 2— CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT/ OUTPUT SCHEDULE A. See the attachment. 1. NOTES: Input/Output types are as follows: a. DI — Discrete Input b. DO — Discrete Output C. Al —Analog Input d. AO —Analog Output PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 93-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT- OUTPUT LIST THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK J H Cl H D O H D d z 5- W H N N J 0 H z Q U as N C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R O O CD O O CD CD O CD O O CD (0 O O CD O O O O O CD CD O (0 CD d O O O O O O O O O Cl O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U d d d d d d d c- 0- 0- d d c- d c- CL c- d d a_ d a_ d O L) U U L) U L) U U U U U U U U L) U U U U U U U U U L) U L) � U N J H 0 co cy) co co co co CY) cM co co co co co m co co C'7 co co co co co C'7 co co co co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O = a O p O CD O O O O O O O CD O O O O O O O p p CD CD O O O p — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z a� — C a W ~ Q Q Q 0 Q 0 Q Q 0 0') N 0 r-1 V) CD N O J � O ~ WC Q Q Q Q Q Q Q CD m m m m m m U U U U U U U 0 0 O i ++ O O r1 r1 rI r1 rI r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 r1 V O fC O O c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I c-I r-I r-I r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I r-I ri c-I r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I Cn O C C) C) CD CD CD CD O CD O O CD CD O CD CD O O O CD CD O O O cn LV O a> Q Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D O D O L) CD 0 > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d � bA E E E _ c O Q H U U U U Q O bA O tin O co 'oA O s = c6 V = = Q = a) n O W O i i i o w 1i o a o nn o co coCN () N = L` i a) N N = L` i a) a) N = L` i a) W N = a) oc = 0 °C w = = 0 L a� a) = 0 °� a� a) = Q o O O t? 0- = O LL +� Q Q = > Z Q Q = 7 U- + Q Q = O z cn cn — cc > cn cn co — = > cn cn cn — cr O rI cI rI rI rI ri rI N N N N N N N co co M co a7 co co zT zT = U U U ia) i N U U ai) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a 'o O O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U N Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m co co m m m cp U U U U 0 0 O ri r-1 r-I ri c-I c-I r-I c-I U i U ri U ri r-I r-I U- a) O CD `� c-I `� r-I r-I ri c-I c-I c-I `� ri r-I ri c-I c-I ri c-1 Co O p `� O 0 0 p Co O O Q c I r I O `� 0 0 `� p a) c-I c-I CD � CD c-I CD r-I c-I CD O CD CD c-I c-I CD O ri ri OD OD CD r-I O Q H U J Q Q U U - J = Q = U U - J � Q = U U 1 J Q C/) } } fn } (n - >- � } (n } >- z0 J H d H D O H D D_ Z 5- W H N N J 0 H Z Q U as N C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W Q6 O O O O O CD CD O O O CD CD O O CD O O O o O O O O O O d O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O o O O O O O O U d O_ CL 0- D_ D_ 0- 0- D_ D_ d D_ d D_ D_ D_ D_ d D_ d c L) U L) L) U L) U U U U U U L) U L) U L) U U U U U U U L) U L) � U v� J H 0 co co co co C) co C') C") co M co co co m co m co C'7 co CIO C''7 co co C7 co co co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 0 0 0 O O O O O a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z C — Q N W p p p Q p p p p p Q p p p p p Q p p Clp Q p N r- 0 1 V) CD N O J � O ~ C p p p Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U U U U U p p p O 0 _ ri r-1 r-1 i i i i N N N N N i r-N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N L) � ri r-1 r-1 ri r r r r r1 r-1 r-1 ri r-1 r-1 r-1 ri ri r-1 ri ri ri ri ri r-1 ri ci 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N �/ N 0 � c-I c-I ci ri ri ri ri ci ci ri c-I c-I c-I c-I ci ci ri c-I ri c-I ri ci ci ri ;r 1 w C)V) 0000000 0000000 0000000 000 L) CD > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > a nn E E E E cc Q o 0 O UA O O s UA O s c VO_ O N J "O Q O CU J O_ O N J 'p O_ O N N O H s= o U 1i o ao o (� ci o uo �_ o �j 1i o no o °' °' 'T 0 ci � E ,c Cv Qn c cv > ca > N U 70 LL O N i N N E L.L > i N N E L.L > i C U- > i � N N p a) N 1= a p � CU CU oC = p a� oC p a� CU CC Q o LL +. Q Q = 7 U- +� D_ Q = 7 U- +J Q Q U- Z > Qn CO cn — oc > co Qn U) — > CO Qn cn — cc > Qn cn cn — ,�T IZT LO LO LO LO LO LO LO co co co CD co CD Q9 r- rl r- Q\ � Q\ � co 00 00 0 N NL L N L O O L N Xx X X X xX ca O U D_ U � U U U o � m m m m m U p ri ri � U U � U � � p p ri c I N N rrH N rNI rNI N N N rNi N cNI cNI N N CV N CV N U a0 0 O O O 0 p o p D O O Q ri ri p 0 0 ri � ri c-I ri � c-I � ri ri � r� ri ri ri ri O O" c-I ri -4 O >O cc Q cc CC U CU/) } Q L) cn cn � } Q U a in } Q U Cn z Q � } H � � � 0 E J H d H D O H D d z 5- W H N N J 0 H z Q U as cn C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R O O O O CD O O O O O CD CD CD (0O O CD O o O O CD CD O O d O O O O O O O O O O Cl O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U C L) U L) U U L) U U U U U U L) U L) U L) U U U U U U U U U L) � U v� J H 0 M M M co M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M co co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z C — n M W p p p p Q p p p p p Q p p p p p Q p —Cl p p p Q rn N 0 ri N O J � O ~ c p p p p Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U U U U U p p O i N N N N co CY) co M C`) co M CM M M M co M co M M M M M M M co co L) mri ri ri r-Iri r- r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I 1 r-1 r-I r-I 1 ri ri r-Iri r-I r-I ri ci r ri ri ri Co 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NC ri ri r 1 ri ri ri ri c I ri ri ri ci ri ri ri r I ri ri ri r 1 r I ri r I ri ri ci ri rn ;r i w O ; D000 0000000 000000 � 000C, 000 00 p 0 > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > a O ccu bA O bA O cu Q bA w + 2 + t3 2 } 6 V 0 0O N °� 0 ca U 1i o bn �_ U 1i o w �_ U 1i N O bA 7 S +J U 11 O tw 7 > +- -p 'a E c m �i c� "O "O E C `� > (� -6 -0 CN CN c i a) a) a) a) w OC p L �p a) a)CL 0- �[ c p a) a) Yjp >C � =5 cn L7 n > cn cn CO zz > c o j O O O O O O O r I r-I r-I r-1 r-I c I r-I N N + 00 00 00 00 a) m m m m m m O U a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) m a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) m a) a) a) (3) (3) a 'o X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X :3 d U � p p p p Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U U U U U p p O � N N N N M ¢ M M M �'� M M M a) ri r-I r-I M c-I c-I M M r-I M r-I r-I M M M M O O O O O ri ri 0 r I O O c I r-I O r-I O O `� ri p ri O O Q O O O O O O O cI cI O O s � ri O � O O � > O Q = cc: U J Q = U J Q = � U J Q = � U Q � } } } � } } E J H d H D O H D d Z 5- W H N N J 0 H Z Q U as cn C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N w ca O CD O O CD O O O CD O O Co CD O O O CD O O O CD O CD CD O d O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U d d d d CL a- d 0- d a- d a_ a_ a_ a_ d a_ d a_ a_ d C L) L) L) L) L) L) L) U L) L) U L) L) U L) L) L) U U U U U U U U U L) � U v� J H 0 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M co O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O = a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —CL — O a z a� W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 r-I V) M N O J � O O i M M M co M r-I r-I ri c-I r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I ri ri c-I ri c-I ri c-I c-I c-I L) ri ri rI cI rI N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Co O O O O O O 0 O 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N C c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I c-I r-I r-I r-I ri c-I r-I r-I r-I c-I r-I c-I r-I c-I r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I r-I Cn w p U) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d CL CL a O_ H H H Y H cc U U U fn bA O bA O bA O bA p 70 VyN _ O O 0 O U Nm OO t1D � LL o i o 1 o O E Li � a E u "O "p E "o -o E -0 -0N w o oC 0 o 0 CC � 0 � � a) 0 = s= 0 � Co a� nn IL �, Q Q 7 LL +. Q Q 7 IL }. Q Q LL +. Q Q o oC > co co U) aC > cn cn cn oC > cn cn cn c[ > cn co Z N N N N N co Ce) M Cl) M M M I;T NT 'IT NT LO m m 0 LO LO LO CO O + r-I ri ri ri ri ri ri r-I ri r-I ri r-I ri ri r-I ri r-I ri ri r-I ri ri ri ri ri ri r-I O U i i) i a>i — 0 o m a> m a> a o a) m a) o 0 0 0 0 0 o m o a) o a) m a> m o � o' X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U � 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U U O M M ri +� (V N N `� C9 ri O ri O O N N O N O Cl N N N O N O O N N C�1 p N O O N c-I c-I r-I O r-I r-I ri O 0 c-I r-I O c-I r-I >cc cc cc Cc Cl cn > > Q U cn } Q �) cn Q L) U cn J = Q = U U >- } H >- >- ZO E J H d H D O H D d z 5- LU H N N J 0 H z Q U as cn C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W ca O O CD O O CDO O O CD O CD O O O O O CD 0 O O O O O CD d O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O U d d d a- d d CL 0- a- a- a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ a_ d a_ a_ d C L) U L) U L) U U U U U U L) U U L) U L) U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O a o 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 o CD o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cl 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z a� — CL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ LO a ' W Q p p p p p Q p p p p p Q p p p p p Q p p p p rn N 0 ri N O J O ~ c p p p p p p Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U U U U U O V _ ri r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N () 0 m N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Co O O O O O O 0 O 0 O O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O N C w p V) p p M p in p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p U LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL O > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d a Q n a cc U U U U fn C c 7E5 aA O c bA O m bA 70 i O N -0 0 N N -0 c N N _0 Q N N -0 0- c6 rl V LL O W O _ N a O O O O N O y O U LL O llA 7 > +-� U L L O UA 7 >_ +, U Li O UA O > +-0 N N "a Li "O li > "O "6 U- > N 'a "O E Li > 70 N 0 N N i N N 0 O +-- N N O O i N N N E i cv a> p[ DC p a) OC tz p � ca a) a> p[ c p nn Q LL Q Q LL +. Q Q = LL } Q Q LL +� Q O cn oC > <n cn 0 oC > cn cn cn - cc > cn cn cn oC > cn p z CO C4 Cfl Cfl (fl (fl r- r- r- r- r- r*l r� W o0 W co W co 00 6) m 0') 0') a) 0) O + r-I r-I ri r-I ri ri ri r-I ri ri ri r-I r-I O U i i - N N N N O N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N U N U cu '0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U � p p p p p p Q Q Q Q Q Q Q �p m m m m m m U U U U U U U o � ' N N N N N N N ' N ' N N ' N ' N N L.L O N N NO N CD O O NO N O p O O N N O N O O N N N N N N N O O O O 0 c-I c-I ci O r-I ri ri ri ci O 0 c-I O-1 ri ri O-' O Or r-I O� c-I ci >O 1 J Q = Cc: U J Q = ccU J ccQ = cr U J Q = CcQ } } } N E J H CL H D O H D CL Z 5- W H N N J 0 H Z Q U a) cn C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R Co O O O O CD O O CD CD Co O O O O O O O O CD CD O O O d O O O O O O O O O O O O O Co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U CL CL CL CL CL CL a_ CL d CL CL CL CL CL CL C- CL CL CL CL CL CL C U U L) L) C.) L) L) L) L) L) L) L) U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H 0 M co co co M M M M co M M co co co co M M M co co co M M M M M M M O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O a O o 0 0 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O o 0 0 0 0 C) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z a� a W Q p p p p < Q Cl p p p Q p p p p p Q 1-0 —0p p 0 rn N 0 (D N O J O ~ c p p p p p p p Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U U U U U O i N N N N N N N M co M co co CY) M M M M co co M M M M M M M M M () O N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N Cn w p U) MOMMOOM p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d CL O_ a a U U U U pp O � bA O CIO bA O � bA O � bA 70 CL + -a 2 +� -p 2 + 70 2 + -a 2 i O O a) Q O a) O Q O O a) J Q O O a) ca -0 Q C� O s O O O N O U ii o uo U �i o wo U ii o no +� U ii o �o a) N a a E .� � 0 E •� m � w O O E c i" > 0 O 6 E co cn -0 CN CN a) CC p a) CC pco w a) CC � p ,� a) 00- CL c p nn cn cn OC > cn 0 CC > cn cn 0 c oC > cn N cn � OC > z cn Z O O O O O O O r-I ri r I r-1 r I ri N N N N N N N M M M M CM CO M O + N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 0U i i i i a) a) a) a) a) N N a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) a) () a) a) a) a) a) a) a) N a) a) a) a) cu 'O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 2: 2: Z CL U � p in p p p p p Q Q Q Q m m m m m U U U U U O � co M M U U M M M li a) U' N N o N p 0 N N N O N O O N N m o N o N0 CO N N � N N N N a O O O O c I ci O O O Cl c I ri O O O O r I ri 0 0 0 0 C) 0 > 0 a) � ci c-I ci O CC cn M Q U u) Q U M N } } Q U U J Q = CC H H H } >- H >- 0 J H d H D O H D d Z 5- W H N N J 0 H Z Q U as cn C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R CD O CD O O CD O O CD Co CD O O O O O O O CD O O O d O O O O O O O O O O O Co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U C U L) U L) U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U L) U L) � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z C a ' W 0 0 0 0 O O p Q Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 Q 0 N 0 r-I V) C4 N O J � O ~ C 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U i i i i i i i O i M M M M co M co N N r� ri-I rii ri r� ri r� ri r� r I r I r I r I L) N N N N N N N 00 00 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M CO M O CD CD CD CD O CDO O CD O O CD CD CD O O O CD O CD CD CD N c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I ri c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I ri c-I c-I c-I ri r-I c-I c-I W O v) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L) > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > M N a� 0- o cc o � � m o nn o o v_o o n o o cc70 a) CL C) U Ii o w 7 7 F U Ii o t7A 7 �_ —0O U Ii o bA O O a) o N rn m ca U o m as 7o E ii m m -0 -a E Ii U) -a -a E I u U) 7o 7o E 7 N 0 a) a) a) .� a) a) a) '� +� a) a) a) .� a) a) a) N a) o 0 N N a) o oC 0 o a) OC 0 () a) nn I? Q U- �. i a- CL U- +J 0- Q O U- +. Q Q Q O fn M OC > N .O ,O Cn M OC > fn fn U CC > N C7 Cn 0 Z N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 0U i U U i i a) 0 0 o a) o a) o o 0 a) m o 0 0 0 o a) o a) m o 0 0 o a 'o X X X X X X X O O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U � 0 0 0 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m m U U U O o ' ' ' M ' M M N N ' ' ' r-I ' .� r-I ' ' c-I ' c-I c-I ' i LL 41 cI U' N N N Np N 0 0 O O M M co co co co co M CO M CO CO co M M co m � a O O O ri 0 cI ri cI rI O O O cI 0 cI cI O O O O Cl O O MO p > r-I c-I -1 � r-ICC c-I c-I c-I ri c-I c-I r-I O U J Q = Q H U J Q = U J Q = U J M Q J H d H D O H D d Z 5- LU H N N J 0 H Z Q U a) cn C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R CD CD CD O O O O O O CD CD Co O CD O O O O O O O CD CD O O d O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U c U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z a� W— CL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 Cl 0 0 0 OQ Q rn N 0 (D N O J � O ~ C U U U U 0 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 00 00 CD CD CD m CD U U O V _ a1 r I ri r I r I ri r I ri r-I ri -q N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N () M M M M co co co co M co M co M co M co M co M co M co co co co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N C ri r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I r-I c-I c-I c-I ri c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I ri c-I c-I r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I w p � 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d F U U � U U pp O � �_ O � � O O m � Q 2 + 2 + a 2 + 2 + 6 N c6 v p OO p O p Op a y _ U Ll O w U <L O U <L O U L_ N U) S S i "O E (n "O "6 - Li Li- i N O c N 0 N N 2 (v O N = C 0 O 0) 0C 0 N N 0[ C O N W U- Q Q M U- �, Q Q U- +J Q Q U- +.. Q 0- 0- 0 OC > Cn w w � = > fn cn cn oC > cn cn w r- 0C > 0 cn cn 0 Z I- r- r- r- 00 00 00 00 00 w 00 m m m m m m m 0 0 0 0 O O O r I ri + N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M M M M M M M co M 0U i i i i N N O N ("DN N N N N 0) O O 0) N N N N N N N N N N N N N N ca 'O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U N U U U U 0 0 0 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m CD U U O ri c-I c-I i ri c-I i - & I N N � � � O N N N co co co CO .� M co co co co m CD coM CO N N CON N M co N N � a Co p O O O CD MO p COO 0 0 O CO 0 0 0 0 0 O MO � p CO Co O MO MO � j cc: CC Cc Q U co M Q U L) M Q U in fn Q U U M Z � � >- O E J H d H D O H D d Z 5- W H N N J 0 H z Q U as N C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N U) ca O O O O O O O O O O O O Co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O LU d O O O O O O O O O O Cl O Co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U C U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O 0 0 0 O O O O O a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O o 0 0 0 0 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z C — n rn W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q D D D O p N 0 r-I V) N O J O O i N N N N N N N N N N N N M M M co M M co M M M M M M M M () M M M M M M co M M M M M M M M M M M M M co M M M M M co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N 0 c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I r-I r-I r-I c-I c-I r-I ri ri c-I r-I c-I c-I c-I r-I r-I r-I ri r-I c-I r-I c-I r-I Cn w C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 0 UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d CL O_ n 0_ H H H Y F— cc U U U fn bA o 7E5 bA O m b0 p 2 a -0 2 + -0 2 + -0 2 + s= 0- 0 _0 CL w V O -ao � �_ U LL O UA 5 O O s O + N a _ a) , _ a) , _ N O H U o bo > U IL o �o U m a) E Li � "O E Li > m "O "O E li > � -o -o E li -0 -0 N 0 s= 0 w 0 CC 0 a) a) CC I_- 0 a) W LL �, 0- CL 7 U- }. C2 CL U- +. 0- CL U- +. iZ 0- o OC > cn M w DC > Cn Cn M = oC > cn cn cn CC > CO Cn 0 z r-I c-I r-I r-I " N N N N N N N M M M co M M M NT NT Iq zT Iq zT Iq LO O +-- M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M co M M M M M M M M M U L L L L O N a) a) a) N a) a) a) N a) a) N N a) a) a) a) N a) a) a) a) a) N a) a) a) ca O x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Z Zd U � Q Q Q CD V U V U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q Q Q Q m m m m U o s ' N ' N N ' ' N ' N N ' ' M ' co co ' ' M ' co M U' M M M co co M N N CvJ N M M M M co co co co co CO M M CO M M co co Q O Cl O O O CO MO O p 0 0 O D O 0 0 0 0 O OM p p CO 0 0 � j J Q = cc cc U J Q = U J Q = U J Q = U U) Q � J � Q U [n M } J � Q U � Cn } J } Q U M cn � J � Q U M Z J H M H D H d Z 5- W H N N J 0 H Z Q U as � C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R O O CD O O O O O O O CD O O O O CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD O O d O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U C U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O a O O O O CD O O O O O O O CD O CD O O O O O O O CD O CD O CD— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z n O O V) r-I >- W N O J NT O O i M M M co M co co M M co co co M () M M M M M M M M M M M M M � � T Co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Cl O O O O N C c-I r-I c-I r-I c-I c-I r-I r-I r-I ri r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I c-I w p � 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 0 UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d a a a a ca U U U U fn C M 7E5 bA O bA O M bA 70 Q a 2 + 2 + p 2 + 2 V Li O txA O _ N a O OCL C O N O y O U IL O llA > +� U Li O UA 7 > +J U Li O w 7 +� N N "a E Li "a E Li > "O "6 E l" > 'a "O E LL (n 7 N 0 N N i N N N i N N U O +--� N w O i N (v pc 0 O N p[ s= 0 U N cC 0 N w cc 0 Yjp Q 11 a a U- a a U- .� a Q U- +- Q O cn cc > cn <n w oC > cn cn cn cc > cn cn cn r oC > cn 0 Z LO M LO LO M LO W W W 0 W W W r- r- r- r- r- r- r- W W W W CO 00 00 O + M M M M M M co M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M 0 U i i i i N N N N O N N N N N w O N O O N N N N N N N N N N N N N O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U � U V U V U U 0 0 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m 00 m m m m O i i i i i i i U M M M M M M C'J ' M M M M co NT t r-I ri `� `� -q � M M O co O co CY) MCO a O O ri CD cI cI O O O p� CD 0 0 0 CO C) Or-I 0 0r-j O0 p cl O CD O O > r-I c-I r-1 i i rq -, r-I r-I i r-I c-I c-I I 1 c-I r-1 -q -1 i i O J Q = U J Q = U J Q = U J Q = Cc Q cn J Q U L7 W J Q U M M J Q U N W J Q U Z J H M H D H d z 5- W H N N J 0 H z Q U as � C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W ca Co O O O O CD O O CD O O CD O O O CD O O O O O O O CD d O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U r_ U c U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O 0 O 0 O O O O O O a o 0 0 0 0 0 o O O O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD O CD o O O — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O a z CL LU Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q I— O V) r-I N O J NT O ~ C U U U U U U U Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q CD CD m m m m m r-1 r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I ri ci ri ri ri N N N N N N N N N N N N N N V � NT 11 � NT Iq Iq NT � NT � � � Iq qq ql qq qq � NT � 'T � O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O N 0 r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I r-I r-I c-I c-I c-I r-I ri c-I c-I r-I c-I c-I r-I r-I r-I r-I ri r-I c-I r-I c-I w O � Q Q Q Q in Q in Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d CL 0_ n a H Y H H F- CC U U U - U fn O bA O bA O bA O M 70 CL + -0 2 +� -0 2 + -0 2 + 70 2 i O O a) -0 Q O O a) -0 Q O O a) J -0 Q O a) O . 70 Q C� 0 O O c O N 0 U Ii o UA 0 U Ii o UA U 1i O n0 0 .. U 1i o UA O a) N 0 0 E LcT 0 E .� Li � � -0 a E •� i� � w 70 -0 E s= cv � CO CN p av 0 � s= w 0 0 0 � w 0 w � 4 0 0 a> � U- � � N (> 0 Q a) 0 s= Q w 0 CC � Q � � 0 0) CC Q Q U- Q O_ U- } Q Q cn cn oC > cn Cl) cn cc > cn cn co oc > cn cn cn — oC > cn z m m m m m m m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ri r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I r-I N N N N N N N 0 + i i i i .— !) a) a) m a> m a) W c m m a> m w (> a) W m W a) W m w w o w m a) a 'o X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U � U U U U U U U Q inQ Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q CO m m m m m m O o c-I c-I r-I c-I c-I r-I i N N N 41 C7 .� It � N N NT N N N N N O O O , O O CD 'I O O O O O a) Q O O O r-1 CDri rI O O O 0 r, c rI O CD CDcI 0 r-I r-IO O O O cI rI > i ri r ri 1 i ri -, r-I ri I i V ri � r-I ± i ri ri ri � ri i i O U J Q = U J Q = CC U J Q = U J Q = CC Q cn J Q U cn J Q U cn } Q U Q U z J H M H D H d z 5- LU H N N J 0 H z Q U a) � C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R CD O CD O O CD O O O CD CD O O O CD O O CD O O O O CD d O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U C U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U � U v� J H O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O a p p p p p p p o p p p CD p CDp p p p p p o CD CD CD p p CD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O a Z Q N W 0 Q in 0 0 p 0 0 0 0 O O p Q O O O O p 0 0 0 0 0 rn H O V) r-I >- C4 N p J NT O z C U U U U U U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m CD m m m O i N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M co Cl) co M M M M M M M M M V M � I�T NT NT IqNT It I;t NTI;t NTI�t NT Iq qq qq NT Iq Iq IqI;t NT Iq qq 11 O O O O O O O O O O O O Co O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N c-I c-I r-I c-I r-I c-I r-I r-I c-I r-I ri r-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I ri c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I r-I c-I cn W O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UO > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > d a a n M- E E E U U U U fn O m O 7E5 bA Q + a 2 + a 2 + p 2 + 2 i O (V 9- O a) O Q p a) Q p a) N u U Ii o un �_ U Ii o bo �_ U Ii o nn •�_ U Ii o tin ,c m o N LM � E .� Li � E •� ,m U) a a E •� ,m -0 N 0 N N N i N N N i N N U M (y O N = 4J N C U N OC N d OC " Q Q Ll �. Q Q U- �, Q Q L.L }' Q a- Ll Q O fn w OC > N 0 m � OC > C7 N w > fn M N OC > z co M M M M M M l;T l;T I;T q�T ZT Ln M Ln U') LSD L O M CO Cfl C4 Cfl C4 CO + i N N N N N N N N N N N N O N O U N o N o N N o N o N o N 'O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X U � U U U U U U U 0 Q 0 0 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q m m m m m m O ' ' N ' N N ' ' N ' N N ' ' M ' co M ' A ' M ' M Li N N N N -q � N N N N M M M M � M M M M U' 14 O qq O O p O O O O O O O U a O O C) r I p c I ri O O p C- p ri c I O O p c I O r I c I O 0 0 ri p c I > c-I c-I � ri -1 � V ri ri r-I r- r� � r-I i O U J Q = U U Cn J Q = U U J Q ¢ U U J � Q = M Q J H M H D H d z 5- W H N N J 0 H z 0 U as � C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W R O O O O O O O CD O O CD Co CD O O O O O O CD O d O O O O O O O O O O O O Co O O O O O O O O O O U C L) L) U U U U U U U U U U U U U L) U U U U U U U � U v� J O co co M co co O d O O O O O O 0 O 0 O O O O O O O rl r- r M M r� a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 w (D CD (D w CD — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — o 0 0 0 0 0 0 a Z Q co W Q 0 Q 0 Q I— O V) rI >- M N O J � O � � N Z~ C m U U U U U U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 > � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � N N N N N CDL O V M M M M C6 M M M M M M M M M M O O O O O 0- O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O CD r I r-I -4 -q �l V) C ri _N M_ w O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N a a o_ CU �5 p > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0- a d (1 M- N U ai .� N cc U L U L (6 C2 Q C p c6 bA C6 _ Q } a 2 + 2 C1 Ocz m } Q sz z= � a� N (n cn � � 2 cv CN N a> 0 a> s= 0 = a a a- O O + tz C L U- Q Q 2 0 0 0 0- a Q o Cn co M I OC > Cn Cn Cn = > Cn N N N N N N N z C.0 r- r- r� r- r- r- r- CC) CC) M co co M CC N O O O O 0 O O U �i i i N r-I -i " -i l N CU N N x N X N CU x x x N U J J J J J J J ca O X X X X X X X X X X X O Cl OL a_ D_ In_ d Cl U U U U U U U U � m U } U () U U U U U p 0 0 N N Q CD N O s M M ' M ' M M ' ' M ' M M r-I O Np O N N N 0 � M M qq M � CO cM M M rI O 0 0 0 0 aO C) o C O C) O O p o p 0 0 0 O " r- 00 0r—I 0 j i r-I ci i >- >- O E THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all equipment as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING COMPLETE FUNCTIONING SYSTEMS AS DESCRIBED HEREIN. The PLC and HMI software programming services shall be Provided by the Owner. B. Together with the control system input/output schedule, the equipment specifications (including functional descriptions for local equipment control panels), and the Drawings, the functional control descriptions describe the required operation, monitoring, and control of the facilities included in this Contract. C. THE FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS CONTAIN REQUIREMENTS FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING LABOR AND MATERIALS THAT MAY NOT APPEAR ELSEWHERE IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. D. All equipment and services required in equipment local control panels provided to implement the monitoring and control functions described herein or in the process input/output schedules shall be provided by the Contractor through individual equipment suppliers. E. Unless specifically stated otherwise, all interconnected wiring between all instruments, panels, controls, and other devices listed in the functional descriptions as required to provide all functions specified herein shall be furnished by the electrical subcontractor under Division 26. The electrical subcontractor shall provide all cable and conduit required to carry all signals listed in the process input/output schedules. Special cables that are required for interconnection between sensors or probes and transmitters or signal conditioners shall be furnished with the instrumentation devices by the equipment supplier. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 14 00 — Coordination with Owner's Operations B. Section 40 61 90 — Schedules and Control Descriptions, General C. Section 40 61 91 — Process Control System Instrument List D. Section 40 61 93— Process Control System Input-Output List ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-1 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 2— FUNCTIONAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, GENERAL 2.01 DEFINITIONS A. RUNNING status signals shall be from auxiliary contacts provided with the motor control equipment (i.e., starter, VFD, etc.). B. AUTO status signals shall be defined as process control system in Auto (versus Manual). C. FAULT status signals shall be defined as motor overload and/or any other shut down mode such as overtorque, overtemperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc. D. READY status signal shall be defined as all conditions, including equipment control power, satisfied to permit Remote control of the equipment. 2.02 CONVENTIONS A. Operator workstation graphic display symbols and indicator lights on all MCC's, control panels, starter enclosures, etc. shall conform to the following color convention: 1. Running/On/Open: Green 2. Auto/Ready: White 3. Stopped/Off/Closed: Red 4. Fault/Alarm: Amber 5. Generic Status: Blue or White 2.03 PROCESS CONTROL A. Where setpoints, operating limits, and other control settings are provided by the functional descriptions, these settings shall be initial settings only and shall be used for assistance in the initial startup of the plant. All such settings shall be fully adjustable and, based on actual operating conditions, the instrumentation subcontractor shall make all necessary adjustments to provide smooth, stable operation at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provision shall be made in PLC logic to suppress nuisance alarms and control actions by the following means: 1. For alarms and control actions derived from analog input signals, use adjustable time delays and deadbands. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-2 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS 2. For alarms and control actions derived from discrete input signals, use adjustable time delays. 3. Initial settings for time delays shall be 10 seconds (range 0-120 seconds). Initial settings for deadbands shall be 5% of span (range 0-100%). 4. Equipment that is started or stopped manually by the operator shall start or stop immediately, with no time delay. C. All setpoint control shall be by PID control algorithms. Where only proportional control is specified, tuning constants shall be used to reduce the Integral and Derivative functions to zero. All setpoints, sequence times, sequence orders, dead bands, PID tuning parameters, PLC delay timers, variable speed operating range limits, and similar control constants shall be accessible and alterable from the operator workstations. D. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall automatically restart after a power failure utilizing adjustable start delay timers in PLC control logic. Unless otherwise specified, all PLC control strategies shall be based upon automatic restart after a power failure and shall return to a normal control mode upon restoration of power. E. The PLC shall be capable of receiving initial run-time values for existing and proposed equipment. Initial run-time shall not automatically be assumed to be zero. F. A control discrepancy alarm shall be generated through the PLC for any drive, motor, etc. for which a command has been issued, but for which the PLC is not receiving a confirming status signal (e.g., start command with no run feedback). The failure shall be logged. G. An instrument failure alarm shall be generated for any instrument which is generating a signal that is less than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA. H. Unless otherwise specified in an individual control description, an instrument failure or control discrepancy alarm shall cause the control strategy to maintain last values and to generate an alarm. Manual initiation of the automatic control strategy shall be required. I. A control program that controls multiple pieces of equipment shall not be prevented from running because not all of the equipment is in Auto. If equipment within an equipment chain is required to be running for program operation and it is running in Hand or Manual, then the program shall run and control the other equipment that is in Auto. J. All PLC wait states (internal time delays, etc.) after an operator action shall be displayed on the operator workstation. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-3 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 3— FUNCTIONAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS 3.01 FLOCCULATION A. General 1. Reference P&ID: 1003 AND 1004 2. Controlling PLC: PLC-1002 B. Process Overview 1. Flow is introduced to the flocculation basins 1 and 2 via an open channel that flows into each basin's central "dry well" structure. In the dry well, flow in each basin is split and enters two flocculation trains. Flow travels in each train in a serpentine path across the four Stage 1 mixers, then the four Stage 2 mixers, and finally the four Stage 3 mixers. 2. After the third stage, flow is directed to an elevated distribution channel with perforated baffle wall facing the primary sedimentation basin. The distribution channels at the effluent of each flocculation train will be connected to run continuously across the full width of the basin. 3. All mixers are driven by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). The mixer speed is operator adjusted to provide the desired mixing energy to flocculate the water. The mixers will run continuously at the setpoint speed when the associated basin is in operation. C. Control Operations 1. Local Control a. Each mixer is equipped with a Local Control Station (LCS)with Local-Off- Remote (LOR) and Start-Stop (SS) selector switches. b. Selecting LOCAL shall enable the operation at the LCS. Selecting REMOTE shall enable the Remote start/stop by the PLC. Selecting OFF shall prevent the mixer from starting in any mode. C. When the LOR switch is placed in LOCAL position the operator can start a mixer by placing the SS switch in the START position; conversely, the operator can stop a mixer by placing the SS switch in the STOP position. d. Running, VFD Fault, and High Temp lights are provided on the VFD in electrical building. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-4 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS e. The operator shall be able to manually adjust the speed of the mixers using the keypad on the VFD. 2. Remote Manual Control a. When the LOR is placed in Remote and Manual mode is selected at the HMI screen, the mixer shall be controlled from the HMI. b. The mixer shall be started and stopped using the Start/Stop pushbuttons on the HMI. C. The mixer speed is manually adjusted by entering a manual speed setpoint on the HMI. d. The PLC calculates the mixing energy, G (s-') for each mixer, using the polynomial equation provided below as a function of process water temperature (TI-1001 or TI-1002) and mixer speed, and displays the value on the SCADA screen. The operator shall manually adjust the speed setpoint to achieve the target G values at stages 1, 2, and 3 (80, 40, and 10- 20 respectively). 3. Remote Auto Control a. Each Basin can be placed in Online or Offline mode; the operator assigns Online or Offline mode from the SCADA HMI. b. Automatic control of the flocculator shall be initiated when the associated Basin is in Online mode. C. The flocculator manufacturer shall provide a polynomial equation that calculates the mixing energy, G(s-'), as a function of process water temperature and flocculator speed. d. The operator enters a mixing speed (Hz) setpoint for each flocculation mixing stage in the respective Basin. The PLC adjusts the flocculator speed to match the mixing speed setpoint. 4. Software Interlocks a. A VFD Fault or Motor Winding High Temperature alarm shall remove the start command of the associated mixer. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-5 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS D. G-Value Calculation G = FLOWER G = G-Value POWER (lb ft/s) = Impeller Power Number* Shaft Speed' * Impeller Diameters * Water Density µ (Ibs x s/ft') = (4 x 10-')(Temperature °F)'—(8 x 10-')(Temperature °F) +(6 x 10-s) V (ft3) =3,921 for Stage 1 Mixers V (ft3) =4,108 for Stage 2 Mixers V (ft') =4,295 for Stage 3 Mixers Impeller Power Number(Dimensionless) => Provided by Manufacturer Shaft Speed (Revolutions/Second) =Speed (%) * Shaft Speed at Full Motor Speed (RPMs)_60 Seconds/Minute Shaft Speed at Full Motor Speed (Revolutions/Minute) => Provided by Manufacturer Impeller Diameter(ft) => Provided by Manufacturer Water Density(slugs/ft3) = (-3 x 10-')(Temperature °F)'+0.0002(Temperature °F)+ 1.9361 E. SCADA Monitoring and Graphic Displays 1. The following features will be incorporated in the HMI screens: a. Overall Layout of Basin 1 and 2 with new flocculator mixers in train 1/2 and stage 1/2/3 b. Popup control station for each mixer C. G value (s-') will be shown on the popup control station d. Mixer In Remote, Running, VFD Fault, and High Motor Temperature e. pH and Temperature indication for each basin. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-6 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 61 96-7 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 62 63 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS (OIT) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all operator interface terminals, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 63 43— Programmable Logic Controllers PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINAL— LARGE A. An Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) shall be provided to view and change PLC monitoring and control parameters and to display alarm messages using a graphical user interface. The OIT shall provide the following features as a minimum: 1. Minimum of 10.4 inch diagonal display 2. 18-bit color TFT LCD 800 x 600 SVGA display 3. Backlit analog resistive touch screen interface w/ 1 million press actuation rating 4. Backlight w/ min. 50,000 hour life to half brightness 5. Minimum of 512 MB internal storage 6. Minimum of 512 MB RAM application memory 7. Minimum of 80 MB nonvolatile user memory 8. Windows CE Operating System 9. Battery-backed real-time clock N 10. Secure Digital (SD) card slot w/ min. 2 GB card ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 62 63-1 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS 11. One USB 2.0 high-speed Type A host port; one USB 1.0 high-speed Type B device port 12. One 10/100Base-T Auto MDI/MDI-X Ethernet port 13. Windows-based configuration software complete with download cable 14. Operating Voltage: 120 VAC or 24 VDC (internal or via independent power supply) 15. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 12/4X to match the associated PLC cabinet rating 16. Environment: 0-55°C, 5-95% relative humidity, non-condensing B. The operator interface terminal shall be Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Standard 1000, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The OIT shall be configured to display all PLC 1/0, setpoints, and parameters. All equipment failures shall be alarmed. PLC 1/0 values and operator-entered setpoints shall be displayed with associated engineering units and service descriptions. Menus shall be provided to navigate between screens of different equipment items. Displays shall be arranged in a hierarchical structure with displays for specific equipment items grouped together. Additional functionality shall be as specified elsewhere in this Division. B. All necessary configuration and programming software shall be provided on optical media and turned over to the Owner. C. Unless otherwise indicated, each OIT shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. D. Refer to Section 40 61 13 — Process Control System General Provisions, for additional requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 62 63-2 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS SECTION 40 63 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all programmable logic controllers (PLC), with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 23— Signal Coordination Requirements C. Section 40 66 00 — Network and Communication Equipment D. Section 40 67 63— Uninterruptible Power Systems E. Section 40 67 00 — Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.03 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 40 61 22 — Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts. In addition, the following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. One of each type and size of module for PLC equipment furnished under this Contract. 2. One of each type and size of PLC and equipment power supply furnished under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS - GENERAL A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall furnish programmable controllers (PI-Cs) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. PI-Cs shall be provided complete with backplane, power supply, 1/0 cards, special function cards, instructions, memory, ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 63 43-1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS input/output capacity, and appurtenances to provide all features and functions as described herein. No substitutions will be permitted. B. All components of the PLC system shall be of the same manufacturer; who shall have fully tested units similar to those being furnished in an industrial environment with associated electrical noise. The PLC system shall have been tested to meet the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2-230 (Arc Test) and IEEE C37.90.1 (SWC). The processing unit shall perform the operations functionally described herein based on the program stored in memory and the status of the inputs and outputs. C. Programmable controllers shall be designed to operate in an industrial environment. The PLC shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0-60 C and a relative humidity of 5-95 percent, non-condensing. The PLC shall operate on supply voltages of 90-132 VAC at 47-63 Hz or 24 VDC if provided with a battery backup system. An integral fuse shall be provided on the power supply for short circuit protection and shall be front panel accessible. Integral overcurrent and undervoltage protection shall be provided on the power supply. D. Where applicable, the minimum PLC backplane size shall be 7 slots, not including power supply slots. E. System configuration shall be as shown on the Control System Architecture Drawing. PLC types shall be designated on the Control System Architecture Drawing and correspond to the specifications herein. Only a single type of processor shall be supplied for all PLCs of a designated type. Memory and processor shall be adequate for all control functions specified. PLCs shall be as manufactured or equal to the following: 1. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix with 5580 (1756-L83E) processor 2.02 PROCESSORS A. The processor and its associated memory shall be enclosed in a modular enclosure. A multiple-position selector switch or equivalent shall be used to select processor operating mode. LED-type indicating lights shall be provided to indicate processor, memory, and battery status. Errors in memory shall be recognized and shall activate the memory error indicating lights. The PLC processor shall monitor the internal operation of the PLC for failure and provide an alarm output. Nonvolatile memory in the form of a manufacturer supplied industrial CompactFlash card or equivalent technology shall be required to maintain the entire current program and firmware of the controller in the event of power loss. The program shall be updated onto the flash memory each time a program change such as an online edit or tag value is changed. When nonvolatile memory (flash memory) is not available for certain controller models as offered by the PLC manufacturer, lithium batteries shall be used to maintain process RAM memory for at least one year in the event of power loss. The lithium battery unit shall be an ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 63 43-2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS externally mounted battery assembly with the highest available capacity. The PLC shall send an alarm to the plant control system if battery level is low. B. The instruction set for the PLC shall conform to the requirements of IEC 61131-3. Each PLC shall have the capability to run all five of the standard IEC 61131-3 languages simultaneously. These five languages shall be: 1. Ladder Diagram 2. Structured Text 3. Instruction List 4. Function Block Diagram 5. Sequential Function Chart C. Additional co-processors or modules may be necessary and shall be furnished as required to meet the functions specified herein and in Section 40 61 96— Process Control Descriptions. D. PLC processors shall be provided with substantial user program, data and logic memory to allow for future expansion of the overall system. The total memory used on each processor shall be less than 60% of available memory at project completion. 2.03 COMMUNICATIONS A. PLC communications shall be provided as specified in Section 40 66 00— Network and Communication Equipment and as shown on the Control System Architecture Drawing. B. In addition to a communications port for the control system network, communication ports shall be provided for any other devices required (i.e., operator interface unit) plus an additional communication port for connection to a notebook computer. C. The PLC shall be able to support various types of fieldbus communication systems for data links to field instruments (where specified) in addition to connected equipment such as power monitors, VFDs, motor protection monitors, etc. As a minimum, Profibus DP, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus RTU Master and Slave, TCP/IP Ethernet shall be supported. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of the necessary parties (instrumentation subcontractor and equipment suppliers) to accomplish the required device and data table addressing between each PLC and the associated connected equipment. D. Additional communication modules or protocol gateways may be required to support specific communication protocols required under this Contract and shall be supplied at ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 63 43-3 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS no extra cost to the Owner. Redlion DSP shall be used if a Modbus data gateway is required. 2.04 INPUT/OUTPUT SUBSYSTEMS A. Input/output hardware shall be plug-in modules in associated 1/0 backplane/chassis or DIN-rail mounting assemblies. Each unit shall handle the required number of process inputs and outputs plus a minimum of 10 percent active pre-wired spares for each 1/0 type furnished, plus a minimum of 20 percent spare 1/0 module space for the addition of future circuit cards or modules. B. Discrete inputs shall be 24 VDC signals (integral to the PLC) from dry field contacts. Discrete outputs shall be dry relay contacts (2A minimum) as required. Refer to Section 40 61 23— Signal Coordination Requirements for further details of discrete signal type and voltage requirements. The PLC shall provide momentary and latched outputs as required to interface with motor controls and external devices. Interposing relays shall be provided where required to interface with field equipment. Interposing relays shall be as specified in Section 40 78 00— Panel Mounted Instruments. Electrical isolation shall be provided where required. Maximum density for discrete 1/0 modules shall be 16 per input module and 16 per output module. C. Analog input circuits shall be isolated, minimum 16-bit resolution type. Analog input hardware shall be provided as required for all types of analog inputs being transmitted to the PLC. In general, analog input modules shall be capable of receiving 4-20 mA signals. Where required, RTD input modules shall have a minimum resolution of 0.15°C and be capable of accepting signals from 100-ohm Platinum RTDs. Analog outputs shall be coordinated with the receivers but shall generally be isolated 24 VDC 4-20 mA outputs powered from the PLC. Each input/output circuit shall have optical isolation to protect the equipment against high voltage transients. Optical isolation shall be rated at not less than 1500 V RMS. Lightning/surge protection shall be provided as specified in Section 40 78 56— Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors. Maximum density for analog 1/0 modules shall be 8 per module. D. Input/output modules shall be configured for ease of wiring and maintenance. The modules shall be connected to wiring arms that can be disconnected to permit removal of a module without disturbing field wiring. Covers shall be provided to prevent operator personnel from inadvertently touching the terminals. The process interface modules shall be provided with screw-type terminal blocks with barriers between adjacent terminals for connection of field inputs. Terminals shall be suitable for accepting up to and including No. 14 AWG wire. All DC output circuits to the field shall include fuses, either integral or at the terminal strip. Output failure mode shall be selectable so that upon station or communication system failure all outputs shall be placed either in the non-conducting mode or remain as were prior to failure. Light-emitting diodes shall be provided for status indication for each input and output point. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 63 43-4 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS E. External power supplies shall be provided with the PLC as required to meet specified installed 1/0 power requirements plus spares. Power supplies shall be modular units, shall be fully redundant and shall alarm the PLC upon failure. Power supplies shall have a line regulation of 0.05% and meet the environmental and power requirements specified herein for the PLC. 2.05 REMOTE 1/0 SUBSYSTEMS A. Remote 1/0 shall be provided as designated on the Control System Architecture Drawing. Remote 1/0 shall be either PLC backplane type 1/0 or field modules as manufactured by the PLC manufacturer. Field modules shall meet the requirements of Subsection 2.04, Input/Output Subsystems. Remote 1/0 processor or communication modules shall be modular and individually replaceable. B. Remote 1/0 shall communicate with the PLC using the PLC manufacturer's standard protocol or an open standard network such as DeviceNet, Ethernet IP, ProfiNet, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus TCP/IP, or equal. 2.06 INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT A. Signal and control circuitry to individual input/output boards shall be arranged such that board failure shall not disable more than one half of the control loops within any group of controlled equipment (e.g., one pump out of a group of three pumps, two pumps out of four, etc.). Where possible, individual control loops and equipment shall be assigned to individual boards such that failure of the board will disable only one loop or piece of equipment. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Owner provided PLC programming shall be furnished to perform all functions described in Section 40 61 96— Process Control Descriptions, including global functions. In addition, PLCs shall be programmed to provide additional functions described in other Sections of this Division. B. PLC programming shall make use of the various IEC languages as appropriate to the specific task and shall be performed in a modular style making extensive use of program blocks (subroutines) and program variables to be passed to the program blocks for specific equipment. It is the intent of this requirement to allow for enhanced readability and ease of modification of the program code through the elimination of multiple instances of repeated code for the same function in a "hard-coded" style. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 63 43-5 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS C. Extensive comments shall be placed in the program code to describe the functions of all elements of the program code. PLC code that does not contain comments shall be rejected. D. Refer to Section 40 61 13 — Process Control System General Provisions, Part 3 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 63 43-6 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS SECTION 40 66 00 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation IEEE 802.3 ethernet local area network(s) for communications among plant devices. B. Local area network shall be provided with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 63 43— Programmable Logic Controllers C. Section 40 62 16—Operator Workstation Computers 1.03 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. The following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. A termination tool kit shall be provided containing all required tools and consumables for up to 25 connections of each connection type furnished. Termination kit shall be as manufactured by Black Box, Corning Cable Systems, Optical Cable Corporation, or equal. 2. One (1) spare switch of each type furnished under this Contract. 3. Two (2) spare patch cables of each type and of the maximum length used. 4. Two (2) spare GBIC or SFP modules for each type used. 5. One (1) spare media converter for each type used. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1. Fiber optic testing results, including signal attenuation for each fiber. PART 2— PRODUCTS ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-1 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 2.01 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) A. An IEEE 802.3 ethernet local area network shall be used for communications between plant devices. B. Network wiring shall be unshielded, twisted-pair copper cables for connections within buildings. Fiber optic media shall be used for all inter-device communication links extended outside of a building, unless specifically noted. Cables shall be as specified herein. C. The Contractor may provide a network configuration different from that shown in the Contract Drawings with written approval of the Engineer, but the Contractor shall coordinate with all affected trades and pay for all additional charges incurred. D. The Contractor shall provide appurtenances, including but not limited to, all hardware, cables, connectors, adapters, modules, and software, to implement a network as required for a fully functional system even if not explicitly specified or shown. 2.02 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET NETWORK SWITCHES A. Except where specifically allowed on the Control System Architecture Drawing, industrial ethernet network switches shall be provided for each device connected to the process control system network. The switches shall create switched ethernet networks that conform to the IEEE 802.3 and 802.3u standards using copper wires or optical fibers in a bus, tree or ring network topology as shown on the Drawings. Ethernet network switches shall be modular, rack mounted, or standard DIN-rail mounted within the PLC cabinet or in an adjacent communication cabinet, as shown on the Drawings. B. Ethernet network switches shall support ring, bus, star, or point-to-point network topologies. On-line signal monitoring shall be provided to detect and locate impending faults. Ethernet network switches shall be replaceable on-line without disrupting the network. The ethernet network switches shall be integrated into the in-plant Ethernet network to form a redundant ring network with self-healing communication recovery. Switches shall support the non-proprietary Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) in addition to the switch manufacturer's standard redundant ring network protocol, all of which shall provide self-healing communication recovery. C. Ethernet network switches shall meet the following minimum performance requirements: 1. Functions: Modular managed switch with store and forward switching mode, 10 Mbps ethernet, or 100 Mbps Fast-Ethernet, or gigabit Ethernet support, multi- address capability, auto-crossing, auto-negotiation, auto-polarity. Port speed and duplex auto-negotiation shall be configurable. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-2 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 2. Management: Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) (v1/v2/v3) and Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) support; IGMP filtering and snooping. 3. Power Requirements: Redundant 24 VDC power supply 4. Operating Temperature: 0 to 60 degrees C 5. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95% 6. Network Size: Up to 50 nodes in ring structure; otherwise unlimited 7. Port Type & Quantity (at each PLC location): minimum of four (4) 10/100Base-TX, twisted pair cable, RJ-45 sockets, 0-100 meters LAN segment and two (2) 100/1000Base-FX, multimode fiber optic cables (62.5/125 pm), LC, ST or SC sockets, 0-5000 meters LAN segment 8. Link Budget: 8 dB @ 1300 nm; 10 dB @ 850 nm 9. Wavelength: 850 or 1300 nm D. Acceptable industrial ethernet network switches shall be as manufactured by MOXA Series EDS-508A, no or equal. 2.03 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE A. Unshielded twisted pair cable for drops within buildings shall consist of 4 pair of 24 AWG copper conductors in a flame-retardant jacket. Cable shall be plenum rated (UL 910) and meet EIA/TIA-568 Category 6 (i.e., Cat6) specifications. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be Hyper Grade Extended Distance cable as manufactured by Berk-Tek, Belden equivalent, or equal. Connectors shall be modular RJ-45 plug. B. Solid conductors shall be used for all field wiring and punch-down applications. For patch cable applications and where installed-flexibility is necessary, such as for movable equipment or across enclosure door hinges, conductors shall be stranded. C. For use as ethernet, Contractor's conduit/cable routing shall be limited to the maximum ethernet length of 100m. If this cannot be accomplished, Contractor shall design and provide a system utilizing long-range copper extenders or fiber with media conversion or similar to overcome distance limitations, subject to Engineer's approval. D. Provide copper patch panels where more than one copper communication cable leaves the enclosure. 2.04 MULTIMODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE (OM1) A. Fiber optic cable shall conform to TIA 492-AAAA and the following specifications: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-3 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 1. Fiber Type: Graded Index (GI) Multimode 2. Fiber/Cladding Diameter: 62.5/125 microns 3. No. Fibers: 12 (color-coded), unless otherwise indicated 4. Cable Construction: Loose Tube w/ Ripcords 5. Filling: Water Swellable Dry Block 6. Armored: No 7. Central Member: Dielectric (Kevlar) 8. Rating: Gigabit ethernet, unless otherwise indicated 9. Modal bandwidth (OM1): a. 200 MHz*km OFL at 850 nm b. 500 Mhz*km OFL at 500 nm 10. Maximum Attenuation: a. 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm b. 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm 11. Application Type: Direct-burial/Conduit/Aerial 12. Plenum Rated: Where required (e.g., in drop ceilings) 13. Sheath: UV Resistant 14. Max. Tensile Load: 600 lb (2700 N) installation; 200 lb (890 N) long term 15. Minimum Bend Radius: 7 in under maximum tensile load; 4.6 in unloaded (installed) 16. Operating Temperature: -40 to 70 degrees C 17. Operating Relative Humidity: 0 to 100% B. Fiber optic cable shall utilize mechanically spliced, field installable, SC, LC, or ST compatible connectors. Connections shall have a typical loss of 0.35 dB or better and shall provide stable optical performance after numerous rematings. Heat or UV cured ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-4 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT connections shall not be acceptable. Where applicable, field terminations shall use a simple procedure requiring minimal training. C. Fiber optic cable shall be ALTOS All Dielectric Loose Tube Optical Cable as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems, the Extended Performance Fiber Optic Cable Series as manufactured by Phoenix Digital, Inc., Belden equivalent, equivalent system by Optical Cable Corporation, or equal. 2.05 SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE (OS2) A. Fiber optic cable shall conform to ITU-T G.652 and the following specifications: 1. Fiber Type: Graded Index (GI) Single Mode 2. Fiber/Cladding Diameter: 9/125 microns 3. No. Fibers: 12 (color-coded), unless otherwise indicated 4. Cable Construction: Loose Tube w/ Ripcords 5. Filling: Water Swellable Dry Block 6. Armored: No 7. Central Member: Dielectric (Kevlar) 8. Rating: Gigabit ethernet, unless otherwise indicated 9. Maximum Attenuation: 0.5 dB/km 10. Application Type: Direct-burial/Conduit/Aerial 11. Plenum Rated: Where required (e.g., in drop ceilings) 12. Sheath: UV Resistant 13. Max. Tensile Load: 600 lb (2700 N) installation; 200 lb (890 N) long term 14. Minimum Bend Radius: 7 in under maximum tensile load; 4.6 in unloaded (installed) 15. Operating Temperature: -40 to 70 degrees C 16. Operating Relative Humidity: 0 to 100% ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-5 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT B. Fiber optic cable shall utilize mechanically spliced, field installable, SC, LC, or ST compatible connectors. Connections shall have a typical loss of 0.35 dB or better and shall provide stable optical performance after numerous rematings. Heat or UV cured connections shall not be acceptable. Where applicable, field terminations shall use a simple procedure requiring minimal training. Fiber optic cable shall be ALTOS All Dielectric Loose Tube Optical Cable as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems, the Extended Performance Fiber Optic Cable Series as manufactured by Phoenix Digital, Inc., Belden equivalent, equivalent system by Optical Cable Corporation, or equal. 2.06 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS A. Upon entering a cabinet, panel or console, fiber optic cable shall be broken out using fan-out kits and terminated in a fiber optic patch panel. Fan-out kit shall provide mechanical connection to fiber optic cable jacket for strain relief and clean appearance. Where mechanical connection is not made or fan-out kit does not completely cover jacket, rip cords, dry block, material etc., fan-out kit shall be reinforced with short length of properly sized heat shrink tubing. Use of adhesive tape in this application shall not be permitted. B. All fiber optic patch panels shall be mounted within a rack or a NEMA rated enclosure. Wall-mounting stand-alone patch panels shall not be permitted unless otherwise indicated. C. Rack-mounted patch panels shall be Cabinet-Mounted Interconnect Center (C-MIC) as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems, equivalent by Black Box, Inc., Optical Cable Corporation, or equal. D. Stand-alone patch panels shall be Wall-Mountable Interconnect Center (WIC) or Premises Interconnect Center (PIC) as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems, equivalent by Black Box, Inc., Optical Cable Corporation, or equal. E. Fiber optic patch cable shall be provided at necessary lengths with a modal bandwidth (OM or OS) rating at least as high as the connected components. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The destination of all network data cables (both copper and fiber) leaving an enclosure, patch panel, or building shall be labeled at each end using industry-standard wire markers. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-6 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT B. Refer to Section 40 61 13 — Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. 3.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. Fiber optic cable for installation within buildings shall comply with all applicable fire and building safety codes for such applications. B. Testing 1. Bulk fiber shall be tested on-site to prior to installation to provide a reference for the installed test data. 2. All individual fibers, including spares, shall be terminated and all connections shall be tested after installation. 3. Complete installed fiber optic cable shall be tested for continuity with a visual fault locator or fiber tracer and the connections verified and documented. Cabling shall also be tested for optical/insertion loss in compliance with Tier 1 testing per TIA- 568. 4. Submit all test results. 3.03 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS A. All patch panels shall be labeled with destination/function of each port, matching terminology from the Contract Documents where possible. Provide printed directory mounted to or adjacent to patch panel with this information where sufficient space is not available. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 66 00-7 NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 67 00 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place, in satisfactory operation the control enclosures, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Control enclosures shall be assembled, wired, and tested in the instrumentation subcontractor's own facilities, unless specified otherwise. All components and all necessary accessories such as power supplies, conditioning equipment, mounting hardware, signal input and output terminal blocks, and plug strips that may be required to complete the system shall be provided. C. Either manufacturer's standard or custom enclosures may be furnished subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents and favorable review by the Owner. D. Due consideration shall be given to installation requirements for enclosures in new and existing structures. The Contractor shall examine plans and field inspect new and existing structures as required to determine installation requirements and shall coordinate the installation of all enclosures with the Owner and all affected contractors. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with installation of enclosures, including repair of damage to structures (incidental, accidental or unavoidable). E. The terms enclosure, cabinet, and panel shall be considered the same product and are used interchangeably. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be per Section 40 61 15— Process Control System Submittals. B. Thermal calculations. C. Proof of circuit breaker selective coordination. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 62 00 — Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-1 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS C. Section 40 78 00 — Panel Mounted Instruments D. Section 40 78 56— Isolators, Intrinsically-Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors E. Section 40 70 00 — Instrumentation for Process Systems F. Section 40 61 90 — Schedules and Control Descriptions, General G. Refer to Division 26 for additional requirements for conductors, circuit breakers, disconnect switches, etc. 1.04 PANEL LOCATION AND TYPE A. For locations inside buildings in areas other than climate controlled (i.e., heated and air conditioned) electrical or control rooms, panel shall be Type 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction, or as indicated for hazardous area classification (Class, Division, at a minimum), or submersible, NEMA 6, applications. Epoxy coated cast copper-free aluminum construction shall also be acceptable for NEMA 4, 6 and 7 applications. B. For locations in storage/feed areas for chlorine or other applicable corrosive chemicals, panel shall be of non-metallic construction, rated NEMA 4X, and be fully compatible with the associated chemical. C. For locations within climate controlled (i.e., heated and air-conditioned) electrical or control rooms, panel shall be a painted steel fully enclosed NEMA 12 units with gasketed doors. D. For outdoor locations, panel shall be Type 316L stainless steel NEMA 4X construction unless located in chlorine environments. Chlorine environment shall be nonmetallic NEMA 4X construction. 1.05 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 40 61 22 — Tools, Supplies and Spare Parts, General. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS AND PANELS A. Cabinets and panels shall be formed or welded construction, reinforced with Unistrut, Powerstrut, or equal to facilitate mounting of internal components or equipment. Sufficient access plates and doors shall be provided to facilitate maintenance and testing of the cabinet's equipment. Doors shall be removable. Cabinets and panels with any dimension 36 inches or greater shall be provided with removable lifting lugs designed to ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-2 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS facilitate safe moving and lifting of the panel during installation. All doors shall be fitted with common-keyed locks. B. Cabinets and panels shall be minimum 14 USS gauge. Cabinets and panels with any dimension greater than 36 inches shall be 12 USS gauge. C. Cabinets and panels shall have doors on the front and shall be designed for front access. NEMA 12 cabinets shall be fitted with three-point door latches. Doors for NEMA 4X cabinets shall be all stainless steel with three-point latches. Door hardware on NEMA 4X cabinets located in chemical storage/feed areas shall be non-corrosive in that environment. D. Panels and cabinets located outside fence-secured areas shall be fitted with padlockable latch kits. Coordinate keying with Owner. E. All cabinets and panels shall be provided with drawing pockets for as-built panel drawings. One copy of the appropriate panel as-built drawings shall be furnished and left in the pocket of each panel. F. Panels with any dimension greater than 36 inches that contain a programmable controller(PLC) shall be provided with a folding laptop programmer shelf on the inside of the door. When deployed, the laptop shelf shall not be greater than 48 inches above finished floor. Laptop shelf shall be fitted to door with factory applied weld-studs. Weld discoloration and enclosure penetrations will not be accepted. G. Unless otherwise noted, panel-mounted control devices (OIUs, hand switches, etc.) requiring operator access shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. H. Cabinets and panels shall be prefabricated cabinets and panels by Hoffman or Saginaw Control and Engineering (SCE). The Contractor may optionally provide cabinets that are custom-fabricated by the instrumentation subcontractor or by a reputable panel fabrication shop acceptable to the Engineer. 2.02 FIELD PANELS A. Field panels for outdoor service shall be suitable for wall or pipe mounting. Panels shall have the following features: 1. Hinged and foamed-in-place continuous gasketed door(s). Door material shall match enclosure and shall have piano hinge(s) and three-point latches. 2. Field panels located outside fence-secured areas shall be fitted with staple and hasp. Provide padlock and coordinate keying with Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-3 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 3. Thermal insulation and thermostatically controlled space heaters where required to prevent condensation or maintain environmental conditions for installed components. 4. External sun shields or shades constructed of the same materials as the associated enclosure, unless otherwise specified. Sun shield or shade shall be fitted to enclosure supports and not to enclosure. Sun shield or shade shall have a slightly sloped top to shed water and shall extend past the front of the enclosure by at least 6 inches and extend down the side and back of enclosure. B. All external sample/process piping, including valves and appurtenances, shall be insulated with weather-proof insulation and heat-taped to prevent freezing. Heat taping shall be thermostatically controlled and self-regulating, and shall adjust its heat output to the temperature of the lines. Heat tape shall be powered from an equipment-safety GFCI circuit from within panel, unless otherwise shown or specified. C. Field panels shall be adequately sized to house instruments, power supplies, surge protection, and appurtenant equipment required for operation. Sufficient space shall be provided for servicing instruments without removal of equipment from the enclosure. D. Field panels shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Saginaw Control & Engineering (SCE), or equal. 2.03 CABINET AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Where indicated or required due to ambient conditions and panel component ratings, panel-mounted closed loop air conditioning units and thermostatically controlled space heaters shall be provided. B. Air conditioning units shall both cool and dehumidify the cabinet's internal air. Each air conditioner shall be sized to handle current and future (with specified spare capacity filled) heat loadings from all equipment mounted inside the cabinet. C. Air conditioners shall be provided with thermostats which operate the centrifugal evaporator blowers continuously to prevent stratification of air within the cabinet. Compressors shall operate as needed to maintain the temperature set at the thermostat. Compressors shall be provided with space heaters to maintain the compressor at a minimum temperature during cold ambient temperatures. D. Ambient air shall be completely separated from the air inside the cabinet. All air conditioner components exposed to the atmosphere outside the cabinets shall be coated to prevent corrosion. E. Power supply shall be 115VAC, 60 Hz. Units shall be provided with EMI/RFI noise suppressors. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-4 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS F. Air conditioner enclosures shall be constructed of stainless steel or cold rolled steel which is phosphatized and finished in baked enamel. G. Cabinet air conditioners shall be ProAir CR Series as manufactured by McLean Midwest of Brooklyn Park, MN, or equal. 2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized steel DIN mounting rails securely bolted to the cabinet subpanel. Terminals shall be of the screw down pressure plate type as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, Wieland, Square D, or equal. B. Power terminal blocks for both 120 VAC and 24 VDC power shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 30 amps. C. Signal terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 20 amps. 2.05 NAMEPLATES A. Items of equipment installed in control panels shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for maintenance and repair shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall include, as necessary, the equipment identification number, description, calibrated range, and set point(s). Abbreviations of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/16-inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16-inch high on a black background. Nameplates attached to instruments may be black laser etched 1/8-inch high text on stainless steel with sharp edges made smooth. Stamped text shall not be acceptable. C. Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by NEMA rated stainless steel screws and to other surfaces by an epoxy-based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drilled and attached to the associated device by means of a braided stainless steel wire affixed with a permanent crimp. D. Submit sample nameplate of each type. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-5 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. The cabinet itself and all interior and exterior equipment shall be identified with nameplates. The equipment shall be mounted such that service can occur without removal of other equipment. Face mounted equipment shall be flush or semi-flush mounted with flat black escutcheons. All equipment shall be accessible such that adjustments can be made while the equipment is in service and operating. All enclosures shall fit within the allocated space as shown on the Drawings. B. Enclosures shall provide mounting for power supplies, control equipment, input/output subsystems, panel-mounted equipment and appurtenances. Ample space shall be provided between equipment to facilitate servicing and cooling. C. Enclosures shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted inside the panel. If required, one or more of the following shall be provided to facilitate cooling: 1. For NEMA 12 cabinets only, louvered openings near the bottom and top or thermostatically controlled, low-noise cooling fans to circulate outside air into the enclosure, exhausting through louvers near the top of the cabinet. Air velocities through the enclosure shall be minimized to assure quiet operation. 2. Thermostatically controlled, low noise internal air blowers to circulate air within the enclosure, maintaining a uniform internal temperature. Initial setpoint shall be 75 degrees F. 3. All intake openings in cabinets and panels shall be fitted with dust filters. D. Enclosures shall be constructed so that no screws or bolt heads are visible when viewed from the front. Punch cutouts for instruments and other devices shall be cut, punched, or drilled and smoothly finished with rounded edges. E. The temperature inside each enclosure containing digital hardware (e.g., PLC, computer, Ethernet switch) shall be continuously monitored and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC if the temperature rises to an adjustable, preset high temperature. This thermostat shall be independent and separate from the thermostat used to control the temperature in the enclosure described above. Enclosure "high interior temperature" alarm shall be displayed on the HMI or OIT. F. Intrusion alarm switches shall be provided on all enclosures containing digital hardware and shall generate an alarm to the nearest PLC when any enclosure door is opened. If panel contains a service light, alarm switch shall also be wired to turn light on when door is opened. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-6 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS G. Terminals shall be marked with a permanent, continuous marking strip. One side of each terminal shall be reserved exclusively for field incoming conductors. Common connections and jumpers required for internal wiring shall not be made on the field side of the terminal. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, a vendor's pre-engineered and prefabricated wiring termination system will be acceptable. H. Wiring within cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be installed neatly and shall comply with accepted standard instrumentation and electrical practices. Power, control and signal wiring shall comply with Division 26 of the Specifications, except that the minimum wire size for discrete signal wiring may be 16 AWG, and for analog wiring may be 18 AWG. For each pair of parallel terminal blocks, the field wiring shall be between the blocks. I. Separate terminal strips shall be provided for each type of power and signal used within each cabinet. Where applicable, terminal strips for different voltages of discrete signal wiring shall also be separated. Terminal strips shall be labeled as to voltage and function. J. All wiring shall be bundled and run open or enclosed in vented plastic wireway as required. Wireways shall be oversized by a minimum of 10%; overfilled wireways shall not be acceptable. All conductors run open shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals, not exceeding 12 inches, with nylon cable ties. Care shall be taken to separate electronic signal, discrete signal, and power wiring when operating at differing voltages. K. Spare field wiring shall be bundled, tied, and labeled as specified above, and shall be neatly coiled in the bottom of the cabinet. L. All installed spare 1/0 hardware shall be wired along with live 1/0 wiring to the field wiring terminal blocks within the cabinet. Where space for spare 1/0 modules has been provided with the PLC backplane or DIN-rail mounting system, corresponding space for wiring, surge protection, and terminations shall be furnished within the cabinet. M. A copper ground bus shall be installed in each cabinet and shall be connected to the building power ground. N. Interior panel wiring shall be tagged at all terminations with machine-printed self- laminating labels. Labeling system shall be Brady TLS 2200 Printer with TLS 2200®/TLS PC Link TM labels, or equivalent system by Seton or Panduit. The wire numbering system and identification tags shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19— Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables. Field wiring terminating in panels shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 19 — Low-Voltage Conductors and Cables. Where applicable, the wire number shall be the ID number listed in the input/output schedules. O. Wires shall be color coded as follows: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-7 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 1. Equipment Ground — GREEN 2. 120 VAC Power— BLACK 3. 120 VAC Power Neutral — WHITE 4. 120 VAC Control (Internally Powered) — RED 5. 120 VAC Control (Externally Powered)—YELLOW 6. 24 VAC Control — ORANGE 7. DC Power (+)— RED 8. DC Power (-)— BLACK 9. DC Control — BLUE 10. Analog Signal — BLACK/WHITE or BLACK/RED P. Enclosures shall be provided with a main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from the panel. Main breaker and branch breaker sizes shall be coordinated such that an overload in a circuit will trip only its immediate breaker and not the upstream breaker. Q. Enclosures with any dimension larger than 36 inches shall be provided with 120-volt duplex receptacles for service equipment and LED service lights. Power to these devices shall be independent from the PLC power supply and its associated uninterruptible power system. R. Where applicable, enclosures shall be furnished with red laminated plastic warning signs in each section. The sign shall be inscribed "WARNING - This Device Is Connected to Multiple Sources of Power." Letters in the word "WARNING" shall be 0.75 inch high, white. S. The interconnection between equipment and panel shall be by means of flexible cables provided to permit withdrawal of the equipment from the cabinet without disconnecting the plugs. 3.02 PAINTING/FINISHING A. All steel enclosures shall be free from dirt, grease, and burrs and shall be treated with a phosphatizing metal conditioner before painting. All surfaces shall be filled, sanded, and finish coated by spraying a 1-2 mil epoxy prime coat and smooth, level, high grade textured finish between flat and semi-gloss shine. The colors shall be selected by the ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-8 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS Owner from a minimum of six color samples provided. Refer to Division 09 for additional requirements. B. Materials and techniques shall be of types specifically designed to produce a finish of superior quality with respect to adherence, as well as impact and corrosion resistance. C. Panels fabricated from stainless steel shall not be painted. D. Panels fabricated from non-metallic materials (e.g., FRP) shall be gel-coated and shall not be otherwise painted. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 40 61 13 — Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 00-9 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 67 63 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all uninterruptible power systems, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. One UPS shall be provided for each programmable logic controller(PLC) panel and its appurtenant equipment provided under this Contract. However, courtesy receptacles in PLC and RTU cabinets shall not be powered by the UPS. C. UPS units for control panels containing PLCs shall be mounted either within the cabinet or in an adjacent cabinet of suitable environmental rating. D. Where the UPS is mounted within a dedicated enclosure, that enclosure shall be properly sized for heat dissipation and all other applicable requirements as specified in Section 40 67 00 — Control System Equipment Panels and Racks and its subordinate Sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 63 43— Programmable Logic Controllers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Sizing calculations, in Watts (W) or Volt-Amps (VA), for all UPS units. B. Heat dissipation calculations for all enclosures that contain a UPS unit. C. Run time calculation. PART 2— EQUIPMENT 2.01 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS 0 0 A. Each UPS shall consist of a freestanding UPS module and battery modules as required to meet backup run time requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 63-1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS B. UPS units shall be true on-line type. Each UPS shall be sized to match the maximum power requirements of the associated digital equipment, control panel power supplies and accessories. Under normal operation, the AC power shall be converted to DC. The DC power from the battery charger shall supply an inverter and maintain the battery module at full charge. The AC output from the inverter shall be fed to the associated digital equipment power supply unit and/or other equipment power supplies as appropriate. Upon loss of the AC supply, the inverter shall continue to supply normal power to the device, drawing DC from the batteries. C. An automatic bypass switch shall be provided with UPS units of greater than 2 kVA capacity. The transfer switch shall be of the solid state, make-before-break type and shall automatically transfer load from the inverter to the AC line in the event of an inverter malfunction. The total transfer time shall be 5 milliseconds or less. The transfer switch shall be provided with a manual override. D. A manually operated maintenance bypass switch shall be provided for each UPS installation, other than for computers, to allow the hardware to be powered while the UPS is removed for maintenance. The bypass switch shall be the make-before-break type to ensure continuous power to the load. E. Loss of AC power shall be monitored on the line side of the UPS and reported via normally closed (fail safe) unpowered contacts to the associated PLC/RTU. F. Each UPS shall meet the following requirements: 1. Input voltage shall be 117 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Voltage regulation shall be +/-5 percent for line and load changes. 3. The output frequency shall be phase-locked to the input AC line on AC operation and shall be 60 hertz +/-0.5 percent when on battery operation. 4. The batteries shall be of the sealed, lead acid or lead calcium gelled electrolyte type, or VRLA absorbed glass mat (AGM) type. The battery modules shall have a minimum full load backup time of 30 minutes for PLC-based control panels. 5. The UPS capacity shall be sized for 150% of the connected load. 6. A status monitoring and control panel shall be provided and shall include the following: a. Status indicating lights for both normal and abnormal conditions. b. Individual alarm contacts that shall close upon: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 63-2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS 1) Loss of the AC line 2) Low battery level 3) Fault condition. C. Contacts shall be wired to the closest discrete input subsystem. Alternatively, an RS-232 or USB port shall provide UPS status to an operator workstation. All required interface software and hardware shall be provided. d. Circuit breaker for the AC input. 7. Sound absorbing enclosure. 8. EMI/RF noise filtering. 9. Surge protection shall be provided on the AC input circuit, which shall have a UL TVSS clamping voltage rating of 400 V with a <5 ns response time. G. UPS systems shall be the 9PX series by Eaton, Smart-UPS On-line series by APC/Schneider-Electric, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Where the UPS is mounted within the PLC or RTU cabinet, it shall not interfere with access to other equipment or wiring within the panel (i.e., it shall not be necessary to move or remove the UPS to remove or service other panel-mounted equipment). For floor-mounted PLC cabinets with bottom wiring access (including those cabinets with legs), the UPS shall be placed on a dedicated shelf within the cabinet. B. Refer to Section 40 61 13 — Process Control System General Provisions for additional requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 67 63-3 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall furnish, install, test and place in operation instruments as scheduled together with all signal converters, transmitters, isolators, amplifiers, etc. to interface with the process control system as shown on the Drawings and as specified. The Contractor may elect to install sensors on process lines provided that the instrumentation subcontractor provides full on-site supervision during installation. Mounting of associated indicators, sensors, sampling pumps, power supplies, brackets and appurtenances shall be provided as indicated. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all process taps, isolation valves, nipples, penetrations, embedded instrumentation supports, conduit, wiring, terminations, and the installation of process instrumentation on process lines shall be provided under this Contract. The Instrumentation Subcontractor shall supervise installation of equipment provided where installation is by other Subcontractors or Contractors. C. Tapping and connections for primary process sensors shall be sized to suit each individual installation and the requirements of the instrument served. The Contractor shall ensure that the location, supports, orientation and dimensions of the connections and tapping for instruments are such as to provide the proper bracing, the required accuracy of measurement, protection of the sensor from accidental damage and accessibility for maintenance while the plant is in operation. Isolation valves shall be provided at all process taps. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 61 91 — Process Control System Instrument List C. Section 40 67 00 — Control System Equipment Panels and Racks D. Section 40 61 22 —Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General E. Instruments furnished with mechanical equipment shall be furnished, installed, tested and calibrated as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. o w N O N O ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 70 00-1 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 1.03 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 40 61 22 -- Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General. B. Additional items as recommended by the analytical instrument manufacturers or as described for the specified analytical instrument sections shall be provided. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All instrumentation supplied shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Unless otherwise specified, instruments shall be solid state, electronic, using enclosures to suit specified environmental conditions. Microprocessor-based equipment shall be supplied unless otherwise specified. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the Drawings, or as required. B. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet or exceed Class, Group, and Division requirements as shown on the Drawings, to comply with the National Electrical Code. C. All field instrumentation for outdoor service shall be provided with enclosures that are suitable for outdoor service, as follows: 1. Where the manufacturer's enclosures are suitable for outdoor service, they shall be provided with instrument sunshades. Sunshades shall be Style E as manufactured by O'Brien Corporation, or equal. Where possible, these instruments shall be mounted in a north facing direction. 2. Where the manufacturer's standard enclosures are not suitable for outdoor service, instruments shall be mounted in Field Panels in accordance with Section 40 67 00— Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, or may be furnished with Vipak instrument field enclosures as manufactured by O'Brien Corporation, equivalent by Intertec, or equal. It shall not be necessary to provide the manufacturer's NEMA 4 or 4X enclosures for instruments that will be subsequently mounted in separate field panels. D. All instruments shall return to accurate measurement without manual resetting upon restoration of power after a power failure. E. Unless otherwise shown or specified, local indicators shall be provided for all instruments. Where instruments are located in inaccessible locations, local indicators shall be provided and shall be mounted as specified in Paragraph 3.01 B herein. All indicator readouts shall be linear in process units. Readouts of 0 to 100% shall not be ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 70 00-2 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS acceptable (except for speed and valve position). Isolated outputs shall be provided for all transmitters. F. Unless otherwise specified, field instrument and power supply enclosures shall be Type 316 stainless steel, fiberglass (or similar, per Engineer's judgement) or PVC coated copper-free cast aluminum NEMA 4X construction. G. Where separate elements and transmitters are required, they shall be fully matched, and unless otherwise noted, installed adjacent to the sensor. Special cables or equipment shall be supplied by the associated equipment manufacturer. H. Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry and shall be coated (tropicalized) to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid state components shall be conservatively rated for long term performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations. Ambient conditions shall be -20 to 50 degrees C and 20 to 100 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise specified. Field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and corrosive service conditions. I. All devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models that are currently in production. All equipment provided, where applicable, shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion. J. All non-loop-powered instruments and equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 Hz AC power source at a nominal 117 V, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied. K. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be isolated, 4 to 20 milliamps into a load of 0 to 750 ohms, unless specifically noted otherwise. All switches shall have double pole, double throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless specified otherwise. L. Materials and equipment used shall be UL approved wherever such approved equipment and materials are available. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 70 00-3 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 1. Equipment shall be located so that it is accessible for operation and maintenance. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the Drawings and shop drawings for various items of equipment in order to determine the best arrangement for the work as a whole and shall supervise the installation of process instrumentation supplied under this Division. 2. Work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable local codes and practices. Where the Contract Documents do not delineate precise installation procedures, the latest version of the American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 551 manual (API RP 551) shall be used as a guide to installation procedures. B. Equipment Mounting and Support 1. Field equipment shall be wall mounted or mounted on two inch diameter pipe stands welded to a 10 inch square by 1/2 inch thick base plate unless shown adjacent to a wall or otherwise noted. Materials of construction shall be aluminum or 316 stainless steel. Instruments attached directly to concrete shall be spaced out from the mounting surface not less than 1/2 inch by use of phenolic spacers. Expansion anchors in walls shall be used for securing equipment or wall supports to concrete surfaces. Unless otherwise noted, field instruments shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or work platform. 2. Embedded pipe supports and sleeves shall be Schedule 40, Type 316 stainless steel pipe, ASA B 36.19, with stainless steel blind flange for equipment mounting, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Materials for miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel construction. 4. Pipe stands, miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall comply with the requirements of Division 05 of the specifications. 5. Transmitters shall be oriented such that output indicators are readily visible. C. Control and Signal Wiring 1. Electrical, control and signal wiring connections to transmitters and elements mounted on process piping or equipment shall be made through liquid tight flexible conduit. Conduit seals shall be provided where conduits enter all field instrument enclosures and all cabinetry housing electrical or electronic equipment. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall comply with the requirements of Division 01 of these Specifications and all instrumentation and control system tests, inspection, and ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 70 00-4 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS calibration requirements for all instrumentation and controls provided under this Contract and specified herein. The Engineer, or his/her designated representative(s), reserves the right to witness any test, inspection, calibration or start up activity. Acceptance by the Engineer of plans, reports, or documentation relating to testing or commissioning activity shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility for meeting all specified requirements. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect and adjust each instrument to its specified performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Instruments which fails to meet Contract requirements, or published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all costs and provide all personnel, equipment and materials necessary to implement all installation tests and inspection activities for equipment specified herein. C. At least 60 days before the anticipated initiation of installation testing, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed description of the installation test(s) to be conducted to demonstrate the correct operation of the instrumentation supplied hereunder. D. Field instrument calibration shall conform to the following requirements: 1. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory trained instrumentation technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate or verify factory calibration of each instrument supplied under this Contract and existing instruments shown to its specified accuracy in accordance with the manufacturer's specification and instructions for calibration. Calibration and verification shall take place under actual process conditions. Forcing outputs shall not be acceptable. 2. Each instrument shall be calibrated/verified at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs. Test instruments shall be rated to an accuracy of at least five (5) times greater than the specified accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. Where applicable, such test instruments shall have accuracy's as set forth by the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). 3. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide a written calibration/verification sheet to the Engineer for each instrument, certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified accuracy. The Contractor shall submit proposed calibration sheets for various types of instruments for Engineer approval prior to the start of calibration. This sheet shall include but not be limited to date, instrument tag numbers, brief description of how the calibration process was performed, calibration data for the various procedures described herein, name of person ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 70 00-5 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS performing the calibration, a listing of the published specified accuracy, permissible tolerance at each point of calibration, calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerance, defect noted, corrective action required and corrections made. For electronic or powered instruments, the calibration/verification sheet shall also list all configurable parameters that have been modified from their default factory setting. 4. If doubt exists as to the correct method for calibrating or checking the calibration/verification of an instrument, the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be used as an acceptable standard, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 5. Upon completion of calibration, devices calibrated hereunder shall not be subjected to adjustments, sudden movements, accelerations, or shocks, and shall be installed in permanent protected positions not subject to moisture, dirt, and excessive temperature variations. Caution shall be exercised to prevent such devices from being subjected to over-voltages, incorrect voltages, overpressure or incorrect air. Damaged equipment shall be replaced and re-calibrated/verified at no cost to the Owner. Equipment that has been adjusted, modified, or moved or there is evidence of such activity shall be re-calibrated/verified at no cost to the Owner. 6. After completion of instrumentation installation, the instrumentation subcontractor shall perform a loop check. The Contractor shall submit final loop test results with all instruments listed in the loop. Loop test results shall be signed by all representatives involved for each loop test. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 70 00-6 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS SECTION 40 75 13 PH ANALYZERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the pH analyzers, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 70 00 — Instrumentation for Process Systems PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 PH SENSORS A. pH sensors shall be digital sensors encapsulated in liquid crystal polymer thermoplastic and utilize the differential electrode measurement technique to measure the negative of the base 10 logarithm of the activity of the hydrogen ion. The sensors shall include an integral digital shielded cable for connection to the associated controller. The sensors shall have the following features and minimum performance requirements: 1. Glass process electrode in buffered pH 7 solution 2. Integral preamplifier 3. Integral temperature compensation sensor 4. Measuring range: 0 - 14 pH 5. Maximum pressure: 100 psig at 70 degrees C 6. Accuracy: +/- 0.02 pH 7. Repeatability: +/- 0.05 pH 0 8. Sensitivity: +/- 0.01 pH 0 9. Drift: 0.03 pH per 24 hours, non-cumulative ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 75 13-1 PH ANALYZERS 10. Operating temperature: -5 to 70 degrees C 11. Housing Material: Ryton (PVDF) material for clean water applications; PEEK for all other applications; however, material shall be compatible with process fluid 12. Other Wetted Materials: Kynar junction, glass process electrode, titanium ground electrode, Viton 0-ring seals, or as required for the process fluid 13. Sensor cable length: minimum of 10 feet or as required to accommodate locations indicated B. Sensor mounting method shall be submersion. Submersion mounted sensors shall be provided with a PVC mounting pipe, PVC electrode protector, and all required appurtenances to facilitate a guard mount. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating length of mounting pipe. C. Sensors shall be pHD sc series pH sensor by Hach, pHX by Cerlic, CPF81 D by Endress + Hauser, or equal. 2.02 CONTROLLERS A. The microprocessor-based dissolved oxygen controller shall be compatible with and of the same manufacturer as the luminescent dissolved oxygen sensor. The controller shall receive a signal from the sensor, condition it, and amplify the signal for display and transmission. B. Controllers shall meet the following minimum functional requirements: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X 2. Power Supply: 115 VAC, 60 Hz 3. Operating Temperature: -20 to +60 degC, 0 to 95% relative humidity, non- condensing with an 8WAC/9WDC sensor load. Temperature shall be linearly derated to no less than +45degC with a sensor load of 28WAC/20WDC. C. The controller shall have two relay contact outputs that can be configured based on the dissolved oxygen level. Relay outputs shall be programmable for various alarms and warning conditions that occurred internally within the system or with the process conditions. Relays shall be Form-C SPDT contacts rated at 5A, 115/230 VAC. The control and alarm setpoints for the relays shall be adjustable across the full operating range. LED lights at the controller shall indicate that the relay is energized. The analyzer shall have two linear, isolated 4-20mA assignable outputs. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 75 13-2 PH ANALYZERS D. The controller display shall be a 3.5" TFT color display with capacitive touchpad. The controller shall have diagnostic screens for messages, including scrolling lists for failure and warning alarm conditions, calibration records, and hardware tests. E. Dissolved oxygen controllers shall be the Hach SC4500 Digital Controller, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Section 40 70 00 — Instrumentation for Process Systems. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 75 13-3 PH ANALYZERS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 78 00 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation the panel mounted instruments, with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 67 00 — Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 1.03 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. All equipment mounted on the face of a panel shall conform to the same NEMA rating specified for the panel construction. 1.04 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 40 61 22 — Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General. In addition, the following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. One of each type of panel mounted equipment (i.e., indicators, signal converters, etc.) provided under this Contract. 2. Five of each type of interposing control relay provided under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATORS A. Control operators shall be 30.5 mm, round, heavy-duty, oil tight NEMA 4X corrosion resistant. For Hazardous areas, control operators shall be rated NEMA 7. B. Pushbuttons shall be non-illuminated, spring release type. Pushbuttons shall include a full guard. Panic stop/alarm pushbuttons shall be red mushroom type with manual-pull release. Selector switches shall be non-illuminated, maintained contact type, unless otherwise indicated. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 00-1 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS C. Pilot lights shall be of the proper control voltage, push-to-test LED type with lens and LED lamp colors as specified below. 1. Red: stopped, off, or closed 2. Green: running, on, or opened 3. Amber: fault, alarm, or warning 4. White: generic non-alarm status 5. Blue: control power on D. Control operators shall have legend plates as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise directed by the Engineer. Legend plates shall be plastic, black field (background)with white lettering. Engraved nameplates shall be securely fastened above each control operator. If adequate space is not available, the nameplate shall be mounted below the operator. E. Control operators for all equipment under this Contract shall be of the same type and manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Control operators such as pushbuttons (PB), selector switches (SS), and pilot lights (PL) shall be Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse Type E34, Square D Company Type SK, or equal 2.02 RELAYS A. Interposing control relays (CR) 1. Where required to interface between motor control centers, equipment controls, and control panels, interposing relays and associated control wiring circuitry shall be furnished and installed to provide the monitoring and/or control functions specified herein. 2. Interposing relays shall be small format type, DPDT, minimum 10 amp, 120 VAC contact rating. 3. Relay coils shall be 120 VAC or 24 VDC as required to interface with equipment. 4. Relays shall have a flag indicator to show relay status, a pushbutton to allow manual operation of the relay, and an internal pilot light to indicate power to the coil. 5. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D, Potter & Brumfield, Allen-Bradley, or equal. B. Timing Relays JR) ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 00-2 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS 1. Timing relays shall be electronic type with 120 VAC coils unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Timers shall be provided with a minimum of two SPDT timed output contacts and instantaneous contacts where required. Contact ratings shall be the same as for interposing relays. 2. Timing relays shall be the general purpose plug-in type, Type JCK as manufactured by Square D Company, equivalent by Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, equivalent by Allen-Bradley, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 67 00 — Control System Equipment Panels and Racks, for additional requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 00-3 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 40 78 56 SURGE SUPPRESSORS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in satisfactory operation the isolators, intrinsically-safe barriers, and surge protection devices (SPDs) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 40 61 13— Process Control System General Provisions B. Section 40 67 00 — Control System Equipment Panels and Racks C. Section 40 78 00— Panel Mounted Instruments 1.03 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 40 61 22 — Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General. B. In addition, the following specific spare parts items shall be provided: 1. Five of each type of surge protection device provided under this Contract. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 SURGE PROTECTION A. General 1. All electrical and electronic elements shall be protected against damage due to electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines from lightning discharges and nearby electrical systems. 2. Manufacturer's Requirements: All surge protection devices shall be manufactured by a company that has been engaged in the design, development, and manufacture of such devices for at least 5 years. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Phoenix Contact, Edco, Transtector, Weidmuller, or equal. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 56-1 SURGE SUPPRESSORS 3. Surge protection device installations shall comply with UL 94, the National Electric Code (NEC), and all applicable local codes. 4. Surge protection devices shall be installed as close to the equipment to be protected as practically possible. 5. Device Locations: As a minimum, provide surge protection devices at the following locations: a. At connections between AC power and electrical/electronic equipment, including, but not limited to, panels, assemblies, and field mounted analog transmitters. b. At both ends of signal circuits that have any portion of the circuit extending outside of a building. C. At both ends of copper-based communication cables which extend outside of a building, including at field instruments and the field side of analog valve position signals. d. On all external telephone communication lines. B. AC power protection 1. Surge protection device assemblies for connections to AC power supply circuits shall: a. Be provided with two 3-terminal barrier terminal strips capable of accepting No. 12 AWG solids or stranded copper wire. One terminal strip shall be located on each end of the unit. b. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements. The surge protection device shall be provided with provisions for mounting to interior of equipment racks, cabinets, or to the exterior of freestanding equipment. C. Be constructed as multistage devices consisting of gas tube arrestors, high energy metal oxide varistors, or silicon avalanche suppression diodes. Assemblies shall automatically recover from surge events and shall have status indication lights. d. Comply with all requirements of UL 1449, latest edition. e. Be able to withstand a peak surge current of 10,000 amps based on a test surge waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time and a 20-microsecond exponential decay time, as defined in UL 1449. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 56-2 SURGE SUPPRESSORS f. Have the following characteristics: 1) Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: 150VAC 2) Maximum Operating Current: 20 amps 3) Ambient Temperature Range: -20 degrees C to +65 degrees C 4) Response Time: 5 nanoseconds C. Analog signal circuit protection 1. Surge protection device assemblies for analog signal circuits shall: a. Have four lead devices with DIN Rail mounting. b. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements. C. Be constructed as multistage devices consisting of gas tube arrestors and silicon avalanche suppression diodes. Gas tube arrestors and diodes shall be separated by a series impedance of no more than 20 ohms. Assemblies shall automatically recover from surge events. d. Comply with all requirements of UL 497B. e. Be able to withstand a peak surge current of 10,000 amps based on a test surge waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time and a 20-microsecond exponential decay time, as defined in UL 1449. f. Limit line-to-line voltage to 40 volts on 24VDC circuits. g. Have the following characteristics: 1) Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: 28VDC 2) Ambient Temperature Range: -20 degrees C to +65 degrees C 3) Response Time (Line-to-Line): 5 ns D. Discrete signal circuit protection 1. Surge protection device assemblies for 24VDC discrete signal circuits shall: a. Have 2-wire circuit protection with DIN Rail mounting base and plug. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 56-3 SURGE SUPPRESSORS b. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements. C. Be constructed as multistage devices consisting of gas tube arrestors and silicon avalanche suppression diodes. Gas tube arrestors and diodes shall be separated by a series impedance of no more than 20 ohms. Assemblies shall automatically recover from surge events. d. Be able to withstand a peak surge current of 10,000 amps based on a test surge waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time and a 20-microsecond exponential decay time. e. Limit line-to-line voltage to 40 volts on 24VDC circuits. f. Have the following characteristics: 1) Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: 28VDC 2) Ambient Temperature Range: -40 degrees C to +85 degrees C 3) Response Time (Line-to-Line): <_ 1 ns g. Discrete signal circuit protection shall be by Phoenix Contact PT Series; or equal. E. Communication circuit protection 1. Surge protection devices for copper-based data communication circuits shall: a. Be designed for the specific data communication media and protocol to be protected (e.g., telephone, serial, parallel, network, data highway, coax, twinaxial, twisted pair, RF). b. Provide protection of equipment to within the equipment's surge withstand levels for applicable standard test wave forms of the following standards: 1) IEC 60-1 / DIN VDE 0432 part 2 2) CCITT K17/ DIN VDE 0845 part 2 3) IEEE C62.31 C. Have a nonflammable enclosure that meets or exceeds UL 94 VO flammability requirements. d. Provide automatic recovery. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 56-4 SURGE SUPPRESSORS PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 40 78 00— Panel Mounted Instruments, for additional requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 40 78 56-5 SURGE SUPPRESSORS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 46 00 00 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in acceptable operation all mechanical equipment and all accessories as specified, as shown on the Drawings, and as required for a complete and operable system. B. The mechanical equipment shall be provided complete with all accessories, special tools, spare parts, mountings, shims, sheaves, couplings, and other appurtenances as specified, and as may be required for a complete and operating installation. C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner complete and operational equipment/systems. To this end, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all interfaces related mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation, and control work and to provide necessary ancillary items such as controls, wiring, etc., to make each piece of equipment operational as shown and specified. D. The complete installation shall be free from excessive vibration, cavitation, noise, and oil or water leaks. E. The requirements of this section shall apply to equipment furnished under Divisions 40 and 46. F. Comply with reference specifications, codes and standards as specifically modified, complimented, and supplemented herein. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. All equipment, materials, and installations shall conform to the requirements of the most recent editions with latest revisions, supplements, and amendments of the specifications, codes, and standards listed in Section 01 42 00— References along with those identified herein this and other individual specification sections. B. American Institute for Steel Construction (AISC) C. American National Standards Institute/American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ANSI/ABMA): N W N O 1. ANSI/ABMA 9 — Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings W ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-1 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. ANSI/ABMA 11 — Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings D. Acoustical Society of America (ASA)/American National Standard Institute (ANSI) S2.75, Shaft Alignment Methodology: 1. Part 1: General Principles, Methods, Practices, and Tolerances 2. Part 2: Vocabulary 3. Part 3: Alignment of Vertically Oriented Rotating Machinery 4. Guidelines and recommendations included in ASA/ANSI S2.75 shall establish and be interpreted as the minimum requirements for acceptance for leveling, grouting and alignment related work. E. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) Standard B29.1, Heavy Duty Offset Sidebar Transmission Roller Chains and Sprocket Teeth. F. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 2. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society G. Electrical Apparatus Service Association, Inc. (EASA) Mechanical Reference Handbook (latest revision). H. Standard, ISO 1940 — Mechanical Vibration — Balance quality requirements for rotors balance quality grade for rotors in a constant rigid state. I. In the event of conflict between individual specifications and reference specifications, codes and standards, the more restrictive criteria shall govern. 1.03 ACTION/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Comply with Section 01 33 00— Submittals Procedures 2. Fabrication information B. Provide submittals identified in individual equipment specification sections in addition to the submittals identified herein. C. Shop Drawings shall include the following information in addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures and shall include the following additional information: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-2 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. Equipment name, identification number and specification number. 2. Performance characteristics and descriptive data, including but not limited to capacity, power, speed, torque, and efficiency. 3. Detailed equipment dimensional drawings and setting plans including but not limited to: a. General cutaway sections b. Materials of construction C. Dimension of shaft projections d. Shaft and keyway dimensions e. Shaft diameter f. Shaft connection details g. Dimension between bearings h. General dimensions of equipment i. Anchor bolt locations j. Forces k. Assembly views I. Weights: Provide weight of entire equipment assembly, including motor and base weight of individual major subassemblies. Indicate the weight of each component, and total static and dynamic loads imparted by the equipment to the supporting structure. M. Rotating assembly technical information and illustration. n. Drawings shall identify each component by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain. o. Drawings showing the location and type of all equipment, system components, supports, hangers, foundations and the required clearances to operate and maintain equipment, valves and system components in a code compliant, safe and ergonomic manner. Drawings shall show clearances reserved for walking access around all sides, for opening access doors fully, for visual inspection for condition monitoring, and for the performance of maintenance tasks including but not limited to changing filters, replacing ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-3 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS belts, maintaining lubrication levels, predictive maintenance and performing diagnostic functions. 4. Drive and motor data as required by Division 26— Electrical. Complete motor data shall include but not be limited to size, make, type and characteristics along with wiring diagrams. Where equipment and motor speeds are to be regulated by variable speed drives, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate, furnish and exchange all necessary requirements with the respective equipment manufacturers to ensure compatibility and shall submit equipment, shafting, coupling, motor and variable speed drive shop drawings. 5. Bearings: a. Information on bearings including but not limited to: type, size, materials of construction. b. Bearing life calculations including but not limited to: basic dynamic load rating, static load rating, rating life, ABMA L10 reliability (expressed in hours of bearing life) and bearing system life. 6. Gear box design and performance criteria and AGMA service factor, including but not limited to the following: a. Thermal horsepower rating b. Bearing type C. Actual gear ratio d. Forced lubrication system: Provide description of equipment, system and instrumentation including but not limited to flow meter, pressure switches, etc. e. Gear tooth finish quality 7. Piping schematics. 8. Equipment protective device details and connection diagrams. 9. Panel layout drawings, schematic wiring diagrams, and component product data sheets for control panels. 10. A list of spare parts and special tools to be provided. 11. Information on equipment appurtenances including couplings, shaft guards, v-belt drive systems, etc. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-4 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 12. Any additional information required to demonstrate conformance with the equipment specifications. 13. Results of critical speed analyses, structural, lateral, and torsional dynamic analyses as required herein and in the individual specification sections. 14. Warranty documentation including statement of duration of warranty period and contact phone numbers and addresses for warranty issues. 15. Shipment, delivery, handling, and storage instructions. 16. Installation instructions 17. Manufacturers literature and brochures 18. Materials of construction and associated specifications (such as AISI, ASTM, SAE, etc.), including grade and type. 19. Anchor design in accordance with Section 05 05 23— Metal Fastening. 20. Intermediate shafting design, including but not limited to general arrangement drawings, engineering data, materials of construction, recommended angular offsets (for cardan universal jointed shafts), and shaft critical speed analyses (including 11t 2nd and 3rd critical speed analysis). 21. Coatings: Coating system data and description of coating system, surface preparation and shop painting, including certification that the shop paint is compatible with the finish paint. 22. Pre-commissioning lubrication oil flushing plan developed by a machinery lubrication specialist, specifically for each piece of lubricated equipment. Plan shall identify, describe procedure and demonstrate data-based approach to demonstrating achievement of lubricant cleanliness via flushing. Level of lubricant cleanliness shall be as required by equipment manufacturer's written recommendations. 23. Equipment installation lists. 24. Equipment specific requirements for levelness, plumbness, flatness, coplanarity and coplanar surface deviation. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit warranty documentation in compliance with: 1. Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 61 00— Product Requirements and Options ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-5 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS B. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures and Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be submitted in accordance with: 1. Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 78 23—Operation and Maintenance Data B. Comply with Section 01 78 43— Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1. For spare parts, extra stock materials, and tools, submit quantity of items specified in associated Specification Section. 2. Submit complete list of spare parts, extra stock materials, maintenance supplies and special tools required for maintenance for one year with unit prices and source of supply. Indicate number/quantity specified and furnished, manufacturer, part number, description, C. Comply with Section 01 79 00— Instructions to Owner's Personnel. D. Lubrication Information: 1. Comply with Specification Section 01 78 23— Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Complete lubrication instructions and lubricant schedule, including manufacturer's recommended lubricant. All lubricants shall be food grade, NSF 61 approved. Schedule shall include frequency of lubricant application, type of lubricant, and instructions regarding lubricant application 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Factory testing plan. B. Factory Test Results shall be submitted and approved prior to shipment of equipment. C. Field testing plan. D. Comply with Section 01 75 00— Check Out and Start Up Procedures. E. Alignment Report: 1. Alignment reports shall contain numerical values to express offset and angular alignment and all other parameters documented in ANSI/ASA S2.75. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-6 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. Alignment reports shall be submitted immediately after each of the following activities have been completed: a. Preliminary Alignment b. Final Alignment (at both ambient and operating temperatures) C. Re-check of alignment F. Preliminary field test data G. System field quality control testing H. Final field test data I. Certified test reports 1.07 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. All parts of the equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed for the maximum stresses occurring during fabrication, transportation, installation, testing, and all conditions of operation. All materials shall be new and shall conform to all applicable Sections of these Specifications. B. All parts of duplicate equipment shall be interchangeable without modification. Manufacturer's design shall accommodate all the requirements of these Specifications. C. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with specifications, codes and reference standards. D. All bearings and moving parts shall be protected by bushings or other Engineer approved means against wear, and provision shall be made for accessible lubrication by extending lubrication lines and fittings to approximately 30 inches above finished floor elevation. E. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding members, joints, corners, gear covers, etc., shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds on machinery shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered. F. Machinery parts shall conform within allowable tolerances to the dimensions shown on the working drawings. G. All machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the specifications, codes, and reference standards. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-7 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS H. All rotating shafts, couplings, or other moving pieces of equipment shall be provided with protective guards of sheet metal or wire mesh, neatly and rigidly supported. Guards shall be removable as required to provide access for repairs. I. All equipment greater than 100 pounds shall have lifting lugs, eyebolts, etc., for ease of lifting, without damage or undue stress exerted on its components. J. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be of current manufacture and shall be the products of manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. K. Code Compliance, safety and ergonomics for operating and maintenance personnel accessing equipment shall be considered during shop drawing development, fabrication, and installation. Items to considering include but are not limited to clearances reserved for walking access around all sides, for opening access doors fully, for visual inspection for condition monitoring, and for the performance of maintenance tasks including but not limited to changing filters, replacing belts, maintaining lubrication levels, predictive maintenance and performing diagnostic functions. 1.08 EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES A. Warranty requirements shall be as specified in Section 01 61 00— Product Requirements and Options and Section 01 75 00— Checkout and Startup Procedures. Warranty requirements are supplementary to the individual equipment specifications. 1.09 DEFINITIONS A. Comply with specification Section 01 42 00— References. B. Refer to the specified reference specifications, codes and standards for definitions applicable to this specification. Additional definitions are included hereafter. C. Chockplate: A solid steel (or alloy steel) plate with a machined top surface that is grouted to a concrete foundation to support and maintain alignment of a machinery structural steel base plate. D. Equipment Train: Two or more rotating equipment machinery elements consisting of at least one driver and one driven element joined together by a coupling. E. Mounting plate: A device used to attach equipment to concrete foundations; includes base plates, soleplates, and chockplates. A mounting plate is a base-support mechanism for the attached machinery and all individual pieces of machinery are expected to be removable from the mounting plate as a single assembly. F. Operating Temperature (Thermal) Alignment: A procedure to determine the actual change in relative shaft positions within a machinery train from the ambient (not running) condition and the normal operating temperature (running) condition by taking measurements from start-up to normal operating temperature while the machine(s) is ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-8 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS (are) operating, or after the shafts have been stopped but the machines are still near operating temperature. G. Preliminary alignment: The aligning of two adjacent machinery shafts to ensure that final alignment can be achieved without being bolt bound. This is accomplished before grouting (for horizontal machines) and the measurement of piping strain on the machinery. H. Soleplate: A solid steel (or alloy steel) plate with a machined top surface that is grouted to a concrete foundation to support and maintain alignment of machinery. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All like components within a piece of equipment shall be provided by the same manufacturer. B. Base plates: 1. Top surface of mounting plates shall be machined in locations where equipment supports/feet will contact the plate. 2. Equipment contact points shall be flat and parallel within ASA/ANSI 2.75 tolerances or 0.002-inches per foot, whichever is more stringent, and within related tolerances. 3. There shall be no paint where equipment supports or feet contact mounting plate. 4. Mounting plate shall be sufficiently rigid to avoid bending or flexing when equipment is installed. 2.02 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with the following Specification Sections: 1. Specification Section 05 05 23— Metal Fastening. 2. Comply with individual equipment specifications. B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and protect all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances required for the installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. Working Drawings for installation shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer, and templates shall be used by the Contractor when required in the detailed equipment Specifications. C. Anchor bolts and fasteners: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-9 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. Anchor bolts shall be designed and provided by the Contractor in accordance with Section 05 05 23— Metal Fastening, and with the individual equipment Specifications. 2. All anchor bolts shall have at least the minimum diameter as required by Specification Section 05 05 23— Metal Fasteners. 3. All anchor bolts, guard bolts, washers, clips, clamps, fasteners, and leveling plate pads, nuts, shims, and jack bolts of any type shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified the individual equipment Specifications. 4. Undercutting of anchors or fasteners shall not be permitted. D. Pipe sleeves as a means for adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where indicated in the contract documents or required by the equipment manufacturer. E. The Contractor shall provide all concrete pads or pedestals required for equipment furnished. All concrete equipment pads shall be a minimum of 4" high, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, and shall be doweled. 2.03 DEFAULT MATERIALS A. Equipment shall be constructed out of the materials specified in respective individual pumping specification sections. Material not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. 2.04 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural steel used for fabricating equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 12 00— Structural Steel. B. All materials shall conform to applicable provisions of the AISC Specifications for the design and fabrication of structural steel, and to pertinent ASTM Standard Specifications. 2.05 DISSIMILAR METALS A. All dissimilar metals shall be isolated in accordance with Section 05 10 00— Metal Materials and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2.06 GALVANIZING A. Where required by the equipment specifications, galvanizing shall be performed in accordance with Section 05 05 13— Galvanizing. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-10EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 2.07 STANDARDIZATION OF GREASE FITTINGS A. The grease fittings on all mechanical equipment shall be such that they can be serviced with a single type of grease gun. Fittings shall be "Zerk" type. 2.08 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. All electrical equipment and appurtenances, including but not limited to motors, panels, conduit, and wiring, etc., specified in the equipment specifications shall comply with the applicable requirements of the Division 26 specifications and the latest National Electric Code. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 and Division 40 unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. B. In the individual equipment specifications, specified motor horsepower is intended to be the minimum size motor to be provided. If a larger motor is required to meet the specified operating conditions and performance requirements, the Contractor shall furnish the larger sized motor and shall upgrade the electrical service (conduit, wires, starters, etc.) at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Where variable frequency drives (VFDs) are specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating between equipment supplier and VFD supplier to ensure a complete and operational system. VFDs shall be furnished under Division 26 unless otherwise specified in the equipment specification. Wherever variable speed drives (VSDs) are specified the same requirements as for VFDs shall apply. D. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 and Division 40 unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. 2.09 ACCESSORIES, SPARE PARTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Accessories, spare parts, and special tools shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 78 43— Spare Parts and Extra Materials. 2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with a substantial stainless-steel nameplate, mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware in a conspicuous place, and clearly inscribed with: 1. The manufacturer's name 2. Year of manufacture 3. Serial number 4. Principal rating data such as (for example): a. Capacity ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-11 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS b. Pressure C. Horsepower d. Speed B. Each piece of mechanical equipment shall also be identified as to name and number by a suitable laminated plastic or stainless-steel nameplate mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware; for example, "Raw Water Pump #1 (RWP-1)". Coordinate name and number with same on remotely located controls, control panel, and other related equipment. C. Nameplates shall not be painted over. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP TESTING A. All equipment shall be tested in the shop of the manufacturer in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that it will operate in the manner specified or implied. B. No equipment shall be shipped to the project site until the Engineer has been furnished a certified copy of test results and has notified the Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. C. A certified copy of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review. D. If required by the individual equipment Specifications, arrangements shall be made for the Owner/Engineer to witness performance tests in the manufacturer's shop. The Engineer shall be notified ten working days before shop testing commences. Expenses are to be paid by Contractor. E. Shop testing of electric motors shall conform to: 1. Section 26 05 60— Low-Voltage Electric Motors 2. Section 26 05 00— Basic Electrical Requirements 3.02 SHIPMENT, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Shipment, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with Section 01 65 00 — Product Delivery Requirements. B. Storage of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with Section 01 66 00— Product Storage and Protection Requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-12EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS C. Shipping plans shall include consideration for protecting bearings and/or other rotating equipment from chatter damage. D. Any equipment shipped to site that needs further attention shall have a WARNING tag affixed to it with indication of the action that should be taken in preparation for startup. Examples are: Final Lubrication, Mechanical Seal not in final position, etc. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer's field services shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00— Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified factory trained Technical Representative from each manufacturer or supplier of equipment who is regularly involved in the inspection, installation, start-up, troubleshooting, testing, maintenance, and operation of the specified equipment. Qualification of the Technical Representative shall be appropriate to the type of equipment furnished and subject to the approval of the Engineer and the Owner. Where equipment furnished has significant process complexity, furnish the services of engineering personnel knowledgeable in the process involved and the function of the equipment. When necessary, the Contractor shall schedule multiple Technical Representatives to be present at the same time for the purpose of coordinating the operation of multiple pieces of related equipment. C. Services of the Technical Representative will require a minimum of two (2) site visits, one for installation and testing and one for startup and training, and will be for the minimum number of days recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer but will not be less than the number of days specified in individual equipment sections. Additional site visits may be required as described below and in the equipment specifications. D. For each site visit, the Technical Representative shall submit jointly to the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor a complete signed report of the results of their inspection, operation, adjustments, and testing. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified. E. The manufacturer's Technical Representative shall provide the following services. 1. Installation: The Technical Representative shall inspect the installed equipment to verify that installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Where required by individual equipment specifications, the Technical Representative shall also supervise the installation of the equipment. 2. Testing: After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the Technical Representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment as required to prove that the equipment is in proper condition for satisfactory ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-13EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS operation under the conditions specified. Unless otherwise noted in the signed site visit report, the report shall constitute a certification that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for startup and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. The report shall include date of final acceptance field test, as well as a listing of all persons present during tests. 3. Startup: The Technical Representative shall start up the equipment for actual service with the help of the Contractor. If equipment or installation problems are experienced, the Contractor and the representative shall provide the necessary services until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and performing according to the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Unless otherwise noted in the signed site visit report, the report shall constitute a certification that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. 4. Training: Training shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 79 00— Instruction of Owner Personnel. 5. Services after Startup: Where required by the individual equipment specifications, the Technical Representative shall return to the project site thirty (30) days after the startup date to review the equipment performance, correct any equipment problems, and conduct operation and maintenance classes as required by the Owner. This follow-up trip is required in addition to the specified services of Technical Representative prior to and during equipment startup. At this time, if there are no equipment problems, each manufacturer shall certify to the Owner in writing that their equipment is fully operational and capable of meeting operating requirements. If the equipment is operating incorrectly, the Technical Representative will make no certification to the Owner until the problems are corrected and the equipment demonstrates a successful thirty (30) days operating period. F. The Contract amount shall include the cost of furnishing the Technical Representative for the minimum number of days specified, and any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation. The times specified for services by the Technical Representative in the equipment Specifications are exclusive of travel time to and from the facility and shall not be construed as to relieve the manufacturer of any additional visits to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. G. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 14 days in advance of each equipment test or Owner training session. H. The Technical Representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer's Resident Project Representative on each day the Technical Representative is at the project. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-14EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.04 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall obtain written installation manuals from the equipment manufacturer prior to installation. Equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. A copy of all installation instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer's field representative one week prior to installation. B. The Owner's field representative (e.g., the Engineer or similar) shall witness all activities involved with equipment installation. C. The Contractor shall have on hand personnel, construction equipment, and machinery of capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies encountered in work of this character. To minimize field erection problems, mechanical units shall be factory assembled insofar as practical. D. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings. E. All equipment sections and loose items shall be match-marked prior to shipping. F. The Contractor shall furnish oil and grease for initial operation and testing. The manufacturer and grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. G. Leveling and Grouting: 1. Set equipment to dimensions shown on drawings. Dimensions shall be accurate to +/- 1/16 inch except as otherwise specified, required or indicated on the drawings. 2. Base plate Surface Preparation — Prior to setting equipment and grouting, inspect and clean equipment mounting base plates, pads, feet, and frames to remove all grease, rust, paint, and dirt. 3. Wedges (i.e., tapered shims) shall not be used for leveling, aligning, or supporting equipment. 4. General Equipment Leveling: a. Non-rotating Equipment: Set level to +/- 1/16 inch per 10-foot length (0.005 inch per foot) unless manufacturer's requirements are more stringent. b. Rotating Equipment: Install, set to the most stringent of the following requirements for levelness, plumbness, flatness, coplanarity and coplanar surface deviation: 1) ASA-ANSI S2.75, Shaft Alignment Methodology. Comply with tolerance ranges scheduled at the end of this specification section. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-15EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 2) Individual equipment specifications 3) Manufacturer's pre-printed written requirements. 4) When the equipment manufacturer's pre-printed tolerances are more stringent than those stated in ASKANSI 2.75 or more stringent than the individual pump specification, the cost of field machining sole plates or precision grouting sole plates shall be covered by the [Contractor] [by the allowance stated in the bid table] [by the unit cost stated in the bid table]. C. Shims or leveling nuts shall be used unless equipment is furnished with leveling feet. Set shims flush with equipment base plate edges. When grouting is required, equipment shall be shimmed to allow a minimum of one-inch grout thickness. Grout shall cover shims at least 3 inches. Final level check shall be held for inspection and approval by Engineer before proceeding. d. Equipment shall be leveled by first using sitting nuts on the anchor bolts, and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal with epoxy base plate grout, unless alternate methods are recommended by the manufacturer and are acceptable to the Engineer (e.g., such as shim leveling pumps, or chemical grout). 5. Grouting a. Comply with Section 03 60 00— Grout. b. Grout Materials: 1) Rotating Equipment: Grout for rotating equipment shall be epoxy base plate grout. Cementitious grouts shall not be accepted for rotating equipment. 2) Non-rotating Equipment: Grout shall be as per the non-rotating equipment manufacturer's pre-printed written installation instructions and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. C. Fill pipe sleeves with grout, after bolt alignment is proven, and prior to placing grout under equipment bases. d. Concrete Surface Preparation: Roughen concrete equipment pad surface by chipping, removing laitance, and unsound concrete. Clean area of all foreign material such as oil, grease, and scale. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-16EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1) When grouting with cementious grouts is approved, the contact area of the concrete equipment pad shall be saturated with water at least 4 hours prior to grouting, removing excess water ponds. e. Application: 1) Place grout after the equipment base has been set and its initial alignment and level have been approved. 2) Form around the base, mix grout, and place in accordance with the grout manufacturers published instructions. 3) Grout mixture shall be flowable. Dry packing of grout shall not be permitted. 4) Eliminate all air or water pockets beneath the base using a drag chain or rope. 5) Grout voids detectable by tapping the top of the base plate with a hammer shall be grounds for removal and reinstallation of the work. f. Finishing: Point the edges of the grout to form a smooth 45-degree slope. g. After cementious grout has cured (not before 3 days after placement) paint exposed surfaces of grout with shellac. h. Level Verification. After grout has cured, and immediately prior to final drive alignment, recheck equipment for level and plumb. Re-level and square as necessary. Hold final checks for inspection and approval by Engineer. 6. Inspect for and remove all machining burrs or thread pulls in female holes on mating surfaces of mounting frame and machine feet. 3.05 ALIGNMENT A. For equipment that requires field alignment and connections, the Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's qualified mechanic, millwright, or machinist, to align the equipment and motor prior to making piping connections or anchoring the equipment base. Alignment shall be as specified herein. B. Rotating Equipment Shaft Alignment: Assembled equipment shafts shall be set to comply with the most stringent of the following tolerance requirements for shaft runout and shaft-to-shaft alignment tolerances expressed in angle at flex plane, in offset and angularity and/or in offset per tolerance plane separation: 1. ASA-ANSI S2.75, Shaft Alignment Methodology. Comply with tolerance ranges scheduled at the end of this specification section. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-17EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. Individual equipment specifications 3. Manufacturer's pre-printed written requirements. C. Use the machined surfaces on which the equipment sets for the base/mounting frame leveling plane. Use the machined shaft surface for equipment leveling plane. D. Sprocket and Sheave Alignment: 1. Check shaft mounted components for face runout and eccentricity (outside diameter) runout by magnetically mounting a dial indicator on a stationary base and indicating over 360 degrees on a continuous machined surface at the outside diameter of the component. Maximum allowable total indicated face runout and eccentricity for sprockets and sheaves will be per ANSI Standard B29.1-1975. 2. Drive and driven sheaves shall lie in the same plane. The sum of parallel and angular sheave misalignment measured across the span length of the belt and angular misalignment perpendicular to the belt span length shall each not exceed '/Z degree or the belt manufacturer's recommendation whichever is more stringent. E. Belt tensioning: Set drive belt tension to manufacturer's specification for the belt type. Recheck alignment after drive tensioning. F. Thermal/Mechanical Growth: Thermal/mechanical growth corrections for driver and driven machines will be used in vertical and horizontal alignment where applicable. The equipment manufacturer will determine thermal/mechanical growth applicability for any machine and provide the correction offsets to be used. G. Rotating Shaft Alignment 1. Measurement devices/fixtures will be set up on the driver and driven machine, or machine shaft surfaces. Machined coupling hubs may be used only if there is no clearance to mount fixtures directly on the shafts. 2. Account for possible coupling flex by always rotating coupled machines in the same direction during alignment. 3. Final alignments shall be performed utilizing laser alignment tools unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 4. Cardan Universal Jointed Intermediate Shafting: a. Align cardan universal joints in accordance with manufacturer's written offset recommendations. b. Offsets shall be field verified. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-18EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS C. Contractor shall have unit responsibility for all components of extended shaft driven equipment, including but not limited to the coordination of shaft design with equipment, variable frequency drive and control strategies. 5. Alignment Steps: Each of the following alignment steps are required in all instances, including but not limited to, all vertically and horizontally mounted drivers: a. Preliminary alignment is when uncoupled. Preliminary Alignment (at ambient temperature): 1) Perform prior to grouting and piping connections. 2) Check shaft straightness (runout). 3) Correct for soft foot. b. Final alignment method is when coupled. Final Alignment (at ambient temperature): 1) Perform after grouting and piping connections have been completed. 2) Check for pipe strain. 3) Alignment shall be within tolerances. C. Final alignment method is when coupled. Final Alignment (at operating temperature after 1-hour of continuous operation): 1) Check for pipe strain. 2) Alignment shall be within tolerances (coupled). d. Re-check alignment (at operating temperature): 1) After a minimum of 24-hours of run time 2) Alignment shall be within tolerances (coupled) 6. Additional Alignment Steps for Vertical Mixers: a. Level gearbox. b. Verify vertical plumbness of shaft (while shaft is not turning). C. Grout. d. Check shaft runout. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-19EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS e. Install impeller blades. 3.06 FIELD TESTING A. Field testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00— Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. All equipment shall be set, aligned, and assembled in conformance with the manufacturer's drawings and instructions. Provide all necessary calibrated instruments to execute performance tests. Submit report certified by the pump manufacturer's representative. C. Preliminary Field Tests, Yellow Tag. 1. As soon as conditions permit, after the equipment has been secured in its permanent position, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the equipment is free from defects. b. Check for alignment as specified herein. C. Check for direction of rotation. d. Check motor for no load current draw. 2. Contractor shall flush all bearings, gear housings, etc., in accordance with the pre- commissioning lubrication oil flushing plan and manufacturer's pre-printed written recommendations, to remove any foreign matter accumulated during shipment, storage or erection. Lubricants shall be added as required by the manufacturer's instructions. 3. When the Contractor has demonstrated to the Engineer that the equipment is ready for operation, a yellow tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer, or the Engineer's assigned representative and attached to the equipment. The tag shall not be removed. 4. Preliminary field tests, yellow tag, must be completed before equipment is subjected to final field tests, blue tag. D. Final Field Tests, Blue Tag 1. Upon completion of the above, and at a time approved by the Engineer, the equipment will be tested by operating it as a unit with all related piping, ducting, electrical and controls, and other ancillary facilities. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-20EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. The equipment will be placed in continuous operation as prescribed or required and witnessed by the Engineer or the Engineer's assigned representative and the Owner or the Owner's assigned representative. 3. The tests shall prove that the equipment and appurtenances are properly installed, meet their operating cycles and are free from defects such as overheating, overloading, and undue vibration and noise. Operating field tests shall consist of the following: a. Check equipment for excessive vibration and noise. b. Check motor current draw under load conditions. The rated motor nameplate current shall not be exceeded. The rated motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded when a torque transducer is provided. C. Recheck alignment where applicable, after unit has run under load for a minimum of 24 hours. E. Additional field testing recommended by the manufacturer shall be performed at no cost to Owner. F. Until final field tests are acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes, readjustments, and replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Upon acceptance of the field tests, a blue tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer and attached to the unit. The tag shall not be removed, and no further construction work will be performed on the unit, except as required during start-up operations and directed by the Engineer. H. Defects which cannot be corrected by installation adjustments will be sufficient grounds for rejection of any equipment. I. All costs in connection with field testing of equipment such as lubricants, temporary instruments, labor, equipment, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor. Power, fuel, chemicals, water, etc. normally consumed by specific equipment shall be supplied by the Owner unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. J. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. K. Field testing of electric motors shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 60— Low- Voltage Electric Motors; and Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Requirements. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-21 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.07 VIBRATION TESTING A. Vibration testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 — Checkout and Startup Procedures. 3.08 FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT TO PERFORM A. Any defects in the equipment, or failure to meet the guarantees or performance requirements of the Specifications shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise. B. If the Contractor fails to make these corrections, or if the improved equipment shall fail again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding their having made partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of said equipment, may reject said equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor's expense. C. The Contractor shall then obtain specified equipment to meet the contract requirements or upon mutual agreement with the Owner, adjust the contract price to reflect not supplying the specific equipment item. D. In case the Owner rejects said equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay to the Owner all sums of money paid to him for said rejected equipment on progress certificates or otherwise on account of the lump sum prices herein specified. E. Upon receipt of said sums of money, the Owner will execute and deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all rights, title, and interest in and to said rejected equipment; provided, however, that said equipment shall not be removed from the premises until the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of that rejected. F. Said bill of sale shall not abrogate Owner's right to recover damages for delays, losses, or other conditions arising out of the basic contract. 3.09 PAINTING A. The equipment and motor shall be painted. All surface preparation, shop painting, field repairs, finish painting, and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall conform to applicable paragraphs of Section 09 90 00 — Painting. B. All shop coatings shall be compatible with proposed field coatings. C. All inaccessible surfaces of the equipment, which normally require painting, shall be finished painted by the manufacturer. D. Gears, bearing surfaces, and other unpainted surfaces shall be protected prior to shipment by a heavy covering of rust-preventive compound sprayed or hand applied ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-22EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS which shall be maintained until the equipment is placed in operation. This coating shall be easily removable by a solvent. 3.10 WELDING A. The Equipment Manufacturer's shop welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirement of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable. B. The Contractor's welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable. C. The Contractor shall perform all field welding in conformance with the information shown on the Equipment Manufacturer's drawings regarding location, type, size, and length of all welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the American Welding Society, and special conditions, as shown by notes and details. Schedule 46 00 00—01 —Applicable Tolerance Range Equipment Horsepower ANSI/ASA S2.75 Quality Grade Tolerance Range <=25 HP Minimal >25 HP< 100 HP Standard >= 100 HP Precision Scheduled ANSI/ASA S2.75 Quality grade tolerance range categories relate to ANSI/ASA S2.75 quantified tolerances for: levelness, plumbness,flatness, coplanarity, coplanar surface deviation, shaft runout, shaft-to-shaft alignment, flex plane offset, angularity, and offset per tolerance plane separation. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 00 00-23EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION 46 41 27.11 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, motors, gear reducers, anchorage systems, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish, install, adjust, and place in satisfactory operation the vertical shaft flocculator mixers as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The flocculator mixer assembly shall consist of motor, flexible coupling, gear reducer, mixer shaft, impeller, and all accessories and appurtenances as specified herein and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. C. For the purposes of this Section, "Manufacturer" shall mean the designer, manufacturer and tester of the mixer train, including the motor, impeller, impeller shafting, and gear reducer. Second party manufactured gear drives are not allowed. D. The Manufacturer shall thoroughly review the conditions of service and installation arrangements for the proposed mixers including tank geometry, flow path, degree of mixing intensity, baffling requirements, freeboard, baseplate/anchorage, and support. The mixer supplied shall be entirely suitable for the proposed application. The Manufacturer shall provide equipment that operates within recommended limits for vibration and that provides non-surging hydraulic conditions within the mixing basins. E. The Contractor shall install, anchor, test, and align the mixing equipment such that vibration levels are within the more stringent of the Manufacturer's recommended tolerances, or the tolerances stated herein. The Contractor shall provide all supports, stiffeners, baffles, etc., that may be required to provide mixing systems that operate reliably and within vibration limits specified. 1.02 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Flocculation Mixers— Shall be located in the existing Plant 1 Flocculation Basins (Basin 1 and Basin 2) as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. The mixers shall provide tapered energy mixing within the successive Flocculation Basins. 0 A O B. The mixers shall be designed to transmit to the water a velocity gradient "G" as o N scheduled below, and to provide complete and uniform dispersion of chemicals essential N to the flocculation process with minimal floc shear. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-1 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS C. Each mixer shall consist of a right-angle drive, double or triple reduction horizontal motor driven flexibly coupled gear reducer directly connected to a vertical shaft equipped with an impeller. D. Design the equipment for uncovered outdoor exposure in all weather conditions — including wind, rain, and freezing temperatures. IP55 ingress rating as a minimum, excluding the desiccant breather, is required. E. Where scheduled in this Section, Contractor shall furnish variable frequency drives (VFDs) as specified in Section 26 29 23— Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Mixer equipment manufacturer shall provide information to Contractor for coordination with VFD manufacturer as required. F. Mixer Schedule Location Flocculation Flocculation Flocculation Basins Stage 1 Basins Stage 2 Basins Stage 3 Required Number of Flocculators 16 16 16 MIX-1011-A MIX-1012-A MIX-1013-A MIX-1011-13 MIX-1012-B MIX-1013-B MIX-1011-C MIX-1012-C MIX-1013-C MIX-1011-D MIX-1012-D MIX-1013-D MIX-1021-A MIX-1022-A MIX-1023-A MIX-1021-B MIX-1022-B MIX-1023-B MIX-1021-C MIX-1022-C MIX-1023-C Equipment Tag Number MIX-1021-D MIX-1022-D MIX-1023-D MIX-1031-A MIX-1032-A MIX-1033-A MIX-1031-B MIX-1032-B MIX-1033-B MIX-1031-C MIX-1032-C MIX-1033-C MIX-1031-D MIX-1032-D MIX-1033-D MIX-1041-A MIX-1042-A MIX-1043-A MIX-1041-B MIX-1042-B MIX-1043-B MIX-1041-C MIX-1042-C MIX-1043-C MIX-1041-D MIX-1042-D MIX-1043-D Baseplate mounted Baseplate mounted Baseplate mounted Mounting Arrangement to new steel to new steel to new steel structure structure structure Mixing Tank Dimensions Length x Width,ft 16.31 x 17.17 16.31 x 17.17 16.31 x 17.17 Mixing Tank Floor Elevation,ft Sloped, Midpoint Sloped, Midpoint Sloped, Midpoint 66.17 65.5 64.83 Operating Platform Top Elevation, 81.50 81.50 81.50 ft Max. Water Surface Elevation,ft 80.20 80.20 80.20 Min.Water Surface Elevation,ft 78.75 78.75 78.75 Mixing Tank Max.Water Volume, gal 29,340 30,735 32,130 ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-2 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS Location Flocculation Flocculation Flocculation Basins Stage 1 Basins Stage 2 Basins Stage 3 Design Flow Rate per Mixing Tank, mgd 26.25 26.25 26.25 Water Temperature, IF 50-95 50-95 50-95 Number of Impellers 1 1 1 Approximate Impeller CL Elevation,ft(1) 71.83 71.83 71.83 Minimum Impeller Diameter, in. 68 68 68 Maximum Impeller Diameter, in. 102 102 102 Maximum Impeller Speed, RPM 30 30 30 Maximum Impeller Tip Speed,fps 10 10 10 Minimum Superficial Velocity at 3.0 3.0 3.0 Reduced Motor Speed,fpm Impeller Type Axial, Hydrofoil Axial, Hydrofoil Axial, Hydrofoil Mixer Impeller Pumping Direction Downward Downward Downward Alternating CW and Alternating CW and Alternating CW and CCW(8 mixers CCW(8 mixers CCW(8 mixers Mixer Rotation rotating CW, 8 rotating CW, 8 rotating CW, 8 mixers rotating mixers rotating mixers rotating CCW)as shown in CCW)as shown in CCW)as shown in Drawings Drawings Drawings Number of Impeller Blades, each 3 3 3 Design Velocity Gradient, sec-' 80 (at 501 F) 40 10 (at 951 F) Maximum Rated Motor Power, HP 1.5 1.5 1.5 Maximum Nominal Motor Speed, RPM 1,800 1,800 1,800 Motor Speed Control VFD VFD VFD Vapor Seal Assembly No No No Desiccant Breather Yes Yes Yes Notes: (1) Provided for bidding purposes. Engineer may adjust distance to match Manufacturer's recommendations during the submittal review process during construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Performance Affidavit, and Operations and Maintenance Manuals including product information for standard and accessory items shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00— Submittals; and Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. The following items shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-3 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 1. Manufacturer's literature, data sheets, fabrication, assembly, and mounting drawings of the following components indicating all materials and dimensions. a. Impellers: 1) Quantity, diameter, and number of blades 2) Impeller type 3) Maximum shaft speed 4) Tip speed at maximum shaft speed and at minimum required horsepower 5) Materials of construction 6) Stress at maximum load 7) Setting elevation 8) Velocity gradient G at design conditions 9) Water horsepower at maximum speed 10) Power number 11) Flow number b. Impeller shaft: 1) Diameter 2) Shaft length 3) Materials of construction 4) Critical speed of rotating assembly 5) Torsional and bending stresses at maximum load 6) Coupling details: a) Submit shop drawings detailing the coupling arrangement b) Submit details showing that the drive unit may be removed while the impeller shaft and impeller remain in place ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-4 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 7) Impeller connection details 8) Revolutions per minute at maximum motor speed C. Gear reducers: 1) Manufacturer's literature and drawings 2) Model number 3) AGMA horsepower rating and support calculations for AGMA service factor 4) Materials of construction 5) Efficiency 6) Bearing ratings 7) Bearing manufacturer 8) Lubrication details 9) Bearing life under maximum loading conditions 10) Gearbox run test results d. Motors: 1) Provide manufacturer's motor run test results 2) Provide manufacturer's data sheets and drawings with sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements 3) Rating and horsepower 4) Motor speed and frame size 5) Gear ratio 6) Insulation and enclosure details 7) Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load e. Support design information: ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-5 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 1) Weight of complete assembly including lubricant 2) Impeller shaft and impeller weight 3) Torque load 4) Calculations for anchor bolt design 5) Setting drawings and instructions for installation of anchor bolts and gear reducer, including tolerances f. Electrical information: 1) Schematic drawings 2) Wiring diagrams showing electrical connections to motor including all ancillary equipment such as temperature switches and motor winding heaters 3) Loop diagrams and control descriptions g. Alignment reporting as per Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. h. Table indicating the following: 1) For minimum and maximum temperature: a) G-value b) Pumping rate c) Water horsepower(in increments of 10%) 2) Supporting calculations for item 1.03 A.1.h.1. 2. A project specific computational fluid dynamic (CFD) representation of a clockwise-rotating and counter clockwise-rotating mixer in each mixing stage, confirming that adequate fluid velocities are achieved to maintain the desired process result. The CFD model shall demonstrate mixing within a given mixer's mixing zone, and general flow patterns within the mixing zone. CFD modeling shall be performed at minimum water temperature. Manufacturer shall submit recommended dimensions of any required deflector and baffle plate(s) based on CFD results. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-6 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 3. Submit evidence and contact information for a minimum of 5 installations in the United States in satisfactory operation for minimum 5 years. 4. Complete lubricant schedule, including manufacturers of recommended lubricants and a cross reference table of alternative lubricant manufacturers and brand names for each lubricant recommended. Schedule shall include frequency of lubricant application, type of lubricant, and comments / remarks regarding lubricant application. 5. Documentation showing all lubricants are food grade NSF H1 approved. 6. All components of the mixer assembly that come into contact with process water shall be constructed of NSF-61 approved materials. Include supporting documentation that all wetted components meet the intent of NSF-61. 7. Calculations for gear reducer AGMA service factor. Calculations shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer or include a certificate of conformance signed by the Manufacturer's Chief Engineer/Engineering Director. At minimum, this certificate shall list the gear design standard(s) used. 8. Calculations showing mixing energy imparted to fluid at the specified average, minimum, and maximum temperatures and power number and ratio of impeller loading to nameplate horsepower. 9. Manufacturer's recommendations on slab openings and baseplate sizing and arrangement. 10. Dimensional drawings for the mixers indicating mixer and motor size. 11. Drawings for the baseplates, sealed by a Professional Engineer. 12. Manufacturer's certificate of source testing. 13. Manufacturer's certificate of installation and functionality compliance. 14. Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 15. Bearing life calculations. 16. Calculations supporting shaft and impeller design criteria (stresses and critical speed). 17. Description of coating system, surface preparation and shop painting, including certification that the shop paint is compatible with the finish paint. Vendor shall ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-7 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS certify that any and all field-applied or touch-up paint is compatible with factory- applied paint. 18. Tag numbers for all equipment and serialized components. Tag numbers shall match what is shown on the Contract Drawings. 19. Test plans for required field or factory performance testing. B. Shop Test Results 1. Submit results for shop tests. C. Field Test Results 1. Submit written results of field test and start-up reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mixing equipment manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Manufactured in the United States with minimum 5 years of experience of producing substantially similar equipment. 2. Member of AGMA. B. Component supply and compatibility: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section from a single mixing equipment manufacturer. 2. Mixing equipment manufacturer shall review shop drawings and other submittals prepared for mixing equipment components. 3. Gear reducers shall be manufactured by mixing equipment manufacturer. C. Factory testing of mixers: 1. Factory test 1 mixer to determine the horsepower it will transmit to the water. a. Mixer power draw shall be determined by measuring real motor power draw using a properly calibrated 3-phase wattmeter with an accuracy range of less than 0.1% error over the anticipated current's dynamic range. Torque shall be calculated from the measured real motor power draw or directly measured. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-8 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS b. Make measurements at a minimum of 5 points, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 percent over the speed range which will be used to produce the velocity gradients specified above. C. Prepare a water horsepower-speed curve with test water temperature shown. d. Measure and record for each test run: 1) Motor revolutions per minute. 2) Torque on the drive shaft of the mixer. 3) Remarks. 2. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the power demand of each drive motor, at any speed setting of the drive, does not exceed the nameplate horsepower or nameplate full load ampere rating. a. Demonstrate each mixer to be capable of speed variation required without undue noise vibration or shaft whip. b. If the equipment is found defective, make all adjustments, repairs, or replacements required, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. All necessary equipment required for testing, properly calibrated, shall be furnished by the Contractor. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Warranty and Guarantee shall be as specified in Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions with the exception that the warranty period shall be for two (2) years. PART 2— MATERIALS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The same mixer manufacturer shall furnish all mixers. Mixer manufacturer and model shall be one of the following: 1. Philadelphia Mixing Solutions— Raven 3800 Series 2. Lightnin — 70 Series 3. Chemineer— Model 20HT ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-9 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 4. Mixtec— MNAF Series 5. No approved equal. B. To ensure system responsibility and design integration, the mixer train, including gear reducer, motor, impeller, and impeller shafting shall be designed as being application specific. It shall be designed, constructed, and tested by the mixer supplier. Second party manufactured gear drives are not allowed. The mixer supplier shall have a complete after sale service program, which would include service personnel for on-site repairs and an inventory of spare gear reducers available for shipment from the manufacturer's inventory within 48 hours' notice. The intent of this is to establish unit responsibility and after-market support for the complete mixer assembly. C. The mixer supplier must have the capabilities to verify the impeller selections with an in- house Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) software. If requested, the mixer supplier must be able to map and verify the flow velocities in the basin geometry through the CFD program, and provide a report for review by the Engineer. 2.02 VERTICAL MIXER CONSTRUCTION A. Motors 1. Motors shall be IEEE 841 compliant, NEMA Premium efficiency, commercially available NEMA horizontal frames sizes unless otherwise specified. 2. The motor shall be provided with a two part epoxy coating. 3. Gearmotors shall not be allowed. 4. NEMA C-face frames are unacceptable without engineers' approval. 5. Motors shall comply with Section 26 05 60— Low Voltage Electric Motors and as specified in this Section. 6. Type: a. In accordance with NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and NEC standards and as specified in Section 26 29 23— Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Motor Controllers up to 500 Horsepower, unless otherwise specified. b. Horizontal, totally enclosed, fan cooled, NEMA Design B, squirrel cage induction units, inverter duty, matched with VFD controller furnished (where scheduled), and suitable for 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz power supply. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-10 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS C. IEEE 841 compliant premium high efficiency, high power factor, and severe duty motors designed for specified horsepower ratings and shall operate continuously. d. Copper windings. 7. Design: a. Service factor: 1.0 b. Insulation: Class H or better. C. Bearings: Antifriction with minimum L10 life of 50,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11. d. Sufficiently sized so that unit operates within motor's rated nameplate horsepower under every condition of operation. e. Direct connected to input shaft of speed reducer with a torsionally resilient flexible coupling, Falk Steelflex, TB Woods Grid Flex, or equal. 8. Provide an approved OSHA guard for each coupling. 9. Nameplates: IEEE 841 compliant. 10. Motor terminal box: IEEE 841 compliant. 11. Motor leads: Permanently marked in agreement with connection diagram. 12. Provide a 120 VAC rated motor winding heater as indicated on the drawings. 13. Provide a motor winding temperature switch with a SPDT contact rated for 120 VAC operation as indicated on the drawings. 14. The mixer manufacturer shall coordinate torque and speed requirements with the motor vendor to ensure that the motor matches the torque and speed requirements of the driven load over the entire range of operation. In addition, the mixer manufacturer shall coordinate with the drive manufacturer the settings of the variable frequency drive with the mixer to ensure proper operation. A written transmittal of the drive settings shall be sent to the Contractor prior to start-up of any equipment. 15. If the mixer manufacturer requires a larger drive motor than the horsepower indicated in the table in Section 1.02.F, then the manufacturer shall furnish the larger motor. The cost of any additional design work or equipment cost (including ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-11 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS the cost of modifying the motor starters, conduit, wiring, etc.) shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Gear Reducer 1. The gear reducer shall be specifically designed for flocculation mixing for water treatment service. The gear drive shall be of the double or triple reduction horizontal, right-angle design - comprised of helical and spiral bevel gearing. The gear reducers with gear drive shall have a minimum efficiency of 95%. Gear reducers with vertically mounted motors and worm gear drives are not acceptable. 2. Gear reducer shall be designed to meet the output speed requirements as shown in the Mixer Schedule in Section 1.02.F. 3. The gear reducer shall be mounted on a pedestal base a minimum of 12-inches above the operating deck with the output shaft coupling below the base of the mixer to allow the disassembly of the coupling above the operating deck. The pedestal shall support and shall be integral to the gear reducer (external support members are not acceptable). I-beam type channels will not be allowed in place of pedestal mount. 4. Gear reducer housing and pedestal base shall be constructed of ductile iron, close grained cast iron, or fabricated steel, stress relieved and reinforced, and shall be provided with lifting lugs or holes. 5. The gear reducer for each mixer shall be directly connected through a flexible coupling to the electric motor driver. 6. The gear reducer shall be designed in accordance with AGMA Standard 6010-F97 requirements for 24-hr./day operation with a minimum AGMA service factor of 2.0 based upon motor nameplate horsepower. Service factors shall not be calculated based on brake horsepower loads. The basic rating of the gear reducer shall adhere to appropriate AGMA standards, and the gear reducer shall bear an AGMA nameplate, or the manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the gear reducer is designed to the applicable AGMA standards. 7. All gearing must be contained in a single housing. Auxiliary gear boxes to obtain double or triple reduction are not acceptable. Gearmotor attachments to reduce speed will not be allowed. 8. The mixer gear drive system as being application specific shall take into account all possible operating loading from: Shock loading, Imbalanced flow loading, Side flow loading, thrust loading, Bending moments, Overhung loading, Operating torque. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-12 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 9. The deflection in the gear reducer housing while at a 2:1 bending moment to torque ratio shall not exceed 0.003". 10. The vendor shall supply certification that the stress in the gear reducer housing while at a 2:1 bending moment to torque ratio shall not exceed: a. 70% of the material's tensile/yield strength if cast iron. b. 75% of the material's tensile/yield strength if cast steel. C. 80% of the material's tensile/yield strength if fabricated steel. 11. All gearing shall be made of Case Carburized Grade #1 materials or better and rated using AGMA 6010-1388 or equivalent. As a minimum, all helical gearing shall meet the requirements of AGMA Quality No. 10 under AGMA Standard 390.03. Hobbed and shaved through-hardened helical gearing will not be acceptable because of lower strength and surface durability. Spiral bevel gears shall be designed in accordance with the latest AGMA standards. All spiral gearing shall be lapped as matched sets after hardening. 12. Oil used shall be food grade and shall be NSF H1 certified for use in potable water applications. 13. All gearing shall be immersed in a common bath of lubricating oil. All rotating parts and bearings, except for the output shaft and output shaft bearings, shall be immersed in oil or splash lubricated by means of the gears or a slinger rotating on the horizontal gear shafts in the oil bath. Oil leakage down the impeller shaft shall be prevented by means of a cast-in-place oil dam around the shaft. The oil dam shall be cast, machined or otherwise permanently affixed to the main gearbox housing. The dam design shall be permanent in nature to prevent potential seepage over the service life of the gearbox. Drywell configurations in which the base is threaded into or bolted onto the gearbox housing will not be acceptable. The gear reducer shall be provided with a dipstick and/or a sight glass to observe oil level. The sight glass shall be of a 360' view design, made from a high impact chemically resistant, crystal clear copolyester. Use only Luneta Tritan or equivalent. Acrylic sight glasses are not acceptable. Lubrication systems requiring oil pumps are not acceptable. Grease packed gear reducers are not acceptable. Sealed for life bearings are not acceptable. 14. The drywell feature must be integral and permanent to the gear reducer housing. Drywell configurations consisting of multiple lip seal arrangements will not be acceptable. The primary method of sealing the drywell shall not include wear items, such as o-rings or oil seals. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-13 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 15. The mixer gear drive shall be designed with a shaft and bearing system suitable for the loadings imposed by the application. All designs shall be based upon the hydraulic loadings, including both torques and bending moments, experienced in this specific mixing application. 16. A single oil drain shall be provided at the low point of the gear reducer to allow oil drainage. The oil drain shall be extended from the gear reducer to prevent leakage and spillage during oil changes. No oil seals will be permitted below the operating oil level for rotating elements. The gear reducer openings below the operating oil level shall be positively sealed with compressible gaskets or non-hardening gel type sealant. RTV silicone type sealant shall not be accepted. All oil fill and drain lines and grease fittings shall be located to be easily accessible and weather tight. 17. All gear reducer bearings shall be antifriction type ball or spherical or tapered roller bearings and shall have a minimum rated L-10 life of 100,000 hours when operating at full motor nameplate horsepower at design speed. All bearings shall be sized above AGMA requirements to provide minimum maintenance and long service life. Bearing calculations must be based upon all loadings, including both torques and bending moments, and the resulting gearbox housing deflections (if applicable) as seen in this specific mixing application. L-10 calculations as per SKF rating life are the preferred calculation methodology. All oil lubricated bearings shall be located above the top of the main lubricant drain, and above the bottom of the gear reducer to prevent premature bearing wear due to sludge and metal particle accumulation in the bearings. 18. Acceptable bearing manufacturers shall be only top tier manufacturers; Timken, Torrington, NSK, SKF, FAG, INA, NTN are acceptable. All bearings shall be from the same manufacturer. 19. Gear reducer shall have an oversized solid output shaft equal to or larger than the mixer shaft. Output shaft bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be furnished with a high-quality lip seal to retain grease. Designs using drive quill to gear reducer output shaft torque transmission via keyless locking device technology may be allowed to moderately step size the output shaft prior to its mixer shaft interface to prevent potential bearing roller skidding issues from a lack of output shaft bearing loading, with engineering approval, if all shafting stresses are proven to be within acceptable margins after conducting an FEA review. 20. Output shafts retained using keyless locking technology shall utilize ASTM A564 GR630 17-4 PH — H900 material (or better) for all shrink disc and related components. All removable seal caps shall be installed with a minimum of four threaded fasteners. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-14 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 21. Mixer trains must be suitable for uncovered outdoor use year around. To prevent moisture from contaminating the oil, the gear reducer shall be furnished with a disposable desiccant breather. The breather shall have a disposable 10-micron polyester filter for solid particulate and a hygroscopic agent to prevent water vapor from entering the gear reducer. The gear reducer breather shall be located above possible oil foam level. 22. The full load operating noise levels of the gear reducer and motor shall meet current OSHA occupational noise standards, and/or AGMA Standard 299.01, and not exceed 90 dB at a distance of 3 feet from any part of the unit. 23. The thermal rating of the gear reducer shall exceed the design mechanical rating to eliminate the need for external coolers. External cooling devices are not acceptable. 24. Where required in the mixer schedule, the mixer base and output shaft shall be furnished with a vapor seal assembly which shall include either a V-ring seal, clamping collar and Teflon wear plate or a 316 stainless steel ANSI 150-pound flange and Teflon lip seal and Teflon wear plate to prevent foul air from escaping through the shaft openings in the slab. 25. Any portion of the output shaft not made of stainless steel external to the gearbox housing will be painted using the same system used for the remainder of the gear reducer. 26. Gear reducers must provide a minimum ingress protection rating of IP55. 27. Gear reducers will be provided with a two part epoxy or two part polyester-acrylic aliphatic polyurethane top coating. 28. NSF H1 approved, or food grade lubricants are required. 29. Oil changes shall not be required at an interval of less than 2,500 hours following the initial break in period. C. Shaft Couplings 1. Except as otherwise specified in individual mixer specification sections, flexible couplings for direct driven mixer shall be provided between the mixer shaft and driver and keyed to mixer and driver shafts. Flexible couplings shall be internal metal grid type couplings with a metal flange on both shafts with a metal cage in between, as manufactured by TB Woods, Falk, or equal. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-15 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 2. Comply with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions protective guard requirements. 3. Couplings manufactured from sintered materials will not be accepted. 4. Three lobe "Love-Joy" type tri-dogged couplings with polymer "insert spiders" are not acceptable. 5. Sure flex type or tire type couplings are not acceptable. D. Mixer Shaft 1. The mixer shaft shall be connected to the flange of the reducer output shaft by means of a rigid shaft coupling in the pedestal of the gear reducer above the mounting deck. If required, the mixer shaft shall be provided in two sections (middle shaft and lower shaft) connected by a rigid coupling. Coupling(s) shall be an AISI Type 316 stainless steel or 316L rigid rabbeted coupling with an epoxy resin encapsulated key, or equal. Mixer shaft coupling rabbets shall be allowed no more than 0.003" TIR at the rabbets and no more than 0.002" TIR at the flange faces. 2. The mixer shaft and all materials located below the operating deck shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. 3. Shaft diameter shall be determined by an analysis of torques, bending moment, thrust, pressure, temperature, and critical speed. The shaft shall be designed such that the maximum combined shear stress shall not exceed 8,000 psi under maximum operating loads. It shall be of overhung design. The use of in-tank steady bearings is not permitted. 4. The shaft-impeller system design shall be such that its operating speed shall not exceed 70% of its first lateral critical speed. The use of stabilizing rings or fins will not influence this limitation. 5. Mixer shaft straightness, rigid coupling squareness, and gear reducer output shaft accuracy must be such that the maximum total indicated runout at the lower end of the mixer shaft does not exceed 1/8-inch per every 10 ft of shaft length, as measured when turning over by hand. 6. Shaft design shall include features to allow all wetted parts to be suspended from the mixer pedestal base or support structure during gearbox replacement. Furnish 1 set of all special tools, adapters, etc. required to suspend the wetted parts and reconnect during gearbox replacement. E. Mixer Impeller ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-16 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 1. Impellers shall be connected to the mixer shaft with a hook key. a. Adjustable impeller applications may retain the impeller through use of keyless locking technology. The keyless locking device shall utilize ASTM A564 GR630 17-4 PH — H900 material (or better) for all locking assemblies, shrink disc, keyless ridged couplings, and related components. The interface shall be properly designed so as to prevent extrusion of the shafting material with the keyless locking device. b. Impeller elevation adjustment may retain the impeller through the use of multiple hook key engagement locations. 2. Mixer impeller diameters and speed shall be selected by the manufacturer for the pertinent conditions of service. 3. Each impeller shall be constructed of AISI Type 316 stainless steel. Bolts for impellers shall be double nutted. 4. The impeller shall be dynamically and hydraulically stable and shall not cause the equipment to overload over the specified range of liquid levels with up to the specified flow rates through the basins. a. For equipment over 45 HP, balance grade ISO-G16 or better is required. 5. The use of stabilizer rings will not be permitted. 6. The impellers shall be designed as to not allow vortex formation during normal operation as demonstrated in the CFD analysis. F. Guards 1. All rotating shafts above the deck shall be provided with guards in accordance with OSHA requirements. Protective guards shall be of sheet metal or wire mesh (steel or stainless steel), neatly and rigidly supported. Guards shall be removable as required to provide access for repairs. Guards shall comply with the most-stringent requirements of ANSI B11.19 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910. Aluminum guarding is unacceptable. 2. Composite, plastic or aluminum guards shall not be allowed. 3. Shall provide at least 40% open area for visible inspection and ventilation. G. Mounting Arrangements and Anchorage ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-17 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 1. Where the Drawings and Specifications indicate that the mixer pedestal base is to be mounted directly to a concrete slab, the Contractor shall coordinate with the mixer manufacturer to provide an opening in the slab of adequate size for the mixer shaft and rigid coupling. 2. Where Drawings and Specifications indicate that the mixer pedestal base is to be mounted on a baseplate, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the design of the baseplate. The baseplate shall be designed to withstand all dead and live loads associated with the mixer plus a live load of 50 Ib/sf over the area of the baseplate. 3. The Contractor shall provide a steel baseplate and installation arrangement subject to review and approval by the equipment manufacturer for the mixers furnished. The installation arrangements shall be reviewed by the manufacturer for support and prevention of vibration for the mixing equipment furnished. Plate stiffeners, added plate thickness, additional anchor bolts, modified impeller design, etc., shall be provided as required for a complete system that operates smoothly and reliably. 4. Anchor bolts for the mixers shall be supplied by the Contractor, the number and size of which shall be determined by the equipment manufacturer as required for mounting in accordance with the details shown and sufficient to withstand the torque and other loadings transmitted by the gear reducer. Anchor bolts shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel, provided in accordance with the requirements of Div 05 - Metals, and shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for anchoring to concrete or structural support members (as applicable). H. Standardization of Grease Fittings 1. Anti-friction bearings shall be "lube ready" and include easily accessible grease fill zerk (Ref. Alemite grease fittings. Ref. SAE J534 m 0.260"). 2. Type "D" or"M" fittings shall only be allowed with prior approval of the engineer. 3. The grease fittings on all mechanical equipment shall be such that they can be serviced with a single type of grease gun. Fittings shall be "Zerk" type. 4. Zerk type fittings shall be installed in such a way that they fill the proper side of the bearing and a grease relief vent/plate when applicable. Single shielded bearings are the preferred configuration for the majority of grease lubricated applications whenever possible. Zerk type fittings shall be threaded in and replaceable in type, drive in fittings shall only be allowed with engineering approval. Any extension tubes shall be filled with the appropriate grease. Bearing housings shall be fitted ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-18 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS with fill and drain/purge piping that is fully accessible when the equipment is fully assembled, whenever possible. Lube fill and drain port piping shall be purged out prior to commissioning to ensure that no pluggage, blockage or contamination exists, and that the appropriate amount of lubrication is present at the bearing. Document on the final pre-commissioning report the quantity of new grease applied, and how it was applied. 5. Each purge line shall be provided with a pipe cap. 6. Note that Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions requires stainless steel Zerk type fittings. 2.03 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall furnish all special tools necessary to disassemble, service, repair and adjust the equipment and shall furnish a one (1)-year supply of all recommended lubricating oils and grease. The manufacturer shall submit a list of at least four (4) manufacturer's standard lubricants which may be used interchangeably for each type of lubricant required. All lubricants shall be Food-Grade, NSF H1 approved. B. Spare parts shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions, and shall include the following: 1. Provide one (1) set of any special tools required for maintenance or operation. 2. Two (2) sets of bearings for each mixer rotation direction 3. Four (4) sets of seals 4. Five (5) desiccant breather replaceable elements 5. One (1) spare motor 6. One (1) spare VFD 7. Provide one (1)-year supply of bearing grease or oils for all units, including the lubricant changes after the initial run period. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING A. The gear reducer and motor shall be prepared and shop painted with the Manufacturer's paint system. The coating system shall comply with the requirements of Section 09 90 00— Painting and this specification and consist of 3 layers with a total dry thickness of not less than 6-mils. Manufacturer to provide coating thickness information. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-19 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer's field services shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00— Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions and shall include the following site visits for each series of mixers: 1. Installation, Testing, Startup, and Additional Services per Basin (does not include travel time): Service Number of Trips Number of Days On per Basin Site/Trip per Basin Installation and Testing 1 3 Startup 1 3 Services after Startup 1 2 2. Training (does not include travel time): Number of Trips Number of Days On Service total for all Site/Trip total for all Basins Basins Training 1 1 C. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. D. Contractor shall submit equipment start-up certification in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. E. Storage and Handling: 1. Protect machined surfaces and mating connections. 2. Protect bearings and gearing with shop applied corrosion prevention coating. 3. Cover all openings into gear boxes and provide water-repellent storage measures. Units should be stored in a climate controlled area with desiccant breathers installed per IOM instructions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-20 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 4. Package equipment in a manner which shall mitigate damage during shipment, delivery, and storage. 5. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the Storage Procedures provided in General Instructions by the Equipment Manufacturer. Failure to properly store and protect the equipment as described in the General Instructions may void any Warranty provided for the equipment. 3.02 SHOP TESTING A. Shop testing shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions, Part 1.04.0 of this Section, and with the following additional requirements: 1. Each gear reducer shall be run tested by its manufacturer and all anomalies shall be correct prior to shipment. Unless otherwise requested, a spin test shall be conducted of no less than 3 minutes or sufficient additional duration to obtain input RPM's, output RPM's, bearing temperature, gearbox dBA at 1 meter, absolute and relative vibration of horizontal and vertical planes in mil's, oil temperature and any other parameter as seen fit by the manufacturer. A certified report of this spin test shall accompany every gear reducer. 2. Each gear reducer shall be run with a food-grade lubricant before shipment during the reducer spin test at the manufacturer's facility. 3. All openings in the equipment shall be covered with water repellent tape. Water repellent tape will be applied over any adapter sleeves, locknuts, dipsticks, breather assemblies, and other areas or openings requiring special protection. 4. Motors' standard IEEE 841 test report shall be supplied with the unit as a minimum. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Field testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 — Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. Field Testing shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. C. The Contractor shall make modifications that may be required to provide vibration within specified tolerances in accordance with the manufacturer's and/or Engineer's recommendations without additional cost to the Owner. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-21 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS 3.04 ALIGNMENT A. Reporting shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. B. Shaft to shaft alignment tolerances shall be the more stringent of ANSI/ASA S2.75 Part 1, Standard Alignment Quality Grade or the OEM's alignment recommendation. C. For low speed shafts below 105 RPM, alignment tolerance shall be the more stringent of 0.006" or the OEM's alignment recommendation. 3.05 VIBRATION TESTING A. Vibration testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 00 — Checkout and Startup Procedures. B. The entire installation equipment group shall operate at the more stringent of the manufacturer's specification or with a vibration of less than 3 mils measured on any plane at the motors' drive end endbell. 3.06 FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT TO PERFORM A. Shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. 3.07 PAINTING A. Shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions and this specification. 3.08 WELDING A. Shall be in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 41 27.11-22 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS SECTION 46 70 00 BAFFLE WALLS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, adjust, and place in satisfactory operation all stainless steel baffle walls as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. C. Each baffle wall shall be as specified herein and will be designed for installation in a basin having the dimensions indicated on the Drawings and confirmed with detailed field measurements by the Contractor. Baffle wall components shall not be manufactured until the Contractor has verified all relevant dimensions with field measurement and coordinated with the baffle wall manufacturer. D. The manufacturer of the baffle wall shall be vested with unit responsibility for the proper function of the complete system. The equipment covered by this specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven ability as manufactured by reputable entities having extensive experience in the production of such equipment. 1.02 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Flocculation Divider Walls — Shall be located in each flocculation train in Basins 1 and 2 as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Each of the four (4) flocculation trains shall have six (6) solid baffle walls that shall provide thorough division between flocculation stages. Of the twenty-four (24) total divider walls: 1. Sixteen (16) shall be mounted between new concrete support columns. 2. Four (4) shall be mounted between new concrete support columns and existing flocculation basin dry wells. 3. Four (4) shall be mounted between new concrete support columns and existing flocculation basin perimeter walls. B. Ported Flocculation Distribution Baffle Walls - Shall be located at the elevated distribution channels in Basins 1 and 2 as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Each of the two (2) basins shall have one ported baffle wall that shall distribute flow from the flocculation basins to the sedimentation basins. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 70 00-1 STAINLESS STEEL BAFFLE WALLS 1. All ported flocculation distribution baffle walls shall be mounted between existing flocculation basin perimeter walls. C. Ported Secondary Sedimentation Basin Baffle Walls — Shall be located in Secondary Sedimentation Basins 1 and 2 as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Each of the two (2) basins shall have one ported baffle wall that shall distribute flow in the secondary sedimentation basins. 1. All ported secondary sedimentation basin baffle walls shall be mounted between existing sedimentation basin perimeter walls. D. New flocculation basin concrete support columns and the existing flocculation basin dry well provide vertical sidewall mounting surfaces. The existing flocculation and sedimentation basin perimeter walls provide angled/tapered sidewall mounting surfaces and tee walkways at the top of the wall. E. Baffle Wall Schedule Flocculation Flocculation Flocculation Divider Walls Divider Walls Divider Walls Ported Ported Between New Between New Secondary Location Between New Concrete Concrete Flocculation Sedimentation Concrete Support Support Distribution Basin Baffle Support Columns and Columns and Baffle Walls Walls Columns Dry Wells Perimeter Walls Total Number of 16 4 4 2 2 Walls Floor and Floor and Floor and Mounting sidewall Floor and Floor and sidewall sidewall Arrangement mounted sidewall mounted sidewall mounted mounted mounted On one side, as On both On both sides, Sidewall Slope N/A N/A shown in sides, as as shown in Drawings shown in Drawings Drawings Tapered from Tapered from Baffle Length,feet 15.0 15.75 14.75 to 15.25, 140.0 to 135.5 see Drawings 141.0, see Drawings Varies, as Varies, as Baffle Height,feet shown in 15'-5" 16'-3" 11'-111, shown in Drawings Drawings (sloped floor) (sloped floor) Basin Dimensions Basin Floor Varies, as Varies, as Elevation shown in 65.17 64.33 68.67 shown in Drawings Drawings Baffle Wall Top 80.58 80.58 80.58 80.58 80.00 Elevation Max. Water 80.20 80.20 80.20 80.15 79.00 Surface Elevation Min.Water 78.75 78.75 78.75 78.75 78.50 Surface Elevation ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 70 00-2 STAINLESS STEEL BAFFLE WALLS Flocculation Flocculation Flocculation Divider Walls Divider Walls Divider Walls Ported Ported Between New Between New Secondary Location Between New Concrete Concrete Flocculation Sedimentation Concrete Support Support Distribution Basin Baffle Support Columns and Columns and Baffle Walls Walls Columns Dry Wells Perimeter Walls Maximum Head Differential, 2 2 2 2 2 inches Port Diameter, N/A N/A N/A 4 4 inches 630 or 672, spaced evenly below min. water elevation. 630 or 672, Outer 4.5 ft spaced evenly Port Quantity N/A N/A N/A on far north below min. and far south water elevation sides of each baffle wall shall contain no ports,see Drawings F. The following items shall be submitted in accordance with, or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures and Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions: 1. Shop Drawings 2. O&M Manuals 3. All process design calculations shall be prepared by the manufacturer and sealed by a registered professional engineer. 4. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications, and engineering data including total weight of each unit, structural loads at supports, connection details, and performance data. 5. Drawings shall show dimensions, overall arrangement of equipment and materials of construction. 1.03 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Warranty and Guarantee shall be as specified in Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 70 00-3 STAINLESS STEEL BAFFLE WALLS PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Baffle walls shall be Jim Myers & Sons, Inc. (JMS), Meurer Research (MRI), or Engineer Approved equal. B. The manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the warranty and mechanical and structural design adequacy of all the provided components under this Section. 2.02 BAFFLE WALL A. Baffle wall planks shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 22 gauge. Planks shall be 12" tall with 2" legs. Wooden or fiberglass planks are not acceptable. B. 316 stainless steel support columns and guide rails shall be designed and provided by the Manufacturer to support the planks as needed. C. At locations where baffle walls extend above the top of concrete support columns that they are mounted to, the Manufacturer shall design and provide angle brackets to mount to the concrete columns for support of baffle planks as needed. D. Means for washdown underneath the bottom plank shall be provided for all baffle walls. Means for washdown shall be an 2-inch tall open gap between the bottom plank and the basin floor with at least one opening provided at the lowest elevation of the floor. A rotating bottom plank shall not be allowed. 2.03 HARDWARE A. All field assembly bolts and anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. All submerged connections shall utilize Type 316 stainless steel nylon insert locknuts. C. The design for the anchor system will be as provided by the manufacturer. All anchors, fasteners and hardware will be type ASTM 316 stainless steel. 2.04 FABRICATION A. All parts and components shall be factory-assembled in sections convenient for field handling and installation but requiring the minimum amount of work for field assembly. Any field assembly work shall be bolted. No cutting or welding should be required on either field assembly or erection. ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 70 00-4 STAINLESS STEEL BAFFLE WALLS B. All assembled parts and components ready for shipment shall be securely bundled, coiled, or crated and adequately protected from damage and corrosion during shipment and storage. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install the walls in strict accordance with the manufacturer's drawings and recommendations. B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturer to provide a level grout bed underneath each baffle wall support column for a flat mounting surface as necessary. C. Food grade anti-seize shall be applied to the threads of all stainless steel bolts before assembly at the factory and field assembly. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions and shall include the following site visits for each baffle wall: Service Number of Number of Trips Days/Trip Installation and Testing 1 1 Startup and Training 1 1 END OF SECTION ONSWTP FLOCCULATION UPGRADES AND BAFFLING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 22407 46 70 00-5 STAINLESS STEEL BAFFLE WALLS 22407 Conformed Set of Drawings https://gov.e- builder.net/public/public Land ing.aspx?QS=e7ca1 f1 aOc9e43eda40d 1 f67707fd158 Signature: 2CVaS O-eilS caW Signature: 3MA04> ReVae Crenshaw(Sep 8,2026 08:25:30 CDT) GilbeK Sanchez tlep 8,2026 09:39:01 CDT) Email: revaec@corpuschristitx.gov Email: GilbertS2@corpuschristitx.gov Signature: E uuI�(UA&Vk� Signature: SOKLIh BrUnKenh08Fer Ekaterina Glukhikh(Sep 8;2026 10:42:52 CDT) Sarah Brunkenhoefer(Sep 9,2026 08:10:43 CDT) Email: ekaterinag@corpuschristitx.gov Email: citysecretary@corpuschristitx.gov